DXC 5000

Multiplexer / Cross-Connect

Technical Guide

DXC5K/EN T/A22
Publication: DXC5K/EN T/A22

AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com

T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/
Technical Guide DXC5K/EN T/A22

DXC 5000 Page 1/2

DXC 5000
MULTIPLEXER / CROSS-CONNECT

CONTENT

Product Description DXC5K/EN HW/A22

Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

Maintenance DXC5K/EN MT/A22

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

Low Speed Optical Fiber LS-OF/EN U/A22

TS Card Configuration Not Available Yet

DXC5K/EN T/A22 Technical Guide

Page 2/2 DXC 5000

BLANK PAGE
Product Description DXC5K/EN HW/A22

DXC 5000

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Production Description DXC5K/EN HW/A22

DXC 5000 Page 1/26

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 5

2. DESCRIPTION 6
2.1 Functional description 6
2.2 General Features 6

3. EXAMPLE OF APPLICATION 8

4. COMMON SUBSYSTEMS 9
4.1 Power supply 9
4.2 Controller board 9
4.3 Clock Source 9
4.4 Alarm Relay 9
4.5 External dry contact input / output card 10

5. E1 (2MBIT/S) SUBSYSTEMS 11

6. VOICE EQUIPMENT SUBSYSTEMS 12

6.1 Analog 2/4 wire interface Tributary 12
6.2 Subscriber PCM Tributary : FXS/FXO boards 13

7. DATA EQUIPMENT SUBSYSTEMS 15

7.1 Data interface at 64 or N x 64 kbit/s Tributary (V35 / V36 / EIA530) 15
7.1.1 General 15
7.2 Data rate adapter Tributary 16
7.2.1 General 16
7.2.2 Technical data 16
7.3 Data interface at 64 or N x 64 kbit/s tributary (X.21) 17
7.3.1 General 17
7.3.2 Technical data 17
7.4 Data interface at 64k (G.703) 18
7.4.1 General 18
7.4.2 Technical data 18

8. T1 (1.5MBIT/S) SUBSYSTEMS 19

9. ROUTER INTERFACE 20
9.1.1 General 20
9.1.2 Technical data 20
DXC5K/EN HW/A22 Product Description

Page 2/26 DXC 5000

10. ATM FRAME RELAY NETWORK LINE INTERFACE 21

10.1.1 General 21
10.1.2 Technical data 21

11. XDSL SUBSYSTEMS (G.SHDSL INTERFACE CARD) 22

11.1.1 General 22
11.1.2 Technical data 22

12. OPTICAL (8MBIT/S) SUBSYSTEMS 23

13. OPTICAL (C37.94) SUBSYSTEMS 24

14. MECHANICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL DATA 25

15. TEST AND PERFORMANCE MONITORING 26

15.1 Performance Monitor 26
15.2 Test facilities 26
Production Description DXC5K/EN HW/A22

DXC 5000 Page 3/26

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

Version DATE COMMENTS

A (A11) 01/10/2004 ORIGINAL ISSUE
B (B11) 01/03/2005 Add Mini QuadE1, 64k G.703 and G.SHDSL boards
A22 15/05/2007 Add C37.94 and new features (G)
DXC5K/EN HW/A22 Product Description

Page 4/26 DXC 5000

BLANK PAGE
Production Description DXC5K/EN HW/A22

DXC 5000 Page 5/26

1. INTRODUCTION
The Areva DXC 5000 is an access cross-connect/multiplexer built around a 2048x2048 64k
matrix (i.e. 64 E1 equivalent). A wide variety of voice channel units, using different types of
signaling, has been developed, allowing the system to interface with different types of
exchanges, or to interface directly with a subscriber. In addition, different types of data
channel units are available, including Ethernet and IP facilities. It also offers optical and
G.SHDSL integrated interfaces.
The equipment can be used to accommodate mixed traffic of telephony and data, and to
achieve special configurations like terminal, drop and insert or cross-connect application.
The DXC5000 is natively SNMP and offers direct compatibility with the AREVA Télécom
management system.
DXC5K/EN HW/A22 Product Description

Page 6/26 DXC 5000

2. DESCRIPTION
2.1 Functional description
The DXC 5000 is an access equipment that can combine various digital access interfaces
into E1 or T1 lines for convenient transport and switching. The DXC 5000 provides access
for a variety of interfaces, including Quad E1/T1, 10/100baseT Router, G.703, ATM/Frame
Relay, RS232, V.35, V.36, X.21, 2W/4W E&M, FXS and FXO.
It also includes integrated optical modules and G.SHDSL boards.
Furthermore, dedicated power utilities interfaces such as optical C37.94 are available.
The DXC 5000 is a full cross-connect. This means that one or more of the E1 ports can be
multiplexed into one or more other E1.
Redundancy is optionnally available in dual CPU controller (including clock and 64k matrix
functions) and power supply, making it an excellent fit for critical applications.
The DXC 5000 equipment supports local control and tests, via standard V24/V28
connection. An Ethernet interface is available for centralized management of several DXC
5000 equipment (using SNMP protocol).
2.2 General Features

• Non blocking 64k centralized matrix (2048x2048 64k equivalent), 1+1 protection in
option

• Single controller, dual controller (1+1 protection) in option

• Single –48V DC or optional dual –48V DC with load sharing

• Support 1+1 protection for E1 (Option)

• Up to 64 E1 WAN ports

• Number of slot available: 12 slots + 4 ½ slots

• 1/2 slot plug-in card types:

− Single E1 card

− Single T1 card

− Small Quad E1 card

− E1/T1 ATM/Frame Relay card

− 10/100baseT Ethernet/IP Router card

− Optical interface (8Mbps)

• Single-slot DTE plug-in card types:

− 4-channel G.SHDSL card (2 wires) without line power

− 2-channel G.SHDSL card (4 wires) without line power

− 4-channel E1 card

− 4-channel T1 card

− 8-channel 64k G.703 card

− 8-channel 2W/4W E&M card

− 8 input alarm / 8 output contact (telecommand) card

− 12-channel FXS card

− 12-channel FXO card

Production Description DXC5K/EN HW/A22

DXC 5000 Page 7/26

− 12-channel Magneto card

− 1-channel C37.94 card

− 4-channel C37.94 card

• Double-slot DTE plug-in card types:

− 6-channel X.21 card

− 6-channel V.35 card

− 6-channel V.36 card

− 6-channel EIA530 card

− 5-channel RS232 with X.50 subrate card

• Telnet, SLIP, SNMP, and Inband management support

• Craft interface port

• Compatible to a GUI (Graphical user Interface) network management system.

POWER E1/T1(A) E1/T1(B) CPU-1 CPU-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

E1/T1 E1/T1
C C
P P
U U
E1/T1(C) E1/T1(D)
1 2

E1/T1 E1/T1

Shelf - Front Side D0324ENa

DXC5K/EN HW/A22 Product Description

Page 8/26 DXC 5000

3. EXAMPLE OF APPLICATION

Access Element Management:

"AEM5000"

Ethernet LAN (IP)

Eth Eth

Eth DXC5000 DXC5000

RS232 DXC5000
Terminal
Local Management:
"LCT5000"

Eth
Eth Server

PABX / SWITCH

D0325ENa
Production Description DXC5K/EN HW/A22

DXC 5000 Page 9/26

4. COMMON SUBSYSTEMS
The Areva DXC5000 is composed of a 5U subrack with four half slots (A to D) and twelve
slots (1 to 12) to house the different type of boards (optical, 2Mbit/s and tributaries) and with
the following common modules which use dedicated slots.
4.1 Power supply

This unit contains a DC/DC converter which power feeds the boards of
the subrack. This board can be optionally redundant (load sharing).
Battery input voltage : from –36 to -72 V DC (-48 V or -60 V nominal,
positive grounding).

4.2 Controller board

This unit forms the interface between the different port of the equipment
(2Mbit/s, user interfaces, optical interfaces).
It fulfills the common functions of the multiplexer :
- configuration control,
- 64k matrix,
- main processing of voice/data and signaling information,
- interface with central alarm system,
- SNMP monitoring (5 trap IP address are available)
This unit can be 1+1 protected.

4.3 Clock Source

Internal, E1/T1 Line, External (2Mbit/s 75Ohm)
4.4 Alarm Relay
One dry contact for minor alarm and one dry contact for major alarm are available.
DXC5K/EN HW/A22 Product Description

Page 10/26 DXC 5000

4.5 External dry contact input / output card

This unit offers 8 dry contact inputs (housekeeping) and 8 dry contact outputs
(telecommands). It can be housed in slot 1 to 12.

Inputs - Outputs -
8-channel 2-port per card, 8-channel 8-pair per card
4-pair per port
Connector RJ45 Connector Screw type/ Terminal block
Internal Resistance 1 kOhm Initial Insulation Resistance Min. 100M Ohm (at 500Vdc)
Activation Current 3 mA Max. Current 5A (Vdc), 10A (Vac)
Deactivation Current 1.5 mA Max. Voltage 100Vdc, 250Vac
Allowable Current 4 mA Normal operating range 125Vac/ 9A, 250Vac/ 9A,
27Vdc/ 4.5A, 100Vdc/ 0.45A
Short-circuit Current 5A
Production Description DXC5K/EN HW/A22

DXC 5000 Page 11/26

5. E1 (2MBIT/S) SUBSYSTEMS
These units form the interface between the 2Mbit/s aggregate and the central controller. The
general characteristics of the 2Mbit/s are given in the following table:

Line Rate 2.048 Mbps ± 50 ppm Framing ITU G.704

Line Code AMI or HDB3 Electrical 75 Ohm Coax/120 Ohm twisted pair
Inp/Out Signal ITU G.703 Jitter ITU G.823

Quad-E1
This unit offers four 2Mbit/s G.703 interfaces and it can
be 1+1 EPS protected.
Two versions are available, one for 120 Ohm (with
RJ48c connectors) and one for 75 Ohm (with BNC
connectors).
It offers 1+1 Line Protection and supports unframed E1.

Single E1 (Slot A-D) Mini-Quad E1 (Slot A-D)

This unit offers one This unit offers four
2Mbit/s G.703 2Mbit/s G.703 interfaces
interface with BNC and it can be 1+1 EPS
connectors for protected. The
75 Ohm and RJ48C interfaces are available
connector for on a DB25 connector. It
120 Ohm. It offers offers 1+1 Line
1+1 Line Protection. Protection and supports
unframed E1.

1+1APS (Line Protection):
1+1EPS (Board Protection)

Sm all-E1/T1, Quad-Z1/T1, with Y-Box:
-
Sm all-Quad-E1
Quad-E1/T1, Small-Quad-E1

Sw itching criteria:
Sw itching criteria:
LOF/LOS/RAI/Board failure LOF/LOS/RAI/Board failure

Not revertive
Not revertive

Manual Switch available
Manual Switch available

Working board
Working

DXC5000 DXC5000 DXC5000

E1 #1 E1 #1 4xE1 #1
4xE1 access
E1
for #1 and #2
(Y-BOX)
E1 #2 E1 #2 4xE1 #2

Y-BOX
Stand-by
Stand-by board

1
D0498ENa
DXC5K/EN HW/A22 Product Description

Page 12/26 DXC 5000

6. VOICE EQUIPMENT SUBSYSTEMS

6.1 Analog 2/4 wire interface Tributary
This board comprises 8 identical circuits . Each circuit performs the conversion of an analog
signal into one selectable 64kbit/s timeslot on a framed 2Mbit/s stream and vice-versa.
Selection between 2- or 4- wire mode is done with on board jumpers, individually per circuit.

Connector RJ45 connector

Alarm Conditioning CGA busy after 2.5 seconds of LOS,
LOF
Encoding A-law or µ-law, user selectable
together for all
Impedance Balanced 600 or 900 Ohms user
selectable together for all
Longitudinal Rejection 55 dB
Loss Adjustment -16 to +7 dB / 0.5dB step transmit &
receive
Signal/Distortion > 25dB with 1024 Hz, 0dBm input
Frequency Response - 0.25 to -1 dB from 300 to 3400 Hz
Signaling Type 1, Type 2, Type 3, Type 4, and
Type 5, Transmit only, A side and B
side for all types
All in-band signaling tones are carried transparently by the
digitizing process.

E&M Signaling Bits

E&M
M - Tx E - Rx
A B C D A B C D
IDLE - ON HOOK 0 0 0 1 0 0 NA NA
Normal
ACTIVE - OFF HOOK 1 1 0 1 1 1 NA NA
IDLE - ON HOOK 1 1 0 1 1 1 NA NA
A-Bit Invert
ACTIVE - OFF HOOK 0 0 0 1 0 0 NA NA
Production Description DXC5K/EN HW/A22

DXC 5000 Page 13/26

6.2 Subscriber PCM Tributary : FXS/FXO boards

The FXS unit forms the interface between the controller and 12 POTS (Plain Ordinary
Telephone Subscriber) lines. The Direct interface towards the exchange can be done via the
primary Multiplexer using the G.704 frame format at 2048kbit/s. Signaling is conform to the
CAS signaling. The interface towards the exchange can also be done via a second primary
Multiplexer working as a mirror configuration. The interface to the exchange will be a/b wires
through FXO unit.

1 1
2 DXC 2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s DXC 2 Analog
. 5000 5000 . Exchange
. Transport . PSTN
. . or PABX
30 G.703 G.703 30
CAS CAS
D0326ENa

FXS

Alarm Conditioning CGA busy after 2.5 seconds of LOS,

LOF
Longitudinal Rejection 55 dB
Longitudinal Max 2.5 volts peak AC
FXS Loop Feed Nominal - 48Vdc with 20mA current limit
FXS Ringing 1 REN at 5K meters per port
16.5Hz, 20Hz, 25Hz, 50Hz, user
selectable for all
Sine wave, 38 Vrms / 64 Vrms / 85 Vrms
(strap selectable)
2 sec on 4 sec off, or 1 sec on 2 sec off
optional for PLAR
Connector RJ11
Encoding A-law or µ-law, user selectable together
for all
Impedance Balanced 600 or 900 Ohms, user
selectable together for all
Loss Adjustment -21 to +10 dB / 0.1dB step transmit &
receive
Signal/ Distortion > 46dB with 1024 Hz, 0dBm input
Frequency Response - 0.25 to -1 dB from 300 to 3400 Hz
(ITU-T G.712)
Idle Channel Noise Max. –65 dBmop
Inter-Modulation Coincide with ITU-T G.712
Loop Resistance Min. 300 Ohm, Max. 1800 Ohm
2-Wire Return Loss >28 dB echo, >20 dB signing
Signaling Loop Start, DTMF, pulse, PLAR (Private
Line Automatic Ringdown or Hot Line),
Battery Reverse
Optional Signaling Ground Start, Metering pulse (12KHz,
16KHz)
Signaling Bit A,B,C,D Programable
DXC5K/EN HW/A22 Product Description

Page 14/26 DXC 5000

FXO

Min Detectable Ringing 25Vrms

Voltage
Ringing Detectable Tip and Ring, Tip and Ground, Ring
Across and Ground
Ringing Send Across Tip and Ring, Tip and Ground, Ring
and Ground
Connector RJ11
Encoding A-law or µ-law, user selectable
together for all
Impedance Balanced 600 or 900 Ohms, user
selectable together for all
Loss Adjustment -21 to +10 dB / 0.1dB step transmit &
receive
Signal/ Distortion > 46dB with 1024 Hz, 0dBm input
Frequency Response - 0.25 to -1 dB from 300 to 3400 Hz
(ITU-T G.712)
Idle Channel Noise Max. –65 dBmop
Inter-Modulation Coincide with ITU-T G.712
Loop Resistance Min. 300 Ohm, Max. 1800 Ohm
2-Wire Return Loss >28 dB echo, >20 dB signing
Signaling Loop Start, DTMF, pulse, PLAR,
Battery Reverse
Optional Signaling Ground Start, Metering pulse (12KHz,
16KHz)
Signaling Bit A,B,C,D Programable
Production Description DXC5K/EN HW/A22

DXC 5000 Page 15/26

7. DATA EQUIPMENT SUBSYSTEMS

7.1 Data interface at 64 or N x 64 kbit/s Tributary (V35 / V36 / EIA530)
7.1.1 General
These units have six interface circuits. The digital signal transmitted and received by the
connected data terminal is an N x 64 kbit/s signal, with N being any value from 1 to 31, and
are in agreement with ITU-T recommendation V.36 or V.35 or EIA530.

Data Port 6-port DTE V.35/ V.36 / EIA530. Up to six cards per subrack.
Data Rate N x 64 Kbps (N= 1 to 31)
Connector DB25S (optional conversion cable DB25S to M34 connector)
DXC5K/EN HW/A22 Product Description

Page 16/26 DXC 5000

7.2 Data rate adapter Tributary

7.2.1 General
This unit forms the interface between the controller and 5 low-speed data users.
It performs the adaptation of the low-speed data signals to a 64kbit/s channel according to
ITU-T recommendation X.50.
7.2.2 Technical data

Data Port 5-port RS232 with X.50 plug-in with subrate mux. Up to six cards per subrack.
MUX (a) 5 independent RS232, or (b) 5 subrate RS232 (X.50) muxed to 64K
Data Rate Mode (a) 5 independent 1.2k, 2.4k, 4.8k, 9.6k, 19.2k, 38.4k, 48k, 64k sync
RS232
1.2k, 2.4k, 4.8k, 9.6k, 19.2k async
Mode (b) 5 mix together 1.2k, 2.4k, 4.8k, 9.6k sync
1.2k, 2.4k, 4.8k, 9.6k async
NOTE: Mode (a) and mode (b) cannot be used simultaneously
Connector DB25S
Production Description DXC5K/EN HW/A22

DXC 5000 Page 17/26

7.3 Data interface at 64 or N x 64 kbit/s tributary (X.21)

7.3.1 General
This unit has six interface circuits. The digital signal transmitted and received by the
connected data terminal is an N x 64 kbit/s signal, with N being any value from 1 to 31, and
are in agreement with ITU T recommendation X.21.
7.3.2 Technical data

Data Rate Nx56kbps (N=1 to 24) or Connector DB15

Nx64kbps (N=1 to 31)
Mapping Any sequential time slots Remote ESF Mode, proprietary
Sending message
DXC5K/EN HW/A22 Product Description

Page 18/26 DXC 5000

7.4 Data interface at 64k (G.703)

7.4.1 General
This unit has eight interface circuits. The digital signal transmitted and received by the
connected data terminal is a 64kbit/s signal and are in agreement with ITU-T
recommendation G.703.
7.4.2 Technical data

Data Port 8-port 64k G.703. Up to twelve cards per subrack.

Interface ITU-T G.703 64 Kbps co-directional interface
Connector RJ48c
Production Description DXC5K/EN HW/A22

DXC 5000 Page 19/26

8. T1 (1.5MBIT/S) SUBSYSTEMS
This unit forms the interface between the 1.5Mbit/s aggregate and the central controller.
The general characteristics of the 1.5 Mbit/s are given in the following table :

Line Rate 1.544 Mbps ± 50 bps

Line Code AMI or B8ZS
Input Signal ABAM cable length up to 200 meters
Output Signal DSX1
Framing D4/ESF (selectable)
Connector RJ48C

Two type of boards are available :

− T1 board for slot A-D

− Quad-T1 board for slot 1-12

DXC5K/EN HW/A22 Product Description

Page 20/26 DXC 5000

9. ROUTER INTERFACE
9.1.1 General
This unit forms the interface between the 2 LAN ports (1x10BaseT and 1x10/100BaseT) and
the central controller. Each interface (LAN or WAN) can be configured as a bridge port or a
router port.
9.1.2 Technical data

Number of ports 2 LAN ports, Max. 64 WAN ports

Physical Interface 10/100 BaseT x 2
Connector RJ45
Routing protocol Static, RIP-I, RIP-II
Data Rates Channelized N x 64 Kbps up to 2 x T1/E1 capacity (limited to
32x64k max. per WAN port)
Supporting Protocol TCP/IP, PPP, HDLC, NAT/NAPT, DHCP server, DHCP relay
Supporting facilities Packet filtering, control lists
Other Auto MDI/MDI-X crossover , speed autosensing, Half/full duplex
auto-negociation
Management VT-100, SNMP
Production Description DXC5K/EN HW/A22

DXC 5000 Page 21/26

10. ATM FRAME RELAY NETWORK LINE INTERFACE

10.1.1 General
This unit forms the interface between ATM/Frame Relay ports and the central controller.
10.1.2 Technical data

Network Interface:
T1 Module: T1 ATM UNI
FR (N x 64 Kbps, N=1 to 24)
E1 Module: E1 ATM UNI
FR (N x 64 Kbps, N= 1 to 31)
Up to 31 logical FR channels can be concentrated/ de-concentrated to FR or ATM.
Service Ports:
T1/FT1 interface: N x 64 Kbps, N=1 to 24
E1/FE1 interface: N x 64 Kbps, N= 1 to 31
Support HDLC to FR
Support HDLC to ATM
Supporting FR to FR multiplexing.
Support up to 128 DLCIs for total of 31 FR interfaces.
Support up to 128 VCs.
Peak cell rate on DLCI basis.
Manufacturing disable/enable ATM scrambling for internal testing (E1 ATM only).
AAL0 and AAL5 are supported in the ATM adaptation layer.
Support VBR service.
ITU FR management protocols are supported.
Flash memory software download through RS485.
Only the PVC type of ATM/FR service is supported.
DXC5K/EN HW/A22 Product Description

Page 22/26 DXC 5000

11. XDSL SUBSYSTEMS (G.SHDSL INTERFACE CARD)

11.1.1 General
These units form the interface between the controller and 2 or 4 G.SHDSL ports (depending
on the configuration).
11.1.2 Technical data

Up to twelve 2 or 4 port G.SHDSL cards without line power.

Line code : 16 –TCPAM, full duplex with adaptive echo cancellation.
Unconditioned 19-26 AWG twisted pair.
Line rate up to N x 64 kbit/s (N<=30 or 31).
Max data rate per port is 2Mbit/s
Management of TS16 for voice transmission (CAS) N>=16
Production Description DXC5K/EN HW/A22

DXC 5000 Page 23/26

12. OPTICAL (8MBIT/S) SUBSYSTEMS

These units form the interface between a 8Mbit/s optical signal and the central controller:

CTRL E1

Voice
nx64K

Data

8M Optical

n x 64K from any interface cards to optical

D0327ENa

The general characteristics of the optical signal are given in the following table:

Line Rate 8Mbps Line Cade Scrambled NRZ

Line Protection Yes, 1+1 Detector type PIN-FET

Optical Connector SC Automatic Laser Shutdown Yes

Output Power Receiver (@BER=10-10)

Wavelength
Optical Board Sensitivity Overload
(nm) Min (dBm) Max (dBm)
(dBm) (dBm)
19dB-34km 1310 +/- 50nm -15 -8 -34 -7
29dB-61km 1310 +/- 50nm -5 0 -34 0
17dB-40km 1550 +/- 40nm -15 -8 -32 -8
32dB-94km 1550 +/- 40nm -5 0 -37 -7
DXC5K/EN HW/A22 Product Description

Page 24/26 DXC 5000

13. OPTICAL (C37.94) SUBSYSTEMS

These units form the interface between a C37.94 optical interface and the central controller.
There are two version of the board: one with a single optical interface and one with 4 optical
interfaces. The board can be housed in slot 1 to 12 (single slot board).
The main application is described in the diagram below.
The general characteristics of the optical signal are given in the following table:

Line Rate From 1 to 12 Time Slots (1x64kbit/s to 12x64kbit/s)

Optical signal Compliant with C37.94. Multimode @ 820nm (+/-) 25nm

Typical distance Up to 2km
Optical Connector ST
Management / Alarms SNMP support
Production Description DXC5K/EN HW/A22

DXC 5000 Page 25/26

14. MECHANICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL DATA

Dimensions 435 x 225.5 x 220 mm (W×H×D)
Power Single/ Dual -48V DC, 100 Watts max.
Temperature -5°C / +50°C (working) / -25 to +55°C (storage)
Humidity 0-95%RH (non-condensing)
Mounting Desk-top stackable, 19” /23” rack mountable - 5U Heigth
EMC Comply with IEC TS 61000-6-5: “Immunity for power station and
substation environments”.
DXC5K/EN HW/A22 Product Description

Page 26/26 DXC 5000

15. TEST AND PERFORMANCE MONITORING

15.1 Performance Monitor

Performance Registers Last 24 hours in 15 minutes interval and last 7 days in 24 hours
summary
Separate Registers network, user, and remote site
Performance Reports Reports include Date & Time, Errored Second, Unavailable
Second, E1 Bursty Errored Second, Severe Errored Second,
Degraded Minutes, and Controlled Slip Second. Also available
in Statistics (%)
Alarm Queue 40 alarm records which record the latest alarm type, location
and date & time
Threshold Bursty Seconds, Severely Errored Second, Degraded Minutes

15.2 Test facilities

Loopback E1/T1 interface (Line Loopback, Payload Loopback, Local

Loopback)
Optical, G.SHDSL Loopback
Test Pattern E1/T1 interface (215-1 PRBS, 3-in-24, 1-in-8, 2-in-8, 1:1
patterns)
Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

DXC 5000

INSTALLATION
Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

DXC 5000 Page 1/34

CONTENTS

1. SITE SELECTION 5

2. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 6

3. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 7
3.1 Front Views 7
3.2 Connector pin definition and connection 12

4. CONFIGURATION SETTING 30
4.1 Software configuration setting 30
4.2 Replacement of Plug-in Card 30
DXC5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 2/34 DXC 5000

BLANK PAGE
Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

DXC 5000 Page 3/34

MODIFICATIONS PAGE
Version DATE COMMENTS
A 01/10/2004 ORIGINAL ISSUE
B 01/03/2005 Add Mini Quad E1, 64k G.703 and G.SHDSL boards
A22 15/05/07 Update
DXC5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 4/34 DXC 5000

CAUTION: ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL SHALL INSTALL AND

MAINTAIN THE SYSTEM.
THIS EQUIPMENT MUST BE CONNECTED TO AN EARTH SOCKET-
OUTLET, WHICH HAS A PERMANENT CONNECTION TO PROTECTIVE
EARTH WITH A CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA OF NOT LESS THAN
2.5 MM2.
ENSURE PROTECTIVE EARTHING CONNECTED BEFORE INSTALL
/UNINSTALL TELEPHONE WIRES.
NEVER INSTALL TELEPHONE WIRING DURING A LIGHTNING STORM.
NEVER INSTALL TELEPHONE JACKS IN WET LOCATIONS UNLESS THE
JACK IS SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR WET LOCATIONS.
NEVER TOUCH UNINSULATED TELEPHONE WIRES OR TERMINALS
UNLESS THE TELEPHONE LINE HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED AT THE
NETWORK INTERFACE.
USE CAUTION WHEN INSTALLING OR MODIFYING TELEPHONE LINES.
Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

DXC 5000 Page 5/34

1. SITE SELECTION
The following list indicates a site selection guideline. User need to follow this guideline to
select a proper installation site.

• Location of the Rack should be part of the central office equipment layout design.
Considerations should be given to entrance cable routing and -48 Vdc power.

• The installation site should have -48 Vdc power. An optional AC/DC power converter
can be used. Use Only with Class 2 power source, -48 Vdc, 100 watts.
DXC5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 6/34 DXC 5000

2. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
DXC 5000 and the Y-BOX can be installed as a desk top unit or mounted on a 19 inch.
Mounting of the unit in a rack follows standard telephone rack mount practices. Accessories
to install on a 19 inch is provided. As a desk-top unit DXC 5000 is stackable.
Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

DXC 5000 Page 7/34

3. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
3.1 Front Views
Central office -48 Vdc power is wired to terminal blocks in the front of the DXC 5000, shown
in Figure 2-1. Central office alarm system is wired to the Alarm Relay terminal blocks. For
connection to the CONSOLE/SLIP (button down/ button up) connector for maintenance and
administration, a CONSOLE/SLIP port with DB9 connector is located on the front panel, see
also Figure 2-1. The RJ45 connector is for an Ethernet connection. For direct modem or VT-
100 terminal connection, use a null modem cable to connect the CONSOLE/SLIP port on the
front panel.
When DXC 5000 is plugged with two CPU cards, both of these two CPU cards can be
primary (master) or redundant (slave) which only depends on which CPU card completes
boot up first after powering on the main unit. User can tell which CPU card is primary or
redundant from the status of CPU card's ACTIVE led. If ACTIVE led is flashing green, the
CPU card is primary. When one CPU fails, the other becomes master and remains master
even when the failed is replaced.

POWER E1/T1(C)E1/T1(D) CPU-1 CPU-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

ER

VE

M
AR
W

TI
AC
PO

AL

E1/T1 E1/T1
A B C D
SYNC/ C C
TEST
P P
LOF U U
E1/T1(A) E1/T1(B)
BPV
1 2
RAI/AIS

ACO
E1/T1 E1/T1
TIP EXT.
RING CLOCK

NC
MINOR
COM ALARM

NO
NC
MAJOR
COM ALARM Main Access DCS-Mux Shelf - Front Side
NO
ETHERNET
CONSOLE/SLIP
9600,N,8,1

FAN TRAY FAN TRAY

-V+V ALIM -V+V ALIM GND

DC 48V DC 48V
SLIP CONSOLE
LCD INTERFACE

Main Access DCS-Mux Shelf - Rear Side

CPU D0328ENb

FIGURE 1: PANEL VIEWS - MAIN SHELF AND CPU

When these plug-in modules, two CPU cards, four mini Quad E1 cards, ten G.shdsl cards,
and one 100W UM5813 power module, are plugged into a DXC 5000, one more 100W
UM5813 power module should be added to plug into the DXC 5000.
DXC5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 8/34 DXC 5000

FIGURE 2: PANEL VIEWS - POWER MODULE AND PLUG-IN CARDS (FOR 1/2 SLOT)
The re-sync time for repluging any voice card into DXC 5000 shelf is about 1 minute.

MAG FXS FXO

QUAD QUAD A-law 600 A-law 600 A-law 600 E&M
900 900 900
E1 T1
U-law U-law U-law

RIMG MODE METERING PLS METERING PLS

SIDE
A B
(L1,L2) (L1,GND) 12K 16K 12K 16K
WIRE
U6 U12 6 12 6 12 6 12 2 4
5 11 5 11 5 11 OHM
PORT 4 PORT 4
4 10 4 10 4 10 600 900
U5 U11 TYPE
3 9 3 9 3 9
1 2
SYNC/ALM SYNC/ALM 2 8 2 8 2 8
U4 U10 3 4
1 7 1 7 1 7
5 SET BY
DIP
U3 U9 PORT 3 PORT 3
L12 L12 L12 TEST

U2 U8 L11 L11 L11

L8
U7 L10 L10 L10
U1
L9 L9 L9 L7
U6
L8 L8 L8 L6
U5 L7 L7 L7
L5
PORT 2 PORT 2 L6 L6 L6
U4
L5 L5 L5 L4
U3
SYNC/ALM SYNC/ALM
L4 L4 L4 L3
U2 PORT 1 PORT 1 L3 L3 L3
L2
U1 L2 L2 L2
L1
L1 L1 L1

6-channel 10-channel 12-channel 12-channel 12-channel 8-channel

Quad E1 Quad E1
DTU DTU MAG FXS FXO 2W/4W E&M
D0330ENb

FIGURE 3: PANEL VIEWS - PLUG-IN CARDS (FOR SINGLE SLOT)

Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

DXC 5000 Page 9/34

FXS FXS FXO FXO MAG MAG

A-law 600 A-law 600 A-law 600 A-law 600
U-law 900 U-law 900 U-law 900 U-law 900 A-law A-law
U-law U-law
METERING PLS METERING PLS METERING PLS METERING PLS
12K 16K 12K 16K 12K 16K 12K 16K L1, GND L1 ,L2 L1,GND
L1,L2
6 12 6 12 6 12 6 12
6 12 6 12
5 11 5 11 5 11 5 11 5 11
5 11
4 10 4 10 4 10 4 10 4 10 4 10
3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9
2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8
1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7

RING TIP RING TIP RING TIP

1 1 1
L L L
E E E
F F F
T T T
12 12 12
1 1 1
R R R
I I I
G G G
H H H
T T T
12 12 12

24-channel 24-channel 24-channel

FXS FXO MAG
D0522ENa

FIGURE 4: PANEL VIEWS - PLUG-IN CARDS (FOR DUAL SLOT)

DXC5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 10/34 DXC 5000

FIGURE 5: PANEL VIEWS - PLUG-IN CARDS (FOR SINGLE SLOT)

A
5 5 6
RS232-X.50 MUX
RS232-5

V.35-5

V.35-6

3 4 3 4
H3

2
RS232-3

RS232-4

V.35-3

V.35-4

H2

1 2 1 2
H1
RS232-1

RS232-2

V.35-1

V.35-2

5-channel 6-channel 3-channel

RS232 with X.50 subrate V.35 MDSL
D0524ENa

FIGURE 6: PANEL VIEWS - PLUG-IN CARDS (FOR DUAL SLOT)

Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

DXC 5000 Page 11/34

A A
5 6 5 6

V.36/RS449/EIA530-6
V.36/RS449/EIA530-6
X.21-6

X.21-6
3 4 3 4

V.36/RS449/EIA530-6
V.36/RS449/EIA530-6
X.21-6

X.21-6

1 2 1 2

V.36/RS449/EIA530-6
V.36/RS449/EIA530-6
X.21-6

X.21-6

6-channel 6-channel
X.21 V.36/RS449/EIA530
D0525ENa

FIGURE 7: PANEL VIEWS - PLUG-IN CARDS (FOR DUAL SLOT)

TM

Y-BOX
A-TX LINE-TX B-TX A-TX LINE-TX B-TX A-TX LINE-TX B-TX A-TX LINE-TX B-TX
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4

A-RX LINE-RX B-RX A-RX LINE-RX B-RX A-RX LINE-RX B-RX A-RX LINE-RX B-RX

D0332ENa

FIGURE 8: PANEL VIEWS – Y-BOX BNC (75 OHM)

A LINE 9 B A LINE 10 B A LINE 11 B A LINE 12 B A LINE 13 B A LINE 14 B A LINE 15 B A LINE 16 B

TM

Y-BOX
A LINE 1 B A LINE 2 B A LINE 3 B A LINE 4 B A LINE 5 B A LINE 6 B A LINE 7 B A LINE 8 B

D0333ENa

FIGURE 9: PANEL VIEWS – Y-BOX RJ48C (120 OHM)

DXC5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 12/34 DXC 5000

3.2 Connector pin definition and connection

Pin Number Signal Description

1 -V -DC 48 Volts
2 +V +DC Return
3 Chassis Ground

TABLE 1: POWER CONNECTOR FOR MAIN UNIT

Pin Number Signal Description

1 NC Fuse Relay - Normally Close
2 C Fuse Relay - Common
3 NO Fuse Relay - Normally Open
4 NC Alarm Relay –Normally Close
5 C Alarm Relay –Common
6 NO Alarm Relay –Normally Open

TABLE 2: ALARM RELAY CONNECTOR

The console port is configured as a DCE device with a DB-9 female connector. Pin
definitions and pin connections are listed in Table 2-4 below.

Pin Number Signal Source

1 Data Carrier Detect To DTE
2 Receive Data To DTE
3 Transmit Data From DTE
4 Unassigned
5 Signal Ground
6 Data Set Ready To DTE
7 Unassigned
8 Clear to send To DTE
9 Unassigned

TABLE 3: CONSOLE PORT

SLIP port can be connected via RS232 interface. Pin definition is listed in Table 2-5.

Pin Number Signal Source

1 Data Carrier Detect From DCE
2 Receive Data From DCE
3 Transmit Data To DTE
4 Data Terminal Ready To DTE
5 Signal Ground

TABLE 4: SLIP PORT (9 PIN)

Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

DXC 5000 Page 13/34

Ethernet port can be connected via Ethernet 10-Base-T interface. Pin definition is listed in
Table 2-6.

Pin Number Signal Description

1 TPTX+ TP Driver Output
2 TPTX-
3 TPRX+ TP Receive Input
6 TPRX-

TABLE 5: ETHERNET PORT

Pin Number Signal

1 R TIP
2 R RING
4 T TIP
5 T RING
7 Chassis Ground/ Unassigned
8 Chassis Ground/ Unassigned

TABLE 6: E1 BNC/ RJ 45 AND T1 PORT

Normally the choice for the E1 connector, balanced 120 ohm or unbalanced BNC 75 ohm, is
installed at the factory according to the customer order. Users can change this choice by
opening the case and changing the jumper pins as indicated in the Table 2-8.

JUM9 JUM10 JUM9 JUM10

JUM2 JUM3 JUM2 JUM3
JUM1 JUM4 JUM1 JUM4

JUM5 JUM6 JUM5 JUM6

JUM8

JUM8

120 ohm E1 Card 75 ohm

OPEN, OFF CLOSE, ON

D0334ENa

FIGURE 10: JUMPER LOCATIONS FOR E1 CARD

NOTE 1: For 75 ohm E1 card, jumper 9 can be OPEN or ON. If the jumper 9 is
OPEN, BNC connector is set to Unassigned. If the jumper 9 is ON,
BNC connector is set to Chassis Ground.
NOTE 2 : For 120 ohm E1 card, jumper 9 can be OPEN or ON. If the jumper 9 is
OPEN, port 7 and port 8 of BNC connector is set to Unassigned. If the
jumper 9 is ON, port 7 and port 8 of BNC connector is set to Chassis
Ground.
NOTE 3 : BNC is open if jumper 10 is opened, BNC is grounded if jumper 10 is
closed.
NOTE 4: When BNC connector is selected, the user has the option of
grounding the received BNC shield by installing a jumper clip on the
jumper location. This is usually not necessary, but if you have any
noise on your device it can often be filtered out by using this
grounding process.
DXC5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 14/34 DXC 5000

The two RJ45 jacks are wired as follows:

Pin Number Signal Signal Direction

1 Transmit Data + Output from DXC 5000
2 Transmit Data - Output from DXC 5000
3 Receive Data + Input to DXC 5000
4 No Connection
5 No Connection
6 Receive Data - Input to DXC 5000
7 No Connection
8 No Connection

TABLE 7: RJ-45 FOR 10M AND 10/100M PIN ASSIGNMENT

For each of the U-interface ports, U-PORTs, connection to the line is by RJ48C connector.
The pin definition is listed in Table 2-9.

Pin Number Signal

4 TIP
5 RING

TABLE 8: U- PORT U-INTERFACE RJ48C TERMINALS

Pin Number Signal Signal Description

1 Unassigned
2 Unassigned
3 Unassigned
4 Loop 1 Tip Tip
5 Loop1 Ring Ring
6 Unassigned
7 Chassis Ground/ Unassigned
8 Chassis Ground/ Unassigned

TABLE 9: LINE HDSL CONNECTOR

Pin Number Signal Signal Description

1 Pair 1-A
2 Pair 1-B
3 Pair 2-A
4 Pair 2-B
5 Pair 3-A
6 Pair 3-B
7 Pair 4-A
8 Pair 4-B

TABLE 10: RJ45 PIN ASSIGNMENT - N1 & N2 OF DRY CONTACT I/O CARD
Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

DXC 5000 Page 15/34

Pin Number Signal Signal Description

1 U-NO U1 to U8 Normal Open
2 U-COM U1 to U8 GND
3 U-NC U1 to U8 Normal Close

TABLE 11: SCREW TYPE CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT - DRY CONTACT I/O CARD

Pin Number Pin Color Pin Name

8 Brown SG
7 White/ Brown E
6 Green TIP1
5 White/ Blue TIP
4 Blue RING
3 White/ Green RING1
2 Orange M
1 White/ Orange SB

TABLE 12: RJ45 PIN ASSIGNMENT - E&M CARD

PIN 8
PIN 7
Amber LED
PIN 6
PIN 5
PIN 4
PIN 3
PIN 2
PIN 1 Green LED
D0335ENa

FIGURE 11: RJ45 CONNECTOR - E&M CARD

Slide Switch
for A SIDE
D0336ENa

FIGURE 12: SIDE SWITCH FOR A SIDE - E&M CARD

DXC5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 16/34 DXC 5000

Slide Switch
for B SIDE
D0337ENa

FIGURE 13: SIDE SWITCH FOR B SIDE - E&M CARD

A Side B Side
Mode Status E (TX bit) M (RX bit) M (TX bit) E (RX bit)
A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D
Idle - on hook 0 0 0 1 0 * * * 0 0 0 1 0 * * *
ETSI Normal
Active - off hook 1 1 0 1 1 1 * * 1 1 0 1 1 1 * *
Idle - on hook 1 1 0 1 1 * * * 1 1 0 1 1 * * *
ETSI Revert
Active - off hook 0 0 0 1 0 0 * * 0 0 0 1 0 0 * *
Idle - on hook 0 0 0 0 0 * * * 0 0 0 0 0 * * *
ANSI Normal
Active - off hook 1 1 1 1 1 1 * * 1 1 1 1 1 1 * *
Idle - on hook 1 1 1 1 1 * * * 1 1 1 1 1 * * *
ANSI Revert
Active - off hook 0 0 0 0 0 0 * * 0 0 0 0 0 0 * *

TABLE 13: SIGNALING BITS - E&M CARD

NOTE: For version V2.02.01 or over
Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

DXC 5000 Page 17/34

E&M Card
LEDs

J28
ETSI Mode
J28

ion
without JUMP
New Version J28

ers
Top Side

dV
with JUMP

Ol
Revert Mode ETSI+Revert Mode

J28 J28

ANSI Mode ANSI Mode

J28
J28

ANSI+REVERT ANSI+REVERT

J28
J28

Note: for BOM version C04-C7 Note: for BOM version C04-C7
or lower or higher

D0530ENa

FIGURE 14: SHORT LINE AND JUMPER SETTING FOR EM CARD SIGNALLING BIT MODE

2 Wire 4 Wire
Pin No. Pin Name
A, B Side A Side B Side
4, 5 Ring, Tip Transmit, Receive Transmit Receive
3, 6 Ring1, Tip1 — Receive Transmit

TABLE 14: VOICE CHANNEL DIRECTION - E&M CARD

Signaling Direction A Side B Side

A to B B to A E lead M lead M lead E lead
ON HOOK ON HOOK OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN
ON HOOK OFF HOOK GROUND OPEN OPEN CLOSE
OFF HOOK ON HOOK OPEN CLOSE GROUND OPEN
OFF HOOK OFF HOOK GROUND CLOSE GROUND CLOSE

TABLE 15: E&M SIGNALING CHANNEL DIRECTION

DXC5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 18/34 DXC 5000

Pin Number Line Color Description

1 Unassigned
2 Unassigned
3 Red Ring lead
4 Green Tip lead
5 Unassigned
6 Unassigned

TABLE 16: RJ11 CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT - FXS/ FXO CARD

FIGURE 15: RJ11 CONNECTOR - FXS, FXO, AND MAG CARDS

Ring Generation & Ring

Pin Number Line Color Description Detector
L1 & L2 L1 & GND
1 White Unassigned
2 Black Unassigned
3 Red L2 Line 9
4 Green L1 Line 9 9
5 Yellow GND Line 9
6 Blue Unassigned

TABLE 17: RJ11 CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT - MAG CARD

Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

DXC 5000 Page 19/34

LEFT Card RJ21X PIN RIGHT Card RJ21X PIN

Line No (t(teleco 50 PIN) Line No (t (teleco 50PIN)
Ring T Tip Ring Tip
Line 1 1 26 Line 1 13 38
Line 2 2 27 Line 2 14 39
Line 3 3 28 Line 3 15 40
Line 4 4 29 Line 4 16 41
Line 5 5 30 Line 5 17 42
Line 6 6 31 Line 6 18 43
Line 7 7 32 Line 7 19 44
Line 8 8 33 Line 8 20 45
Line 9 9 34 Line 9 21 46
Line 10 10 35 Line 10 22 47
Line 11 11 36 Line 11 23 48
Line 12 12 37 Line 12 24 49

TABLE 18: RJ21X CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT – 24 FXS/ FXO CARD

LEFT Card RJ21X PIN RIGHT Card RJ21X PIN

Line No (t(teleco 50 PIN) Line No (t(teleco 50PIN)
L2 T L1 L2 L1
Line 1 1 26 Line 1 13 38
Line 2 2 27 Line 2 14 39
Line 3 3 28 Line 3 15 40
Line 4 4 29 Line 4 16 41
Line 5 5 30 Line 5 17 42
Line 6 6 31 Line 6 18 43
Line 7 7 32 Line 7 19 44
Line 8 8 33 Line 8 20 45
Line 9 9 34 Line 9 21 46
Line 10 10 35 Line 10 22 47
Line 11 11 36 Line 11 23 48
Line 12 12 37 Line 12 24 49

TABLE 19: RJ21X CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT – 24 MAG CARD

NOTE: Module of w/L1, L2 and w/L1, GND cannot use for 24-MAG Card. It
can use Module of w/L1, L2 or w/L1, GND only. (refer to -ordering
information).
DXC5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 20/34 DXC 5000

(L2) (L1)
Ring TIP

PIN 1 PIN 26

PIN 25 PIN 50

D0532ENa

FIGURE 16: RJ21X CONNECTOR - FXS, FXO, AND MAG CARDS

FXS/FXS-P
PLAR OFF PLAR ON

FXS/FXS-P FXS FXS-P

TX RX TX RX
A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D
On hook 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Off hook 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
No ring 1 * * * 0 * * * 1 * * *
Ring on 0 0 * * 1 1 1 1 0 0 * *
Battery Reverse 0 1 0 0
Metering Pulse 0 1 0 0
Tip lead open 1 1 1 1
Ring lead GND 0 0 0 1
OOS-Alarm * * * * * * * * * * * *

TABLE 20: SIGNALING BITS (DEFAULT SETTING) - FXS CARD

Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

DXC 5000 Page 21/34

FXO
TX RX
A B C D A B C D
On hook 0 * * *
Off hook 1 1 * *
No ring 0 1 0 1
Ring On 0 0 0 1
Battery Reverse 0 1 0 0
Metering Pulse 0 1 0 0
Tip Lead open 1 1 1 1
Ring lead GND 0 0 0 1
OOS-Alarm * * * *

TABLE 21: SIGNALING BITS (DEFAULT SETTING) -FXO CARD

For H/W Version F:

FIGURE 17: JUMPER SETTING FOR FXS RINGING VOLTAGE

NOTE : R89, jumper 9, and R50 cannot be set up at the same time.
DXC5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 22/34 DXC 5000

R89 R50
Vrms 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 75 74 73 72 71 70 68 60 55 50 42 40 39
Resister 20 36 66 86 150 500 1 4 3.2 2.8 2.6 2.2 1.8 1.2 500 360 200 100 68 20
(ohm) K K K K K K M M M M M M M M K K K K K K

TABLE 22: RINGING VOLTAGE RESISTER FOR H/W VERSION F

For H/W Version H or over:

R50 R107
MP GS

Ring (VAC)
JP2
J9

For FXS Model (normal model)

JP1
JP2

For FXS-GM Model

(add Ground Start and Metering Pulse Function)
JP2
PLAR (bit)

For FXS-M Model

(only add Metering Pulse Function)
JP2

For FXS-G Model

JP2 (only add Ground Start Function)
# JP2 Jumper setting for Ground Start and Metering
Pulse Function
JP1

For FXS PLAR ABCD bit to fixed 1111

JP1

For FXS-P or FXS-GMP PLAR bit (=OFF HOOK) programmable

# JP1 Jumper setting for PLAR

For Ring 78 Vrms (default)

J9
For Ring 64 Vrms (select R50)
J9
For Ring 85 Vrms (select R107)

FXS Card J9
# J9 Jumper setting for Ring Voltage

D0534ENa

FIGURE 18: JUMPER SETTING FOR FXS, MODEL AND PLAR BIT RINGING VOLTAGE
(H/W VERSION H OR OVER)
NOTE 1 : J9 85Vrms and J9 64Vrms cannot do setting at the same time.
NOTE 2: J9, JP1 and JP2 can do function setting at the same time.

R107 R50
Vrms 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 75 74 73 72 71 70 68 64 60 55 50 42 40 39

Resister 10 20 36 66 86 150 500 1 4 3.2 2.8 2.6 2.2 1.8 1.2 620 500 360 200 100 68 20

(ohm) K K K K K K K M M M M M M M M K K K K K K K

TABLE 23: RINGING VOLTAGE RESISTER FOR H/W VERSION H OR OVER

Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

DXC 5000 Page 23/34

PLAR ON PLAR OFF

Tx Rx Tx Rx
A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D
Normal 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
L1 & L2 Ring Detector 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
L1 & L2 Ring Generation 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
L1 & GND Ring Detector 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0
L1 & GND Ring Generation 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0

TABLE 24: SIGNALING BITS - MAGNETO CARD

The following 3 tables indicate using Magneto card PLAR mode setting for communicaitons
between a Magneto telephone and a regular telephone.

Status Phone in Local Site Phone in Remote Site

Turn the crank or push the button of
Ringing No action
the Magneto phone
Stop the ring and start to Stop turnning the crank or release
No action
speak the button of the Magneto phone

TABLE 25: MAGNETO TO MAGNETO SPEAK

Status Phone in Local Site Phone in Remote Site

Turn the crank or push and release
Ringing No action
the button of the Magneto phone
Turn the crank again or push and
release the button of the Magneto No action
phone
Stop the ring to speak
Turn the crank or push
No action and release the button
of the Magneto phone
Turn the crank again or
push and release the
End speaking No action
button of the Magneto
phone

TABLE 26: MAGNETO (PLAR) TO MAGNETO (PLAR) SPEAK

c Make a call from Magneto Phone to FXS Phone

Status Magneto Phone FXS Phone
Turn the crank or push and release
Ringing
the button of the Magneto phone
Stop the ring to speak Off hook
End speaking On hook

TABLE 27: MAGNETO (PLAR) TO FXS (PLAR) SPEAK

DXC5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 24/34 DXC 5000

d Make a call from FXS Phone to Magneto Phone

Status Magneto Phone FXS Phone
Ringing Off hook
Turn the crank or push and release
Stop the ring to speak
the button of the Magneto phone
End speaking On hook

TABLE 28: FXS (PLAR) TO MAGNETO ( (PLAR) SPEAK

FIGURE 19: JUMPER LOCATION FOR QUAD E1/ T1 INTERFACE

Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

DXC 5000 Page 25/34

Circuit
Jumper RJ BNC GND 120 Ω 75 Ω 100 Ω E1 T1
Protection
9 2, 3 ON 1, 2 ON
10 2, 3 ON 1, 2 ON
12 2, 3 ON 1, 2 ON
14 2, 3 ON 1, 2 ON
For 15 ON
Port 4 5 ON OFF
6 ON OFF
7 ON OFF
58 OFF ON
59 OFF ON
22 2, 3 ON 1, 2 ON
23 2, 3 ON 1, 2 ON
25 2, 3 ON 1, 2 ON
27 2, 3 ON 1, 2 ON
For 28 ON
Port 3 18 ON OFF
19 ON OFF
20 ON OFF
60 OFF ON
61 OFF ON
35 2, 3 ON 1, 2 ON
36 2, 3 ON 1, 2 ON
38 2, 3 ON 1, 2 ON
40 2, 3 ON 1, 2 ON
For 41 ON
Port 2 31 ON OFF
32 ON OFF
33 ON OFF
62 OFF ON
63 OFF ON
48 2, 3 ON 1, 2 ON
49 2, 3 ON 1, 2 ON
51 2, 3 ON 1, 2 ON
53 2, 3 ON 1, 2 ON
For 54 ON
Port 1 44 ON OFF
45 ON OFF
46 ON OFF
64 OFF ON
65 OFF ON
For Bank
57 When jumper 57 is on, bank will be changed after rebooting the system.
Change
TABLE 29: JUMPER SETTING FOR QUAD E1/ T1 INTERFACE
DXC5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 26/34 DXC 5000

Pin Number Signal Source

1 Cable Shield
2 Transmit Data DTE
3 Receive Data DCE
4 Request To Send DTE
5 Clear To Send DCE
6 Data Set Ready DCE
7 Signal Ground
8 Data Carrier Detect DCE
9 Receive Clock Return DCE
10 Unassigned
11 External Clock Return DTE
12 Transmit Clock Return DCE
13 Unassigned
14 Transmit Data Return DTE
15 Transmit Clock DCE
16 Receive Data Return DCE
17 Receive Clock DCE
18 Local Loopback DTE
19 Unassigned
20 Data Terminal Ready DTE
21 Remote Loopback DTE
22 Unassigned
23 Unassigned
24 External Clock DTE
25 Test Mode DCE

TABLE 30: V.35/DB25 DTE PORT PIN DEFINITION

Pin Number Signal Source

1 Cable Shield
2 Transmit Data DTE
3 Receive Data DCE
4 Request To Send DTE
5 Clear To Send DCE
6 Data Set Ready DCE
7 Signal Ground
8 Data Carrier Detect DCE
9 Receive Clock Return DCE
10 Data Carrier Detect Return DCE
Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

DXC 5000 Page 27/34

Pin Number Signal Source

11 External Clock Return DTE
12 Transmit Clock Return DCE
13 Clear To Send Return DCE
14 Transmit Data Return DTE
15 Transmit Clock DCE
16 Receive Data Return DCE
17 Receive Clock DCE
18 Local Loopback DTE
19 Request To Send Return DTE
20 Data Terminal Ready DTE
21 Remote Loopback DTE
22 Data Set Ready Return DCE
23 Data Terminal Ready Return DTE
24 External Clock DTE
25 Test Mode DCE

TABLE 31: V.36/ EIA530/ DB25 DTE PORT PIN DEFINITION

Pin Number Signal Source

1 Cable Shield
2 Transmit Data DTE
3 Control DTE
4 Receive Data DCE
5 Indication DCE
6 Signal Timing DCE
7 External Clock DTE
8 Signal Ground
9 Transmit Data Return DTE
10 Control Return DTE
11 Receive Data Return DCE
12 Indication Return DCE
13 Signal Timing Return DCE
14 External Clock Return DTE
15 Unassigned

TABLE 32: X.21/V.11 AND DB15 DTE PORT PIN DEFINITION

DXC5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 28/34 DXC 5000

Pin Number Signal Source

1 Cable Shield
2 Transmit Data DTE
3 Receive Data DCE
4 Request To Send DTE
5 Clear To Send DCE
6 Data Set Ready DCE
7 Signal Ground
8 Data Carrier Detect DCE
9 Unassigned
10 Unassigned
11 Unassigned
12 Unassigned
13 Unassigned
14 Unassigned
15 Transmit Clock DCE
16 Unassigned
17 Receive Clock DCE
18 Local Loopback DTE
19 Unassigned
20 Data Terminal Ready DTE
21 Remote Loopback DTE
22 Unassigned
23 Unassigned
24 External Clock DTE
25 Test Mode DCE

TABLE 33: RS232/DB25 DTE PORT PIN DEFINITION

Pin Number Signal Source

1 Transmit Data TIP_Port 1
2 Receive Data TIP_Port 1
3 Unassigned
4 Transmit Data TIP_Port 2
5 Receive Data TIP_Port 2
6 Unassigned
7 Transmit Data TIP_Port 3
8 Receive Data TIP_Port 3
9 Unassigned
10 Transmit Data TIP_Port 4
11 Receive Data TIP_Port 4
12 Unassigned
Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

DXC 5000 Page 29/34

Pin Number Signal Source

13 Unassigned
14 Transmit Data RING_Port 1
15 Receive Data RING_Port 1
16 Unassigned
17 Transmit Data RING_Port 2
18 Receive Data RING_Port 2
19 Unassigned
20 Transmit Data RING_Port 3
21 Receive Data RING_Port 3
22 Unassigned
23 Transmit Data RING_Port 4
24 Receive Data RING_Port 4
25 Unassigned

TABLE 34: DB25 MINI QUAD E1 PIN DEFINITION

DXC5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 30/34 DXC 5000

4. CONFIGURATION SETTING
4.1 Software configuration setting
There are three system configurations:

• Factory default

• Current working

• User stored
Factory default configurations are not changeable. Each DXC 5000 is shipped with all three
configurations set to the factory default configuration.
The current working configuration, which can be saved into nonvolatile memory as a user-
stored configuration, can be changed at any time. When the system is reset, the previous
configuration will be retrieved as the current working configuration. The user-stored
configuration can be retrieved at any time. User can retrieve the user-stored configuration to
overwrite the current working configuration.
4.2 Replacement of Plug-in Card
When a plug-in card is removed and replaced with a card of a different type, default
configuration is assigned to the new card. The user must set the configuration for each
change of card type. If the same type card is inserted, depending on card type, then the
following happens:

• For E1, T1, and DTE plug-in cards, the previous configuration is automatically
downloaded.

• For Router plug-in card, the factory default configuration is assigned to the new card.

• For E1/ T1 ATM Frame Relay plug-in card, (a) The port configuration for E1 or T1 is
automatically downloaded, (b) The Frame Relay management setup is factory default
configuration.

Console Port Fixed

Baud Rate 9600
Data Bit 8
Stop Bit 1
Parity Bit NONE
XON-XOFF OFF
Interface TERMINAL
SNMP OFF

E1 Line Item Default

Line Frame FAS
Line Code HDB3
Interface Card setting
Line FDL OFF
FDL Sa-bit Sa4
Line AIS OFF
Line RAI ON
Line CRC ON
Idle Code 0Xd5
Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

DXC 5000 Page 31/34

T1 Line Item Default

Line Frame ESF
Line Code B8ZS
Interface Long Haul
Line LBO 0dB
Line EQU 0-133 ft
Line AIS OFF
Line YEL ON
Line Inband OFF
Idle Code 0xFF

HDSL Items Default

XDSL MODE Master
CLOCK SOURCE Internal
LINE RATE 768k bps
LINE CODE 2B1Q

DTE (V.35/ V.36/ EIA530/ Default

X.21/V.11) Item
RATE 64K
CLOCK Normal
DATA Normal
RTS Activate
TTM Off
V.54 Off
V.35,
INTERFACE
V.36,
(Depend on which DTE card
EIA530/RS449,
is plugged into the shelf)
X.21/V.11

DTE (X.50) Item Default

X50 MUX NO_MUX
SYNC MODE SYNC
RATE 1.2K
PHASE Fixed
4.8K SEL Fixed
CLOCK Normal
DATA Normal
RTS Permanent
TTM Off
INTERFACE RS-232
WARNING No
DXC5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 32/34 DXC 5000

U-PORT Line Item (All Default

ports)
Channel B1
Speed 64 Kbps

ATM FR T1 Line Items Default

Frame Format Mode ESF
Line Code Mode B8ZS
Line Build Out 0 dB
Yellow Alarm ON
Alarm Indication Signal FRAMED
Interface LONG HAUL

ATM FR E1 Line Items Default

Frame Format Mode ON
Line Code Mode HDB3
CRC ON
RAI ON
Alarm Indication Signal FRAMED
CAS OFF
FDL OFF
Sa_bit Sa4
Interface 120 Ohm (Hardware)

Router Setup Default

Net_Address 000.000.000.000
Netmask 000.000.000.000
Gateway_Address 000.000.000.000
NI_Address 000.000.000.000
Metric 01

E&M Card Default Configuration

Item Option/ Range Default
Side A Side, B Side Depending on
side switch
setting
Impedance 600 ohm, 900 ohm 600 ohm
Signaling Type1, Type 2, Type 3, Type 4, Type 5
and Type 5 or Tx only
Tx Gain -10 to +7 dB 0 dB
Rx Gain -10 to +14 dB 0 dB
Installation DXC5K/EN IN/A22

DXC 5000 Page 33/34

FXS Card Default Configuration

Item Option/ Range Default
A/ µ Law A Law, µ Law A Law
Impedance 600 ohm, 900 ohm 600 ohm
Tx Gain -21 to +10 dB -3 dB
Rx Gain -21 to +10 dB -3 dB
PLAR Ring 2" on 4" off, 1" on 2" off 2" on 4" off
Cadence
Ring Frequency 16.7, 20, 25, 50 Hz 20 Hz
Metering Pulse On, Off Off
Metering Pulse 12 KHz, 16 KHz 16 KHz
Frequency
Metering Level 1Vrms, 2.4Vrms 2.4Vrms
PLAR On, Off Off

FXO Card Default Configuration

Item Option/ Range Default
A/ µ Law A Law, µ Law A Law
Impedance 600 ohm, 900 ohm 600 ohm
Tx Gain -21 to +10 dB -3 dB
Rx Gain -21 to +10 dB -3 dB
Trunk Condition On hook, Off hook On hook
Line Polarity Normal, Reverse Normal
Metering Pulse 12 KHz, 16 KHz 16 KHz
Frequency
Metering Pulse Normal, Packet Normal
Detect Mode
Metering Pulse -19 to -47 dBm -27 dBm
Decode Level

Magneto Card Default Configuration

Item Option/ Range Default
Ring Mode Ring across L1 & L2 and L1 &
GND
A/ µ Law A Law, µ Law A Law
Impedance 600 ohm, 900 ohm 900 ohm
Tx Gain -21 to +10 dB -3 dB
Rx Gain -21 to +10 dB -3 dB
PLAR Ring 2" on 4" off, 1" on 2" off 1" on 2" off
Cadence
PLAR On, Off Off
DXC5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 34/34 DXC 5000

Miscellaneous Default
Password DXC5000
Device Name DXC 5000

TABLE 35: DEFAULT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION

Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000

OPERATION
Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 1/38

CONTENTS

1. QUICK START FOR DXC 5000 5

1.1 Power On 5
1.2 Load Default 5
1.3 Using Terminal 5

2. SYSTEM OPERATION 6
2.1 Date 6
2.2 Master Clock 6
2.3 Console Port 6
2.4 Menu Lock 6
2.5 Logon, Logoff, and Password 6

3. DS0 CHANNEL MAP 7

4. DS1 NETWORK LINE CONFIGURATION (E1 LINE) 8

4.1 Frame Format 8
4.2 Line Code 8
4.3 Interface 8
4.4 Facility Data Link 8
4.5 Equalization (Line Build-Out) 8
4.6 Equalization 8
4.7 AIS 8
4.8 RAI (Remote Alarm Indication) 8
4.9 CRC (Cycle Redundancy Check) Format 8
4.10 In-Band Signaling 9
4.11 Idle Code 9

5. REMOTE DTE CONFIGURATION 10

5.1 Channel 10
5.2 Mode 10
5.3 Remote Link 10
5.4 Terminal Timing Mode (TTM) 10

6. SYNC, ASYNC AND SUBRATE SETTINGS FOR X.50 INTERFACE 12

DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 2/38 DXC 5000

7. ALARMS AND REPORTS 14

7.1 Alarms 14
7.2 Reports 21
7.3 HDSL Reports 23
7.4 LED Operation 24
7.5 Telnet Connectivity 35
7.6 Embedded SNMP Agent 36

8. IN-BAND MANAGEMENT SETUP 37

Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 3/38

MODIFICATIONS PAGE
Version DATE COMMENTS
A 23/09/2004 ORIGINAL ISSUE
B 01/03/2005 Add Mini Quad E1, 64k G.703 and G.SHDSL boards
A22 15/05/2007 Update
DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 4/38 DXC 5000

Using a VT100 terminal, the DXC 5000 provides a comprehensive user interface.
The DXC 5000 uses out-of-band link within the U-interface to communicate to the matching
remote DXC 5000 unit so that an operator from one side can obtain information on both
sides of the U-interface line. The configuration changes on one side can be viewed from the
other side.
NOTE: With the DXC 5000 at one end, the DXC 5000 must be, by default,
configured as LT. The remote DXC 5000 unit, when connected to the
DXC 5000 must be configured as NT.
DXC 5000 also uses out-of-band link within the E1 interface to communicate to the
matching DXC 5000 at the far end of the E1 network so that an operator from one side can
obtain information on both sides of the E1 network. The configuration changes on one side
can be viewed from the other side. The E1 channel assignment changes can be sent to the
remote unit when the link between two units is up. Through use of FDL data link, the remote
unit updates its configuration accordingly upon receipt of the new configuration.
Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 5/38

1. QUICK START FOR DXC 5000

After installation, the user may want to familiarize himself with the equipment immediately.
The following abbreviated instructions will give the user a quick start.
1.1 Power On
Turn power on by attaching a power cable to the front of the unit.
1.2 Load Default
The unit is shipped with factory default setting.
The DXC 5000 will automatically load the system hardware configuration stored in the flash
memory. If you prefer to load the factory default configuration press the ACO button during
the countdown (ie. 3….2…1).
1.3 Using Terminal
To use the RS232 interface to configure the unit, connect a VT-100 terminal to the
CONSOLE/SLIP (button down/ button up) connector using a null modem cable. The VT-100
terminal can be a PC running a VT-100 emulator software.
Upon connection, press ENTER and ESC alternately to bring the main menu into view.
Press O (Log On) to see the full menu.
Press S (System Setup) to review or change the configuration. The entire configuration is
shown when S is pressed. To change any setting, use the arrow keys to move to the target
setting. Then press the TAB key repeatedly to cycle to the desired setting for any selected
parameter.
Press U (Select Slot) to select a board (A-D or 1-12).
Press I (Information) to see the DXC5000 physical configuration and firmware release.
DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 6/38 DXC 5000

2. SYSTEM OPERATION
2.1 Date
DXC 5000 is equipped with a RTC (Real Time Clock). User can change the current date and
time as necessary. RTC also can manage leap year. To save RTC battery life, the RTC is
activated by the manufacturer just before shipping. The RTC battery has a 10 years power-
off life cycle.
2.2 Master Clock
This product has a system clock PLL (Phase Lock Loop) which may be phase locked to the
DS1 line clock or internal clock. The default master is the DS1 line clock.
NOTE: If no DS1 line clock is available, DXC 5000 will automatically switch to
the internal clock source. DXC 5000 will automatically switch back to
the DS1 line clock when card plug-in.
2.3 Console Port
The console port allows the user either to use a local VT-100 terminal via DB9 connector or
use a remote VT-100 terminal via modem for system configuration, diagnostics, polling
status reports, etc. The console port baud, data bit length, stop bit length, parity bit length,
XON-XOFF flow control, and interface type are as shown below.

Item Fixed Setting

Baud 9600
Data Bit 8
Stop Bit 1
Parity Bit NONE
XON-XOFF OFF
Interface TERMINAL

TABLE 1: CONSOLE PORT SETTING

2.4 Menu Lock
The terminal is used to read alarms, system configurations, and system status. It also can be
used to change system configurations and clear the alarm queue, etc. By enabling the
menu-lock, only read operations are allowed. Modifications to the current status are not
allowed. Users may not change system configurations or clear performance data.

• Password and menu-clock options are disabled by default

• The default password is DXC5000

2.5 Logon, Logoff, and Password
Logoff prevents system configuration changes at the terminal, while logon allows system
configuration changes. The password feature is used to augment lock control against
unauthorized terminal users from changing system parameters from the terminal. With
password enabled, logon requires entering the correct password. If password is disabled, no
password is required to logon.

• The default option of the password is disabled.

• The default password is DXC5000.

If password is enabled, users must enter the password when logging in to gain the privilege
to change system configurations by the terminal. To change the password for the first time,
enter the default password when prompted for the old password.
Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 7/38

3. DS0 CHANNEL MAP

NOTE: DSO is equivalent to 64 Kbit /s channel or Time Slot (TS).
DS0 channel multiplexing is done by the MAP command. A map contains 31 DS0 channels
(E1) or 24 DS0 channel (T1) where a single DS0 channel can be assigned to any other DSO
channel. If in-band management is need, select 1 DS0 channel map to SNMP. An idle code
is transmitted on all unused channels.
NOTE: For E1 network interface with HDB3 coding or T1 network interface
with B8ZS coding all remote DTE ports with 56 Kbps, all channels are
available for any DS0 assignment, data or voice.
However, for either network interface with AMI coding, user should
assign only alternate odd or even DS0 channels for 64 Kbps data.
This is to guarantee one's density requirement.
DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 8/38 DXC 5000

4. DS1 NETWORK LINE CONFIGURATION (E1 LINE)

A detailed option list of E1 line configuration is given after in this document (Table 2). The
following paragraphs will describe each item.
4.1 Frame Format
For the E1 line interface, the frame format is ITU-T G.704. Either 2-frame, or 16-frame
structure can be selected. Only the 16-frame provides CRC and optional CAS. For the T1
line interface, either D4 or ESF frame format is available. In ESF frame format mode, user
can choose either AT&T or ANSI facility data link protocol. ESF & T1.403 chooses ANSI ESF
data link protocol and one second performance report will be sent to the network every
second automatically. Also, ANSI and AT&T data link message is acceptable in ANSI ESF
frame format mode. However, AT&T ESF frame format mode only accept AT&T ESF data
link protocol.
4.2 Line Code
For the T1 line interface, either AMI (Alternate Mark Inverting) or B8ZS (bipolar with 8 zero
substitution) line code format can be chosen. For theE1 line interface, either AMI (Alternate
Mark Inverting) or HDB3 (high density bipolar of length 3) line code format can be chosen.
Be sure the line code chosen matches that used on the network.
4.3 Interface
The T1 interface can be long haul or short haul. Long haul has higher powered output to
drive long lines, while short haul is more appropriate for intraoffice connections. E1 interface
will only display 120 Ohm twisted pair or 75 Ohm coaxial cable, which is a jumper choice.
4.4 Facility Data Link
Whereas for T1, the FDL (facility data link) is part of the ESF structure, for E1, this is not part
of the standard. DXC 5000 uses a proprietary FDL within the E1 frame structure to facilitate
remote control and remote performance and statistics monitoring. This FDL, for E1 only, can
be turned ON or OFF. For E1, user can set Sa-bit (Sa4-Sa8) to select FDL channel.
4.5 Equalization (Line Build-Out)
For the T1 line long haul interface, the transmit LBO (line build-out) can be programmed to
either 0 dB, -7.5 dB, or -15 dB.
For the T1 line short haul interface, the equalization can be set to equivalent cable distances
up to 655 feet.
4.6 Equalization
Whether long haul or short haul, for T1, further refinements of the output signal can be made
using the EQU controls. For long haul, the choices are in dB of inserted loss. For short
haul, the choices are in equivalent distances of inserted loss.
4.7 AIS
AIS, alarm indication signal, notifies the far end that an alarm condition or a loopback and
diagnostic test are in progress. Thus customer signals are blocked. The AIS can be sent
two ways. In the framed mode, all time slots will have all ones sent but the framing pattern
will be preserved. In the unframed mode, all ones are sent for all time slots.
4.8 RAI (Remote Alarm Indication)
DXC 5000 transmits RAI (Remote Alarm Indication) when it detects LOS (Loss of Signal),
AIS (Alarm Indication Signal), or OOF (Out of Frame) for 2.5 ± 0.5 seconds. User can
disable this feature by disable RAI (Remote Alarm Indication) command.
4.9 CRC (Cycle Redundancy Check) Format
DXC 5000 can be used in two frame or multiframe mode. For two frame mode, set CRC to
OFF. For multiframe mode, set CRC to ON. A proprietary facility data link is implemented in
both modes to facilitate remote system control and performance and statistics monitoring.
Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 9/38

4.10 In-Band Signaling

In all cases, DXC 5000 utilizes a proprietary facility data link, FDL for E1, or in-band
signaling for T1, to achieve remote system control and performance and statistics
monitoring.
4.11 Idle Code
Any DS0 channel which is not assigned to any U-PORT is an idle channel. An idle code is
transmitted on idle DS0 channel. User may program the idle channel to any bit pattern from
0x00 to 0xFF.
NOTE: Due to one's density requirement, it is advised that idle code to be set
as 0xD5. Or, user must program idle code to contain at least two bits
of '1'. The factory default idle code is 0xD5.

Item Options Default

Line Frame FAS FAS
Line Code HDB3, AMI HDB3
Interface 75 Ohm Coaxial Cable, 120 Ohm Twisted Pair Jumper setting
Line FDL OFF, ON OFF
FDL Sa-bit Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7, Sa8 Sa4
Line AIS OFF, ON OFF
Line RAI OFF, ON ON
Line CRC OFF, ON ON
Idle Code 0x00 - 0xFF 0xD5

TABLE 2: E1 LINE DEFAULT SETTING

Item Options Default

Line Frame D4, ESF, ESF$T1.403 ESF
Line Code B8ZS, AMI B8ZS
Interface Long Haul, Short Haul Long Haul
Line LBO 0dB, -7.5dB, -15dB 0dB
FDL EQU 0-133ft, 133-266ft, 266-399ft, 399-533ft, 533-655ft 0-133ft
Line AIS OFF, ON OFF
Line YEL OFF, ON ON
Line Inband OFF, ON OFF
Idle Code 0x00 - 0xFF 0xFF

TABLE 3: T1 LINE DEFAULT SETTING

DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 10/38 DXC 5000

5. REMOTE DTE CONFIGURATION

Although for the DXC 5000, the channel assignment of each U-PORT or H-PORT is
independent of the configuration of the remote DXC 5000 unit, for compatibility with other
DXC 5000 products, which allows remote DTE configuration, such commands are also
available for the DXC 5000. The two configurations suitable for remote control are Channel
and Speed. Another two settings for DXC 5000 operation, mode and link, are also
important, but must be locally set. The following paragraphs describe each, which is also
summarized in Table 3-4.
5.1 Channel
When a DTE port is configured to run at 64 Kbps or above, the channel to associate with the
DTE port can be either B1 or B2. Else it must be B1+B2. IDLE means no channel is
assigned, which applies only if the speed is 0, or idle
5.2 Mode
When two DXC 5000 are interconnected through the U-interface, one DXC 5000 must be
mode NT, and the other LT. The DXC 5000 must be the LT. Therefore this parameter is
fixed for the DXC 5000. The remote unit, NT, updates its configuration accordingly upon
receipt of the new configuration. Whenever the link between two units is established, the LT
transmits its DTE configuration to NT. The NT changes its DTE configuration accordingly.
5.3 Remote Link
The channel used to transmit the configuration information can be only the M channel. Both
LT and NT units must use the same channel.
5.4 Terminal Timing Mode (TTM)
In a normal operating mode, the CSU/DSU uses the transmit clock (from CSU/DSU) to
sample the transmit data sent from the DTE. In the Terminal Timing Mode (TTM) the
CSU/DSU uses the external clock from the DTE to sample the transmit data. This avoids
data reception problems due to phase delay caused by long cables. If the DTE cable is too
long, the transmit data, after traversing the cable, may not be in-phase with the transmit
clock. By using this feature the transmit data will be in phase with the sampling clock, which
in this case will be the external clock from the DTE.
Note that the "external clock" from the DTE can also be used as the CSU/DSU system clock.
This choice is independent of the TTM option. See the section on Master Clock for the
details.

Item Options DTE Default

Channel IDLE, B1, B2, B1+B2 B1
Speed 0, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 64K
38.4, 56, 64, 112, 128 Kbps
Mode LT (NT not allowed) LT
Link M-channel M-channel

TABLE 4: DTE PORT DEFAULT SETTING

Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 11/38

I/O Item Description Default

ON - Send alarm trap ˇ
Alarm Trigger
OFF - No alarm trap is sent
Dry
Programmable message with length to
Contact Alarm Message
255 bytes
Input
ON - Alarm
Alarm Status
OFF - Normal
Set the dry contact to normal ˇ
Dry Contact Setup
Dry Set the dry contact to operated
Contact
Output Contact normal
Contact Status
Contact Oprated

TABLE 5: DRY CONTACT I/O PORT DEFAULT SETTING

DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 12/38 DXC 5000

6. SYNC, ASYNC AND SUBRATE SETTINGS FOR X.50 INTERFACE

The parameter settings for Mode, Rate and Phase must match the far end units exactly.
Failing to match these settings may result in no connection. Each port on X.50 modules used
in the DXC 5000 can be set individually. This section will explain the method to change each
port and adjust it’s mode.
Though the LCD can be used to do these adjustments, this section will cover only operation
through the VT100 terminal.
Each port can setup the following configurations:

• MUX mode, whose options are “NO-MUX” and “MUX”,

• Sync mode, whose options are “SYNC”, “ASYNC-8”, “ASYNC-9”, “ASYNC-10”, and
“ASYNC-11”, (ASYNC-N, with N = number of bits including start + data + parity +
stop),

• Data Rate, whose options are “1.2”, “2.4“, “4.8“, “9.6“, “38.4“, “48“, and “64“,

• Phase, whose options are “PH_1“, “PH_2“, “PH_3“, “PH_4“, “PH_5“, and “FIXED“,

• 4.8K, whose options are “F-HALF“, “L-HALF“, “OD-PAIR“, “EV-PAIR“, and “FIXED“.
Under the “NO-MUX” mode, except 64Kbps, which can be selected only for full rate, these
data rates, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 38.4, and 48Kbps, can be selected for RS232 interface.
When “NO-MUX” mode is selected with the data rates of X.50, 1.2 to 48 Kbps, the default
of “PHASE” and “4.8K” are “FIXED”. Under this mode, the data rates of each PHASE can be
set as 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 38.4, or 48Kbps.
Examples for NO-MUX mode:
When the data rate of PHASE 1 is set as 2.4 Kbps, the value of PHASE 1, 1, is fixed for
PORT 1 to 5.

PHASE 1 1 6 11 16 PORT 2 2.4 Kbps

PHASE 2 2 7 12 17 4.8 Kbps
PHASE 3 3 8 13 18 9.6 Kbps
PHASE 4 4 9 14 19 19.2 Kbps
PHASE 5 5 10 15 20 38.4 Kbps

PHASE 1 1 6 11 16 PORT 1 2.4 Kbps

PHASE 2 2 7 12 17 4.8 Kbps
PHASE 3 3 8 13 18 9.6 Kbps
PHASE 4 4 9 14 19 19.2 Kbps
PHASE 5 5 10 15 20 38.4 Kbps

PHASE 1 1 6 11 16 PORT 5 2.4 Kbps

PHASE 2 2 7 12 17 4.8 Kbps
PHASE 3 3 8 13 18 9.6 Kbps
PHASE 4 4 9 14 19 19.2 Kbps
PHASE 5 5 10 15 20 38.4 Kbps
Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 13/38

PHASE 1 1 6 11 16 PORT 3 2.4 Kbps

PHASE 2 2 7 12 17 4.8 Kbps
PHASE 3 3 8 13 18 9.6 Kbps
PHASE 4 4 9 14 19 19.2 Kbps
PHASE 5 5 10 15 20 38.4 Kbps

PHASE 1 1 6 11 16 PORT 4 2.4 Kbps

PHASE 2 2 7 12 17 4.8 Kbps
PHASE 3 3 8 13 18 9.6 Kbps
PHASE 4 4 9 14 19 19.2 Kbps
PHASE 5 5 10 15 20 38.4 Kbps

PHASE 1 1 6 11 16 PORT 2 2.4 Kbps

PHASE 2 2 7 12 17 4.8 Kbps
PHASE 3 3 8 13 18 9.6 Kbps
PHASE 4 4 9 14 19 19.2 Kbps
PHASE 5 5 10 15 20 48 Kbps

From the VT100 terminal screens, select the port first. Press “U” and enter the port number
you wish to modify. For example, B2.
Change the Synchronization mode. Use the down arrow to select “SYNC Mode.” Use “Tab”
to change to one of the following values: SYNC, ASYNC-8, ASYNC-9, ASYNC-10, ASYNC-
11.
Change the Rate. Use the down arrow to select “Rate.” Use “Tab” to change to one of the
following values: 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 38.4, 48, 64.
Change the Phase. Use the down arrow to select “Phase.” Use “Tab” to change to one of the
following values: 1.6.11.16, 2.7.12.17, 3.8.13.18, 4.9.14.19, 5.10.15.20.
When “MUX” mode is selected, the data rates of each PHASE can be set as 1.2, 2.4, 4.8,
or 9.6Kbps.
Though each port can select any of the listed phases, each phase set can only be used by
one port. If an overlap message is displayed, the corresponding conflicting port must be
adjusted to another phase set.
Change the 4.8K selection. This adjusts for the usage of two of the four phase sections. Use
the down arrow to select “4.8K Selection.” Use “Tab” to change to one of the following
values: first half, last half, odd pair, even pair. For example, on Phase 2, selection “odd pair”
will use 2 and 12 for the 4.8K data rate.
Refer to sections 6.6.1 and 6.6.3 for terminal screen views. The following table lists the
various phases.
Example for MUX mode:

PHASE 1 1 6 11 16 PORT 2 2.4 Kbps

PHASE 2 2 7 12 17 PORT 1 1.2 Kbps
PHASE 3 3 8 13 18 PORT 5 4.8 Kbps
PHASE 4 4 9 14 19 PORT 3 9.6 Kbps
PHASE 5 5 10 15 20 PORT 4 4.8 Kbps
DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 14/38 DXC 5000

7. ALARMS AND REPORTS

7.1 Alarms
DXC 5000 has many types of alarm. This includes system to control all of alarm, as listed in
Table 3-6,system alarm as listed in Table3-7, alarms from the E1 network port, as listed in
Table 3-8, and each of the U-PORTs, as listed in Table 3-9. HDSL alarm is listed in Table 3-
10. Also, DXC 5000 has alarm queue which record the latest 100 alarms with time stamp.
DXC 5000 also has alarm history and alarm status registers which is used to track the alarm
count. Each alarm can be individually enabled or disabled. When disabled, no action is
taken. When enabled, alarm counter increments on the occurrence of the specific type of
alarm. When alarm occurs or the counter threshold exceeds, alarm is triggered.
When alarm is triggered, a relay is activated if it is enabled. Otherwise, no action is taken
and only the specific alarm count is incremented. When threshold level is implemented, it is
based on the 15 minutes alarm count register.
All alarms are disabled by default. The relay is also disabled by default.
Individual fault counts are updated every second. Bipolar Violation (BPV) counts are updated
every second, but the BPV alarm is based on an average Bit Error Rate (BER) that is
calculated over a 15-minute interval. Therefore, BPV alarm status is updated every 15
minutes after the average BER is calculated. If the average BPV rate exceeds the preset
threshold ⎯ i.e., from 10-9 up to 10-5, an alarm can be declared (assuming BPV alarm is
enabled). ES and UAS employ threshold-triggered alarms, but these alarms are declared as
soon as the recorded account exceeds the preset threshold. The 15-minute integration
interval does not apply to ES and UAS alarms. Alarm register states are reset every 15
minutes, but preserved in the Alarm History display.
When any of the U-PORTs report an alarm condition, such as loss of synchronization, the
ALARM will cause the corresponding LED on the front panel to turn red color, and if enabled,
turn the ACO LED on as well. This LED can be turned off by pressing the ACO key. For
each unit and for each type of alarm condition, the alarm can be disabled.

Alarm Action Description Alarm Severity

Alarm enable or disable all alarm/event (include card Disable/Enable
alarm).
Relay enable or disable relay while alarm occurs. Disable/Enable
Alarm Cut Off issue alarm to Management if "alarm cut off" key Disable/Enable
pressed.

TABLE 6: ALARM ACTION TABLE

Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 15/38

Alarm Type Alarm Description Alarm Severity

Port Inactive alarm control for: Disable/major/min
or/critical
a. slot inactive: pull out card or card failed.
b. redundant loss: redundant CPU pull out or failed.
c. redundant checksum error: checksum error while
transmit data from primary to redundant.
d. redundant unsync: redundant SW is not same
with primary CPU.
Port Start-up alarm control for: Disable/major/min
or/critical
a. slot startup: plug in card.
b. primary startup: first startup CPU card.
c. redundant insert: redundant CPU inserted.
d. redundant to primary: redundant CPU become to
primary if primary CPU loss.
Clock Loss alarm control for clock loss (line clock or external clock). Disable/major/min
or/critical
Link Switch alarm control for link switch in e1/t1 protection Disable/major/min
mechanism. or/critical
Map Switch alarm control for map switch (timing switch) mechanism. Disable/major/min
or/critical
Power Alarm alarm control for: Disable/major/min
or/critical
a. power fail: power card failed.
b. fan fail: fan failed.
c. power consumption: power over load.
Type Mismatch alarm control for: Disable/major/min
or/critical
a. card type mimatch: if plug in card different with
previous record.
b. link change: if link ID different with previous record.

TABLE 7: SYSTEM ALARM TYPE TABLE

NOTE: disable: no alarm issue.
major: issue major alarm and enable major relay (if enabled).
minor: issue minor alarm and enable minor relay (if enabled).
critical: issue critical alarm and enable major relay (if enabled).

Alarm Type Alarm Description Threshold

"RAI, LINE" E1 Line Yellow Alarm no
"AIS, LINE" E1 Line Alarm Indication Signal no
"LOS, LINE" E1 Line Loss of Signal no
"LOF, LINE" E1 Line Loss of Frame no
"BPV, LINE" E1 Line Bipolar Violation yes (default 5)
"ES, LINE" E1 Line Error Second yes (default 1)
"UAS, LINE" E1 Line Unavailable Second yes (default 1)
"CSS, LINE" E1 Line Control Slip Second yes (default 1)

TABLE 8: E1 NETWORK INTERFACE ALARM TYPE TABLE

DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 16/38 DXC 5000

Alarm Type Alarm Description Threshold

"YEL, LINE" T1 Line Yellow Alarm no
"AIS, LINE" T1 Line Alarm Indication Signal no
"LOS, LINE" T1 Line Loss of Signal no
"LOF, LINE" T1 Line Loss of Frame no
"BPV, LINE" T1 Line Bipolar Violation yes (default 5)
"ES, LINE" T1 Line Error Second yes (default 1)
"UAS, LINE" T1 Line Unavailable Second yes (default 1)
"CSS, LINE" T1 Line Control Slip Second yes (default 1)

TABLE 9: T1 NETWORK INTERFACE ALARM TYPE TABLE

Alarm Type Alarm Description Threshold

"LOS, MASTER- Master Loop-1 Loss of signal/ LOSW* None
LOOP1"
"LOS, SLAVE- Slave Loop-1 Loss of signal/ LOSW* None
LOOP1"
"ES15M, Master Loop-1 Error Second in current 15- 1-900 (default 1)
MASTER-LOOP1" minute interval
"ES15M, SLAVE- Slave Loop-1 Error Second in current 15- 1-900 (default 1)
LOOP1" minute interval
"SES15M, Master Loop-1 severely Error Second in 1-900 (default 1)
MASTER-LOOP1" current 15-minute interval
"SES15M, SLAVE- Slave Loop-1 Severely Error Second in 1-900 (default 1)
LOOP1" current 15-minute interval
"ES24H, Master Loop-1 Error Second in current 24 1-65535 (default 1)
MASTER-LOOP1" hours
"ES24H, SLAVE- Slave Loop-1 Error Second in current 24 1-65535 (default 1)
LOOP1" hours
"SES24H, Master Loop-1 Severely Error Second in 1-65535 (default 1)
MASTER-LOOP1" current 24 hours
"SES24H, SLAVE- Slave Loop-1 Severely Error Second in 1-65535 (default 1)
LOOP1" current 24 hours

TABLE 10: HDSL ALARM TYPE TABLE

Alarm Type Alarm Description Threshold

"slot-m U#n UNSYNC, U-interface no
UNSYNC"
(slot number = m; port number = n, n=1-10)
"slot-m U#n UNSYNC, U-interface no
UNSYNC"
(slot number = m; port number = n, n=1-6)

TABLE 11: U-PORT ALARM TYPE TABLE

Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 17/38

Alarm Type Alarm Description Threshold

V.35 "slot-m DTE#n RTS Loss, V.35-interface no
UNSYNC"
(slot number = m; port number = n, n=1-6)
X.50 "slot-m X50#n RTS Loss,RS232-interface no
UNSYNC"
(slot number = m; port number = n, n=1-5)

TABLE 12: DTE-PORT ALARM TYPE TABLE

Alarm Type
Unit Alarm Type Alarm Description
Number
Alarm cut off 0
Slot no work 1
Slot start 2
Clock loss 3
Primary start 4
Redundant loss 5
Controller
Backup switch 6
Power failure 7
Redundant checksum
8
error
Fan failure 9
TSI map switch 10
RAI Remote Alarm Indication 21
AIS Alarm Indication Signal 22
LOS Loss of Signal 23
LOF Loss of Frame 24
E1 card
BPV Bipolar Violation 25
ES Error Second 26
UAS Unavailable Second 27
CSS Control Slip Second 28
YEL Yellow Alarm 21
AIS Alarm Indication Signal 22
LOS Loss of Signal 23
LOF Loss of Frame 24
T1 card
BPV Bipolar Violation 25
ES Error Second 26
UAS Unavailable Second 27
CSS Control Slip Second 28

TABLE 13: ALARM TYPE NUMBERS

DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 18/38 DXC 5000

Alarm Type
Unit Alarm Type Alarm Description
Number
DTE cards
(V.35/ V.36/
X.21/V.11/ UNSYNC Un-synchronous 20
EIA530/
RS232)
DTU card
(6-port/ 10- UNSYNC Un-synchronous 20
port)
LOS,MASTER-LOOP Master Loop Loss of Signal 20
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP Slave Loop Loss of Signal 21
ES15M,MASTER- Master Loop Error Second in
22
LOOP current 15-minute interval
Slave Loop Error Second in
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP 23
current 15-minute interval
Master Loop severely Error
SES15M,MASTER-
Second in current 15-minute 24
LOOP
interval
SES15M,SLAVE- Slave Loop severely Error Second
25
MDSL card LOOP in current 15-minute interval
ES24H,MASTER- Master Loop Error Second in
26
LOOP current 24-hour
Slave Loop Error Second in
ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP 27
current 24-hour
SES24H,MASTER- Master Loop severely Error
28
LOOP Second in current 24-hour
SES24H,SLAVE- Slave Loop severely Error Second
29
LOOP in current 24-hour
MCLK LOSS Master Clock Loss 30
SEALING CURRENT Sealing Current 31
Remote Alarm Indication or Yellow
RAI or YEL 21
Alarm
AIS Alarm Indication Signal 22
LOS Loss of Signal 23
LOF Loss of Frame 24
BPV Bipolar Violation 25
ATM Frame ES Error Second 26
Relay E1/T1
UAS Unavailable Second 27
card
CSS Control Slip Second 28
ATM LOS Loss of Signal 29
ATM AIS Alarm Indication Signal 30
ATM RDI ATM Remote Defect Indication 31
ATM LOC ATM Loss of Continuity 32
FR LKD Frame Relay Link Down 33
Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 19/38

Alarm Type
Unit Alarm Type Alarm Description
Number
RAI Remote Alarm Indication 20
AIS Alarm Indication Signal 21
LOS Loss of Signal 22
LOF Loss of Frame 23
Quad E1 card
BPV Bipolar Violation 24
ES Error Second 25
UAS Unavailable Second 20
CSS Control Slip Second 21
YEL Yellow Alarm 20
AIS Alarm Indication Signal 21
LOS Loss of Signal 22
LOF Loss of Frame 23
Quad T1 card
BPV Bipolar Violation 24
ES Error Second 25
UAS Unavailable Second 20
CSS Control Slip Second 21
G.703 64Kbps
Co-directional LOS Loss of Signal 20
card
G.SHDSL LOS,MASTER-LOOP1 Master Loop-1 Loss of Signal 20
card
LOS,MASTER-LOOP2 Master Loop-2 Loss of Signal 21
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 Slave Loop-1 Loss of Signal 22
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP2 Slave Loop-2 Loss of Signal 23
Master E1 Loss of Signal/ Loss of
LOS/LOF,MASTER-E1 24
Frame
Slave E1 Loss of Signal/ Loss of
LOS/LOF,SLAVE-E1 25
Frame
ES15M,MASTER- Master Loop-1 Error Second in
26
LOOP1 current 15-minute interval
ES15M,MASTER- Master Loop-2 Error Second in
27
LOOP2 current 15-minute interval
ES15M,SLAVE- Slave Loop-1 Error Second in
28
LOOP1 current 15-minute interval
ES15M,SLAVE- Slave Loop-2 Error Second in
29
LOOP2 current 15-minute interval
Master E1 Error Second in current
ES15M,MASTER-E1 30
15-minute interval
Slave E1 Error Second in current
ES15M,SLAVE-E1 31
15-minute interval
Master Loop-1 severely Error
SES15M,MASTER-
Second in current 15-minute 32
LOOP1
interval
DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 20/38 DXC 5000

Alarm Type
Unit Alarm Type Alarm Description
Number
Master Loop-2 severely Error
SES15M,MASTER-
Second in current 15-minute 33
LOOP2
interval
Slave Loop-1 severely Error
SES15M,SLAVE-
Second in current 15-minute 34
LOOP1
interval
Slave Loop-2 severely Error
SES15M,SLAVE-
Second in current 15-minute 35
LOOP2
interval
Master E1 severely Error Second
SES15M,MASTER-E1 36
in current 15-minute interval
Slave E1 severely Error Second in
SES15M,SLAVE-E1 37
current 15-minute interval
ES24H,MASTER- Master Loop-1 Error Second in
38
LOOP1 current 24-hour
ES24H,MASTER- Master Loop-2 Error Second in
39
LOOP2 current 24-hour
ES24H,SLAVE- Slave Loop-1 Error Second in
40
LOOP1 current 24-hour
ES24H,SLAVE- Slave Loop-2 Error Second in
41
LOOP2 current 24-hour
Master E1 Error Second in current
ES24H,MASTER-E1 42
24-hour
Slave E1 Error Second in current
ES24H,SLAVE-E1 43
24-hour
SES24H,MASTER- Master Loop-1 severely Error
44
LOOP1 Second in current 24-hour
SES24H,MASTER- Master Loop-2 severely Error
45
LOOP2 Second in current 24-hour
SES24H,SLAVE- Slave Loop-1 severely Error
46
LOOP1 Second in current 24-hour
SES24H,SLAVE- Slave Loop-2 severely Error
47
LOOP2 Second in current 24-hour
Master E1 severely Error Second
SES24H,MASTER-E1 48
in current 24-hour
Slave E1 severely Error Second in
SES24H,SLAVE-E1 49
current 24-hour
SEALING CURRENT Sealing Current 50
MCLK LOSS Master Clock Loss 51
RTS,MASTER-DTE Master DTE Request To Send 52
RTS,SLAVE-DTE Slave DTE Request To Send 53
EXTCLK,MASTER- Master DTE External Clock
54
DTE
EXTCLK,SLAVE-DTE Slave DTE External Clock 55
DYING GASP ALARM Dying Gasp Alarm 56
LOOP ATTENU Loop Attenu Alarm
57
ALARM
Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 21/38

Alarm Type
Unit Alarm Type Alarm Description
Number
LOW NOISE MARGIN Signal Noise Margin of Line 58
LOF,LOCAL-OPTICAL Local Optical Loss of Frame 20
LOS,LOCAL-OPTICAL Local Optical Loss of Signal 21
Local Optical Remote Alarm
RAI,LOCAL-OPTICAL 22
Indication
LOF,REMOTE- Remote Optical Loss of Frame
23
OPTICAL
LOS,REMOTE- Remote Optical Loss of Signal
24
OPTICAL
LOF,LOCAL-E1- Local E1 port-1 Loss of Frame
25
PORT1
LOF,LOCAL-E1- Local E1 port-2 Loss of Frame
26
PORT2
FOM card
LOF,LOCAL-E1- Local E1 port-3 Loss of Frame
27
PORT3
LOF,LOCAL-E1- Local E1 port-4 Loss of Frame
28
PORT4
LOF,REMOTE-E1- Local E1 port-1 Loss of Frame
29
PORT1
LOF,REMOTE-E1- Local E1 port-2 Loss of Frame
30
PORT2
LOF,REMOTE-E1- Local E1 port-3 Loss of Frame
31
PORT3
LOF,REMOTE-E1- Local E1 port-4 Loss of Frame
32
PORT4

7.2 Reports
For DS1 line receiver, DXC 5000 has three sets of performance registers. These are line,
user, and far-end. The line performance register tracks the DS1 line receiver performance
status. The user performance register tracks the DS1 line receiver as well, but user may
clear at any time. The far-end performance register tracks the far-end DS1 receiver status.
The performance parameters are listed in Table 3-11. User performance register have an
additional parameter, CSS (controlled slip second).
Each performance parameter has ninety six sets of registers to record 24 hours history in 15
minute intervals.
DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 22/38 DXC 5000

Performance Description Definition Definition

Parameter 2 Frame/Multiframe 16 Frame/Multiframe
ES Error Second BPV≥1, OOF≥1, or CRC6 ERROR ≥ 1, OOF
CS≥1. ≥1, or CS ≥1.
BES Bursty Error 1 < BPV < 2048 1 < CRC6 < 860
Second
SES Severe Error BPV ≥ 2048, or OOF ≥ 1 CRC6 ≥ 860, or OOF ≥ 1
Second
DM Degraded BPV≥ 123 CRC6 ≥ 47
Minute
LOFC Loss Of OOF for 2.5 ± 0.5 sec OOF for 2.5 ± 0.5 sec
Frame Count
UAS Unavailable ≥ 10 consecutive SES ≥ 10 consecutive SES
Second
CSS Controlled frame slip ≥ 1 frame slip ≥ 1
Slip Second

TABLE 14: PERFORMANCE PARAMETER LIST

Table 3-11 lists the types of reports available, performance parameters provided by each
report, and the reset commands for each report.

Report Type Category Report

[Menu Command] ES UAS BES SES CSS LOFC
Front Panel Reports USER [Network] Y Y Y Y Y Y
1-Hour Terminal USER [Network] Y Y Y Y Y Y
Reports LINE [Network] N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C
Menu Option [1] FAR-END N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C
24-Hour Terminal USER [Network] Y Y Y Y Y Y
Reports LINE [Network] N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C
Menu Option [2] FAR-END N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C
CRC Error Count USER [Network] ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Terminal Reports LINE [Network] ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Menu Option [E] FAR-END ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

TABLE 15: PERFORMANCE REPORT OPTIONS

Y = Report available and can be cleared by admin terminal command “Y”.

N/C = No clear. Report available, but counts cannot be cleared by the user.
─ = Report not available.

For the U-Ports, the performance reports include the last 24-hour reports in 15-minute
intervals, and the last 8-day reports in 24-hour intervals. Performance reports are the UAS
(unavailable seconds) counts.
Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 23/38

7.3 HDSL Reports

From the master unit, by use of a terminal connected to the Loop-H, the current status of
both master and slave units can be obtained.
Also, by use of the terminal connected to the master, the performance report of both master
and slave unit can be obtained. Performance reports contain performance parameters
recorded in 15-minute intervals for the past 24 hours. Reports for each of the following
parameters are available.

Performance Parameter Description

ES Error Seconds
SES Severe Error Second
UAS Unavailable Second

TABLE 16: PERFORMANCE PARAMETER

DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 24/38 DXC 5000

7.4 LED Operation

The front of the DXC 5000 has LEDs for operation and error indications. The indication can
be in one or more colors. For each of the U-PORTs there are associated multicolored LEDs.
Table 3-14 lists each LED and its color and meaning it represents. Note that when powering
up and self test is in progress, the unit front panel LEDs are also used to indicate fault
conditions. See section 4.1.

LED Color Indication

Off Power off
POWER
Green Power on and operational
Primary CPU
Off Power off
Power
Green Power on and operational
Off CPU fails
Active
Flashing Green Normal
Off Normal or alarm disable
Alarm
Red Alarm
Redundant CPU
CPU

Off Power off

Power
Flashing Green Normal
Active Off Normal
Off Normal

Alarm Red Î Off Redundant CPU board is synchronizing to

primary CPU board. Î The
synchronization is done.
NOTE: Active led is used to identify primary CPU.
If the color of Active led is flashing green, then this CPU is primary.
Off Not existed
SYNC/TEST Green DS1 line frame in sync
Flash Green DS1 line is under testing
Off Normal
LOF
E1/T1

Red Loss of Frame (LOF) or Loss of Signal (

LOS)
Off Normal
BPV
DS1

Red E1 line has bipolar violation

Off Normal
Amber Receive remote alarm indication from DS1
RAI/AIS line
Flashing Amber
Receive alarm indication signal from DS1
line
Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 25/38

LED Color Indication

Off No signal or port not equipped
Normal, 4E1/ T1 interface in sync
Green In master mode (as protection function is
E1/T1 enable)
SYNC/ALM
4E1/ T1 interface loopback test in
Flashing Green
progress
4

Alarm, 4E1/ T1 interface is unsync

Red
In slave mode (as protection function is
Flashing Green slowly
enable)
Off No signal or port not equipped
Normal, 4E1/ T1 interface in sync
Green
E1/T1

In master mode (as protection function is

enable)
(4 LEDs) 4E1/ T1 interface loopback test in
Flashing Green
Mini 4

progress
Alarm, 4E1/ T1 interface is unsync
Red
In slave mode (as protection function is
Flashing Green slowly
enable)
Red LOS (Loss of Signal)
Green Line in Sync
FOM

OPTICAL
Flashing Green Loopback testing
Flashing Amber Receive RAI
NOTE: When FOM card is plugged into main unit, all BPV LEDs of CPU module are off
and RAI LEDs of CPU module are flashing in amber color as long as the FOM
card's LED is flasing in amber.

TABLE 17: FRONT-PANEL LED TABLE (DS1, DTU, HDSL, DTE, ATM/FR)
DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 26/38 DXC 5000

LED Color Indication

No signal or port not equipped
Off
Normal, U-interface in sync
DTU SYNC Green
U-interface loopback test in
(One per port) Flashing Green
progress
Red
Normal, U-interface is unsync
Green Normal, Loop 1 is in sync
Flashing Green Loop1 is synchronizing
HDSL

Loop 1
Red Loop 1 is not sync
Flashing Amber HDSL line-side test is in progress
Flashing Green Transmit/ Receive data present
DTE port-
Green Normal
V.35/ V.36/
Flashing Green regularly Loopback Test
EIA530/ X.21/V.11
RED Alarm
Flashing Green
DTE

y 0.1 sec on, 0.1 sec off y Transmit and Receive data present
y 0.4 sec on, 0.4 sec off y Transmit or Receive data present
DTE port-X.50
y 1.6 sec on, 1.6 sec off y Loopback Test
Green Normal
RED Alarm
E1/ T1 line frame in sync
Green E1/ T1 line is under testing
Flash Green Loss of Frame (LOF) or Loss of
ATM/ FR

Signal ( LOS)
Red
Receive yellow alarm from E1/ T1
Amber
line
Flashing Amber
Receive alarm indication signal
(AIS) from E1/ T1 line
Link.
ON A valid network connection on the
RJ-45 Ethernet port.
ROUTER

LINK/ACT Activity.

Flashing Data is being transmitted or

received through the RJ-45
Ethernet port.

COL ON Collision Detected.

Dry Contact I/O

Flashing Green Normal

ACT
Off Port is failed
Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 27/38

LED Color
Indication
GH1 GH2 GH3 GH4
Green SYNC
Flashing Green Test
Red UNSYNC or Power on

TABLE 18: FRONT-PANEL LED TABLE (2-CHANNEL AND 4-CHANNEL G.SHDSL)

z No Light { Light ☼ Flashing

TABLE 19: LED INDICATION - E&M CARD

„ A SIDE/ B SIDE (setup by side switch, refer to

Figure2-12 and 2-13)
LED
Indication
A B
{ z A side mode

z { B side mode E&M

☼ ☼ Alarm (Loss SYNC, AIS, RAI) SIDE
z z NO -48V or AB SW FAIL
A B
WIRE
„ 2 Wire/ 4 Wire
2 4
LED
Indication OHM
2 4
600 900
{ z 2 Wire mode
TYPE
z { 4 Wire mode
1 2
„ 600 ohm/ 900 ohm
3 4
LED
Indication 5 SET BY
600 900 DIP
{ z 600 ohm mode

z { 900 ohm mode

D0341ENa

z No Light { Light ☼ Flashing

„ TYPE
LED TYPE 1 TYPE 2 TYPE 3 TYPE 4 TYPE 5 TX only
1 { { 2 { z z { z z z z z z z z
3 { { 4 z z z z { z z { z z z z
5 { { z z z z z z z z { z z z
SET BY
DIP
DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 28/38 DXC 5000

TEST
Amber LED
L8

Green LED
L7

L6

L5

D0345ENa

Condition LED A Side Mode B Side Mode

Amber †
E lead ground. M lead ground.
Green „
Amber „
Normal M lead close. E lead close.
Green †
Amber „ E lead open. M lead open.
Green „ M lead open. E lead open.

Test Amber „ (All ports: L1 to L8) (All ports: L1 to L8)

(TEST button of Green †
M lead close. E lead close
the front panel)

„ No Light † Light
Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 29/38

„ LED Indication for Encoding/ Impedance:

A-law, µ-law/ 600 ohm, 900 ohm
LED

Encoding Imped.
Indication
A-law 600 Color
FXS
µ-law 900
{ { Green A-law mode, 600 ohm A-law 600
U-law 900
{ z Green A-law mode, 900 ohm METERING PLS
12K 16K
z { Green µ-law mode, 600 ohm
6 12
z z Green µ-law mode, 900 ohm 5 11
„ LED Indication for Metering Pulse 4 10
3 9
LED
Indication 2 8
12K 16K Color 1 7
z z Off Metering Pulse is OFF
L12
{ z Green 12 KHz metering is ON
Ì z Flashing Green 8Hz 12 KHz pulse is active L11

z { Green 16 KHz metering is ON L10

z Ì Flashing Green 8Hz 16 KHz pulse is active L9

„ LED Indication for Line 1 to Line 12 L8
LED
Indication L7
L1 to L12 Color
L6
z Off
Tip Lead Open
[Ground Start Mode]
L5
{ Green Normal
L4
☼ Flashing Green 1Hz Off Hook
L3
Ring Lead Ground
☼ Flashing Green 4Hz (Ground Start Mode) L2
[Ground Start Mode]
Ì Metering Pulse L1
Green flash 8 Hz
[Metering Pulse Mode]
Ì Flashing Green 32Hz Ringing
{ Red Alarm D0342ENa

☼ Red flash 1 Hz Alarm and Off Hook

z No Light { Light ☼ Show Flashing Ì Fast Flashing

TABLE 20: TABLE 3- 1 LED INDICATION – 12FXS CARD

DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 30/38 DXC 5000

„ LED Indication for Encoding/ Impedance:

A-law, µ-law/ 600 ohm, 900 ohm
LED

Encoding Imped.
Indication
A-law 600 Color

µ-law 900
{ { Green A-law mode, 600 ohm LEFT RIGHT
{ z Green A-law mode, 900 ohm
FXS FXS
z { Green µ-law mode, 600 ohm
A-law 600 A-law 600
z z Green µ-law mode, 900 ohm U-law 900 U-law 900
METERING PLS METERING PLS
„ LED Indication for LEFT /RIGHT Side Card Metering Pulse 12K 16K 12K 16K
6 12 6 12
LED 5 11 5 11
Indication
4 10 4 10
12K 16K Color
3 9 3 9
z z Off Metering Pulse is OFF 2 8 2 8
1 7 1 7
{ z Green 12 KHz metering is ON
Ì z Green flash 8 Hz 12 KHz pulse is active RING TIP

z { Green 16 KHz metering is ON

z Ì Green flash 8 Hz 16 KHz pulse is active 1

L
„ LED Indication for LEFT /RIGHT Side Card from Line 1 to E
F
Line 12 T
12
LED 1
Indication
R
L1 to L12 Color I
G
z Off
Tip Lead Open H
T
[Ground Start Mode]
12
{ Green Normal

☼ Green flash 1 Hz Off Hook

Ring Lead Ground

☼ Flashing Green 4Hz (Ground Start Mode)
[Ground Start Mode]
Ì Metering Pulse
Green flash 8 Hz D0519ENa
[Metering Pulse Mode]
Ì Green flash 32 Hz Ringing
{ Red Alarm

☼ Red flash 1 Hz Alarm and Off Hook

z No Light { Light ☼ Show Flashing Ì Fast Flashing

TABLE 21: LED INDICATION – 24FXS CARD

Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 31/38

„ LED Indication for Encoding/ Impedance:

A-law, µ-law/ 600 ohm, 900 ohm
LED
FXO
Encoding Imped.
Indication
A-law 600 Color A-law 600
U-law 900
µ-law 900
METERING PLS
{ { Green A-law mode, 600 ohm 12K 16K
{ z Green A-law mode, 900 ohm 6 12
5 11
z { Green µ-law mode, 600 ohm
4 10
z z Green µ-law mode, 900 ohm
3 9
„ LED Indication for Metering Pulse 2 8
LED 1 7
Indication
12K 16K Color

z z Off Metering Pulse is OFF L12

{ z Green 12 KHz metering is ON
L11
Ì z Green flash 8 Hz 12 KHz pulse is active
L10
z { Green 16 KHz metering is ON

z Ì Green flash 8 Hz 16 KHz pulse is active L9

„ LED Indication for Line 1 to Line 12 L8
LED
Indication
L1 to L12 Color L7

z Off
Tip Lead Open L6
[Ground Start Mode]
{ Green Normal L5

☼ Green flash 1 Hz Off Hook

L4
Ring Lead Ground,
☼ Green flash 4 Hz
[Ground Start Mode] L3
Ì Metering Pulse
Green flash 8 Hz
[Metering Pulse Mode] L2
Ì Green flash 32 Hz Ringing L1
{ Red Alarm

☼ Red flash 1 Hz Alarm and Off Hook

D0343ENa

z No Light { Light ☼ Show Flashing Ì Fast Flashing

TABLE 22: LED INDICATION - 12FXO CARD

DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 32/38 DXC 5000

„ LED Indication for Encoding/ Impedance:

A-law, µ-law/ 600 ohm, 900 ohm
LED

Encoding Imped.
Indication
A-law 600 Color

µ-law 900
{ { Green A-law mode, 600 ohm
{ z Green A-law mode, 900 ohm LEFT RIGHT

z { Green µ-law mode, 600 ohm FXO FXO

z z Green µ-law mode, 900 ohm A-law

U-law
600
900
A-law
U-law
600
900

„ LED Indication for LEFT /RIGHT Side Card Metering Pulse METERING PLS METERING PLS
12K 16K 12K 16K
LED 6 12 6 12
Indication 5 11 5 11
12K 16K Color 4 10 4 10
3 9 3 9
z z Off Metering Pulse is OFF 2 8 2 8
1 7 1 7
{ z Green 12 KHz metering is ON
Ì z Green flash 8 Hz 12 KHz pulse is active RING TIP

z { Green 16 KHz metering is ON

z Ì Green flash 8 Hz 16 KHz pulse is active 1

L
E
„ LED Indication for LEFT /RIGHT Side Card from Line 1 to F
T
Line 12
12
1
LED R
Indication I
L1 to L12 Color G
H
T
z Tip Lead Open or Line
Off Empty, 12
[Ground Start Mode]
{ Green Normal

☼ Green flash 1 Hz Off Hook

Ring Lead Ground,

☼ Green flash 4Hz
[Ground Start Mode]
D0520ENa
Ì Metering Pulse active
Green flash 8 Hz
[Metering Pulse Mode]
Ì Green flash 32 Hz Ringing
{ Red Alarm

☼ Red flash 1 Hz Alarm and Off Hook

z No Light { Light ☼ Show Flashing Ì Fast Flashing

TABLE 23: LED INDICATION - 24FXO CARD

Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 33/38

„ LED Indication for Encoding/ Impedance:

A-law, µ-law/ 600 ohm, 900 ohm MAG
LED
A-law 600
Encoding Imped. U-law 900
Indication MODULE
A-law 600 Color
L1,L2 L1,GND
µ-law 900 6 12
{ { Green A-law mode, 600 ohm 5 11
4 10
{ z Green A-law mode, 900 ohm
3 9
z { Green µ-law mode, 600 ohm 2 8
1 7
z z Green µ-law mode, 900 ohm

„ LED Indication for module L12

LED
Indication L11
L1,L2 L1,GND Color
L10
{ { Green Ring across L1 & L2, L1 & GND
L9
{ z Green Ring across L1 & L2
L8
z { Green Ring across L1 & GND

„ LED Indication for Line 1 to Line 12 L7

LED L6
Indication
L1 to L12 Color
L5
{ Green Normal
L4
{ Green PLAR On
L3
• Green Ringing
L2
☼ Green Crank Magneto Gen
L1
{ Red Alarm

z No Light { Light ☼ Slow

Flashing
•
Fast
Flashing D0344ENa

TABLE 24: LED INDICATION - 12MAG CARD

DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 34/38 DXC 5000

„ LED Indication for Encoding/ Impedance:

A-law, µ-law/ 600 ohm, 900 ohm
LED
Encoding Imped. LEFT RIGHT
Indication
A-law 600 Color
MAG MAG
µ-law 900
A-law 600 A-law 600
{ { Green A-law mode, 600 ohm U-law 900 U-law 900
MODULE MODULE
{ z Green A-law mode, 900 ohm L1,L2 L1,GND L1,L2 L1,GND
6 12 6 12
z { Green µ-law mode, 600 ohm 5
4
11
10
5
4
11
10
3 9 3 9
z z Green µ-law mode, 900 ohm 2 8 2 8
1 7 1 7
„ LED Indication for module
LED RING TIP
Indication
L1,L2 L1,GND Color
{ { Green Ring across L1 & L2, L1 & GND
1
L
{ z Green Ring across L1 & L2 E
F
T
z { Green Ring across L1 & GND 12
1
„ LED Indication for Line 1 to Line 12 R
I
G
LED H
Indication T
L1 to L12 Color 12
{ Green Normal
{ Green PLAR On
• Green Ringing

☼ Green Crank Magneto Gen

D0521ENa
{ Red Alarm

z No Light { Light ☼ Slow

Flashing
•
Fast
Flashing

TABLE 25: LED INDICATION – 24MAG CARD

Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 35/38

7.5 Telnet Connectivity

To manage the system from internet, DXC 5000 controller offers Telnet connectivity to allow
user access to the DXC 5000 controller from any workstation in the network. There are
three interfaces for Telnet function, one is Ethernet port, second is SLIP port, and the other
is HDLC port (in-band management). To use Ethernet interface, use Ethernet/RJ45 port at
back panel to connect with Ethernet network directly as shown in Figure 3-1. To use SLIP
interface, use CONSOLE/SLIP port of front panel, make sure the button is up, to connect
with a Terminal server and link to Ethernet indirectly as show in Figure 3-2. To use HDLC
port, set MAP to assign a time slot to SNMP and connect as Figure 3-3. Ethernet and SLIP
and HDLC cannot be used at the same time. Console and SLIP cannot be used at the same
time.
To use the Telnet function, make sure IP Address, and Interface parameters are matched.
Once the IP parameters are set, users can verify that the DXC 5000 is operating properly by
using the ping command to check for a response from DXC 5000:

• $ping 192.1.100.45

• 192.1.100.45 is active
The Telnet utility simulates VT-100 to connect with the DXC 5000 controller. The controller
main menu of terminal screen will be displayed after Telnet connection is established.
DXC 5000 controller can maintain several Telnet connections simultaneously.
The most popular Telnet utility in the public domain is provided by NCSA.

E1
DXC5000

Telnet
Station

Ethernet
D0346XXa

FIGURE 1: TELNET: ETHERNET INTERFACE

E1
DXC5000
SLIP
Terminal Telnet
E1
DXC5000 Server Station
SLIP

Ethernet
D0347ENa

FIGURE 2: TELNET: SLIP INTERFACE

DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 36/38 DXC 5000

E1
DXC5000
Telnet
Station DXC5000 Bridge

Ethernet
D0348ENb

FIGURE 3: HDLC

PORT Console SLIP Ethernet HDLC

Console - x 9 9
SLIP x - x x
Ethernet 9 x - x
HDLC 9 x x -
TABLE 26: OPERATION BY CONSOLE/ SLIP/ ETHERNET/ HDLC CONCURRENTLY
7.6 Embedded SNMP Agent
The embedded SNMP agent for DXC 5000 offers standard RFC 1213 MIB II and RFC 1406
DS1 MIB as well as AREVA's enterprise MIB. Network manager can use any SNMP
compatible network management system such as Sun Connect's Sun Net Manager and
Hewlett-Packard's HP Open View to monitor and control DXC 5000. This enables user to
integrate WAN equipment management with LAN SNMP network management systems.
The embedded SNMP agent also includes Telnet implementation to allow user to access
DXC 5000 terminal interface from any workstation in the network.
Before SNMP is enabled, make sure the IP address for DXC 5000 is configured correctly
and the communication parameters match the Terminal server port.
Once the SNMP agent is activated, user can verify whether the DXC 5000 is running
successfully by using ping command to check if DXC 5000 is responding or not. e.g.

• $ ping 192.1.100.45

• 192.1.100.45 is alive
Please refer to each respective SNMP manager operation instruction to incorporate the
AREVA enterprise MIB to the system.
Telnet capability comes with embedded SNMP agent. Once SNMP agent is running, user
can use telnet program that is simulated on a VT-100 to access DXC 5000 command
screen. The most popular Telnet utility in the public domain is provided by NCSA. It can
maintains several telnet connections simultaneously. It is recommended to set the COMM
port running at the highest speed to reduce the jittery output on terminal. The DXC 5000 can
run reliably at 38.4 Kbps.

E1
DXC 5000

Telnet E1 Router
Station DXC 5000

Ethernet
D0358ENa

FIGURE 4: HDLC USING DXC5000 ROUTER

Operation DXC5K/EN FT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 37/38

8. IN-BAND MANAGEMENT SETUP

In addition to the console port and the Ethernet port, DXC 5000 can also allow remote
management through a 64 Kbps time slot from the network line. To achieve remote
management using this “in-band” technique, two steps are necessary.
First, the Ethernet connection of the remote management terminal must be inserted to a
designated time slot in the network. This time slot can be a DS0 channel in a E1 or T1 line,
or a DS0 channel in any of the broadband facilities, such as E3, DS3, STM1, or OC3.

LAN DXC5000 DXC5000

64 Kbps
E1/ T1 E1/ T1 E1/ T1
Router E1/ T1 NETWORK E1/ T1

In-Band Insertion In-Band Extraction

Management
Terminal D0350ENa

Next, the equipment to be management, namely this DXC 5000 must extract this 64 Kbps
time slot to the management port. This is accomplished through the TSI screen, illustrated
below.
For the DXC 5000, the management port is named HD. The incoming in-band management
time slot, which is 01 (time slot number), is assigned to the management channel, as shown.
DXC 500 0 = == Sys tem Set up (MAP ) = == 1 1:3 0:53 12 /12 /200 1
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B: ROLL OP TIO NS
MAP NO: MA P_1
So urc e S lot E1 NO N-C AS Des t. S lot HDL C
Sour ce Slo t PO /TS D SL/P O T S P O/TS D SL/ PO T S PO/ TS D SL /PO TS PO/ TS D SL /PO TS
Slot : C == === == ==== === = = ==== == === ==== = === == = === === === === == ==== === ===
Port : 1 d HD 1 17 d 1 d C 1
T.S. : 01 2 d 18 d
3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d
T.S. # : 01 5 d 21 d
Clea r : No 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 23 d
8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d
Dest Sl ot 10 d 26 d
Slot : HD 11 d 27 d
Port : 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 01 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d
Upda te? Ye s 15 d 31 d
Conf irm ?Ye s 16 d

<< P res s E SC t o r etu rn t o C ont roll er Set up m enu , t hen Pre ss D to ac tiv e >>
DXC5K/EN FT/A22 Operation

Page 38/38 DXC 5000

The error messages defined here should be corresponded to the error codes.

Error Code Error Description

ERROR01 A loopback is in effect
ERROR02 LCD operation is locked
ERROR03 Channel is already in use
ERROR04 can't be in TTM if MCLK=DTE
ERROR05 DTEn is in TTM or speed is 0
ERROR06 Line unsync
ERROR07 No channel is assigned
ERROR08 Please select speed first
ERROR09 A test is in progress
ERROR10 DTE loopback is in progress
ERROR11 Please reduce speed first
ERROR12 Illegal Date/Time format
ERROR13 the DTE1 channel should be B2
ERROR14 the DTE1 channel should be B1+B2
ERROR15 the DTE1 channel should be B1
ERROR16 the DTE1 channel should be B1/B2
ERROR17 Remote doesn't have this function
ERROR18 Remote unit rejected this request
ERROR19 Remote unit didn’t respond
ERROR20 Remote DTE1 TTM should be off
ERROR21 the DTE1 channel should be IDLE
ERROR22 the DTE1 is not installed
ERROR23 undefined response
ERROR24 the unit didn't response
ERROR25 speed can't be zero if MCLK=DTEn
ERROR26 the unit is not installed
ERROR27 ESF or ESF&T1.403 mode is required
ERROR28 ESF&T1.403 mode is required
ERROR29 E1 CRC and FDL must set to be on
ERROR30 LLB or LOCAL LOOPBACK activated
ERROR31 EOC is not ready
ERROR32 Current slot is not HDSL card
ERROR33 Current slot is not DTE card
ERROR34 Not enough channels
ERROR35 Slot need to download firmware
ERROR36 Time slot conflict
ERROR37 Reserved for future use
ERROR38 Reserved for future use
ERROR39 Reserved for future use
ERROR40 Reserved for future use
ERROR41 Reserved for future use

TABLE 27: FIGURE 5: ERROR MESSAGE TABLE

Maintenance DXC5K/EN MT/A22

DXC 5000

MAINTENANCE
Maintenance DXC5K/EN MT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 1/12

CONTENTS

1. SELF-TEST 5

2. DIAGNOSTICS 6

3. NEAR END LOOPBACK 7

3.1 Local Loopback 7
3.2 Line Loopback 7
3.3 Payload Loopback 7
3.4 U-PORT Loopbacks 8
3.5 HDSL-PORT Loopbacks 8

4. FAR END LOOPBACK 9

5. TEST PATTERN 10

6. VERIFYING DXC 5000 OPERATIONS 11

6.1 Quick Test 11
6.1.1 LCD/Display 11
6.1.2 Independent Test 11
6.2 Substitution 11
6.3 Using Loopback Plugs 11
6.4 Using Bert Test Set 12
DXC5K/EN M/A22 Maintenance

Page 2/12 DXC 5000

BLANK PAGE
Maintenance DXC5K/EN MT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 3/12

MODIFICATIONS PAGE
Version DATE COMMENTS
A 23/09/2004 ORIGINAL ISSUE
B 01/03/2005 ADD Mini Quad E1, 64k G.703 and G.SHDSL boards
A22 15/05/2007 Update
DXC5K/EN M/A22 Maintenance

Page 4/12 DXC 5000

BLANK PAGE
Maintenance DXC5K/EN MT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 5/12

1. SELF-TEST
When DXC 5000 is powered up, a complete self-test routine is run to check all I/O ports,
read/write memory, and data paths to validate system integrity.
DXC5K/EN M/A22 Maintenance

Page 6/12 DXC 5000

2. DIAGNOSTICS
A 15-bit register PRBS (Pseudo-Random Bit Sequence) patterns, is used in E1. A 20-bit
register QRSS (Quasi-Random Signal Sequence) pattern is used in T1, while a 11-bit PRBS
patterns is used in DXC 5000. The PRBS/QRSS test pattern is used to test local DXC 5000
system integrity by local loopback test. It can also be used to measure the DS1 line quality
and the U-interface line quality. The diagnostics scenario is as follows:
1. First, send a remote loopback command to cause the remote facility to loopback DS0
channels in the case of E1 line, or B channels in the case of U line.
2. Then, activate the local PRBS/QRSS diagnostics operation, use Test command to
enable PRBS and choose to test DS0 channels in a bundle of U-PORTs, all 31
channels, or only idle channels, or, in the case of U-interface, channels in use (B1, B2,
or B1+B2), or full (always B1+B2).
3. The FULL PRBS/QRSS diagnostic uses a framed pattern. This is useful for testing full
E1/T1 loopbacks at the far-end.
When the PRBS pattern sync is found, a bit error counter tracks total bit errors. It is advised
to send PRBS for more than 15 minutes interval to evaluate the quality of loop condition and
facility reliability.
User may utilize '>' key to inject single error, '<' key to reset error counter, and 'ESC' key to
terminate PRBS test. User may also read performance report to understand type of error
occurs.
Maintenance DXC5K/EN MT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 7/12

3. NEAR END LOOPBACK

The near end loopbacks such as local loopback, line loopback, payload loopback, U-PORT
loopback, and HDSL loopback, are activated by the DXC 5000. The loopbacks are at the
near end facility. The following paragraph describes each loopback in detail.
NOTE: Deactivate the near-end loopbacks from the terminal, depending on
where it was activated.
3.1 Local Loopback
Local loopback is illustrated in Figure 4-1. The outgoing DS1 signal is looped back through
the DS1 PCM transceiver. All 31 DS0 channels are looped back to the receiver path. This
loopback test is activated by the Test command. This loopback test can be used with the
PRBS diagnostic test pattern to validate the local DXC 5000's integrity. An AIS (Alarm
Indication Signal) is sent to the network during the local loopback test. The local loopback
test can be activated from terminal.

11 10 U-PORT 5 4

D Line
S Driver
1

F
15 14 13 12 HDSL-PORT 7 6
Multiplexe r 3 r 2 1 DS1 Line port 16
a
m
e Line
r
Driver

DTE-PORT 9 8

1 Local Loopback
2 Line Loopback (LLB)
3 Payload Loopback (PLB)
4 U-PORT TO-E1 Loopback and Remote U to E Loopback
5 U-PORT TO-U Loopback and Remote U to U Payload Loopback
6 HDSL-PORT TO-E1 Loopback and Remote HDSL to E Loopback
7 HDSL-PORT TO-LINE Loopback and Remote HDSL to LINE Payload Loopback
8 DTE-PORT TO-DS1 Loopback
9 DTE-PORT TO-DTE Loopback
10 Remote Payload Loopback
11 Remote DTE Loopback
12 HDSL TO LINE Loopback
13 HDSL TO DTE Loopback
14 DTE TO LINE Loopback
15 DTE TO DTE Loopback
16 Remote LINE Loopback
D0351ENb

FIGURE 1: LOOPBACK BLOCK DIAGRAM

3.2 Line Loopback
Line loopback is illustrated in Figure 4-1. The incoming DS1 line signal is loopback to the
outgoing DS1 signal before the DS1 transceiver framer. This loopback is used to isolate the
local equipment from a troubled DS1 transmission line. Line loopback test can be activated
from the terminal.
3.3 Payload Loopback
Payload loopback is illustrated in Figure 4-1. The incoming signal is loopback to the outgoing
DS1 signal after the DS1 transceiver framer. This loopback is used to isolate the U-PORTs
from the troubled DS1 transmission line. Payload loopback test can be activated from the
terminal.
DXC5K/EN M/A22 Maintenance

Page 8/12 DXC 5000

3.4 U-PORT Loopbacks

U-PORT loopbacks are illustrated in Figure 4-1. There are two types of local loopbacks, TO-
U (payload) and TO-DS1 (local). TO-U is that the U-interface incoming signal is loopback to
the U-interface outgoing signal. This is used to isolate the DS1 equipment from a troubled U-
interface line. TO-DS1 is that U-interface outgoing signal is loopback to the U-interface
incoming signal. This loopback is used to validate the system integrity of U-interface facility.
U-PORT loopback test can be activated from the terminal. While in TO-U loopback, all ones
are send to DS1 network line outgoing direction on U-PORT associated DS0 channels.
NOTE: U-PORT loopbacks work only when one or more DS0 channels are
mapped to the U-PORT.
3.5 HDSL-PORT Loopbacks
Trouble isolation of the entire HDSL system is facilitated by the use of loopbacks. By
determining where one loopback is successful and another is not, the repair personnel can
isolate the fault to a particular line or equipment. Loopbacks can be towards the network, or
towards the customer.
Maintenance DXC5K/EN MT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 9/12

4. FAR END LOOPBACK

Far-end loopbacks (remote line loopback, remote payload loopback, remote channel
loopback, U-PORT loopback, and HDSL loopback) can be activated by the local DXC 5000
to cause a remote loopback commands to the far-end facility. Inband code words are
supported by FDL (facility data link) to initiate the loopback in the case of the DS1 line, and
either M channel in the case of the U-interface line. When using FDL messages, FDL must
be turned ON. All remote loopback can be activated from the terminal.
If the remote facility responds to a remote loopback activate command, a LOOPED message
appears in the lower left corner of the display. If the remote facility responds to a remote
loopback deactivate command, a NO LOOP message appears. If the remote
activation/deactivation fails, an error message appears.
Either proprietary remote loopback commands can be used, or the industry standard V.54
loopback codes can be used.
It is best to use remote loopbacks in conjunction with PRBS diagnostics testing to measure
the DS1 network line or U line integrity. The procedure is as follows:
1. Send a remote loopback command to cause the remote facility to perform a loopback.
2. Activate the PRBS or QRSS diagnostics test.
DXC5K/EN M/A22 Maintenance

Page 10/12 DXC 5000

5. TEST PATTERN
To test the DS1 line, four test patterns are available to determine faults such as deficient
clock recovery, fault ALBO level recovery, inadequate jitter margin, presence of bridge taps,
and mis-optioned network interface. These four patterns are framed pattern with proper DS1
frame pattern as described in the following paragraph.
Maintenance DXC5K/EN MT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 11/12

6. VERIFYING DXC 5000 OPERATIONS

The purpose of this section is not to help the user determine where a possible fault in the
network may lie. For this, the user needs to know the exact geometry of the network. Then
standard network trouble shooting procedures should be followed, which involve
sectionalizing the network and performing loopback tests on pieces of the network.
The purpose here is to help the user determine whether the DXC 5000 equipment is at fault
after tests have pointed a suspicious finger at this equipment. The procedures outlined here
depends on test equipment and other equipment the user may have on hand.
The organization of these procedures start from the simple to the complex. The procedure
ends when a definitive conclusion is made that the DXC 5000 equipment is at fault. To verify
that the DXC 5000 equipment is not at fault, specialized equipment such as a BERT (bit
error rate test) set is needed.
6.1 Quick Test
6.1.1 LCD/Display
LCD currently not available.
6.1.2 Independent Test
Remove all line and U-interface connections to DXC 5000. Remove power. After a few
seconds, re-apply power. Observe the power-AMp self-test sequence. If this fails, then
DXC 5000 has failed. See if the LEDs show any abnormal displays. If yes, use the LED
indications to guide the user to test other parts of the network, such as the E1 line, or U-
interface plug-in.
Especially during initial installation, excessive errors may be due to (a) incorrect
configuration of either DXC 5000 or of the equipment at the other end of the line, or (b) due
to faulty line installation, which results in excessive noise, cross talk, or impedance
mismatch. Especially in electrically noisy environments, such as central offices, use of
shielded cables are mandatory.
6.2 Substitution
If a spare DXC 5000 plug-in is available, then replace the working one with the spare. The
user must carefully configure the spare exactly as the working one. If the substitution clears
the problem, then the original working one is suspect. Note that this is not definitive as other
reasons may cause the same symptom. A good practice is to reconfigure the original one
and swap once more.
If both units behave the same, then the problem is probably elsewhere.
6.3 Using Loopback Plugs
Without a spare, loopback plugs are handy for diagnosis. Note that internal loopback
facilities of the DXC 5000 does not include the interface circuitry. Thus a set of plugs, one for
each of the interfaces, line and DTE, are needed for complete tests. These plugs are wired
such that signals from the DXC 5000 are loopback by hard wire back to the receive pin of the
same plug.
Replace the line connector with a loopback plug. Observe if the line is in sync. If not then
DXC 5000 has failed. Then perform a PRBS test towards the line. If this fails, then
DXC 5000 has failed.
For the U-PORTs, a loopback plug must be used in concert with a far end DXC 5000 if such
a terminal is available, then a PRBS test will determine if that U-PORT is at fault.
Note that if a far end terminal is available, the first test should be a local line loopback to see
if the line is good.
If tests with loopback plugs all pass, then the problem is probably elsewhere.
DXC5K/EN M/A22 Maintenance

Page 12/12 DXC 5000

6.4 Using Bert Test Set

If a BERT (bit error rate test) set and another DXC 5000 are available, such as the Fireberd
6000, then a comprehensive suite of test are available to examine the health of the
DXC 5000. If another DXC 5000 is not available, use of the loopback plugs would provide
some of the tests otherwise possible.
With a BERT, each of the ports of the DXC 5000 can be tested individually. The user must
configure the BERT in the exact way the DXC 5000 is configured. This is easily done by
comparing each of the options one by one. After checking that the configuration matches, if
any one of the ports fails, then DXC 5000 has failed.
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000

TERMINAL OPERATION
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 1/202

CONTENTS

1. MAIN MENU 13
1.1 System Configuration 13
1.1.1 System 14
1.1.2 Clock Source 14
1.1.3 TSI Map 15
1.1.4 Current TSI Map 16
1.1.5 Power/Fan Status 16
1.1.6 Link backup function 17
1.1.7 QDS1 1:1 protection 17
1.2 Clock Source Configuration 18
1.3 Alarm Queue Summary 18
1.4 Information Summary 18
1.5 System Setup 19
1.5.1 System 19
1.5.2 SNMP 20
1.5.3 Password 24
1.5.4 TSI Map Setup 24
1.5.5 Select a New TSI Map 25
1.5.6 Copy a TSI Map to another 25
1.5.7 Clear a TSI Map 26
1.5.8 Command Line 26
1.5.9 Init New Card 27
1.5.10 Clear Empty Slot 28
1.5.11 Link Backup Function 28
1.5.12 QSD1 1:1 Protection 29
1.5.13 Multicast Mapping Procedure 29
1.6 System Alarm Setup 2
1.7 Firmware Transfer 3
1.7.1 Download Mainboard Firmware 3
1.7.2 Upload Mainboard Firmware 4
1.7.3 Download Configuration 4
1.7.4 Upload Configuration 4
1.7.5 Copy Firmware to Redundant 5
1.7.6 Download Firmware Procedure 5
1.8 Store/ Retrieve Configuration 10
1.9 Clock Source Setup 12
1.10 Bit Error Rate Test 17
1.11 Alarm Cut Off 18
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 2/202 DXC 5000

1.12 Clear Alarm Queue 18

1.13 Return to Default 18
1.14 Controller Reset 18

2. DS1 (FE1) SUB-MENU 19

2.1 Unit 1-Hour Performance Report 19
2.2 Unit 24-Hour Performance Report 20
2.3 Unit Line Availability 20
2.4 Unit Configuration 21
2.5 Unit Status 21
2.6 Unit Alarm History 22
2.7 Unit Alarm Queue 22
2.8 Unit Loopback Setup 23
2.9 Unit System Setup 23
2.10 Unit Clear Performance Data 24
2.11 Unit Alarm Setup 24
2.12 Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History 25
2.13 Unit Load Default Configuration 25
2.14 Unit Reset 26

3. QUAD E1/ T1 SUB-MENU 27

3.1 Unit 1-Hour Performance Report 28
3.2 Unit 24-Hour Performance Report 29
3.3 Unit Line Availability 29
3.4 Unit Configuration 30
3.5 Unit Status 30
3.6 Unit Alarm History 31
3.7 Unit Alarm Queue 31
3.8 Unit Loopback Setup 32
3.9 Unit System Setup 32
3.10 Unit Clear Performance Data 35
3.11 Unit Alarm Setup 36
3.12 Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History 36
3.13 Unit Upgrade Firmware 37
3.14 Unit Load Default Configuration 37
3.15 Unit Reset 38

4. DS1 (FT1) SUB-MENU 39

4.1 Unit 1-Hour Performance Report 39
4.2 Unit 24-Hour Performance Report 40
4.3 Unit Line Availability 40
4.4 Unit Configuration 41
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 3/202

4.5 Unit Status 41

4.6 Unit Alarm History 42
4.7 Unit Alarm Queue 42
4.8 Unit Loopback Setup 43
4.9 Unit System Setup 43
4.10 Unit Clear Performance Data 44
4.11 Unit Alarm Setup 44
4.12 Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History 44
4.13 Unit Load Default Configuration 44
4.14 Unit Reset 44

5. U-PORT SUB-MENU (10-PORT) 45

5.1 System Configuration 45
5.2 Remote Information 46
5.3 Alarm History 47
5.4 Performance Report 47
5.5 System Setup 48
5.5.1 U Remote Router Setup - DS0 MAP 49
5.5.2 U Remote Router Setup - LAN1,WAN1,WAN2 50
5.5.3 U Remote Router Setup - Static Route 51
5.5.4 U Remote Router Setup - Router Reset 52
5.5.5 U Remote Router Setup - Router Load Default 52
5.6 Loopback Test 53
5.7 Alarm Setup 53
5.8 Clear 10 Ports Performance Data 53
5.9 Clear U Port CRC Error 53
5.10 Upgrade Firmware 54
5.11 Load and Reset Current U Port 54
5.12 Reset Current U Port 54

6. U-PORT SUB-MENU (6-PORT) 55

6.1 System Configuration 55
6.2 Remote Information 56
6.3 Alarm History 56
6.4 Performance Report 57
6.5 System and Remote DTE Setup 57
6.6 Loopback and Test 58
6.7 Alarm Setup 58

7. HDSL SUB-MENU 59
7.1 Unit Configuration 60
7.2 Unit Status 60
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 4/202 DXC 5000

7.3 Alarm History 61

7.4 Performance Report 61
7.5 System Setup 62
7.6 Loopback and Test 62
7.7 Alarm Setup 63
7.8 Line Rate 63
7.9 Upgrade Firmware 64

8. DTE (V.35) SUB-MENU 65

8.1 DTE Configuration 65
8.2 DTE Status 67
8.3 Alarm History 67
8.4 System Setup 68
8.5 Loopback Test 68
8.6 Alarm Setup 69
8.7 Upgrade Fireware 69
8.8 Clear Current Port Performance Data 69
8.9 Return to Default 70
8.10 Reset Current DTE Board 70

9. DTE (X.50) SUB-MENU 71

9.1 DTE Configuration 71
9.2 DTE Status 72
9.3 Alarm History 72
9.4 System Setup 73
9.5 Loopback Test 73
9.6 Alarm Setup 74
9.7 Upgrade Firmware 74
9.8 Clear Current Port Performance Data 74
9.9 Return to Default 75
9.10 Reset Current DTE Board 75

10. G.703-64K (CO-DIRECTIONAL) SUB-MENU 76

10.1 G703 Status 76
10.2 Alarm History 77
10.3 Loopback Test 77
10.4 Alarm Setup 78
10.5 Clear Alarm History 79

11. ATM FRAME RELAY SUB-MENU 80

11.1 1-Hour Performance Report 80
11.1.1 ATM Frame Relay - T1 80
11.1.2 ATM Frame Relay - E1 82
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 5/202

11.2 24-Hour Performance Report 84

11.2.1 ATM Frame Relay – T1 84
11.2.2 ATM Frame Relay – E1 85
11.3 Port Statistics 86
11.3.1 T1/E1 Line Availability 86
11.3.2 Frame Relay Statistics 86
11.3.3 ATM Statistics 87
11.4 Unit Configuration 88
11.4.1 System Setup – ATM/ FR T1 88
11.4.2 System Setup – ATM/ FR E1 88
11.5 Alarm History 89
11.5.1 Alarm History - FR to ATM 89
11.5.2 Alarm History - FR to FR 89
11.6 Port Status 90
11.6.1 T1/ E1 Status 90
11.6.2 Frame Relay Status 90
11.6.3 ATM Status 91
11.7 Alarm Queue 92
11.8 Loopback Test 93
11.8.1 ATM Frame Relay – T1 93
11.8.2 ATM Frame Relay – E1 93
11.9 Alarm Setup 94
11.9.1 Alarm Setup - FR to ATM 94
11.9.2 Alarm Setup - FR to FR 94
11.10 DXC 5000 TSI MAP Setup 95
11.10.1 Map slot D (ATM/FR) to slot B (E1 card) 95
11.10.2 Map slot D (ATM/FR) to slot 6 (V.35 card) 95
11.10.3 Map slot D (ATM/FR) to slot 1 (V.35 card) 96
11.10.4 Map slot D (ATM/FR) to HDLC (Inband Channel) 96
11.11 System Setup 97
11.11.1 ATM/ FR Card Configuration 97
11.11.2 System Specific to ATM Protocol 97
11.11.3 Setup Specific to FR-FR Protocol 102
11.12 Clear Alarm Queue and History 105
11.13 Clear Performance Data 105
11.14 Upgrade Firmware 106
11.15 Unit Load Default Configuration 106
11.16 Unit Reset 106

12. E&M SUB-MENU 107

12.1 System Configuration 107
12.2 E&M Status 109
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 6/202 DXC 5000

12.3 System Setup 109

12.4 Self Test 111
12.5 Unit Load Default Config 111

13. FXS SUB-MENU 112

13.1 System Configuration 112
13.2 FXS Status 115
13.3 System Setup 115
13.4 Diagnostic Test 118
13.5 Unit Load Default Configuration 119
13.6 Unit Reset 119

14. FXO SUB-MENU 120

14.1 System Configuration 120
14.2 FXO Status 123
14.3 System Setup 124
14.4 Diagnostics Test 126
14.5 Unit Load Default Configuration 127
14.6 Unit Reset 127

15. MAGNETO SUB-MENU 128

15.1 System Configuration 128
15.2 Magneto Status 129
15.3 System Setup 129
15.4 Diagnostic Test 130
15.5 Unit Load Default Configuration 130
15.6 Unit Reset 131

16. ROUTER SUB-MENU 132

16.1 System Display (LAN1 – WAN16) 132
16.2 System Display (WAN17 – WAN32) 133
16.3 Route Display 133
16.4 DS0 Map Display 134
16.5 System Setup (LAN1 – WAN16) 134
16.6 System Setup (WAN17 – WAN32) 135
16.7 Route Setup 135
16.8 DS0 Map Setup 136
16.9 Firmware Upgrade 136
16.10 Unit Load Default Configuration 137
16.11 Unit Reset 137

17. MINI QUAD E1 SUB-MENU 138

17.1 Unit 1-Hour Performance Report 139
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 7/202

17.2 Unit 24-Hour Performance Report 140

17.3 Unit Line Availability 141
17.4 Unit Configuration 141
17.5 Unit Status 142
17.6 Unit Alarm History 142
17.7 Unit Alarm Queue 143
17.8 Unit Loopback Setup 143
17.9 Unit System Setup 144
17.10 Unit Clear Performance Data 146
17.11 Unit Alarm Setup 146
17.12 Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History 147
17.13 Unit Upgrade Firmware 147
17.14 Unit Load Default Configuration 148
17.15 Unit Reset 148

18. G.SHDSL (4 PORTS, 1 PAIR) SUB-MENU 149

18.1 Unit Configuration 149
18.1.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL-DTE 149
18.1.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL-T1 150
18.1.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL-E1 150
18.1.4 Far-end: G.SHDSL-BRIDGE 150
18.1.5 Far-end: G.SHDSL-ROUTER 151
18.2 Unit Status 151
18.2.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE 151
18.2.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1 152
18.2.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1 152
18.2.4 Far-end: G.SHDSL- BRIDGE 153
18.2.5 Far-end: G.SHDSL- ROUTER 153
18.2.6 Line Power (4 ports) 154
18.3 Unit Performance Report 155
18.3.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE, Bridge, Router 155
18.3.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1 155
18.3.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1 155
18.4 Unit Alarm Queue 155
18.5 Unit Alarm History 156
18.5.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE, Bridge, Router 156
18.5.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1 156
18.5.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1 156
18.6 HDSL Information 157
18.7 Unit System Setup 157
18.7.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL-DTE 158
18.7.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL-T1 158
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 8/202 DXC 5000

18.7.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL-E1 159

18.7.4 Far-end: G.SHDSL-BRIDGE 159
18.7.5 Far-end: G.SHDSL-ROUTER 160
18.7.6 Advance System Setup 160
18.8 Unit Loopback and Test 161
18.8.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE 161
18.8.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1 161
18.8.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1 161
18.8.4 Far-end: G.SHDSL- BRIDGE 161
18.8.5 Far-end: G.SHDSL- ROUTER 161
18.9 Reomte-Bert 162
18.10 Unit Alarm Setup 163
18.10.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE, Bridge, Router 163
18.10.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1 163
18.10.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1 163
18.11 Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History 164
18.12 Unit Clear Performance Data 164
18.13 Unit Line Rate 165
18.14 Unit Upgrade Firmware 165
18.15 Unit Load Default Configuration 166
18.16 Unit Reset 166
18.17 Far End Reset 167
18.18 Bank Switch 167

19. G.SHDSL (2 PORTS, 2 PAIRS) SUB-MENU 168

19.1 Unit Configuration 168
19.1.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL-DTE 168
19.1.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL-T1 169
19.1.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL-E1 169
19.1.4 Far-end: G.SHDSL-BRIDGE 169
19.1.5 Far-end: G.SHDSL-ROUTER 170
19.2 Unit Status 170
19.2.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE 170
19.2.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1 171
19.2.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1 171
19.2.4 Far-end: G.SHDSL- BRIDGE 171
19.2.5 Far-end: G.SHDSL- ROUTER 172
19.2.6 Line Power (2 ports) 172
19.3 Unit Performance Report 173
19.3.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE, Bridge, Router 173
19.3.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1 173
19.3.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1 173
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 9/202

19.4 Unit Alarm Queue 173

19.5 Unit Alarm History 174
19.5.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE, Bridge, Router 174
19.5.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1 174
19.5.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1 175
19.6 HDSL Information 175
19.7 Unit System Setup 176
19.7.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL-DTE 176
19.7.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL-T1 176
19.7.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL-E1 177
19.7.4 Far-end: G.SHDSL-BRIDGE 177
19.7.5 Far-end: G.SHDSL-ROUTER 177
19.7.6 Advance System Setup 178
19.8 Unit Loopback and Test 179
19.8.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE 179
19.8.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1 179
19.8.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1 179
19.8.4 Far-end: G.SHDSL- BRIDGE 180
19.8.5 Far-end: G.SHDSL- ROUTER 180
19.9 Unit Alarm Setup 181
19.9.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE, Bridge, Router 181
19.9.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1 181
19.9.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1 182
19.10 Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History 182
19.11 Unit Clear Performance Data 183
19.12 Unit Line Rate 183
19.13 Unit Upgrade Firmware 184
19.14 Unit Load Default Configuration 184
19.15 Unit Reset 185
19.16 Far End Reset 185

20. DRY CONTACT SUB-MENU 186

20.1 Inputs & Outputs Configuration 186
20.2 Inputs Alarm Message 188
20.3 Inputs & Outputs Status 188
20.4 Inputs & Outputs Setup 189
20.5 Inputs Alarm Message Setup 190
20.6 Unit Load Default Configuration 191

21. FOM (FIBER OPTICAL MODULE) SUB-MENU 192

21.1 Unit Configuration 192
21.2 Unit Status 193
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 10/202 DXC 5000

21.3 Unit Alarm History 193

21.4 Unit Optical Type 193
21.5 Unit APSD Configuration 194
21.6 Unit System Setup 194
21.7 Unit Loopback and Test 194
21.8 Unit Alarm Setup 195
21.9 Unit APSD Setup 195
21.10 Clear Unit Alarm History 195
21.11 Unit E1 CRC Error 196
21.12 Clear Optical Error 196
21.13 Unit Load Default Config 197
21.14 Clear All Error Counters 198

22. ROUTER-A SUB-MENU 201

23. LS (LOW SPEED) OPTICAL FIBER SUB-MENU (C37.94) 202

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 11/202

MODIFICATIONS PAGE
Version DATE COMMENTS
A 23/09/2004 ORIGINAL ISSUE
B 01/03/2005 Supersedes Version A
A22 15/05/2007 Update
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 12/202 DXC 5000

DXC 5000 provides comprehensive report and enhanced configuration capability through the
console port on the front panel. Using single-character commands and arrow keys, the
DXC 5000, including all of its ports, can be configured and monitored through the use of a
VT-100 terminal. The single-character commands are not case sensitive. On each screen,
the available commands and the configurable fields are highlighted.
When a VT-100 terminal is connected to the CONSOLE/SLIP port of front panel, make sure
the button is up, upon power up, a main menu is shown. The main menu consists of three
groups of commands, Display, Log, Setup, and MISC. Initially only Display and Access
commands are available. To enable Setup and MISC, user has to log on using the "O"
command, after which the full screen is shown.

==>> In put the un it numb er (A~ D or 1~ 12) : A

If the password option is turned on, a prompt asking for password is shown.

==>> En ter pas swo rd : xx xx

With the password option is turned on, only after a valid password is entered, the full menu is
shown, otherwise user is asked to enter the correct password again.

>>In val id inpu t o f p assw ord ! Try aga in ?[Y/ N]

If password is correctly entered, or if the password option is OFF, the full controller main
menu is shown. Otherwise, only display menu items will be shown, which are in the lower left
half of the screen.
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 13/202

1. MAIN MENU
If the terminal screen is illegible, press the "enter" and "esc" key alternatively to bring up the
main menu. This is particularly needed if the terminal is connected to the controller while the
power is already applied. If the main menu still fails to appear, check to see that the terminal
is configured as 9600, 8, n, 1, and that a proper null modem or a null modem cable is used.
DXC 500 0 == = C ontr oll er Menu == = 09: 54:2 5 0 6/0 2/20 05

Seri al Num ber : 53 023 Redu nda nt Cont rol ler : Di sab led
Hard war e V ersi on: Ve r.D Star t T ime : 19: 16: 09 0 6/0 1/2 005
Soft war e V ersi on: S4 .B4 06/ 01/ 2005

[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]

C -> Sy ste m Co nfi gur atio n S -> Sy ste m Se tup
B -> Cl ock sou rce Co nfig ura tio n M -> Sy ste m Al arm Se tup
Q -> Al arm Que ue Sum mary W -> Fi rmw are Tra nsf er
I -> In for mati on Sum mary V -> St ore /Ret rie ve Conf igu rat ion
K -> Cl ock sou rce Se tup
T -> Bi t E rror Ra te Test

[LOG ] [MIS C]
U -> Ch oos e a Slo t A -> Al arm Cut Of f
F -> Lo g O ff [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu X -> Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
O -> Lo g O n [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu Y -> Co ntr olle r R etu rn t o D efa ult
Z -> Co ntr olle r R ese t

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

1.1 System Configuration

Press “C” from the Controller Menu, the screen of System Configuration will show as below.
DXC 500 0 == = Co ntr oll er C onf igu rati on === 15: 55: 15 0 7/1 4/2 006

A -> Sys tem

B -> Clo ck sou rce
C -> TSI ma p
D -> Cur ren t T SI m ap
E -> Pow er/ Fan Sta tus

G -> Lin k b ack up f unc tio n

Q -> QDS 1 1 :1 prot ect ion

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 14/202 DXC 5000

1.1.1 System
Press “A” from the Controller Configuration Menu, the screen of System Configuration will
show as below.
SSM: Synchronous Status Message
DXC 500 0 === Sys tem Con fig ura tion == = 15: 55: 46 0 7/1 4/2 006

[Sys tem ]
IP A ddr ess : 01 0.0 02.0 01. 010 Subn et Mas k : 00 0.0 00.0 00. 000
Gate way IP : 00 0.0 00.0 00. 000

IP I nte rfa ce : ET HER NET_ POR T

[CON SOL E p ort] [SLI P p ort ]

Baud Ra te : 38 400 Baud Ra te : 38 400
Data Le ngt h : 8- Bit s Data Le ngt h : 8- Bit s
Stop Bi t : 1- Bit Stop Bi t : 1- Bit
Pari ty : NO NE Pari ty : NO NE
XON_ XOF F : XO FF XON_ XOF F : XO FF

[TSI ma p] [SNT P S etu p]

TSI Fun cti on : 1:1 (Bid ire cti on) SNTP Se rve r1 : 00 0.0 00.0 00. 000
Idle Si gna llin g: 110 1 SNTP Se rve r2 : 00 0.0 00.0 00. 000
SNTP up dat e pe rio d ( Min) : 0
SNTP ti mez one: +0
Curr ent SN TP s erv er : 00 0.0 00. 000. 000
[Clo ck] Last up dat e ti me: 00: 00:0 0#0 0/0 0/UU 00
Cloc k M ode : Nor mal
<< E SC key to ret urn to pre vio us m enu , S PACE ba r t o re fre sh >>

1.1.2 Clock Source

Press “B” from the Controller Configuration Menu, the screen of Clock Source Setup will
show as below. Note that the external clock type in this example is E1.
DXC 500 0 = == Clo ck S our ce Setu p = == 1 9:0 7:29 03 /01 /200 1

Mast er_ Clk Sou rce : SLOT _A

Seco nd_ Clk Sou rce : SLOT _D
Curr ent Cl ock : INTE RNA L
Clk_ Rec ove r_Mo de : MANU AL
Cloc k S tat us : NORM AL
Ext. Clock Type : E1

<< E SC key to ret urn to pre vio us m enu , S PACE ba r t o re fre sh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 15/202

The sample screen below shows a T1 clock type.

DXC 500 0 = == Clo ck S our ce Setu p = == 1 9:0 7:29 03 /01 /200 1

Mast er_ Clk Sou rce : SLOT _A

Seco nd_ Clk Sou rce : SLOT _D
Curr ent Cl ock : INTE RNA L
Clk_ Rec ove r_Mo de : MANU AL
Cloc k S tat us : NORM AL
Ext. Clock Type : T1

<< E SC key to ret urn to pre vio us m enu , S PACE ba r t o re fre sh >>

1.1.3 TSI Map

Press “C” from the Controller Configuration Menu, the screen of TSI Map will show as below.
DX C 5 000 === System Configuration (Map) === 15:44:01 09/06/2005
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Map Number:MAP_1

Slot Number: C E1 PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS

Port Number: == ========== ===== ==========
1 d 7 1 1 17 d 7 1 17
2 d 7 1 2 18 d 7 1 18
3 d 7 1 3 19 d 7 1 19
4 d 7 1 4 20 d 7 1 20
5 d 7 1 5 21 d 7 1 21
6 d 7 1 6 22 d 7 1 22
7 d 7 1 7 23 d 7 1 23
8 d 7 1 8 24 d 7 1 24
9 d 7 1 9 25 d 7 1 25
10 d 7 1 10 26 d 7 1 26
11 d 7 1 11 27 d 7 1 27
12 d 7 1 12 28 d 7 1 28
13 d 7 1 13 29 d 7 1 29
14 d 7 1 14 30 d 7 1 30
15 d 7 1 15 31 d 7 1 31
16 d 7 1 16

<< Press ESC to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 16/202 DXC 5000

1.1.4 Current TSI Map

Press “D” from the Controller Configuration Menu, the screen of Current TSI Map will show
as below.
DXC 500 0 = == Sys tem Con fig urat ion (C urre nt Map ) == 16: 19: 54 1 0/0 1/2 003

Curr ent Ma p

Slot Nu mbe r:11 Qua d-E1 PO /TS D S L/P O T S PO /TS D SL/P O T S

Port Nu mbe r:P3 N ON- CAS == === === === = == === == ==== === =
3 1 d D 1 3 17 d D 17
3 2 d D 2 3 18 d D 18
3 3 d D 3 3 19 d D 19
3 4 d D 4 3 20 d D 20
3 5 d D 5 3 21 d D 21
3 6 d D 6 3 22 d D 22
3 7 d D 7 3 23 d D 23
3 8 d D 8 3 24 d D 24
3 9 d D 9 3 25 d D 25
3 10 d D 1 0 3 26 d D 26
3 11 d D 1 1 3 27 d D 27
3 12 d D 1 2 3 28 d D 28
3 13 d D 1 3 3 29 d D 29
3 14 d D 1 4 3 30 d D 30
3 15 d D 1 5 3 31 d D 31
3 16 d D 16

<< P res s E SC t o r etu rn t o p rev ious me nu >>

1.1.5 Power/Fan Status

To view the screen of Power/Fan Status press “E” from the Controller Configuration Menu.
DXC 5000 === Power/Fan Status === 11:31:30 09/27/2005

Power 1 Status : 100W DC

Power 2 Status : N/A

Total power consumption (Estimation) : 32W

Fan 1 Status : Fail or not exist

Fan 2 Status : Fail or not exist

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

NOTE: Power consumption table shows below to estimate total power

consumption and detecte power card status. Power consumption does
not include –48V DC consumption.
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 17/202

Condition
Alarm Trap Warning message
Total Power DC Power
Consumption Supplies
>= 75W & FAN
Tray unavailable Any External fan tray is necessary Please add a fan tray.
or Failure
Single 100W Power supplies over loading Please remove plugged-in
>= 90W Dual 100W Power protection not supported cards or upgrade to 150W
100W + 150W Power protection not supported power supplies.

Single 150W Power supplies over loading

Please remove plugged-in
>= 135W 100W + 150W Power protection not supported cads or upgrade
Dual 150W Power protection not supported

TABLE 1: POWER CONSUMPTION

1.1.6 Link backup function
Under the "Controller Configuration" menu, press "G" to enable or disable Link backup
function.
DXC 500 0 = == S yst em Setu p ( Bac kup) == = 09: 58: 12 0 6/0 2/2 005
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B: ROLL OP TIO NS

Back up fun ctio n : ON

Mode : reve rti ble

Link A Li nk B L ink C Lin k D

FOM FO M E1 RTR
- ---- --- --- ---- --- --- ---- --- --- -
Back up Li nk : Link B -- ---- - --- -- --- ---
Link ba cku p fu n : ON ON O FF OFF
Link st atu s : Work ing Id le N orm al Nor mal

1.1.7 QDS1 1:1 protection

To view the screen of QDS1 1:1 protection press “Q” from the Controller Configuration
Menu.
DXC 5000 === QDS1 1:1 Protection === 11:34:23 06/14/2006

Protection Status Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4

Slot A ( FOM)
Slot B ( FOM)
Slot C ( FT1)
Slot D ( FE1)
Slot 1 ( )
Slot 2 ( )
Slot 3 (GDSL-4)
Slot 4 ( )
Slot 5 (QuadE1) WORKING WORKING
Slot 6 (QuadE1) BACKUP BACKUP
Slot 7 (DTU-10)
Slot 8 ( DTE-A)
Slot 9 ( )
Slot 10 ( X.50)
Slot 11 ( )
Slot 12 ( )
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 18/202 DXC 5000

1.2 Clock Source Configuration

Press “B” to view the Clock Source Configuration, the screen will show as below.
DXC 500 0 = == Clo ck S our ce Setu p = == 1 9:0 8:09 03 /01 /200 1

Mast er_ Clk Sou rce : SLOT _A

Seco nd_ Clk Sou rce : SLOT _D
Curr ent Cl ock : INTE RNA L
Clk_ Rec ove r_Mo de : MANU AL
Cloc k S tat us : NORM AL
Ext. Cl ock Typ e : E1

<< E SC key to ret urn to pre vio us m enu , S PACE ba r t o re fre sh >>

1.3 Alarm Queue Summary

Press “Q” to view the Alarm Queue Summary, the screen will show as below.
DXC 500 0 == = A larm Qu eue Sum mar y = == 1 9:08 :13 03 /01/ 200 1
1 -- Con trol ler : S LOT 9 STA RTUP --- --- ---1 9:0 3:1 0 03 /01 /20 01
2 -- Con trol ler : P RIMA RY STA RT-U P-- --- ---1 9:0 3:0 7 03 /01 /20 01

<< S PAC E b ar t o r efr esh or ESC key re tur n to ma in menu >>

1.4 Information Summary

Press “I” to view the Information Summary, the screen will show as below. If the user plug in
same card, the word of mismatch will not show on the screen. If the user pull out one card to
plug in different card, the screen will show up the word of mismatch. When the word of
mismatch show up, the user should press “S” command from the controller menu to enter “I”
command in the screen of "Controller Setup" in order to init new card.
DXC 5000 === Information Summary === 11:48:19 08/30/2005

Slot Alm Interface Software Version

==== === ================ ===================
A
B
C 0 FT1 LONG_HAUL V3.04 06/01/2005 mismatch
D

==== === ================ ===================

1
2
3
4 0 DTU-10 V1.06 01/03/2005
5 V.35-A V1.02 02/24/2005
6
7 40 Quad E1 V1.09 01/03/2005
8 6 HDSL_LTU V1.04 09/27/2002
9 40 Quad T1 V2.02 07/05/2005
10 40 Quad E1 V2.02 07/05/2005
11 0 HDSL-LTU-A V1.05 12/27/2002
12 6 HDSL-LTU-A V1.02 01/06/2005

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 19/202

1.5 System Setup

Press "S" from the "Controller Menu" to enter in the screen of "Controller Setup". For the
details, see also the following sections.
DXC 500 0 == = C ontr oll er Setu p = == 10: 55:3 5 1 2/0 8/20 06

A -> Sys tem

S -> SNM P S etu p
B -> Pas swo rd
C -> TSI ma p s etup
D -> Sel ect a new TSI ma p
E -> Cop y a TS I ma p t o a noth er
F -> Cle ar a T SI m ap
L -> Com man d L ine
I -> Ini t N ew Card
J -> Cle ar Emp ty S lot
G -> Lin k B ack up F unc tio n
Q -> QDS 1 1 :1 Prot ect ion

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

1.5.1 System
Under the "Controller Setup" menu, press “A” to enter in the screen of System Setup as
below. This menu is allowed to set up configuration for system, console port, and TSI map.
DXC 500 0 = == S yst em Setu p ( SYS TEM) == = 15: 57: 03 0 7/1 4/2 006
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : h h:mm :ss mm /dd/ yyy y, BACK SPA CE to e dit
[Sys tem ]
Time /Da te : 15 :57 :03 07/ 14/ 2006
IP A ddr ess : 01 0.0 02.0 01. 010 Subn et Mas k : 00 0.0 00.0 00. 000
Gate way IP : 00 0.0 00.0 00. 000

IP I nte rfa ce : ET HER NET_ POR T

[CON SOL E p ort] [SLI P p ort ]

Baud Ra te : 38 400 Baud Ra te : 38 400
Data Le ngt h : 8- Bit s Data Le ngt h : 8- Bit s
Stop Bi t : 1- Bit Stop Bi t : 1- Bit
Pari ty : NO NE Pari ty : NO NE
XON_ XOF F : XO FF XON_ XOF F : XO FF

[TSI ma p] [SNT P S etu p]

TSI Fun cti on : 1:1 (Bid ire cti on) SNTP Se rve r1 : 00 0.0 00.0 00. 000
Idle Si gna llin g: 110 1 SNTP Se rve r2 : 00 0.0 00.0 00. 000
SNTP up dat e pe rio d ( Min) : 0
SNTP ti mez one: +0
[Clo ck] Nor mal
Cloc k M ode : Nor mal
<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 20/202 DXC 5000

1.5.2 SNMP
Under the "Controller Setup" menu, press “S” to SNMP setup sub-menu.
DXC 500 0 == = S NMP Set up === 10: 54: 58 1 2/0 8/2 006

A -> SN MP Syst em Set up

B -> V1 : T rap Set up
C -> V3 : U ser- Bas ed Secu rit y M odel Se tup
D -> V3 : V iew- Bas ed Acce ss Con trol Mo del Set up 1
E -> V3 : V iew- Bas ed Acce ss Con trol Mo del Set up 2
F -> V3 : T arge t & No tify Se tup

<< E SC key to ret urn to pre vio us m enu , S PACE ba r t o re fre sh >>

1.5.2.1 SNMP System Setup

Under the SNMP sub-menu,press A to do setup, the user must select SNMP model for V1
server or V3 server from the screen.
DXC 500 0 === Sys tem Set up (SN MP) === 10: 57: 57 1 2/0 8/2 006
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

Devi ce Nam e :D XC 5000

Syst em Loc atio n:A REV A MA SSY

Syst em Con tact :A REV A MA SSY

SNMP Mo del : V3 only

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 21/202

1.5.2.2 V1: Trap Setup

If the user use SNMPv1,press B to do setup for Trap and Community setup. The user cannot
setup more than 5 trap IP for SNMPv1.
DXC 500 0 === Tr ap and Com mun ity === 10: 59: 31 1 2/0 8/2 006
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

Get Com mun ity : pub lic_ ___ __ Set Com mun ity : pub lic

Trap IP 1 : 000 .000 .00 0.0 00 Comm uni ty Name : pub lic
Trap IP 2 : 000 .000 .00 0.0 00 Comm uni ty Name : pub lic
Trap IP 3 : 000 .000 .00 0.0 00 Comm uni ty Name : pub lic
Trap IP 4 : 000 .000 .00 0.0 00 Comm uni ty Name : pub lic
Trap IP 5 : 000 .000 .00 0.0 00 Comm uni ty Name : pub lic

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

1.5.2.3 V3: User-Based Security Model Setup

For SNMPv3, user must setup USM and VACM. For USM, it is used to setup user
authentication and privacy. Press C to setup V3: User-Based Security Model. There are 12
digit number for Engine ID. The user’’s name is “areva”, the password is “areva tlc”.
DXC 500 0 == = S NMP Set up (USM ) = == 11: 02:3 2 1 2/0 8/20 06

[My Eng ine ] . . .

Engi ne ID : 00 000 337 0000 000 07F 0000 01
Boot s : 8
Tota l U ser : 6

[Use r 0 1] . . .
Engi ne ID : 00 000 3370 000 000 07F0 000 01
User Na me : ar eva
Auth Pr oto col: MD 5
Auth Ke y : CD 364 4D21 8EB 247 E369 743 4F7 F2B3 E15
Priv Pr oto col: DE S
Priv Ke y : CD 364 4D21 8EB 247 E369 743 4F7 F2B3 E15
Stat us : Ac tiv e
Stor age : No nVo lati le

<< E SC= >re turn to pr evio us men u, L EFT /RI GHT= >pr ev/ next us er, F=> fin d u ser >>
<< E =>e dit eng ine , E NTER =>e dit use r, C=> clon e u ser , A= >ad d u ser, D= >de lete >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 22/202 DXC 5000

If you press Enter, an edit screen will appear. The user must enter a password. A delay will
occur because of transfer time to record the key.
DXC 500 0 == = S NMP Set up (USM ) = == 11: 14:5 0 1 2/0 8/20 06
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

[My Eng ine ] . . .

Engi ne ID : 00 000 337 0000 000 07F 0000 01
Boot s : 8
Tota l U ser : 6

[Use r 0 1] . . .
Engi ne ID : 00 000 3370 000 000 07F0 000 01
User Na me : ar eva
Auth Pr oto col: MD 5
Auth Pa ssw ord: ar eva 1234 ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ ___ _
Priv Pr oto col: DE S
Priv Pa ssw ord:
Stat us : Ac tiv e
Stor age : No nVo lati le

[Ski p p ass word wi ll not cha nge cur ren t k ey.]

<< E SC key ign ore an d re tur n, ENTE R k ey acce pt cha nge >>

1.5.2.4 V3: View-Based Access Control Model Setup 1

Press “D” to setup context and group, the user should be in a group.The default group name
is “initial” and scurity name is name of user.
DXC 500 0 === SN MP Setu p ( VAC M) = == 11: 09: 22 1 2/0 8/2 006

[Con tex t] : (e mpt y)

[Sec uri ty to G rou p] 1/7

Secu rit y M odel : V 3(U SM)
Secu rit y N ame : a rev a
Grou p N ame : i nit ial
Stat us : A cti ve
Stor age : N onV olat ile

<< E SC= >re turn to me nu, UP/ DOW N=>c ont ext /gro up, LE FT/R IGH T=> prev /ne xt >>
<< F =>f ind , EN TER =>e dit, A= >ad d, D =>d ele te > >
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 23/202

1.5.2.5 V3: View-Based Access Control Model Setup 2

Press “E” to edit Access and View for VACM, every group can define their own security level
and have read and write access to view. “Item shows (reserved)” means that the item
shown is not currently supported by this version. View contains 1 or more MIB sub-trees.
The V3 driver will check incoming packages.
DXC 500 0 === SN MP Setu p ( VAC M) = == 11: 18: 28 1 2/0 8/2 006

[Acc ess ] 1 /3
Grou p N ame : ar eva
Secu rit y M odel : V3 (USM )
Secu rit y L evel : Au thPr iv
Cont ext Pr efix : (r eser ved )
Cont ext Ma tch : (r eser ved )
Read Vi ew Name : ar eva
Writ e V iew Nam e : ar eva
Noti fy Vie w Na me: (r eser ved )
Stat us : Ac tive
Stor age : No nVol ati le

[Vie w F ami ly] 1/5

View Na me : on e
Sub- tre e : 1. 3.6 .1. 6.3
Mask : (r ese rve d)
Type : in clu de
Stat us : Ac tiv e
Stor age : No nVo lat ile

<< E SC= >re turn to pr evio us men u, U P/D OWN =>Ac ces s/V iew, LE FT/ RIGH T=> pre v/ne xt >>
<< E NTE R=> edit , A =>a dd, D=> del ete >>

1.5.2.6 V3: Target & Notify Setu

“F” command is to notify the V3 target(similar to situation with V1 trap).
DXC 500 0 = == SNMP Se tup (Ta rge t & Not ify ) = == 11: 24: 06 1 2/0 8/2 006

[Tar get ] 1 /2
Targ et Nam e: t arg et2
Doma in : U DP
IP A ddr ess : 1 0.2 .1. 1 Noti fy Por t: 1 62
Tag : g rou p2
Time out : 3 Retr y : 0
Para met er : g rou p2
Stat us : A cti ve
[Par ame ter ] 1/ 2
Para m N ame : g rou p2
MP M ode l : V1
Sec Mod el : V1
Sec Lev el : N oAu thN oPri v
Sec Nam e : p ubl ic
Stat us : A cti ve
[Not ify ] 1 /2
Name : g rou p1
Tag : g rou p1
Type : T rap
Stat us : A cti ve
<< E SC= >re turn to me nu, UP/ DOW N=>T arg et/ Para met er/ Noti fy, LE FT/R IGH T=> prev /ne xt
<< E NTE R=> edit , A =>a dd, D=> del ete >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 24/202 DXC 5000

1.5.3 Password
Under the "Controller Setup" menu, press “B” to enable or change password.
DXC 500 0 1 9:0 8:31 03 /01 /200 1
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B: ROLL OP TIO NS

Ena ble Pas swo rd : YE S

Cha nge Pas swo rd : NO

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

1.5.4 TSI Map Setup

Under the "Controller Setup" menu, press “C” to setup TSI map.
DXC 500 0 === Sy ste m Se tup (M AP) === 14: 54: 52 0 9/3 0/2 003
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B: ROLL OP TIO NS
MAP NO: MA P_1
Tar get E1 NON -CA S Sou rce Qua d-E 1 N ON-C AS
Targ et PO /TS D SL/P O T S P O/TS D SL/ PO T S PO/ TS D SL /PO TS PO/ TS D SL /PO TS
Slot : D == === == ==== === = = ==== == === ==== = === == = === === === === == ==== === ===
Port : 1 d 11 3 1 17 d 11 3 17 3 1 d D 1 3 17 d D 17
T.S. : 01 2 d 11 3 2 18 d 11 3 18 3 2 d D 2 3 18 d D 18
3 d 11 3 3 19 d 11 3 19 3 3 d D 3 3 19 d D 19
4 d 11 3 4 20 d 11 3 20 3 4 d D 4 3 20 d D 20
T.S. # : 31 5 d 11 3 5 21 d 11 3 21 3 5 d D 5 3 21 d D 21
Clea r : No 6 d 11 3 6 22 d 11 3 22 3 6 d D 6 3 22 d D 22
d/v : d 7 d 11 3 7 23 d 11 3 23 3 7 d D 7 3 23 d D 23
8 d 11 3 8 24 d 11 3 24 3 8 d D 8 3 24 d D 24
9 d 11 3 9 25 d 11 3 25 3 9 d D 9 3 25 d D 25
Sour ce 10 d 11 3 10 26 d 11 3 26 3 10 d D 10 3 26 d D 26
Slot : 11 11 d 11 3 11 27 d 11 3 27 3 11 d D 11 3 27 d D 27
Port : P3 12 d 11 3 12 28 d 11 3 28 3 12 d D 12 3 28 d D 28
T.S. : 01 13 d 11 3 13 29 d 11 3 29 3 13 d D 13 3 29 d D 29
14 d 11 3 14 30 d 11 3 30 3 14 d D 14 3 30 d D 30
Upda te? Ye s 15 d 11 3 15 31 d 11 3 31 3 15 d D 15 3 31 d D 31
Conf irm ?Ye s 16 d 11 3 16 3 16 d D 16

<< P res s E SC t o r etu rn t o C ont roll er Set up m enu , t hen Pre ss D to ac tiv e >>

NOTE : For 3-port 2Mbits HDSL card and 6-port V.35 card, overlapping of
map setup is not allowed.
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 25/202

1.5.5 Select a New TSI Map

Under the "Controller Setup" menu, press "D" to set up a new TSI map.
DXC 500 0 = == S yst em Setu p ( New map ) = == 14: 55: 34 0 9/3 0/2 003
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B: ROLL OP TIO NS

La st a cti vat ed T SI Map : MA P_3

Ch ange to TS I Ma p : MA P_3

( This it em will be ig nore d i f a nyon e o f t he f oll owi ng i s e nab led. )

[ TSI Map ] sw itch sta rt h r/m in

M ap1 DI SABL E 00 :00
M ap2 DI SABL E 00 :00
M ap3 DI SABL E 00 :00
M ap4 DI SABL E 00 :00

<< P res s E SC t o r etu rn t o C ont roll er Set up m enu , t hen Pre ss D to ac tiv e >>

1.5.6 Copy a TSI Map to another

Under the "Controller Setup" menu, press "E" to copy a TSI map to another.
DXC 500 0 == = S yste m S etu p (C opy ) = == 1 9:09 :07 03 /01/ 200 1
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B: ROLL OP TIO NS

C opy TS I Ma p f rom MAP _1 to MAP_ 2

<< P res s E SC t o r etu rn t o C ont roll er Set up m enu , t hen Pre ss D to ac tiv e >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 26/202 DXC 5000

1.5.7 Clear a TSI Map

Under the "Controller Setup" menu, press "F" to clear a TSI map.
DXC 500 0 == = S yste m S etu p (C lea r) === 1 9:09 :12 03 /01/ 200 1
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B: ROLL OP TIO NS

Cl ear TSI Ma p : MA P_1

<< P res s E SC t o r etu rn t o C ont roll er Set up m enu , t hen Pre ss D to ac tiv e >>

1.5.8 Command Line

Under the "Controller Setup" menu, press "L" to get help for available system commands.
Press "?", then press ENTER, the system will list all available commands. Then key in a
desired command to get the detail description. To return to the "Controller Setup" menu,
press "q".
1 1:39 :26 Ma y 06 /05 R epla ce
Pres s ? ge t he lp or QUIT re tur n.
11:3 9:1 8 M ay 0 6/0 5 > >?
Avai lab le Comm and s:
qu it hel p et her arp pi ng
fb ank fbo ot up gra de ver
11:3 9:2 0 M ay 0 6/0 5 > >hel p
Comm and s S uppo rt:
qu it --- ---- --- --- ---- -> Lea ve c omm and sup por t.
ar p - --- ---- --- --- ---- -> Pri nt A RP tab le.
pi ng ip ---- --- --- ---- -> Pin g an ip ad dres s.
et her st atus /cl ear --- -> Dis play /Cl ear eth ern et stat us.
fb ank -- ---- --- --- ---- -> For ce f las h s witc h b ank .
fb oot -- ---- --- --- ---- -> Dow nloa d b oot -up cod e ( DANG ER) .
11:3 9:2 6 M ay 0 6/0 5 > >
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 27/202

1.5.9 Init New Card

Under the "Controller Setup" menu, press "I” to Init new card.
DXC 5000 === Init a New Card === 11:58:56 08/30/2005
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Slot Model State Slot Model State

A 5 DTE-A
B 6
C FT1 mismatch 7 Quad E1
D 8 HDSL_LTU
1 9 Quad T1
2 10 Quad E1
3 11 HDSL-LTU-A
4 DTU-10 12 HDSL-LTU-A

This command will clear the related TSI and init the unit with default !!!

Select Card : C

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Press “ENTER” and “Y”, the screen will show as below.

DXC 5000 === Init a New Card === 11:58:56 08/30/2005
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Slot Model State Slot Model State

A 5 DTE-A
B 6
C FT1 7 Quad E1
D 8 HDSL_LTU
1 9 Quad T1
2 10 Quad E1
3 11 HDSL-LTU-A
4 DTU-10 12 HDSL-LTU-A

No card need initialize, press any key return...

Select Card : C

Please wait at least 10 seconds for initialize procedure.

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 28/202 DXC 5000

1.5.10 Clear Empty Slot

Under the "Controller Setup" menu, press "J” to clear empty slot.
DXC 500 0 == = C lear Em pty Slo t = == 10: 25:0 5 0 7/0 6/20 06
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B: ROLL OP TIO NS

Slot Re gis tere d M ode l St ate Slot Re gis tere d M ode l St ate
A MQ uad E1 5 Qu ad T1
B MQ uad E1 6 Qu ad T1
C FE 1 7 V. 35- A
D FE 1 8
1 Qu ad E1 9 GS HDS L-4
2 Qu ad E1 10 DT U-1 0
3 11 X. 50
4 HD SL- A 12 DT U-6 un plu gge d

This co mma nd w ill cl ear the re late d T SI and cle ar the slo t w ith ZER O ! !!

Sele ct Slo t : 12

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

1.5.11 Link Backup Function

Under the "Controller Setup" menu, press "G" to enable or disable Link backup function.
DXC 500 0 = == S yst em Setu p ( Bac kup) == = 10: 29: 01 0 7/0 6/2 006
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B: ROLL OP TIO NS

Back up fun ctio n : ON

Mode : non- rev ert ible

Link A Li nk B L ink C Lin k D

MQ- E1 M Q-E1 E1 E1
- ---- --- --- ---- --- --- ---- --- --- -
Back up Li nk : ---- -- -- ---- L ink D --- ---
Link ba cku p fu n : OFF OF F O FF OFF
Link st atu s : Norm al No rmal N orm al Nor mal

Note !!
Plea se che ck b oth ba ckup li nk have th e s ame FRA ME and CAS se ttin g.
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 29/202

1.5.12 QSD1 1:1 Protection

For detail of QDS1 1:1 protection screen, please refer to Application Notes.
1.5.13 Multicast Mapping Procedure
DXC 5000 === Controller Menu === 09:54:25 06/02/2005

Serial Number : 53023 Redundant Controller: Disabled

Hardware Version: Ver.D Start Time : 19:16:09 06/01/2005
Software Version: S4.B4 06/01/2005

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Configuration S -> System Setup
B -> Clock source Configuration M -> System Alarm Setup
Q -> Alarm Queue Summary W -> Firmware Transfer
I -> Information Summary V -> Store/Retrieve Configuration
K -> Clock source Setup
T -> Bit Error Rate Test

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose a Slot A -> Alarm Cut Off
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu X -> Clear Alarm Queue
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu Y -> Controller Return to Default
Z -> Controller Reset

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

Press “S” from the Controller Menu screen to enter into the Controller Setup menu, see also
below screen.
DXC 5000 === Controller Setup === 09:57:44 06/02/2005

A -> System
B -> Password
C -> TSI map setup
D -> Select a new TSI map
E -> Copy a TSI map to another
F -> Clear a TSI map
G -> Link backup function
L -> Command Line
M -> FOM Ring protection

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 30/202 DXC 5000

Press "A" from the above "Controller Setup" menu to set up system configuration. Then
move the cursor at "TSI Function" option and use TAB or "`" key to set "TSI Function" as 1:N
(Multicast). Press ESC to return to the "Controller Setup" menu.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (SYSTEM) === 14:54:28 09/30/2003
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: hh:mm:ss mm/dd/yyyy, BACKSPACE to edit
[System]
Time/Date :14:54:28 09/30/2003
IP Address :140.133.034.041 Subnet Mask : 255.255.000.000
Trap IP Address:140.132.001.123 Gateway IP : 140.133.034.040
Community Name :public
Device Name :DXC 5000
System Location:

System Contact :

IP Interface : HDLC_PORT Loopback Timer (s) : 00000001

[CONSOLE port] [SLIP port]
Baud Rate : 19200 Baud Rate : 38400
[TSI map]
TSI Function : Multicast Clock Mode : SSM
Idle Signalling: 1101

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Before setting TSI map for this 1:N (Multicast) TSI function, make sure the previous TSI map
setting is cleared up.
DXC 5000 === Controller Setup === 09:57:44 06/02/2005

A -> System
B -> Password
C -> TSI map setup
D -> Select a new TSI map
E -> Copy a TSI map to another
F -> Clear a TSI map
G -> Link backup function
L -> Command Line
M -> FOM Ring protection

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

Press "F" from the above "Controller Setup" menu to clear the previous TSI map. Then press
ESC to return to the "Controller Setup" menu.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (Clear) === 19:09:12 03/01/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Clear TSI Map : MAP_3

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 31/202

DXC 5000 === Controller Setup === 09:57:44 06/02/2005

A -> System
B -> Password
C -> TSI map setup
D -> Select a new TSI map
E -> Copy a TSI map to another
F -> Clear a TSI map
G -> Link backup function
L -> Command Line
M -> FOM Ring protection

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

Then press "C" from the above "Controller Setup" menu to set system map. The following
two screens show map settings for the following example.

(Source Port) (Destination Port)

Slot B Slot A
TSI PORT 1 PORT 1 Data/Voice
TS01 TS01

Slot 1
TSI PORT 1
TS01

DXC5000
D0353ENa

Below settings are for mapping Slot B/Port 1's time slot 01 to Slot A/Port 1's time slot 01.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (MAP) === 14:49:50 02/21/2005
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_3
Target E1 NON-CAS Source E1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : B ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P1 1 d A 1 17 d 1 d 17 d
T.S. : 01 2 d 18 d 2 d 18 d
3 d 19 d 3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d 4 d 20 d
T.S.# : 01 5 d 21 d 5 d 21 d
Clear : No 6 d 22 d 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 23 d 7 d 23 d
8 d 24 d 8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d 9 d 25 d
Source 10 d 26 d 10 d 26 d
Slot : A 11 d 27 d 11 d 27 d
Port : P1 12 d 28 d 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 01 13 d 29 d 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d 14 d 30 d
Update? Yes 15 d 31 d 15 d 31 d
Confirm?Yes 16 d 16 d

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 32/202 DXC 5000

Below settings are for mapping Slot 1/Port 1's time slot 01 to Slot A/Port 1's time slot 01.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (MAP) === 14:49:50 02/21/2005
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_3
Target Quad-E1 NON-CAS Source E1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P1 1 1 d A 1 17 d 1 d 17 d
T.S. : 01 2 d 18 d 2 d 18 d
3 d 19 d 3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d 4 d 20 d
T.S.# : 01 5 d 21 d 5 d 21 d
Clear : No 6 d 22 d 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 23 d 7 d 23 d
8 d 24 d 8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d 9 d 25 d
Source 10 d 26 d 10 d 26 d
Slot : A 11 d 27 d 11 d 27 d
Port : P1 12 d 28 d 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 01 13 d 29 d 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d 14 d 30 d
Update? Yes 15 d 31 d 15 d 31 d
Confirm?Yes 16 d 16 d

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

Press "D" to enable this map as the current map.

DXC 5000 === System Setup (MAP) === 14:49:50 02/21/2005

Please use D-command (next screen) to active map as current map.

and V-command (main menu) to save maps to Flash memory.

>> Press any key to continue.

DXC 5000 === Controller Setup === 09:55:24 05/03/2005

A -> System
S -> SNMP
B -> Password
C -> TSI map setup
D -> Select a new TSI map
E -> Copy a TSI map to another
F -> Clear a TSI map
L -> Command Line
I -> Init New Card
J -> Clear Empty Slot
G -> Link Backup function
Q -> QDS1 1:1 Protection

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>>>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 1/202

DXC 5000 === System Setup (New map) === 14:55:34 09/30/2003
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Last activated TSI Map: MAP_3

Change to TSI Map : MAP_3

(This item will be ignored if anyone of the following is enabled.)

[TSI Map] switch start hr/min

Map1 DISABLE 00:00
Map2 DISABLE 00:00
Map3 DISABLE 00:00
Map4 DISABLE 00:00

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

Enable MAP_3 as the current TSI map. Then press "Y" to confirm the setting or "N" to abort.
To save the new map configuration to flash memory, press "V" from the "Controller Menu".
DXC 5000 === System Setup (New map) === 14:55:34 09/30/2003
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Last activated TSI Map: MAP_3

Change to TSI Map : MAP_3

(This item will be ignored if anyone of the following is enabled.)

[TSI Map] switch start hr/min

Map1 DISABLE 00:00
Map2 DISABLE 00:00
Map3 ENABLE 00:00
Map4 DISABLE 00:00

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 2/202 DXC 5000

1.6 System Alarm Setup

Under the Controller Menu, press “M” to setup system alarm as below.
DXC 5000 === System Alarm Setup === 19:09:18 03/01/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[Alarm Action]
ALARM : ENABLE
RELAY : ENABLE

[Alarm Type]
ALARM CUT OFF : ENABLE
PORT INACTIVE : ENABLE
PORT START-UP : ENABLE
CLK LOSS ALM : ENABLE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 3/202

1.7 Firmware Transfer

Under the Controller Menu, press “W” to enter in the screen of File Transfer as below. Press
“A” to download mainboard firmware, “B” to upload mainboard firmware, and "R" to copy
firmware to redundant.
DXC 5000 === Controller Setup === 09:55:24 06/14/2006

A -> System
S -> SNMP
B -> Password
C -> TSI map setup
D -> Select a new TSI map
E -> Copy a TSI map to another
F -> Clear a TSI map
L -> Command Line
I -> Init New Card
J -> Clear Empty Slot
G -> Link Backup function
Q -> QDS1 1:1 Protection

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

1.7.1 Download Mainboard Firmware

DXC 5000 === Download Firmware === 19:09:25 03/01/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

Firmware 1 Version : S1.T1 03/01/2001

Firmware 2 Version : Disabled
Current Firmware Bank: 1
Next Boot Firmware : 1
TFTP Server IP : 000.000.000.000
Firmware File Name :

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 4/202 DXC 5000

1.7.2 Upload Mainboard Firmware

DXC 5000 === Upload Firmware === 19:09:30 03/01/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

Firmware 1 Version : S1.T1 03/01/2001

Firmware 2 Version : Disabled
Current Firmware Bank: 1
TFTP Server IP : 000.000.000.000
Firmware File Name :
Firmware Bank Number : 1

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

1.7.3 Download Configuration

DXC 5000 === Download Configuration === 14:52:11 01/07/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

TFTP Server IP : 000.000.000.000

Config File Name :

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

1.7.4 Upload Configuration

DXC 5000 === Upload Configuration === 14:52:21 01/07/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

TFTP Server IP : 000.000.000.000

Config File Name :

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 5/202

1.7.5 Copy Firmware to Redundant

DXC 5000 ===Copy Firmware to Redundant Board=== 17:10:18 01/13/2002

Current Firmware Bank: 2

NextBootFirmware Bank: 2

Copy firmware to Redundant Board - are you sure ?

1.7.6 Download Firmware Procedure

1.7.6.1 Download Firmware Procedure (A)

For firmware version 2.X or over update to over version 3.X (i.e. V.2.01 update to V.3.00)

(This NOTE is for Download Firmware Procedure (A) only)

User is not allowed to download firmware to redundant CPU card by using "R"
command of "File Transfer" menu. For downloading firmware to the redundant
CPU card, please repeat the Download Firmware Procedure (A).

A-1. Under "Controller Menu", press "W" to enter into "Firmware Transfer" menu.
DXC 5000 === Controller Menu === 09:54:25 06/02/2005

Serial Number : 53023 Redundant Controller: Disabled

Hardware Version: Ver.D Start Time : 19:16:09 06/01/2005
Software Version: S4.B4 06/01/2005

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Configuration S -> System Setup
B -> Clock source Configuration M -> System Alarm Setup
Q -> Alarm Queue Summary W -> Firmware Transfer
I -> Information Summary V -> Store/Retrieve Configuration
K -> Clock source Setup
T -> Bit Error Rate Test

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose a Slot A -> Alarm Cut Off
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu X -> Clear Alarm Queue
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu Y -> Controller Return to Default
Z -> Controller Reset

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 6/202 DXC 5000

DXC 5000 === File Transfer === 15:19:21 11/03/2004

A -> Download Mainboard Firmware

B -> Upload Mainboard Firmware
C -> Download Configuration
D -> Upload Configuration
E -> Download Mainboard Boot-up
R -> Copy Firmware to Redundant

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

A-2. Press "A" from "File Transfer" menu to download firmware, see below screen.
DXC 5000 === Download Firmware === 19:09:25 03/01/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

Firmware 1 Version : S1.T1 03/01/2001

Firmware 2 Version : Disabled
Current Firmware Bank: 1
Next Boot Firmware : 1
TFTP Server IP : 000.000.000.000
Firmware File Name : DXC 5000_T.RUN

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A-3. If the “Current Firmware Bank” is “2”, download DXC 5000_T.RUN to bank 1. After the
download is completed, then reboot the system.
If the “Current Firmware Bank” is “1”, pull the CPU interface out from the main chassis. Then
adjust jumper 1 to be "ON", please see also below diagram. Download DXC 5000_T.RUN
to bank 1 after plugging the CPU board into the main chassis. After the download is
completed, adjust the jumper 1 to be "OFF". Then reboot the system.
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 7/202

JUM1

CPU Interface
: ON : OFF
D0352ENa

A-4. Download the file, strapper.rom, to boot up code. Under "File Transfer" menu, press "E"
to get into the submenu to download the file. (NOTE: Do not reboot now.)
DXC 5000 === File Transfer === 15:19:21 11/03/2004

A -> Download Mainboard Firmware

B -> Upload Mainboard Firmware
C -> Download Configuration
D -> Upload Configuration
E -> Download Mainboard Boot-up
R -> Copy Firmware to Redundant

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

DXC 5000 === Download Bootup Code === 15:18:51 11/03/2004

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

TFTP Server IP : 000.000.000.000

Download File Name : strapper.rom

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 8/202 DXC 5000

A-5. After downloading V3.xx runcode to bank2, reset the system to enable the new
firmware.
NOTE: If you want bank 1 to has the same firmware as bank 2's, please
followe below procedures:
- Make sure the current firmwre bank is bank 2.
- Then download V3.xx runcode to bank 1.
- Rest the system to enable the new firmware.
1.7.6.2 Download Firmware Procedure (B)

For firmware version 2.X or over update to over version 2.X (i.e. V.2.01 update to V.2.08).
For firmware version 3.X or over update to over version 3.X (i.e. V.3.00 update to V.3.02).

B-1. Connect the Ethernet port of the DXC 5000 to the TFTP server Ethernet port.
B-2. Click the TFTP server icon on your PC screen to run the TFTP program. A screen will
be shown with your PC’s IP address displayed. Left-click your mouse on the Settings button.

B-3. Hook-up the COM PORT 1 of the VT100 (PC running VT100 emulation) to the
DXC 5000 through the front console port.
B-4. Run a VT100 terminal after connecting to the DXC 5000.
B-5. Under the main menu, press “W” to enter into the “File Transfer” menu.
B-6. Under the “File Transfer” menu, press “A”
Press “A” to download mainboard firmware, “B” to upload mainboard firmware, and "R" to
copy firmware to redundant.
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 9/202

DXC 5000 === File Transfer === 17:07:20 01/13/2002

A -> Download Mainboard Firmware

B -> Upload Mainboard Firmware
C -> Download Configuration
D -> Upload Configuration
R -> Copy Firmware to Redundant

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

B-7. Enter the proper TFTP Server IP address and the firmware file name.
DXC 5000 === Download Firmware === 19:09:25 03/01/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

Firmware 1 Version : V1.03 01/08/2004

Firmware 2 Version : V1.03 02/06/2004
Current Firmware Bank: 1
Next Boot Firmware : 1
TFTP Server IP : 192.168.100.206
Firmware File Name : dxc5000.run

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

NOTE : When new firmware is downloaded to a DXC 5000 that has its current
firmware in BANK 1, the new firmware is not activated until the
DXC 5000 is rebooted. Upon reboot the newly downloaded firmware
will automatically be switched to BANK 2 and it will become the new
current firmware, Similarly, if the current firmware is in BANK 2, the
newly downloaded firmware will be switched to BANK 1 upon
rebooting. BANKS only switch after a download occurs and the
DXC 5000 is rebooted.
B-8. Press ENTER, then "Really want to download? [Y/N)", shows on the screen, press "Y"
to confirm the download, or “N” to abort it.
B-9. As the download is completed, press ESC to return to the "File Transfer" screen.
B-10. Press ESC to return to the "Controller Menu" screen.
B-11. Press “Z” to reset the system, the download is done.
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 10/202 DXC 5000

1.8 Store/ Retrieve Configuration

Under the Controller Menu, press “V” to store or retrieve the current configuration as the
following screen shows. Use TAB key to select STORE or RETRIEVE, press ENTER. The
current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
Store Configuration:
DXC 5000 ===Store/Retrieve Configuration=== 19:09:51 03/01/2001

>> S ele ct ? *ST ORE R ETR IEVE

Then the system will prompt the following message, shown in the bottom line. Enter “Y” to
confirm the setting or “N” to abort.
DXC 5000 ===Store/Retrieve Configuration=== 19:09:51 03/01/2001

>> Select ? *STORE RETRIEVE

>> S tor e C urre nt Con figu rat ion ? [ Y/N ]

Press “Y” from the above screen, then enter password in the following screen. The default
password is DXC5000.
DXC 5000 ===Store/Retrieve Configuration=== 16:43:26 02/20/2004

>> Select ? *STORE RETRIEVE

==>> En ter pas swo rd : XX XX

Then press ENTER from the above screen, the configuration is saved.
DXC 5000 ===Store/Retrieve Configuration=== 16:43:26 02/20/2004

>> Select ? *STORE RETRIEVE

==>> Sa vin g...
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 11/202

Retrieve Configuration:
Use arrow keys to move the cursor at “RETRIEVE”, which will be highlighted by an asterisk
(*).
DXC 5000 ===Store/Retrieve Configuration=== 19:09:51 03/01/2001

>> S ele ct ? ST ORE *R ETR IEVE

Press ENTER from the above screen. Then press “Y” to retrieve last stored configuration, or
“N” to abort it.
DXC 5000 ===Store/Retrieve Configuration=== 16:45:31 02/20/2004

>> Select ? STORE *RETRIEVE

>> R etr iev e La st Sto red Con fig urat ion ? [Y/N ]

Press “Y” from the above screen, then enter password in the following screen. The default
password is DXC5000.
DXC 5000 ===Store/Retrieve Configuration=== 16:45:31 02/20/2004

>> Select ? STORE *RETRIEVE

==>> En ter pas swo rd : XX XX

Then press ENTER from the above screen, the configuration is retrieved.
DXC 5000 ===Store/Retrieve Configuration=== 16:45:31 02/20/2004

>> Select ? STORE *RETRIEVE

===> Re tri evin g . ... ..
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 12/202 DXC 5000

1.9 Clock Source Setup

For Normal Clock Mode:
Under the "Controller Setup" menu, press “A” to get in "System Setup (SYSTEM)" menu, as
below screen shows. Use arrow keys to mvoe the cursor at "Clock Mode" item and TAB key
to choose "Normal" option.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (SYSTEM) === 09:58:47 06/02/2005
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
[System]
Time/Date :09:58:48 06/02/2005
IP Address :010.003.005.005 Subnet Mask : 255.255.000.000
Trap IP Address:010.003.005.001 Gateway IP : 000.000.000.000
Community Name :public
Device Name :DXC 5000
System Location:AREVA MASSY

System Contact :Name: AREVA MASSY

IP Interface : ETHERNET_PORT
[CONSOLE port] [SLIP port]
Baud Rate : 38400 Baud Rate : 38400
[TSI map] [Clock]
TSI Function : 1:1(Bidirection) Clock Mode : Normal
Idle Signalling: 1101

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Press ESC key from the above screen. Then press "Y" to confirm the new setting or "N" to
abort.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (SYSTEM) === 09:58:47 06/02/2005
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
[System]
Time/Date :09:58:48 06/02/2005
IP Address :010.003.005.005 Subnet Mask : 255.255.000.000
Trap IP Address:010.003.005.001 Gateway IP : 000.000.000.000
Community Name :public
Device Name :DXC 5000
System Location: AREVA MASSY

System Contact :Name: AREVA MASSY

IP Interface : ETHERNET_PORT
[CONSOLE port] [SLIP port]
Baud Rate : 38400 Baud Rate : 38400
[TSI map] [Clock]
TSI Function : 1:1(Bidirection) Clock Mode : Normal
Idle Signalling: 1101

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 13/202

Under the "Controller Menu", press “K” to do clock source setup. Then the following screen
will show up.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (CLOCK) === 19:10:05 03/01/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Master_Clk Source : EXTERNAL

Second_Clk Source : SLOT_D
Current Clock : INTERNAL
Clk_Recover_Mode : MANUAL
Clock Status : NORMAL

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

For SSM (Synchronous Status Message) Clock Mode:

Under the "Controller Setup" menu, press “A” to get in "System Setup (SYSTEM)" menu, as
below screen shows. Use arrow keys to mvoe the cursor at "Clock Mode" item and TAB key
to choose "SSM" option.
Note that the SSM clock mode is only available for Quad E1 card and mini Quad E1 card.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (SYSTEM) === 09:58:47 06/02/2005
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
[System]
Time/Date :09:58:48 06/02/2005
IP Address :010.003.005.005 Subnet Mask : 255.255.000.000
Trap IP Address:010.003.005.001 Gateway IP : 000.000.000.000
Community Name :public
Device Name :DXC 5000
System Location: AREVA MASSY

System Contact :Name: AREVA MASSY

IP Interface : ETHERNET_PORT
[CONSOLE port] [SLIP port]
Baud Rate : 38400 Baud Rate : 38400
[TSI map] [Clock]
TSI Function : 1:1(Bidirection) Clock Mode : SSM
Idle Signalling: 1101

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 14/202 DXC 5000

Press ESC key from the above screen. Then press "Y" to confirm the new setting or "N" to
abort.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (SYSTEM) === 09:58:47 06/02/2005
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
[System]
Time/Date :09:58:48 06/02/2005
IP Address :010.003.005.005 Subnet Mask : 255.255.000.000
Trap IP Address:010.003.005.001 Gateway IP : 000.000.000.000
Community Name :public
Device Name :DXC 5000
System Location: AREVA MASSY

System Contact :Name: AREVA MASSY

IP Interface : ETHERNET_PORT
[CONSOLE port] [SLIP port]
Baud Rate : 38400 Baud Rate : 38400
[TSI map] [Clock]
TSI Function : 1:1(Bidirection) Clock Mode : SSM
Idle Signalling: 1101

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

Then exit from the above menu after keying "Y" to confirm the latest system configuration.
Go to Quad E1's Port Menu. Under the "Port Menu", press "S" to get in the "Port System
Setup" menu. Use arrow key to move the cursor at the "FDL" item, and TAB key to select
"SSM" option.
SLOT 7 Quad-E1 PORT 1 === Port System Setup === 15:13:51 06/25/2004

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ON
CODE = HDB3
CRC = ON
RAI = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
FDL = SSM
Sa_bit = Sa4
IDLE = D5
Protected = CIRCUIT
Master = MASTER
INTF = 75 Ohm

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 15/202

Then back to the "Controller Menu", press “K” to do clock source setup. Then the following
screen will show up. This menu is allowed to set up first, second, and third clcok sources.
The "SLOT_1 P1" means port 1 of slot 1.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (CLOCK-SSM Mode) === 10:04:37 06/02/2005
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

First Clock Source : SLOT_1 P1

Second Clock Source : SLOT_1 P2
Third Clock Source : SLOT_1 P3
Current Clock : INTERNAL
Clock Status : NORMAL

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

SSM code for E1 Operation

Quality Level Description

0 Quality unknown (existing sync. network)
2 Rec. G.811 (Traceable to PRS)
4 SSU-A (Traceable to SSU type A, see G.812)
8 SSU-B (Traceable to SSU type B, see G.812)
11 Synchronous Equipment Timing Source (SETS)
F Do not use for synchronization

DXC5000 E1 E1

DXC5000 QE1 E1 Network

For SLOT_1 P2:

Tx_Sabit = F, Rx_Sabit = 2

D0556ENa
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 16/202 DXC 5000

As below example shows, SLOT_1 P2 is the current clock and top priority for the quality
level of its receive Sabit is "2". So the quality level of its transmit Sabit must be "F". Also, the
quality level for transmit Sabit of SLOT_1 P1 and slot_1 P3 will be "2".
DXC 5000 === Clock Source Setup (SSM Mode) === 15:15:24 06/06/2005

First Clock Source : SLOT_1 P1 [ Tx_Sabit: 2 , Rx_Sabit: 0 ]

Second Clock Source : SLOT_1 P2 [ Tx_Sabit: F , Rx_Sabit: 2 ]
Third Clock Source : SLOT_1 P3 [ Tx_Sabit: 2 , Rx_Sabit: 8 ]
Current Clock : INTERNAL
Clock Status : NORMAL

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 17/202

1.10 Bit Error Rate Test

This menu is used to do bit error rate testing. Press "T" from the "Controller Menu".
Note that this function is not available for these cards: Router, ATM Frame Relay, Dry
Contact, FXS, FXO, E&M, and Magneto.
For test channel, when a channel is set as "1", which means this channel is used to do bit
error rate testing.
There are two options are available: full or mapped. Note that only E1 and T1 cards support
full channel. When this option, mapped, is selected for test channel, which means user
should set up map first.
For split mode, two options are available: (1) Send AIS - sending AIS to the other side, or (2)
OFF - no sending AIS.
For Period, if set to 0, means text is permanent. Other value will stop the test after time out.
2exp 15- 1: 2 1 5 -1
AIS : Alarm Indication Signal

SES : Severely Error Second

BER : Bit Error Rate, BER = Bit Error/ (Elapsed Second - SES) x test channel x 64,000
ESR : Error Second Ratio, ESR = Error Second/ Elapsed Second – SES
SESR : Severely Error Second Ratio, SESR = SES/ Elapsed Second

DXC5000

TSI E1
loopback
E1 Devices
E1 BERT
AIS

D0557ENa

DXC 5000 === BERT Test === 09:55:21 06/02/2005

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Test Slot : 1 ( Quad-E1)

Test Port : P1
Pattern Type : 2exp15-1
Split Mode : Send AIS
Test Channel : full
User Pattern : 00000000
Test Enable : ENABLE

Test Channel : 01111111111111111111111111111111 (31 channels)

Pattern: 2exp15-1 UNSYNC Elapsed Second: 13

Bit Error : 0 BER : 1.0
Error Seconds : 0 ESR : 1.0
SES : 13 SESR : 1.0

<< ESC KEY : EXIT, LEFT ARROW : RESET ERROR, RIGHT ARROW : INJECT AN ERROR >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 18/202 DXC 5000

1.11 Alarm Cut Off

Press "A" to show the alarm cut off screen.

>> Use TAB key to select unit, and ENTER key to clear alarm: ALL SLOTs

>> Clear alarm queue of ALL SLOTs - are you sure ? [Y/N]

>> Cut off alarm - are you sure (Y/N)?

1.12 Clear Alarm Queue

Press "X" to show the clear alarm queue screen.

=>> Clear Alarms (Y/N)?

1.13 Return to Default

Press "Y" to show the return to default screen.

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

1.14 Controller Reset

Press "Z" to show t he system reset screen.

>> Select ? *Redundant Primary Both

>> Reset – are you sure ? [Y/N]
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 19/202

2. DS1 (FE1) SUB-MENU

When FE1 port is selected, the following Port Menu will show up.
SLOT A FE1 === Port Menu === 08:13:11 01/09/2002

Version : SW V3.00 02/07/2001

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report S -> Unit System Setup
A -> Unit Line Availability K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
C -> Unit Configuration M -> Unit Alarm Setup
I -> Unit Status X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose a Port Y -> Unit Load Default Config
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu Z -> Unit Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

2.1 Unit 1-Hour Performance Report

Press “1” from FE1 Port Menu to view the 1-hour performance report. Use TAB key to select
register type, USER or LINE. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
SLOT A FE1 === Port 1-Hour Perf. Report === 08:17:45 01/09/2002

>> Select Register Type ? *USER LINE

After pressing ENTER from the above screen, the following screen will show up.
SLOT A FE1 === Port 1-Hour Perf. Report === 08:17:50 01/09/2002
USER
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 23 seconds
(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (DM) (CSS)
Current 15-Min Interval : 1 0 0 0 0 1
1st Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
2nd Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
3rd Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
4th Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0

(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (DM) (CSS)
Current 24-Hour Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
01/08/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
01/07/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
01/06/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
01/05/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
01/04/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
01/03/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
01/02/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

<< TAB key to show Statistics Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 20/202 DXC 5000

2.2 Unit 24-Hour Performance Report

Press “2” from FE1 Port Menu to view the 24-hour performance report. Use TAB key to
select register type, USER or LINE, press ENTER. Then move the cursor to select the
desired parameter. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
SLOT A FE1 === Port 24-Hour Perf. Report === 08:18:13 01/09/2002

>> Select Register Type ? *USER LINE

>> Select Parameter ? *ES UAS BES SES CSS DM AS EFS BPV

After pressing ENTER from the above screen, the following screen will show up.
SLOT A FE1 === Port 24-Hour Perf. Report === 08:18:27 01/09/2002
USER ES
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 60 seconds
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0
(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (DM) (CSS)
Current 15-Min Interval : 3 0 0 0 0 3
Current 24-Hour Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

-- USER, ES, Last 96 15-Min Interval :

01-08 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
09-16 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
17-24 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
25-32 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
33-40 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
41-48 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
49-56 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
57-64 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
65-72 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
73-80 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
81-88 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
89-96 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

<< TAB key to show Statistics Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

2.3 Unit Line Availability

Under Port Menu, press “A” to view the line availability as the following screen shows.
SLOT A FE1 === Port Line Availability === 08:18:37 01/09/2002

-- Line Availability during Last 24-Hour:

Valid Seconds : 70 seconds
Available Seconds : 70 seconds
Unavailable Seconds: 0 seconds
Line Avaliability : 100.0 %

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 21/202

2.4 Unit Configuration

To view the unit configuration, press “C” from Port Menu, then the screen will show as below.
SLOT A FE1 === Port System Setup === 08:18:53 01/09/2002

FRAME = ON
CODE = HDB3
CRC = ON
RAI = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
FDL = OFF
Sa_bit = Sa4
IDLE = D5
INTF = 120 Ohm

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

2.5 Unit Status

Press “I” from Port Menu, to show the screen of Unit Status as below.
SLOT A FE1 === Port Status === 08:19:05 01/09/2002

-- LINE --
LOS : NO
LOF : NO
RCV AIS : NO
RCV RAI : NO
XMT AIS : NO
XMT RAI : NO
BPV ERROR COUNT : 0
ES ERROR COUNT : 5

-- TEST --
PATTERN TRANSMITTED : OFF
NEAR-END LOOPBACK : OFF

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 22/202 DXC 5000

2.6 Unit Alarm History

To view the unit alarm history, press “H” from Port Menu.
SLOT A FE1 === Port Alarm History === 08:19:17 01/09/2002
LOCAL
[ALARM-TYPE] [THRESHOLD] [CURR-STATE] [COUNT] [ALARM]
RAI OK 2 ENABLE
AIS OK 0 ENABLE
LOS OK 2 ENABLE
LOF OK 3 ENABLE
BPV 10E-5 OK 1 ENABLE
ES 1 ALM 61 ENABLE
UAS 1 OK 95 ENABLE
CSS 1 ALM 154 ENABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

2.7 Unit Alarm Queue

Under Port Menu, press “Q” to view the alarm queue as the following screen shows.
SLOT A FE1 === Unit Alarm Queue === 08:20:41 01/09/2002
1 -- Slot A : LOF remove--------------------------08:20:37 01/09/2002
2 -- Slot A : LOS remove--------------------------08:20:37 01/09/2002
3 -- Slot A : LOF---------------------------------08:20:33 01/09/2002
4 -- Slot A : LOS---------------------------------08:20:33 01/09/2002

<< ESC key return to previous menu or SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 23/202

2.8 Unit Loopback Setup

Under Port Menu, press “L” to do Loopback Test, then the screen will show as below. Use
arrow keys to move the cursor, press ENTER key to select items.
SLOT A FE1 === Port Loopback Test === 08:14:32 01/09/2002
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

- NEAR-END LOOPBACK : *OFF LOCAL PLB LLB

- SEND LOOPBACK ACTIVATE CODE TO FAR-END:

*PAYLOAD LINE
- SEND LOOPBACK DEACTIVATE CODE TO FAR-END:
*PAYLOAD LINE
- SEND TEST PATTERN:
*OFF PRBS-FULL

- STATUS:

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

2.9 Unit System Setup

To setup unit system, press “S” from Port Menu, then the following screen will show up. Use
arrow keys to move the cursor, TAB key to roll up options.
SLOT A FE1 === Port System Setup === 08:14:47 01/09/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ON
CODE = HDB3
CRC = ON
RAI = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
FDL = OFF
Sa_bit = Sa4
IDLE = D5
INTF = 120 Ohm

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 24/202 DXC 5000

2.10 Unit Clear Performance Data

Press “K” from Port Menu to clear performance data, the screen will show as below. Press
“Y” or “N” to confirm the commend.
SLOT A FE1 === Port Menu === 08:14:53 01/09/2002

Version : SW V3.00 02/07/2001

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report S -> Unit System Setup
A -> Unit Line Availability K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
C -> Unit Configuration M -> Unit Alarm Setup
I -> Unit Status X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose a Port Y -> Unit Load Default Config
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu Z -> Unit Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

==> Clear performance data - are you sure [Y/N] ?

2.11 Unit Alarm Setup

To do alarm setup, press “M” from Port Menu, then the following screen will show up.
SLOT A FE1 === Port Alarm Setup === 08:15:41 01/09/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[TYPE] [THRESHOLD] [ALARM]

RAI ENABLE
AIS ENABLE
LOS ENABLE
LOF ENABLE
BPV 10E-5 ENABLE
ES 001 ENABLE
UAS 001 ENABLE
CSS 001 ENABLE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 25/202

2.12 Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History

Under Port Menu, press “X” to clear alarm queue and history, then press “Y” or ”N” to
confirm it.
SLOT A FE1 === Port Menu === 08:15:49 01/09/2002

Version : SW V3.00 02/07/2001

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report S -> Unit System Setup
A -> Unit Line Availability K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
C -> Unit Configuration M -> Unit Alarm Setup
I -> Unit Status X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose a Port Y -> Unit Load Default Config
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu Z -> Unit Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Clear alarm queue of SLOT A - are you sure ? [Y/N]

2.13 Unit Load Default Configuration

Press “Y” to return to default, then confirm it by pressing “Y” or “N”.
SLOT A FE1 === Port Menu === 08:20:49 01/09/2002

Version : SW V3.00 02/07/2001

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report S -> Unit System Setup
A -> Unit Line Availability K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
C -> Unit Configuration M -> Unit Alarm Setup
I -> Unit Status X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose a Port Y -> Unit Load Default Config
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu Z -> Unit Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 26/202 DXC 5000

2.14 Unit Reset

Under Port Menu, press “Z” to reset unit. Press “Y” or “N” to confirm it.
SLOT A FE1 === Port Menu === 08:20:49 01/09/2002

Version : SW V3.00 02/07/2001

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report S -> Unit System Setup
A -> Unit Line Availability K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
C -> Unit Configuration M -> Unit Alarm Setup
I -> Unit Status X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose a Port Y -> Unit Load Default Config
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu Z -> Unit Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

Reset - are you sure ? [Y/N]

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 27/202

3. QUAD E1/ T1 SUB-MENU

NOTE: The terminal operations for Quad E1 and Quad T1 are same. Only the
content information for "Unit System Setup" of Quad T1 is different
from Quad E1.
Under the Controller Menu, press “U” to choose a slot for Quad E1 port. The screen will
show as below. Then press “P” to choose E1 port, press ENTER to get into the port menu.
SLOT 11 Quad-E1 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 14:48:30 09/30/2003

Version : SW S1.E0 09/22/2003

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report S -> Unit System Setup
A -> Unit Line Availability K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
C -> Unit Configuration M -> Unit Alarm Setup
I -> Unit Status X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose E1 Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu
Port : 02

>> Ple ase inp ut E1 Port (1 -4) , th en pre ss E NTE R

This port menu is for Quad E1 Port 2.

SLOT 11 Quad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Menu === 14:48:40 09/30/2003

Version : SW S1.E0 09/22/2003

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report S -> Unit System Setup
A -> Unit Line Availability K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
C -> Unit Configuration M -> Unit Alarm Setup
I -> Unit Status X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose E1 Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 28/202 DXC 5000

3.1 Unit 1-Hour Performance Report

Press “1” from FE1 Port Menu to view the 1-hour performance report. Use TAB key to select
register type, USER or LINE. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
SLOT 11 Quad-E1 PORT 2=== Port 1-Hour Perf. Report === 14:48:50 09/30/2003

>> Select Register Type ? *USER LINE

After pressing ENTER from the above screen, the following screen will show up.
SLOT 11 Quad-E1 PORT 2=== Port 1-Hour Perf. Report === 14:49:02 09/30/2003
USER
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 833 seconds
(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (DM) (CSS)
Current 15-Min Interval : 0 833 0 0 0 140
1st Nearest 15-Min Interval : 0 900 0 0 0 150
2nd Nearest 15-Min Interval : 0 900 0 0 0 151
3rd Nearest 15-Min Interval : 0 900 0 0 0 151
4th Nearest 15-Min Interval : 0 0 0 0 0 0

-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 20

(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (DM) (CSS)
Current 24-Hour Interval : 0 18000 0 0 0 255
09/29/2003 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
09/28/2003 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
09/27/2003 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
09/26/2003 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
09/25/2003 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
09/24/2003 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
09/23/2003 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

<< TAB key to show Statistics Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 29/202

3.2 Unit 24-Hour Performance Report

Press “2” from FE1 Port Menu to view the 24-hour performance report. Use TAB key to
select register type, USER or LINE, press ENTER. Then move the cursor to select the
desired parameter. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
SLOT 11 Quad-E1 PORT 2=== Port 24-Hour Perf. Report === 14:49:26 09/30/2003

>> Select Register Type ? *USER LINE

>> Select Parameter ? *ES UAS BES SES CSS DM AS EFS BPV

After pressing ENTER from the above screen, the following screen will show up.
SLOT 11 Quad-E1 PORT 2=== Port 24-Hour Perf. Report === 14:49:38 09/30/2003
USER ES
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 869 seconds
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 20
(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (DM) (CSS)
Current 15-Min Interval : 0 869 0 0 0 146
Current 24-Hour Interval : 0 18000 0 0 0 255

-- USER, ES, Last 96 15-Min Interval :

01-08 > 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
09-16 > 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
17-24 > 0 0 0 0 ----- ----- ----- -----
25-32 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
33-40 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
41-48 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
49-56 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
57-64 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
65-72 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
73-80 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
81-88 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
89-96 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

<< TAB key to show Statistics Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

3.3 Unit Line Availability

Under Port Menu, press “A” to view the line availability as the following screen shows.
SLOT 11 Quad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Line Availability === 14:49:46 09/30/2003

-- Line Availability during Last 24-Hour:

Valid Seconds : 18877 seconds
Available Seconds : 0 seconds
Unavailable Seconds: 18877 seconds
Line Avaliability : 0.0 %

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 30/202 DXC 5000

3.4 Unit Configuration

To view the unit configuration, press “C” from Port Menu, then the screen will show as below.
There are four options are available for FDL item: OFF, SSM, FDL, and HDLC.
SLOT 11 Quad-E1 PORT 2 === Port System Setup === 14:49:53 09/30/2003

FRAME = ON
CODE = HDB3
CRC = ON
RAI = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
FDL = OFF
Sa_bit = Sa4
IDLE = D5
Protected = DISABLE
Master = ****
INTF = 120 Ohm

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

3.5 Unit Status

Press “I” from Port Menu, to show the screen of Unit Status as below. All of the
following cards support remote link identification: DTU-6, DTU-10, HDSL, G. SHDSL-2, G.
SHDSL-4, E1, QE1, and MiniQE1.
SLOT 11 Quad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Status === 14:50:03 09/30/2003

-- LINE --
LOS : YES -- REMOTE LINK IDENTIFICATION --
LOF : LOF TYPE: CPE
RCV AIS : NO SERIAL_NO :26224
RCV RAI : NO
XMT AIS : NO
XMT RAI : RAI
BPV ERROR COUNT : 0
ES ERROR COUNT : 0

-- TEST --
PATTERN TRANSMITTED : OFF
NEAR-END LOOPBACK : OFF

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 31/202

3.6 Unit Alarm History

To view the unit alarm history, press “H” from Port Menu.
SLOT 11 Quad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Alarm History === 14:50:11 09/30/2003
LOCAL
[ALARM-TYPE] [THRESHOLD] [CURR-STATE] [COUNT] [ALARM]
RAI DISABLE 0 DISABLE
AIS DISABLE 0 DISABLE
LOS DISABLE 0 DISABLE
LOF DISABLE 0 DISABLE
BPV 10E-5 DISABLE 0 DISABLE
ES 1 DISABLE 0 DISABLE
UAS 1 DISABLE 0 DISABLE
CSS 1 DISABLE 0 DISABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

3.7 Unit Alarm Queue

Under Port Menu, press “Q” to view the alarm queue as the following screen shows.
SLOT 11 Quad-E1 PORT 2 === Unit Alarm Queue === 14:50:19 09/30/2003
1 -- Slot 11: E1#1 ES remove--------------------11:18:34 09/30/2003
2 -- Slot 11: E1#1 ES ---------------------------11:18:33 09/30/2003
3 -- Slot 11: E1#1 CSS remove--------------------10:53:01 09/30/2003
4 -- Slot 11: E1#1 CSS---------------------------10:52:59 09/30/2003
5 -- Slot 11: E1#1 UAS remove--------------------10:52:59 09/30/2003
6 -- Slot 11: E1#1 UAS---------------------------10:52:58 09/30/2003

<< ESC key return to previous menu or SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 32/202 DXC 5000

3.8 Unit Loopback Setup

Under Port Menu, press “L” to do Loopback Test, then the screen will show as below. Use
arrow keys to move the cursor, press ENTER key to select items.
SLOT 11 Quad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Loopback Test === 14:50:32 09/30/2003
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

- NEAR-END LOOPBACK : *OFF LOCAL PLB LLB

- SEND LOOPBACK ACTIVATE CODE TO FAR-END:

*PAYLOAD LINE
- SEND LOOPBACK DEACTIVATE CODE TO FAR-END:
*PAYLOAD LINE
- SEND TEST PATTERN:
*OFF PRBS-FULL

- STATUS:

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

3.9 Unit System Setup

To setup unit system, press “S” from Port Menu, then the following screen will show up. Use
arrow keys to move the cursor, TAB key to roll up options.
NOTE: If "Protected" is set as DISABLE, then "Master" option will show 4
asterisks (****), which means this option is not allowed to set up.
For Quad E1:
SLOT 11 Quad-E1 PORT 2 === Port System Setup === 14:50:39 09/30/2003
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ON
CODE = HDB3
CRC = ON
RAI = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
FDL = OFF
Sa_bit = Sa4
IDLE = D5
Protected = DISABLE
Master = ****
INTF = 120 Ohm

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

NOTE: If "Protected" is set as CIRCUIT, then user can go to "Master" option

to set the current port as Master or Slave.
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 33/202

For Quad E1:

SLOT 7 Quad-E1 PORT 1 === Port System Setup === 11:27:15 07/02/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ON
CODE = HDB3
CRC = ON
RAI = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
FDL = OFF
Sa_bit = Sa4
IDLE = D5
Protected = CIRCUIT
Master = MASTER
INTF = 75 Ohm

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

NOTE: If "Protected" is set as LINE, then user is allowed to set "Master"

option as Master or Slave.
For Quad E1:
SLOT 1 Quad-E1 PORT 1 === Port System Setup === 11:30:50 07/02/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ON
CODE = HDB3
CRC = ON
RAI = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
FDL = OFF
Sa_bit = Sa4
IDLE = D5
Protected = LINE
Master = SLAVE
INTF = 120 Ohm

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

After done the setting, press ENTER. Then the system will ask for double confirm. Press "Y"
to change the current configuration or "N" to abort it. To save the new configuration, press
"V" from the "Controller Menu".
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 34/202 DXC 5000

For Quad E1:

SLOT 1 Quad-E1 PORT 1 === Port System Setup === 11:30:50 07/02/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ON
CODE = HDB3
CRC = ON
RAI = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
FDL = OFF
Sa_bit = Sa4
IDLE = D5
Protected = LINE
Master = SLAVE
INTF = 120 Ohm

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

NOTE: As user is setting "Protected" option, if the system occurs this

message on the screen: The next protect port is not ready, which
means the connection of protect port is not correct. Please see also
Appendix C of this menu for the correct operations.
For Quad E1:
SLOT 7 Quad-E1 PORT 1 === Port System Setup === 11:27:15 07/02/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ON
CODE = HDB3
CRC = ON
RAI = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
FDL = OFF
Sa_bit = Sa4
IDLE = D5
Protected = CIRCUIT
Master = MASTER
INTF = 75 Ohm

The next protect port is not ready

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 35/202

For Quad T1:

SLOT 1 Quad-T1 PORT 1 === Port System Setup === 11:08:45 08/30/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ESF
CODE = B8ZS
YEL = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
INBAND = OFF
IDLE = FF
INTF = LONG HAUL
LBO = 0 dB
FDL = FDL
Protected = DISABLE
Master = ****

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

3.10 Unit Clear Performance Data

Press “K” from Port Menu to clear performance data, the screen will show as below. Press
“Y” or “N” to confirm the commend.
SLOT 11 Quad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Menu === 14:50:45 09/30/2003

Version : SW S1.E0 09/22/2003

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report S -> Unit System Setup
A -> Unit Line Availability K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
C -> Unit Configuration M -> Unit Alarm Setup
I -> Unit Status X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose E1 Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

==> Clear performance data - are you sure [Y/N] ?

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 36/202 DXC 5000

3.11 Unit Alarm Setup

To do alarm setup, press “M” from Port Menu, then the following screen will show up.
SLOT 11 Quad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Alarm Setup === 14:50:59 09/30/2003
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[TYPE] [THRESHOLD] [ALARM]

RAI DISABLE
AIS DISABLE
LOS DISABLE
LOF DISABLE
BPV 10E-5 DISABLE
ES 001 DISABLE
UAS 001 DISABLE
CSS 001 DISABLE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

3.12 Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History

Under Port Menu, press “X” to clear alarm queue and history, then press “Y” or ”N” to
confirm it.
SLOT 11 Quad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Menu === 14:51:05 09/30/2003

Version : SW S1.E0 09/22/2003

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report S -> Unit System Setup
A -> Unit Line Availability K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
C -> Unit Configuration M -> Unit Alarm Setup
I -> Unit Status X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose E1 Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Clear alarm queue of SLOT 11 - are you sure ? [Y/N]

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 37/202

3.13 Unit Upgrade Firmware

Press “D” to download firmware, then the screen will show as below. Use arrow keys to
move the cursor and SPACE key to edit.
DXC 5000 === Download Firmware === 14:51:21 09/30/2003
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

Bank 1 Firmware Ver. : S1.E0 09/22/2003 (Bad)

Bank 2 Firmware Ver. : S1.E0 09/22/2003 (Bad)
Working Firmware Bank: 1
TFTP Server IP : 000.000.000.000
Firmware File Name :

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

3.14 Unit Load Default Configuration

Press “Y” to return to default, then confirm it by pressing “Y” or “N”.
SLOT 11 Quad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Menu === 14:51:29 09/30/2003

Version : SW S1.E0 09/22/2003

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report S -> Unit System Setup
A -> Unit Line Availability K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
C -> Unit Configuration M -> Unit Alarm Setup
I -> Unit Status X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose E1 Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 38/202 DXC 5000

3.15 Unit Reset

Under Port Menu, press “Z” to reset unit. Press “Y” or “N” to confirm it.
SLOT 11 Quad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Menu === 14:51:29 09/30/2003

Version : SW S1.E0 09/22/2003

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report S -> Unit System Setup
A -> Unit Line Availability K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
C -> Unit Configuration M -> Unit Alarm Setup
I -> Unit Status X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose E1 Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

Reset - are you sure ? [Y/N]

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 39/202

4. DS1 (FT1) SUB-MENU

When FT1 port is selected, the following Port Menu will show up.
SLOT D FT1 === Port Menu === 08:21:38 01/09/2002

Version : SW V3.02 07/15/2001

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report S -> Unit System Setup
A -> Unit Line Availability K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
C -> Unit Configuration M -> Unit Alarm Setup
I -> Unit Status X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu Z -> Unit Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

4.1 Unit 1-Hour Performance Report

Press “1” from FT1 Port Menu to view the 1-hour performance report. Use TAB key to select
register type, USER or LINE. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
SLOT D FT1 === Port 1-Hour Perf. Report === 08:23:03 01/09/2002

>> Select Register Type ? *USER LINE

After pressing ENTER from the above screen, the following screen will show up.
SLOT D FT1 === Port 1-Hour Perf. Report === 08:23:03 01/09/2002
USER
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 94 seconds
(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (CSS) (LOFC)
Current 15-Min Interval : 0 94 0 0 0 1
1st Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
2nd Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
3rd Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
4th Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0

(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (CSS) (LOFC)
Current 24-Hour Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

<< TAB key to show Statistics Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 40/202 DXC 5000

4.2 Unit 24-Hour Performance Report

Press “2” from FE1 Port Menu to view the 24-hour performance report. Use TAB key to
select register type, USER or LINE, press ENTER. Then move the cursor to select the
desired parameter. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
SLOT D FT1 === Port 24-Hour Perf. Report === 08:23:29 01/09/2002

>> Select Register Type ? *USER LINE

>> Select Parameter ? *ES UAS BES SES CSS LOFC AS EFS BPV ESF

After pressing ENTER from the above screen, the following screen will show up.
SLOT D FT1 === Port 24-Hour Perf. Report === 08:23:32 01/09/2002
USER ES
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 124 seconds
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0
(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (CSS) (LOFC)
Current 15-Min Interval : 0 124 0 0 0 1
Current 24-Hour Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

-- USER, ES, Last 96 15-Min Interval :

01-08 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
09-16 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
17-24 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
25-32 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
33-40 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
41-48 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
49-56 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
57-64 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
65-72 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
73-80 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
81-88 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
89-96 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

<< TAB key to show Statistics Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

4.3 Unit Line Availability

Under Port Menu, press “A” to view the line availability as the following screen shows.
SLOT D FT1 === Port Line Availability === 08:23:41 01/09/2002

-- Line Availability during Last 24-Hour:

Valid Seconds : 132 seconds
Available Seconds : 0 seconds
Unavailable Seconds: 132 seconds
Line Availability : 0.0 %

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 41/202

4.4 Unit Configuration

To view the unit configuration, press “C” from Port Menu, then the screen will show as below.
SLOT D FT1 === Port System Setup === 08:23:47 01/09/2002

FRAME = ESF
CODE = B8ZS
YEL = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
INBAND = OFF
IDLE = FF
INTF = LONG HAUL
LBO = 0 dB

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

4.5 Unit Status

Press “I” from Port Menu, to show the screen of Unit Status as below.
SLOT D FT1 === Port Status === 08:23:51 01/09/2002

-- LINE --
LOS : YES
LOF : YES
RCV AIS : NO
RCV YEL : NO
XMT AIS : NO
XMT YEL : YEL
BPV ERROR COUNT : 0
ES ERROR COUNT : 0

-- TEST --
PATTERN TRANSMITTED : OFF
NEAR-END LOOPBACK : OFF

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 42/202 DXC 5000

4.6 Unit Alarm History

To view the unit alarm history, press “H” from Port Menu.
SLOT D FT1 === Port Alarm History === 08:23:56 01/09/2002
LOCAL
[ALARM-TYPE] [THRESHOLD] [CURR-STATE] [COUNT] [ALARM]
YEL OK 0 ENABLE
AIS OK 0 ENABLE
LOS ALM 1 ENABLE
LOF ALM 1 ENABLE
BPV 10E-5 OK 0 ENABLE
ES 1 OK 0 ENABLE
UAS 1 OK 0 ENABLE
CSS 1 OK 0 ENABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

4.7 Unit Alarm Queue

Under Port Menu, press “Q” to view the alarm queue as the following screen shows.
SLOT D FT1 === Unit Alarm Queue === 08:24:01 01/09/2002
1 -- Slot D : LOF---------------------------------08:21:33 01/09/2002
2 -- Slot D : LOS---------------------------------08:21:33 01/09/2002

<< ESC key return to previous menu or SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 43/202

4.8 Unit Loopback Setup

Under Port Menu, press “L” to do Loopback Test, then the screen will show as below. Use
arrow keys to move the cursor, press ENTER key to select items.
SLOT D FT1 === Port Loopback Test === 08:22:06 01/09/2002
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

- NEAR-END LOOPBACK : *OFF LOCAL PLB LLB

- SEND LOOPBACK ACTIVATE CODE TO FAR-END:

*IN-BAND AT&T-P ANSI-P ANSI-L
- SEND LOOPBACK DEACTIVATE CODE TO FAR-END:
*IN-BAND AT&T-P ANSI-P ANSI-L
- SEND TEST PATTERN:
*OFF QRSS-FULL

- STATUS:

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

4.9 Unit System Setup

To setup unit system, press “S” from Port Menu, then the following screen will show up. Use
arrow keys to move the cursor, TAB key to roll up options.
SLOT D FT1 === Port System Setup === 08:22:12 01/09/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ESF
CODE = B8ZS
YEL = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
INBAND = OFF
IDLE = FF
INTF = LONG HAUL
LBO = 0 dB

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 44/202 DXC 5000

4.10 Unit Clear Performance Data

Press “K” from Port Menu to clear performance data, the screen will show as below. Press
“Y” or “N” to confirm the commend.

==> Clear performance data - are you sure [Y/N] ?

4.11 Unit Alarm Setup

To do alarm setup, press “M” from Port Menu, then the following screen will show up.
SLOT D FT1 === Port Alarm Setup === 08:22:24 01/09/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[TYPE] [THRESHOLD] [ALARM]

YEL ENABLE
AIS ENABLE
LOS ENABLE
LOF ENABLE
BPV 10E-5 ENABLE
ES 001 ENABLE
UAS 001 ENABLE
CSS 001 ENABLE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

4.12 Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History

Under Port Menu, press “X” to clear alarm queue and history, then press “Y” or ”N” to
confirm it.

>> Clear alarm queue of SLOT D - are you sure ? [Y/N]

4.13 Unit Load Default Configuration

Press “Y” to return to default, then confirm it by pressing “Y” or “N”.

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

4.14 Unit Reset

Under Port Menu, press “Z” to reset unit. Press “Y” or “N” to confirm it.

Reset - are you sure ? [Y/N]

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 45/202

5. U-PORT SUB-MENU (10-PORT)

Then the following Port Menu of DTU-port will show as below.
SLOT 10 DTU PORT 1 === Port Menu === 10:41:02 07/06/2006

Version : SW V2.01.01 07/03/2006

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
D -> System Configuration S -> System Setup
I -> Remote Information L -> Loopback Test
H -> Alarm History M -> Alarm Setup
R -> Performance Report K -> Clear all Ports Performance Data
C -> Line Status X -> Clear U port CRC Error
G -> Upgrade Firmware

[LOG] [MISC]
F -> Log Off B -> Load and Reset current U port
O -> Log On Y -> Reset current U port
U -> Choose Other Slot Z -> Reset DTU card
P -> Choose DTU Port
E -> Return to Main Menu

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

5.1 System Configuration

To view the screen of System Configuration, press "D" from the Port Menu.
EXAMPLE 1:
SLOT 2 DTU PORT 2 === System Configuration === 14:23:01 10/19/2000

[DTU SETUP] ****** Local ****** **** Remote DTUs ****

Master Clock : Internal Internal

Operating Mode : D-channel D-channel
Protocol : M-channel M-channel

[Remote DTU] [Speed] [Channel] [Clock] [Data] [RTS] [TTM] [Interface]

Unit 12# 1: 19.2K B1+B2 Inverted Inverted Permanent Off RS232 X.50
Unit 12# 2: 19.2K B1+B2 Inverted Inverted Permanent Off RS232 X.50
Unit 12# 3: 19.2K B1+B2 Inverted Inverted Permanent Off RS232 X.50
Unit 12# 4: 19.2K B1+B2 Inverted Inverted Permanent Off RS232 X.50
Unit 12# 5: 19.2K B1+B2 Inverted Inverted Permanent Off RS232 X.50
Unit 12# 6: 19.2K B1+B2 Inverted Inverted Permanent Off RS232 X.50
Unit 12# 7: 19.2K B1+B2 Inverted Inverted Permanent Off RS232 X.50
Unit 12# 8: 19.2K B1+B2 Inverted Inverted Permanent Off RS232 X.50
Unit 12# 9: 19.2K B1+B2 Inverted Inverted Permanent Off RS232 X.50
Unit 12#10: 19.2K B1+B2 Inverted Inverted Permanent Off RS232 X.50

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 46/202 DXC 5000

EXAMPLE 2:
SLOT 2 DTU PORT 2 === System Configuration === 14:45:09 06/12/2002

[DTU SETUP] ****** Local ****** **** Remote DTUs ****

Master Clock : Internal Line

Operating Mode : LT NT
Protocol : M-channel M-channel

[Remote DTU] [Speed] [Channel] [Clock] [Data] [RTS] [TTM] [Interface]

Unit 2# 1: Empty
Unit 2# 2: 64K B1 N/A N/A N/A N/A G.703
Unit 2# 3: Empty
Unit 2# 4: Empty
Unit 2# 5: Empty
Unit 2# 6: 64K B1 Normal Normal Active Off RS232 X.50
Unit 2# 7: Empty
Unit 2# 8: Empty
Unit 2# 9: Empty
Unit 2#10: Empty

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

5.2 Remote Information

Under the Port Menu, press "I" to view the screen of Remote Information.
SLOT 2 DTU PORT 2 === Remote DTUs Information === 14:23:08 10/19/2000

[DTU] [Date] [Serial Number] [Software Version] [Configuration]

LOCAL: 01/97 1238 v 1.30 07/22/1997 1 DTU port
12# 1: 01/97 1238 v 1.30 07/22/1997 1 DTU port
12# 2: 01/97 1238 v 1.30 07/22/1997 1 DTU port
12# 3: 01/97 1238 v 1.30 07/22/1997 1 DTU port
12# 4: 01/97 1238 v 1.30 07/22/1997 1 DTU port
12# 5: 01/97 1238 v 1.30 07/22/1997 1 DTU port
12# 6: 01/97 1238 v 1.30 07/22/1997 1 DTU port
12# 7: 01/97 1238 v 1.30 07/22/1997 1 DTU port
12# 8: 01/97 1238 v 1.30 07/22/1997 1 DTU port
12# 9: 01/97 1238 v 1.30 07/22/1997 1 DTU port
12#10: 01/97 1238 v 1.30 07/22/1997 1 DTU port

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 47/202

5.3 Alarm History

Under the Port Menu, press "H" to view the screen of Alarm History.
SLOT 2 DTU PORT 2 === Alarm History === 14:23:16 10/19/2000

[Port] [State] [Count] [Alarm]

Unit 12# 1: OK 0 DISABLE

Unit 12# 2: OK 0 DISABLE
Unit 12# 3: OK 0 DISABLE
Unit 12# 4: OK 0 DISABLE
Unit 12# 5: OK 0 DISABLE
Unit 12# 6: OK 0 DISABLE
Unit 12# 7: OK 0 DISABLE
Unit 12# 8: OK 0 DISABLE
Unit 12# 9: OK 0 DISABLE
Unit 12#10: OK 0 DISABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

5.4 Performance Report

To view the screen of Performance Report, press "R" from the Port Menu.
SLOT 2 DTU PORT 2 === Performance Report === 14:23:23 10/19/2000

U port : Unit 12# 1 Line Unsync

[15 Minute Registers]
[---------Unavailable Seconds---------]
Current: 97
01-08 14:15 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
09-16 12:15 . . . . . . . .
17-24 10:15 . . . . . . . .
25-32 08:15 . . . . . . . .
33-40 06:15 . . . . . . . .
41-48 04:15 . . . . . . . .
49-56 02:15 . . . . . . . .
57-64 00:15 . . . . . . . .
65-72 22:15 . . . . . . . .
73-80 20:15 . . . . . . . .
81-88 18:15 . . . . . . . .
89-96 16:15 . . . . . . . .

[24 Hour Registers]

[10/19] [10/18] [10/17] [10/16] [10/15] [10/14] [10/13] [10/12]
UAS: 20 20 20 20 20 . . .

<< ESC key: Exit; SPACE bar: Refresh; TAB key: Next Unit; Z key: Reset >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 48/202 DXC 5000

5.5 System Setup

Remote Router Setup:
Press "S" to setup the system, the screen will show as below. There are five options are
available: DSO MAP, LAN1,WAN1,WAN2, Static Route, Router Reset, and Router Load
Default. Move the cursor to the desired option, then press ENTER. The current selection will
be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
SLOT 2 DTU PORT 2 ====== U Remote Router Setup ====== 10:57:58 02/08/2002

<< DS0 MAP >>

[DTU SETUP] ****** LOCAL ****** ****** REMOTE ******

Master Clock : Internal Line
Operating Mode: LT NT
Remote Link : M-channel M-channel

[ROUTER]

*DS0 MAP
LAN1,WAN1,WAN2
Static Route
Router Reset
Router Load Default

<< Select item or press ESC to return >>

Remote DTE Setup:

SLOT 2 DTU PORT 2 === System and Remote DTE Setup === 14:45:27 06/12/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Line Sync

[DTU SETUP] ****** LOCAL ****** ****** REMOTE ******

Master Clock : Internal Line
Operating Mode: LT NT
Remote Link : M-channel M-channel

[DTE SETUP] [DTE-1]

Speed : SYNC
64K
Channel : B1
Clock :
Data :
RTS :
TTM :
Interface : G.703

<< ESC key to previous menu, SPACE bar to another page >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 49/202

5.5.1 U Remote Router Setup - DS0 MAP

Move the cursor to “DS0 MAP”, then press ENTER. The screen will show as below.
SLOT 2 DTU PORT 2 ====== U Remote Router Setup ====== 10:57:58 02/08/2002

<< DS0 MAP >>

[DTU SETUP] ****** LOCAL ****** ****** REMOTE ******

Master Clock : Internal Line
Operating Mode: LT NT
Remote Link : M-channel M-channel

[ROUTER]

*DS0 MAP
LAN1,WAN1,WAN2
Static Route
Router Reset
Router Load Default

<< Select item or press ESC to return >>

Press ENTER from the above menu. The following screen will show up.
SLOT 2 DTU PORT 2 ====== U Remote Router Setup ====== 10:57:58 02/08/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Channel WANPort
B1 : WAN1
B2 : Idle

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 50/202 DXC 5000

5.5.2 U Remote Router Setup - LAN1,WAN1,WAN2

Press “S” from Port Menu. Then move the cursor to “LAN1,WAN1,WAN2”.
SLOT 2 DTU PORT 2 ====== U Remote Router Setup ====== 10:57:58 02/08/2002

<< DS0 MAP >>

[DTU SETUP] ****** LOCAL ****** ****** REMOTE ******

Master Clock : Internal Line
Operating Mode: LT NT
Remote Link : M-channel M-channel

[ROUTER]

DS0 MAP
*LAN1,WAN1,WAN2
Static Route
Router Reset
Router Load Default

<< Select item or press ESC to return >>

Press ENTER from the above menu. The following screen will show up.
SLOT 2 DTU PORT 2 ====== U Remote Router Setup ====== 10:57:58 02/08/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

NI IPAddress SubnetMask Frame RIP_I RIP_II Mode

LAN1 140.153.001.254 255.255.000.000 ETHERNET DISABLE ENABLE ROUTE
WAN1 140.136.001.253 255.255.000.000 PPP DISABLE ENABLE ROUTE
WAN2 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 51/202

5.5.3 U Remote Router Setup - Static Route

Press “S” from Port Menu. Then move the cursor to “Static Route”.
SLOT 2 DTU PORT 2 ====== U Remote Router Setup ====== 10:57:58 02/08/2002

<< DS0 MAP >>

[DTU SETUP] ****** LOCAL ****** ****** REMOTE ******

Master Clock : Internal Line
Operating Mode: LT NT
Remote Link : M-channel M-channel

[ROUTER]

DS0 MAP
LAN1,WAN1,WAN2
*Static Route
Router Reset
Router Load Default

<< Select item or press ESC to return >>

Press ENTER from the above menu. The screen will show as below.
SLOT 2 DTU PORT 2 ====== U Remote Router Setup ====== 10:57:58 02/08/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit
<< Static Route >>
Net_Address Netmask Gateway_Address NI_Address Metric
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 52/202 DXC 5000

5.5.4 U Remote Router Setup - Router Reset

Press “S” from Port Menu. Then move the cursor to “Router Reset”. Press ENTER to reset
Router.
SLOT 2 DTU PORT 2 ====== U Remote Router Setup ====== 10:57:58 02/08/2002

<< DS0 MAP >>

[DTU SETUP] ****** LOCAL ****** ****** REMOTE ******

Master Clock : Internal Line
Operating Mode: LT NT
Remote Link : M-channel M-channel

[ROUTER]

DS0 MAP
LAN1,WAN1,WAN2
Static Route
*Router Reset
Router Load Default

<< Select item or press ESC to return >>

5.5.5 U Remote Router Setup - Router Load Default

Press “S” from Port Menu. Then move the cursor to “Router Reset”. Press ENTER to load
default.
SLOT 2 DTU PORT 2 ====== U Remote Router Setup ====== 10:57:58 02/08/2002

<< DS0 MAP >>

[DTU SETUP] ****** LOCAL ****** ****** REMOTE ******

Master Clock : Internal Line
Operating Mode: LT NT
Remote Link : M-channel M-channel

[ROUTER]

DS0 MAP
LAN1,WAN1,WAN2
Static Route
Router Reset
*Router Load Default

<< Select item or press ESC to return >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 53/202

5.6 Loopback Test

Press "L" to setup the loopback test.
SLOT 2 DTU PORT 2 === Loopback and Test === 14:22:46 10/19/2000
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE; ENTER KEY: ITEM SELECT; TAB,'`': NEXT/PREV UNIT

U port : Unit 12# 1 Line Unsync

Near Loopback : *OFF LOCAL PAYLOAD

Remote Loopback : *OFF PAYLOAD DTE
Send Test Pattern : *OFF ON
Status :

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

5.7 Alarm Setup

Press "M" to configure the alarm setup.
SLOT 2 DTU PORT 2 === Alarm Setup === 14:22:53 10/19/2000
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[Port] [Alarm] [Relay]

Unit 12# 1: DISABLE DISABLE

Unit 12# 2: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 12# 3: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 12# 4: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 12# 5: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 12# 6: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 12# 7: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 12# 8: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 12# 9: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 12#10: DISABLE DISABLE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu or save setup >>

5.8 Clear 10 Ports Performance Data

Press "Y" to clear performance data.

=>> Clear All Performance Data (Y/N) ?

5.9 Clear U Port CRC Error

Use TAB key to select LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL PORT,and press ENTER to clear CRC
Error.

>> Use TAB key to select, and ENTER key to clear CRC Error: LOCAL
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 54/202 DXC 5000

5.10 Upgrade Firmware

To updrade the Firmware, press "G".
DXC 5000 === Download Firmware === 16:02:46 07/14/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

Bank 1 Firmware Ver. : V2.01.01 03/03/2006 (Good)

Bank 2 Firmware Ver. : V2.01.01 03/03/2006 (Good)
Working Firmware Bank: 1
TFTP Server IP : 192.168.1.1
Firmware File Name : dtu_f.run

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

5.11 Load and Reset Current U Port

Press "B" to load and reset the current U port.

>> Reset – are you sure ? [Y/N]

5.12 Reset Current U Port

Press "Z" to reset the current U port.

>> Reset – are you sure ? [Y/N]

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 55/202

6. U-PORT SUB-MENU (6-PORT)

Press "U" from the controller menu, then choose DTU port. The port menu for DTU port will
show as below.
SLOT 6 DTU PORT 1 === Port Menu === 17:07:52 07/26/2001

Version : SW V1.00 07/25/2001

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
D -> System Configuration S -> System Setup
I -> Remote Information L -> Loopback Test
H -> Alarm History M -> Alarm Setup
R -> Performance Report

[LOG] [MISC]
F -> Log Off Y -> Clear all Ports Performance Data
O -> Log On B -> Load and Reset current U port
U -> Choose Other Slot Z -> Reset current U port
P -> Choose DTU Port
E -> Return to Main Menu

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

6.1 System Configuration

Press "D" from the above menu to view the system configuration.
SLOT 6 DTU PORT 1 === System Configuration === 17:08:26 07/26/2001

[DTU SETUP] ****** Local ****** **** Remote DTUs ****

Master Clock : Internal Line

Operating Mode : LT NT
Protocol : M-channel M-channel

[Remote DTU] [Speed] [Channel] [Clock] [Data] [RTS] [TTM] [Interface]

Unit 6# 1: 64K B1 Normal Normal Active Off V.35

Unit 6# 2: Empty
Unit 6# 3: Empty
Unit 6# 4: Empty
Unit 6# 5: Empty
Unit 6# 6: Empty

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 56/202 DXC 5000

6.2 Remote Information

Press "I" from the port menu to view the remote DTU information, then the screen will show
as below. All of the following cards support remote link identification: DTU-6, DTU-10, HDSL,
G. SHDSL-2, G. SHDSL-4, E1, QE1, and MiniQE1.
SLOT 6 DTU PORT 1 === Remote DTUs Information === 17:08:47 07/26/2001

[DTU] [Date] [Serial Number] [Software Version] [Configuration]

6# 1: 10/00 27626 V 1.37 08/19/2000 1 DTU port

6# 2: EMPTY
6# 3: EMPTY
6# 4: EMPTY
6# 5: EMPTY
6# 6: EMPTY

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

6.3 Alarm History

To view the alarm history, press "H" from the port menu, then the following screen will show.
SLOT 6 DTU PORT 1 === Alarm History === 17:08:54 07/26/2001

[Port] [State] [Count] [Alarm]

Unit 6# 1: OK 0 DISABLE
Unit 6# 2: OK 0 DISABLE
Unit 6# 3: OK 0 DISABLE
Unit 6# 4: OK 0 DISABLE
Unit 6# 5: OK 0 DISABLE
Unit 6# 6: OK 0 DISABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 57/202

6.4 Performance Report

To view the performance report, press "R" from the port menu, then the following screen will
show.
SLOT 6 DTU PORT 1 === Performance Report === 17:08:58 07/26/2001

U port : Unit 6# 1 Line SYNC

[15 Minute Registers]
[---------Unavailable Seconds---------]
Current: 8
01-08 17:00 . . . . . . . .
09-16 15:00 . . . . . . . .
17-24 13:00 . . . . . . . .
25-32 11:00 . . . . . . . .
33-40 09:00 . . . . . . . .
41-48 07:00 . . . . . . . .
49-56 05:00 . . . . . . . .
57-64 03:00 . . . . . . . .
65-72 01:00 . . . . . . . .
73-80 23:00 . . . . . . . .
81-88 21:00 . . . . . . . .
89-96 19:00 . . . . . . . .

[24 Hour Registers]

[ 7/26] [ 7/25] [ 7/24] [ 7/23] [ 7/22] [ 7/21] [ 7/20] [ 7/19]
UAS: . . . . . . . .

<< ESC key: Exit; SPACE bar: Refresh; TAB key: Next Unit; Z key: Reset >>

6.5 System and Remote DTE Setup

Press "S" from the port menu to setup the system, then the following screen will show.
SLOT 6 DTU PORT 1 === System and Remote DTE Setup === 17:08:08 07/26/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Line Sync

[DTU SETUP] ****** LOCAL ****** ****** REMOTE ******

Master Clock : Internal Line
Operating Mode: LT NT
Remote Link : M-channel M-channel

[DTE SETUP] [DTE-1]

Speed : SYNC
64K
Channel : B1
Clock : Normal
Data : Normal
RTS : Active
TTM : Off
Interface : V.35

<< ESC key to previous menu, SPACE bar to another page >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 58/202 DXC 5000

6.6 Loopback and Test

Press "L" from the port menu to setup the loopback, then the screen will show as below.
SLOT 6 DTU PORT 1 === Loopback and Test === 17:08:14 07/26/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE; ENTER KEY: ITEM SELECT; TAB,'`': NEXT/PREV UNIT

U port : Unit 6# 1 Line SYNC

Near Loopback : *OFF LOCAL PAYLOAD

Remote Loopback : *OFF PAYLOAD DTE
Send Test Pattern : *OFF ON
Status :

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

6.7 Alarm Setup

Press "M" from the port menu to setup the alarm, then the screen will show as below.
SLOT 6 DTU PORT 1 === Alarm Setup === 17:08:17 07/26/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[Port] [Alarm] [Relay]

Unit 6# 1: DISABLE DISABLE

Unit 6# 2: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 6# 3: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 6# 4: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 6# 5: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 6# 6: DISABLE DISABLE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu or save setup >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 59/202

7. HDSL SUB-MENU
Under the Controller Menu, press “U” to choose a slot for the HDSL port.
DXC 5000 === Controller Menu === 09:54:25 06/02/2005

Serial Number : 53023 Redundant Controller: Disabled

Hardware Version: Ver.D Start Time : 19:16:09 06/01/2005
Software Version: S4.B4 06/01/2005

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Configuration S -> System Setup
B -> Clock source Configuration M -> System Alarm Setup
Q -> Alarm Queue Summary W -> Firmware Transfer
I -> Information Summary V -> Store/Retrieve Configuration
K -> Clock source Setup
T -> Bit Error Rate Test

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose a Slot A -> Alarm Cut Off
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu X -> Clear Alarm Queue
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu Y -> Controller Return to Default
Z -> Controller Reset

==>> Input the unit number (A~D or 1~12): 9

Then the following Port Menu of HDSL-port will show as below.

SLOT 4 - HDSL#1 === Port Menu === 10:37:34 07/06/2006

Version : SW V2.01.02 04/27/2006

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> HDSL Configuration S -> System Setup
I -> HDSL Status L -> Loopback Test
H -> Alarm History M -> Alarm Setup
R -> Performance Report B -> Line Rate
G -> Upgrade Firmware

[LOG] [MISC]
F -> Log Off Y -> Clear Performance Data
O -> Log On Z -> Reset current HDSL board
U -> Choose Other Slot D -> Port Return to Default
P -> Choose HDSL Port
E -> Return to Main Menu

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 60/202 DXC 5000

7.1 Unit Configuration

By pressing "C", the unit setup menu is displayed as follows.
DXC 5000 === Unit Configuration === 14:43:20 10/19/2000

Slot 9: HDSL#1 Line Rate: 784Kbps (1 pair)

[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]

HDSL MODE : MASTER NA

E1 Time Slots :
[111iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii]
HDSL carries E1 time slots as:
TS 01 02 03

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

7.2 Unit Status

To enter the xDSL status menu, press " I ". The following screen appears. All of the following
cards support remote link identification: DTU-6, DTU-10, HDSL, G. SHDSL-2, G. SHDSL-4,
E1, QE1, and MiniQE1.
DXC 5000 === Unit Status === 14:43:34 10/19/2000

Slot 9: HDSL#1 Line Rate: 784Kbps (1 pair)

[------------- MASTER ------------] [------------- SLAVE -------------]
S/W: V1.00 10/17/2000 Serial Number: 24264
[LOOP-1] [LOOP-1] [DTE]
SYNC : NO SYNC : NO DSR : NA
ES : 0 ES : 0 CTS : NA
SES : 0 SES : 0 DCD : NA
UAS : 176 UAS : 176 DTR : NA
RTS : NA

[Loopback Status]
HDSL Loopback : OFF
SLAVE Loopback : OFF
BERT : OFF

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 61/202

7.3 Alarm History

To show the alarm history report, enter "H". The count column, [Cnt], is the total alarm
occurrences. The state column is the current alarm state.
DXC 5000 === Unit Alarm History === 14:43:46 10/19/2000
Slot 9: HDSL#1

[----Alarm Type----][Cnt][Sta][-Setup-]
LOS,MASTER-LOOP 1 DIS DIS
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP 1 DIS DIS
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP 0 DIS DIS 0
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP 0 DIS DIS 0
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP 0 DIS DIS 0
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP 0 DIS DIS 0
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP 0 DIS DIS 0
ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP 0 DIS DIS 0
SES24H,MASTER-LOOP 0 DIS DIS 0
SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP 0 DIS DIS 0

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

7.4 Performance Report

To view the performance report of xDSL, enter "R".
DXC 5000 === Unit Performance Report === 14:43:54 10/19/2000
Slot 9: HDSL#1
Location: MASTER-LOOP1
Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 196 seconds
Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-hour: 0
[15 Minute registers]
[------ ES ------] [------ SES -----] [------ UAS -----]
Current: 0 0 196
1-4 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-12 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-16 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
17-20 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
21-24 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
25-28 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
29-32 : . . . . . . . . . . . .

[24 hour registers]

[Current] [ 1 ] [ 2 ] [ 3 ] [ 4 ] [ 5 ] [ 6 ] [ 7 ]
ES : 0 . . . . . . .
SES: 0 . . . . . . .
UAS: 196 . . . . . . .

<<TAB to change location, SPACE bar to refresh, ESC to return to previous menu>>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 62/202 DXC 5000

7.5 System Setup

Press “S” to setup the system.
DXC 5000 === Unit Setup === 14:43:20 10/19/2000
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Slot 9: HDSL#1 Line Rate: 784Kbps (1 pair)

[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]

HDSL MODE : MASTER HDSL MODE : SLAVE
[Router]
Mode: ROUTER
LAN interface
IP Address: 140.150.001.254
Subnet Mask: 255.255.000.000

E1 Time Slots : WAN interface

[1iiiiiiiiiiiiii111111111iiiiiii] IP Address: 140.133.001.253
HDSL carries E1 time slots as: Subnet Mask: 255.255.000.000
TS 01 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Default Gateway: 140.133.001.254

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

7.6 Loopback and Test

To enter the Loopback and Test screen, press "L". The following screen appears.
DXC 5000 === Unit Loopback and Test === 14:44:12 10/19/2000
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT
Slot 9: HDSL#1
[TEST MENU]
HDSL Loopback : *OFF TO-E1
Slave Loopback : *OFF DTE-TO-LINE HDSL-TO-LINE DTE-TO-DTE HDSL-TO-DTE
BERT : *OFF ON

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 63/202

7.7 Alarm Setup

To set up the alarm configuration, press "M". The following screen is displayed.
DXC 5000 === Unit Alarm Setup === 14:44:18 10/19/2000
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Slot 9: HDSL#1
[----- Type ------] [Alarm] [Threshold]
LOS,MASTER-LOOP DISABLE
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP DISABLE
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP DISABLE 000
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP DISABLE 000
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP DISABLE 000
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP DISABLE 000
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP DISABLE 00000
ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP DISABLE 00000
SES24H,MASTER-LOOP DISABLE 00000
SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP DISABLE 00000

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

7.8 Line Rate

To view the line rate, press "B".
DXC 5000 === Line Rate === 14:44:26 10/19/2000
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

LINE RATE : 784Kbps

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 64/202 DXC 5000

7.9 Upgrade Firmware

To updrade the Firmware, press "G".
DXC 5000 === Download Firmware === 16:02:46 07/14/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

Bank 1 Firmware Ver. : V2.01.01 03/03/2006 (Good)

Bank 2 Firmware Ver. : V2.01.01 03/03/2006 (Good)
Working Firmware Bank: 1
TFTP Server IP : 192.168.1.1
Firmware File Name : hdsl_f.run

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 65/202

8. DTE (V.35) SUB-MENU

Under the Controller Menu, press "U" to choose a slot for the DTE (V.35) port. Then the
following Port Menu of DTE (V.35) port will show.
SLOT 7 DTE PORT 1 === Port Menu === 10:40:07 07/06/2006

Version : SW V2.01.02 04/27/2006

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> DTE Configuration S -> System Setup
I -> DTE Status L -> Loopback Test
H -> Alarm History M -> Alarm Setup
G -> Upgrade Firmware

[LOG] [MISC]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On B -> DTE board Return to Default
U -> Choose Other Slot Z -> Unit Reset
P -> Choose DTE Port
E -> Return to Main Menu

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

8.1 DTE Configuration

By pressing "C", the unit setup menu is displayed as follows.
For V.35 DTE Interface:
SLOT 9 DTE PORT 1 === Unit Configuration === 18:35:23 03/01/2001

[-------- LOCAL --------]

Channel : 0
Rate : 64KBps
Clock : Normal
Data : Normal
RTS : Active
TTM : Off
V.54 : Off
INTERFACE : V.35

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 66/202 DXC 5000

For V.36 DTE Interface:

SLOT 5 DTE PORT 1 === Unit Configuration === 15:39:39 04/29/2004

[-------- LOCAL --------]

Channel : 0
Rate : 64KBps
Clock : Normal
Data : Normal
RTS : Active
TTM : Off
V.54 : Off
INTERFACE : V.36

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

For EIA530/RS449 DTE Interface:

SLOT 11 DTE PORT 1 === Unit Configuration === 15:41:54 04/29/2004

[-------- LOCAL --------]

Channel : 0
Rate : 64KBps
Clock : Normal
Data : Normal
RTS : Active
TTM : Off
V.54 : Off
INTERFACE : EIA530/RS449

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

For X.21/V.11 DTE Interface:

SLOT 7 DTE PORT 1 === Unit Configuration === 15:40:36 04/29/2004

[-------- LOCAL --------]

Channel : 0
Rate : 64KBps
Clock : Normal
Data : Normal
RTS : Active
TTM : Off
V.54 : Off
INTERFACE : X.21

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 67/202

8.2 DTE Status

To enter the DTE status menu, press " I ". The following screen appears.
SLOT 9 DTE PORT 1 === Unit Status === 18:35:27 03/01/2001

[------ LOCAL ------]

DTE-M1 existed : YES
RTS LOSS : YES
EXT_CLK LOSS : NO
DSR : YES
CTS : NO
DCD : YES
DTR : NO
RTS : NO

[Loopback Status]
DTE Loopback : OFF
BERT : OFF

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

8.3 Alarm History

Press “H” to view the alarm history.
SLOT 9 DTE PORT 1 11:19:07 03/02/2001

[Port] [State] [Count] [Alarm]

1 OK 0 DISABLE
2 OK 0 DISABLE
3 OK 0 DISABLE
4 OK 0 DISABLE
5 OK 0 DISABLE
6 OK 0 DISABLE

<< ESC to return to previous menu, SPACE to refresh, U key to change unit >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 68/202 DXC 5000

8.4 System Setup

Press “S” to setup the system.
SLOT 9 DTE PORT 1 === Setup Configeration === 18:35:35 03/01/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[-------- LOCAL --------]

Channel : 0
Rate : 64KBps
Clock : Normal
Data : Normal
RTS : Active
TTM : Off
V.54 : Off
INTERFACE : V.35

<< ESC key to previous menu, SPACE bar to another page >>

8.5 Loopback Test

To enter the Loopback and Test screen, press "L". The following screen appears.
SLOT 9 DTE PORT 1 === Unit Loopback and Test === 18:35:39 03/01/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE; ENTER KEY: ITEM SELECT; TAB,'`': NEXT/PREV UNIT

DTE Port 1

[TEST MENU]
DTE Loopback : *OFF TO-DTE TO-DS1
Send V.54 Activate Code to Far-End : *DTE
Send V.54 Deactivate Code to Far-End : *DTE
Send BERT : *OFF ON

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 69/202

8.6 Alarm Setup

To set up the alarm configuration, press "M". The following screen is displayed.
SLOT 9 DTE PORT 1 === Alarm Setup === 18:35:43 03/01/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[Port] [Alarm] [Relay]

Unit 9# 1: DISABLE DISABLE

Unit 9# 2: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 9# 3: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 9# 4: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 9# 5: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 9# 6: DISABLE DISABLE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu or save setup >>

8.7 Upgrade Fireware

To set up the alarm configuration, press "G". The following screen is displayed.
OOP DXC 5000 === Download Firmware === 16:02:46 07/14/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

Bank 1 Firmware Ver. : V2.01.01 03/03/2006 (Good)

Bank 2 Firmware Ver. : V2.01.01 03/03/2006 (Good)
Working Firmware Bank: 1
TFTP Server IP : 192.168.1.1
Firmware File Name : hdsl_f.run

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

8.8 Clear Current Port Performance Data

To clear current port performance data, press "X".
SLOT 9 DTE PORT 1 === Port Menu === 18:35:45 03/01/2001

=>> Clear Performance Data (Y/N)?

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 70/202 DXC 5000

8.9 Return to Default

Press "Y" to return to default.
SLOT 9 DTE PORT 1 === Port Menu === 18:35:45 03/01/2001

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

8.10 Reset Current DTE Board

To reset DTE board, press "Z".
SLOT 9 DTE PORT 1 === Port Menu === 18:35:45 03/01/2001

=>> Reset Board 9 (Y/N)?

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 71/202

9. DTE (X.50) SUB-MENU

Under the Controller Menu, press “U” to choose a slot for the DTE (X.50) port. Then the
following screen will show.
SLOT 10 X50 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 17:48:57 07/10/2006

Version : SW V2.01.01 06/28/2006

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> DTE Configuration S -> System Setup
I -> DTE Status L -> Loopback Test
H -> Alarm History M -> Alarm Setup
G -> Upgrade Firmware

[LOG] [MISC]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On B -> DTE board Return to Default
U -> Choose Other Slot Z -> Unit Reset
P -> Choose DTE Port
E -> Return to Main Menu

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

9.1 DTE Configuration

Under the Port Menu, press "C" to view the unit configuration, the screen will show as below.
SLOT 9 X50 PORT 1 === Unit Configuration === 09:46:37 05/23/2001

[-------- LOCAL --------]

Channel : 72
X50 MUX : NO_MUX
SYNC mode : SYNC
Rate : 1.2K
Phase : fixed
4.8k sel : fixed
Clock : Normal
Data : Normal
RTS : Permanent
TTM : Off
Interface : RS-232
Warning : NO

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 72/202 DXC 5000

9.2 DTE Status

Under the Port Menu, press "I" to view the unit status, the screen will show as below.
SLOT 9 X50 PORT 1 === Unit Status === 09:46:44 05/23/2001

[------ LOCAL ------]

DTE-M1 existed : YES
RTS LOSS : NO
EXT_CLK LOSS : NO
DSR : YES
CTS : YES
DCD : YES
DTR : NO
RTS : YES

[Loopback Status]
DTE Loopback : OFF
BERT : OFF

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

9.3 Alarm History

To view the alarm history, press "H" from the Port Menu. The screen will show as below.
SLOT 9 X50 PORT 1 == Alarm History == 09:46:47 05/23/2001

[Port] [State] [Count] [Alarm]

1 OK 0 DISABLE
2 OK 0 DISABLE
3 OK 0 DISABLE
4 OK 0 DISABLE
5 OK 0 DISABLE

<< ESC to return to previous menu, SPACE to refresh, U key to change unit >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 73/202

9.4 System Setup

To setup the system, press "S" from the Port Menu. The screen will show as below.
SLOT 9 X50 PORT 1 === Setup Configeration === 09:45:59 05/23/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[-------- LOCAL --------]

Channel : 72
X50 MUX : NO_MUX
SYNC mode : SYNC
Rate : 1.2K
Phase : fixed
4.8k sel : fixed
Clock : Normal
Data : Normal
RTS : Permanent
TTM : Off
Interface : RS-232
Warning : NO

<< ESC key to previous menu, SPACE bar to another page >>

9.5 Loopback Test

To setup the loopback test, press "L" from the Port Menu. The screen will show as below.
SLOT 9 X50 PORT 1 === Unit Loopback and Test === 09:46:25 05/23/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE; ENTER KEY: ITEM SELECT; TAB,'`': NEXT/PREV UNIT

X50 Port 1

[TEST MENU]
RS232 Loopback : *OFF TO-DTE TO-DS1
Send BERT : *OFF ON

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 74/202 DXC 5000

9.6 Alarm Setup

To setup the alarm setup, press "M" from the Port Menu. The screen will show as below.
SLOT 9 X50 PORT 1 === Alarm Setup === 09:46:30 05/23/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[Port] [Alarm] [Relay]

Unit 9# 1: DISABLE DISABLE

Unit 9# 2: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 9# 3: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 9# 4: DISABLE DISABLE
Unit 9# 5: DISABLE DISABLE

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

9.7 Upgrade Firmware

To setup the upgrade firmware, press "G" from the Port Menu. The screen will show as
below.
DXC 5000 === Download Firmware === 10:39:28 07/06/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

Bank 1 Firmware Ver. : V2.01.02 04/27/2006 (Good)

Bank 2 Firmware Ver. : V2.01.02 04/27/2006 (Good)
Working Firmware Bank: 2
TFTP Server IP : 010.003.005.001
Firmware File Name :

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

9.8 Clear Current Port Performance Data

To clear current port performance data, press "X".
SLOT 9 X50 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 09:46:30 05/23/2001

=>> Clear Performance Data (Y/N)?

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 75/202

9.9 Return to Default

Press "Y" to return to default.
SLOT 9 X50 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 09:46:30 05/23/2001

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

9.10 Reset Current DTE Board
To reset DTE board, press "Z".
SLOT 9 X50 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 09:46:30 05/23/2001

=>> Reset Board 9 (Y/N)?

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 76/202 DXC 5000

10. G.703-64K (CO-DIRECTIONAL) SUB-MENU

Press "U" from the "Controller Menu" to select a port for G.703-64K interface. Press ENTER
to show Port Menu for G.703-64K interface as below.
SLOT 9 G703 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 11:35:12 07/02/2004

Version : HW FPGA Ver.A

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
I -> G703 Status L -> Loopback Test
H -> Alarm History M -> Alarm Setup

[LOG] [MISC]
F -> Log Off X -> Clear Alarm History
O -> Log On
U -> Choose Other Slot
P -> Choose G703 Port
E -> Return to Main Menu

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

10.1 G703 Status

Press "I" from the G703 Port Menu to display the current port status. This menu lists the
current status for line, local loopback, and payload loopback.
SLOT 9 G703 PORT 1 === Port Status === 11:35:31 07/02/2004

-- LINE --
LOS : YES

-- TEST --
LOCAL LOOPBACK : YES
PAYLOAD LOOPBACK : NO

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 77/202

10.2 Alarm History

To display alarm history, press "H" from the port menu to view the details.
SLOT 9 G703 PORT 1 === Alarm History === 11:35:51 07/02/2004

[Port] [State] [Count] [Alarm]

1 OK 0 DISABLE
2 OK 0 DISABLE
3 OK 0 DISABLE
4 OK 0 DISABLE
5 OK 0 DISABLE
6 OK 0 DISABLE
7 OK 0 DISABLE
8 OK 0 DISABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

10.3 Loopback Test

Press "L" from the Port Menu to enter into the Loopback Test menu. This menu is used to
set up Near loopback and send test pattern. There are 3 options for near loopback: OFF,
LOCAL, and PAYLOAD. Use arrow keys to select the desired option, and press ENTER to
confirm. Move the cursor at "OFF" to disable sending test pattern or "ON" to send test
pattern. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
SLOT 9 G703 PORT 1 === Port Loopback Test === 11:36:09 07/02/2004
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

- NEAR-END LOOPBACK : OFF *LOCAL PAYLOAD

- Send Test Pattern : *OFF ON

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 78/202 DXC 5000

Press ENTER from the above menu, then the screen will show as below. To stop sending
testing pattern, press ESC.
SLOT 9 G703 PORT 1 === Port Loopback Test === 11:36:09 07/02/2004
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

- NEAR-END LOOPBACK : OFF *LOCAL PAYLOAD

- Send Test Pattern : OFF *ON

BERT SYNC BIT ERROR=0

ERROR SECONDS=0 ELAPSED SECONDS=3

<< Press ESC key to stop sending test pattern >>

10.4 Alarm Setup

Press "M " from the Port Menu to do alarm setting. This menu can be used to disable alarm,
or set as major alarm, critical alarm, and minor alarm.
SLOT 9 G703 PORT 1 === Alarm Setup === 11:37:09 07/02/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[Port] [Type] [Alarm]

Unit 9# 1: LOS DISABLE

Unit 9# 2: LOS DISABLE
Unit 9# 3: LOS DISABLE
Unit 9# 4: LOS DISABLE
Unit 9# 5: LOS DISABLE
Unit 9# 6: LOS DISABLE
Unit 9# 7: LOS DISABLE
Unit 9# 8: LOS DISABLE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu or save setup >>

After done the alarm setting, press "Y" to change configuration or "N" to abort it. To save the
new configuration, press "V" from the "Controller Menu" to save it.
SLOT 9 G703 PORT 1 === Alarm Setup === 11:37:09 07/02/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[Port] [Type] [Alarm]

Unit 9# 1: LOS MAJOR

Unit 9# 2: LOS CRITICAL
Unit 9# 3: LOS MINOR
Unit 9# 4: LOS DISABLE
Unit 9# 5: LOS DISABLE
Unit 9# 6: LOS DISABLE
Unit 9# 7: LOS DISABLE
Unit 9# 8: LOS DISABLE

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 79/202

10.5 Clear Alarm History

To clear alarm history, press "X" from the Port Menu. Then press "Y" or "N" to confirm.
SLOT 9 G703 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 11:39:29 07/02/2004

Version : HW FPGA Ver.A

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
I -> G703 Status L -> Loopback Test
H -> Alarm History M -> Alarm Setup

[LOG] [MISC]
F -> Log Off X -> Clear Alarm History
O -> Log On
U -> Choose Other Slot
P -> Choose G703 Port
E -> Return to Main Menu

>> Clear alarm history - are you sure ? [Y/N]

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 80/202 DXC 5000

11. ATM FRAME RELAY SUB-MENU

Under the Controller Menu, press “U” to choose a slot for the ATM/ FR port. Then the
following screen will show.
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port Menu === 09:41:53 09/13/2002

Version : SW V3.03 01/03/2002

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report M -> Unit Alarm Setup
A -> Unit Statistics S -> Unit System Setup
C -> Unit Configuration X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
I -> Unit Status D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose a Port Y -> Unit Load Default Config
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu Z -> Unit Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

11.1 1-Hour Performance Report

11.1.1 ATM Frame Relay - T1
Press "1" from the port menu, the following screen will show. To view ATM FR T1 port 1-
hour performance report by selecting register type, USER or LINE. The current selection will
be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
SLOT D ATM/FR T1 === Port 1-Hour Perf. Report === 17:17:44 07/21/2002

>> Select Register Type ? *USER LINE

SLOT D ATM/FR T1 === Port 1-Hour Perf. Report === 17:17:49 07/21/2002
USER
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 290 seconds
(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (CSS) (LOFC)
Current 15-Min Interval : 0 0 0 0 0 0
1st Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
2nd Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
3rd Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
4th Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0

(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (CSS) (LOFC)
Current 24-Hour Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

<< TAB key to show Statistics Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 81/202

SLOT D ATM/FR T1 === Port 1-Hour Stat. Report === 17:18:05 07/21/2002
USER
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 290 seconds
(%AS) (%EFS) (%ES) (%BES) (%SES) (%CSS) (%LOFC)
Current 15-Min :100.00% 100.00% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000%
1st Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
2nd Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
3rd Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
4th Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0

(%AS) (%EFS) (%ES) (%BES) (%SES) (%CSS) (%LOFC)
Current 24-Hour :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

<< TAB key to show Performance Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>

SLOT D ATM/FR T1 === Port 1-Hour Perf. Report === 17:18:20 07/21/2002
LINE
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 321 seconds
(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (CSS) (LOFC)
Current 15-Min Interval : 0 0 0 0 0 0
1st Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
2nd Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
3rd Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
4th Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0

(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (CSS) (LOFC)
Current 24-Hour Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

<< TAB key to show Statistics Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>

SLOT D ATM/FR T1 === Port 1-Hour Stat. Report === 17:18:23 07/21/2002
LINE
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 321 seconds
(%AS) (%EFS) (%ES) (%BES) (%SES) (%CSS) (%LOFC)
Current 15-Min :100.00% 100.00% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000%
1st Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
2nd Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
3rd Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
4th Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0

(%AS) (%EFS) (%ES) (%BES) (%SES) (%CSS) (%LOFC)
Current 24-Hour :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

<< TAB key to show Performance Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 82/202 DXC 5000

11.1.2 ATM Frame Relay - E1

To view ATM FR E1 port 1-hour performance report by selecting register type. The current
selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port 1-Hour Perf. Report === 16:29:59 07/24/2002
USER
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 16 seconds
(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (DM) (CSS)
Current 15-Min Interval : 0 16 0 0 0 16
1st Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
2nd Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
3rd Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
4th Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0

(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (DM) (CSS)
Current 24-Hour Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
07/23/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
07/22/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
07/21/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
07/20/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
07/19/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
07/18/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
07/17/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

<< TAB key to show Statistics Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>

SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port 1-Hour Stat. Report === 16:30:04 07/24/2002
USER
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 16 seconds
(%AS) (%EFS) (%ES) (%BES) (%SES) (%DM) (%CSS)
Current 15-Min :0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 100.00%
1st Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
2nd Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
3rd Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
4th Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0

(%AS) (%EFS) (%ES) (%BES) (%SES) (%DM) (%CSS)
Current 24-Hour :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
07/23/2002 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
07/22/2002 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
07/21/2002 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
07/20/2002 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
07/19/2002 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
07/18/2002 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
07/17/2002 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

<< TAB key to show Performance Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 83/202

SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port 1-Hour Perf. Report === 16:30:16 07/24/2002
LINE
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 33 seconds
(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (DM) (CSS)
Current 15-Min Interval : 0 33 0 0 0 33
1st Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
2nd Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
3rd Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
4th Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0

(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (DM) (CSS)
Current 24-Hour Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
07/23/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
07/22/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
07/21/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
07/20/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
07/19/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
07/18/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
07/17/2002 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

<< TAB key to show Statistics Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>

SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port 1-Hour Stat. Report === 16:30:20 07/24/2002
LINE
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 33 seconds
(%AS) (%EFS) (%ES) (%BES) (%SES) (%DM) (%CSS)
Current 15-Min :0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 100.00%
1st Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
2nd Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
3rd Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
4th Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0

(%AS) (%EFS) (%ES) (%BES) (%SES) (%DM) (%CSS)
Current 24-Hour :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
07/23/2002 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
07/22/2002 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
07/21/2002 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
07/20/2002 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
07/19/2002 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
07/18/2002 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
07/17/2002 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

<< TAB key to show Performance Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 84/202 DXC 5000

11.2 24-Hour Performance Report

11.2.1 ATM Frame Relay – T1
Press "2" from the port menu, the following screen will show. To view ATM FR T1 port 24-
hour performance report by selecting register type and parameter. The current selection will
be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
SLOT D ATM/FR T1 === Port 24-Hour Perf. Report === 17:18:33 07/21/2002

>> Select Register Type ? *USER LINE

>> Select Parameter ? *ES UAS BES SES CSS LOFC AS EFS BPV ESF

SLOT D ATM/FR T1 === Port 24-Hour Perf. Report === 17:18:44 07/21/2002
USER ES
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 345 seconds
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0
(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (CSS) (LOFC)
Current 15-Min Interval : 0 0 0 0 0 0
Current 24-Hour Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

-- USER, ES, Last 96 15-Min Interval :

01-08 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
09-16 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
17-24 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
25-32 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
33-40 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
41-48 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
49-56 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
57-64 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
65-72 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
73-80 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
81-88 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
89-96 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

<< TAB key to show Statistics Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>

SLOT D ATM/FR T1 === Port 24-Hour Stat. Report === 17:18:48 07/21/2002
USER %ES
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 345 seconds
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0
(%ES) (%UAS) (%BES) (%SES) (%CSS) (%LOFC)
Current 15-Min :0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000%
Current 24-Hour :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

-- USER, %ES, Last 96 15-Min Interval :

01-08 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
09-16 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
17-24 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
25-32 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
33-40 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
41-48 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
49-56 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
57-64 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
65-72 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
73-80 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
81-88 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
89-96 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

<< TAB key to show Performance Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 85/202

11.2.2 ATM Frame Relay – E1

Press "2" from the port menu, the following screen will show. To view ATM FR E1 port 24-
hour performance report by selecting register type. The current selection will be highlighted
by an asterisk (*).
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port 24-Hour Perf. Report === 16:30:29 07/24/2002
USER ES
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 46 seconds
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0
(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (DM) (CSS)
Current 15-Min Interval : 0 46 0 0 0 46
Current 24-Hour Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

-- USER, ES, Last 96 15-Min Interval :

01-08 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
09-16 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
17-24 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
25-32 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
33-40 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
41-48 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
49-56 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
57-64 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
65-72 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
73-80 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
81-88 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
89-96 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

<< TAB key to show Statistics Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>

SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port 24-Hour Stat. Report === 16:30:33 07/24/2002
USER %ES
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 46 seconds
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0
(%ES) (%UAS) (%BES) (%SES) (%DM) (%CSS)
Current 15-Min :0.0000% 100.00% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 100.00%
Current 24-Hour :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

-- USER, %ES, Last 96 15-Min Interval :

01-08 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
09-16 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
17-24 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
25-32 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
33-40 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
41-48 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
49-56 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
57-64 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
65-72 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
73-80 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
81-88 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
89-96 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

<< TAB key to show Performance Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 86/202 DXC 5000

11.3 Port Statistics

Press "A" from the port menu, the screen will show as below. To view the statistics of ATM
FR port by selecting statistics type. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk
(*).
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port Statistics === 17:23:15 07/21/2002

>> Select Statistics Type ? *T1/E1 Line FR Statistics ATM Statistics

11.3.1 T1/E1 Line Availability

SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port Line Availability === 17:23:19 07/21/2002

-- Line Availability during Last 24-Hour:

Valid Seconds : 621 seconds
Available Seconds : 621 seconds
Unavailable Seconds: 0 seconds
Line Avaliability : 100.0 %

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>

11.3.2 Frame Relay Statistics

SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port Frame Relay Statistics === 17:23:33 07/21/2002

Channel : 1
PVC Number : 1 Total PVC : 1

<< Input PVC ( 0 for channel summary ) or ESC to previous menu >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 87/202

SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port Frame Relay Statistics === 17:23:33 07/21/2002

Channel : 1
PVC : 1
DLCI : 100

[Recived] [Transmitted]
Bytes : 0 Bytes : 0
Frames : 0 Frames : 0
Discards : 0 Discards : 0
Drops : 0 Drops : 0

Channel : 1
PVC Number : 1 Total PVC : 1

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>

11.3.3 ATM Statistics

SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port ATM Statistics === 17:23:53 07/21/2002

Total Connections : 37 [Bad HEC]: 0

[VPI/VCI] [Rx_Frames][Tx_Frames][Congestion] [Bad CRC] [Bad Len]
-----------------------------------------------------------------
1 12 101 0 0 0 0 0
2 12 105 0 0 0 0 0
3 12 106 0 0 0 0 0
4 12 107 0 0 0 0 0
5 12 108 0 0 0 0 0
6 12 109 0 0 0 0 0
7 12 110 0 0 0 0 0
8 12 111 0 0 0 0 0
9 12 112 0 0 0 0 0
10 12 113 0 0 0 0 0
11 12 114 0 0 0 0 0
12 12 115 0 0 0 0 0
13 12 116 0 0 0 0 0
14 12 117 0 0 0 0 0
15 12 118 0 0 0 0 0
16 12 119 0 0 0 0 0

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 88/202 DXC 5000

11.4 Unit Configuration

The interface setting displays the egress port type (E1 or T1).
The Protocol setting specifies the protocol on the line (ATM or Frame Relay).
The Channel Map setting specifies the type of traffic. "1" specifies layer 2 traffic, and "i" is
idle. When the line carries ATM traffic, this setting cannot be modified.
To view the port configuration, press "C" from the port menu, the screen will show as below.
11.4.1 System Setup – ATM/ FR T1
To view the port configuration, press "C" from the port menu.
SLOT D ATM/FR T1 === Port System Setup === 17:35:29 03/23/2002

FRAME = ESF Interface : T1

CODE = B8ZS Protocol : ATM
YEL = ON Channel Map:
AIS = FRAMED [111111111111111111111111]
INBAND = OFF
INTF = LONG HAUL
LBO = 0 dB

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

11.4.2 System Setup – ATM/ FR E1

To view the port configuration, press "C" from the port menu.
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port System Setup === 15:56:08 03/27/2002

FRAME = ON Interface : E1
CODE = HDB3 Protocol : ATM
CRC = ON Channel Map:
RAI = ON [111111111111111i111111111111111]
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
FDL = OFF
Sa_bit = Sa4
INTF = 120 Ohm

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 89/202

11.5 Alarm History

Press "H" from the port menu to view the alarm history.
11.5.1 Alarm History - FR to ATM
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port Alarm History === 17:24:14 07/21/2002
LOCAL
[ALARM-TYPE] [THRESHOLD] [CURR-STATE] [COUNT] [ALARM]
RAI OK 0 ENABLE
AIS OK 0 ENABLE
LOS OK 0 ENABLE
LOF OK 0 ENABLE
BPV 10E-5 OK 0 ENABLE
ES 1 OK 0 ENABLE
UAS 1 OK 0 ENABLE
CSS 1 OK 0 ENABLE
ATM LOS OK 0 ENABLE
ATM AIS ALM 37 ENABLE
ATM RDI ALM 1 ENABLE
ATM LOC OK 0 ENABLE
FR LKD DISABLE 1 DISABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>

11.5.2 Alarm History - FR to FR

SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port Alarm History === 17:24:14 07/21/2002
LOCAL
[ALARM-TYPE] [THRESHOLD] [CURR-STATE] [COUNT] [ALARM]
YEL OK 0 ENABLE
AIS OK 0 ENABLE
LOS OK 1 ENABLE
LOF OK 1 ENABLE
BPV 10E-5 OK 0 ENABLE
ES 1 OK 0 ENABLE
UAS 1 ALM 1 ENABLE
CSS 1 OK 0 ENABLE
FR LKD ALM 2 ENABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous bar to refresh >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 90/202 DXC 5000

11.6 Port Status

Press "I" from the port menu, the following screen will show. To view the port status for the
ATM FR T1 interface by selecting ATM status type. The current selection will be highlighted
by an asterisk (*).
NOTE: When Frame Relay is selected, ATM Status will be hidden.
SLOT D ATM/FR T1 === Port Status === 17:24:32 07/21/2002

>> Select ATM Status Type ? *T1/E1 Status FR Status ATM Status

11.6.1 T1/ E1 Status

SLOT D ATM/FR T1 === Port Status === 17:24:37 07/21/2002

-- LINE --
LOS : NO
LOF : NO
RCV AIS : NO
RCV YEL : NO
XMT AIS : NO
XMT YEL : NO
BPV ERROR COUNT : 0
ES ERROR COUNT : 0

-- TEST --
PATTERN TRANSMITTED : OFF
NEAR-END LOOPBACK : OFF

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>

11.6.2 Frame Relay Status

11.6.2.1 FR to ATM
SLOT D ATM/FR T1 === Port Frame Relay Status === 17:24:42 07/21/2002

[CH] [Link] [CH] [Link]

------------------- -------------------
1 Up 17 Inactive
2 Inactive 18 Inactive
3 Inactive 19 Inactive
4 Inactive 20 Inactive
5 Inactive 21 Inactive
6 Inactive 22 Inactive
7 Inactive 23 Inactive
8 Inactive 24 Inactive
9 Inactive 25 Inactive
10 Inactive 26 Inactive
11 Inactive 27 Inactive
12 Inactive 28 Inactive
13 Inactive 29 Inactive
14 Inactive 30 Inactive
15 Inactive 31 Inactive
16 Inactive

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 91/202

11.6.2.2 FR to FR
SLOT D ATM/FR T1 === Port Frame Relay Status === 16:03:29 03/27/2002

[CH] [Link] [CH] [Link]

------------------- -------------------
T1/E1 Up 16 Inactive
1 Down 17 Inactive
2 Inactive 18 Inactive
3 Inactive 19 Inactive
4 Inactive 20 Inactive
5 Inactive 21 Inactive
6 Inactive 22 Inactive
7 Inactive 23 Inactive
8 Inactive 24 Inactive
9 Inactive 25 Inactive
10 Inactive 26 Inactive
11 Inactive 27 Inactive
12 Inactive 28 Inactive
13 Inactive 29 Inactive
14 Inactive 30 Inactive
15 Inactive 31 Inactive

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>

11.6.3 ATM Status

11.6.3.1 ATM Status – T1
SLOT D ATM/FR T1 === Port ATM Status === 17:24:50 07/21/2002

ATM LINE : SYNC

[Active] [AIS] [RDI] [LOC] [Active] [AIS] [RDI] [LOC]

------------------------------- -------------------------------
1 Yes Yes Yes No 21 Yes Yes Yes No
6 Yes Yes Yes No 22 Yes Yes Yes No
7 Yes Yes Yes No 23 Yes Yes Yes No
8 Yes Yes Yes No 24 Yes Yes Yes No
9 Yes Yes Yes No 25 Yes Yes Yes No
10 Yes Yes Yes No 26 Yes Yes Yes No
11 Yes Yes Yes No 27 Yes Yes Yes No
12 Yes Yes Yes No 28 Yes Yes Yes No
13 Yes Yes Yes No 29 Yes Yes Yes No
14 Yes Yes Yes No 30 Yes Yes Yes No
15 Yes Yes Yes No 31 Yes Yes Yes No
16 Yes Yes Yes No 32 Yes Yes Yes No
17 Yes Yes Yes No 33 Yes Yes Yes No
18 Yes Yes Yes No 34 Yes Yes Yes No
19 Yes Yes Yes No 35 Yes Yes Yes No
20 Yes Yes Yes No 36 Yes Yes Yes No

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 92/202 DXC 5000

11.6.3.2 ATM Status – E1

SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port Status === 15:46:07 07/24/2002

-- LINE --
LOS : YES
LOF : FAS
RCV AIS : NO
RCV RAI : NO
XMT AIS : NO
XMT RAI : RAI
BPV ERROR COUNT : 0
ES ERROR COUNT : 0

-- TEST --
PATTERN TRANSMITTED : OFF
NEAR-END LOOPBACK : OFF

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh >>

11.7 Alarm Queue

Press "Q" form the port menu to view the alarm queue.
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Unit Alarm Queue === 17:24:57 07/21/2002
1 -- Port A: ATM RDI-------------------17:13:34 07/21/2002
2 -- Port A: ATM AIS-------------------17:13:34 07/21/2002
3 -- Port A: FR LKD--------------------17:13:33 07/21/2002

<< ESC key return to previous menu or SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 93/202

11.8 Loopback Test

11.8.1 ATM Frame Relay – T1
Under the port menu, press "L" to setup the loopback test for the ATM FR T1 interface.
SLOT D ATM/FR T1 === Port Loopback Test === 17:43:55 03/23/2002
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

- NEAR-END LOOPBACK : *OFF LOCAL PLB LLB

- SEND LOOPBACK ACTIVATE CODE TO FAR-END:

*IN-BAND AT&T-P ANSI-P ANSI-L
- SEND LOOPBACK DEACTIVATE CODE TO FAR-END:
*IN-BAND AT&T-P ANSI-P ANSI-L
- SEND TEST PATTERN:
*OFF QRSS-FULL 1-IN-8

- STATUS:

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

11.8.2 ATM Frame Relay – E1

Under the port menu, press "L" to setup the loopback test for the ATM FR E1 interface.
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port Loopback Test === 15:44:49 07/24/2002
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

- NEAR-END LOOPBACK : *OFF LOCAL PLB LLB

- SEND LOOPBACK ACTIVATE CODE TO FAR-END:

*PAYLOAD LINE
- SEND LOOPBACK DEACTIVATE CODE TO FAR-END:
*PAYLOAD LINE
- SEND TEST PATTERN:
*OFF PRBS-FULL

- STATUS:

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 94/202 DXC 5000

11.9 Alarm Setup

Under the port menu, press "M' to setup alarm.
11.9.1 Alarm Setup - FR to ATM
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port Alarm Setup === 17:45:51 03/23/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[TYPE] [THRESHOLD] [ALARM]

YEL ENABLE
AIS ENABLE
LOS ENABLE
LOF ENABLE
BPV 10E-5 ENABLE
ES 001 ENABLE
UAS 001 ENABLE
CSS 001 ENABLE
ATM LOS ENABLE
ATM AIS ENABLE
ATM RDI ENABLE
ATM LOC ENABLE
FR LKD ENABLE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

11.9.2 Alarm Setup - FR to FR

SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port Alarm Setup === 17:25:38 07/21/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[TYPE] [THRESHOLD] [ALARM]

YEL ENABLE
AIS ENABLE
LOS ENABLE
LOF ENABLE
BPV 10E-5 ENABLE
ES 001 ENABLE
UAS 001 ENABLE
CSS 001 ENABLE
FR LKD ENABLE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 95/202

11.10 DXC 5000 TSI MAP Setup

Before the ATM-FR card can be set up, the TSI map for the card must be set up first. From
the main controller menu, choose S - System Setup to do this.
Enter the required information where the cursor appears in the left-hand side column of the
screen. In the example below three screens are shown in sequence to display the choices
available to the user.
11.10.1 Map slot D (ATM/FR) to slot B (E1 card)
DXC 5000 === System Setup (MAP) === 10:08:40 09/13/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target ATM/FR Source E1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : D ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : 1 d B 1 17 d 1 d D 1 17 d
T.S. : 01 2 d B 2 18 d 2 d D 2 18 d
3 d B 3 19 d 3 d D 3 19 d
4 d B 4 20 d 4 d D 4 20 d
T.S.# : 04 5 d 21 d 5 d 21 d
Clear : No 6 d 22 d 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 23 d 7 d 23 d
8 d 24 d 8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d 9 d 25 d
Source 10 d 26 d 10 d 26 d
Slot : B 11 d 27 d 11 d 27 d
Port : 12 d 28 d 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 01 13 d 29 d 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d 14 d 30 d
Update? Yes 15 d 31 d 15 d 31 d
Confirm?Yes 16 d 16 d

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

11.10.2 Map slot D (ATM/FR) to slot 6 (V.35 card)

DXC 5000 === System Setup (MAP) === 10:08:40 09/13/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target ATM/FR Source RTR
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : D ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : 1 d B 1 17 d 1 d D 5 17 d
T.S. : 05 2 d B 2 18 d 2 d D 6 18 d
3 d B 3 19 d 3 d D 7 19 d
4 d B 4 20 d 4 d D 8 20 d
T.S.# : 04 5 d 61 1 21 d 5 d 21 d
Clear : No 6 d 61 2 22 d 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 61 3 23 d 7 d 23 d
8 d 61 4 24 d 8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d 9 d 25 d
Source 10 d 26 d 10 d 26 d
Slot : 6 11 d 27 d 11 d 27 d
Port : P1 12 d 28 d 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 01 13 d 29 d 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d 14 d 30 d
Update? Yes 15 d 31 d 15 d 31 d
Confirm?Yes 16 d 16 d 32 d

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 96/202 DXC 5000

11.10.3 Map slot D (ATM/FR) to slot 1 (V.35 card)

DXC 5000 === System Setup (MAP) === 10:08:40 09/13/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target ATM/FR Source V.35
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : D ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : 1 d B 1 17 d 1 1 d D 9 17 d
T.S. : 09 2 d B 2 18 d 1 2 d D 10 18 d
3 d B 3 19 d 1 3 d D 11 19 d
4 d B 4 20 d 1 4 d D 12 20 d
T.S.# : 04 5 d A 1 21 d 5 d 21 d
Clear : No 6 d A 2 22 d 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d A 3 23 d 7 d 23 d
8 d A 4 24 d 8 d 24 d
9 d 1 1 1 25 d 9 d 25 d
Source 10 d 1 1 2 26 d 10 d 26 d
Slot : 1 11 d 1 1 3 27 d 11 d 27 d
Port : P1 12 d 1 1 4 28 d 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 01 13 d 29 d 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d 14 d 30 d
Update? Yes 15 d 31 d 15 d 31 d
Confirm?Yes 16 d 16 d 32 d

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

11.10.4 Map slot D (ATM/FR) to HDLC (Inband Channel)

DXC 5000 === System Setup (MAP) === 10:08:40 09/13/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target ATM/FR Source HDLC
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : D ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : 1 d B 1 17 d 1 d D 13
T.S. : 13 2 d B 2 18 d
3 d B 3 19 d
4 d B 4 20 d
T.S.# : 01 5 d A 1 21 d
Clear : No 6 d A 2 22 d
d/v : d 7 d A 3 23 d
8 d A 4 24 d
9 d 1 1 1 25 d
Source 10 d 1 1 2 26 d
Slot : HD 11 d 1 1 3 27 d
Port : 12 d 1 1 4 28 d
T.S. : 01 13 d HD 1 29 d
14 d 30 d
Update? Yes 15 d 31 d
Confirm?Yes 16 d

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 97/202

11.11 System Setup

11.11.1 ATM/ FR Card Configuration
From the main system menu, press “U” to select the PORT, in this case, PORT D. Then from
the PORT menu, press “S” for Unit System Setup. The following screen is shown. At the
bottom, four setup choices are given. For initial setup, each of these four setup screens
should be filled in. An asterisk will highlight the current selection (*). Use arrow keys to
change selection. Press ENTER to activate.
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port System Setup === 17:35:29 03/23/2002

>> Select ATM_setup Type ? *T1/E1 CH_MAP FR_MAN CONN_TAB

When the setup choice T1/E1 is entered. The following screen is shown.
The Interface setting displays the egress port type (E1 or T1).
The Protocol setting allows the user to specify the protocol on the line (ATM or Frame
Relay).
The Channel Map, with 31 time slot positions, specifies the type of traffic. A “1” specifies
presence of layer 2 traffic in that time slot, and an “i” indicates an idle time slot. For ATM
traffic, this setting cannot be modified.
All of the E1 line settings, Frame, Code, CRC, and others, must match that of the ATM
network settings.
NOTE : Although the following illustrations are for the E1 interface the
procedure for the T1 interface are similar except for the 24 available
time slots for T1 compared to 30 for E1.
11.11.2 System Specific to ATM Protocol
In the following, further setup will be for the ATM protocol. For Frame Relay protocol, see
later sections.
11.11.2.1 Port System Setup
SLOT D ATM/FR T1 === Port System Setup === 17:35:29 03/23/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ESF Interface : T1

CODE = B8ZS Protocol : ATM
YEL = ON Channel Map:
AIS = FRAMED [111111111111111111111111]
INBAND = OFF
INTF = LONG HAUL
LBO = 0 dB

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 98/202 DXC 5000

SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port System Setup === 10:24:07 09/13/2002

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ON Interface : E1
CODE = HDB3 Protocol : ATM
CRC = ON Channel Map:
RAI = ON [111111111111111i111111111111111]
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
FDL = OFF
Sa_bit = Sa4
INTF = 75 Ohm

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

11.11.2.2 Channel Map Setup

Select the CH_MAP item on the Port System Setup menu. Use this channel map to tell the
ATM/FR card what time slots are combined to be a logical frame relay channel. The logical
channel number can be 1 to 31. A 00 will indicate an idle time slot.
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port Channel Map Setup === 10:24:58 09/13/2002
Please Input: 1~10, BACKSPACE to edit

Time Slot : 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FR Channel : [01 01 01 01 02 02 02 02 03 03 03 03 04 00 00 00]

Time Slot : 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
FR Channel : [00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00]

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 99/202

11.11.2.3 Frame Relay Management Setup – FR to ATM

Select the FR_MAN item on the Port System Setup menu. Use this management setup to
tell the protocol details of the ATM network. The logical channel number can be 1 to 31. The
meanings of the parameters are as follows:

Column Heading Options Meaning

CH 1 to 31 Logical channel number
Active YES Activated by user
NO An idle frame relay channel
Protocol ITU Using Q.933 Annex A protocol
ANSI Using T1.617 Annex D protocol
Direction User Acts as user side device (periodically issues polling
messages to network side)
Network Acts as network side device (waits for polling
messages from user side)
Bidirection This channel can issue polling messages and
respond to polling messages
T391 5-30 seconds The interval between Status Inquiry message from
user to network, else error counted.
Polling Interval
T392 5-30 seconds The max allowed interval between Status Inquiry and
network response, else error counted.
Response time
N391 PVC 1-255 seconds The interval between PVC Status Inquiry message
from user to network, else error counted.
Polling Interval
N392 1-10 Determine service affecting condition by detecting
N392 errors in the last N393 events.
Error count
N393 1-10 See N392
Error count

These parameters must be coordinated with the ATM network parameters.

IMPORTANT NOTE :
The procedure for changing Port FR Management setting, which has
been saved in the system, are:
1. Go to “Port Connection Table Setup” screen, as the 2nd screen
shows,
2. Then change [CH] from 04 to 00, as the 3rd screen shows.
3. Go back to “Port FR Management Setup” screen, as 1st screen
shows, to change the previous setting.
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 100/202 DXC 5000

1st screen
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port FR Management Setup === 10:25:33 09/13/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[CH] [Active] [Protocol] [Direction] [T391] [T392] [N391] [N392] [N393]

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 YES FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
2 YES HDLC
3 YES FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
4 YES HDLC
5 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
6 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
7 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
8 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
9 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
10 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
11 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
12 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
13 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
14 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
15 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
16 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

2nd screen
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port Connection Table Setup === 10:25:48 09/13/2002
Please Input: 1~10, BACKSPACE to edit

[CH] [DLCI] [VPI] [VCI] [BR] [IWK & Translation] [DE-CLP]

index : 4 04 (HDLC) 103 00103 0064 MAP

--------------------------------------------------------------------
125 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
126 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
127 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
128 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
1 1 16 100 100 64< 64> Network MAP
2 2 0 101 101 256< 0> Network 0
3 3 18 102 102 64< 64> Network MAP
4 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
5 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
6 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
7 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
8 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
9 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

3rd screen
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port Connection Table Setup === 10:25:48 09/13/2002
Please Input: 1~10, BACKSPACE to edit

[CH] [DLCI] [VPI] [VCI] [BR] [IWK & Translation] [DE-CLP]

index : 4 00 (HDLC) 103 00103 0064 MAP

--------------------------------------------------------------------
125 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
126 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
127 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
128 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
1 1 16 100 100 64< 64> Network MAP
2 2 0 101 101 256< 0> Network 0
3 3 18 102 102 64< 64> Network MAP
4 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
5 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
6 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
7 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
8 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
9 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 101/202

11.11.2.4 Connection Table Setup – FR to ATM

Select the CONN_TAB item on the Port System Setup menu. Use this management setup to
link the connection table to that of the ATM network. The channel number can be 1 to 31. All
the numerical entries must be coordinated with the ATM network. The meanings of the table
columns are as follows:

Column Heading Options Meaning

CH 1-31 Logical channel number
DLCI 16-991 Data Link Connection Identifier within the channel
VPI 1-255 Virtual Path Identifier, from ATM
VCI 1-65535 Virtual Channel Identifier, from ATM
BR 1-1920 Bit Rate requested in Kilobits/sec for this VC
[Blank] 1-1920 Actual Bit Rate allocated I Kilobits/sec
IWK & Translation Network Network inter-working, FRF.5
SVC-Mode1 Service inter-working, FRF.8, Map FECN field in
Frame Relay to ATM EFCI field
SVC-Mode 2 Service inter-working, FRF.8, ATM EFCI is always set
to “congestion net experienced”
SVC-YES Translation column appears in table, see Translation
below.
SVC-NO Translation column appears in table, see Translation
below.
SVC-YES Do translation between Frame Relay (FRF-3) and
ATM (RFC1483)
SVC-NO Forward encapsulations unaltered
DE-CLP MAP Maps content of DE (discard eligibility) in Frame Relay
or CLP (cell loss probability) in ATM to CLP in ATM,
DE in Frame Relay
0 Regardless of contend of DE and CLP, set outgoing
DE and CLP to constant 0.
1 Regardless of contend of DE and CLP, set outgoing
DE and CLP to constant 1.
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 102/202 DXC 5000

SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port Connection Table Setup === 10:25:48 09/13/2002
Please Input: 1~10, BACKSPACE to edit

[CH] [DLCI] [VPI] [VCI] [BR] [IWK & Translation] [DE-CLP]

index : 4 04 (HDLC) 103 00103 0064 MAP

--------------------------------------------------------------------
125 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
126 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
127 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
128 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
1 1 16 100 100 64< 64> Network MAP
2 2 0 101 101 256< 0> Network 0
3 3 18 102 102 64< 64> Network MAP
4 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
5 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
6 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
7 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
8 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP
9 0 0 0 0 0< 0> Network MAP

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

The entire connection table can be viewed by paging through the line numbers using the
space bar. Each of the line numbers (line index) can be edited. The procedure is as follows.
Move the cursor to the “index” number. Type in the line number followed by ENTER.
Edit any of the entry by moving the cursor to that entry. For numbers, enter the new number
followed by ENTER. For option choices, use TAB key to cycle through the availabe choices.
11.11.3 Setup Specific to FR-FR Protocol
In the following, setup will be for the FR-FR protocol. From the E1/T1 menu, select Frame
Relay for the Protocol. Screen below illustrates that for the T1 interface.
11.11.3.1 Port System Setup
SLOT D ATM/FR T1 === Port System Setup === 22:50:06 07/15/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ESF Interface : T1

CODE = B8ZS Protocol : Frame Relay
YEL = ON Channel Map:
AIS = FRAMED [111111111111111111111111]
INBAND = OFF
INTF = LONG HAUL
LBO = 0 dB

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 103/202

SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port System Setup === 10:16:36 09/13/2002

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ON Interface : E1
CODE = HDB3 Protocol : Frame Relay
CRC = ON Channel Map:
RAI = ON [1111111111111111111111111111111]
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
FDL = OFF
Sa_bit = Sa4
INTF = 75 Ohm

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

11.11.3.2 Channel Map Setup

Select the CH_MAP item on the Port System Setup menu. Use this channel map to tell the
ATM/FR card what time slots are combined to be a logical frame relay channel (FR channel).
The logical FR channel number can be 1 to 31 (eg. FR 1 to FR 31). A 0 will indicate an idle
time slot.
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port Channel Map Setup === 10:17:28 09/13/2002
Please Input: 1~10, BACKSPACE to edit

Time Slot : 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FR Channel : [01 01 01 01 02 02 02 02 03 03 03 03 04 00 00 00]

Time Slot : 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
FR Channel : [00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00]

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 104/202 DXC 5000

11.11.3.3 Frame Relay Management Setup – FR to FR

Select the FR_MAN item on the Port System Setup menu. Use this management setup to
tell the protocol details of the ATM network. The logical channel number can be 1 to 31. The
meanings of the parameters are the same as for FR to ATM.
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port FR Management Setup === 10:18:27 09/13/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[CH] [Active] [Protocol] [Direction] [T391] [T392] [N391] [N392] [N393]

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
T1/E1 FR-ITU User 10 15 006 03 04
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 YES FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
2 YES HDLC
3 YES FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
4 YES HDLC
5 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
6 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
7 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
8 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
9 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
10 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
11 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
12 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
13 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
14 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
15 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
16 NO FR-ITU Network 10 15 006 03 04
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

11.11.3.4 Connection Table Setup – FR to FR

Select the CONN_TAB item on the Port System Setup menu. Use this management setup to
link the connection table to that of the Frame Relay network. The channel number can be 1
to 31. All the numerical entries must be coordinated with the Frame Relay network. The
meanings of the table columns are as follows:

Column Heading Options Meaning

CH 1-31 Logical channel number
DLCI 16-991 Data Link Connection Identifier within the egress E1/T1
port
CIR 1-1920 Committed Information Rate
Bc 1-1920 Committed Burst Size
Be 1-1920 Excess Burst Size

DLCI: DLCI in egress E1/T1 port. CIR-Be: Information rate committed on E1/T1 side.
( ): Actual allocated bandwidth.
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port Connection Table Setup === 10:20:01 09/13/2002
Please Input: 1~10, BACKSPACE to edit

[CH DLCI] <=> [DLCI CIR Bc Be]

index : 4 04 (HDLC) 019 0064 0064 0000

------------------------------------------------
126 0 0 0 0( 0) 0 0
127 0 0 0 0( 0) 0 0
128 0 0 0 0( 0) 0 0
1 1 16 16 256( 256) 256 0
2 2 0 17 256( 256) 256 0
3 3 18 18 64( 64) 64 0
4 4 0 19 64( 64) 64 0
5 0 0 0 0( 0) 0 0
6 0 0 0 0( 0) 0 0
7 0 0 0 0( 0) 0 0
8 0 0 0 0( 0) 0 0
9 0 0 0 0( 0) 0 0
10 0 0 0 0( 0) 0 0
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu, available DLCI : 16 ~ 991 >>

The procedure for modifying this table is the same as for the FR-ATM protocol.
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 105/202

11.12 Clear Alarm Queue and History

Press "X" to clear alarm queue and history, then enter "Y" or "N" to confirm it.
DXC 5000 === Controller Menu === 09:54:25 06/02/2005

Serial Number : 53023 Redundant Controller: Disabled

Hardware Version: Ver.D Start Time : 19:16:09 06/01/2005
Software Version: S4.B4 06/01/2005

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Configuration S -> System Setup
B -> Clock source Configuration M -> System Alarm Setup
Q -> Alarm Queue Summary W -> Firmware Transfer
I -> Information Summary V -> Store/Retrieve Configuration
K -> Clock source Setup
T -> Bit Error Rate Test

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose a Slot A -> Alarm Cut Off
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu X -> Clear Alarm Queue
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu Y -> Controller Return to Default
Z -> Controller Reset

>> Clear alarm queue of PORT D - are you sure ? [Y/N]

11.13 Clear Performance Data

Under the port menu, press "K" to clear performance data.
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Port Statistics === 15:44:43 07/24/2002

>> Clear Statistics Type ? *T1/E1 Line FR Statistics ATM Statistics

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 106/202 DXC 5000

11.14 Upgrade Firmware

Under the port menu, press "D" to download firmware.
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Download Firmware === 17:27:03 07/21/2002
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort

Bank 1 Firmware Ver. : V2.04 07/10/2002 (Good)

Bank 2 Firmware Ver. : V2.04 06/07/2002 (Good)
Working Firmware Bank: 1
TFTP Server IP : 140.132.1.156
Firmware File Name : lv_s_f_c.run____________________________________________

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

11.15 Unit Load Default Configuration

Under the port menu, press "Y" to download firmware. Then press “Y” or “N” to confirm the
selection.
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Download Firmware === 17:27:03 07/21/2002

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

11.16 Unit Reset

Press “Z” from Port Menu to reset the unit. Then press “Y” or “N” to confirm the selection.
SLOT D ATM/FR E1 === Download Firmware === 17:27:03 07/21/2002

Reset - are you sure ? [Y/N]

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 107/202

12. E&M SUB-MENU

Under the Controller Menu, press “U” to choose a slot for the E&M port. Then the following
screen will show.
SLOT 8 E&M === Port Menu === 18:14:49 06/12/2001

Version : SW V1.00 06/08/2001

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Configuration S -> System Setup
I -> E&M Status T -> Self Test

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
E -> Return to Main Menu

12.1 System Configuration

Press "C" to view the system configuration as below.
For lower the version 2.01:
SLOT 8 E&M === System Configuration === 13:46:32 06/15/2001

Side: A
Above Set by HW

Line: 4-WIRE
Impedance: 600 ohm
Signaling: TYPE5
Above Set by SW

A/u-Law: A
Tx Gain: -3.0 dB
Rx Gain: -3.0 dB
Above Set by SW

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 108/202 DXC 5000

For version 2.02.01 or over:

SLOT 8 E&M === System Setup === 01:31:01 06/05/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Side: A ( Set by HW )

A/u-Law: A
Line: 4-WIRE
Impedance: 600 ohm
Signaling: TYPE5

L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8
TxGain(D-A): 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 (-16 ~ + 7 in dB)
RxGain(A-D): 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 (-16 ~ + 7 in dB)
ALL Tx/Rx Gain = L1 : NO

Tx Signaling Bit ( Set by HW ) Rx Signaling Bit ( Set by HW )

ON HOOK : 0 0 0 1 RELAY OPEN : 0 * * *
OFF HOOK : 1 1 0 1 RELAY CLOSE : 1 1 * *

Trunk condition : ON HOOK ( Set by HW )

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

For version 3.01.01 or over:

SLOT 8 E&M === System Setup === 01:31:01 06/05/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Side: A ( Set by HW )

A/u-Law: A
Line: 4-WIRE
Impedance: 600 ohm
Signaling: TYPE5

L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8
TxGain(D-A): 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 (-10 ~ + 7 in dB)
RxGain(A-D): 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 (-10 ~ +14 in dB)
ALL Tx/Rx Gain = L1 : NO

Tx Signaling Bit ( Set by HW ) Rx Signaling Bit ( Set by HW )

ON HOOK : 0 0 0 1 RELAY OPEN : 0 * * *
OFF HOOK : 1 1 0 1 RELAY CLOSE : 1 1 * *

Trunk condition : ON HOOK ( Set by HW )

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 109/202

12.2 E&M Status

Press "I" from the port menu to view the E&M status.
SLOT 8 E&M === E&M Status === 13:47:18 06/15/2001

Side: A

E-Led: E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8
M-Led: M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8

-48V Power: OK

<< press ESC key to return to main menu, SPACE key to refresh >>

12.3 System Setup

Press "S" from the main menu to setup the system.
For lower the version 2.01:
SLOT 8 E&M === System Configuration === 13:46:32 06/15/2001

Side: A
Above Set by HW

Line: 4-WIRE
Impedance: 600 ohm
Signaling: TYPE5
Above Set by SW

A/u-Law: A
Tx Gain: -3.0 dB
Rx Gain: -3.0 dB
Above Set by SW

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 110/202 DXC 5000

For version 2.02.01 or over:

SLOT 8 E&M === System Setup === 01:31:01 06/05/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Side: A ( Set by HW )

A/u-Law: A
Line: 4-WIRE
Impedance: 600 ohm
Signaling: TYPE5

L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8
TxGain(D-A): 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 (-16 ~ + 7 in dB)
RxGain(A-D): 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 (-16 ~ + 7 in dB)
ALL Tx/Rx Gain = L1 : NO

Tx Signaling Bit ( Set by HW ) Rx Signaling Bit ( Set by HW )

ON HOOK : 0 0 0 1 RELAY OPEN : 0 * * *
OFF HOOK : 1 1 0 1 RELAY CLOSE : 1 1 * *

Trunk condition : ON HOOK ( Set by HW )

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

For version 3.01.01 or over:

SLOT 8 E&M === System Setup === 01:31:01 06/05/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Side: A ( Set by HW )

A/u-Law: A
Line: 4-WIRE
Impedance: 600 ohm
Signaling: TYPE5

L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8
TxGain(D-A): 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 (-10 ~ + 7 in dB)
RxGain(A-D): 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 (-10 ~ +14 in dB)
ALL Tx/Rx Gain = L1 : NO

Tx Signaling Bit ( Set by HW ) Rx Signaling Bit ( Set by HW )

ON HOOK : 0 0 0 1 RELAY OPEN : 0 * * *
OFF HOOK : 1 1 0 1 RELAY CLOSE : 1 1 * *

Trunk condition : ON HOOK ( Set by HW )

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 111/202

12.4 Self Test

Press "T" from the main menu to enter in the following screen. When the "Self Test" screen
shows, press SPACE to start the self-test.
SLOT 8 E&M === Self Test === 18:12:57 06/12/2001

Side: A
Test Button: START 9

E-Led: E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8
M-Led: M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8

-48V Power: OK

<< Press SPACE key to push Test Button >>

<< press ESC key to return to main menu >>

12.5 Unit Load Default Config

Press "Y" to return to default.
SLOT 8 E&M === Port Menu === 18:14:49 06/12/2001

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 112/202 DXC 5000

13. FXS SUB-MENU

Under the Controller Menu, press “U” to choose a slot for the FXS port. Then the following
screen will show.
SLOT 11 FXS === Port Menu === 14:23:04 07/22/2002

Version : SW V1.00 06/10/2002

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Configuration S -> System Setup
I -> FXS Status T -> Diagnostic Test

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
F -> Log Off Z -> Unit Reset
O -> Log On
E -> Return to Main Menu

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

13.1 System Configuration

Press "C" to view the system configuration as below.
EXAMPLE 1:
When Metering Pulse is not available, the screen will show as below.
For FXS Normal mode PCB H/W Version F or over:
SLOT 11 FXS === System Setup === 01:32:43 06/05/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
A/u-Law : A Impedance : 600 ohm
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12
TxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
RxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
ALL Tx/Rx Gain = L1 : NO ( -21 ~ +10 in dB )
Tx Signaling Bit A B C D Rx Signaling Bit A B C D
ON HOOK : 0 1 0 1 RING ON : 0 0 * *
OFF HOOK : 1 1 0 1 BATT-REV & PLS ON : 0 1 0 0
RING-GND : ( NA ) OOS-ALARM : * * * *
PLAR OFF HOOK : 1 1 1 1 (fixed) TIP-OPEN : ( NA )
PLAR RING ON : 1 1 1 1 (fixed)
PLAR Ring Cadence : 2"ON,4"OFF ( * for don't care )
Ring Frequency : 20 Hz
Metering Pulse : (NA)
Metering Freq. : (NA)
Metering Level : (NA)

PLAR L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ALL PLAR = L1 : NO

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 113/202

For FXS-P mode PCB H/W Version F or over:

SLOT 11 FXS === System Setup === 01:32:43 06/05/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
A/u-Law : A Impedance : 600 ohm
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12
TxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
RxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
ALL Tx/Rx Gain = L1 : NO ( -21 ~ +10 in dB )
Tx Signaling Bit A B C D Rx Signaling Bit A B C D
ON HOOK : 0 1 0 1 RING ON : 0 0 * *
OFF HOOK : 1 1 0 1 BATT-REV & PLS ON : 0 1 0 0
RING-GND : ( NA ) OOS-ALARM : * * * *
PLAR OFF HOOK : 1 1 0 1 (=OFF HOOK) TIP-OPEN : ( NA )
PLAR RING ON : 0 0 * * (=RING ON)
PLAR Ring Cadence : 2"ON,4"OFF ( * for don't care )
Ring Frequency : 20 Hz
Metering Pulse : (NA)
Metering Freq. : (NA)
Metering Level : (NA)

PLAR L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ALL PLAR = L1 : NO

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

NOTE 1: FXS-P
New mode: put a jumper to JP1 for H/W Version H or over
Old mode: add a R367 resister in the back of the PCB for H/W
Version F.
NOTE 2: FXS-P mode PLAR bit can programmable when PLAR turn on.
NOTE 3: Regarding US ring back signaling for the FXS Card, PLAR generates
a 440/480Hz ringback tone (H/W version H or over).
EXAMPLE 2:
When Metering Pulse and Ground start is available, the screen will show as below.
For FXS-GM mode PCB H/W Version H or over:
SLOT 11 FXS === System Configuration === 07:22:30 06/25/2000
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
A/u-Law : A Impedance : 600 ohm
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12
TxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
RxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
ALL Tx/Rx Gain = L1 : NO ( -21 ~ +10 in dB )
Tx Signaling Bit A B C D Rx Signaling Bit A B C D
ON HOOK : 0 1 0 1 RING ON : 0 0 * *
OFF HOOK : 1 1 0 1 BATT-REV & PLS ON : 0 1 0 0
RING-GND : 0 0 0 1 OOS-ALARM : ( NA )
PLAR OFF HOOK : 1 1 1 1 (fixed) TIP-OPEN : 1 1 1 1
PLAR RING ON : 1 1 1 1 (fixed)
PLAR Ring Cadence : 2"ON,4"OFF ( * for don't care )
Ring Frequency : 20 Hz
Metering Pulse : OFF
Metering Freq. : 16 KHz
Metering Level : 2.4Vrms

PLAR L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ALL PLAR = L1 : NO

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 114/202 DXC 5000

For FXS-GMP mode PCB H/W Version H or over:

SLOT 11 FXS === System Setup === 01:32:43 06/05/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
A/u-Law : A Impedance : 600 ohm
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12
TxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
RxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
ALL Tx/Rx Gain = L1 : NO ( -21 ~ +10 in dB )
Tx Signaling Bit A B C D Rx Signaling Bit A B C D
ON HOOK : 0 1 0 1 RING ON : 0 0 * *
OFF HOOK : 1 1 0 1 BATT-REV & PLS ON : 0 1 0 0
RING-GND : 0 0 0 1 OOS-ALARM : ( NA )
PLAR OFF HOOK : 1 1 0 1 (=OFF HOOK) TIP-OPEN : 1 1 1 1
PLAR RING ON : 0 0 * * (=RING ON)
PLAR Ring Cadence : 2"ON,4"OFF ( * for don't care )
Ring Frequency : 20 Hz
Metering Pulse : OFF
Metering Freq. : 16 KHz
Metering Level : 2.4Vrms

PLAR L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ALL PLAR = L1 : NO

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

NOTE 1: FXS-GM mode with metering pulse 12KHz/16KHz and Ground start.
NOTE 2: Metering Pulse Level.
New mode: support level 2.4Vrms or 1 Vrms for H/W Version H or
over.
Old mode: support level 0dBm or –24dBm for H/W Version F or below.
NOTE 3: FXS-GMP
New mode: put a jumper for JP1 for H/W Version H or over. Than the
PLAR bit can be programmable when PLAR is turn on.
Old mode: add a R367 resister in the back of the PCB for H/W Version
F. Than the PLAR bit can be programmable when PLAR is trun on.
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 115/202

13.2 FXS Status

Press "I" from the Port Menu to view the FXS status.
SLOT 6 FXS === FXS Status === 01:16:33 08/13/2000

1.OFF HOOK : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

2.METERING PULSE : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

3.TIP-OPEN : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

4.RING-GND : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

5.PLAR ON : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

6.RINGING : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

7.ALARM ON : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

<< press ESC key to return to main menu, SPACE key to refresh >>

13.3 System Setup

Press "S" from the Port Menu to setup system configuration. Use arrow keys to move cursor
and TAB key to roll options.
NOTE 1: ALL PLAR = L1 : YES, means that PLAR setting of L2 to L12 are
same as L1.
ALL PLAR = L1 : NO, means that PLAR setting of L2 to
L12 are different from L1.
NOTE 2: The option, OOS-ALARM, is only available for new E1 and
new T1 interfaces.
EXAMPLE:
When Metering Pulse is not available, the screen will show as below.
For FXS Normal mode H/W Version F or over:
SLOT 11 FXS === System Setup === 01:32:43 06/05/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
A/u-Law : A Impedance : 600 ohm
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12
TxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
RxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
ALL Tx/Rx Gain = L1 : NO ( -21 ~ +10 in dB )
Tx Signaling Bit A B C D Rx Signaling Bit A B C D
ON HOOK : 0 1 0 1 RING ON : 0 0 * *
OFF HOOK : 1 1 0 1 BATT-REV & PLS ON : 0 1 0 0
RING-GND : ( NA ) OOS-ALARM : * * * *
PLAR OFF HOOK : 1 1 1 1 (fixed) TIP-OPEN : ( NA )
PLAR RING ON : 1 1 1 1 (fixed)
PLAR Ring Cadence : 2"ON,4"OFF ( * for don't care )
Ring Frequency : 20 Hz
Metering Pulse : (NA)
Metering Freq. : (NA)
Metering Level : (NA)

PLAR L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ALL PLAR = L1 : NO

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 116/202 DXC 5000

For FXS-P mode H/W Version F or over:

SLOT 11 FXS === System Setup === 01:32:43 06/05/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
A/u-Law : A Impedance : 600 ohm
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12
TxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
RxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
ALL Tx/Rx Gain = L1 : NO ( -21 ~ +10 in dB )
Tx Signaling Bit A B C D Rx Signaling Bit A B C D
ON HOOK : 0 1 0 1 RING ON : 0 0 * *
OFF HOOK : 1 1 0 1 BATT-REV & PLS ON : 0 1 0 0
RING-GND : ( NA ) OOS-ALARM : * * * *
PLAR OFF HOOK : 1 1 0 1 (=OFF HOOK) TIP-OPEN : ( NA )
PLAR RING ON : 0 0 * * (=RING ON)
PLAR Ring Cadence : 2"ON,4"OFF ( * for don't care )
Ring Frequency : 20 Hz
Metering Pulse : (NA)
Metering Freq. : (NA)
Metering Level : (NA)

PLAR L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ALL PLAR = L1 : NO

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

NOTE 1: FXS-P
New mode: put a Jumper to JP1 for H/W Version H or over
Old mode: add a R367 resister in the back of PCB for H/W Version F
NOTE 2: FXS-P mode PLAR bit can programmable when PLAR turn on.
NOTE 3: Regarding US ring back signaling for the FXS Card, PLAR generates
a 440/480Hz ringback tone (H/W version H or over).
EXAMPLE 2:
When Metering Pulse and Ground start is available, the screen will show as below.
For FXS-GM mode PCB H/W Version H or over:
SLOT 11 FXS === System Configuration === 07:22:30 06/25/2000
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
A/u-Law : A Impedance : 600 ohm
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12
TxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
RxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
ALL Tx/Rx Gain = L1 : NO ( -21 ~ +10 in dB )
Tx Signaling Bit A B C D Rx Signaling Bit A B C D
ON HOOK : 0 1 0 1 RING ON : 0 0 * *
OFF HOOK : 1 1 0 1 BATT-REV & PLS ON : 0 1 0 0
RING-GND : 0 0 0 1 OOS-ALARM : ( NA )
PLAR OFF HOOK : 1 1 1 1 (fixed) TIP-OPEN : 1 1 1 1
PLAR RING ON : 1 1 1 1 (fixed)
PLAR Ring Cadence : 2"ON,4"OFF ( * for don't care )
Ring Frequency : 20 Hz
Metering Pulse : OFF
Metering Freq. : 16 KHz
Metering Level : 2.4 Vrms

PLAR L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ALL PLAR = L1 : NO

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 117/202

For FXS-GMP mode PCB H/W Version H or over:

SLOT 11 FXS === System Setup === 01:32:43 06/05/2001
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
A/u-Law : A Impedance : 600 ohm
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12
TxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
RxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
ALL Tx/Rx Gain = L1 : NO ( -21 ~ +10 in dB )
Tx Signaling Bit A B C D Rx Signaling Bit A B C D
ON HOOK : 0 1 0 1 RING ON : 0 0 * *
OFF HOOK : 1 1 0 1 BATT-REV & PLS ON : 0 1 0 0
RING-GND : 0 0 0 1 OOS-ALARM : ( NA )
PLAR OFF HOOK : 1 1 0 1 (=OFF HOOK) TIP-OPEN : 1 1 1 1
PLAR RING ON : 0 0 * * (=RING ON)
PLAR Ring Cadence : 2"ON,4"OFF ( * for don't care )
Ring Frequency : 20 Hz
Metering Pulse : OFF
Metering Freq. : 16 KHz
Metering Level : 2.4 Vrms

PLAR L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ALL PLAR = L1 : NO

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

NOTE 1: FXS-GM mode with metering pulse 12KHz/16KHz and Ground start.
NOTE 2: FXS-GMP
New mode: put a jumper to JP1 for H/W Version H or over. Than the
PLAR bit can be programmable when PLAR is trun on.
Old mode: add a R367 resister in the back of the PCB for H/W Verion
F. Than the PLAR bit can be programmable when PLAR is turn on.
NOTE 3: Regarding US ring back signaling for the FXS Card, PLAR generates
a 440/480Hz ringback tone (H/W version H or over).
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 118/202 DXC 5000

13.4 Diagnostic Test

Press “T” from the Port Menu to do diagnostic test. Use TAB key to select the desired option.
The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
SLOT 6 FXS === FXS Diagnostic Test === 15:41:13 12/09/2003

*1.RING TEST 2.BATTERY REVERSE TEST

- STATUS :

<< press ESC key to return to main menu >>

Press ENTER after done the selection. As the following example shows, the system is doing
RING TEST.
SLOT 6 FXS === FXS Diagnostic Test === 15:41:13 12/09/2003

*1.RING TEST 2.BATTERY REVERSE TEST

- STATUS : Remain 12 seconds.

<< press ESC key to return to main menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 119/202

13.5 Unit Load Default Configuration

Press “Y” from Port Menu to return the default. Then press “Y” or “N” to confirm the
selection.
SLOT 7 FXS === FXS Diagnostic Test === 14:32:20 07/22/2002

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

13.6 Unit Reset

Press “Z” from Port Menu to reset the unit. Then press “Y” or “N” to confirm the selection.
SLOT 7 FXS === FXS Diagnostic Test === 14:32:20 07/22/2002

Reset - are you sure ? [Y/N]

If users enter "Y" to confirm the reset, the system will request users to enter the password,
DXC5000, then press ENTER.
SLOT 7 FXS === FXS Diagnostic Test === 14:32:20 07/22/2002

==>> Enter password :

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 120/202 DXC 5000

14. FXO SUB-MENU

Under the Controller Menu, press “U” to choose a slot for the FXO port. Then the following
screen will show.
SLOT 8 FXO === Port Menu === 18:14:49 06/12/2001

Version : SW V1.00 05/17/2002

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Configuration S -> System Setup
I -> FXO Status T -> Diagnostic Test

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
F -> Log Off Z -> Unit Reset
O -> Log On
E -> Return to Main Menu

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

14.1 System Configuration

Under the above menu, press "C" to view the system configuration as below.
EXAMPLE 1:
When Metering Pulse is not available, the screen will show as below.
For lower the version 1.02:
SLOT 5 FXO === System Configuration === 07:20:43 06/25/2000

A/u-Law : A Impedance : 600 ohm

Tx Gain : -3.0 dB ( -21 ~ +10 )

Rx Gain : -3.0 dB ( -21 ~ +10 )

Tx Signaling Bit A B C D Rx Signaling Bit A B C D

RINGING : 0 0 0 1 OFF-HOOK : 1 1 * *
NO RING : 0 1 0 1 OOS-ALARM : * * * *
BATT-REV : 0 1 0 0 RING-GND : 0 0 0 1
PULSE ON : 0 1 0 0 ( * for don't care )
TIP-OPEN : 1 1 1 1
Trunk Condition : ON-HOOK
Line Polarity : NORMAL

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 121/202

For version 1.02 or over:

SLOT 7 FXO === System Configuration === 07:21:11 06/25/2000

A/u-Law : A Impedance : 600 ohm

L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12
TxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
RxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
( -21 ~ +10 in dB )
Tx Signaling Bit A B C D Rx Signaling Bit A B C D
RINGING : 0 0 0 1 OFF-HOOK : 1 1 * *
NO RING : 0 1 0 1 OOS-ALARM : * * * *
BATT-REV : 0 1 0 0 RING-GND : 0 0 0 1
PULSE ON : 0 1 0 0 ( * for don't care )
TIP-OPEN : 1 1 1 1
Trunk Condition : ON-HOOK
Line Polarity : NORMAL

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

EXAMPLE 2:

When Metering Pulse is available, the screen will show as below.

For lower the version 1.02:
SLOT 5 FXO === System Configuration === 07:20:43 06/25/2000

A/u-Law : A Impedance : 600 ohm

Tx Gain : -3.0 dB ( -21 ~ +10 )

Rx Gain : -3.0 dB ( -21 ~ +10 )

Tx Signaling Bit A B C D Rx Signaling Bit A B C D

RINGING : 0 0 0 1 OFF-HOOK : 1 1 * *
NO RING : 0 1 0 1 OOS-ALARM : * * * *
BATT-REV : 0 1 0 0 RING-GND : 0 0 0 1
PULSE ON : 0 1 0 0 ( * for don't care )
TIP-OPEN : 1 1 1 1
Trunk Condition : ON-HOOK
Line Polarity : NORMAL

Metering Pulse Frequency : 16 KHz

Metering Pulse Detect Mode : NORMAL
Minimum Pulse Decode Level ( -19 ~ -47 )
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12
-27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 (dBm)

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 122/202 DXC 5000

For version 1.02 or over:

SLOT 7 FXO === System Configuration === 07:21:11 06/25/2000

A/u-Law : A Impedance : 600 ohm

L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12
TxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
RxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
( -21 ~ +10 in dB )
Tx Signaling Bit A B C D Rx Signaling Bit A B C D
RINGING : 0 0 0 1 OFF-HOOK : 1 1 * *
NO RING : 0 1 0 1 OOS-ALARM : * * * *
BATT-REV : 0 1 0 0 RING-GND : 0 0 0 1
PULSE ON : 0 1 0 0 ( * for don't care )
TIP-OPEN : 1 1 1 1
Trunk Condition : ON-HOOK
Line Polarity : NORMAL

Metering Pulse Frequency : 16 KHz

Metering Pulse Detect Mode : NORMAL
Minimum Pulse Decode Level ( -19 ~ -47 )
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12
-27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 (dBm)

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 123/202

14.2 FXO Status

Under FXO Port Menu, press “I” to display status of FXO interface, then the screen will show
as below.
EXAMPLE 1:
When Ground Start is not available, the system will show up “NO AVAILABLE” for TIP-
OPEN and RING-GND. When Metering Pulse is not available, the system will show up “NO
AVAILABLE” for PULSE ON.
SLOT 8 FXO === FXO Status === 18:14:17 06/12/2001

1.RINGING : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

2.OFF-HOOK : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

3.TIP-OPEN : NO AVAILABLE

4.RING-GND : NO AVAILABLE

5.BATT-REV : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

6.PULSE ON : NO AVAILABLE

7.ALARM ON : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

<< press ESC key to return to main menu, SPACE key to refresh >>

EXAMPLE 2:
When Ground Start and Metering Pulse are available, the screen will show as below.
SLOT 8 FXO === FXO Status === 14:26:31 09/24/2002

1.RINGING : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

2.OFF-HOOK : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

3.TIP-OPEN : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

4.RING-GND : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

5.BATT-REV : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

6.PULSE ON : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

7.ALARM ON : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

<< press ESC key to return to main menu, SPACE key to refresh >>

NOTE : L1 means the status of Line1 and L1 means the status of Line1 is
active.
As the above example shows:
RINGING: L3 means the status of Line 3 is receiving RINGING;
TIP-OPEN: L1 means the status of Line 1 is Tip-Open;
PULSE ON: L6 means the status of Line 6 is receiving PULSE signal.
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 124/202 DXC 5000

14.3 System Setup

Under FXO Port Menu, press “S” to setup FXO system, then the following screen will show
up.
EXAMPLE 1:
When Metering Pulse is not available, the screen will show as below.
For lower the version 1.02:
SLOT 5 FXO === System Setup === 07:13:02 06/25/2000
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
A/u-Law : A Impedance : 600 ohm

Tx Gain : -3.0 dB ( -21 ~ +10 )

Rx Gain : -3.0 dB ( -21 ~ +10 )

Tx Signaling Bit A B C D Rx Signaling Bit A B C D

RINGING : 0 0 0 1 OFF-HOOK : 1 1 * *
NO RING : 0 1 0 1 OOS-ALARM : * * * *
BATT-REV : 0 1 0 0 RING-GND : 0 0 0 1
PULSE ON : 0 1 0 0 ( * for don't care )
TIP-OPEN : 1 1 1 1
Trunk Condition : ON-HOOK
Line Polarity : NORMAL

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

For version 1.02 or over:

SLOT 7 FXO === System Setup === 07:13:25 06/25/2000
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
A/u-Law : A Impedance : 600 ohm
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12
TxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
RxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
ALL Tx/Rx Gain = L1 : NO ( -21 ~ +10 in dB )
Tx Signaling Bit A B C D Rx Signaling Bit A B C D
RINGING : 0 0 0 1 OFF-HOOK : 1 1 * *
NO RING : 0 1 0 1 OOS-ALARM : * * * *
BATT-REV : 0 1 0 0 RING-GND : 0 0 0 1
PULSE ON : 0 1 0 0 ( * for don't care )
TIP-OPEN : 1 1 1 1
Trunk Condition : ON-HOOK
Line Polarity : NORMAL

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 125/202

EXAMPLE 2:
When Metering Pulse is available, the screen will show as below. This screen is allowed to
setup metering pulse frequency, pulse mode, and minimum pulse decode level for each line.
For lower the version 1.02:
SLOT 5 FXO === System Setup === 07:13:02 06/25/2000
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
A/u-Law : A Impedance : 600 ohm

Tx Gain : -3.0 dB ( -21 ~ +10 )

Rx Gain : -3.0 dB ( -21 ~ +10 )

Tx Signaling Bit A B C D Rx Signaling Bit A B C D

RINGING : 0 0 0 1 OFF-HOOK : 1 1 * *
NO RING : 0 1 0 1 OOS-ALARM : * * * *
BATT-REV : 0 1 0 0 RING-GND : 0 0 0 1
PULSE ON : 0 1 0 0 ( * for don't care )
TIP-OPEN : 1 1 1 1
Trunk Condition : ON-HOOK
Line Polarity : NORMAL

Metering Pulse Frequency : 16 KHz

Metering Pulse Detect Mode : NORMAL
Minimum Pulse Decode Level ( -19 ~ -47 )
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12
-27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 (dBm)
ALL Level= L1 : NO

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

For version 1.02 or over:

SLOT 7 FXO === System Setup === 07:13:25 06/25/2000
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
A/u-Law : A Impedance : 600 ohm
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12
TxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
RxGain: -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0 -3.0
ALL Tx/Rx Gain = L1 : NO ( -21 ~ +10 in dB )
Tx Signaling Bit A B C D Rx Signaling Bit A B C D
RINGING : 0 0 0 1 OFF-HOOK : 1 1 * *
NO RING : 0 1 0 1 OOS-ALARM : * * * *
BATT-REV : 0 1 0 0 RING-GND : 0 0 0 1
PULSE ON : 0 1 0 0 ( * for don't care )
TIP-OPEN : 1 1 1 1
Trunk Condition : ON-HOOK
Line Polarity : NORMAL

Metering Pulse Frequency : 16 KHz

Metering Pulse Detect Mode : NORMAL
Minimum Pulse Decode Level ( -19 ~ -47 )
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12
-27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 (dBm)
ALL Level= L1 : NO

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

NOTE 1: When L1’s decode level value is changed, L2’s value will be
automatically changed by the system. Also if L2’s value is changed,
L1’s value will be changed too.
Same operation is applied for L3 and L4, L5 and L6, L7 and L8, L9
and L10, L11 and L12.
NOTE 2: Metering Pulse Detect Mode, this option is allowed to select a
desired detect mode of pulse. Two modes, NORMAL and PACKET,
are available here. Use TAB key to switch a desired item.
For NORMAL mode (Tone Follower mode), a logic level for the period
of a correct decode.
For PACKET mode, respond/ de-respond after a cumulative period of
tone or no-tone in a preset period.
NOTE 3: ALL Level= L1 : NO, this option is allowed to copy Line 1’s pulse
decode value to all lines or not. Use TAB key to switch YES (copy to
all) or NO (not copy to all).
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 126/202 DXC 5000

14.4 Diagnostics Test

Under FXO Port Menu, press “T” to do diagnostics test, then the screen will show as below.
Two options are available for diagnostics test: OFF-HOOK TEST and PULSE DECODE
LEVEL SCAN. Use TAB key to select the desired option. The current selection will be
highlighted by an asterisk (*).
1. OFF-HOOK TEST
SLOT 9 FXO === Diagnostic Test === 11:05:47 05/17/2002

*1.OFF-HOOK TEST 2.PULSE DECODE LEVEL SCAN

- STATUS : Remain 11 seconds.

<< press ESC key to return to main menu >>

2. PULSE DECODE LEVEL SCAN

After done the scan of pulse decode level, the system will show up detected value of each
line in the screen. Press “Y” to copy the detected value to Pulse Decode Level of System
Setup screen. Or press “N” or ESC key to cancel the copy.
NA means no found any signal in line.
SLOT 8 FXO === FXO Diagnostic Test === 14:27:05 09/24/2002

1.OFF-HOOK TEST *2.PULSE DECODE LEVEL SCAN

- STATUS :

Detected Value
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12
-24 -21 -20 NA -20 NA NA -24 -21 -20 NA -21 (dBm)

Copy Detected Value to System Setup (Pulse Decode Level) (Y/N)

<< press ESC key to return to main menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 127/202

14.5 Unit Load Default Configuration

Press “Y” from Port Menu to return the default. Then press “Y” or “N” to confirm the
selection.
SLOT 9 FXO === Diagnostic Test === 11:05:47 05/17/2002

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

14.6 Unit Reset

Press “Z” from Port Menu to reset the unit. Then press “Y” or “N” to confirm the selection.
SLOT 9 FXO === Diagnostic Test === 11:05:47 05/17/2002

Reset - are you sure ? [Y/N]

If users enter "Y" to confirm the reset, the system will request users to enter the password,
DXC5000, then press ENTER.
SLOT 9 FXO === Diagnostic Test === 11:05:47 05/17/2002

==>> Enter password :

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 128/202 DXC 5000

15. MAGNETO SUB-MENU

Under the Controller Menu, press “U” to choose a slot for the Magneto port. Then the port
menu will show as below.
SLOT 10 Magneto === Port Menu === 14:34:46 06/30/2003

Version : SW S1.A0 04/25/2003

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Configuration S -> System Setup
I -> Magneto Status T -> Diagnostic Test

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
F -> Log Off Z -> Unit Reset
O -> Log On
E -> Return to Main Menu

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>>>

15.1 System Configuration

Under the above menu, press "C" to view the system configuration as below.
For version 1.03.01 or over:
SLOT 10 Magneto 14:35:24 06/30/2003

Ring Mode : RING ACROSS (L1 & L2) AND (L1 & GND)
A/u-Law : A
Impedance : 900 ohm
Tx Gain : -3.0 dB ( -21 ~ +10 )
Rx Gain : -3.0 dB ( -21 ~ +10 )

Tx Signaling Bit A B C D Rx Signaling Bit A B C D

TX-RING(L1 & L2 ) : 1 1 1 0 RX-RING(L1 & L2 ) : 1 1 1 0
TX-RING(L1 & GND) : 1 1 0 0 RX-RING(L1 & GND) : 1 1 0 0
PLAR TX-RING(L1 & L2 ) : 1 1 1 1 PLAR RX-RING(L1 & L2 ) : 1 1 1 1
PLAR TX-RING(L1 & GND) : 1 1 0 1 PLAR RX-RING(L1 & GND) : 1 1 0 1
NO TX-RING : 0 1 0 1 OOS-ALARM : 0 0 0 0
(OOS-ALARM 0000 for no available )
PLAR Ring Cadence : 1"ON,2"OFF

PLAR L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 129/202

15.2 Magneto Status

Under the Port Menu, press "I" to display the Magneto system status, then the screen will
show as below.
SLOT 10 Magneto === Magneto Status === 14:35:42 06/30/2003

1. TX-RING(L1&L2 ) : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

2. TX-RING(L1&GND) : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

3. PLAR ON : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

4. ALARM ON : L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

<< press ESC key to return to main menu, SPACE key to refresh >>

15.3 System Setup

Under the Port Menu, press "S" to setup system configuration. Use arrow keys to move the
cursor and TAB key to roll up options.
For version 1.03.01 or over:
SLOT 10 Magneto === System Setup === 14:35:59 06/30/2003
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Ring Mode : RING ACROSS (L1 & L2) AND (L1 & GND)
A/u-Law : A
Impedance : 900 ohm
Tx Gain : -3.0 dB ( -21 ~ +10 )
Rx Gain : -3.0 dB ( -21 ~ +10 )

Tx Signaling Bit A B C D Rx Signaling Bit A B C D

TX-RING(L1 & L2 ) : 1 1 1 0 RX-RING(L1 & L2 ) : 1 1 1 0
TX-RING(L1 & GND) : 1 1 0 0 RX-RING(L1 & GND) : 1 1 0 0
PLAR TX-RING(L1 & L2 ) : 1 1 1 1 PLAR RX-RING(L1 & L2 ) : 1 1 1 1
PLAR TX-RING(L1 & GND) : 1 1 0 1 PLAR RX-RING(L1 & GND) : 1 1 0 1
NO TX-RING : 0 1 0 1 OOS-ALARM : 0 0 0 0
(OOS-ALARM 0000 for no available )
PLAR Ring Cadence : 1"ON,2"OFF

PLAR L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ALL = L1 : NO

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

NOTE: Because of the operational complexity, PLAR ON is not

recommended."
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 130/202 DXC 5000

15.4 Diagnostic Test

Under the Port Menu, press "T" to do diagnostic test, then the screen will show as below.
SLOT 10 Magneto === Magneto Diagnostic Test === 14:36:19 06/30/2003

*1.RX-RING(L1&L2) TEST 2.RX-RING(L1&GND) TEST 3.TX-RING TEST

(PLAR ON only) (PLAR ON only)

- STATUS :

<< press ESC key to return to main menu >>

15.5 Unit Load Default Configuration

Under the Port Menu, press "Y" to load default configuration. Then press “Y” to confirm or
“N” to abandon it.
SLOT 10 Magneto === Port Menu === 14:36:32 06/30/2003

Version : SW S1.A0 04/25/2003

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Configuration S -> System Setup
I -> Magneto Status T -> Diagnostic Test

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
F -> Log Off Z -> Unit Reset
O -> Log On
E -> Return to Main Menu

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 131/202

15.6 Unit Reset

Under the Port Menu, press "Z" to reset the system. Then press “Y” to confirm or “N” to
abandon it.
SLOT 10 Magneto === Port Menu === 14:36:32 06/30/2003

Version : SW S1.A0 04/25/2003

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Configuration S -> System Setup
I -> Magneto Status T -> Diagnostic Test

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
F -> Log Off Z -> Unit Reset
O -> Log On
E -> Return to Main Menu

Reset - are you sure ? [Y/N]

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 132/202 DXC 5000

16. ROUTER SUB-MENU

Under the Controller Menu, press “U” to choose a slot for the Router port. Then the port
menu will show as below.
SLOT C RTR LAN/WAN === Port Menu === 14:26:47 06/30/2003

Version : SW V3.05 12/03/2002

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit System(LAN1-WAN16) Display S -> Unit System(LAN1-WAN16) Setup
B -> Unit System(WAN17-WAN32) Display A -> Unit System(WAN17-WAN32) Setup
X -> Unit Route Display R -> Unit Route Setup
T -> Unit DS0 MAP Display M -> Unit DS0 MAP Setup
D -> Unit Firmware Upgrade

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose a Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu Z -> Unit Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

16.1 System Display (LAN1 – WAN16)

Under the Port Menu, press ”C” to show up the system display for LAN1 to WAN16. Then
the screen will show as below.
SLOT C RTR LAN/WAN === Port System(LAN1-WAN16) Setup === 14:27:32 06/30/2003

NI IPAddress SubnetMask Frame RIP_I RIP_II Mode

LAN1 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 ETHERNET DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
LAN2 140.132.042.009 255.255.000.000 ETHERNET ENABLE ENABLE ROUTE
WAN1 100.001.001.002 255.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE ENABLE ROUTE
WAN2 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN3 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN4 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN5 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN6 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN7 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN8 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN9 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN10 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN11 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN12 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN13 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN14 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN15 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN16 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 133/202

16.2 System Display (WAN17 – WAN32)

Under the Port Menu, press ”B” to show up the system display for WAN17 to WAN32. Then
the screen will show as below.
SLOT C RTR LAN/WAN=== Port System(WAN17-WAN32) Setup === 14:28:52 06/30/2003

NI IPAddress SubnetMask Frame RIP_I RIP_II Mode

WAN17 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN18 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN19 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN20 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN21 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN22 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN23 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN24 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN25 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN26 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN27 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN28 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN29 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN30 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN31 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN32 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

16.3 Route Display

Under the Port Menu, press ”X” to view the Router configuration, then the following screen
will show up.
SLOT C RTR LAN/WAN === Port ROUTE Setup === 14:29:42 06/30/2003

Net_Address Netmask Gateway_Address NI_Address Metric

000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 1
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 1
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 1
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 1
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 1
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 1
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 1
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 1
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 1
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 1
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 1
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 1
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 1
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 1
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 1
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 1

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 134/202 DXC 5000

16.4 DS0 Map Display

Under the Port Menu, press ”T” to display DS0 Map setting, then the following screen will
show up.
SLOT C RTR LAN/WAN === Port DS0 MAP Setup === 14:30:44 06/30/2003

TimeSlot WANPort TimeSlot WANPort

TS1 : WAN1 TS17 : Idle
TS2 : Idle TS18 : Idle
TS3 : Idle TS19 : Idle
TS4 : Idle TS20 : Idle
TS5 : Idle TS21 : Idle
TS6 : Idle TS22 : Idle
TS7 : Idle TS23 : Idle
TS8 : Idle TS24 : Idle
TS9 : Idle TS25 : Idle
TS10 : Idle TS26 : Idle
TS11 : Idle TS27 : Idle
TS12 : Idle TS28 : Idle
TS13 : Idle TS29 : Idle
TS14 : Idle TS30 : Idle
TS15 : Idle TS31 : Idle
TS16 : Idle TS32 : Idle

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

16.5 System Setup (LAN1 – WAN16)

Under the Port Menu, press ”S” to do system setup for LAN1 to WAN16, then the following
screen will show up.
SLOT C RTR LAN/WAN === Port System(LAN1-WAN16) Setup === 14:30:59 06/30/2003
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

NI IPAddress SubnetMask Frame RIP_I RIP_II Mode

LAN1 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 ETHERNET DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
LAN2 140.132.042.009 255.255.000.000 ETHERNET ENABLE ENABLE ROUTE
WAN1 100.001.001.002 255.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE ENABLE ROUTE
WAN2 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN3 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN4 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN5 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN6 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN7 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN8 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN9 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN10 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN11 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN12 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN13 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN14 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN15 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN16 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 135/202

16.6 System Setup (WAN17 – WAN32)

Under the Port Menu, press ”A” to do system setup for WAN17 to WAN32, then the following
screen will show up.
SLOT C RTR LAN/WAN=== Port System(WAN17-WAN32) Setup === 14:31:46 06/30/2003
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

NI IPAddress SubnetMask Frame RIP_I RIP_II Mode

WAN17 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN18 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN19 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN20 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN21 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN22 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN23 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN24 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN25 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN26 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN27 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN28 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN29 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN30 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN31 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE
WAN32 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC DISABLE DISABLE ROUTE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

16.7 Route Setup

Under the Port Menu, press ”R” to setup Router configuration, then the following screen will
show up. Use arrow keys to move the cursor and BACKSPACE to edit.
SLOT C RTR LAN/WAN === Port ROUTE Setup === 14:32:39 06/30/2003
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

Net_Address Netmask Gateway_Address NI_Address Metric

000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 01

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 136/202 DXC 5000

16.8 DS0 Map Setup

Under the Port Menu, press ”M” to do DS0 Map setting, then the following screen will show
up. Use arrow keys to move the cursor and TAB key to roll options.
SLOT C RTR LAN/WAN === Port DS0 MAP Setup === 14:33:19 06/30/2003
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

TimeSlot WANPort TimeSlot WANPort

TS1 : WAN1 TS17 : Idle
TS2 : Idle TS18 : Idle
TS3 : Idle TS19 : Idle
TS4 : Idle TS20 : Idle
TS5 : Idle TS21 : Idle
TS6 : Idle TS22 : Idle
TS7 : Idle TS23 : Idle
TS8 : Idle TS24 : Idle
TS9 : Idle TS25 : Idle
TS10 : Idle TS26 : Idle
TS11 : Idle TS27 : Idle
TS12 : Idle TS28 : Idle
TS13 : Idle TS29 : Idle
TS14 : Idle TS30 : Idle
TS15 : Idle TS31 : Idle
TS16 : Idle TS32 : Idle

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

16.9 Firmware Upgrade

Under the Port Menu, press ”D” to upgrade firmware, then the screen will show as below.
Use arrow keys to move the cursor and BACKSPACE to edit.
DXC 5000 === Download Firmware === 14:33:39 06/30/2003
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

Current Software Downloading...: ROUTER!!

TFTP Server IP : 192.168.100.208
Firmware File Name :

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 137/202

16.10 Unit Load Default Configuration

Under the Port Menu, press "Y" to load default configuration. Then press “Y” to confirm or
“N” to abandon it.
SLOT C RTR LAN/WAN === Port Menu === 14:33:55 06/30/2003

Version : SW V3.05 12/03/2002

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit System(LAN1-WAN16) Display S -> Unit System(LAN1-WAN16) Setup
B -> Unit System(WAN17-WAN32) Display A -> Unit System(WAN17-WAN32) Setup
X -> Unit Route Display R -> Unit Route Setup
T -> Unit DS0 MAP Display M -> Unit DS0 MAP Setup
D -> Unit Firmware Upgrade

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose a Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu Z -> Unit Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

16.11 Unit Reset

Under the Port Menu, press "Z" to reset the system. Then press “Y” to confirm or “N” to
abandon it.
SLOT C RTR LAN/WAN === Port Menu === 14:33:55 06/30/2003

Version : SW V3.05 12/03/2002

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit System(LAN1-WAN16) Display S -> Unit System(LAN1-WAN16) Setup
B -> Unit System(WAN17-WAN32) Display A -> Unit System(WAN17-WAN32) Setup
X -> Unit Route Display R -> Unit Route Setup
T -> Unit DS0 MAP Display M -> Unit DS0 MAP Setup
D -> Unit Firmware Upgrade

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose a Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu Z -> Unit Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

Reset - are you sure ? [Y/N]

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 138/202 DXC 5000

17. MINI QUAD E1 SUB-MENU

Under the Controller Menu, press “U” to choose a slot for Quad E1 port. The screen will
show as below. Then press “P” to choose mini Quad E1 port, press ENTER to get into the
port menu.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Menu === 10:28:12 10/27/2004

Version : SW S1.C0 10/20/2004

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report S -> Unit System Setup
A -> Unit Line Availability K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
C -> Unit Configuration M -> Unit Alarm Setup
I -> Unit Status X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Please input E1 Port (1-4), then press ENTER

This port menu is for mini Quad E1 Port 2.

SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Menu === 10:28:12 10/27/2004

Version : SW S1.C0 10/20/2004

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report S -> Unit System Setup
A -> Unit Line Availability K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
C -> Unit Configuration M -> Unit Alarm Setup
I -> Unit Status X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 139/202

17.1 Unit 1-Hour Performance Report

Press “1” from Port Menu to view the 1-hour performance report. Use TAB key to select
register type, USER or LINE. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Menu === 10:28:12 10/27/2004

>> Select Register Type ? *USER LINE

After pressing ENTER from the above screen, the following screen will show up.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2=== Port 1-Hour Perf. Report === 10:22:19 10/27/2004
LINE
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 754 seconds
(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (DM) (CSS)
Current 15-Min Interval : 4 0 4 0 1 1
1st Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
2nd Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
3rd Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
4th Nearest 15-Min Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0

(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (DM) (CSS)
Current 24-Hour Interval : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
10/26/2004 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
10/25/2004 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
10/24/2004 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
10/23/2004 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
10/22/2004 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
10/21/2004 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
10/20/2004 : ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

<< TAB key to show Statistics Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

Press TAB key to display the 1-hour statistics report, as belwo shows.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2=== Port 1-Hour Stat. Report === 10:22:48 10/27/2004
LINE
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 754 seconds
(%AS) (%EFS) (%ES) (%BES) (%SES) (%DM) (%CSS)
Current 15-Min :100.00% 99.469% 0.5305% 0.5305% 0.0000% 6.6666% 0.3921%
1st Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
2nd Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
3rd Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
4th Nearest 15-Min :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0

(%AS) (%EFS) (%ES) (%BES) (%SES) (%DM) (%CSS)
Current 24-Hour :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
10/26/2004 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
10/25/2004 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
10/24/2004 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
10/23/2004 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
10/22/2004 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
10/21/2004 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
10/20/2004 :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

<< TAB key to show Performance Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 140/202 DXC 5000

17.2 Unit 24-Hour Performance Report

Press “2” from Port Menu to view the 24-hour performance report. Use TAB key to select
register type, USER or LINE, press ENTER. Then move the cursor to select the desired
parameter. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2=== Port 24-Hour Perf. Report === 10:28:12 10/27/2004

>> Select Register Type ? *USER LINE

>> Select Parameter ? *ES UAS BES SES CSS DM AS EFS BPV

After pressing ENTER from the above screen, the following screen will show up.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2=== Port 24-Hour Perf. Report === 10:28:12 10/27/2004
USER ES
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 869 seconds
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 20
(ES) (UAS) (BES) (SES) (DM) (CSS)
Current 15-Min Interval : 0 869 0 0 0 146
Current 24-Hour Interval : 0 18000 0 0 0 255

-- USER, ES, Last 96 15-Min Interval :

01-08 > 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
09-16 > 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
17-24 > 0 0 0 0 ----- ----- ----- -----
25-32 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
33-40 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
41-48 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
49-56 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
57-64 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
65-72 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
73-80 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
81-88 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
89-96 > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

<< TAB key to show Statistics Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

Press TAB key to display the 1-hour statistics report, as belwo shows.
SLOT C MQuad-E1 PORT 1=== Port 24-Hour Stat. Report === 13:42:16 10/27/2004
USER %ES
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 282 seconds
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0
(%ES) (%UAS) (%BES) (%SES) (%DM) (%CSS)
Current 15-Min :0.7092% 0.0000% 0.7092% 0.0000% 6.6666% 0.0000%
Current 24-Hour :------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

-- USER, %ES, Last 96 15-Min Interval :

01-08 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
09-16 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
17-24 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
25-32 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
33-40 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
41-48 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
49-56 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
57-64 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
65-72 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
73-80 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
81-88 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
89-96 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

<< TAB key to show Performance Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 141/202

17.3 Unit Line Availability

Under Port Menu, press “A” to view the line availability as the following screen shows.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Line Availability === 10:23:56 10/27/2004

-- Line Availability during Last 24-Hour:

Valid Seconds : 849 seconds
Available Seconds : 849 seconds
Unavailable Seconds: 0 seconds
Line Avaliability : 100.0 %

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

17.4 Unit Configuration

To view the unit configuration, press “C” from Port Menu, then the screen will show as below.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Port System Setup === 10:24:14 10/27/2004

FRAME = ON
CODE = HDB3
CRC = ON
RAI = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
FDL = OFF
Sa_bit = Sa4
IDLE = D5
Protected = DISABLE
Master = ****
INTF = 120 Ohm

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 142/202 DXC 5000

17.5 Unit Status

Press “I” from Port Menu, to show the screen of Unit Status as below.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Status === 10:24:27 10/27/2004

-- LINE --
LOS : NO
LOF : NO
RCV AIS : NO
RCV RAI : NO
XMT AIS : NO
XMT RAI : NO
BPV ERROR COUNT : 9407
ES ERROR COUNT : 4

-- TEST --
PATTERN TRANSMITTED : OFF
NEAR-END LOOPBACK : OFF

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

17.6 Unit Alarm History

To view the unit alarm history, press “H” from Port Menu.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Alarm History === 10:24:44 10/27/2004
LOCAL
[ALARM-TYPE] [THRESHOLD] [CURR-STATE] [COUNT] [ALARM]
RAI OK 0 MAJOR
AIS OK 0 MAJOR
LOS OK 0 MAJOR
LOF OK 0 MAJOR
BPV 10E-5 OK 0 MAJOR
ES 1 OK 0 MAJOR
UAS 1 OK 0 MAJOR
CSS 1 OK 0 MAJOR

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 143/202

17.7 Unit Alarm Queue

Under Port Menu, press “Q” to view the alarm queue as the following screen shows.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Unit Alarm Queue === 10:25:10 10/27/2004
1 -- Slot A : E1#4: MAJOR : UAS remove--------------- 10:24:51 10/27/2004
2 -- Slot A : E1#3: MAJOR : UAS remove--------------- 10:24:51 10/27/2004
3 -- Slot A : E1#4: MAJOR : UAS---------------------- 10:24:49 10/27/2004
4 -- Slot A : E1#3: MAJOR : UAS---------------------- 10:24:49 10/27/2004
5 -- Slot A : E1#4: MAJOR : UAS remove--------------- 10:09:38 10/27/2004
6 -- Slot A : E1#3: MAJOR : UAS remove--------------- 10:09:38 10/27/2004
7 -- Slot A : E1#4: MAJOR : UAS---------------------- 10:09:37 10/27/2004
8 -- Slot A : E1#3: MAJOR : UAS---------------------- 10:09:37 10/27/2004
9 -- Slot A : E1#2: MAJOR : RAI remove--------------- 10:09:35 10/27/2004
10 -- Slot A : E1#1: MAJOR : RAI remove--------------- 10:09:35 10/27/2004
11 -- Slot A : E1#4: MAJOR : LOF---------------------- 10:09:31 10/27/2004
12 -- Slot A : E1#4: MAJOR : LOS---------------------- 10:09:31 10/27/2004
13 -- Slot A : E1#3: MAJOR : LOF---------------------- 10:09:31 10/27/2004
14 -- Slot A : E1#3: MAJOR : LOS---------------------- 10:09:31 10/27/2004
15 -- Slot A : E1#2: MAJOR : RAI---------------------- 10:09:31 10/27/2004
16 -- Slot A : E1#1: MAJOR : RAI---------------------- 10:09:31 10/27/2004

<< ESC key return to previous menu or SPACE bar to refresh >>

17.8 Unit Loopback Setup

Under Port Menu, press “L” to do Loopback Test, then the screen will show as below. Use
arrow keys to move the cursor, press ENTER key to select items.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Loopback Test === 10:25:24 10/27/2004
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

- NEAR-END LOOPBACK : *OFF LOCAL PLB LLB

- SEND LOOPBACK ACTIVATE CODE TO FAR-END:

*PAYLOAD LINE
- SEND LOOPBACK DEACTIVATE CODE TO FAR-END:
*PAYLOAD LINE
- SEND TEST PATTERN:
*OFF PRBS-FULL

- STATUS:

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 144/202 DXC 5000

17.9 Unit System Setup

To setup unit system, press “S” from Port Menu, then the following screen will show up. Use
arrow keys to move the cursor, TAB key to roll up options.
NOTE: If "Protected" is set as DISABLE, then "Master" option will show 4
asterisks (****), which means this option is not allowed to set up.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Port System Setup === 10:26:20 10/27/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ON
CODE = HDB3
CRC = ON
RAI = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
FDL = OFF
Sa_bit = Sa4
IDLE = D5
Protected = DISABLE
Master = ****
INTF = 120 Ohm

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

NOTE: If "Protected" is set as CIRCUIT, then user can go to "Master" option

to set the current port as Master or Slave.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Port System Setup === 10:28:12 10/27/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ON
CODE = HDB3
CRC = ON
RAI = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
FDL = OFF
Sa_bit = Sa4
IDLE = D5
Protected = CIRCUIT
Master = MASTER
INTF = 75 Ohm

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

NOTE: If "Protected" is set as LINE, then user is allowed to set "Master"

option as Master or Slave.
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 145/202

SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Port System Setup === 10:28:12 10/27/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ON
CODE = HDB3
CRC = ON
RAI = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
FDL = OFF
Sa_bit = Sa4
IDLE = D5
Protected = LINE
Master = SLAVE
INTF = 120 Ohm

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

After done the setting, press ENTER. Then the system will ask for double confirm. Press "Y"
to change the current configuration or "N" to abort it. To save the new configuration, press
"V" from the "Controller Menu".
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Port System Setup === 10:28:12 10/27/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ON
CODE = HDB3
CRC = ON
RAI = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
FDL = OFF
Sa_bit = Sa4
IDLE = D5
Protected = LINE
Master = SLAVE
INTF = 120 Ohm

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

NOTE: As user is setting "Protected" option, if the system occurs this

message on the screen: The next protect port is not ready, which
means the connection of protect port is not correct.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Port System Setup === 10:28:12 10/27/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ON
CODE = HDB3
CRC = ON
RAI = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
FDL = OFF
Sa_bit = Sa4
IDLE = D5
Protected = CIRCUIT
Master = MASTER
INTF = 75 Ohm

The next protect port is not ready

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 146/202 DXC 5000

17.10 Unit Clear Performance Data

Press “K” from Port Menu to clear performance data, the screen will show as below. Press
“Y” or “N” to confirm the commend.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Menu === 10:26:45 10/27/2004

Version : SW S1.C0 10/20/2004

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report S -> Unit System Setup
A -> Unit Line Availability K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
C -> Unit Configuration M -> Unit Alarm Setup
I -> Unit Status X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

==>Clear performance data - are you sure [Y/N] ?

17.11 Unit Alarm Setup

To do alarm setup, press “M” from Port Menu, then the following screen will show up.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Alarm Setup === 10:27:05 10/27/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[TYPE] [THRESHOLD] [ALARM]

RAI MAJOR
AIS MAJOR
LOS MAJOR
LOF MAJOR
BPV 10E-5 MAJOR
ES 001 MAJOR
UAS 001 MAJOR
CSS 001 MAJOR

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 147/202

17.12 Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History

Under Port Menu, press “X” to clear alarm queue and history, then press “Y” or ”N” to
confirm it.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Menu === 10:27:33 10/27/2004

Version : SW S1.C0 10/20/2004

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report S -> Unit System Setup
A -> Unit Line Availability K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
C -> Unit Configuration M -> Unit Alarm Setup
I -> Unit Status X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Clear alarm queue of SLOT A - are you sure ? [Y/N]

17.13 Unit Upgrade Firmware

Press “D” to download firmware, then the screen will show as below. Use arrow keys to
move the cursor and SPACE key to edit.
DXC 5000 === Download Firmware === 10:27:49 10/27/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

Bank 1 Firmware Ver. : S1.C0 10/20/2004 (Good)

Bank 2 Firmware Ver. : S1.B0 10/20/2004 (Good)
Working Firmware Bank: 1
TFTP Server IP : 000.000.000.000
Firmware File Name :

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 148/202 DXC 5000

17.14 Unit Load Default Configuration

Press “Y” to return to default, then confirm it by pressing “Y” or “N”.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Menu === 10:28:12 10/27/2004

Version : SW S1.C0 10/20/2004

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report S -> Unit System Setup
A -> Unit Line Availability K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
C -> Unit Configuration M -> Unit Alarm Setup
I -> Unit Status X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

17.15 Unit Reset

Under Port Menu, press “Z” to reset unit. Press “Y” or “N” to confirm it.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 2 === Port Menu === 10:28:12 10/27/2004

Version : SW S1.C0 10/20/2004

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Unit 1-Hour Perf. Report L -> Unit Loopback Setup
2 -> Unit 24-Hour Perf. Report S -> Unit System Setup
A -> Unit Line Availability K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
C -> Unit Configuration M -> Unit Alarm Setup
I -> Unit Status X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

Reset - are you sure ? [Y/N]

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 149/202

18. G.SHDSL (4 PORTS, 1 PAIR) SUB-MENU

Under the Controller Menu, press “U” to choose a slot for G.SHDSL port. The screen will
show as below. Then press “P” to choose G.SHDSL port, press ENTER to get into the port
menu.
SLOT 5 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 11:29:35 12/21/2004

Version : SW S1.00 16/10/2004

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
R -> Unit Performance Report M -> Unit Alarm Setup
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
N -> HDSL Information B -> Unit Line Rate
D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose G.SHDSL Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu W -> Far End Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

18.1 Unit Configuration

To display port system, enter ”C”. The screens of system setup of far-end for G.SHDSL-
DTE, G.SHDSL-T1, G.SHDSL-E1(Master), and G.SHDSL-E1(Slave) are shown as follows.
18.1.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL-DTE
SLOT 5 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Configuration === 11:32:26 12/21/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (1 pair)

[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]

xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
MAX DATA RATE : 768Kbps CLOCK SOURCE : LINE
DATA RATE : 768Kbps
DTE CLOCK : NORMAL
DTE DATA : NORMAL
DTE RTS : ACTIVE
DTE TTM : OFF
DTE V.54 : OFF
DS1 Time Slots : DTE INTERFACE : V.35
[iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii] MAPPER MAPPING:
[111111111111]

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 150/202 DXC 5000

18.1.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL-T1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Configuration === 10:12:28 12/22/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (1 pair)

[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]

xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
MAX DATA RATE : 768Kbps CLOCK SOURCE : INTERNAL
DS1 FRAME : ESF
DS1 CODE : B8ZS
DS1 CAS : OFF
DS1 Time Slots :
[i111111111111iiiiiiiiiii]
xDSL carries DS1 time slots as:
DS1 Time Slots : TS 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11
[iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii] TS 12 13

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

18.1.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL-E1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Configuration === 11:33:26 12/21/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (1 pair)

[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]

xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
MAX DATA RATE : 768Kbps CLOCK SOURCE : LINE
DS1 FRAME : CRC-OFF
DS1 CODE : HDB3
DS1 Time Slots :
[i111111111111iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii]
xDSL carries DS1 time slots as:
TS 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
DS1 Time Slots : TS 11 12
[iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii]

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

18.1.4 Far-end: G.SHDSL-BRIDGE

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Configuration === 10:52:56 12/22/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (1 pair)

[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]

xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
MAX DATA RATE : 768Kbps CLOCK SOURCE : LINE
DATA RATE : 768Kbps
DTE CLOCK : None
DTE DATA : None
DTE RTS : None
DTE TTM : None
DTE V.54 : None
DS1 Time Slots : DTE INTERFACE : BRIDGE
[iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii] MAPPER MAPPING:
[111111111111]

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 151/202

18.1.5 Far-end: G.SHDSL-ROUTER

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Configuration === 11:40:30 12/22/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (1 pair)

[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]

xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
MAX DATA RATE : 768Kbps CLOCK SOURCE : LINE
DATA RATE : 768Kbps
DTE CLOCK : None
DTE DATA : None
DTE RTS : None
DTE TTM : None
DTE V.54 : None
DS1 Time Slots : DTE INTERFACE : ROUTER
[iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii] MAPPER MAPPING:
[111111111111]

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

18.2 Unit Status

To view the port status screen, enter ”I”. The screens of port status of far-end for G.SHDSL-
DTE, G.SHDSL-T1, G.SHDSL-E1 (Master), and G.SHDSL-E1(Slave) are shown as follows.
All of the following cards support remote link identification: DTU-6, DTU-10, HDSL, G.
SHDSL-2, G. SHDSL-4, E1, QE1, and MiniQE1.
18.2.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE
SLOT 5 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Status === 11:34:38 12/21/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (1 pair)
[------------- MASTER ------------] [------------- SLAVE -------------]
Serial Number: 026740
[LOOP-1] [LOOP-1] [DTE]
SYNC : YES SYNC : YES DSR : YES
ES : 0 ES : 0 CTS : NO
SES : 0 SES : 0 DCD : YES
UAS : 308 UAS : 308 DTR : NO
RTS : NO

[Loopback Status]
xDSL Loopback : OFF
SLAVE Loopback : OFF
BERT : OFF
SLAVE BERT : OFF

[Daughter Card Status] [Remote Link Identification]

Daughter Card : No Daughter Card TYPE : CPE

[CAS Status]
CAS : DISABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 152/202 DXC 5000

18.2.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Status === 10:13:17 12/22/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (1 pair)
[------------- MASTER ------------] [------------- SLAVE -------------]
Serial Number: 026740
[LOOP-1] [LOOP-1] [T1]
SYNC : YES SYNC : YES SYNC : NO
ES : 0 ES : 0 ES : 0
SES : 0 SES : 0 SES : 0
UAS : 1232 UAS : 1232 UAS : 45
TxAIS: NO
TxYEL: YES
RxAIS: NO
[Loopback Status] RxYEL: NO
xDSL Loopback : OFF LOS : YES
SLAVE Loopback : OFF LOF : YES
BERT : OFF
SLAVE BERT : OFF

[Daughter Card Status] [Remote Link Identification]

Daughter Card : No Daughter Card TYPE : CPE

[CAS Status]
CAS : DISABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

18.2.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Status === 11:34:38 12/21/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (1 pair)
[------------- MASTER ------------] [------------- SLAVE -------------]
Serial Number: 026740
[LOOP-1] [LOOP-1] [E1]
SYNC : YES SYNC : YES SYNC : YES
ES : 3 ES : 0 ES : 1
SES : 0 SES : 0 SES : 0
UAS : 148 UAS : 148 UAS : 0
TxAIS: NO
TxRAI: NO
RxAIS: NO
[Loopback Status] RxRAI: NO
xDSL Loopback : OFF LOS : NO
SLAVE Loopback : OFF LOF : NO
BERT : OFF
SLAVE BERT : OFF

[Daughter Card Status] [Remote Link Identification]

Daughter Card : No Daughter Card TYPE : CPE

[CAS Status]
CAS : DISABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 153/202

18.2.4 Far-end: G.SHDSL- BRIDGE

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Status === 10:48:12 12/22/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (1 pair)
[------------- MASTER ------------] [------------- SLAVE -------------]
Serial Number: 026740
[LOOP-1] [LOOP-1] [DTE]
SYNC : YES SYNC : YES DSR : NA
ES : 3 ES : 0 CTS : NA
SES : 0 SES : 0 DCD : NA
UAS : 246 UAS : 246 DTR : NA
RTS : NA

[Loopback Status]
xDSL Loopback : OFF
SLAVE Loopback : OFF
BERT : OFF
SLAVE BERT : OFF

[Daughter Card Status] [Remote Link Identification]

Daughter Card : No Daughter Card TYPE : CPE

[CAS Status]
CAS : DISABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

18.2.5 Far-end: G.SHDSL- ROUTER

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Status === 11:41:45 12/22/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (1 pair)
[------------- MASTER ------------] [------------- SLAVE -------------]
Serial Number: 026740
[LOOP-1] [LOOP-1] [DTE]
SYNC : YES SYNC : YES DSR : NA
ES : 0 ES : 0 CTS : NA
SES : 0 SES : 0 DCD : NA
UAS : 2323 UAS : 2323 DTR : NA
RTS : NA

[Loopback Status]
xDSL Loopback : OFF
SLAVE Loopback : OFF
BERT : OFF
SLAVE BERT : OFF

[Daughter Card Status] [Remote Link Identification]

Daughter Card : No Daughter Card TYPE : CPE

[CAS Status]
CAS : DISABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 154/202 DXC 5000

18.2.6 Line Power (4 ports)

Under Port Menu the screen will show “ Daughter Card: Line Power Single” when it include
line power.
SLOT 1 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Status === 10:34:13 12/26/2005
Line Rate: 1992Kbps (1 pair)
[------------- MASTER ------------] [------------- SLAVE -------------]
Serial Number: 000529
[LOOP-1] [LOOP-1] [DTE]
SYNC : YES SYNC : YES DSR : YES
ES : 0 ES : 0 CTS : YES
SES : 0 SES : 0 DCD : YES
UAS : 0 UAS : 0 DTR : NO
RTS : YES

[Loopback Status]
xDSL Loopback : OFF
SLAVE Loopback : OFF
BERT : OFF
SLAVE BERT : OFF

[Daughter Card Status] [Remote Link Identification]

Daughter Card : Line Power Single TYPE : CPE

[CAS Status]
CAS : DISABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 155/202

18.3 Unit Performance Report

To view the performance report screen, enter ”R”. Move the cursor to select the desired
location, MASTER-LOOP1 or SLAVE-LOOP1, then press ENTER to confirm the selection.
The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
18.3.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE, Bridge, Router

>>Location ? *MASTER-LOOP1 SLAVE-LOOP1

18.3.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1

>>Location ? *MASTER-LOOP1 SLAVE-LOOP1 SLAVE-T1

18.3.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1

>>Location ? *MASTER-LOOP1 SLAVE-LOOP1 SLAVE-E1

Press ENTER from the above screen, the detail performance report will show as below.
SLOT 5 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1=== Unit Performance Report === 11:35:33 12/21/2004

Location: MASTER-LOOP1
Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 634 seconds
Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-hour: 5
[15 Minute registers]
[------ ES ------] [------ SES -----] [------ UAS -----]
Current: 0 0 0
1-4 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5-8 : 0 . . . 0 . . . 308 . . .
9-12 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-16 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
17-20 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
21-24 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
25-28 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
29-32 : . . . . . . . . . . . .

[24 hour registers]

[Current] [ 1 ] [ 2 ] [ 3 ] [ 4 ] [ 5 ] [ 6 ] [ 7 ]
ES : 0 . . . . . . .
SES: 0 . . . . . . .
UAS: 308 . . . . . . .

<<TAB to change location, SPACE bar to refresh, ESC to return to previous menu>>

18.4 Unit Alarm Queue

Press “Q” from the Port menu to display alarm queue.
SLOT 5 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Alarm Queue === 11:44:47 12/21/2004
1 -- Slot 5 : GDSL-4#1: MAJOR : LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1------ 11:37:40 12/21/2004
2 -- Slot 5 : GDSL-4#1: MAJOR : LOS,MASTER-LOOP1----- 11:37:40 12/21/2004
3 -- Slot 5 : GDSL-4#4: MAJOR : LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1------ 11:37:06 12/21/2004
4 -- Slot 5 : GDSL-4#4: MAJOR : LOS,MASTER-LOOP1----- 11:37:06 12/21/2004
5 -- Slot 5 : GDSL-4#3: MAJOR : LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1------ 11:37:06 12/21/2004
6 -- Slot 5 : GDSL-4#3: MAJOR : LOS,MASTER-LOOP1----- 11:37:06 12/21/2004

<< ESC key return to previous menu or SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 156/202 DXC 5000

18.5 Unit Alarm History

To view the alarm history report, enter “H” from the Port Menu. The following screen will
show up.
18.5.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE, Bridge, Router
SLOT 5 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Alarm History === 11:46:04 12/21/2004

[----Alarm Type----][Cnt][Sta][-Setup-]
LOS,MASTER-LOOP1 1 MAJ
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 1 MAJ
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
LOW NOISE MARGIN 0 MAJ 1

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

18.5.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Alarm History === 10:17:11 12/22/2004

[----Alarm Type----][Cnt][Sta][-Setup-]
LOS,MASTER-LOOP1 1 MAJ
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 1 MAJ
LOS/LOF,SLAVE-T1 1 ALM MAJ
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
ES15M,SLAVE-T1 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,SLAVE-T1 0 MAJ 1
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
ES24H,SLAVE-T1 0 MAJ 1
SES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES24H,SLAVE-T1 0 MAJ 1
LOW NOISE MARGIN 0 MAJ 1

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

18.5.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Alarm History === 10:19:12 12/22/2004

[----Alarm Type----][Cnt][Sta][-Setup-]
LOS,MASTER-LOOP1 1 MAJ
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 1 MAJ
LOS/LOF,SLAVE-E1 1 ALM MAJ
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 2 ALM MAJ 1
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
ES15M,SLAVE-E1 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,SLAVE-E1 0 MAJ 1
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
ES24H,SLAVE-E1 0 MAJ 1
SES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES24H,SLAVE-E1 0 MAJ 1
LOW NOISE MARGIN 0 MAJ 1

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 157/202

18.6 HDSL Information

Press “N” from the Port Menu to display HDSL Information as below screen shows.
SLOT 5 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === HDSL Information === 11:47:13 12/21/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (1 pair)

[------------- MASTER ------------]

[Loop-1]
Noise Margin: 21.0 dB
Max. NMR : 22.0 dB 11:43:31 12/21/04
Min. NMR : 20.5 dB 11:43:38 12/21/04

[------------- SLAVE -------------]

[Loop-1]
Noise Margin: 21.0 dB
Max. NMR : 22.5 dB 11:43:33 12/21/04
Min. NMR : 20.5 dB 11:43:38 12/21/04

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

18.7 Unit System Setup

To setup port system, enter ”S” from the Port Menu.

General System Setup

Then move the cursor to select "General" for general setting. The current selection will be
highlighted by an asterisk (*).
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Setup === 14:26:55 03/04/2005

>> Select ? *General Advance

The screens of system setup of far-end for G.SHDSL-DTE, G.SHDSL-T1, G.SHDSL-

E1(Master), and G.SHDSL-E1(Slave) are shown as follows.
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 158/202 DXC 5000

18.7.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL-DTE

Here "i" (eye, idle) means TS that cannot be used for transmission of any data; "1" (one)
means active TS carrying customer data; "X" means TS available for customer data, but not
in active use.
NOTE: For time slot setting, user must to do TSI map setting from "System
Setup (MAP)" of "Controller Setup" menu. And start the setting from
the first time slot. Please note that "1" must be set in the front of "X".
That is user cannot put in (iXXX111), Also, the 111 must be
consecutive. The sum of [l] and [x] should equal to the sum of line
rate.
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Setup === 11:47:33 12/21/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Line Rate: 776Kbps (1 pair)
[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]
xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
MAX DATA RATE : 768Kbps CLOCK SOURCE : LINE
DATA RATE : 768Kbps
DTE CLOCK : NORMAL
DTE DATA : NORMAL
DTE RTS : ACTIVE
DTE TTM : OFF
DTE V.54 : OFF
DS1 Time Slots : DTE INTERFACE : V.35
[1111111111XXiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii] MAPPER MAPPING:
[1111111111ii]

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

18.7.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL-T1

Here "i" (eye, idle) means TS that cannot be used for transmission of any data; "1" (one)
means active TS carrying customer data; "X" means TS available for customer data, but not
in active use.
NOTE: For time slot setting, user must to do TSI map setting from "System
Setup (MAP)" of "Controller Setup" menu. And start the setting from
the first time slot. Please note that "1" must be set in the front of "X".
That is user cannot put in (iXXX111), Also, the 111 must be
consecutive. The sum of [l] and [x] should equal to the sum of line
rate.
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Setup === 10:20:21 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Line Rate: 776Kbps (1 pair)
[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]
xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
MAX DATA RATE : 768Kbps CLOCK SOURCE : INTERNAL
DS1 FRAME : ESF
DS1 CODE : B8ZS
DS1 CAS : OFF

Select 12 Channels from DS1 time slots

to route into xDSL channels:
DS1 Time Slots : DS1 Time Slots :
[1111111111XXiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii] [11111111111XXiiiiiiiiiii]
xDSL carries DS1 time slots as:
TS 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
TS 11 12

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 159/202

18.7.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL-E1

Here "i" (eye, idle) means TS that cannot be used for transmission of any data; "1" (one)
means active TS carrying customer data; "X" means TS available for customer data, but not
in active use.
NOTE: For time slot setting, user must to do TSI map setting from "System
Setup (MAP)" of "Controller Setup" menu. And start the setting from
the first time slot. Please note that "1" must be set in the front of "X".
That is user cannot put in (iXXX111), Also, the 111 must be
consecutive. The sum of [l] and [x] should equal to the sum of line
rate.
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Setup === 11:48:03 12/21/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Line Rate: 776Kbps (1 pair)
[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]
xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
MAX DATA RATE : 768Kbps CLOCK SOURCE : LINE
DS1 FRAME : CRC-OFF
DS1 CODE : HDB3

Select 12 Channels from DS1 time slots

to route into xDSL channels:
DS1 Time Slots :
DS1 Time Slots : [i1111111111XXiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii]
[1111111111XXiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii] xDSL carries DS1 time slots as:
TS 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
TS 11 12

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

18.7.4 Far-end: G.SHDSL-BRIDGE

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Setup === 10:51:48 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Line Rate: 776Kbps (1 pair)
[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]
xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
MAX DATA RATE : 768Kbps CLOCK SOURCE : LINE
DATA RATE : 768Kbps
DTE CLOCK : None
DTE DATA : None
DTE RTS : None
DTE TTM : None
DTE V.54 : None
DS1 Time Slots : DTE INTERFACE : BRIDGE
[111111111111iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii] MAPPER MAPPING:
[111111111111]

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 160/202 DXC 5000

18.7.5 Far-end: G.SHDSL-ROUTER

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Setup === 11:43:33 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Line Rate: 776Kbps (1 pair)
[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]
xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
MAX DATA RATE : 768Kbps CLOCK SOURCE : LINE
DATA RATE : 768Kbps
DTE CLOCK : None
DTE DATA : None
DTE RTS : None
DTE TTM : None
DTE V.54 : None
DS1 Time Slots : DTE INTERFACE : ROUTER
[111111111111iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii] MAPPER MAPPING:
[111111111111]

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

18.7.6 Advance System Setup

To setup port system, enter ”S” from the Port Menu. Then move the cursor to select
"Advance" for advance setting. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Setup === 14:26:55 03/04/2005

>> Select ? General *Advance

Press ENTER from the above menu. If the far-end site supports advance setup, the screen
will show as the first menu. If not, the scrren will show as the second menu. Press ESC key
to continue. Then the system will ask for confirmation about the new setting. Press "Y" to
confirm the new confiruration or "N" to abort. To enable the new configuration, press "V"
from the "Controller Menu" to save the current setting.
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Setup === 14:27:41 03/04/2005
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Line Rate: 1928Kbps (1 pair)
[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]
ANNEX TYPE : A ANNEX TYPE : A
CLOCK MODE : PLESIOSYNCHRONOUS CLOCK MODE : PLESIOSYNCHRONOUS
PSD MASK : SYMMETRIC PSD MASK : SYMMETRIC
PBO MODE : AUTOMATIC PBO MODE : AUTOMATIC

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Setup === 14:47:05 03/04/2005

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Line Rate: 200Kbps (2 pairs)
[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]
ANNEX TYPE : B ANNEX TYPE : Not Support...
CLOCK MODE : PLESIOSYNCHRONOUS CLOCK MODE : Not Support...
PSD MASK : SYMMETRIC PSD MASK : Not Support...
PBO MODE : 31 dB PBO MODE : Not Support...

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 161/202

18.8 Unit Loopback and Test

To enter the loopback test screen, enter ”L” from the Port Menu. The screens of the
loopback test of far-end for G.SHDSL-DTE, G.SHDSL-T1, G.SHDSL-E1(Master), and
G.SHDSL-E1(Slave) are shown as follows.
18.8.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE
SLOT 5 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Loopback and Test === 11:48:03 12/21/2004
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

[TEST MENU]
xDSL Loopback : *OFF TO-LOCAL TO-LINE
Slave Loopback : *OFF DTE-TO-LINE xDSL-TO-LINE DTE-TO-DTE xDSL-TO-DTE
BERT : *OFF QRSS

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

18.8.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Loopback and Test === 10:21:35 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

[TEST MENU]
xDSL Loopback : *OFF TO-LOCAL TO-LINE
Slave Loopback : *OFF T1-TO-LINE xDSL-TO-LINE T1-TO-T1 xDSL-TO-T1
BERT : *OFF QRSS

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

18.8.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Loopback and Test === 11:48:53 12/21/2004
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

[TEST MENU]
xDSL Loopback : *OFF TO-LOCAL TO-LINE
Slave Loopback : *OFF E1-TO-LINE xDSL-TO-LINE E1-TO-E1 xDSL-TO-E1
BERT : *OFF QRSS

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

18.8.4 Far-end: G.SHDSL- BRIDGE

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Loopback and Test === 10:52:22 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

[TEST MENU]
xDSL Loopback : *OFF TO-LOCAL TO-LINE
Slave Loopback : *OFF xDSL-TO-LINE xDSL-TO-BRG
BERT : *OFF QRSS

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

18.8.5 Far-end: G.SHDSL- ROUTER

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Loopback and Test === 11:44:19 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

[TEST MENU]
xDSL Loopback : *OFF TO-LOCAL TO-LINE
Slave Loopback : *OFF RTR-TO-LINE xDSL-TO-LINE
BERT : *OFF QRSS

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 162/202 DXC 5000

18.9 Reomte-Bert
The screen of Remote-Bert show as below. Remote-Bert only support for FW Version >=
V1.07.01
SLOT 6 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Remote Bert === 11:47:51 08/15/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Pattern Type : 2^15-1

Test Channels: Full
Test Enable : Disable

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

The screen of enable status shows as below.

SLOT 6 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Remote Bert === 11:47:51 08/15/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Pattern Type : 2^15-1

Test Channels: Full
Test Enable : Enable

[BERT STATUS]
BERT TYPE : 2^15-1
BERT STATUS : UNSYNC
BIT ERROR COUNT: 0
ERROR SECONDS: 0
ELAPSED SECONDS: 1
UNSYNC SECONDS: 1

<< ESC KEY : EXIT, LEFT ARROW : RESET ERROR >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 163/202

18.10 Unit Alarm Setup

To do alarm setup, enter “M” from the Port Menu. Use arrow keys to move the cursor and
TAB key to roll up options.
18.10.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE, Bridge, Router
SLOT 5 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Alarm Setup === 11:48:31 12/21/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[----- Type ------] [Alarm] [Threshold]

LOS,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
SES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
LOW NOISE MARGIN MAJOR 01

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

18.10.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Alarm Setup === 10:22:34 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[----- Type ------] [Alarm] [Threshold]

LOS,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR
LOS/LOF,SLAVE-T1 MAJOR
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
ES15M,SLAVE-T1 MAJOR 001
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
SES15M,SLAVE-T1 MAJOR 001
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
ES24H,SLAVE-T1 MAJOR 00001
SES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
SES24H,SLAVE-T1 MAJOR 00001
LOW NOISE MARGIN MAJOR 01

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

18.10.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Unit Alarm Setup === 10:23:08 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[----- Type ------] [Alarm] [Threshold]

LOS,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR
LOS/LOF,SLAVE-E1 MAJOR
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
ES15M,SLAVE-E1 MAJOR 001
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
SES15M,SLAVE-E1 MAJOR 001
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
ES24H,SLAVE-E1 MAJOR 00001
SES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
SES24H,SLAVE-E1 MAJOR 00001
LOW NOISE MARGIN MAJOR 01

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 164/202 DXC 5000

18.11 Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History

Press “X” from the Port Menu to clear alarm queue and alarm history. Then press “Y” or “N”
to confirm the setting.
SLOT 5 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 11:48:59 12/21/2004

Version : SW S1.00 16/10/2004

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
R -> Unit Performance Report M -> Unit Alarm Setup
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
N -> HDSL Information B -> Unit Line Rate
D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose G.SHDSL Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu W -> Far End Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Clear alarm queue of SLOT 5 - are you sure ? [Y/N]

18.12 Unit Clear Performance Data

Press “K” from the Port Menu to clear performance data. Then press “Y” or “N” to confirm the
setting.
SLOT 5 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 11:48:59 12/21/2004

Version : SW S1.00 16/10/2004

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
R -> Unit Performance Report M -> Unit Alarm Setup
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
N -> HDSL Information B -> Unit Line Rate
D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose G.SHDSL Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu W -> Far End Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

==> Clear performance data - are you sure [Y/N] ?

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 165/202

18.13 Unit Line Rate

To view the line rate screen, enter ”B” from the Port Menu.
SLOT 5 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Line Rate === 11:50:30 12/21/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Nx64 : 12
LINE RATE : 776Kbps
LOOP NUM : Loop_One

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

18.14 Unit Upgrade Firmware

To upgrade firmware, enter ”D” from the Port Menu.
DXC 5000 === Download Firmware === 11:53:34 12/21/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

Bank 1 Firmware Ver. : S1.00 13/10/2004 (Good)

Bank 2 Firmware Ver. : S1.00 16/10/2004 (Good)
Working Firmware Bank: 2
TFTP Server IP : 000.000.000.000
Firmware File Name :

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 166/202 DXC 5000

18.15 Unit Load Default Configuration

Press “Y” from the Port Menu to return to default setting. Then press “Y” or “N” to confirm the
setting.
SLOT 5 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 11:51:47 12/21/2004

Version : SW S1.00 16/10/2004

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
R -> Unit Performance Report M -> Unit Alarm Setup
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
N -> HDSL Information B -> Unit Line Rate
D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose G.SHDSL Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu W -> Far End Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

18.16 Unit Reset

Press “Z” from the Port Menu to reset the system. Then press “Y” or “N” to confirm the
setting.
SLOT 5 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 11:51:47 12/21/2004

Version : SW S1.00 16/10/2004

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
R -> Unit Performance Report M -> Unit Alarm Setup
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
N -> HDSL Information B -> Unit Line Rate
D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose G.SHDSL Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu W -> Far End Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

Reset - are you sure ? [Y/N]

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 167/202

18.17 Far End Reset

Press “W” from the Port Menu to reset the system of remote side. Then press “Y” to confirm
the reset or “N” to abandon.
SLOT 5 G.SHDSL-4 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 11:51:47 12/21/2004

Version : SW S1.00 16/10/2004

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
R -> Unit Performance Report M -> Unit Alarm Setup
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
N -> HDSL Information B -> Unit Line Rate
D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose G.SHDSL Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu W -> Far End Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

Reset Far End - are you sure ? [Y/N]

18.18 Bank Switch

If the “Current Firmware Bank” is “1”, pull the G.SHDSL interface out from the main chassis.
Then adjust jumper 7 to be "ON", please see also below diagram. Plug the G.SHDSL
interface into the main chassis. Then reboot the system. The current firmware bank will be
switched from Bank 1 to Bank 2.
NOTE: As long as the jumper 7 is set as "ON", the current firmware bank will
be switched to the other after each system rebooting. So user is
advised to adjust the jumper 7 to be "OFF" after finishing to download
the current firmware bank.

G1 G2 G3 G4

4-channel G.SHDSL Interface

(4 ports, 1 pair)

JP7

: ON : OFF

D0558ENa
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 168/202 DXC 5000

19. G.SHDSL (2 PORTS, 2 PAIRS) SUB-MENU

Under the Controller Menu, press “U” to choose a slot for G.SHDSL port. The screen will
show as below. Then press “P” to choose G.SHDSL port, press ENTER to get into the port
menu.
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 14:35:29 12/22/2004

Version : SW S1.00 16/10/2004

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
R -> Unit Performance Report M -> Unit Alarm Setup
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
N -> HDSL Information B -> Unit Line Rate
D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose G.SHDSL Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu W -> Far End Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

19.1 Unit Configuration

To display port system, enter ”C”. The screens of system setup of far-end for G.SHDSL-
DTE, G.SHDSL-T1, G.SHDSL-E1(Master), and G.SHDSL-E1(Slave) are shown as follows.
19.1.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL-DTE
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Configuration === 11:51:37 12/22/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (2 pairs)

[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]

xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
CAS : OFF CLOCK SOURCE : LINE
MAX DATA RATE : 1536Kbps DATA RATE : 1472Kbps
DTE CLOCK : NORMAL
DTE DATA : NORMAL
DTE RTS : ACTIVE
DTE TTM : OFF
DTE V.54 : OFF
DS1 Time Slots : DTE INTERFACE : V.35
[iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii] MAPPER MAPPING:
[1111111111111111i1111111]

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 169/202

19.1.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL-T1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Configuration === 13:51:49 12/22/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (2 pairs)

[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]

xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
CAS : OFF CLOCK SOURCE : LINE
MAX DATA RATE : 1536Kbps DS1 FRAME : D4
DS1 CODE : B8ZS
DS1 CAS : ON
DS1 Time Slots :
[111111111111111111111111]
xDSL carries DS1 time slots as:
DS1 Time Slots : TS 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
[iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii] TS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
TS 21 22 23 24

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

19.1.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL-E1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Configuration === 15:07:10 12/22/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (2 pairs)

[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]

xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
CAS : OFF CLOCK SOURCE : LINE
MAX DATA RATE : 1536Kbps DS1 FRAME : CRC-ON
DS1 CODE : HDB3
DS1 Time Slots :
[i111111111111111111111111iiiiiii]
xDSL carries DS1 time slots as:
TS 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
DS1 Time Slots : TS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
[iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii] TS 21 22 23 24

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

19.1.4 Far-end: G.SHDSL-BRIDGE

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Configuration === 15:03:07 12/22/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (2 pairs)[Loops Reversed]

[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]

xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
CAS : OFF CLOCK SOURCE : LINE
MAX DATA RATE : 1536Kbps DATA RATE : 1536Kbps
DTE CLOCK : None
DTE DATA : None
DTE RTS : None
DTE TTM : None
DTE V.54 : None
DS1 Time Slots : DTE INTERFACE : BRIDGE
[iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii] MAPPER MAPPING:
[111111111111111111111111]

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 170/202 DXC 5000

19.1.5 Far-end: G.SHDSL-ROUTER

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Configuration === 14:56:38 12/22/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (2 pairs)

[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]

xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
CAS : OFF CLOCK SOURCE : LINE
MAX DATA RATE : 1536Kbps DATA RATE : 1536Kbps
DTE CLOCK : None
DTE DATA : None
DTE RTS : None
DTE TTM : None
DTE V.54 : None
DS1 Time Slots : DTE INTERFACE : ROUTER
[iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii] MAPPER MAPPING:
[111111111111111111111111]

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

19.2 Unit Status

To view the port status screen, enter ”I”. The screens of port status of far-end for G.SHDSL-
DTE, G.SHDSL-T1, G.SHDSL-E1(Master), and G.SHDSL-E1(Slave) are shown as follows.
19.2.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Status === 11:54:35 12/22/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (2 pairs)
[------------- MASTER ------------] [------------- SLAVE -------------]

[LOOP-1] [LOOP-2] [LOOP-1] [LOOP-2] [DTE]

SYNC : YES SYNC : YES SYNC : YES SYNC : YES DSR : YES
ES : 0 ES : 0 ES : 0 ES : 0 CTS : NO
SES : 0 SES : 0 SES : 0 SES : 0 DCD : YES
UAS : 148 UAS : 169 UAS : 148 UAS : 169 DTR : NO
RTS : NO

[Loopback Status]
xDSL Loopback : OFF
SLAVE Loopback : OFF
BERT : OFF
SLAVE BERT : OFF

[Daughter Card Status]

Daughter Card : No Daughter Card

[CAS Status]
CAS : DISABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 171/202

19.2.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Status === 13:54:01 12/22/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (2 pairs)
[------------- MASTER ------------] [------------- SLAVE -------------]

[LOOP-1] [LOOP-2] [LOOP-1] [LOOP-2] [T1]

SYNC : YES SYNC : YES SYNC : YES SYNC : YES SYNC : NO
ES : 0 ES : 0 ES : 0 ES : 0 ES : 9
SES : 0 SES : 0 SES : 0 SES : 0 SES : 7
UAS : 264 UAS : 285 UAS : 264 UAS : 285 UAS : 69
TxAIS: NO
TxYEL: YES
RxAIS: NO
[Loopback Status] RxYEL: NO
xDSL Loopback : OFF LOS : YES
SLAVE Loopback : OFF LOF : YES
BERT : OFF
SLAVE BERT : OFF

[Daughter Card Status]

Daughter Card : No Daughter Card

[CAS Status]
CAS : DISABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

19.2.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Status === 15:09:03 12/22/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (2 pairs)
[------------- MASTER ------------] [------------- SLAVE -------------]

[LOOP-1] [LOOP-2] [LOOP-1] [LOOP-2] [E1]

SYNC : YES SYNC : YES SYNC : YES SYNC : YES SYNC : NO
ES : 0 ES : 0 ES : 0 ES : 0 ES : 2
SES : 0 SES : 0 SES : 0 SES : 0 SES : 1
UAS : 1 UAS : 1 UAS : 1 UAS : 1 UAS : 2
TxAIS: NO
TxRAI: YES
RxAIS: NO
[Loopback Status] RxRAI: NO
xDSL Loopback : OFF LOS : YES
SLAVE Loopback : OFF LOF : YES
BERT : OFF
SLAVE BERT : OFF

[Daughter Card Status]

Daughter Card : No Daughter Card

[CAS Status]
CAS : DISABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

19.2.4 Far-end: G.SHDSL- BRIDGE

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Status === 15:03:43 12/22/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (2 pairs)
[------------- MASTER ------------] [------------- SLAVE -------------]

[LOOP-1] [LOOP-2] [LOOP-1] [LOOP-2] [DTE]

SYNC : YES SYNC : YES SYNC : YES SYNC : YES DSR : NA
ES : 0 ES : 0 ES : 0 ES : 0 CTS : NA
SES : 0 SES : 0 SES : 0 SES : 0 DCD : NA
UAS : 0 UAS : 0 UAS : 0 UAS : 0 DTR : NA
RTS : NA

[Loopback Status]
xDSL Loopback : OFF
SLAVE Loopback : OFF
BERT : OFF
SLAVE BERT : OFF

[Daughter Card Status]

Daughter Card : No Daughter Card

[CAS Status]
CAS : DISABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 172/202 DXC 5000

19.2.5 Far-end: G.SHDSL- ROUTER

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Status === 14:57:16 12/22/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (2 pairs)
[------------- MASTER ------------] [------------- SLAVE -------------]

[LOOP-1] [LOOP-2] [LOOP-1] [LOOP-2] [DTE]

SYNC : YES SYNC : YES SYNC : YES SYNC : YES DSR : NA
ES : 0 ES : 0 ES : 0 ES : 0 CTS : NA
SES : 0 SES : 0 SES : 0 SES : 0 DCD : NA
UAS : 0 UAS : 0 UAS : 0 UAS : 0 DTR : NA
RTS : NA

[Loopback Status]
xDSL Loopback : OFF
SLAVE Loopback : OFF
BERT : OFF
SLAVE BERT : OFF

[Daughter Card Status]

Daughter Card : No Daughter Card

[CAS Status]
CAS : DISABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

19.2.6 Line Power (2 ports)

Under Port Menu the screen will show “ Daughter Card: Line Power Single” when it include
line power.
SLOT 7 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Status === 10:36:41 12/26/2005
Line Rate: 1032Kbps (2 pairs)
[------------- MASTER ------------] [------------- SLAVE -------------]
Serial Number: 000694
[LOOP-1] [LOOP-2] [LOOP-1] [LOOP-2] [DTE]
SYNC : YES SYNC : YES SYNC : YES SYNC : YES DSR : YES
ES : 0 ES : 0 ES : 0 ES : 0 CTS : YES
SES : 0 SES : 0 SES : 0 SES : 0 DCD : YES
UAS : 0 UAS : 0 UAS : 0 UAS : 0 DTR : NO
RTS : YES

[Loopback Status]
xDSL Loopback : OFF
SLAVE Loopback : OFF
BERT : OFF
SLAVE BERT : OFF

[Daughter Card Status] [Remote Link Identification]

Daughter Card : Line Power Dual TYPE : CPE

[CAS Status]
CAS : DISABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 173/202

19.3 Unit Performance Report

To view the performance report screen, enter ”R”. Move the cursor to select the desired
location, MASTER-LOOP1 or SLAVE-LOOP1, then press ENTER to confirm the selection.
The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
19.3.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE, Bridge, Router

>>Location ? *MASTER-L1 MASTER-L2 SLAVE-L1 SLAVE-L2

19.3.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1

>>Location ? *MASTER-L1 MASTER-L2 SLAVE-L1 SLAVE-L2 SLAVE-T1

19.3.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1

>>Location ? *MASTER-L1 MASTER-L2 SLAVE-L1 SLAVE-L2 SLAVE-E1

Press ENTER from the above screen, the detail performance report will show as below.
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1=== Unit Performance Report === 11:55:58 12/22/2004

Location: MASTER-L1
Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 447 seconds
Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-hour: 0
[15 Minute registers]
[------ ES ------] [------ SES -----] [------ UAS -----]
Current: 0 0 148
1-4 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-12 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-16 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
17-20 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
21-24 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
25-28 : . . . . . . . . . . . .
29-32 : . . . . . . . . . . . .

[24 hour registers]

[Current] [ 1 ] [ 2 ] [ 3 ] [ 4 ] [ 5 ] [ 6 ] [ 7 ]
ES : 0 . . . . . . .
SES: 0 . . . . . . .
UAS: 148 . . . . . . .

<<TAB to change location, SPACE bar to refresh, ESC to return to previous menu>>

19.4 Unit Alarm Queue

Press “Q” from the Port menu to display alarm queue.
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Alarm Queue === 11:57:44 12/22/2004
1 -- Slot 3 : GDSL-2#2: MAJOR : LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 remove 11:57:36 12/22/2004
2 -- Slot 3 : GDSL-2#2: MAJOR : LOS,MASTER-LOOP1 remove 11:57:36 12/22/2004
3 -- Slot 3 : GDSL-2#1: MAJOR : LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 remove 11:57:33 12/22/2004
4 -- Slot 3 : GDSL-2#1: MAJOR : LOS,MASTER-LOOP1 remove 11:57:33 12/22/2004
5 -- Slot 3 : GDSL-2#2: MAJOR : LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1------ 11:57:30 12/22/2004
6 -- Slot 3 : GDSL-2#2: MAJOR : LOS,MASTER-LOOP1----- 11:57:30 12/22/2004
7 -- Slot 3 : GDSL-2#1: MAJOR : LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1------ 11:57:23 12/22/2004
8 -- Slot 3 : GDSL-2#1: MAJOR : LOS,MASTER-LOOP1----- 11:57:23 12/22/2004

<< ESC key return to previous menu or SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 174/202 DXC 5000

19.5 Unit Alarm History

To view the alarm history report, enter “H” from the Port Menu. The following screen will
show up.
19.5.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE, Bridge, Router
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Alarm History === 14:39:44 12/22/2004

[----Alarm Type----][Cnt][Sta][-Setup-] [----Alarm Type----][Cnt][Sta][-Setup-]

LOS,MASTER-LOOP1 1 MAJ SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
LOS,MASTER-LOOP2 1 MAJ SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 1 MAJ LOW NOISE MARGIN 0 MAJ 1
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP2 1 MAJ
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 1 ALM MAJ 1
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 1 ALM MAJ 1
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
SES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES24H,MASTER-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

19.5.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Alarm History === 14:28:46 12/22/2004

[----Alarm Type----][Cnt][Sta][-Setup-] [----Alarm Type----][Cnt][Sta][-Setup-]

LOS,MASTER-LOOP1 1 MAJ ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
LOS,MASTER-LOOP2 1 MAJ ES24H,SLAVE-T1 1 ALM MAJ 1
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 1 MAJ SES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP2 1 MAJ SES24H,MASTER-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
LOS/LOF,SLAVE-T1 1 MAJ SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1 SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1 SES24H,SLAVE-T1 1 ALM MAJ 1
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1 LOW NOISE MARGIN 0 MAJ 1
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
ES15M,SLAVE-T1 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,SLAVE-T1 0 MAJ 1
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 175/202

19.5.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Alarm History === 15:19:17 12/22/2004

[----Alarm Type----][Cnt][Sta][-Setup-] [----Alarm Type----][Cnt][Sta][-Setup-]

LOS,MASTER-LOOP1 1 MAJ ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
LOS,MASTER-LOOP2 1 MAJ ES24H,SLAVE-E1 0 MAJ 1
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 1 MAJ SES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP2 1 MAJ SES24H,MASTER-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
LOS/LOF,SLAVE-E1 1 ALM MAJ SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1 SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1 SES24H,SLAVE-E1 0 MAJ 1
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1 LOW NOISE MARGIN 0 MAJ 1
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
ES15M,SLAVE-E1 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
SES15M,SLAVE-E1 0 MAJ 1
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP2 0 MAJ 1
ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 0 MAJ 1

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

19.6 HDSL Information

Press “N” from the Port Menu to display HDSL Information as below screen shows.
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === HDSL Information === 14:40:23 12/22/2004
Line Rate: 776Kbps (2 pairs)

[------------- MASTER ------------]

[Loop-1] [Loop-2]
Noise Margin: 23.0 dB 23.0 dB
Max. NMR : 23.0 dB 14:18:22 12/22/04 23.0 dB 14:18:30 12/22/04
Min. NMR : 19.5 dB 14:16:59 12/22/04 20.0 dB 14:16:42 12/22/04

[------------- SLAVE -------------]

[Loop-1] [Loop-2]
Noise Margin: 22.0 dB 22.5 dB
Max. NMR : 22.5 dB 14:18:26 12/22/04 23.0 dB 14:18:30 12/22/04
Min. NMR : 19.0 dB 14:16:59 12/22/04 20.0 dB 14:16:59 12/22/04

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 176/202 DXC 5000

19.7 Unit System Setup

To setup port system, enter ”S” from the Port Menu.

General System Setup

Then move the cursor to select "General" for general setting. The current selection will be
highlighted by an asterisk (*).
LOT 2 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Setup === 14:26:55 03/04/2005

>> Select ? *General Advance

The screens of system setup of far-end for G.SHDSL-DTE, G.SHDSL-T1, G.SHDSL-

E1(Master), and G.SHDSL-E1(Slave) are shown as follows.
(If CAS change please reactive tsi map)
19.7.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL-DTE
Here "i" (eye, idle) means TS that cannot be used for transmission of any data; "1" (one)
means active TS carrying customer data; "X" means TS available for customer data, but not
in active use.
NOTE: For time slot setting, user must to do TSI map setting from "System
Setup (MAP)" of "Controller Setup" menu. And start the setting from
the first time slot. Please note that "1" must be set in the front of "X".
That is user cannot put in (iXXX111), Also, the 111 must be
consecutive. The sum of [l] and [x] should equal to the sum of line
rate.
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Setup === 14:41:24 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Line Rate: 776Kbps (2 pairs)
[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]
xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
CAS : OFF CLOCK SOURCE : LINE
MAX DATA RATE : 1536Kbps DATA RATE : 1536Kbps
DTE CLOCK : NORMAL
DTE DATA : NORMAL
DTE RTS : ACTIVE
DTE TTM : OFF
DTE V.54 : OFF
DS1 Time Slots : DTE INTERFACE : V.35
[111111111111111111111111iiiiiiii] MAPPER MAPPING:
[111111111111111111111111]

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

19.7.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL-T1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Setup === 15:21:59 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Line Rate: 776Kbps (2 pairs)
[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]
xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
CAS : OFF CLOCK SOURCE : LINE
MAX DATA RATE : 1536Kbps DS1 FRAME : D4
DS1 CODE : B8ZS
DS1 CAS : ON

Select 24 Channels from DS1 time slots

to route into xDSL channels:
DS1 Time Slots : DS1 Time Slots :
[1111111111111111111111XXiiiiiiiii] [11111111111111111111111XX]
xDSL carries DS1 time slots as:
TS 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
TS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
TS 21 22 23 24

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 177/202

19.7.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL-E1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Setup === 15:14:20 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Line Rate: 776Kbps (2 pairs)
[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]
xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
CAS : OFF CLOCK SOURCE : LINE
MAX DATA RATE : 1536Kbps DS1 FRAME : CRC-ON
DS1 CODE : HDB3

Select 24 Channels from DS1 time slots

to route into xDSL channels:
DS1 Time Slots :
DS1 Time Slots : [i1111111111111111111111XXiiiiiii]
[1111111111111111111111XXiiiiiiii] xDSL carries DS1 time slots as:
TS 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
TS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
TS 21 22 23 24

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

19.7.4 Far-end: G.SHDSL-BRIDGE

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Setup === 15:04:45 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Line Rate: 776Kbps (2 pairs)
[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]
xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
CAS : OFF CLOCK SOURCE : LINE
MAX DATA RATE : 1536Kbps DATA RATE : 1536Kbps
DTE CLOCK : None
DTE DATA : None
DTE RTS : None
DTE TTM : None
DTE V.54 : None
DS1 Time Slots : DTE INTERFACE : BRIDGE
[111111111111111111111111iiiiiiii] MAPPER MAPPING:
[111111111111111111111111]

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

19.7.5 Far-end: G.SHDSL-ROUTER

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Setup === 14:58:48 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Line Rate: 776Kbps (2 pairs)
[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]
xDSL MODE : MASTER xDSL MODE : SLAVE
CAS : OFF CLOCK SOURCE : LINE
MAX DATA RATE : 1536Kbps DATA RATE : 1536Kbps
DTE CLOCK : None
DTE DATA : None
DTE RTS : None
DTE TTM : None
DTE V.54 : None
DS1 Time Slots : DTE INTERFACE : ROUTER
[111111111111111111111111iiiiiiii] MAPPER MAPPING:
[111111111111111111111111]

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 178/202 DXC 5000

19.7.6 Advance System Setup

To setup port system, enter ”S” from the Port Menu. Then move the cursor to select
"Advance" for advance setting. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
LOT 2 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Setup === 14:26:55 03/04/2005

>> Select ? General *Advance

Press ENTER from the above menu. If the far-end site supports advance setup, the screen
will show as the first menu. If not, the scrren will show as the second menu. Press ESC key
to continue. Then the system will ask for confirmation about the new setting. Press "Y" to
confirm the new confiruration or "N" to abort. To enable the new configuration, press "V"
from the "Controller Menu" to save the current setting.
SLOT 2 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 3 === Unit Setup === 14:27:41 03/04/2005
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Line Rate: 1928Kbps (1 pair)
[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]
ANNEX TYPE : A ANNEX TYPE : A
CLOCK MODE : PLESIOSYNCHRONOUS CLOCK MODE : PLESIOSYNCHRONOUS
PSD MASK : SYMMETRIC PSD MASK : SYMMETRIC
PBO MODE : AUTOMATIC PBO MODE : AUTOMATIC

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

SLOT 2 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Setup === 14:47:05 03/04/2005

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Line Rate: 200Kbps (2 pairs)
[-------- LOCAL --------] [------- FAR-END -------]
ANNEX TYPE : B ANNEX TYPE : Not Support...
CLOCK MODE : PLESIOSYNCHRONOUS CLOCK MODE : Not Support...
PSD MASK : SYMMETRIC PSD MASK : Not Support...
PBO MODE : 31 dB PBO MODE : Not Support...

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 179/202

19.8 Unit Loopback and Test

To enter the loopback test screen, enter ”L” from the Port Menu. The screens of the
loopback test of far-end for G.SHDSL-DTE, G.SHDSL-T1, G.SHDSL-E1(Master), and
G.SHDSL-E1(Slave) are shown as follows.
19.8.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Loopback and Test === 14:41:47 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

[TEST MENU]
xDSL Loopback : *OFF TO-LOCAL TO-LINE
Slave Loopback : *OFF DTE-TO-LINE xDSL-TO-LINE DTE-TO-DTE xDSL-TO-DTE
BERT : *OFF QRSS

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

19.8.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Loopback and Test === 15:11:15 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

[TEST MENU]
xDSL Loopback : *OFF TO-LOCAL TO-LINE
Slave Loopback : *OFF T1-TO-LINE xDSL-TO-LINE T1-TO-T1 xDSL-TO-T1
BERT : *OFF QRSS

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

19.8.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Loopback and Test === 15:15:21 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

[TEST MENU]
xDSL Loopback : *OFF TO-LOCAL TO-LINE
Slave Loopback : *OFF E1-TO-LINE xDSL-TO-LINE E1-TO-E1 xDSL-TO-E1
BERT : *OFF QRSS

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 180/202 DXC 5000

19.8.4 Far-end: G.SHDSL- BRIDGE

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Loopback and Test === 15:05:19 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

[TEST MENU]
xDSL Loopback : *OFF TO-LOCAL TO-LINE
Slave Loopback : *OFF xDSL-TO-LINE xDSL-TO-BRG
BERT : *OFF QRSS

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

19.8.5 Far-end: G.SHDSL- ROUTER

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Loopback and Test === 14:59:11 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

[TEST MENU]
xDSL Loopback : *OFF TO-LOCAL TO-LINE
Slave Loopback : *OFF RTR-TO-LINE xDSL-TO-LINE
BERT : *OFF QRSS

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 181/202

19.9 Unit Alarm Setup

To do alarm setup, enter “M” from the Port Menu. Use arrow keys to move the cursor and
TAB key to roll up options.
19.9.1 Far-end: G.SHDSL- DTE, Bridge, Router
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Alarm Setup === 14:42:05 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[----- Type ------] [Alarm] [Threshold] [----- Type ------] [Alarm] [Threshold]
LOS,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
LOS,MASTER-LOOP2 MAJOR SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP2 MAJOR 00001
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR LOW NOISE MARGIN MAJOR 01
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP2 MAJOR
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP2 MAJOR 001
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP2 MAJOR 001
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP2 MAJOR 001
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP2 MAJOR 001
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP2 MAJOR 00001
ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP2 MAJOR 00001
SES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
SES24H,MASTER-LOOP2 MAJOR 00001

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

19.9.2 Far-end: G.SHDSL- T1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Alarm Setup === 15:23:49 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[----- Type ------] [Alarm] [Threshold] [----- Type ------] [Alarm] [Threshold]
LOS,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP2 MAJOR 00001
LOS,MASTER-LOOP2 MAJOR ES24H,SLAVE-T1 MAJOR 00001
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR SES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP2 MAJOR SES24H,MASTER-LOOP2 MAJOR 00001
LOS/LOF,SLAVE-T1 MAJOR SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 001 SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP2 MAJOR 00001
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP2 MAJOR 001 SES24H,SLAVE-T1 MAJOR 00001
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 001 LOW NOISE MARGIN MAJOR 01
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP2 MAJOR 001
ES15M,SLAVE-T1 MAJOR 001
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP2 MAJOR 001
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP2 MAJOR 001
SES15M,SLAVE-T1 MAJOR 001
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP2 MAJOR 00001
ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 182/202 DXC 5000

19.9.3 Far-end: G.SHDSL- E1

SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Unit Alarm Setup === 15:17:22 12/22/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[----- Type ------] [Alarm] [Threshold] [----- Type ------] [Alarm] [Threshold]
LOS,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP2 MAJOR 00001
LOS,MASTER-LOOP2 MAJOR ES24H,SLAVE-E1 MAJOR 00001
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR SES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
LOS,SLAVE-LOOP2 MAJOR SES24H,MASTER-LOOP2 MAJOR 00001
LOS/LOF,SLAVE-E1 MAJOR SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 001 SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP2 MAJOR 00001
ES15M,MASTER-LOOP2 MAJOR 001 SES24H,SLAVE-E1 MAJOR 00001
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 001 LOW NOISE MARGIN MAJOR 01
ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP2 MAJOR 001
ES15M,SLAVE-E1 MAJOR 001
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
SES15M,MASTER-LOOP2 MAJOR 001
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 001
SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP2 MAJOR 001
SES15M,SLAVE-E1 MAJOR 001
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001
ES24H,MASTER-LOOP2 MAJOR 00001
ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1 MAJOR 00001

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

19.10 Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History

Press “X” from the Port Menu to clear alarm queue and alarm history. Then press “Y” or “N”
to confirm the setting.
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 11:48:59 12/21/2004

Version : SW S1.00 16/10/2004

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
R -> Unit Performance Report M -> Unit Alarm Setup
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
N -> HDSL Information B -> Unit Line Rate
D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose G.SHDSL Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu W -> Far End Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Clear alarm queue of SLOT 3 - are you sure ? [Y/N]

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 183/202

19.11 Unit Clear Performance Data

Press “K” from the Port Menu to clear performance data. Then press “Y” or “N” to confirm the
setting.
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 11:48:59 12/21/2004

Version : SW S1.00 16/10/2004

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
R -> Unit Performance Report M -> Unit Alarm Setup
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
N -> HDSL Information B -> Unit Line Rate
D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose G.SHDSL Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu W -> Far End Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

==> Clear performance data - are you sure [Y/N] ?

19.12 Unit Line Rate

To view the line rate screen, enter ”B” from the Port Menu.
(If Line Rate or Loop NUM change please reactive tsi map)
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Line Rate === 11:50:30 12/21/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Nx64 : 12
LINE RATE : 776Kbps
LOOP NUM : Loop_One

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 184/202 DXC 5000

19.13 Unit Upgrade Firmware

To upgrade firmware, enter ”D” from the Port Menu.
DXC 5000 === Download Firmware === 11:53:34 12/21/2004
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

Bank 1 Firmware Ver. : S1.00 13/10/2004 (Good)

Bank 2 Firmware Ver. : S1.00 16/10/2004 (Good)
Working Firmware Bank: 2
TFTP Server IP : 000.000.000.000
Firmware File Name :

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

19.14 Unit Load Default Configuration

Press “Y” from the Port Menu to return to default setting. Then press “Y” or “N” to confirm the
setting.
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 11:51:47 12/21/2004

Version : SW S1.00 16/10/2004

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
R -> Unit Performance Report M -> Unit Alarm Setup
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
N -> HDSL Information B -> Unit Line Rate
D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose G.SHDSL Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu W -> Far End Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 185/202

19.15 Unit Reset

Press “Z” from the Port Menu to reset the system. Then press “Y” or “N” to confirm the
setting.
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 11:51:47 12/21/2004

Version : SW S1.00 16/10/2004

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
R -> Unit Performance Report M -> Unit Alarm Setup
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
N -> HDSL Information B -> Unit Line Rate
D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose G.SHDSL Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu W -> Far End Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

Reset - are you sure ? [Y/N]

19.16 Far End Reset

Press “W” from the Port Menu to reset the system of remote side. Then press “Y” to confirm
the reset or “N” to abandon.
SLOT 3 G.SHDSL-2 PORT 1 === Port Menu === 11:51:47 12/21/2004

Version : SW S1.00 16/10/2004

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
R -> Unit Performance Report M -> Unit Alarm Setup
Q -> Unit Alarm Queue X -> Unit Clear Alarm Queue & History
H -> Unit Alarm History K -> Unit Clear Performance Data
N -> HDSL Information B -> Unit Line Rate
D -> Unit Upgrade Firmware

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose G.SHDSL Port Z -> Unit Reset
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu W -> Far End Reset
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

Reset Far End - are you sure ? [Y/N]

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 186/202 DXC 5000

20. DRY CONTACT SUB-MENU

Under the Controller Menu, press “U” to choose a slot for Dry Contact port. The screen will
show as below. Then press “P” to choose Dry Contact port, press ENTER to get into the port
menu.
SLOT 3 Dry Contact === Port Menu === 11:42:03 03/03/2005

Version : HW FPGA Ver.A

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Inputs & Outputs Configuration S -> Inputs & Outputs Setup
A -> Inputs Alarm Message M -> Inputs Alarm Message Setup
I -> Inputs & Outputs Status

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

20.1 Inputs & Outputs Configuration

To display port system setting, enter ”C” from the "Port Menu". This menu will show up the
current setting for alarm triger of inputs and alarm relay of outputs.
SLOT 4 Dry Contact === Inputs & Outputs Configuration === 11:17:04 08/15/2006

[---Dry Contact Inputs---] [---Dry Contact Outputs---]

[Pair] [Alarm Triger] [Pair] [Relay]
N1 P1 DISABLE U1 Normal
N1 P2 DISABLE U2 Normal
N1 P3 DISABLE U3 Normal
N1 P4 DISABLE U4 Normal
N2 P1 DISABLE U5 Normal
N2 P2 DISABLE U6 Normal
N2 P3 DISABLE U7 Normal
N2 P4 DISABLE U8 Normal

Dry Contact Channel: Controller

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

NOTE 1: Option of Dry Contact Channel control alarm source from “Controller”
or DS0 (support hardware FPGA version >= Ver. B only).
NOTE 2: The application illustration of DS0 show as below.
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 187/202

DS0. TS1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

U1

U2

U3

U4
8 Relay U5

U6

U7

U8
D0559ENa

FIGURE 1: RELAY CONTROL OF DS0

DS0. TS2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

N1

Alarm
Input
N2

D0560ENa

FIGURE 2: ALARM SIGNAL OF DS0

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 188/202 DXC 5000

20.2 Inputs Alarm Message

To display alarm message of inputs, press "A" from the "Port Menu". Then move the cursor
to select "N1" or "N2" from this menu.
SLOT 3 Dry Contact === Alarm Message Configuration === 11:42:29 03/03/2005

Dry Contact Inputs ? N1 *N2

Press ENTER from the above menu. Then the coming menu will display detail alarm
messages as below screen shows.
SLOT 3 Dry Contact === Alarm Message Configuration === 11:42:40 03/03/2005

[N2-Pair_1]
Alarm Message: N2_Pair_1 Device Alarm

[N2-Pair_2]
Alarm Message: N2_Pair_2 Device Alarm

[N2-Pair_3]
Alarm Message: N2_Pair_3 Device Alarm

[N2-Pair_4]
Alarm Message: N2_Pair_4 Device Alarm

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

20.3 Inputs & Outputs Status

To display the current status for inputs and outputs, enter ”I” from the "Port Menu". This
menu will show as below. For dry contact inputs, this menu will display "OK" or "Alm"(alarm)
for pair 1 to pair 4 (P1 to P4) of N1 and N2. For dry contact outputs, this menu will display
"Operated" or "Normal" for pair 1 to pair 8 (U1 to U8).
SLOT 3 Dry Contact === Inputs & Outputs Status === 11:49:16 03/03/2005

[---Dry Contact Inputs---] [---Dry Contact Outputs---]

[Pair] [Status] [Pair] [Status]
N1 P1 OK U1 Operated
N1 P2 Alm U2 Normal
N1 P3 OK U3 Normal
N1 P4 OK U4 Normal
N2 P1 OK U5 Normal
N2 P2 OK U6 Normal
N2 P3 OK U7 Normal
N2 P4 OK U8 Normal

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 189/202

20.4 Inputs & Outputs Setup

To set up system configuration for inputs and outputs, press ”S” from the "Port Menu". Use
arrow key to move the cursor at a desired item and TAB key to select a desired option, "ON "
or "OFF" for alarm triger, "Operated" or "Normal" for alarm relay.
SLOT 4 Dry Contact === Inputs & Outputs Setup === 11:12:49 08/15/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
[---Dry Contact Inputs---] [---Dry Contact Outputs---]
[Pair] [Alarm Triger] [Pair] [Relay]
N1 P1 DISABLE U1 Normal
N1 P2 DISABLE U2 Normal
N1 P3 DISABLE U3 Normal
N1 P4 DISABLE U4 Normal
N2 P1 DISABLE U5 Normal
N2 P2 DISABLE U6 Normal
N2 P3 DISABLE U7 Normal
N2 P4 DISABLE U8 Normal

Dry Contact Channel: Controller

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

NOTE 1: Option of Dry Contact Channel control alarm source from “Controller”
or DS0 (support hardware FPGA version >= Ver. B only).

NOTE 2: Press ESC key from the above menu to continue. Then the system
will ask for confirmation. Press "Y" to confirm the new setting or "N" to
abort.
SLOT 3 Dry Contact === Inputs & Outputs Setup === 11:44:05 03/03/2005
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
[---Dry Contact Inputs---] [---Dry Contact Outputs---]
[Pair] [Alarm Triger] [Pair] [Relay]
N1 P1 ON U1 SHORT
N1 P2 ON U2 OPEN
N1 P3 ON U3 OPEN
N1 P4 ON U4 OPEN
N2 P1 ON U5 OPEN
N2 P2 ON U6 OPEN
N2 P3 ON U7 OPEN
N2 P4 ON U8 OPEN

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 190/202 DXC 5000

To save the new setting, press "V" from the "Controller Menu".
DXC 5000 === Controller Menu === 09:54:25 06/02/2005

Serial Number : 53023 Redundant Controller: Disabled

Hardware Version: Ver.D Start Time : 19:16:09 06/01/2005
Software Version: S4.B4 06/01/2005

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Configuration S -> System Setup
B -> Clock source Configuration M -> System Alarm Setup
Q -> Alarm Queue Summary W -> Firmware Transfer
I -> Information Summary V -> Store/Retrieve Configuration
K -> Clock source Setup
T -> Bit Error Rate Test

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose a Slot A -> Alarm Cut Off
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu X -> Clear Alarm Queue
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu Y -> Controller Return to Default
Z -> Controller Reset

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

20.5 Inputs Alarm Message Setup

This menu is used to edit alarm messages for dry contact inputs. Press "M" from the "Port
Menu", then select a desired port, N1 or N2. The current selection will be highlighted by an
asterisk (*).
SLOT 3 Dry Contact === Alarm Message Setup === 11:46:01 03/03/2005

Dry Contact Inputs ? *N1 N2

Press ENTER from the above menu. The coming menu, as below shows, is allowed users to
edit alarm messages. The space for editing each message are 252 digitals 4 lines (63
digitals each line). Use arrow key to move the cursor at the desired position and
BACKSPACE key to edit messages. To abort editing, press ESC key.
SLOT 3 Dry Contact === Alarm Message Setup === 11:46:14 03/03/2005
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort
[N1-Pair_1]
Alarm Message: N1_Pair_1 Device Alarm_________________________________________

[N1-Pair_2]
Alarm Message: N1_Pair_2 Device Alarm

[N1-Pair_3]
Alarm Message: N1_Pair_3 Device Alarm

[N1-Pair_4]
Alarm Message: N1_Pair_4 Device Alarm

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 191/202

20.6 Unit Load Default Configuration

This menu is used to download default configuration. Press "Y" from the "Port Menu". Then
the system will ask for confirmation. Press "Y" to return to default setting or "N" to abort.
SLOT 3 Dry Contact === Port Menu === 11:46:31 03/03/2005

Version : HW FPGA Ver.A

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Inputs & Outputs Configuration S -> Inputs & Outputs Setup
A -> Inputs Alarm Message M -> Inputs Alarm Message Setup
I -> Inputs & Outputs Status

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 192/202 DXC 5000

21. FOM (FIBER OPTICAL MODULE) SUB-MENU

Under the Controller Menu, press “U” to choose a slot for FOM port. The screen will show as
below. Then press “P” to choose FOM port, press ENTER to get into the port menu.
NOTE 1: To set up 1 + 1 protection for fiber optical module, please see
appendix.
NOTE 2: To set up ring protection for fiber optical module, please see
appendix.
SLOT C FOM E1_PORT 1 === Port Menu === 17:36:50 04/19/2005

Version : HW FPGA Ver.A PCB Ver.@

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
H -> Unit Alarm History M -> Unit Alarm Setup
T -> Unit Optical Type J -> Unit APSD Setup
G -> Unit APSD Configuration X -> Clear Unit Alarm History
A -> Clear E1 CRC Error
B -> Clear Optical Error

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose FOM E1 Port R -> Clear All Error Counters
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

21.1 Unit Configuration

To display port system setting, enter ”C” from the "Port Menu". This menu will show up the
current setting.
SLOT C FOM E1_PORT 1 === Unit Configuration === 17:37:29 04/19/2005

FRAME = ON
CRC = OFF
RAI = ON
CAS = OFF
AIS = UNFRAME
IDLE = D5

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 193/202

21.2 Unit Status

Press "I" from the "Port Menu" to display the current system status, then the screen will show
as below. This menu will show up the current system status for local side and remote side.
SLOT C FOM E1_PORT 1 === Unit Status === 17:37:49 04/19/2005

[------------- LOCAL -------------] [------------- REMOTE ------------]

TYPE: DXC 5000 TYPE: DXC5000-OL
-- OPTICAL -- -- OPTICAL --
LOS : NO LOS : NO
LOF : NO LOF : NO
FRAMING ERROR : 0 FRAMING ERROR : 255
FRAME CHECKSUM ERROR : 0 FRAME CHECKSUM ERROR : 2
EOC-M FRAME CHECKSUM ERROR: 1
-- E1 -- -- E1 --
LOF : NO LOS : NO
RCV AIS : NO BPV ERROR: 255
RCV RAI : NO
XMT AIS : NO
XMT RAI : NO
CRC ERROR: 0
-- LOOPBACK STATUS -- -- LOOPBACK STATUS --
OPTICAL LOOPBACK: OFF OPTICAL LOOPBACK: OFF
E1 LOOPBACK: OFF E1 LOOPBACK: OFF
-- TEST --
E1 PATTERN TRANSMITTED: OFF

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

21.3 Unit Alarm History

Press "H" from the "Port Menu" to display alarm history.
SLOT C FOM E1_PORT 1 === Unit Alarm History === 17:38:23 04/19/2005

[----Alarm Type----] [Count] [State] [-Setup-]

LOF,LOCAL-OPTICAL 0 MAJOR
LOS,LOCAL-OPTICAL 0 MAJOR
RAI,LOCAL-OPTICAL 0 MAJOR
LOF,REMOTE-OPTICAL 2 MAJOR
LOS,REMOTE-OPTICAL 2 MAJOR
LOF,LOCAL-E1-PORT1 4 MAJOR
LOF,LOCAL-E1-PORT2 1 ALM MAJOR
LOF,LOCAL-E1-PORT3 1 ALM MAJOR
LOF,LOCAL-E1-PORT4 1 ALM MAJOR
LOF,REMOTE-E1-PORT1 2 MAJOR
LOF,REMOTE-E1-PORT2 1 ALM MAJOR
LOF,REMOTE-E1-PORT3 1 ALM MAJOR
LOF,REMOTE-E1-PORT4 1 ALM MAJOR

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

21.4 Unit Optical Type

Press "T" from the "Port Menu" to display optical outline, optical type, and XMT distance.
SLOT C FOM E1_PORT 1 === Unit Optical Type === 17:38:41 04/19/2005

OUTLINE : SC
TYPE : Dual-1550
XMT DISTANCE : S(20~49Km)

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 194/202 DXC 5000

21.5 Unit APSD Configuration

Press "G" from the "Port Menu" to display the configuration for auto power shut down
function.
SLOT C FOM E1_PORT 1 === Unit APSD Configuration === 17:39:27 04/19/2005

Optical APSD Enable : OFF

Pulse repetition time for automatic restart(sec) : 300
Manual Restart : OFF
Laser Status : LASER ON

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

21.6 Unit System Setup

Press "S" from the "Port Menu" to do system setup. Use arrow keys to move the cursor at a
desired item and TAB key to roll up a desired option.
SLOT C FOM E1_PORT 1 === Unit Setup === 17:39:41 04/19/2005
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ON
CRC = OFF
RAI = ON
CAS = OFF
AIS = UNFRAME
IDLE = D5

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

21.7 Unit Loopback and Test

To do loopback test, press "L" from the "Port Menu". This menu is used to optical and E1
loopbacks of local side and remote side. Users can also enable or disable test pattern
sending through this menu. The current selection will be highlighed by an asterisk (*).
SLOT C FOM E1_PORT 1 === Unit Loopback and Test === 17:39:56 04/19/2005
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

LOCAL OPTICAL LOOPBACK: *OFF PAYLOAD

LOCAL E1 LOOPBACK: *OFF LOCAL PAYLOAD
REMOTE OPTICAL LOOPBACK: *OFF PAYLOAD
REMOTE E1 LOOPBACK: *OFF LOCAL PAYLOAD
ACCEPT REMOTE LOOPBACK: *ENABLE DISABLE
SEND TEST PATTERN : *OFF ON

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 195/202

21.8 Unit Alarm Setup

To do alarm setup, press "M" from the "Port Menu". This menu is used to set as major alarm,
critical alarm, minor alarm, or disable alarm for optical and E1's alarm types.
SLOT C FOM E1_PORT 1 === Unit Alarm Setup === 17:40:32 04/19/2005
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[----- Type ------] [Alarm]

LOF,LOCAL-OPTICAL MAJOR
LOS,LOCAL-OPTICAL CRITICAL
RAI,LOCAL-OPTICAL MINOR
LOF,REMOTE-OPTICAL DISABLE
LOS,REMOTE-OPTICAL MAJOR
LOF,LOCAL-E1-PORT1 MAJOR
LOF,LOCAL-E1-PORT2 MAJOR
LOF,LOCAL-E1-PORT3 MAJOR
LOF,LOCAL-E1-PORT4 MAJOR
LOF,REMOTE-E1-PORT1 MAJOR
LOF,REMOTE-E1-PORT2 MAJOR
LOF,REMOTE-E1-PORT3 MAJOR
LOF,REMOTE-E1-PORT4 MAJOR

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

21.9 Unit APSD Setup

Press "J" from the "Port Menu" to set up APSD (automatic power shut down) function. This
menu is used to enable or disable optical APSD function, manual restart, and laser. Users
are also allowed to set up automatic restart time for pulse repetition.
SLOT C FOM E1_PORT 1 === Unit APSD Setup === 17:42:12 04/19/2005
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Optical APSD Enable : OFF

Pulse repetition time for automatic restart(sec) : 300
Manual Restart : OFF
Laser Status : LASER ON

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

21.10 Clear Unit Alarm History

To clear alarm history, press "X" from the "Port Menu". Then press "Y" to confirm or "N" to
abort.
SLOT C FOM E1_PORT 1 === Port Menu === 17:42:47 04/19/2005

Version : HW FPGA Ver.A PCB Ver.A

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
H -> Unit Alarm History M -> Unit Alarm Setup
T -> Unit Optical Type J -> Unit APSD Setup
G -> Unit APSD Configuration X -> Clear Unit Alarm History
A -> Clear E1 CRC Error
B -> Clear Optical Error

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose FOM E1 Port R -> Clear All Error Counters
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Clear alarm history - are you sure ? [Y/N]

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 196/202 DXC 5000

21.11 Unit E1 CRC Error

To clear E1 CRC error, press "A" from the "Port Menu". Then press "Y" to confirm or "N" to
abort.
SLOT C FOM E1_PORT 1 === Port Menu === 17:42:47 04/19/2005

Version : HW FPGA Ver.A PCB Ver.A

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
H -> Unit Alarm History M -> Unit Alarm Setup
T -> Unit Optical Type J -> Unit APSD Setup
G -> Unit APSD Configuration X -> Clear Unit Alarm History
A -> Clear E1 CRC Error
B -> Clear Optical Error

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose FOM E1 Port R -> Clear All Error Counters
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Clear E1 CRC Error - are you sure ? [Y/N]

21.12 Clear Optical Error

To clear optical error, press "B" from the "Port Menu". Then use TAB key to select "ALL",
"FE", "FCS", or "EOC".
SLOT C FOM E1_PORT 1 === Port Menu === 17:42:47 04/19/2005

Version : HW FPGA Ver.A PCB Ver.A

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
H -> Unit Alarm History M -> Unit Alarm Setup
T -> Unit Optical Type J -> Unit APSD Setup
G -> Unit APSD Configuration X -> Clear Unit Alarm History
A -> Clear E1 CRC Error
B -> Clear Optical Error

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose FOM E1 Port R -> Clear All Error Counters
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Use TAB key to select, and ENTER key to clear error counter: ALL
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 197/202

After done the selection from the above menu, press ENTER to clear error counter. Then
press "Y" to confirm or "N" to abort.
SLOT C FOM E1_PORT 1 === Port Menu === 17:42:47 04/19/2005

Version : HW FPGA Ver.A PCB Ver.A

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
H -> Unit Alarm History M -> Unit Alarm Setup
T -> Unit Optical Type J -> Unit APSD Setup
G -> Unit APSD Configuration X -> Clear Unit Alarm History
A -> Clear E1 CRC Error
B -> Clear Optical Error

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose FOM E1 Port R -> Clear All Error Counters
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Clear ALL COUNTERS - are you sure ? [Y/N]

21.13 Unit Load Default Config

To return to default, press "Y" from the "Port Menu". Then press "Y" to confirm or "N" to
abort.
SLOT C FOM E1_PORT 1 === Port Menu === 17:42:47 04/19/2005

Version : HW FPGA Ver.A PCB Ver.A

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
H -> Unit Alarm History M -> Unit Alarm Setup
T -> Unit Optical Type J -> Unit APSD Setup
G -> Unit APSD Configuration X -> Clear Unit Alarm History
A -> Clear E1 CRC Error
B -> Clear Optical Error

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose FOM E1 Port R -> Clear All Error Counters
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 198/202 DXC 5000

21.14 Clear All Error Counters

To clear all error counter for local side or remote side, press "R" from the "Port Menu". Use
TAB key to select "LOCAL" or "REMOTE". After done the selection, press ENTER to clear
error counter. Then press "Y" to confirm or "N" to abort.
SLOT C FOM E1_PORT 1 === Port Menu === 17:42:47 04/19/2005

Version : HW FPGA Ver.A PCB Ver.A

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> Unit Configuration S -> Unit System Setup
I -> Unit Status L -> Unit Loopback and Test
H -> Unit Alarm History M -> Unit Alarm Setup
T -> Unit Optical Type J -> Unit APSD Setup
G -> Unit APSD Configuration X -> Clear Unit Alarm History
A -> Clear E1 CRC Error
B -> Clear Optical Error

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Unit Load Default Config
P -> Choose FOM E1 Port R -> Clear All Error Counters
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Use TAB key to select, and ENTER key to clear error counter: LOCAL
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 199/202

FOM Card 1 + 1 Protection

* Backup function: On
* Mode: non-revertible FOM card 1 + 1 Protection
* Backup Link: Link B

Before Link A failing -

Backup function: On
Mode: non-revertible
Backup Link: Link B
Link status for Link A : Slot A's FOM card is working
Link status for Link B : Slot B's FOM card is idle
Map: Link A map to Link C, Link B map to Link D

DXC5000 DXC5000
TSI TSI
(E1) (FOM) (FOM) (E1)
Link C Link A Link A Link C

(E1) (FOM) (FOM) (E1)

Link D Link B Link B Link D

When Link A fails - 1 2 3 4 5

Backup function: On
Mode: non-revertible
Backup Link: Link A (when Link A is recovered)
Link status for Link A : Slot A's FOM card is idle
Link status for Link B : Slot B's FOM card is working
Map: (1) Exchange A, B map,
Link A map to Link D, Link B map to Link C
(2) If user want to use Link B to be backup link when
Link A is back to normal, please trun off backup
function, which means all protection should be truned off.

DXC5000 DXC5000
1 3 4 5
TSI TSI
(E1) (FOM) fail idle recover idle (FOM) (E1)
Link C Link A Link A Link C
2 2 2
(E1) (FOM) (FOM) (E1)
working
Link D Link B Link B Link D

When Link B fails - 6 7 8

Backup function: On
Mode: non-revertible
Backup Link: Link A (when Link A is recovered)
Link status for Link A : Slot A's FOM card is working
Link status for Link B : Slot B's FOM card is idle
Map: Exchange A, B map,
Link A map to Link C, Link B map to Link D

DXC5000 DXC5000
7
TSI TSI
(E1) (FOM) working (FOM) (E1)
Link C Link A Link A Link C
7 6 8 7
(E1) (FOM) fail idle (FOM) (E1)
Link D Link B Link B Link D

D0554ENa
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 200/202 DXC 5000

* Backup function: On
* Mode: revertible FOM card 1 + 1 Protection
* Backup Link: Link B

Before Link A failing -

Backup function: On
Mode: revertible
Backup Link: Link B
Link status for Link A : Slot A's FOM card is working
Link status for Link B : Slot B's FOM card is idle
Map: Link A map to Link C, Link B map to Link D

DXC5000 DXC5000
TSI TSI
(E1) (FOM) (FOM) (E1)
Link C Link A Link A Link C

(E1) (FOM) (FOM) (E1)

Link D Link B Link B Link D

When Link A fails - 1 2 3

Backup function: On
Mode: revertible
Backup Link: Link A (when Link A is idle)
Link status for Link A : Slot A's FOM card is idle
Link status for Link B : Slot B's FOM card is working
Map: Exchange A, B map
Link A map to Link D, Link B map to Link C

DXC5000 DXC5000
1 3
TSI TSI
(E1) (FOM) fail idle (FOM) (E1)
Link C Link A Link A Link C
2 2 2
(E1) (FOM) (FOM) (E1)
working
Link D Link B Link B Link D

When Link A recovers - 4 5

Backup function: On
Mode: revertible
Backup Link: Link B (when Link A recovers)
Link status for Link A : Slot A's FOM card is working
Link status for Link B : Slot B's FOM card is idle
Map: Exchange A, B map
Link A map to Link C, Link B map to Link D

DXC5000 DXC5000
TSI 4 TSI
(E1) 4 (FOM) recover ......working (FOM) 4 (E1)
Link C Link A Link A Link C
5
(E1) (FOM) idle (FOM) (E1)
Link D Link B Link B Link D

D0555ENa
Terminal Operation DXC5K/EN CT/A22

DXC 5000 Page 201/202

22. ROUTER-A SUB-MENU

For detail of AREVA's Router-A Sub-Menu, please see AREVA's Router-A separate Manual.
DXC5K/EN CT/A22 Terminal Operation

Page 202/202 DXC 5000

23. LS (LOW SPEED) OPTICAL FIBER SUB-MENU (C37.94)

For detail of DXC 5000 LS (Low Speed) Optical Fiber Sub-Menu, please see DXC 5000 LS
(Low Speed) Optical Fiber (C37.94) separate Manual.
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000

APPLICATION NOTES
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 1/62

CONTENTS

1+1 APS PROTECTION (Small E1)

1. INTRODUCTION 7

2. HARDWARE 8

3. SETTING UP THE TSI MAP 9

INBAND MANAGEMENT

1. INTRODUCTION 15

2. HARDWARE 16

3. SETUP TSI MAP 17

1+1 EPS and APS PROTECTION (QE1 and MQE1)

1. INTRODUCTION 23

2. SETTING UP CIRCUIT PROTECTION 24

2.1 Connecting the Y-Box to the DXC 5000 Shelf 24
2.2 Quad E1 Card Location 25
2.3 Setting up a VT-100 Monitor 25
2.4 Step by Step Quad E1 Card Circuit Protection Setup 25

3. SETTING UP LINE PROTECTION 26

3.1 Step by Step Quad E1 Card Line Protection Setup 26

DXC 5000 ALARM TRAP INFORMATION

1. TRAP DEFINITION 29

SETTING UP A DXC 5000 PDH SHARED PROTECTION RING

1. OVERVIEW 39

2. SETUP INSTRUCTIONS 40
DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 2/62 DXC5000

SETTING UP A DXC 5000 PDH SHARED PROTECTION RING (T1)

1. OVERVIEW 47

2. SETUP INSTRUCTIONS 48

Y-BOX

FXO TEST WITH LC BOX

1. INTRODUCTION 59

2. TRADITIONAL FXO FRONT END 60

3. SOLID STATE FXO FRONT END 61

4. BATTERY FEED CIRCUIT 62

Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 3/62

MODIFICATIONS PAGE
Version DATE COMMENTS
A 23/09/2004 ORIGINAL ISSUE
B 01/03/2005 Supersedes Version A
A22 15/05/2007 Update
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 5/62

1+1 APS PROTECTION

(Small E1)
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 7/62

1. INTRODUCTION
Among the many applications of the DXC 5000, an important one is APS protection. This
occurs when the system is set up so that a backup line (or lines in the case of 1:n) will be
switched into service if the working line fails. In such a case, it must be switched in at each
end of the line.
NOTE: The APS protection function exists or E1 and T1 cards. Four slots on
the DXC 5000 are available for use with E1 /T1 cards.

Port A TS 01-10 SLOT 1

E1 HDSL
Port B
E1
TS11-20
Port C
E1

Port D
E1

D0354ENa

In the above DXC 5000 example, PORT A is backed up by PORT B. Similarly, PORT C is
backed up by PORT D. All cards in this example are E1 cards. Time Slots 01-10 of PORT A
are mapped to the HDSL module in Slot 1. Time Slots 11-20 of PORT C are also mapped to
the HDSL module in Slot 1.
DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 8/62 DXC5000

2. HARDWARE
1. Install the DXC 5000 according to instructions in the user manual.
2. Install E1 plug-in cards into Ports A, B, C, and D.
3. This particular DXC 5000 has an HDSL module plugged into Slot 1.
4. Install a VT-100 terminal to the “console” port on the front of the DXC 5000.
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 9/62

3. SETTING UP THE TSI MAP

Press “S” from the Controller Menu to access the Controller Setup screen.
DXC 500 0 == = C ontr oll er Menu == = 09: 54:2 5 0 6/0 2/20 05

Seri al Num ber : 53 023 Redu nda nt Cont rol ler : Di sab led
Hard war e V ersi on: Ve r.D Star t T ime : 19: 16: 09 0 6/0 1/2 005
Soft war e V ersi on: S4 .B4 06/ 01/ 2005

[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]

C -> Sy ste m Co nfi gur atio n S -> Sy ste m Se tup
B -> Cl ock sou rce Co nfig ura tio n M -> Sy ste m Al arm Se tup
Q -> Al arm Que ue Sum mary W -> Fi rmw are Tra nsf er
I -> In for mati on Sum mary V -> St ore /Ret rie ve Conf igu rat ion
K -> Cl ock sou rce Se tup
T -> Bi t E rror Ra te Test

[LOG ] [MIS C]
U -> Ch oos e a Slo t A -> Al arm Cut Of f
F -> Lo g O ff [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu X -> Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
O -> Lo g O n [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu Y -> Co ntr olle r R etu rn t o D efa ult
Z -> Co ntr olle r R ese t

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Press “G” from the Controller Setup screen.

DXC 500 0 == = C ontr oll er Setu p = == 09: 55:2 4 0 6/1 4/20 06

A -> Sys tem

S -> SNM P
B -> Pas swo rd
C -> TSI ma p s etup
D -> Sel ect a new TSI ma p
E -> Cop y a TS I ma p t o a noth er
F -> Cle ar a T SI m ap
L -> Com man d L ine
I -> Ini t N ew Card
J -> Cle ar Emp ty S lot
G -> Lin k B ack up f unc tio n
Q -> QDS 1 1 :1 Prot ect ion

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The System Setup (BACKUP) screen will appear as shown below. Use the ‘arrow’ keys and
the TAB key to set the “Backup function” to “ON” as shown below. Then set the “Mode” to
“revertible”.
Backup links can be established for two port pairs. In the example below, PORT A is
backed up by PORT B and PORT C is backed up by PORT D.
To set this up, go to the “Link A” column and use the ‘arrow’ keys and ‘TAB’ key to select
“Link B” as the backup for “Link A”. PORT B is now set up to be the backup port for PORT
A. Repeat the same procedure to have PORT C backed up by PORT D. When finished,
press ‘ESC’ to save the configuration. A prompt will ask, “Are you sure? Y/N”. Press ‘Y’.
You will automatically return to the Controller Setup screen
DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 10/62 DXC5000

DXC 500 0 === Sy ste m Se tup (B acku p) === 1 4:3 3:56 01 /23 /200 2
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B: ROLL OP TIO NS

Back up fun ctio n : ON

Mode : reve rti ble

Link A Li nk B L ink C Lin k D

E1 E1 E1 E1
- ---- --- --- ---- --- --- ---- --- --- -
Back up Li nk : Link B -- ---- L ink D --- ---
Link ba cku p fu n : ON ON ON ON
Link st atu s : Work ing Id le W ork ing Idl e

>> A re you sur e < Y/N >?

Press “C” from the Controller Setup menu. The System Setup (MAP) screen will appear
DXC 500 0 == = C ontr oll er Setu p = == 09: 55:2 4 0 6/1 4/20 06

A -> Sys tem

S -> SNM P
B -> Pas swo rd
C -> TSI ma p s etup
D -> Sel ect a new TSI ma p
E -> Cop y a TS I ma p t o a noth er
F -> Cle ar a T SI m ap
L -> Com man d L ine
I -> Ini t N ew Card
J -> Cle ar Emp ty S lot
G -> Lin k B ack up f unc tio n
Q -> QDS 1 1 :1 Prot ect ion

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

For demonstration purposes, several values have been highlighted on the left-hand side of
the System Setup (MAP) screen depicted below. We initially want to map time slots 1-10 of
PORT A to PORT 1 of the HDSL module in SLOT 1.
Use arrow keys and TAB key to select “MAP _1”.
Then drop down a few lines to the Target section and set “Slot” to “A”.
Leave the “Port” value blank and set “T.S. (starting time slot) “at “01”.
Continue down to “T.S.#” (ending time slot) and set it at “10”.
Set “Clear” at “No” and set “d/v” at “d” for data.
Continue down to the Source Slot section and set “Slot” at “1”.
Then set “Port” at “P1” and set “T.S.” (starting tmeslot) at “01”.
Set “Update?” at “YES” and “Confirm?” at “YES”.
The map will appear as shown below. Do not press ESC key yet. Instead, press the down
arrow key to bring on another page so that we can do our PORT C mapping.
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 11/62

DXC 500 0 = == Sys tem Set up (MAP ) = == 1 4:3 4:15 01 /23 /200 2
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B: ROLL OP TIO NS
MAP NO: MA P_1
Ta rge t E1 NO N-C AS Sou rce HDS L
Targ et PO /TS D SL/P O T S P O/TS D SL/ PO T S PO/ TS D SL /PO TS PO/ TS D SL /PO TS
Slot : A == === == ==== === = = ==== == === ==== = === == = === === === === == ==== === ===
Port : 1 d 1 1 1 17 d 1 1 d A 1 17 d
T.S. : 01 2 d 1 1 2 18 d 1 2 d A 2 18 d
3 d 1 1 3 19 d 1 3 d A 3 19 d
4 d 1 1 4 20 d 1 4 d A 4 20 d
T.S. # : 10 5 d 1 1 5 21 d 1 5 d A 5 21 d
Clea r : No 6 d 1 1 6 22 d 1 6 d A 6 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 1 1 7 23 d 1 7 d A 7 23 d
8 d 1 1 8 24 d 1 8 d A 8 24 d
9 d 1 1 9 25 d 1 9 d A 9 25 d
Sour ce 10 d 1 1 10 26 d 1 10 d A 10 26 d
Slot : 1 11 d 27 d 11 d 27 d
Port : P1 12 d 28 d 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 01 13 d 29 d 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d 14 d 30 d
Upda te? Ye s 15 d 31 d 15 d 31 d
Conf irm ?Ye s 16 d 16 d 32 d

<< P res s E SC t o r etu rn t o C ont roll er Set up m enu , t hen Pre ss D to ac tiv e >>

Time Slots 1-10 of PORT C will be mapped to Time Slots 11-20 of PORT 2 of the HDSL
module in SLOT1. To set this up automatically, follow the same procedure that was used
above to do the PORT A mapping. A demonstration screen is shown below with the
appropriate settings highlighted.
When the mapping is complete, press ESC key to return to the Controller Menu. Then press
‘D’ to activate the map.
DXC 500 0 = == Sys tem Set up (MAP ) = == 1 4:3 4:15 01 /23 /200 2
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B: ROLL OP TIO NS
MAP NO: MA P_1
Ta rge t E1 NO N-C AS Sou rce HDS L
Targ et PO/ TS D S L/PO TS PO /TS D S L/P O TS P O/T S D SL/ PO TS P O/T S D SL/ PO TS
Slot : C === == === ==== === == === === === ==== = === = == === === == = === = = ==== === ==
Port : 1 d 1 2 11 17 d 1 1 d A 1 2 17 d C 7
T.S. : 01 2 d 1 2 12 18 d 1 2 d A 2 2 18 d C 8
3 d 1 2 13 19 d 1 3 d A 3 2 19 d C 9
4 d 1 2 14 20 d 1 4 d A 4 2 20 d C 10
T.S. # : 10 5 d 1 2 15 21 d 1 5 d A 5 21 d
Clea r : No 6 d 1 2 16 22 d 1 6 d A 6 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 1 2 17 23 d 1 7 d A 7 23 d
8 d 1 2 18 24 d 1 8 d A 8 24 d
9 d 1 2 19 25 d 1 9 d A 9 25 d
Sour ce 10 d 1 2 20 26 d 1 10 d A 10 26 d
Slot : 1 11 d 27 d 2 11 d C 1 27 d
Port : P2 12 d 28 d 2 12 d C 2 28 d
T.S. : 11 13 d 29 d 2 13 d C 3 29 d
14 d 30 d 2 14 d C 4 30 d
Upda te? Ye s 15 d 31 d 2 15 d C 5 31 d
Conf irm ?Ye s 16 d 2 16 d C 6 32 d

<< P res s E SC t o r etu rn t o C ont roll er Set up m enu , t hen Pre ss D to ac tiv e >>
DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 12/62 DXC5000

BLANK PAGE
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 13/62

INBAND MANAGEMENT
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 15/62

1. INTRODUCTION
The advantage of Inband Management is that saves money because management is
through the line itself and a separate line is not needed for management functions. The
disadvantage is that if you do anything to break the management channel, you cannot get it
back.
In Inband Management, the management function is inserted into the working line. There
are several ways to do this. One is to use a router connected to the CSU/DSU and routed
out to the line. Another is to use a Loop-V 4200-28 with a router card as shown in the
diagram below. Using the Router card, management of a local, as well as one or more
remote DXC 5000 products (up to 32 inband management capable devices per card) is
possible.
NOTE: The inband management function of the DXC 5000 is available only
for E1 and T1 applications. The diagram below illustrates an E1
application.

E1
DXC 5000

Telnet E1 Router
Station DXC 5000

Ethernet
D0358ENa
DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 16/62 DXC5000

2. HARDWARE
1. Install the DXC 5000 according to instructions in the user manual.
2. Load Ports A, B, C and D with E1 or T1 cards.
3. Connect a VT-100 terminal to the DXC 5000 via the Ethernet
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 17/62

3. SETUP TSI MAP

Press “S” from the Controller Menu to access the Controller Setup screen.
DXC 500 0 == = C ontr oll er Menu == = 09: 54:2 5 0 6/0 2/20 05

Seri al Num ber : 53 023 Redu nda nt Cont rol ler : Di sab led
Hard war e V ersi on: Ve r.D Star t T ime : 19: 16: 09 0 6/0 1/2 005
Soft war e V ersi on: S4 .B4 06/ 01/ 2005

[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]

C -> Sy ste m Co nfi gur atio n S -> Sy ste m Se tup
B -> Cl ock sou rce Co nfig ura tio n M -> Sy ste m Al arm Se tup
Q -> Al arm Que ue Sum mary W -> Fi rmw are Tra nsf er
I -> In for mati on Sum mary V -> St ore /Ret rie ve Conf igu rat ion
K -> Cl ock sou rce Se tup
T -> Bi t E rror Ra te Test

[LOG ] [MIS C]
U -> Ch oos e a Slo t A -> Al arm Cut Of f
F -> Lo g O ff [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu X -> Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
O -> Lo g O n [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu Y -> Co ntr olle r R etu rn t o D efa ult
Z -> Co ntr olle r R ese t

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Press “A” from the Controller Setup menu to access the System Setup (SYSTEM) screen.
DXC 500 0 == = C ontr oll er Setu p = == 09: 55:2 4 0 6/1 4/20 06

A -> Sys tem

S -> SNM P
B -> Pas swo rd
C -> TSI ma p s etup
D -> Sel ect a new TSI ma p
E -> Cop y a TS I ma p t o a noth er
F -> Cle ar a T SI m ap
L -> Com man d L ine
I -> Ini t N ew Card
J -> Cle ar Emp ty S lot
G -> Lin k B ack up f unc tio n
Q -> QDS 1 1 :1 Prot ect ion

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 18/62 DXC5000

Use arrow keys to move the cursor, and then key in the ‘IP Address’, ‘Subnet Mask’, Trap IP
Address’ and ‘Gateway IP’. Next, move the cursor down to ‘IP Interface’ and use TAB key to
scroll that setting to ‘HDLC_PORT’. For demonstration purposes these areas are highlighted
on the screen below. When done, press ESC to return to the Controller Setup Menu.
DXC 500 0 === Sy ste m Se tup (S YSTE M) === 1 0:5 6:15 02 /06 /200 2
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : h h:mm :ss mm /dd/ yyy y, BACK SPA CE to e dit
[Sys tem ]
Time /Da te :1 0:5 6:16 02 /06 /200 2
IP A ddr ess :1 40. 139. 034 .04 0 Subn et Mas k : 255 .25 5.00 0.0 00
Trap IP Ad dres s:1 40. 132. 001 .18 3 Gate way IP : 140 .13 9.00 1.2 54
Comm uni ty Name :p ubl ic
Devi ce Nam e :D XC 5000
Syst em Loc atio n:A REV A MA SSY

Syst em Con tact :A REV A MA SSY

IP I nte rfa ce : HDL C_PO RT

[CON SOL E p ort] [SLI P p ort ]
Baud Ra te : 384 00 Baud Ra te : 384 00
[TSI ma p] [Clo ck]
TSI Fun cti on : 1:1 (Bid ire cti on) Cloc k M ode : SSM
Idle Si gna llin g: 110 1

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

From the Controller Setup menu press “C” to access the System Setup (MAP) screen. Use
arrow keys and the TAB key to set up the HDLC TSI map. You must select a time slot to
use for inband management. In the example below we decided to map Time Slot 1 of Port A
to Time Slot 1 of the HDLC Port for this purpose. When you have completed your TSI map,
press “ESC” to return to the Controller Setup menu. Then press “D” from that menu to
activate the new map.
DXC 500 0 = == Sys tem Set up (MAP ) = == 1 0:5 6:26 02 /06 /200 2
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B: ROLL OP TIO NS
MAP NO: MA P_2
Ta rge t E1 NO N-C AS Sou rce HDL C
Targ et PO /TS D SL/P O T S P O/TS D SL/ PO T S PO/ TS D SL /PO TS PO/ TS D SL /PO TS
Slot : A == === == ==== === = = ==== == === ==== = === == = === === === === == ==== === ===
Port : 1 d HD 1 17 d 1 d A 1
T.S. : 01 2 d 18 d
3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d
T.S. # : 01 5 d 21 d
Clea r : No 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 23 d
8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d
Sour ce 10 d 26 d
Slot : HD 11 d 27 d
Port : 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 01 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d
Upda te? Ye s 15 d 31 d
Conf irm ?Ye s 16 d

<< P res s E SC t o r etu rn t o C ont roll er Set up m enu , t hen Pre ss D to ac tiv e >>

Setting The Loopback Timer.

NOTE: When you are setting the Inband Management configuration a
loopback timer will appear on your screen. If you are planning to do
any loopback testing while in the Inband Management (HDLC) mode
you must set the timer for a period (in seconds) suitable to your testing
requirements. The inband management function will be unavailable
for the duration of the loopback testing. If you are not planning to do
any Loopback testing while in the Inband Management mode leave
the timer at its default setting of “0” seconds.
The purpose of the timer is to prevent the irretrievable loss of your
inband management line while doing loopback testing. When you are
not in the inband management mode and wish to do loopback testing
you can ignore the timer.
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 19/62

Press ‘U’ to choose a slot (port).

DXC 500 0 == = C ontr oll er Menu == = 09: 54:2 5 0 6/0 2/20 05

Seri al Num ber : 53 023 Redu nda nt Cont rol ler : Di sab led
Hard war e V ersi on: Ve r.D Star t T ime : 19: 16: 09 0 6/0 1/2 005
Soft war e V ersi on: S4 .B4 06/ 01/ 2005

[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]

C -> Sy ste m Co nfi gur atio n S -> Sy ste m Se tup
B -> Cl ock sou rce Co nfig ura tio n M -> Sy ste m Al arm Se tup
Q -> Al arm Que ue Sum mary W -> Fi rmw are Tra nsf er
I -> In for mati on Sum mary V -> St ore /Ret rie ve Conf igu rat ion
K -> Cl ock sou rce Se tup
T -> Bi t E rror Ra te Test

[LOG ] [MIS C]
U -> Ch oos e a Slo t A -> Al arm Cut Of f
F -> Lo g O ff [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu X -> Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
O -> Lo g O n [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu Y -> Co ntr olle r R etu rn t o D efa ult
Z -> Co ntr olle r R ese t

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Key in the letter of the port you mapped to the HDLC port. In our example it was port ‘A’.
DXC 500 0 == = C ontr oll er Menu == = 09: 54:2 5 0 6/0 2/20 05

Seri al Num ber : 53 023 Redu nda nt Cont rol ler : Di sab led
Hard war e V ersi on: Ve r.D Star t T ime : 19: 16: 09 0 6/0 1/2 005
Soft war e V ersi on: S4 .B4 06/ 01/ 2005

[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]

C -> Sy ste m Co nfi gur atio n S -> Sy ste m Se tup
B -> Cl ock sou rce Co nfig ura tio n M -> Sy ste m Al arm Se tup
Q -> Al arm Que ue Sum mary W -> Fi rmw are Tra nsf er
I -> In for mati on Sum mary V -> St ore /Ret rie ve Conf igu rat ion
K -> Cl ock sou rce Se tup
T -> Bi t E rror Ra te Test

[LOG ] [MIS C]
U -> Ch oos e a Slo t A -> Al arm Cut Of f
F -> Lo g O ff [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu X -> Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
O -> Lo g O n [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu Y -> Co ntr olle r R etu rn t o D efa ult
Z -> Co ntr olle r R ese t

==>> In put the un it numb er (A~ D or 1~ 12) : A

DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 20/62 DXC5000

The Port Menu will appear as below. Press ’L’.

SLOT A FE 1 === Por t M enu === 1 5:59 :27 02 /21/ 200 2

Vers ion : SW V3 .00 02 /07 /200 1

[DIS PLA Y] [S ETUP ]

1 -> Un it 1-Ho ur Per f. R epo rt L -> U nit Lo opba ck Set up
2 -> Un it 24-H our Pe rf. Rep ort S -> U nit Sy stem Se tup
A -> Un it Line Av ail abil ity K -> U nit Cl ear Per for manc e D ata
C -> Un it Conf igu rat ion M -> U nit Al arm Set up
I -> Un it Stat us X -> U nit Cl ear Ala rm Queu e & Hi stor y
H -> Un it Alar m H ist ory
Q -> Un it Alar m Q ueu e

[LOG ] [M ISC]
U -> Ch oos e a Por t Y -> U nit Lo ad D efa ult Con fig
F -> Lo g O ff [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu Z -> U nit Re set
O -> Lo g O n [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu
E -> Re tur n to Co ntr olle r M ain Men u

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The Port Loopback screen will appear. Go to ‘NEAR END LOOPBACK’ (highlighted below)
and use the arrow keys to move the cursor to ‘LOCAL’
SLOT A FE 1 = == Port Lo opb ack Tes t = == 1 5:59 :33 02 /21/ 200 2
ARRO W K EYS : C URS OR MOVE , ENT ER K EY : I TEM SEL ECT

- NE AR- END LOO PBA CK : *OF F LOCA L PLB LL B

- SE ND LOO PBAC K A CTI VATE CO DE TO F AR- END :

*P AYLO AD LI NE
- SE ND LOO PBAC K D EAC TIVA TE COD E TO FA R-E ND:
*P AYLO AD LI NE
- SE ND TES T PA TTE RN:
*O FF PRB S-F ULL

- ST ATU S:

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

When the HDLC TSI map is setup, go to E1 “Port Loopback Test” menu. After moving the
cursor to LOCAL, PLB, or LLB, the system will request to enter loopback time in Period(in
second) option.
SLOT A FE 1 = == Port Lo opb ack Tes t = == 0 8:14 :32 01 /09/ 200 2
ARRO W K EYS : C URS OR MOVE , ENT ER K EY : I TEM SEL ECT

- NE AR- END LOO PBA CK : OFF * LOCA L PLB LL B Pe riod (in se cond ):

- SE ND LOO PBAC K A CTI VATE CO DE TO F AR- END :

*P AYLO AD LI NE
- SE ND LOO PBAC K D EAC TIVA TE COD E TO FA R-E ND:
*P AYLO AD LI NE
- SE ND TES T PA TTE RN:
*O FF PRB S-F ULL

- ST ATU S:

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 21/62

1+1 EPS and APS

PROTECTION
(QE1 and MQE1)
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 23/62

1. INTRODUCTION
When using 1:1 Protection with Quad E1 cards, two cards must be inserted next to each
other as a pair so that one card can be used to protect the other.
NOTE: A pair of Quad E1 cards should be installed in one of the following slot
groupings: [1&2], [3&4], [5&6], [7&8], [9&10] or [11&12]. The pair of
cards should not be installed in the following groupings: [2&3], [4&5],
[6&7], [8&9] or [10&11].
Before removing any Quad E1 card from DXC 5000 shelf, please
make sure its connecting cables are removed from Quad E1 card first.
There are two types of protection available for the Quad E1 card. They are Circuit Protection
and Line Protection. Circuit Protection requires the use of a Y-BOX. This Y-Box is
specifically designed to provide a 1:1 circuit protection function for the Quad E1 interfaces of
the DXC 5000 shelf. Line Protection does not require the use of a Y-Box.
Each Quad E1 card has four ports. The ports of one card protect the corresponding ports of
the other card. For example, Port 1 of the protection card protects Port 1 of the other card.
Similarly, Port 2 of the protection card protects Port 2 of the other card, etc.
DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 24/62 DXC5000

2. SETTING UP CIRCUIT PROTECTION

2.1 Connecting the Y-Box to the DXC 5000 Shelf
There are two Y-Box types available for the DXC 5000. One has BNC connectors and can
handle up to 4 lines. The other has RJ 48C connectors and can handle up to 16 lines. For
every four lines you wish to protect you must have one pair of Quad E1 cards in the
DXC 5000.
If you are using the BNC type Y BOX, use BNC cables to connect it to the DXC 5000 as
shown in Figure 9-1, below. For illustration purposes, only Port 1 is protected in this sample
diagram. To protect other ports you must connect them in a similar manner.

POWER CPU-1 CPU-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

QUAD E1 QUAD E1
R R
x x
C C Port 4 Port 4

P P Tx Tx

U U R R
x x
Port 3 Port 3
1 2 Tx Tx

R R
x x
Port 2 Port 2
Tx Tx

R R
x x
Port 1 Port 1
Tx Tx

Y-BOX
1 A-Tx Line-Tx B-Tx 1 2 A-Tx Line-Tx B-Tx 2 3 A-Tx Line-Tx B-Tx 3 4 A-Tx Line-Tx B-Tx 4

A-Rx Line-Rx B-Rx A-Rx Line-Rx B-Rx A-Rx Line-Rx B-Rx A-Rx Line-Rx B-Rx

D0355ENa

FIGURE 1: CONNECTION FOR DXC 5000 AND Y-BOX WITH BNC CONNECTORS
If you are using the RJ48C type Y BOX, connect it to the DXC 5000 as shown in Figure 9-2
below. For illustration purposes, only Port 9 is protected in this sample diagram. To protect
other ports you must connect them in a similar manner.

POWER CPU-1 CPU-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

QUAD E1 QUAD E1

C C
P P Port 4 Port 4
U U
Port 3 Port 3

1 2

Port 2 Port 2

Port 1 Port 1

A LINE 9 A LINE 10 A LINE 11 A LINE 12 A LINE 13 A LINE 14 A LINE 15 A LINE 16

Y-BOX B B B B B B B B

A LINE 1
A LINE 2 B A LINE 3 B A LINE 4 B A LINE 5 B A LINE 6 B A LINE 7 B A LINE 8 B
B

D0356ENa

FIGURE 2: CONNECTION FOR DXC 5000 AND Y-BOX WITH RJ48C CONNECTORS
NOTE: Cable connections between the RJ 48C connectors on the Y-Box and
RJ48C connectors on the DXC 5000 must be parallel, ie. Pin #1 Æ
Pin #1, Pin #2Æ Pin #2, Pin #4Æ # 4, and Pin #5 Æ # 5.
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 25/62

2.2 Quad E1 Card Location

In our sample setup we installed a Quad E1 card in Slot #7. We will use it as a Master. It will
be the working line. We also installed a Quad E1 card in Slot #8. It will be used as a Slave
and will perform the protection function.
2.3 Setting up a VT-100 Monitor
Use a DB9 cable to connect the front Console Port of the DXC 5000 to either COM Port 1 or
COM Port 2 of the PC you are using as a VT-100 monitor. It doesn’t matter which Com Port
you connect to.
NOTE: Many newer PCs use USB Ports. If your computer has a USB port
rather than COM ports you will need to purchase a commercially
available PC USB to DB9 conversion cable. These cables come with
software which, when loaded in a PC, will allow you to send keyboard
commands through the PC’s USB Port to the DB9 Console Port of the
DXC 5000.
2.4 Step by Step Quad E1 Card Circuit Protection Setup
The sample screens below provide step by step instructions for setting up Quad E1Line
Protection. In our sample setup we installed Quad E1 cards in slot #5 and slot #6. The card
in slot #5 will be working slot, and slot 6 will be stand by.
From the Master Unit DXC 5000 Controller Setup screen press Q to set up QDS1 Protection.
DXC 5000 === Controller Setup === 11:31:39 06/14/2006

A -> System
S -> SNMP
B -> Password
C -> TSI map setup
D -> Select a new TSI map
E -> Copy a TSI map to another
F -> Clear a TSI map
L -> Command Line
I -> Init New Card
J -> Clear Empty Slot
G -> Link Backup Function
Q -> QDS1 1:1 Protection

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

The QDS1 Protection screen will appear. There are four selection for the user to setup such
as disable, circuit, line-non revertive and line-revertive.
DXC 5000 === QDS1 1:1 Protection === 11:32:25 06/14/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Protect Pair(Master:Backup) Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
=========================== =========== =========== =========== ===========
Slot A :B ( FOM:FOM ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot C :D ( FT1:FE1 ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 1 :2 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 3 :4 (GDSL-4: ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 5 :6 (QuadE1:QuadE1) CIRCUIT DISABLE LINE-REV DISABLE
Slot 7 :8 (DTU-10:DTE-A ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 9 :10 ( :X.50 ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 11:12 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------

Protection Working Port Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4

Slot A :B ( FOM:FOM )
Slot C :D ( FT1:FE1 )
Slot 1 :2 ( : )
Slot 3 :4 (GDSL-4: )
Slot 5 :6 (QuadE1:QuadE1) N/A N/A 5 -3 5 -4
Slot 7 :8 (DTU-10:DTE-A )
Slot 9 :10 ( :X.50 )
Slot 11:12 ( : )
DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 26/62 DXC5000

3. SETTING UP LINE PROTECTION

Line protection is illustrated in Figure 9-1, below. It does not require the use of a Y-BOX.

Quad E1 E1 Line Quad E1

Card Card

Quad E1 E1 Line Quad E1

Card Card

DXC5000 DXC5000
D0357ENa

FIGURE 3: LINE PROTECTION FOR QUAD E1 CARD

3.1 Step by Step Quad E1 Card Line Protection Setup
The sample screens below provide step by step instructions for setting up Quad E1Line
Protection. In our sample setup we installed Quad E1 cards in slot #5 and slot #6. The card
in slot #5 will be working slot, and slot 6 will be stand by.
From the Master Unit DXC 5000 Controller Setup screen press Q to set up QDS1 Protection.
DXC 5000 === Controller Setup === 11:31:39 06/14/2006

A -> System
S -> SNMP
B -> Password
C -> TSI map setup
D -> Select a new TSI map
E -> Copy a TSI map to another
F -> Clear a TSI map
L -> Command Line
I -> Init New Card
J -> Clear Empty Slot
G -> Link Backup Function
Q -> QDS1 1:1 Protection

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

The QDS1 Protection screen will appear. There are four selection for the user to setup such
as disable, circuit, line-non revertive and line-revertive.
DXC 5000 === QDS1 1:1 Protection === 11:32:25 06/14/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Protect Pair(Master:Backup) Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
=========================== =========== =========== =========== ===========
Slot A :B ( FOM:FOM ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot C :D ( FT1:FE1 ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 1 :2 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 3 :4 (GDSL-4: ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 5 :6 (QuadE1:QuadE1) DISABLE DISABLE LINE-REV LINE-REV
Slot 7 :8 (DTU-10:DTE-A ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 9 :10 ( :X.50 ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 11:12 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------

Protection Working Port Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4

Slot A :B ( FOM:FOM )
Slot C :D ( FT1:FE1 )
Slot 1 :2 ( : )
Slot 3 :4 (GDSL-4: )
Slot 5 :6 (QuadE1:QuadE1) N/A N/A 5 -3 5 -4
Slot 7 :8 (DTU-10:DTE-A )
Slot 9 :10 ( :X.50 )
Slot 11:12 ( : )
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 27/62

DXC 5000 ALARM TRAP

INFORMATION
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 29/62

1. TRAP DEFINITION
-- trap MIB

localTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE DXC 5000-8M
VARIABLES { ccAlarmQueueString,
ccAlarmType,
ccAlarmModel,
ccAlarmSlot,
ccAlarmPort }
DESCRIPTION
"Local alarm trap"
::= 3

removeTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE DXC 5000-8M
VARIABLES { ccAlarmQueueString,
ccAlarmType,
ccAlarmModel,
ccAlarmSlot,
ccAlarmPort }
DESCRIPTION
"Local alarm trap remove"
::= 5

ccAlarmQueueString OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE (0..255))
ACCESS read-only
STATUS mandatory
DESCRIPTION
"Alarm Queue String"
::= { alarmQueueSummaryEntry 2 }

ccAlarmType OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX INTEGER {
alarm_cut_off(0),
slot_no_work(1),
slot_start(2),
slot_clock_loss(3),
primary_start(4),
redundant_loss(5),
backup_switch(6),
power_fail(7),
redundant_chksum_error(8),
fan_fail(9),
map_switch(10)
}
ACCESS read-only
STATUS mandatory
DESCRIPTION
"Alarm Type"
::= { alarmQueueSummaryEntry 3 }
DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 30/62 DXC5000

ccAlarmModel OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX INTEGER {
fe1(0),
ft1(1),
dte(2),
dte-dl(3),
v35(4),
x50(5),
dtu-6(6),
dtu-10(7),
mdsl(8),
em(10),
fxs(11),
router(12),
fxo(13),
afr-e1(14),
afr-t1(15),
magneto(16),
quad-e1(18),
quad-t1(19),
v35-a(20),
mdsl-a(21),
v35-b(22),
gshdsl4(23),
gshdsl2(24),
g703(25),
mquad-e1(26),
mquad-t1(27),
dry-contact(28),
controller(32),
unknown(99) }
ACCESS read-only
STATUS mandatory
DESCRIPTION
"Alarm Model"
::= { alarmQueueSummaryEntry 4 }

ccAlarmSlot OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX INTEGER {
slot-A(1),
slot-B(2),
slot-C(3),
slot-D(4),
slot-1(5),
slot-2(6),
slot-3(7),
slot-4(8),
slot-5(9),
slot-6(10),
slot-7(11),
slot-8(12),
slot-9(13),
slot-10(14),
slot-11(15),
slot-12(16)
}
ACCESS read-only
STATUS mandatory
DESCRIPTION
"Alarm Slot"
::= { alarmQueueSummaryEntry 5 }
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 31/62

ccAlarmPort OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX INTEGER {
port-1(0),
port-2(1),
port-3(2),
port-4(3),
port-5(4),
port-6(5),
port-7(6),
port-8(7),
port-9(8),
port-10(9),
port-11(10),
port-12(11),
none(254)
}
ACCESS read-only
STATUS mandatory
DESCRIPTION
"Alarm Port"
::= { alarmQueueSummaryEntry 6 }

ccAlarmModel: Card model type

fe1(0),
ft1(1),
dte(2),
dte-dl(3),
v35(4),
x50(5),
dtu-6(6),
dtu-10(7),
mdsl(8),
em(10),
fxs(11),
router(12),
fxo(13),
afr-e1(14),
afr-t1(15),
magneto(16),
quad-e1(18),
quad-t1(19),
v35-a(20),
mdsl-a(21),
v35-b(22),
gshdsl4(23),
gshdsl2(24),
g703(25),
mquad-e1(26),
mquad-t1(27),
dry-contact(28),
controller(32),
DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 32/62 DXC5000

ccAlarmSlot: Slot index

Slot A 1
Slot B 2
Slot C 3
Slot D 4
Slot 1 5
Slot 2 6
Slot 3 7
Slot 4 8
Slot 5 9
Slot 6 10
Slot 7 11
Slot 8 12
Slot 9 13
Slot 10 14
Slot 11 15
Slot 12 16

ccAlarmPort: Port index

Port 1 0
Port 2 1
Port 3 2
……… …

ccAlarmType < 20: controller alarm

alarm-cut-off(0),
slot-no-work(1),
slot-start(2),
clock-loss(3),
primary-start(4),
redundent-loss(5),
backup-switch(6),
power-failure(7),
redundant-checksum-error(8),
fan-failure(9),
tsi-map-switch(10)
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 33/62

ccAlarmType >= 20: unit alarm

1. E1 card
21 "RAI",
22 "AIS",
23 "LOS",
24 "LOF",
25 "BPV",
26 "ES ",
27 "UAS",
28 "CSS"

2. T1 card
21 "YEL",
22 "AIS",
23 "LOS",
24 "LOF",
25 "BPV",
26 "ES ",
27 "UAS",
28 "CSS"

3. DTE/V.35/RS232 card
20 "UNSYNC",

4. DTU 6/10 card

20 "UNSYNC",

5. MDSL card
20 "LOS,MASTER-LOOP",
21 "LOS,SLAVE-LOOP",
22 "ES15M,MASTER-LOOP",
23 "ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP",
24 "SES15M,MASTER-LOOP",
25 "SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP",
26 "ES24H,MASTER-LOOP",
27 "ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP",
28 "SES24H,MASTER-LOOP",
29 "SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP",
30 "MCLK LOSS",
31 "SEALING CURRENT"

6. ATM E1/T1 card

21 "RAI" or “YEL”,
22 "AIS",
23 "LOS",
24 "LOF",
25 "BPV",
26 "ES ",
27 "UAS",
28 "CSS"
29 "ATM LOS",
30 "ATM AIS",
31 "ATM RDI",
32 "ATM LOC",
33 "FR LKD",
DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 34/62 DXC5000

7. QE1 card
20 "RAI",
21 "AIS",
22 "LOS",
23 "LOF",
24 "BPV",
25 "ES ",
26 "UAS",
27 "CSS",

8. QT1 card
20 "YEL",
21 "AIS",
22 "LOS",
23 "LOF",
24 "BPV",
25 "ES ",
28 "UAS",
29 "CSS",

9. G.703 card
20 "LOS",

10. G.shdsl card

20 "LOS,MASTER-LOOP1",
21 "LOS,MASTER-LOOP2",
22 "LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1",
23 "LOS,SLAVE-LOOP2",
24 "LOS/LOF,MASTER-E1",
25 "LOS/LOF,SLAVE-E1",
26 "ES15M,MASTER-LOOP1",
27 "ES15M,MASTER-LOOP2",
28 "ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1",
29 "ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP2",
30 "ES15M,MASTER-E1",
31 "ES15M,SLAVE-E1",
32 "SES15M,MASTER-LOOP1",
33 "SES15M,MASTER-LOOP2",
34 "SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1",
35 "SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP2",
36 "SES15M,MASTER-E1",
37 "SES15M,SLAVE-E1",
38 "ES24H,MASTER-LOOP1",
39 "ES24H,MASTER-LOOP2",
40 "ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1",
41 "ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP2",
42 "ES24H,MASTER-E1",
43 "ES24H,SLAVE-E1",
44 "SES24H,MASTER-LOOP1",
45 "SES24H,MASTER-LOOP2",
46 "SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1",
47 "SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP2",
48 "SES24H,MASTER-E1",
49 "SES24H,SLAVE-E1",
50 "SEALING CURRENT",
51 "MCLK LOSS",
52 "RTS,MASTER-DTE",
53 "RTS,SLAVE-DTE",
54 "EXTCLK,MASTER-DTE",
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 35/62

55 "EXTCLK,SLAVE-DTE",
56 "DYING GASP ALARM",
57 "LOOP ATTENU ALARM",
58 "LOW NOISE MARGIN",

11. FOM card

20 "LOF,LOCAL-OPTICAL",
21 "LOS,LOCAL-OPTICAL",
22 "RAI,LOCAL-OPTICAL",
23 "LOF,REMOTE-OPTICAL",
24 "LOS,REMOTE-OPTICAL",
25 "LOF,LOCAL-E1-PORT1",
26 "LOF,LOCAL-E1-PORT2",
27 "LOF,LOCAL-E1-PORT3",
28 "LOF,LOCAL-E1-PORT4",
29 "LOF,REMOTE-E1-PORT1",
30 "LOF,REMOTE-E1-PORT2",
31 "LOF,REMOTE-E1-PORT3",
32 "LOF,REMOTE-E1-PORT4",
DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 36/62 DXC5000

BLANK PAGE
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 37/62

SETTING UP A DXC 5000

PDH SHARED PROTECTION
RING
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 39/62

1. OVERVIEW
A PDH Shared Protection Ring can be an ideal solution for voice and data transmission
networks, in that, if any one E1 connection is broken, the voice and data communication
system will still function. This protection is made possible by mapping a loopback to where
the channel came from.
In a PDH Shared Protection Ring, each line is split in two directions. The working line
(outside line in the diagram below) travels in a counter-clockwise direction. The protection
line (inside line) travels in a clockwise direction.
While the is no theoretical limit to the number of nodes in a ring, each node needs 2-3
seconds to stabilize SSM clock switching after a break occurs. In our sample diagram below
we have used five nodes.

E1
HDLC Router
Port A
TS31
4E1
TS1-30 TS1-30
Management PC
MASTER HDLC Inband
Inband Mamnagement is set up by
assigning1 DS0 (64K) for inband
Port B Port C
management purposes on the TSl
4E1 4E1 timeslot map of each AM 3440-A unit.
TS1-31

Clk: A/Internal TS1-31 TS1-31

TS1-2 HDLC
Port C TS3-4
Port A Port B Port D
TS27
4E1 4E1 4E1 4E1
TS30

TS5-31 TS1-31 TS1-31

Clk: A/B Clk: A/B TS1-12
SLAVE #1 SLAVE #4
TS17-31
TS27
Port D Port B Port A TS15-16 Port C
4E1 HDLC
TS30 4E1 4E1 TS13-14 4E1

TS5-6 HDLC
Port C TS7-8
Port A Port B TS28 Port D
4E1 4E1 4E1 4E1
TS29
TS1-4 TS1-31
TS1-31
TS9-31
Clk: A/B Clk: A/B TS1-8 SLAVE #3
SLAVE #2 TS13-31
TS28
Port D Port B Port A TS11-12 Port C
4E1 HDLC
TS29 4E1 4E1 TS9-10 4E1

D0561ENa
DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 40/62 DXC5000

2. SETUP INSTRUCTIONS
Nodes

Set up four nodes, each of which consists of a DXC 5000 device equipped with four Quad
E1 cards (or alternatively, four Mini-quad E1 cards or four E1 Fiber Optical Module). Each of
these nodes will be referred to as Slaves.
Master Unit

Set up a Master unit, which consists of a DXC 5000 device equipped with three Quad E1
cards (or alternatively, three Mini-quad E1 cards or three E1 FOM (Fiber Optical Module)
cards, and a single Router card.
VT-100

Each DXC 5000 can be set up individually using a VT-100 monitor.

Clocks

The clocks must be set up on each of the DXC 5000 units. If you have no SSM source at the
MASTER unit, set the clock for this unit at NORMAL. SLAVE units must have their clock set
at SSM.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (CLOCK-Normal Mode) ===15:16:51 03/24/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Master_Clk Source : INTERNAL

Second_Clk Source : INTERNAL
Current Clock : MASTER_CLK
Clk_Recover_Mode : MANUAL
Clock Status : NORMAL
Ext. Clock Type : E1

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

The clocks on the SLAVE units will be set up as shown in the screen below.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (CLOCK-SSM Mode) === 15:19:39 03/24/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

First Clock Source : SLOT_1 P1

Second Clock Source : SLOT_1 P2
Third Clock Source : NONE
Current Clock : FIRST_CLK
Clock Status : NORMAL

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 41/62

FDL (Facilities Data Link)

On the Port System Setup screen, set the FDL must be set at SSM for all ports in the ring
(ie. Slave unit ports and Master unit ports). This setting is highlighted on the sample setup
screen below.
SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 1 === Port System Setup === 15:24:25 03/24/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ON
CODE = HDB3
CRC = ON
RAI = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
FDL = SSM
Sa_bit = Sa4
IDLE = D5
Protected = DISABLE
Master = SLAVE
INTF = 120 Ohm

Warning!! If you need to change FRAME and CAS.

Please clear TSI MAP(MAP1~4) of this port.
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

TSI Function

The TSI function for all the DXC 5000 devices must be set at 1: N (Multicast).

This setting is highlighted on the sample setup screen below.

DXC 5000 === System Setup (SYSTEM) === 15:46:03 03/24/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: hh:mm:ss mm/dd/yyyy, BACKSPACE to edit
[System]
Time/Date : 15:46:04 03/24/2006
IP Address : 020.001.001.011 Subnet Mask : 255.255.000.000
Gateway IP : 020.001.001.001

IP Interface : HDLC_PORT Loopback Timer (s) : 00000001

[CONSOLE port] [SLIP port]

Baud Rate : 38400 Baud Rate : 38400
Data Length : 8-Bits Data Length : 8-Bits
Stop Bit : 1-Bit Stop Bit : 1-Bit
Parity : NONE Parity : NONE
XON_XOFF : XOFF XON_XOFF : XOFF

[TSI map]
TSI Function : 1:N(Multicast)
Idle Signaling: 1101

[Clock]
Clock Mode : Normal

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 42/62 DXC5000

Map Setup
You must do your mapping for the Master Unit. This is a sample TSI map for the Master
unit. The source port is Slot1, Port 3 and the target port is Slot1, port 1.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (MAP) === 15:20:40 03/24/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target Quad-E1 NON-CAS Source Quad-E1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P1 1 1 d 1 3 1 1 17 d 1 3 17 3 1 d 1 2 1 3 17 d 1 2 17
T.S. : 01 1 2 d 1 3 2 1 18 d 1 3 18 3 2 d 1 2 2 3 18 d 1 2 18
1 3 d 1 3 3 1 19 d 1 3 19 3 3 d 1 2 3 3 19 d 1 2 19
1 4 d 1 3 4 1 20 d 1 3 20 3 4 d 1 2 4 3 20 d 1 2 20
T.S.# : 31 1 5 d 1 3 5 1 21 d 1 3 21 3 5 d 1 2 5 3 21 d 1 2 21
Clear : No 1 6 d 1 3 6 1 22 d 1 3 22 3 6 d 1 2 6 3 22 d 1 2 22
d/v : d 1 7 d 1 3 7 1 23 d 1 3 23 3 7 d 1 2 7 3 23 d 1 2 23
1 8 d 1 3 8 1 24 d 1 3 24 3 8 d 1 2 8 3 24 d 1 2 24
1 9 d 1 3 9 1 25 d 1 3 25 3 9 d 1 2 9 3 25 d 1 2 25
Source 1 10 d 1 3 10 1 26 d 1 3 26 3 10 d 1 2 10 3 26 d 1 2 26
Slot : 1 1 11 d 1 3 11 1 27 d 1 3 27 3 11 d 1 2 11 3 27 d 1 2 27
Port : P3 1 12 d 1 3 12 1 28 d 1 3 28 3 12 d 1 2 12 3 28 d 1 2 28
T.S. : 01 1 13 d 1 3 13 1 29 d 1 3 29 3 13 d 1 2 13 3 29 d 1 2 29
1 14 d 1 3 14 1 30 d 1 3 30 3 14 d 1 2 14 3 30 d 1 2 30
Confirm?Yes 1 15 d 1 3 15 1 31 d 1 3 31 3 15 d 1 2 15 3 31 d 1 2 31
1 16 d 1 3 16 3 16 d 1 2 16

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. The source port is Slot 1, Port 1 and the target
port is Slot 1, Port 2.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (MAP) === 15:20:40 03/24/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target Quad-E1 NON-CAS Source Quad-E1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P2 2 1 d 1 1 1 2 17 d 1 1 17 1 1 d 1 3 1 1 17 d 1 3 17
T.S. : 01 2 2 d 1 1 2 2 18 d 1 1 18 1 2 d 1 3 2 1 18 d 1 3 18
2 3 d 1 1 3 2 19 d 1 1 19 1 3 d 1 3 3 1 19 d 1 3 19
2 4 d 1 1 4 2 20 d 1 1 20 1 4 d 1 3 4 1 20 d 1 3 20
T.S.# : 30 2 5 d 1 1 5 2 21 d 1 1 21 1 5 d 1 3 5 1 21 d 1 3 21
Clear : No 2 6 d 1 1 6 2 22 d 1 1 22 1 6 d 1 3 6 1 22 d 1 3 22
d/v : d 2 7 d 1 1 7 2 23 d 1 1 23 1 7 d 1 3 7 1 23 d 1 3 23
2 8 d 1 1 8 2 24 d 1 1 24 1 8 d 1 3 8 1 24 d 1 3 24
2 9 d 1 1 9 2 25 d 1 1 25 1 9 d 1 3 9 1 25 d 1 3 25
Source 2 10 d 1 1 10 2 26 d 1 1 26 1 10 d 1 3 10 1 26 d 1 3 26
Slot : 1 2 11 d 1 1 11 2 27 d 1 1 27 1 11 d 1 3 11 1 27 d 1 3 27
Port : P1 2 12 d 1 1 12 2 28 d 1 1 28 1 12 d 1 3 12 1 28 d 1 3 28
T.S. : 01 2 13 d 1 1 13 2 29 d 1 1 29 1 13 d 1 3 13 1 29 d 1 3 29
2 14 d 1 1 14 2 30 d 1 1 30 1 14 d 1 3 14 1 30 d 1 3 30
Confirm?Yes 2 15 d 1 1 15 2 31 d IB 1 1 15 d 1 3 15 1 31 d 1 3 31
2 16 d 1 1 16 1 16 d 1 3 16

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 43/62

This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. The source port is Slot 1, Port 2 and the target
port is Slot 1, Port 3.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (MAP) === 15:20:40 03/24/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target Quad-E1 NON-CAS Source Quad-E1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P3 3 1 d 1 2 1 3 17 d 1 2 17 2 1 d 1 1 1 2 17 d 1 1 17
T.S. : 01 3 2 d 1 2 2 3 18 d 1 2 18 2 2 d 1 1 2 2 18 d 1 1 18
3 3 d 1 2 3 3 19 d 1 2 19 2 3 d 1 1 3 2 19 d 1 1 19
3 4 d 1 2 4 3 20 d 1 2 20 2 4 d 1 1 4 2 20 d 1 1 20
T.S.# : 31 3 5 d 1 2 5 3 21 d 1 2 21 2 5 d 1 1 5 2 21 d 1 1 21
Clear : No 3 6 d 1 2 6 3 22 d 1 2 22 2 6 d 1 1 6 2 22 d 1 1 22
d/v : d 3 7 d 1 2 7 3 23 d 1 2 23 2 7 d 1 1 7 2 23 d 1 1 23
3 8 d 1 2 8 3 24 d 1 2 24 2 8 d 1 1 8 2 24 d 1 1 24
3 9 d 1 2 9 3 25 d 1 2 25 2 9 d 1 1 9 2 25 d 1 1 25
Source 3 10 d 1 2 10 3 26 d 1 2 26 2 10 d 1 1 10 2 26 d 1 1 26
Slot : 1 3 11 d 1 2 11 3 27 d 1 2 27 2 11 d 1 1 11 2 27 d 1 1 27
Port : P2 3 12 d 1 2 12 3 28 d 1 2 28 2 12 d 1 1 12 2 28 d 1 1 28
T.S. : 01 3 13 d 1 2 13 3 29 d 1 2 29 2 13 d 1 1 13 2 29 d 1 1 29
3 14 d 1 2 14 3 30 d 1 2 30 2 14 d 1 1 14 2 30 d 1 1 30
Confirm?Yes 3 15 d 1 2 15 3 31 d 1 2 31 2 15 d 1 1 15 2 31 d IB 1
3 16 d 1 2 16 2 16 d 1 1 16

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. Note that this map sets up the HDLC Inband
Management mapping.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (MAP) === 15:20:40 03/24/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target In-Band Source Quad-E1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : IB ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : 1 d 1 1 31 1 1 d 1 3 1 1 17 d 1 3 17
T.S. : 01 1 2 d 1 3 2 1 18 d 1 3 18
1 3 d 1 3 3 1 19 d 1 3 19
1 4 d 1 3 4 1 20 d 1 3 20
T.S.# : 01 1 5 d 1 3 5 1 21 d 1 3 21
Clear : No 1 6 d 1 3 6 1 22 d 1 3 22
d/v : d 1 7 d 1 3 7 1 23 d 1 3 23
1 8 d 1 3 8 1 24 d 1 3 24
1 9 d 1 3 9 1 25 d 1 3 25
Source 1 10 d 1 3 10 1 26 d 1 3 26
Slot : 1 1 11 d 1 3 11 1 27 d 1 3 27
Port : P1 1 12 d 1 3 12 1 28 d 1 3 28
T.S. : 31 1 13 d 1 3 13 1 29 d 1 3 29
1 14 d 1 3 14 1 30 d 1 3 30
Confirm?Yes 1 15 d 1 3 15 1 31 d 1 3 31
1 16 d 1 3 16

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>
DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 44/62 DXC5000

Ring Enabling
From the Master Unit DXC 5000 Controller Setup screen press R to set up PDH Ring
Protection.

DXC 5000 === Controller Setup === 15:48:03 03/24/2006

A -> System
S -> SNMP
B -> Password
C -> TSI map setup
D -> Select a new TSI map
E -> Copy a TSI map to another
F -> Clear a TSI map
L -> Command Line
I -> Init New Card
J -> Clear Empty Slot
G -> Link Backup Function

R -> PDH Ring Protection

T -> PDH Ring Diagnostic

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

The PDH Ring Protection screen will appear.

DXC 5000 === PDH Ring Protection === 12:13:36 03/15/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
PDH Ring Protection: ENABLE
Switching Interval : 05 Station : MASTER
Slot(Model) Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
============== ======= ======= ======= =======
C ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
D ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
1 (Quad E1 ) ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE
2 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
3 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
4 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
5 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
6 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
7 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
8 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
9 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
10 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
11 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
12 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

You must now repeat steps 7 and 8 for each of the DXC 5000 Slave units in order to
complete the PDH Shared Protection Ring setup procedure.
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 45/62

SETTING UP A DXC 5000

PDH SHARED PROTECTION
RING (T1)
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 47/62

1. OVERVIEW
A PDH Shared Protection Ring can be an ideal solution for voice and data transmission
networks, in that, if any one T1 connection is broken, the voice and data communication
system will still function. This protection is made possible by mapping a loopback to where
the channel came from.
In a PDH Shared Protection Ring, each line is split in two directions. The working line
(outside line in the diagram below) travels in a counter-clockwise direction. The protection
line (inside line) travels in a clockwise direction.
While the is no theoretical limit to the number of nodes in a ring, each node needs 2-3
seconds to stabilize SSM clock switching after a break occurs. In our sample diagram below
we have used five nodes.

T1
HDLC Router
Port A
TS24
4T1
TS1-23 TS1-23
Management PC
MASTER HDLC Inband
Inband Mamnagement is set up by
Port B Port C assigning1 DS0 (64K) for inband
management purposes on the TSl
4T1 TS1-24
4T1 timeslot map of each AM 3440-A unit.

Clk: A/Internal

TS1-2 HDLC
Port C TS3-4
Port A Port B Port D
TS20
4T1 4T1 4T1 4T1

TS5-24 TS1-24 TS1-24

SLAVE Clk: A/B Clk: A/B TS1-12

SLAVE
#1 TS17-24 #4
Port D Port B Port A TS15-16 Port C
4T1 HDLC
TS23 4T1 4T1 TS13-14
4T1

TS5-6 HDLC
Port C TS7-8
Port A Port B TS21 Port D
4T1 4T1 4T1 4T1
TS1-4 TS1-24
TS1-24
TS9-24
SLAVE Clk: A/B Clk: A/B TS1-8
SLAVE
TS13-24 #3
#2
Port D Port B Port A TS11-12 Port C
4T1 HDLC
TS22 4T1 4T1 TS9-10 4T1

D0562ENa
DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 48/62 DXC5000

2. SETUP INSTRUCTIONS
Nodes
Set up four nodes, each of which consists of a DXC 5000 device equipped with four Quad
T1 cards. Each of these nodes will be referred to as Slaves.
Master Unit
Set up a Master unit, which consists of a DXC 5000 device equipped with three Quad T1
cards, and a single Router card.
VT-100
Each DXC 5000 can be set up individually using a VT-100 monitor.
Clocks
The clocks must be set up on each of the DXC 5000 units. If you have no SSM source at the
MASTER unit, set the clock for this unit at NORMAL. SLAVE units must have their clock set
at SSM.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (CLOCK-Normal Mode) ===15:16:51 03/24/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Master_Clk Source : INTERNAL

Second_Clk Source : INTERNAL
Current Clock : MASTER_CLK
Clk_Recover_Mode : MANUAL
Clock Status : NORMAL
Ext. Clock Type : E1

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

The clocks on the SLAVE units will be set up as shown in the screen below.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (CLOCK-SSM Mode) === 15:19:39 03/24/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

First Clock Source : SLOT_1 P1

Second Clock Source : SLOT_1 P2
Third Clock Source : NONE
Current Clock : FIRST_CLK
Clock Status : NORMAL

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 49/62

FDL (Facilities Data Link)

On the Port System Setup screen, set the FDL must be set at FDL and FRAME (must be
ESF & T1.403) for all ports in the ring (ie. Slave unit ports and Master unit ports). This setting
is highlighted on the sample setup screen below.
SLOT 5 Quad-T1 PORT 1 === Port System Setup === 10:35:03 03/06/2007
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ESF&T1.403
CODE = B8ZS
YEL = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLI= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
INBAND = OFF
IDLE = FF
INTF = LONG HAUL
LBO = 0 dB
FDL = FDL
Protected = DISABLE
Master = ****

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

TSI Function
The TSI function for all the DXC 5000 devices must be set at 1: N (Multicast).
This setting is highlighted on the sample setup screen below.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (SYSTEM) === 15:46:03 03/24/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: hh:mm:ss mm/dd/yyyy, BACKSPACE to edit
[System]
Time/Date : 15:46:04 03/24/2006
IP Address : 020.001.001.011 Subnet Mask : 255.255.000.000
Gateway IP : 020.001.001.001

IP Interface : HDLC_PORT Loopback Timer (s) : 00000001

[CONSOLE port] [SLIP port]

Baud Rate : 38400 Baud Rate : 38400
Data Length : 8-Bits Data Length : 8-Bits
Stop Bit : 1-Bit Stop Bit : 1-Bit
Parity : NONE Parity : NONE
XON_XOFF : XOFF XON_XOFF : XOFF

[TSI map]
TSI Function : 1:N(Multicast)
Idle Signaling: 1101

[Clock]
Clock Mode : Normal

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 50/62 DXC5000

Map Setup
You must do your mapping for the Master Unit. This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit.
The source port is Slot1, Port 3 and the target port is Slot1, port 1.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (MAP) === 15:20:40 03/24/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target Quad-T1 NON-CAS Source Quad-T1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P1 1 1 d 1 3 1 1 17 d 1 3 17 3 1 d 1 2 1 3 17 d 1 2 17
T.S. : 01 1 2 d 1 3 2 1 18 d 1 3 18 3 2 d 1 2 2 3 18 d 1 2 18
1 3 d 1 3 3 1 19 d 1 3 19 3 3 d 1 2 3 3 19 d 1 2 19
1 4 d 1 3 4 1 20 d 1 3 20 3 4 d 1 2 4 3 20 d 1 2 20
T.S.# : 24 1 5 d 1 3 5 1 21 d 1 3 21 3 5 d 1 2 5 3 21 d 1 2 21
Clear : No 1 6 d 1 3 6 1 22 d 1 3 22 3 6 d 1 2 6 3 22 d 1 2 22
d/v : d 1 7 d 1 3 7 1 23 d 1 3 23 3 7 d 1 2 7 3 23 d 1 2 23
1 8 d 1 3 8 1 24 d 1 3 24 3 8 d 1 2 8 3 24 d 1 2 24
1 9 d 1 3 9 3 9 d 1 2 9
Source 1 10 d 1 3 10 3 10 d 1 2 10
Slot : 1 1 11 d 1 3 11 3 11 d 1 2 11
Port : P3 1 12 d 1 3 12 3 12 d 1 2 12
T.S. : 01 1 13 d 1 3 13 3 13 d 1 2 13
1 14 d 1 3 14 3 14 d 1 2 14
Confirm?Yes 1 15 d 1 3 15 3 15 d 1 2 15
1 16 d 1 3 16 3 16 d 1 2 16

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. The source port is Slot 1, Port 1 and the target
port is Slot 1, Port 2.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (MAP) === 15:20:40 03/24/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target Quad-T1 NON-CAS Source Quad-T1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P2 2 1 d 1 1 1 2 17 d 1 1 17 1 1 d 1 3 1 1 17 d 1 3 17
T.S. : 01 2 2 d 1 1 2 2 18 d 1 1 18 1 2 d 1 3 2 1 18 d 1 3 18
2 3 d 1 1 3 2 19 d 1 1 19 1 3 d 1 3 3 1 19 d 1 3 19
2 4 d 1 1 4 2 20 d 1 1 20 1 4 d 1 3 4 1 20 d 1 3 20
T.S.# : 23 2 5 d 1 1 5 2 21 d 1 1 21 1 5 d 1 3 5 1 21 d 1 3 21
Clear : No 2 6 d 1 1 6 2 22 d 1 1 22 1 6 d 1 3 6 1 22 d 1 3 22
d/v : d 2 7 d 1 1 7 2 23 d 1 1 23 1 7 d 1 3 7 1 23 d 1 3 23
2 8 d 1 1 8 2 24 d IB 1 1 8 d 1 3 8 1 24 d 1 3 24
2 9 d 1 1 9 1 9 d 1 3 9
Source 2 10 d 1 1 10 1 10 d 1 3 10
Slot : 1 2 11 d 1 1 11 1 11 d 1 3 11
Port : P1 2 12 d 1 1 12 1 12 d 1 3 12
T.S. : 01 2 13 d 1 1 13 1 13 d 1 3 13
2 14 d 1 1 14 1 14 d 1 3 14
Confirm?Yes 2 15 d 1 1 15 1 15 d 1 3 15
2 16 d 1 1 16 1 16 d 1 3 16

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 51/62

This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. The source port is Slot 1, Port 2 and the target
port is Slot 1, Port 3.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (MAP) === 15:20:40 03/24/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target Quad-T1 NON-CAS Source Quad-T1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P3 3 1 d 1 2 1 3 17 d 1 2 17 2 1 d 1 1 1 2 17 d 1 1 17
T.S. : 01 3 2 d 1 2 2 3 18 d 1 2 18 2 2 d 1 1 2 2 18 d 1 1 18
3 3 d 1 2 3 3 19 d 1 2 19 2 3 d 1 1 3 2 19 d 1 1 19
3 4 d 1 2 4 3 20 d 1 2 20 2 4 d 1 1 4 2 20 d 1 1 20
T.S.# : 24 3 5 d 1 2 5 3 21 d 1 2 21 2 5 d 1 1 5 2 21 d 1 1 21
Clear : No 3 6 d 1 2 6 3 22 d 1 2 22 2 6 d 1 1 6 2 22 d 1 1 22
d/v : d 3 7 d 1 2 7 3 23 d 1 2 23 2 7 d 1 1 7 2 23 d 1 1 23
3 8 d 1 2 8 3 24 d 1 2 24 2 8 d 1 1 8 2 24 d IB 1
3 9 d 1 2 9 2 9 d 1 1 9
Source 3 10 d 1 2 10 2 10 d 1 1 10
Slot : 1 3 11 d 1 2 11 2 11 d 1 1 11
Port : P2 3 12 d 1 2 12 2 12 d 1 1 12
T.S. : 01 3 13 d 1 2 13 2 13 d 1 1 13
3 14 d 1 2 14 2 14 d 1 1 14
Confirm?Yes 3 15 d 1 2 15 2 15 d 1 1 15
3 16 d 1 2 16 2 16 d 1 1 16

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. Note that this map sets up the HDLC Inband
Management mapping.
DXC 5000 === System Setup (MAP) === 15:20:40 03/24/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target In-Band Source Quad-T1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : IB ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : 1 d 1 1 24 1 1 d 1 3 1 1 17 d 1 3 17
T.S. : 01 1 2 d 1 3 2 1 18 d 1 3 18
1 3 d 1 3 3 1 19 d 1 3 19
1 4 d 1 3 4 1 20 d 1 3 20
T.S.# : 01 1 5 d 1 3 5 1 21 d 1 3 21
Clear : No 1 6 d 1 3 6 1 22 d 1 3 22
d/v : d 1 7 d 1 3 7 1 23 d 1 3 23
1 8 d 1 3 8 1 24 d 1 3 24
1 9 d 1 3 9
Source 1 10 d 1 3 10
Slot : 1 1 11 d 1 3 11
Port : P1 1 12 d 1 3 12
T.S. : 24 1 13 d 1 3 13
1 14 d 1 3 14
Confirm?Yes 1 15 d 1 3 15
1 16 d 1 3 16

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>
DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 52/62 DXC5000

Ring Enabling
From the Master Unit DXC 5000 Controller Setup screen press R to set up PDH Ring
Protection.
DXC 5000 === Controller Setup === 15:48:03 03/24/2006

A -> System
S -> SNMP
B -> Password
C -> TSI map setup
D -> Select a new TSI map
E -> Copy a TSI map to another
F -> Clear a TSI map
L -> Command Line
I -> Init New Card
J -> Clear Empty Slot
G -> Link Backup Function

R -> PDH Ring Protection

T -> PDH Ring Diagnostic

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

The PDH Ring Protection screen will appear.

DXC 5000 === PDH Ring Protection === 12:13:36 03/15/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
PDH Ring Protection: ENABLE
Switching Interval : 05 Station : MASTER
Slot(Model) Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
============== ======= ======= ======= =======
C ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
D ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
1 (Quad T1 ) ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE
2 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
3 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
4 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
5 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
6 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
7 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
8 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
9 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
10 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
11 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
12 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

You must now repeat steps 7 and 8 for each of the DXC 5000 Slave units in order to
complete the PDH Shared Protection Ring setup procedure.
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 53/62

Y-BOX
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 55/62

The Y-BOX is designed to provide 1 for 1 protection function for Quad E1 interfaces of
DXC5000 shelf.
Two kinds of connector type are available for Y-BOX: BNC connector and RJ48C
connectors. Each Y-BOX with BNC connectors support 1 for 1 protection function for 2 Quad
E1 interfaces of DXC5000, and each Y-BOX with RJ48C connectors support 1 for 1
protection function for 8 Quad E1 interfaces of DXC5000.

Quad E1
card
E1 Line
DXC5000 Y-BOX
Quad E1
card
D0359ENa

DXC 5000 WITH Y-BOX

Technical Data Y-BOX
LINE

Connector BNC or RJ48C

Port Number For Y-BOX with BNC connectors: 4 line ports
For Y-BOX with RJ48C connectors: 16 line ports
Protection For Y-BOX with BNC connectors: support 2 Quad E1 card, 4 active E1, 4
standby E1
For Y-BOX with RJ48C connectors: support 8 Quad E1 cards, 16 active
E1, 16 standby E1

Mechanical

Height 44.5 mm/ 1.75 in

Width 432 mm/ 17 in
Depth 100 mm/ 3.9 in

Front Panel View (with BNC connectors)

TM

Y-BOX
A-TX LINE-TX B-TX A-TX LINE-TX B-TX A-TX LINE-TX B-TX A-TX LINE-TX B-TX
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4

A-RX LINE-RX B-RX A-RX LINE-RX B-RX A-RX LINE-RX B-RX A-RX LINE-RX B-RX

D0332ENa

Front Panel View (with RJ48C connectors)

A LINE 9 B A LINE 10 B A LINE 11 B A LINE 12 B A LINE 13 B A LINE 14 B A LINE 15 B A LINE 16 B

TM

Y-BOX
A LINE 1 B A LINE 2 B A LINE 3 B A LINE 4 B A LINE 5 B A LINE 6 B A LINE 7 B A LINE 8 B

D0333ENa
DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 56/62 DXC5000

BLANK PAGE
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 57/62

FXO TEST WITH LC BOX

Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 59/62

1. INTRODUCTION
Because DXC 5000 FXO cards uses solid state technology at the front end, in place of the
traditional transformer, the testing of this card requires a battery feed circuit. This paper
explains why such LC battery feed circuit is necessary and provides a schematic of such a
circuit.
DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 60/62 DXC5000

2. TRADITIONAL FXO FRONT END

The traditional FXO front end has a transformer to separate the supervisory signals from the
voice signals. Supervisory signals are On-Hook and Off-Hook signals, which are open and
closed DC circuit paths. Voice signals are AC signals, separated into the two directions of
transmission. [In addition, the FXO front end also needs to detect ringing signals. Detection
of ringing signals is an independent function not related to the discussion here.] The
simplified schematic of a transformer FXO front end is shown in Figure below.

-48 volts from CO

Z
Swiitch Hook

Voice Signal Transmit and Receive

D0360ENa

FIGURE 4: TRADITIONAL FXO FRONT END WITH TRANSFORMER

Note that the switch hook determines whether the supervisory DC current is to be blocked,
On-Hook, or to flow, Off-Hook. Because of the transformer, the DC current stays on the left.
The voice signal, being AC, is coupled by the transformer to the amplifiers on the right. In
this way, the supervisory signals and the voice signals are separated and can be measured
independently.
Application Notes DXC5K/EN AP/A22

DXC5000 Page 61/62

3. SOLID STATE FXO FRONT END

Because of recent efforts on miniaturization, the transformer used in traditional FXO front
end is replaced by solid state components. A solid state circuit would be significantly smaller
and lighter than a transformer. As a result, the dense packing of circuits is made possible.
This is schematically shown in Figure below.

Solid State Active

Resistive Network

Resistive Hybrid Network

AC Impedance Adjust
-48 volts from CO

Constant current DC
Swiitch Hook Logic
Voice Signal
Transmit and
Receive
D0361ENa

FIGURE 5: SOLID STATE FXO FRONT END

One significant operational difference between the solid state network and the transformer is
that the AC path is not active unless the DC path is also active. This, in turn, requires the –
48-volt central office battery be present. This requirement does not present a problem in
operation because the FXO usually receives this voltage, either from the CO or from a PBX.
However, in testing the FXO card for voice transmission, unlike the transformer version, the
solid state FXO must have the –48-volt present. Otherwise, the AC path will be blocked and
measurements will fail.
DXC5K/EN AP/A22 Application Notes

Page 62/62 DXC5000

4. BATTERY FEED CIRCUIT

The LC battery feed circuit is a simple device to supply the FXO card with –48 volts when
voice transmission measurements are made. The components are sized to minimize any
influence on the measurement results. The circuit is shown in Figure below.
The two iron core inductances L are each 10 H in size, which presents an impedance of
about 20K ohms. The two capacitors C are 25 µF each, which presents an impedance of 20
ohms. Both figures are calculated at the low frequency end of 300 Hz. Compared to the
resistive 600-ohm nominal impedance, neither the series capacitive elements, nor the shunt
inductive elements would significantly affect the measurements by the testing instruments. At
the same time, this circuit allows the FXO to be energized by the DC voltage of –48 volts.

From
-48 volt
Supply

L = 10 H

C = 25µF

Testing FXO Card

Instrument being tested

C = 25µF

L = 10 H

Ground

D0362ENa

FIGURE 6: LC BATTER FEED CIRCUIT FOR TESTING BRAND SOLID STATE FXO CARDS
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000

RTA CONFIGURATION
Document Title DOC REFERENCE

SUBJECT (PRODUCT NAME) Page 2/94

RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 1/94

CONTENTS

1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 7
1.1 Description 7
1.2 Application 7
1.3 Specifications 8

2. INSTALLATION 10
2.1 Site Selection 10
2.2 Mechanical Installation 10
2.3 Ethernet Connection 10

3. OPERATION 11
3.1 Using A Terminal 11
3.1.1 Hyperterminal Monitor Connection 11
3.1.2 Hyperterminal Monitor Serial Port Setup 11
3.2 System Operation 13
3.3 WAN Timeslot Map Setup 15
3.4 Configuration 16
3.5 LED Operation 16

4. ROUTER-A CARD SETUP 17

4.1 Configuration -Save and Reset 17
4.1.1 Save the configuration 17
4.1.2 Resetting the Configuraton 17
4.2 WAN Interface Setup 17
4.2.1 Interfaces in bridge mode 17
4.2.2 Interfaces in router mode 18
4.3 LAN interface Setup 19
4.3.1 Interfaces in bridge mode 19
4.3.2 Interfaces in router mode 19

5. DHCP SETUP 20
5.1 DHCP Server overview 20
5.2 DHCP Server Setup 20
5.3 DHCP Relay Overview 22
5.4 DHCP Relay Setup 22

6. FRAME RELAY SETUP 23

6.1 Overview 23
6.2 Step by Step Setup Instructions 23
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 2/94 DXC 5000

7. IP ROUTING SETUP 25
7.1 Overview 25
7.2 Step by Step Setup Instructions 25

8. OSPF SETUP 26
8.1 Overview 26
8.2 Step by Step Setup Instructions 27

9. NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION SERVICE 28

9.1 Overview 28
9.2 Step by Step Setup Instructions 28

10. TRAFFIC FILTERING SETUP 29

10.1 Overview 29
10.2 ACL entry and selector format 29
10.3 Adding ACL entries 30
10.4 Step by Step Setup Instructions 30

11. QOS SETUP 33

11.1 Overview 33
11.2 Policy Syntax 33
11.2.1 Policy add 33
11.2.2 Policy delete 34
11.2.3 Policy display 34
11.3 Step by Step Setup Instructions 34

12. PORT FORWARDING - VIRTUAL SERVICE 36

12.1 Overview 36
12.2 Step by Step Setup Instructions 36

13. REMOTE BRIDGE SETUP OVERVIEW 38

13.1 Step by Step Setup Instructions 39

14. STP/RSTP SETUP 40

14.1 Overview 40
14.2 Step by Step Setup Instructions 42

15. VLAN 44
15.1 Overview 44
15.2 VLAN and Port Tables 45
15.2.1 VLAN Table 45
15.2.2 Vlan Port Table 45
15.3 VLAN Setup Instructions 46
15.3.1 Application #1 (Fig. 13-1) Step by Step Setup Instructions 46
15.3.2 Application #2 (Fig. 15-2) Step by Step Setup Instructions 47
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 3/94

16. FIRMWARE/CONFIGURATION UP/DOWNLOAD WITH TFTP SERVER 50

16.1 Overview 50
16.2 Upload/Download With The TFTP Server on the LAN Side 50
16.2.1 Step by Step Setup Instructions 51
16.3 Upload/Download With The TFTP Server on An Outside Network 53

17. APPENDIX: OPERATION COMMANDS 54

17.1 Ping Command 54
17.2 Traceroute Commands 54
17.3 Bridge Commands 54
17.4 DHCP Commands 60
17.5 Interface Commands 67
17.6 NAT Commands 73
17.7 Policy Command 76
17.8 Route Commands 78
17.9 Show Commands 80
17.10 System Command 86
17.11 Command List 87

18. APPENDIX: CONVERTING A SUBNET MASK TO BINARY CODE 89

19. APPENDIX: ROUTER-ACTIVATION PROCEDURE 92

19.1 Connect a hyperterminal Terminal to the Router-A card Console Port 92
19.2 Power up the hyperterminal and the DXC5000 router. 92
19.3 Find your device serial number 92
19.4 Reboot system 93

20. GLOSSARY 94
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 4/94 DXC 5000

BLANK PAGE
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 5/94

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

Version DATE COMMENTS

A22 15/05/2007 ORIGINAL ISSUE
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 6/94 DXC 5000

BLANK PAGE
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 7/94

1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
1.1 Description
AREVA’s Router-A card is designed for the DXC5000 series. It occupies one mini slot of the
DXC5000. When used within the DXC5000, this card combines the function of a router and
directs Ethernet traffic to/from multiple WAN channels. With this card, access from LAN to
WAN is accomplished within one card, resulting in savings in cost and in space.
1.2 Application

As a Router
WAN WAN

E1/ T1 E1/ T1

Router-A DXC5000

LAN 1 LAN 2

As an Inband Management Element

DXC5000

Router-A E1/ T1

LAN Network
WAN Element
Network
Management
Workstation

As a LAN Bridge

LAN LAN

DXC5000 DXC5000
E1 /
Bridge WAN E1/ T1 Bridge
T1

D0499ENa

FIGURE 1: APPLICATION DIAGRAM

RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 8/94 DXC 5000

1.3 Specifications
Physical Interface

• Two 10/100BaseT interfaces

• Up to 64 WAN ports

• One mini slot of DXC5000

• Each interface can be configured as a bridge port or router port

LAN Interface

• Two 10/100BaseT interfaces

• Auto MDI/MDI-X crossover

• Speed auto-sensing

• Half/full duplex auto-negotiation

• Speed/duplex force mode

WAN Interface

• Up to 64 WAN ports

• Each WAN port has data rate nX64Kbsp, 1≤ n ≤32 (≤ 4Mbps for total of all 64 WAN
ports)

• Layer-two protocol: HDLC, PPP (IPCP/BCP), Frame Relay, Cisco compatible HDLC

• Up to 64 Frame Relay PVCs

Router

• Routing protocol: RIP-I, RIP-II, and static

NAT

• NAT/NAPT

• Static address table for NAT

• Port forwarding table for NAPT(Virtual Service)

DHCP

• DHCP server support for LAN users (RFC2131, RFC2132)

• BOOTP compatible

• DHCP relay
Access Control and Firewall

• Policy based on

− Inbound/outbound direction

− Source/destination IP address

− Protocol types (ICMP, TCP, UDP, …)

− Port number range

• Up to 64 control lists
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 9/94

Remote Bridge

• User configurable aging time

• Up to 16K MAC table

• Cisco ISL packet transparent

• VLAN packet transparent

• padding/un-padding Ethernet FCS

• Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol support (IEEE 802.1w)

• VLAN-ID mapping

• MAC address based Policy

• DHCP relay and server

• Routing between bridge group and router interfaces

Diagnostics

• Ping

• Traceroute
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 10/94 DXC 5000

2. INSTALLATION
2.1 Site Selection
The following list indicates a site selection guideline. Users need to follow this guideline to
select a proper installation site.

• Location of the Rack should be part of the central office equipment layout design.
Considerations should be given to entrance cable routing and -48 Vdc power.

• The installation site should have -48 Vdc power. An optional AC/DC power converter
can be used. Use Only with Class 2 power source, -48 Vdc, 100 watts.
2.2 Mechanical Installation
The Router-A card is designed to be plugged into any of the available slots in the DXC5000
device. The front panel is shown in the following figure.
The LEDs on the front panel indicate unit performance.

Router-A
100M LINK/ACT

LAN 1

LAN 2

100 M LINK/ACT

D0500XXa

FIGURE 2: ROUTER-A CARD FRONT PANEL

2.3 Ethernet Connection
RJ45 10/100M Ethernet connection pin assignents are listed in Table 2-1 below.

Pin Number Signal

1 Transmit Data +
2 Transmit Data -
3 Receive Data +
4 No Connection
5 No Connection
6 Receive Data -
7 No Connection
8 No Connection

TABLE 2- 1 RJ45 10/100M ETHERNET CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT

NOTE: The Ethernet interface supports Auto MDI/MDI-X and will work with
either a parallel or a crossover cable.
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 11/94

3. OPERATION
This chapter describes the Router-A card configuration options and operational functions.
Refer to subsequent chapters for detailed instructions regarding specific applications.
3.1 Using A Terminal
To use the RS232 interface to configure the unit, use a straight cable to connect an
hyperterminal to the DB9 jack (Console Port) on the front panel of the DXC5000 controller.
The hyperterminal can be a PC running hyperterminal emulator software. The unit is
configured as a DCE.
3.1.1 Hyperterminal Monitor Connection
In order to properly set up the set up the Router-A plug-in card you will need a hyperterminal
Monitor. An hyperterminal Monitor is a PC running emulator software. Use a DB9 cable to
connect the front Console Port of the DXC5000 to either Com Port 1or Com Port 2 of the PC
you are using as an hyperterminal monitor. It doesn’t matter which Com Port you connect to.
NOTE: Many newer PCs come with USB Ports. If user’s PC has a USB port
rather than COM ports you will need to purchase a available PC USB
to DB9 conversion cable commercially. These cables come with
software which loaded in a PC, allow the user to send keyboard
commands through the PC’s USB Port to the DB9 Console Port of the
Router-A card.

Router-A Card for

DXC5000

DB9 to PC's COM

Port or Laptop USB
Port
D0501ENa

FIGURE 3: HYPERTERMINAL MONITOR CONNECTION

3.1.2 Hyperterminal Monitor Serial Port Setup
Open your hyperterminal emulator program. Left-click your mouse on Setup. A drop-down
menu will appear. Left click your mouse on Serial port Setup.

A Serial port setup screen will appear as shown below.

RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 12/94 DXC 5000

Set Com Port to whichever Com Port you are connected to on your hyperterminal monitor.
Then select your other settings from Table 1 below.

Item Options Default

Baud 38400, 19200, 9600, 2400, 1200 9600
Data Bit 8, 7 bit per byte 8
Stop Bit 2, 1 bit 1
Parity Bit NONE, EVEN, ODD NONE

TABLE 1: HYPERTERMINAL MONITOR PARAMETERS DEFAULT SETTING

After selecting your settings left-click your mouse on OK. The setup screen will disapear.
To save your setup, left-click Save setup with your mouse, as shown in the screen bleow.

You can save the setup in any directory you choose. For the sake of convenience we saved
our setup in the HyperTerminal file on our desktop.
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 13/94

3.2 System Operation

Main menu is needed if the terminal connected to the controller. If the main menu cannot
display, the user have to set the terminal parameter to default value as Table3-1.
DXC5 000 === Co ntr olle r M enu === 1 3:5 2:2 8 03 /02 /20 06

Seri al Num ber : 53 942 Redu nda nt Cont rol ler : Di sab led
Hard war e V ersi on: Ve r.F Star t T ime : 13: 48: 26 0 3/0 2/2 006
Soft war e V ersi on: V5 .01. 01 02/ 24/2 006

[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]

C -> Sy ste m Co nfi gur atio n
B -> Cl ock sou rce Co nfig ura tio n
Q -> Al arm Que ue Sum mary
I -> In for mati on Sum mary

[LOG ] [MIS C]
U -> Ch oos e a Slo t
F -> Lo g O ff [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu
O -> Lo g O n [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Press ”O” to log on, the following screen will show up.
DXC5 000 === Co ntr olle r M enu === 1 3:5 2:2 8 03 /02 /20 06

Seri al Num ber : 53 942 Redu nda nt Cont rol ler : Di sab led
Hard war e V ersi on: Ve r.F Star t T ime : 13: 48: 26 0 3/0 2/2 006
Soft war e V ersi on: V5 .01. 01 02/ 24/2 006

[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]

C -> Sy ste m Co nfi gur atio n S -> Sy ste m Se tup
B -> Cl ock sou rce Co nfig ura tio n M -> Sy ste m Al arm Se tup
Q -> Al arm Que ue Sum mary W -> Fi rmw are Tra nsf er
I -> In for mati on Sum mary V -> St ore /Ret rie ve Conf igu rat ion
K -> Cl ock sou rce Se tup
T -> Bi t E rror Ra te Test

[LOG ] [MIS C]
U -> Ch oos e a Slo t A -> Al arm Cut Of f
F -> Lo g O ff [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu X -> Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
O -> Lo g O n [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu Y -> Co ntr olle r R etu rn t o D efa ult
Z -> Co ntr olle r R ese t

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 14/94 DXC 5000

Under the Controller Menu, press “U” to select a slot for the Router-A port. Then the port
menu will show as below. In the example, the Router-A Card is installed in slot-A.
DXC5 000 === Co ntr olle r M enu === 1 3:5 2:2 8 03 /02 /20 06

Seri al Num ber : 53 942 Redu nda nt Cont rol ler : Di sab led
Hard war e V ersi on: Ve r.F Star t T ime : 13: 48: 26 0 3/0 2/2 006
Soft war e V ersi on: V5 .01. 01 02/ 24/2 006

[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]

C -> Sy ste m Co nfi gur atio n S -> Sy ste m Se tup
B -> Cl ock sou rce Co nfig ura tio n M -> Sy ste m Al arm Se tup
Q -> Al arm Que ue Sum mary W -> Fi rmw are Tra nsf er
I -> In for mati on Sum mary V -> St ore /Ret rie ve Conf igu rat ion
K -> Cl ock sou rce Se tup
T -> Bi t E rror Ra te Test

[LOG ] [MIS C]
U -> Ch oos e a Slo t A -> Al arm Cut Of f
F -> Lo g O ff [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu X -> Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
O -> Lo g O n [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu Y -> Co ntr olle r R etu rn t o D efa ult
Z -> Co ntr olle r R ese t

==>> In put the un it numb er (A~ D or 1~ 12) : A

Then the port menu will show as below.

SLOT A Ro uter -A === Por t M enu === 1 4:07 :03 03 /02/ 200 6

Vers ion : SW V1 .01. 01

[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]

H -> Un it Alar m H ist ory L -> Co mma nd L ine
M -> Un it Alar m S etu p
X -> Cl ear Uni t A lar m Hi sto ry
D -> Un it Firm war e & Con fig Tr ansf er

[LOG ] [MIS C]
U -> Ch oos e Ot her Sl ot Y -> Un it Load De fau lt A lar m C onfi g
F -> Lo g O ff [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu
O -> Lo g O n [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu
E -> Re tur n to Co ntr olle r M ain Men u

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Under the Port Menu, press “L” to select the command line interface. A blank screen with a
flashing cursor will appear. Key in the command “exit” to return to port menu. See section 4
for further details.

Welc ome !!
Pres s ' ?' to g et hel p!

[A]a dmi n>

RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 15/94

3.3 WAN Timeslot Map Setup

There are two steps for Router-A Card to setup WAN port’s timeslot assignment.
1. Set crossconnect on DXC5000 controller. The Router-A supports up to 4 Mbps TDM
bus, and it is separated into two 2-Mbps ports (port 1 and port 2).
2. CLI commands Instruct the Router-A timeslot assignment for WAN ports.
Following screen examples show the crossconnect setup on DXC5000 controller.
DXC5 000 === Sys tem Set up (MA P) = == 1 4:2 8:0 9 03 /02 /20 06
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B: ROLL OP TIO NS
MAP NO: MA P_1
Tar get RT R-A S our ce Qua d-E1 UN FRA ME
Targ et PO /TS D SL/P O T S P O/TS D SL/ PO T S PO/ TS D SL /PO TS PO/ TS D SL /PO TS
Slot : A == === == ==== === = = ==== == === ==== = === == = === === === === == ==== === ===
Port : P1 1 1 d 6 1 0 1 17 d 6 1 16 1 0 d A 1 1 1 16 d A 1 17
T.S. : 01 1 2 d 6 1 1 1 18 d 6 1 17 1 1 d A 1 2 1 17 d A 1 18
1 3 d 6 1 2 1 19 d 6 1 18 1 2 d A 1 3 1 18 d A 1 19
1 4 d 6 1 3 1 20 d 6 1 19 1 3 d A 1 4 1 19 d A 1 20
T.S. # : 32 1 5 d 6 1 4 1 21 d 6 1 20 1 4 d A 1 5 1 20 d A 1 21
Clea r : No 1 6 d 6 1 5 1 22 d 6 1 21 1 5 d A 1 6 1 21 d A 1 22
d/v : d 1 7 d 6 1 6 1 23 d 6 1 22 1 6 d A 1 7 1 22 d A 1 23
1 8 d 6 1 7 1 24 d 6 1 23 1 7 d A 1 8 1 23 d A 1 24
1 9 d 6 1 8 1 25 d 6 1 24 1 8 d A 1 9 1 24 d A 1 25
Sour ce 1 10 d 6 1 9 1 26 d 6 1 25 1 9 d A 1 10 1 25 d A 1 26
Slot : 6 1 11 d 6 1 10 1 27 d 6 1 26 1 10 d A 1 11 1 26 d A 1 27
Port : P1 1 12 d 6 1 11 1 28 d 6 1 27 1 11 d A 1 12 1 27 d A 1 28
T.S. : 1 13 d 6 1 12 1 29 d 6 1 28 1 12 d A 1 13 1 28 d A 1 29
1 14 d 6 1 13 1 30 d 6 1 29 1 13 d A 1 1 4 1 29 d A 1 30
Conf irm ?Ye s 1 15 d 6 1 14 1 31 d 6 1 30 1 14 d A 1 15 1 30 d A 1 31
1 16 d 6 1 15 1 32 d 6 1 31 1 15 d A 1 1 6 1 31 d A 1 32

<< P res s E SC t o r etu rn t o C ont roll er Set up m enu , t hen Pre ss D to ac tiv e >>

NOTE : Router-A Card and QEI do the MAP setting in Port 1.

DXC5 000 === Sys tem Set up (MA P) = == 1 4:3 0:5 2 03 /02 /20 06
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B: ROLL OP TIO NS
MAP NO: MA P_1
Ta rge t R TR- A Sou rce Qu ad-E 1 U NFR AME
Targ et PO /TS D SL/P O T S P O/TS D SL/ PO T S PO/ TS D SL /PO TS PO/ TS D SL /PO TS
Slot : A == === == ==== === = = ==== == === ==== = === == = === === === === == ==== === ===
Port : P2 2 1 d 6 2 0 2 17 d 6 2 16 2 0 d A 2 1 2 16 d A 2 17
T.S. : 01 2 2 d 6 2 1 2 18 d 6 2 17 2 1 d A 2 2 2 17 d A 2 18
2 3 d 6 2 2 2 19 d 6 2 18 2 2 d A 2 3 2 18 d A 2 19
2 4 d 6 2 3 2 20 d 6 2 19 2 3 d A 2 4 2 19 d A 2 20
T.S. # : 32 2 5 d 6 2 4 2 21 d 6 2 20 2 4 d A 2 5 2 20 d A 2 21
Clea r : No 2 6 d 6 2 5 2 22 d 6 2 21 2 5 d A 2 6 2 21 d A 2 22
d/v : d 2 7 d 6 2 6 2 23 d 6 2 22 2 6 d A 2 7 2 22 d A 2 23
2 8 d 6 2 7 2 24 d 6 2 23 2 7 d A 2 8 2 23 d A 2 24
2 9 d 6 2 8 2 25 d 6 2 24 2 8 d A 2 9 2 24 d A 2 25
Sour ce 2 10 d 6 2 9 2 26 d 6 2 25 2 9 d A 2 10 2 25 d A 2 26
Slot : 6 2 11 d 6 2 10 2 27 d 6 2 26 2 10 d A 2 11 2 26 d A 2 27
Port : P2 2 12 d 6 2 11 2 28 d 6 2 27 2 11 d A 2 12 2 27 d A 2 28
T.S. : 2 13 d 6 2 12 2 29 d 6 2 28 2 12 d A 2 13 2 28 d A 2 29
2 14 d 6 2 13 2 30 d 6 2 29 2 13 d A 2 14 2 29 d A 2 30
Conf irm ?Ye s 2 15 d 6 2 14 2 31 d 6 2 30 2 14 d A 2 15 2 30 d A 2 31
2 16 d 6 2 15 2 32 d 6 2 31 2 15 d A 2 16 2 31 d A 2 32

<< P res s E SC t o r etu rn t o C ont roll er Set up m enu , t hen Pre ss D to ac tiv e >>

NOTE: Router-A Card and QE1 do the MAP setting in Port 2.

After the user setup the DXC5000 main board, please go to the Port Menu to select Router-
A Card in order for the user to do card setting. For details, please refer to section 3.2.
A blank screen with a flashing cursor will appear. Key in the command interface WAN1
timeslot set 1-32.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN1 t ime slot s et 1-3 2
Comm and su ccee ded
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 16/94 DXC 5000

3.4 Configuration
All commands take effect imediately except for the following feature: activate routing,
firmware upgrade, comfiguration download. Those feature take effect after the unit is
powered down and then powered up again.
3.5 LED Operation
The front panel of the Router-A has two LEDs for each LAN port They are for: Ethernet
Link/Active, and Ethernet speed. LED Indications are listed in Table 3-2, below.

LED Color Indication

Off No Ethernet connection or Link fail
LINK/ ACT Green Link
LAN Flashing Green Active
Off 10Mbps
10/100
Green 100Mbps

TABLE 2: FRONT PANEL LED INDICATION

RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 17/94

4. ROUTER-A CARD SETUP

4.1 Configuration -Save and Reset
4.1.1 Save the configuration
The Router-A card stores all configuration changes in volatile RAM. After the device reboots,
all the changes will be gone. In order to save this configuration, key in the admin comand
system configuration save and then press the Enter key. The startup configuration is
stored in text mode.
NOTE: The storage saving space is about 895K
4.1.2 Resetting the Configuraton
To restore factory settings in the future use the command system configuration reset. The
command resets the configuration to the factory default setting and then reboots the card.
4.2 WAN Interface Setup
Router-A card supports mutiple WAN interfaces. Before configuring each WAN interface, it
needs to setup the timeslot map in advance.
Key in the command interface WANXX timeslot set to assgin timeslots to WAN interface
WAN1. The following example assigns 32 timeslots to interface WAN1 from timeslot 1 to
timeslot 32 and 32 timeslots (33-64) to interface WAN2.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN1 t ime slot s et 1-3 2
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN2 t ime slot s et 33- 64

Comm and su ccee ded

The following example shows how to configure the encapsulation PPP on interface WAN1
and WAN2.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN1 t ime slot s et 1-3 2
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN2 t ime slot s et 33- 64

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN1 e nca psul ati on ppp
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN2 e nca psul ati on ppp
Comm and su ccee ded

NOTE: Make sure to follow the above setup step, otherwise the internet
cannot work properly
The above settings are the basic settings for a valid WAN interface.
An interface can be in either router mode or bridge mode, the following sections show how to
set the interface to router mode and bridge mode.
4.2.1 Interfaces in bridge mode
To set any interfaces to bridge mode, a bridge group must be created. Please refer to
Chapter 11 for details. After creating the bridge group, for example br1, key in the admin
command bridge br1 add wanxx and press the enter key. Then the WANxx interface will be
in bridge mode and belong to the bridge group br1.
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 18/94 DXC 5000

4.2.2 Interfaces in router mode

To assign an IP address and subnet mask to the WAN interfaces, key in the admin
command interface wanXX ip followed by the IP address and subnet mask. In the following
screen below, interface wan1 is assigned an IP address 10.1.1.1 with subnet mask 255.0.0.0
and interface wan2 is assigned an IP address 20.1.1.1 with subnet mask 255.0.0.0. Please
refer to Chapter 16 for subnet mask determination.
NOTE: WAN interface could be in bridge mode as default. The user can key
in the admin command show interface wanxx configuration to
check current mode. To switch to router mode, key in the command
bridge xxx delete wanxx.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN1 t ime slot s et 1-3 2
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN2 t ime slot s et 33- 64

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN1 e nca psul ati on ppp
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN2 e nca psul ati on ppp
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN1 ip 1 0.1. 1.1 /8

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN2 ip 2 0.1. 1.1 /8

Comm and su ccee ded

The users may enable the RIP routing protocol to allow Router-A card automatically
exchange dynamical routing tables with other RIP-enabled routers. To enable RIP routing
protocol, key in the command interface wanXX route rip setup enable.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN1 t ime slot s et 1-3 2
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN2 t ime slot s et 33- 64

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN1 e nca psul ati on ppp
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN2 e nca psul ati on ppp
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN1 ip 1 0.1. 1.1 /8

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN2 ip 2 0.1. 1.1 /8

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN2 r out e r ip se tup en abl e

Comm and su ccee ded
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 19/94

Router-A card supports both RIP version 1 and RIP version 2. The default version is version
2 in Router-A card. To change the RIP version, key in the command interface wan2 route
rip version.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN1 t ime slot s et 1-3 2
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN2 t ime slot s et 33- 64

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN1 e nca psul ati on ppp
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN2 e nca psul ati on ppp
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN1 ip 1 0.1. 1.1 /8

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN2 ip 2 0.1. 1.1 /8

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN2 r out e r ip se tup en abl e

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e WAN2 r out e r ip ve rsio n 2

Comm and su ccee ded

4.3 LAN interface Setup

An interface can be either in router mode or bridge mode, the following sections shows how
to set the interface to router mode and bridge mode.
4.3.1 Interfaces in bridge mode
To set any interfaces to bridge mode, a bridge group must be created. Please refer to
Chapter 11 for details. After creating the bridge group, for example br1, key in the admin
command bridge br1 add lanxx and press the enter key. Then the LANxx interface will be
in bridge mode and belong to the bridge group br1.
4.3.2 Interfaces in router mode
To assign an IP address and subnet mask to the LAN interfaces, key in the admin command
interface lanxx ip followed by the IP address and subnet mask. In the following screen
below interface lan1 is assigned with IP address 192.168.1.254 with subnetmask
255.255.255.0. Please refer to Chapter 16 for subnet mask determination.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e lan1 i p 1 92.1 68. 1.2 54/2 4
Comm and su ccee ded

The users may enable the RIP routing protocol to allow Router-A card automatically
exchange dynamical routing tables with other RIP-enabled routers. To enable RIP routing
protocol, key in the command interface lanXX route rip setup enable.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e lan1 i p 1 92.1 68. 1.2 54/2 4
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e lan1 r out e r ip se tup en abl e

Comm and su ccee ded

Router-A card supports both RIP version 1 and RIP version 2. The default version in Router-
A card is version 2. To change the RIP version, key in the command interface lan1 route
rip version.
[A]a dmi n >int erf ace la n1 ip 192 .16 8.1 .254 /24
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e lan1 r out e r ip se tup en abl e

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e lan1 r out e r ip v ersi on 2

Comm and su ccee ded
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 20/94 DXC 5000

5. DHCP SETUP
5.1 DHCP Server overview
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) can be used to automatically assign IP
addresses, to deliver TCP/IP stack configuration parameters (ie. subnet mask and default
router), and to provide other configuration information. Figure 5-1, below, illustrates the
Router-A card set up in a DHCP server application. All hosts (shown on the right hand side
of the network diagram) can get IP addresses from the Router-A card when its DHCP Server
is enabled.

Router-A Card for

DXC5000

WAN1 LAN1 Host (DHCPClient)

IP Network

Network Address : 192.168.1.0

Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0

Host (DHCPClient)

..........
D0502ENa

FIGURE 4: DHCP APPLICATION

5.2 DHCP Server Setup
Use the command dhcp server subnet add to create a subnet which contains all necessary
information needed by DHCP clients. In the following example screen the subnet areva had
been created.
[A]admin>dhcp server subnet add areva
Comm and su ccee ded

Once a subnet is created, we set network address. When the DHCP server allocate an IP
address for a client, the server will also send the client proper network address. The network
address is 192.168.1.0/24.
[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et add a rev a
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et ar eva n etwo rk 19 2.16 8.1 .0/ 24
Comm and su ccee ded

An IP address range from 192.168.1.5 to 192.168.1.20 is for the subnet by key in command
dhcp server subnet areva ip_range.
[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et add a rev a
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et ar eva n etwo rk 19 2.16 8.1 .0/ 24
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et ar eva ip_r ang e 192. 168 .1. 5 19 2.1 68. 1.20
Comm and su ccee ded
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 21/94

The command dhcp server subnet domain_name works set works for domain name.
[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et add a rev a
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et ar eva n etwo rk 19 2.16 8.1 .0/ 24
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et ar eva ip_r ang e 192. 168 .1. 5 19 2.1 68. 1.20
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et ar eva d omai n_n ame wo rks
Comm and su ccee ded

A DNS server 192.168.1.2 is set by command dhcp server subnet areva dns_server add.
[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et add a rev a
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et ar eva n etwo rk 19 2.16 8.1 .0/ 24
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et ar eva ip_r ang e 192. 168 .1. 5 19 2.1 68. 1.20
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et ar eva d omai n_n ame wo rks
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et ar eva d ns_s erv er add 19 2.1 68.1 .2
Comm and su ccee ded

To use command dhcp server interface add to add all LAN interfaces which offer DHCP
service. As following example, only the LAN1 is enabled for the service.
[A] adm in> dhcp s erv er sub net ad d are va
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et ar eva n etwo rk 19 2.16 8.1 .0/ 24
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et ar eva ip_r ang e 192. 168 .1. 5 19 2.1 68. 1.20
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et ar eva d omai n_n ame wo rks
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et ar eva d ns_s erv er add 19 2.1 68.1 .2
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r i nte rfa ce add l an1

Comm and su ccee ded

The command dhcp server enablesthe DHCP service.

RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 22/94 DXC 5000

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et add a rev a

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et ar eva n etwo rk 19 2.16 8.1 .0/ 24
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et ar eva ip_r ang e 192. 168 .1. 5 19 2.1 68. 1.20
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et ar eva d omai n_n ame wo rks
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s ubn et ar eva d ns_s erv er add 19 2.1 68.1 .2
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r i nte rfa ce add l an1

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp se rve r s etu p enab le

...s tar ted , ch eck st atus
Comm and su ccee ded

When the DHCP server is running, the hosts on network connected to LAN1 can use the
DHCP to obtain IP addresses.
5.3 DHCP Relay Overview
Deploying DHCP in a single subnet network is straightforward. DHCP messages are IP
broadcast messages, and all computers on the subnet can listen to and respond to these
broadcasts. A single DHCP server is all that is required.
It is complicated when there is more than one subnet on your network. This is because the
DHCP broadcast messages do not (by default) cross the router interfaces. The DHCP relay
agent allows you to place DHCP clients and DHCP servers on different subnets of your
network or even to put them on different networks.

Router-A card for

DXC5000

WAN1 CC 1
1 1 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
LAN1
IP Network PP Host (DHCP Client)
UU

12

DHCP Server DHCP Relay Server

10.3.2.10

Host (DHCP Client)

..........

D0503ENa

FIGURE 5: DHCP RELAY SETUP

5.4 DHCP Relay Setup
Following example illustrate how to enable a DHCP relay service in the Router-A card.
[A]a dmi n>d hcp re lay in ter fac e a dd la n1
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp re lay se rve r 10.3 .2. 10

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>d hcp re lay s etu p enab le

...s tar ted , ch eck st atus
Comm and su ccee ded
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 23/94

6. FRAME RELAY SETUP

6.1 Overview
Each Router-A WAN port can support multiple Frame Relay PVCs up to 16. The maximum
number of PVCs in a Router-A card is 64. Figure 6-1, below, illustrates a Frame Relay setup.
The dashed lines in the diagram represent Frame Relay PVCs.
NOTE: Router-A cards only support user site protocol and cannot
communicate directly with each other. They must be connected to a
Frame Relay network that includes devices that run on FR network
protocol. The DXC5000 Frame Relay card can be used as such a
device.

User
Frame
Relay
Network

Router-A card for

DXC5000
The DXC5000 Frame
Relay card can be used as
a Frame Relay network
device.
D0504ENa

FIGURE 6: FRAME RELAY APPLICATION

6.2 Step by Step Setup Instructions
Set the WAN port to run Frame Relay.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 en cap sula tio n f rame _re lay
Comm and su ccee ded

Set Frame Relay polling protocol as Q.933 Annex A and its parameters n391, n392, n393,
and t391. Please note that these parameters must match the parameters on the network
side.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 en cap sula tio n f rame _re lay
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 fr ame _rel ay q9 33 n39 1 1 0 n3 92 4 n 393 5 t 391 20
Comm and su ccee ded

Then create a PVC and set its bandwidth parameters.

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 en cap sula tio n f rame _re lay
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 fr ame _rel ay q9 33 n39 1 1 0 n3 92 4 n 393 5 t 391 20
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 pv c add pv c1 17 512 51 2 64 12 0

Comm and su ccee ded

NOTE: In the above screen the first 512 is the value for the CIR (Committed
Information Rate) of PVC1. The total sum of the CIR values for all
PVCs must not exceed the total physical bandwidth of the WAN port.
Physical bandwidth can be calculated by using the formula.
Physical bandwidth= n (# of timeslots mapped) x 64k.
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 24/94 DXC 5000

If you are not sure how many timeslots you used in your WAN port mapping, you can check
by using the command show timeslot.
Assign an IP address for the PVC.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 en cap sula tio n f rame _re lay
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 fr ame _rel ay q9 33 n39 1 1 0 n3 92 4 n 393 5 t 391 20
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 pv c add pv c1 17 512 51 2 64 12 0

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 pv c1 ip 10 0.2 .254 .25 4/1 6
Comm and su ccee ded

A PVC can also run a dynamic routing protocol. In following example, RIP II is enabled
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 en cap sula tio n f rame _re lay
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 fr ame _rel ay q9 33 n39 1 1 0 n3 92 4 n 393 5 t 391 20
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 pv c add pv c1 17 512 51 2 64 12 0

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 pv c1 ip 10 0.2 .254 .25 4/1 6
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 pv c1 rout e rip se tup en able
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 pv c1 rout e rip v ers ion 2
Comm and su ccee ded

This setup procedure is now complete.

RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 25/94

7. IP ROUTING SETUP
7.1 Overview
Figure 7-1 below illustrates the Router-A card being used in router mode. The IP address
and gateway address used in the diagram correspond to the sample step by step
configuration instructions in Section 7.2.

Peer Router
IP 100.2.254.253
E1
(PPP or HDLC)

IP Network WAN 1 LAN 1

IP: 100 .2.254 .254 IP: 192.168 .1.1
MASK: 255.255.0.0 MASK: 255.255.255.0 Local Network
with IP Address

IP: 160.2.254.253 1 2 3
4
5 6 7 8 9 1
0
1
1
1
2

Gateway: 255.255.0.0 C C
P P
U U

1 2

Router-A card for

DXC5000
IP Router
Network Address
100.3.0.0
255.255.0.0
D0505ENa

FIGURE 7: IP ROUTING SETUP

7.2 Step by Step Setup Instructions
Set IP addresses for LAN1 and WAN1.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e l an1 ip 19 2.16 8.1 .1/ 24
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 ip 10 0.2. 254 .25 4/16
Comm and su ccee ded

In example, we disable routing protocol. If the RIP 1 or RIP 2 protocol are used, the setup
procedure is complete. If RIP protocol is not supported by the peer router, the user must
use static routing.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e l an1 ip 19 2.16 8.1 .1/ 24
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 ip 10 0.2. 254 .25 4/16
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 ro ute ri p set up d isa ble
Comm and su ccee ded

Set a static route for network 100.3.0.0.

NOTE: - The user are able to specify a default route by setting the network
address and subnet mask as 0 (eg. route static add 0.0.0.0/0.
100.2.254.253 WAN1).
- max static route number: 64
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e l an1 ip 19 2.16 8.1 .1/ 24
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 ip 10 0.2. 254 .25 4/16
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 ro ute ri p set up d isa ble
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>r oute s tat ic add 1 00.3 .0. 0/1 6 10 0.2 .25 4.25 3 W AN1
Comm and su ccee ded

This setup procedure is now complete.

RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 26/94 DXC 5000

8. OSPF SETUP
8.1 Overview
Figure 8-1 below illustrates the Router-A card being used in router mode. The IP address
and gateway address used in the diagram correspond to the sample step by step
configuration instructions in Section 8.2.

Peer Router
IP 100.2.254.253
E1
(PPP or HDLC)

IP Network WAN 1 LAN 1

IP: 100 .2.254 .254 IP: 192.168 .1.1
MASK: 255.255.0.0 MASK: 255.255.255.0 Local Network
with IP Address

IP: 160.2.254.253 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
0
1
1
1
2

Gateway: 255.255.0.0 C C
P P
U U

1 2

Router-A card
IP Router
Network Address
100.3.0.0
255.255.0.0
D0506ENa

FIGURE 8: ROUTER SETUP (OSPF)

Open Shortest Path First Protocol (OSPFv2)
OSPF is an interior gateway protocol used for routing between routers belonging to a single
Autonomous System. OSPF uses link-state technology in which routers send each other
information about the direct connections and links which they have to other routers. Each
OSPF router maintains an identical database describing the Autonomous System's topology.
From this database, a routing table is calculated by constructing a shortest- path tree. OSPF
recalculates routes quickly in the face of topological changes, utilizing a minimum of routing
protocol traffic. OSPF provides support for equal-cost multi-path. An area routing capability is
provided, enabling an additional level of routing protection and a reduction in routing protocol
traffic. In addition, all OSPF routing protocol exchanges are authenticated.
OSPF has been designed expressly for the TCP/IP internet environment, including explicit
support for CIDR and the tagging of externally-derived routing information. OSPF also
provides for the authentication of routing updates, and utilizes IP multicast when
sending/receiving the updates.
OSPF routes IP packets based solely on the destination IP address found in the IP packet
header. IP packets are routed "as is" - they are not encapsulated in any further protocol
headers as they transit the Autonomous System.
OSPF allows sets of networks to be grouped together. Such a grouping is called an area.
The topology of an area is hidden from the rest of the Autonomous System. This information
hiding enables a significant reduction in routing traffic. Also, routing within the area is
determined only by the area's own topology, lending the area protection from bad routing
data.
OSPF enables the flexible configuration of IP subnets. Each route distributed by OSPF has a
destination and mask. Two different subnets of the same IP network number may have
different sizes (i.e., different masks). This is commonly referred to as variable length
subnetting. A packet is routed to the best (i.e., longest or most specific) match.
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 27/94

8.2 Step by Step Setup Instructions

Set IP addresses for LAN1 and WAN1.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e l an1 ip 19 2.16 8.1 .1/ 24
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 ip 10 0.2. 254 .25 4/16
Comm and su ccee ded

Key in the admin command route ospf area add 1 to create an area with ID 1.
admi n>r out e os pf are a ad d 1

Comm and su ccee ded

Set up the WAN1 interface. Key in the admin command interface wan1 route ospf setup
enable 1 to add WAN1 into area 1. Then press the Enter key.
admi n>i nte rfac e w an1 rou te osp f se tup en able 1

comm and su ccee ded

Save the configuration. Key in the command system configuration save. Then press the
Enter key.
admi n>s yst em c onf igu rati on sav e

comm and su ccee ded

This setup procedure is now complete.

RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 28/94 DXC 5000

9. NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION SERVICE

9.1 Overview
The Router-A card Network Address Translation (NAT) service allows IP clients on your local
network to access the Internet without requiring you to assign globally unique IP addresses
to each system. This feature is used when the user's network only needs to have a few
addresses available to access the Internet. In addition, NAT acts as a filter, allowing only
certain outbound connections and guaranteeing that inbound connections cannot be initiated
from the public network.
This chapter will describe how to setup NAT service to allow clients on your private network
to access a public network, such as the Internet.
In Chapter 10 will describe how to setup port fordwarding (virtual service) to allow clients on
the public network to access selected resources on your private network.
Figure 8-1 below illustrates the Router-A card being used to provide Network Address
Translation services. The IP addresses and gateway addresses used in the diagram
correspond to the sample step by step configuration instructions in Section 8.2.

Peer Router
IP 100.2.254.253
E1
(PPP or HDLC)

IP Network WAN 1 with Public IP Address LAN 1 with Private IP Address

IP: 100 .2.254 .254 IP: 192.168 .1.1
MASK: 255 .255.0.0 MASK: 255.255.255.0 Local Network
with IP Address
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1
4 0 1 2
IP: 160 .2.256 .253 CC
PP
MASK: 255.255.0.0 UU

12

Router-A interface
Card for DXC5000
IP Router
Network Address
100.3.0.0
255.255.0.0
D0507ENa

FIGURE 9: SETTING UP IP ROUTING WITH NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION

9.2 Step by Step Setup Instructions
Network address translation service is only available on WAN or PVC interfaces which is in
router mode. To implement network address translationservice on Router-A card, the
relevant WAN or PVC interface must setup properly in advance. Please refer to Section 4.3
for WAN interface setup and Chapter 6 for PVC interface setup.
NOTE: Key in the command show interface XXX config and then press the
Enter key to check. If the interface is in bridge mode, please follow the
step decribed in section 4.3 and section 4.4 to switch the required
interface to router mode.
To enable the service, key in the admin command interface XXX napt setup enable.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 nap t s etup en abl e
Comm and su ccee ded

When network translation service is enabled, all routing protocols (including RIP 1 and
RIP 2) are automatically disabled. The user add static routes to connect the Internet, refer to
Chapter 7 for detail descriptions.
This setup procedure is now complete.
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 29/94

10. TRAFFIC FILTERING SETUP

10.1 Overview
The Router-A card provides basic traffic filtering capabilities, such as access control lists
(ACL). Traffic filtering is the process of deciding the disposition of each packet that can
possibly pass through a router with the access control lists. With this feature, Router-A card
provides the basic protection mechanism for a routing firewall host, allowing the user to
determine what traffic passes through it based upon the contents of the packet, thereby
potentially limiting access to each of the networks controlled by the lists.
The access control lists are a group of entries. Each entry defines a pattern that would be
found in an IP packet and associates an action with the packets. As each packet comes
through an interface with an associated access list, the list is scanned from top to bottom for
a pattern that matches the incoming packet. A permit or deny rule associated with the
pattern determines that packet's disposition. The user can also use a mask, which is like a
wild card, to determine how much of an IP source or destination address to apply to the
pattern match. The pattern statement also include a TCP or UDP destination port number.
Also, keep in mind that once you associate the list with an interface, any packet not matched
by the list is dropped by default.
10.2 ACL entry and selector format
Every entry in an ACL consists of a one-line statement. The statement has the following
format.

Pattern Definition
Action Source Destination Protocol Destination
IP address/ prefix IP address/ prefix port number

permit / deny xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/nn xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/nn TCP/UDP/ICMP or min[-max]

or any or any any

1 2 3 4 5

TABLE 3: ENTRY FORMAT

Required Optional

1. Each statement is started with the action field. Specify permit or deny here. This will
decide the disposition of the packet matching the pattern definition.
2. Every statement in the list must have a source address. With prefix, you can indicate a
host or a network to match. Key in any if you do not want to filter the source address.
3. Every statement in the list must have a destination address. With prefix, you can
indicate a host or a network to match. Key in any if you do not want to filter the
destination address.
If you are only filtering on IP addresses, the following fields can be disregarded.
1. If you are trying to filter TCP, UDP or ICMP packets, specify the protocol filed with the
name of protocol.
2. If you are also filtering on UDP or TCP port, you must specify TCP or UDP in the
protocol field and port range in this field.
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 30/94 DXC 5000

10.3 Adding ACL entries

Before adding any ACL entry, an ACL list must be created first. Key in the command policy
acl create followed by the name you WANt to gice. Then press the Enter key. In the
following example, the list name “list1” is given.
[A]a dmi n>p olic y a cl crea te lis t1
Comm and su ccee ded

After creating the control list, ACL entris are able to be appended.
A screen with a flashing cursor will appear. Key in the command policy acl list-1 append
followed by the packet source IP address plus its subnet mask prefix length, the packet
destination IP address (ie. your HTTP server) plus its subnet mask prefix length, and finally
the number of the port where the packet will be received. Press the Enter key.
In our sample screen below we keyed in any as the source address, 192.168.1.11/32 as
the destination HTTP IP address, 32 as the destinatrion address subnet mask prefix length,
and 80 as the port number.
[A]a dmi n>p olic y a cl cre ate li st1
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>p olic y a cl list 1 app end per mit "an y 1 92. 168. 1.1 1/3 2 tc p 8 0"
Comm and su ccee ded

10.4 Step by Step Setup Instructions

In section 9.2, an example is given to illustrates how to filter out unwanted traffic and permit
certain traffic in this situation. The IP addresses and gateway addresses used in the Figure
9-1 correspond to the sample step by step configuration instructions in Section 12.2.

Peer Router
IP 100.2.254.253
E1 Company
(PPP or HDLC) Head Office
WAN 1 LAN 1
Customer IP Network IP Address IP Address
IP: 100.2.254.254 IP: 192.168.1.1
IP: 140.1.x.x
MASK: 255.255.0.0 MASK: 255.255.255.0
MASK: 255.255.0.0 HTTP Server
IP: 192.168.11

IP Router
IP: 160.2.254.253
Gateway : 255.255.0.0 FTP Server
Remote User Router-A Card for IP: 192.168.22
I P: 140.100.5.5 DXC5000
Company Branch
Network Address
100.3.0.0
255.255.0.0 TELNET Server
IP: 192.168.33
D0508ENa

FIGURE 10: TRAFFIC FILTERING EXAMPLE NETWORK

Before configuring the access control lists, you need to setup relevent interfaces in router
mode. Please refer to section 4.2 and section 4.3 for setting up LAN/WAN interfaces.
In Figure 10-1, three servers are located in the local network. Their IP addresses are as
follows:
HTTP Server: 192.168.11
FTP Server: 192.168.22
TELNET Server: 192.168.33
NOTE: This is a sample setup only. Your setup will have IP addresses
relevant to your own situation.
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 31/94

Our goal in this example is to protect your local network behind the LAN1 interface but still
privide some traffic to access certain servers in the local network. More specifically, the
following statements are given to illustrates our security requirement.
1. The HTTP server is accessible by all PCs (also known as hosts) in the network, no
matter from internet or local network.
2. TELNET Server access (IP: 192.168.100.33) is available only to the designated
Remote User (IP: 140.100.5.5 ). No other devices, including those at thecompany
head office (Network: 192.168.1.0) or branch office (Network: 100.3.0.0), can reach
that server.
3. IP: 100.3.0.0 is the network for company branch office, so all traffic from that site is
permitted to access PCs in company head office (Network: 192.168.1.0) except the
TELNET server, which is only available to designated Remote User (IP: 140.100.5.5 ),
as desbribed above.
4. Because TFTP Server Access is provided only for the custmer site (Network:
140.1.0.0) and the company branch office(Network: 100.3.0.0), the Router-A card
shall permit TFTP packets from those sites.
Before adding any ACL entry, an ACL list must be created first. Key in the command policy
acl create followed by the name you WANt to give. Then press the Enter key. In the
following example, the list name “list1” is given.
[A]a dmi n>p olic y acl cr eat e l ist1
Comm and su ccee ded

After creating the control list, ACL entries are able to be appended. Before adding ACL
entries, please refer to section 9.2 for detail descriptions about selector. Press the Enter key.
In the example entry shows below, any TCP packets with port number 80 is permitted to
access the HTTP server, i.e. the HTTP session to HTTP server is allowed.
[A]a dmi n>p olic y acl lis t1 ap pend pe rmi t "a ny 192 .168 .10 0.1 1/32 tc p 8 0"
Comm and su ccee ded

In the example entry shows below, packets with source IP address 140.100.5.5, destination
IP address 192.168.1.1, TCP port number 23 is permitted, i.e. the TELNET session requests
from 140.100.5.5 to 192.168.1.11 are allowed.
[A]a dmi n>p olic y acl lis t1 ap pend pe rmi t "1 40. 100 .5.5 /32 19 2.16 8.1 .11 /32 tcp
23"
Comm and su ccee ded

In the following example, one more entry is appended to the access control list list1. That
entry denies all TCP packets with port number 23, i.e. the TELNET session is prohibitted to
any location on the company network.
Combining the last two entrise, this access list accepts only the TELNET session from
140.100.5.5 to 192.168.1.11 and drops all other TELNET session currently, which meets the
2nd security request.
[A]a dmi n>p olic y acl lis t1 ap pend de ny "any an y t cp 2 3"
Comm and su ccee ded

Key in the command policy ac1 list1 append followed by the permit action, the selector
specified the packet source IP address and binary code subnet mask with the branch office
network to meet the 3rd security request.
The entries are scanned from top to bottom when packets passing through the Router-A
card.
The following command will allow any packets from a branch office to pass through to head
office. However, TELNET sessions are prohibited because the command above is
appended.
[A]a dmi n>p olic y acl lis t1 ap pend pe rmi t "1 00. 3.0 .0/1 6 a ny"
Comm and su ccee ded
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 32/94 DXC 5000

In the following example, one more entry is appended to the access control list list1.That
entry allows UDP packets with source address 140.1.0.0/16, destination address
192.168.1.22/32 and port number 69, i.e. the TFTP sessions from custmer site are allowed
to access the company branch office.
[A]a dmi n>p olic y acl lis t1 ap pend pe rmi t "1 40. 1.0 .0/1 6 1 92. 168. 1.2 2/3 2 ud p 6 9
Comm and su ccee ded

The final command, shown below, can be omitted. If a packet cannot match any rules, the
packet will be dropped.
[A]a dmi n>p olic y acl lis t1 ap pend de ny "any an y a ny"
Comm and su ccee ded

In case of checking the rule entries in the control list, the user can key in the command show
policy acl XXX, where XXX shall be the name of access control list.
[A]a dmi n>p olic y acl cr eat e l ist1
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>p olic y acl lis t1 ap pend pe rmi t "a ny 192 .168 .10 0.1 1/32 tc p 8 0"
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>p olic y acl lis t1 ap pend pe rmi t "1 40. 100 .5.5 /32 19 2.16 8.1 .11 /32 tcp
23"
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>p olic y acl lis t1 ap pend de ny "any an y t cp 2 3"

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>p olic y acl lis t1 ap pend pe rmi t "1 00. 3.0 .0/1 6 a ny"
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>p olic y acl lis t1 ap pend pe rmi t "1 40. 1.0 .0/1 6 1 92. 168. 1.2 2/3 2 ud p 6 9
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>p olic y acl lis t1 ap pend de ny "any an y a ny"

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>s how pol icy li st1

No. Ac tio n So urce IP De sti nat ion IP P rot ocol Po rt
==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === =
( 1) p erm it an y 1 92. 168. 100 .11 /32 t cp 8 0~80
( 2) p erm it 1 40. 100. 5.5 /32 1 92. 168. 100 .11 /32 t cp 2 3~23
( 3) d eny an y an y t cp 2 3~23
( 4) p erm it 1 00. 3.0. 0/1 6 an y a ny
( 5) p erm it 1 40. 1.0. 0/1 6 1 92. 168. 100 .22 /32 u dp 6 9~69
( 6) d eny an y an y a ny

Comm and su ccee ded

The access list will be active when it is associated with a port or interface. The ACL can be
applied to incoming or outgoing packets on the interface.
Key in the command interface XXX policy acl YYY inbound/outbound, where XXX is the
interface name and YYY is the access list name.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 pol icy acl in bou nd l ist 1
Comm and su ccee ded
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 33/94

11. QOS SETUP

11.1 Overview
In packet networks, one important requirement for link sharing is to share bandwidth on a
link between multiple agencies, where each agency wants to receive a guaranteed share of
the link bandwidth during congestion. But where bandwidth that is not being used by one
agency should be available to other agencies sharing the link. Quality of Service (QOS) is
the idea that transmission rates, error rates can be measured, improved, and to some extent
guaranteed in advance. QOS enables you to provide better service to certain flows and
helps user to control the use of the outbound traffic on a given link. Our QOS is policy based
where the traffic type defines each policy. In DXC 5000, we have classified the outgoing
traffic (i.e. policy) by packet’s IP address, network protocol and/or TCP/UDP port number.
User can configure the committed bandwidth for a particular class of traffic by mentioning the
minimum and maximum bandwidth. Make sure total configured bandwidth of all such policy
must not exceed the link’s physical bandwidth.
NOTE: QOS is supported for WAN interface only and it supports maximum 32
WAN interfaces at a time.
11.2 Policy Syntax
11.2.1 Policy add
interface wan1~64 policy qos rate_limit append/insert [policy_num] selector
action_parameter

append/insert Instructs where to put the newly created policy entry. If append is
specified, the new entry is put at the tail of the policy list. If insert is
specified, the new entry is put before the policy number specified by
policy_num.
policy-num When the policy is inserted into the list, policy_num specifies insert
point of the new policy entry, for append user should not skip this
parameter.
selector Outgoing packet match criteria, the selector sets some matching
condition. If the packet going through the interface matches the
condition, then the packet will be applied an action according to the
parameters specified by action-parameter. Format of the selector is
as following:
src_ip dest_ip protocol [src_port] [dst_port]
src_ip The source network address that are interested by
the policy. The parameter will be matched with source
address field of IP packets.
dst_ip The interested destination network address. The
parameter will be matched with destination address
field of IP packets.
Protocol Interested protocol type carried by an IP packet. The
field can be a decimal value or a protocol name, like TCP
or UDP.
src_port If protocol is TCP or UDP, user can mention the
specific source port number carried by an IP packet. User
can specify a range of source port or ‘any’ if he/she is not
interested for a particular source port number.
dst_port Interested destination port number for an IP packet if
protocol is TCP or UDP. User can mention
destination port number in minimum-maximum
format for a range of port number or ‘any’ if he/she is
not interested for a particular destination port
number. Both source/destination port number is a
decimal value (1~65535)
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 34/94 DXC 5000

action_parameter action_parameter controls the outgoing traffic flow rate for IP packet
matched the policy criteria specified by selector.
Rate Committed access rate in minimum-maximum
format. The minimum rate is guaranteed the minimum rate of the
selected policy. When the maximum_rate is
mentioned in the action-parameter, the parameter is specified the
maximum rate of the selected policy. If
maximum_rate is not mentioned, it is used that maximum rate
is same as minimum rate.
Type Unit of rate in kbps or mbps, specify the unit of
bandwidth in bits per sec.

11.2.2 Policy delete

interface wan1~64 policy qos rate_limit delete [policy_num]
Instruct the policy to be deleted. Each policy is indexed by the policy number in the policy
list, user should mention the policy number which one to be removed.
11.2.3 Policy display
show interface wan1~64 policy qos
This CLI is used to display all policies user ever entered for a particular interface, shows all
policy in the policy list sequentially according to the policy number.
11.3 Step by Step Setup Instructions

10% Telnet

192.168.1.0/24 20% WWW

20% FTP
A(60 %)
50% other
WAN1 LAN1

15% Telnet
192.168.2.0/24 30% WWW
Router A card for DXC 5000
30% FTP
B(40%)
25% other

WAN1 LAN1
Local
network

Router A card for DXC 5000 D0509ENa

FIGURE 11: QOS APPLICATION

RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 35/94

Two subnetworks, A and B are accessed through the WAN1 interface of our ROUTER-A
card as depicted in the figure i.e. all traffics of these networks are passed through WAN1
interface. Again each of A and B have different types of traffic, say Telnet, WWW, FTP or so
on. Suppose Telnet of subnet A has high traffic rate and consume most of the bandwidth of
WAN1, other will be blocked, as WAN1 don’t have enough bandwidth compared to LAN1
and eventually some traffic from LAN1 will be dropped. To solve this problem, Policy rate
limit is installed on WAN1 to control bandwidth distribution. Suppose subnet A will have 60%
of the available WAN1 bandwidth guarnteed; subnetwork B the rest (40%). Within each
subnetwork the guarantee flows for each type of service are as is indicated in the figure.
Assume WAN1 has 1Mbps bandwidth, so telnet in subnet A will have 60 Kbps (10% of 60%
of 1Mbps) guaranteed bandwidth, while FTP will have 120 Kbps. Corresponding commands
for these Telnet and FTP for subnet A are as follows:

1. interface WAN1 policy qos rate_limit append 192.168.1.0/24 any TCP 23 any 60-60 kbps
2. interface WAN1 policy qos rate_limit append 192.168.1.0/24 any TCP 21 any 120 kbps

For other 2 class of traffic in subnet A, type following commands:

1. interface WAN1 policy qos rate_limit append 192.168.1.0/24 any any 80 any 120-120 kbps
(for www)
2. interface WAN1 policy qos rate_limit append 192.168.1.0/24 any any 300 kbps (for other)

Following are the commands to setup traffic distribution control for subnet B:

1. interface WAN1 policy qos rate_limit append 192.168.2.0/24 any TCP 23 any 60 kbps
(for telnet)
2. interface WAN1 policy qos rate_limit append 192.168.2.0/24 any TCP 21 any 120-120 kbps (for
ftp)
3. interface WAN1 policy qos rate_limit append 192.168.2.0/24 any any 80 120 kbps (for www)
4. interface WAN1 policy qos rate_limit append 192.168.2.0/24 any any 100-100 kbps (for other)
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 36/94 DXC 5000

12. PORT FORWARDING - VIRTUAL SERVICE

12.1 Overview
When NAPT is enabled, the user is able to set up a static port forwarding table in the Loop
Router-A card that instructs the Router-A card to forward specific service packets to
specified internal servers. Figure 10-1 below, illlustrates a HTTP and FTP server put into an
intranet by a Loop Router-A with a Port Forwarding Table. The Router-A card allows users
on the public network (left-hand side of the drawing) to access the HTTP and FTP Server on
the right-hand side of the drawing.

1 1 1
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9
4 0 1 2

WAN1 LAN1 HTTP & FTP Server

IP Network IP 192 .168 .1.25

Router-A Card for

DXC5000

D0510ENa

FIGURE 12: PORT FORWARDING - VIRTUAL SERVICE APPLICATION

12.2 Step by Step Setup Instructions
To enable port forwrding service, NAPT must be enabled in the WAN or PVC interface in
advance. Please refer to Chapter 7 for detail descriptions.
The user have to establish where http packets forwarded. Key in the command interface
WAN1 napt static add http followed by the port number and the http server ip address.
Then press the Enter key. In the sample screen below the packets are forwarded to port 80,
then key in the IP address 192.168.1.25 for http server.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 na pt set up ena ble
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 na pt st ati c add ht tp 80 1 92. 168 .1.2 5
Comm and su ccee ded

The user have to establish where ftp packets forwarded. Key in the command interface
WAN1 napt static add ftp followed by the port number and the ftp server ip address. Then
press the Enter key. In the sample screen below the packets are forwarded to port 21, then
key in the IP address 192.168.1.25 of our ftp server.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 na pt set up ena ble
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 na pt st ati c add ht tp 80 1 92. 168 .1.2 5
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 na pt st ati c add ft p 2 1 19 2.1 68. 1.25
Comm and su ccee ded
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 37/94

To view the results of setup, key in the command show interface WAN1 nat. The setup
configuration will be displayed as the screen below.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 na pt set up ena ble
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 na pt st ati c add ht tp 80 1 92. 168 .1.2 5
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 na pt st ati c add ft p 2 1 19 2.1 68. 1.25
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>s how in ter face WA N1 nat

WAN1 : n apt ena ble d

NAPT po rt forw ard ing ent rie s:

Nam e Sta rt Port En d Po rt S erv er IP

==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==
htt p 80 80 19 2.1 68. 1.25
ftp 21 21 19 2.1 68. 1.25

Comm and su ccee ded

RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 38/94 DXC 5000

13. REMOTE BRIDGE SETUP OVERVIEW

Figure 11-1 below illustrates the Router-A card being used in bridge mode. There are two
DXC5000s with Router-A cards in this application. Their setup procedures are identical. The
IP addresses and gateway addresses used in the diagram correspond to the sample step by
step configuration instructions in section 11.1.

SNMP

IP Network

E1 Router-A
IP address : 140.132.1.1
Mask: 255.255.0.0
WAN 1 LAN 1
Local Network 1
1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2

CC
PP
TDM UU

Network 1 2

DXC5000
Management IP: 140.132.254.254
Mask: 255.255.0.0

E1

WAN 1 LAN 1
Local Network 2
1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2

CC
PP
UU

1 2

DXC5000
Management IP
Gateway
D0511ENa

FIGURE 13: REMOTE BRIDGE MODE SETUP

RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 39/94

13.1 Step by Step Setup Instructions

The first step is to create a bridge group for the Router-A card. Key in the command bridge
create followed by the given name and a MAC address. Then press the Enter key.
The second parameter, MAC adress, is an optional parameter. If MAC address is not given,
the Router-A card will generate the MAC address randomly. It may conflict with the MAC
address of other devices.
[A]a dmi n>b ridg e cre ate br1
WARN ING : A MAC ad dre ss h as bee n ra ndo mly gen era ted for br idg e gr oup ! It m igh t

conf lic t w ith oth er devi ce! !

Comm and su ccee ded

The following command can be setted up once every time for Router-A card.
Set the bridge fcs. Key in the command bridge br1 fcs followed by the parameter you
require. Disabled have been selected as parameter in the following screen.
[A]a dmi n>b ridg e cre ate br1
WARN ING : A MAC ad dre ss h as bee n ra ndo mly gen era ted for br idg e gr oup ! It m igh t
conf lic t w ith oth er devi ce! !
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 fcs d isa ble

Comm and su ccee ded

Set the bridge MAC age. Key in the command bridge br1 age followed by the bridge age
value. Then press the Enter key. The value range is from 10 to 1000000. 300 seconds had
been setup as the IEEE 802.1d default aging time in five minutes.
[A]a dmi n>b ridg e cre ate br1
WARN ING : A MAC ad dre ss h as bee n ra ndo mly gen era ted for br idg e gr oup ! It m igh t
onfl ict wi th o the r d evic e!!
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 fcs d isa ble

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 age 30 0

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b r b r1 ma nage men t enab le

Comm and su ccee ded

To setup management on bridge mode, the user have to enable bridge management feature
as above sample and key in the admin command of bridge br1 ip followed by the IP
address.
[A]a dmi n>b ridg e cre ate br1
WARN ING : A MAC ad dre ss h as bee n ra ndo mly gen era ted for br idg e gr oup ! It m igh t
onfl ict wi th o the r d evic e!!
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 fcs d isa ble

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 age 30 0

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b r b r1 ma nage men t enab le

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 ip 14 0.1 32.2 54. 254 /16

Comm and su ccee ded

To setup interfaces to bridge mode, please refer to section 4.2 and section 4.3 for detail
descriptions
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 40/94 DXC 5000

14. STP/RSTP SETUP

14.1 Overview
The Spanning Tree Algorithm can be used to detect and disable network loops and to
provide backup links between bridges. This allows the device to interact with other
STP/RSTP-compliant switches or bridges in a network to ensure that only one route exists
between any two stations on the network and to provide backup links which automatically
take over when a primary link goes down.
In Figure 12-1, below, the forwarding port in Router-A #4 is blocked so that there can only be
one path between PC#1 and PC #2.

Router-A Card #1 Router-A Card #2

ROOT
PC #2
PC #1 Root PC #2
Fwd. Fwd. Fwd.
Fwd.
LAN LAN
WAN1
1 1

LAN LAN
WAN1
1 1
Root Root
Fwd. Blocked
Fwd. Fwd.

Router-A Card #3 Router-A Card #4

Traffic Path D0512ENa

FIGURE 14: NORMAL RSTP LINK

In Figure 12-2, below, the WAN link between Router-A #1 and Router-A #2 has broken. The
system immediately removes the forwarding port block in Router-A #4 so that there is still a
path between PC #1 and PC #2

Router-A Card #1 Router-A Card #2

ROOT
PC #2
PC #1
WAN1 Root PC #2
Fwd. Fwd. Link Fwd.
Fwd.
LAN Broken LAN
1 1

PC1 to PC2
link is
recovered

LAN LAN
WAN1
1 1
Root Root
Fwd. Fwd. Port Block is
Fwd. Fwd.
removed

Router-A Card #3 Router-A Card #4

Traffic Path
D0513ENa

FIGURE 15: RESTORED RSTP LINK

RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 41/94

The spanning tree algorithms supported by this device include these versions:

• STP – Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1d)

• RSTP – Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)

Spanning tree algorithm uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device that serves
as the root of the spanning tree network. It selects a root port on each bridging device
(except for the root device) which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from
that device to the root device. Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN,
which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device.
All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports. After
determining the lowest cost spanning tree, it enables all root ports and designated ports, and
disables all other ports. Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports
and designated ports, eliminating any possible network loops.
Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs
(Bridge Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the Root Bridge. If a bridge does not get a
Hello BPDU after a predefined interval (Maximum Age), the bridge assumes that the link to
the Root Bridge is down. This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to
reconfigure the network topology. RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the
slower, legacy STP. RSTP achieves much faster reconfiguration (i.e., around one tenth of
the time required by STP) when a node or port fails.
Performance of the Bridges recommends default operational values for performance
parameters. These have been specified in order to avoid the need to set values prior to
operation, and have been chosen with a view to maximizing the ease with which Bridged
LAN components interoperate. Recommended default, absolute maximum, and ranges of
parameters are specified in Tables 12-1 through 12-3.

Parameter Recommended value Absolute maximum

Maximum bridge transit delay 1.0 4.0
Maximum BPDU transmission 1.0 4.0
delay
Maximum Message Age increment 1.0 4.0
overestimate

TABLE 4: TRANSIT AND TRANSMISSION DELAYS

All times are in seconds.

Parameter Recommended or Fixed value Range

default value

Bridge Hello Time 2.0 — 1.0-10.0

Bridge Max Age 20.0 — 6.0-40.0
Bridge Forward 15.0 — 4.0-30.0
Delay
Transmission Limit 3 — —

TABLE 5: (RAPID) SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM TIMER VALUES

All times are in seconds.

Parameter Recommended or default value Range

Bridge Priority 32768 0-61440 in steps of 4096
Port Priority 128 0-240 in steps of 16

TABLE 6: BRIDGE AND PORT PRIORITY PARAMETER VALUES

RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 42/94 DXC 5000

14.2 Step by Step Setup Instructions

To enable STP/RSTP service, a bridge group must be setup properly in advance. Please
refer to Chapter 11 for detail descriptions.
Key in the command bridge br1 spantree to enable spanning tree protocol.
[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 spa ntr ee set up en able
Comm and su ccee ded

NOTE: Key in the command show bridge br1 config and then press the
Enter key. If there is no interface in bridge mode, please follow the
step decribed in section 4.2 and section 4.3 to switch the required
interface to bridge mode.
Key in the command bridge br1 spantree priority followed by the bridge priority value you
decide to use. Then press the Enter Key. We used 32768. In the sample screen below.
[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 spa ntr ee pri ori ty 327 68
Comm and su ccee ded

Set up the LAN port priority. Key in the command interface lan1 spantree priority
followed by the priority value (127). Press Enter. A sample screen is shown below.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e l an1 sp ant ree pr ior ity 12 7
Comm and su ccee ded
Set up the WAN port firstly. Key in the command interface WAN1 spantree priority
followed by the priority value (127). Press Enter. A sample screen is shown below.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 sp ant ree pr ior ity 12 7
Comm and su ccee ded

Set up the span tree Bridge Max Age, key in the command bridge br1 spantree age
followed by a time value in seconds (25). Press Enter. A sample screen is shown below.
[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 spa ntr ee ag e 2 5
Comm and su ccee ded

Set up the span tree Bridge Forward Delay, key in the command bridge br1 spantree delay
followed by a time value in seconds (20). Press Enter. A sample screen is shown below.
[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 spa ntr ee d ela y 2 0
Comm and su ccee ded

Set up the span tree Hello Time, key in the command bridge br1 spantree hello followed by
a time value in seconds (4). Press Enter. A sample screen is shown below.
[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 spa ntr ee hell o 4
Comm and su ccee ded

Set up the LAN port cost. Key in the command interface lan1 spantree cost followed by the
cost value (100). Press Enter. A sample screen is shown below.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e l an1 sp ant ree c ost 100
Comm and su ccee ded

Set up the WAN port cost. Key in the command interface WAN1 spantree cost followed by
the cost value (100). Press Enter. A sample screen is shown below.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 sp ant ree c ost 100
Comm and su ccee ded

Set up the LAN span tree link type. Key in the command interface lan1 spantree link-type
followed by the type of link (p-to-p). Press Enter. A sample screen is shown below.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e l an1 sp ant ree lin k-ty pe p- to-p
Comm and su ccee ded

Set up the WAN span tree link type. Key in the command interface WAN1 spantree link-
type followed by the type of link (p-to-p). Press Enter. A sample screen is shown below.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 sp ant ree lin k-ty pe p- to-p
Comm and su ccee ded
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 43/94

Set the LAN edge-port to enable. Key in the command interface lan1 spantree edge-port
followed by enable. Press Enter. A sample screen is shown below.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e l an1 sp ant ree ed ge- port e nab le
Comm and su ccee ded

Set the WAN edge-port to enable. Key in the command interfae WAN1 spantree edge-port
followed by enable. Press Enter. A sample screen is shown below.
[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 sp ant ree ed ge- port e nab le
Comm and su ccee ded

The setup procedure is now complete. If you WANt to see what your setup looks like, key in
the command show bridge br1 spantree and press Enter. A sample display is shown
below.
[A]a dmi n>s how br idg e b r1 sp antr ee

Span nin g T ree pro toc ol i s e nab led

prot oco l v ersi on: rs tp

Brid ge Inf orma tio n:

Brid ge ID H ell o Ti me Ma x Ag e For ward De lay R oot Co st
==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==
Ro ot 32 768- 001 5F4 EC2F F3 4 se c 2 5 se c 20 sec 0
Th is 32 768- 001 5F4 EC2F F3 4 se c 2 5 se c 20 sec 0

Port In for mati on:

Sta te Pr ior ity Co st Edge -po rt Lin k-t ype Ro ot Port
==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==
lan1 F orw ard 127 1 00 ena ble d p -to -p No
WAN1 F orw ard 127 1 00 ena ble d p -to -p No

Comm and su ccee ded

RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 44/94 DXC 5000

15. VLAN
15.1 Overview
VLAN is used to subdivide a LAN into smaller entities known as VLAN1, VLAN2, VLAN3, …..
VLAN 4094. A device in a particular VLAN can monitor traffic in that VLAN only, and cannot
monitor packets in any other VLANs. This provides an important level of security and also
assists the user to do certain kinds of QoS.
In Figure 13-1, below, VLAN1 and VLAN2 both feed into the VLAN-aware Ethernet Switch.
The switch assigns a Port VID to each port. VLAN1 is assigned VID:3 and VLAN2 is
assigned VID:5. Transmissions from VLAN1(VID:3) and VLAN2(VID:5) are put into tagged
packets by the switch and then passed on to the Ethernet Port of the Router-A card.
The Router-A card reads the tag on the packets and uses this VLAN id to make packet
forwarding decisions. In the diagram below, the packets are to be sent via an E1 or DS1
interface to the Network. A physical interface such as an E1 or DS1 interface can carry
multiple logical channels. Each of these channels can carry VLAN traffic(eg. VID:3, WAN1).
The router-A forwards packets of a VLAN to a proper logical chanel according to the tags on
the packets.

VLAN1 WAN 1 VLAN1

(VID:3) (VID:3)
Network VLAN-aware
Ethernet Switch
VLAN2 VLAN2
(VID:5) WAN 2 Frame Relay (VID:5)
WAN Link
Tagged
Packets
Tagged
1 1 1
Packets CC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2

PP
UU
Router-A Card
12
for DXC5000

D0514ENa

FIGURE 16: VLAN APPLICATION #1

Figure 13-2, below, is much like Figure 13-1, except that it contains both tagged and
untagged packets on the ethernet side. The Router-A assigns a default VLAN ID to
untagged packets (ie.VLAN3 packets in the diagram). The default VID is always the the Port
VID of the Ehernet Port.

WAN 1
VLAN1 (VID:3)
(VID:3)
VLAN1
(VID:3)
VLAN2 VLAN-aware
Network
(VID:5) WAN 2 Ethernet Switch
VLAN2
(VID:5)
(VID:5)
VLAN3
(VID:7) Tagged
WAN 3 Tagged
Packets Packets
(VID:7)
1 1 1
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9
4 0 1 2

CC 10/100 Ethernet Hub

PP
UU

1 2
VLAN3
Untagged (untagged )
Router-A Card for DXC5000 Packets
D0515ENa

FIGURE 17: VLAN APPLICATION #2

RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 45/94

15.2 VLAN and Port Tables

This section is designed to be a brief overview only. If you are already familiar with VLAN
and Port tables please proceed to section 13.3 ( VLAN Commands and Setup Instructions).
15.2.1 VLAN Table
The “show bridge br1 vlan table” command can be used to access the VLAN Table. The
VLAN table displays the tagged/untagged member for each VLAN ID. There can be as
many as 4094 VLAN IDs. The VID1 appears in the table is automatically generated. The
others must be created.
[A]a dmi n>s h b rid ge br1 vl an tab le

==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==
VID: 1
Tag Mem ber :

Unta g M emb er:

BrgM ng_ 0, lan1 , W AN1 , WA N2, WA N3

==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==
VID: 3
Tag Mem ber :
lan1 , W AN1
Unta g M emb er:

==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==
VID: 5
Tag Mem ber :
lan1 , W AN2
Unta g M emb er:

==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==
VID: 7
Tag Mem ber :
WAN3
Unta g M emb er:
lan1

Comm and su ccee ded

TABLE 7: VLAN TABLE

15.2.2 Vlan Port Table
The “show bridge br1 vlan port” command can be used to display a port’s parameters in
the VLAN environment.
[A]a dmi n>s h b rid ge br1 vl an por t
Port P VID F rame -ty pe I ngr ess- fil ter
==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==
lan1 7 a ll d isa bled
WAN1 1 a ll d isa bled
WAN2 1 a ll d isa bled
WAN3 1 a ll d isa bled

Comm and su ccee ded

TABLE 8: VLAN PORT

RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 46/94 DXC 5000

15.3 VLAN Setup Instructions

15.3.1 Application #1 (Fig. 13-1) Step by Step Setup Instructions
Connect a cable between the COM port of your PC and the Console port of the DXC5000.
Then follow the instructions below.
Bridge mode and Timeslot Setting
The first step is to create a bridge group for the Router-A card. Key in the command bridge
create followed by the given name and a MAC address. Then press the Enter key.
The second parameter, MAC adress, is an optional parameter. If MAC address is not given,
the Router-A card will generate the MAC address randomly. It may conflict with the MAC
address of other devices.
[C]a dmi n>b ridg e cre ate br 1
WARN ING : A MAC ad dre ss h as bee n ra ndo mly gen era ted for br idg e gr oup ! It m igh t

conf lic t w ith oth er devi ce! !

Comm and su ccee ded

For WAN interface setup, there are WAN1and WAN2 for setting.
Router-A card supports mutiple WAN interfaces. Before configuring each WAN interface, it
needs to setup the timeslot map in advance.
Key in the command interface WANXX timeslot set to assgin timeslots to interface WAN1.
The following example assigns 32 timeslots to interface WAN1 from timeslot 1 to timeslot 32.
[C]a dmi n>b ridg e cre ate br 1
WARN ING : A MAC ad dre ss h as bee n ra ndo mly gen era ted for br idg e gr oup ! It m igh t

conf lic t w ith oth er devi ce! !

Comm and su ccee ded

[C]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 tim esl ot set 1- 32

Comm and su ccee ded

Key in the command interface WANXX timeslot set to assgin timeslots to interface WAN2.
The following example assigns 32 timeslots to interface WAN2 from timeslot 33 to timeslot
64.
[C]a dmi n>b ridg e cre ate br 1
WARN ING : A MAC ad dre ss h as bee n ra ndo mly gen era ted for br idg e gr oup ! It m igh t

conf lic t w ith oth er devi ce! !

Comm and su ccee ded

[C]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 tim esl ot set 1- 32

Comm and su ccee ded

[C]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN2 tim esl ot set 33 -64
Comm and su ccee ded

Key in the admin command bridge br1 add lan1 WAN1 WAN2.
[C]a dmi n>b ridg e cre ate br 1
WARN ING : A MAC ad dre ss h as bee n ra ndo mly gen era ted for br idg e gr oup ! It m igh t

conf lic t w ith oth er devi ce! !

Comm and su ccee ded

[C]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 tim esl ot set 1- 32

Comm and su ccee ded

[C]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN2 tim esl ot set 33 -64
Comm and su ccee ded

[C]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 add lan 1 W AN1 WAN 2

Comm and su ccee ded
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 47/94

VLAN Setup
The VLAN have to enable on the bridge. Key in the command bridge br1 vlan followed by
enable.
[C]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n set up ena ble
Comm and su ccee ded

You must create a VID for each VLAN. To create VID:3 key in the command bridge br1 vlan
create 3 and press Enter. To create VID:5 key in the command set vlan create 5.
[C]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n set up ena ble
Comm and su ccee ded

[C]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n cre ate 3

Comm and su ccee ded

[C]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n cre ate 5

Comm and su ccee ded

You must setup the WAN Port to allow it to process VLAN1 (VID:3) or VLAN2 (VID:5).For
tagged member of VID:3 VLAN1. Key in the command Bridge br1 vlan add 3 tag WAN1.
Press Enter. For tagged member for VID:5 VLAN2. Key in the command Bridge br1 vlan
add 5 tag WAN2.
[C]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n cre ate 3
Comm and su ccee ded

[C]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n cre ate 5

Comm and su ccee ded

[C]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n ad d 3 ta g WAN1

Comm and su ccee ded

[C]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n ad d 5 ta g WAN2

Comm and su ccee ded

Ethernet Port Setup

You must setup the Ethernet Port to allow it to process VLAN1 (VID:3) and VLAN2 (VID:5).
To set LAN1 Ethernet to be a tagged member for VID:3 VLAN1, key in the command Bridge
br1 vlan add 3 tag lan1. Press Enter. To set LAN1 Ethernet to be a tagged member for
VID:5 VLAN2, key in the command Bridge br1 vlan add 5 tag lan1. Press Enter.
[C]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n ad d 3 ta g lan1
Comm and su ccee ded

[C]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n ad d 5 ta g lan1

Comm and su ccee ded

[C]a dmi n>s ys c on sav e

Comm and su ccee ded

The setup of Application #1 (Figure 13-1) is now complete.

15.3.2 Application #2 (Fig. 15-2) Step by Step Setup Instructions
Connect a cable between the COM port of your PC and the Console port of the AM3440.
Then follow the instructions below.
Bridge mode and Timeslot Setting
The first step is to create a bridge group for the Router-A card. Key in the command bridge
create followed by the given name and a MAC address. Then press the Enter key.
The second parameter, MAC adress, is an optional parameter. If MAC address is not given,
the Router-A card will generate the MAC address randomly. It may conflict with the MAC
address of other devices.
[A]a dmi n>b ridg e cre ate br 1
WARN ING : A MAC ad dre ss h as bee n ra ndo mly gen era ted for br idg e gr oup ! It m igh t

conf lic t w ith oth er devi ce! !

Comm and su ccee ded
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 48/94 DXC 5000

For WAN interface setup, there is WAN1and WAN2 for setting.

Router-A card supports mutiple WAN interfaces. Before configuring each WAN interface, it
needs to setup the timeslot map in advance.
Key in the command interface WANXX timeslot set to assgin timeslots to interface WAN1.
The following example assigns 16 timeslots to interface WAN1 from timeslot 1 to timeslot 16.
[A]a dmi n>b ridg e cre ate br 1
WARN ING : A MAC ad dre ss h as bee n ra ndo mly gen era ted for br idg e gr oup ! It m igh t

conf lic t w ith oth er devi ce! !

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 tim esl ot add 1- 16

Comm and su ccee ded

Key in the command interface WANXX timeslot set to assgin timeslots to interface WAN2.
The following example assigns 16 timeslots to interface WAN2 from timeslot 17 to timeslot
32.
[A]a dmi n>b ridg e cre ate br 1
WARN ING : A MAC ad dre ss h as bee n ra ndo mly gen era ted for br idg e gr oup ! It m igh t

conf lic t w ith oth er devi ce! !

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 tim esl ot add 1- 16

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN2 tim esl ot add 17 -32
Comm and su ccee ded

Key in the command interface WANXX timeslot set to assgin timeslots to interface WAN3.
The following example assigns 16 timeslots to interface WAN3 from timeslot 33 to timeslot
48.
[A]a dmi n>b ridg e cre ate br 1
WARN ING : A MAC ad dre ss h as bee n ra ndo mly gen era ted for br idg e gr oup ! It m igh t

conf lic t w ith oth er devi ce! !

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 tim esl ot add 1- 16

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN2 tim esl ot add 17 -32
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN3 tim esl ot add 33 -48
Comm and su ccee ded

Key in the admin command bridge br1 add lan1 WAN1 WAN2 WAN3.
[A]a dmi n>b ridg e cre ate br 1
WARN ING : A MAC ad dre ss h as bee n ra ndo mly gen era ted for br idg e gr oup ! It m igh t

conf lic t w ith oth er devi ce! !

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN1 tim esl ot add 1- 16

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN2 tim esl ot add 17 -32
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e W AN3 tim esl ot add 33 -48
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 add lan 1 W AN1 WAN 2 W AN3

Comm and su ccee ded
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 49/94

VLAN Setup
You must set the VLAN mode. Key in the command bridge br1 vlan followed by the
parameter you require. In our sample screen we chose to use enable as our parameter.
[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n set up ena ble
Comm and su ccee ded

You must create a VID for each port. To create VID:3 key in the command bridge br1 vlan
create 3 and press Enter. To create VID:5 key in the command set vlan create 5. To create
VID:7 key in the command bridge br1 vlan create 7.
[A]a dmi n> brid ge br1 vl an se tup en abl e
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n cre ate 3

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n cre ate 5

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n cre ate 7

Comm and su ccee ded

For tagged member of VID:3 VLAN1, key in the command Bridge br1 vlan add 3 tag
WAN1. Press Enter. For tagged member of VID:5 VLAN2, key in the command Bridge br1
vlan add 5 tag WAN2. For tagged member of VID:7 VLAN2, key in the command Bridge
br1 vlan add 7 tag WAN3.
[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n cre ate 3
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n cre ate 5

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n cre ate 7

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n ad d 3 ta g WAN1

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n ad d 5 ta g WAN2

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n ad d 7 ta g WAN3

Comm and su ccee ded

Ethernet Port Setup

You must setup the Ethernet Port to allow it to process VLAN1 (VID:3), VLAN2 (VID:5) and
VLAN3 (VID:7)
To set LAN1 Ethernet to be a tagged member for VID:3 VLAN1, key in the command Bridge
br1 vlan add 3 tag lan1. Press Enter. To set LAN1 Ethernet to be a tagged member for
VID:5 VLAN2, key in the command Bridge br1 vlan add 5 tag lan1. Press Enter. To set
LAN1 Ethernet to be an untagged member for VID:7 VLAN3, key in the command Bridge
br1 vlan add 7 untag lan1. Press Enter. Finally, to set LAN1’s PVID to be VID:7, key I the
command interface lan1 vlan pvid 7.
[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n ad d 3 ta g lan1
Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n ad d 5 ta g lan1

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>b ridg e b r1 vla n ad d 7 un tag la n1

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>i nter fac e l an1 vl an pvi d 7

Comm and su ccee ded

[A]a dmi n>s ys c on sav e

Comm and su ccee ded

The setup of Application #2 (Figure 13-2) is now complete.

RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 50/94 DXC 5000

16. FIRMWARE/CONFIGURATION UP/DOWNLOAD WITH TFTP SERVER

16.1 Overview
Firmware/Configuration Up/Download functions can be performed with the server on the
LAN side (ie. same location as the DXC5000) or with the TFTP server on an outside
network.
16.2 Upload/Download With The TFTP Server on the LAN Side
Figure 14-1, below illustrates the Router-A card being used in router mode. The TFTP
Server is on the LAN side. The IP addresses and gateway addresses used in the diagram
correspond to the step by step configuration instructions found in Section 14.3 below.

Local
Network
DXC5000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

IP: 100.1.254.254
Ethernet Gateway: 255.255.0.0
Console

DB9 to PC's COM

port. Newer laptop PCs
will require a DB9 to
USB cable.)
TFTP Note: Both the DXC5000
Server and the TFTP Server are at
the same location

Hyperterminal IP:
Monitor 100.1.1.1
D0516ENa

FIGURE 18: FIRMWARE/CONFIGURATION UP/DOWNLOAD WITH TFTP SERVER ON LAN SIDE

NOTE: In this application the Router-A card and the TFTP Server are at the
same location. Connect a cable between the COM port of your PC
and the Console port of the DXC5000.
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 51/94

16.2.1 Step by Step Setup Instructions

To return to port menu screen of Router-A card for DXC5000, please refer to section 3.2.
To upload configuration proceed to section 14.2.1.3Configuration Upload.
To download configuration proceed to section 14.2.1.4 Configuration Download.
To download firmware proceed to section 14.2.1.2 Firmware Download.
16.2.1.1 File Transfer
Press “D” from the Router-A main menu to enter into the submen of the File Transfer, as
below shows.
SLOT A Ro uter -A === Por t M enu === 1 4:07 :03 03 /02/ 200 6

Vers ion : SW V1 .01. 01

[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]

H -> Un it Alar m H ist ory L -> Co mma nd L ine
M -> Un it Alar m S etu p
X -> Cl ear Uni t A lar m Hi sto ry
D -> Un it Firm war e & Con fig Tr ansf er

[LOG ] [MIS C]
U -> Ch oos e Ot her Sl ot Y -> Un it Load De fau lt A lar m C onfi g
F -> Lo g O ff [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu
O -> Lo g O n [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu
E -> Re tur n to Co ntr olle r M ain Men u

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

SLOT A Ro uter -A == = Fi le Tra nsfe r = == 1 4:33 :38 03 /02/ 200 6

A -> Do wnlo ad Fir mwar e

B -> Do wnlo ad Con figu rat ion
C -> Up load Co nfi gura tio n

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Prev iou s M enu or ent er a co mma nd > >
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 52/94 DXC 5000

16.2.1.2 Firmware Download

Press “A” from the screen of File Transfer to Download Firmware. Then key in the
IP address of the TFTP and the file name. Your screen will tell you how many bytes
were transmitted and if the download was successful.
SLOT A Ro uter -A = == Down loa d F irmw are == = 1 4:36 :04 03 /02/ 200 6
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

TFTP Se rve r IP : 1 0.3 .2. 31

Firm war e F ile Nam e : r om2 7.r om

14: 36: 38 03/0 2/0 6 Down loa din g fi rmw are ... Rec iev ed 15 41 Bloc ks
14: 37: 28 03/0 2/0 6 Rece ive d 7 8944 8 b yte s in 51 se cond s
14: 37: 28 03/0 2/0 6 Send fi rmw are to car d... .Se nd 78 944 8 B ytes
14: 42: 46 03/0 2/0 6 down loa d O K!

<< P res s E SC k ey to cont inu e > >

16.2.1.3 Configuration Upload
Press “C” from the screen of File Transfer to Upload Configuration. Then key in the
IP address of the TFTP and the file name. Your screen will tell you how many bytes
were transmitted and if the upload was successful.
SLOT A Ro uter -A == = U ploa d C onf igur ati on === 1 4:46 :39 03 /02/ 200 6
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

TFTP Se rve r IP : 0 10. 003 .002 .03 1

Conf ig Fil e Na me : r out erA .cfg

Pre par e c onfi g d ata for up loa d... . Req ues t 279 745 Byt es

14: 46: 52 03/0 2/0 6 Uplo adi ng conf ig ... Sen ded 546 Bl ocks
14: 49: 35 03/0 2/0 6 Plea se wai t fo r c onf ig d ata re ceiv e r ead y... .
14: 49: 38 03/0 2/0 6 Conf ig dat a ch eck sum ok. ...
14: 49: 54 03/0 2/0 6 Sent 27 974 5 by tes in 183 se con ds

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 53/94

16.2.1.4 Configuration Download

Press “B” from the screen of File Transfer to Download Configuration. Then key in
the IP address of the TFTP and the file name Your screen will tell you how many
bytes were transmitted and if the download was successful. Before download the
configuration, the user have to make sure the Config File Name is exist.
SLOT A Ro uter -A === Do wnlo ad Con figu rat ion === 1 4:52 :03 03 /02/ 200 6
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

TFTP Se rve r IP : 0 10. 003 .002 .03 1

Conf ig Fil e Na me : r out erA .cfg

14: 52: 15 03/0 2/0 6 Down loa din g co nfi g . .. Rec iev ed 5 46 Bloc ks
14: 52: 33 03/0 2/0 6 conf ig che cksu m o k
14: 52: 33 03/0 2/0 6 Rece ive d 2 7974 5 b yte s in 19 se cond s
14: 52: 33 03/0 2/0 6 Send co nfi g to ca rd. ... Sen d 279 745 By tes
14: 54: 29 03/0 2/0 6 down loa d O K!

<< P res s E SC k ey to cont inu e > >

16.3 Upload/Download With The TFTP Server on An Outside Network

Please refer to DXC5000 Controller board.
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 54/94 DXC 5000

17. APPENDIX: OPERATION COMMANDS

This chapter describes the Router-A card configuration options and operational functions.
Each command requires a certan user privilege. The Router-A CLI assigns Admin a higher
privilege than Operator. In addition, Command list shows in the end of Chapter 15.
17.1 Ping Command

Command: ping
Privilege: operator
Syntax: ping address [-l packet_size] [-w timeout]
Explanation: issue icmp echo packets to a host.
Parameters: address The destination address of the ICMP packets.
packet_size How many bytes to be carried by the ICMP packets. (1 ~
1500)
timeout Timeout in milliseconds to wait for each reply (1~5000)

17.2 Traceroute Commands

Command: traceroute
Privilege: operator
Syntax: traceroute address [-l max_hops] [-w timeout]
Explanation: issue trace route requests
Parameters: address The destination address of the ICMP packets.
timeout Timeout in milliseconds to wait for each reply (1~5000)
max_hops Maximum number of hops to search for target (1~50)

17.3 Bridge Commands

Command: bridge create

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge create name [mac]
Explanation: This command will create a bridge group with a management interface,
the virtual interface, which will use the mac address specified. if the mac
address is not specified, a random address will be generated for the
bridge group. this generated address might conflict with other device.
Note: the router-a only supports one bridge group.
Parameters: name The bridge group name to be created
[mac] MAC address for this bridge group. If no MAC address is
specified, a random address will be generated for the
bridge group.

Command: bridge destroy

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge destroy name
Explanation: Destroys the specified bridge group. all the interfaces belonging to this
bridge group will be removed from this bridge group first.
Parameters: name The bridge brg_name group name will be destroyed.
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 55/94

In the following commands, please replace “brg_name” with the real bridge group name in
your system..

Command: bridge brg_name age

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge brg_name age time
Explanation: Set maximum age of auto-learned mac addresses.
Parameters: time The maximum age. (in seconds)

Command: bridge brg_name delete

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge brg_name delete [interface]
Explanation: Remove an interface from a bridge group.
Parameters: [interface] name of the interface to be deleted. If no interface is
specified, all the interfaces will be deleted from the bridge
group.

Command: bridge brg_name fcs

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge brg_name fcs setting
Explanation: Enable/disable the original ethernet frame checksum.
Parameters: setting enable/disable

Command: bridge brg_name ip

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge brg_name ip address
Explanation: Set ip address on the virtual management interface for this bridge group.
after setting the ip address, this bridge group can be managed remotely.
Parameters: address The management IP. (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/prefix)

Command: bridge brg_name management

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge brg_name management enable/diable
Explanation: Enable/disable bridge management feature.
Parameters: enable/diable enable/disable
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 56/94 DXC 5000

Command: bridge brg_name policy mac

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge brg_name policy mac direction list_name
Explanation: With this command, while packets coming in or out of the virtual
management interface will be checked and dropped if the mac
address(es) matches those in the list.
If a list is binding on “inbound” direction, the source mac address of
incoming packets will be checked; if a list is binding on “outbound”
direction, the destination mac address of outgoing packets will be
checked.
Parameters: direction Set inbound or outbound
list_name list name or ”off” to disable access control

Command: bridge brg_name spantree age

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge brg_name spantree age valuE
Explanation: Sets the maximum age of received protocol information before it is
discarded. that is, when this router is the root bridge, if a non-root bridge
has not received a hello message within the time period set by maximum
age, the non-root bridge assumes that a network failure has occurred and
the bridges can begin reconfiguring the network.
Parameters: value the maximum age (in seconds) of received protocol information
before it is discarded. The possible values range from 6 to 40.seconds.
The default value is 20 seconds
Note: The default value of 20 seconds is recommended in the
STP/RSTP. If you change this value, the following relationship
must be observed: 2 x (Bridge_Forward_Delay – 1.0 seconds) >=
Bridge_Max_Age Bridge_Max_Age >= 2 x (Bridge_Hello_Time +
1.0 seconds)
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 57/94

Command: bridge brg_name spantree priority

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge brg_name spantree priority value
Explanation: Set a bridge’s spanning tree priority value.
Sets the priority for specified bridge group. The lower the bridge’s priority,
the more likely it is to be selected as the root bridge
Parameters: value the value can be set from 0 to 65535. The value 0 is the
highest priority. Default value is 32768.
Command: bridge brg_name spantree delay
Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge brg_name spantree delay value
Explanation: Set a bridge’s spanning tree delay value
Parameters: value the time in seconds that bridge use for forward delay. The
possible valus range from 4 to 30 seconds. The
default value is 15 seconds
Note: The default value of 15 seconds is recommended in the
STP/RSTP. If you change this value, the following relationship must be
observed:
2 x (Bridge_Forward_Delay – 1.0 seconds) >= Bridge_Max_Age

Command: bridge brg_name spantree hello

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge brg_name spantree hello value
Explanation: This command sets how often (in seconds) the root bridge sends out
bpdu hello messages. at any instant in stp/rstp, one bridge is the root
bridge. the root bridge generates a hello message periodically. all other
network bridges wait for hello messages. if a bridge does not get a hello
message in the expected time, it presumes network malfunctions and
notifies other bridges that the network transmission paths must be
reconfigured. when this device is the root bridge, all other bridges use this
device's hello time value.
Parameters: value the time interval for the root bridge sends out BPDU hello
messages. The possible value is 1 to 10. The default
value is 2 seconds
Note: A hello time value that is too low results in many BPDU hello
messages being sent over the network, possibly creating excessive
traffic on the network. A value that is too high slows the response to
network topology changes. The default value of 2 seconds is
recommended in 802.1d/802.1w. If you change this value, the
following relationship must be obeyed:
Bridge_Max_Age >= 2 x (Bridge_Hello_Time + 1.0 seconds)
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 58/94 DXC 5000

Command: bridge brg_name spantree setup

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge brg_name spantree setup setting
Explanation: Enable/disable spanning tree feature
Parameters: setting enable/disable

Command: bridge brg_name vlan add

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge brg_name vlan add vid tag/untag interface
Explanation: Add one port to be a tagged or untagged member of one created vlan in a
bridge group.
Parameters: vid bridge brg_name VLAN ID. Range from 1-4094
tag/untag Tagged port or untagged port
interface Interface Name. (lan1~2/WAN1~WAN64/WANX pvc1-16)

Command: bridge brg_name vlan create

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge brg_name vlan create vid
Explanation: Except vlan 1(default vlan), each vlan needs to be created before use.
This command will create a VLAN in a bridge group.
Parameters: vid bridge brg_name VLAN ID. Range from 1-4094

Command: bridge brg_name vlan delete

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge brg_name vlan delete vid tag/untag interface
Explanation: Delete a tagged or an untagged port from a created vlan in a bridge
group.
Parameters: vid bridge brg_name VLAN ID. Range from 1-4094
tag/untag Tagged port or untagged port
interface Interface Name (lan1~2/WAN1~WAN64/WANX pvc1-16)

Command: bridge brg_name vlan destroy

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge brg_name vlan destroy vid
Explanation: If a created vlan will not be used, use this command to destroy it. default
vlan (vid:1) cannot be destroyeD.
Parameters: vid VLAN ID. Range from 1-4094
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 59/94

Command: bridge brg_name vlan mgmt

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge brg_name vlan mgmt vid
Explanation: For each bridge group, it will have a interface for management. this
interface should belong to one created vlan. it means only hosts in this
vlan could communicate with the interface. by default, this interface will
belong to vlan 1.
Parameters: vid bridge brg_name VLAN ID. Range from 1-4094

Command: bridge brg_name vlan regencrc

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge brg_name regencrc setting
Explanation: Enable/disable regenerating crc on wan interface for bridge brg_name
frames.
Parameters: setting enable/disable (Default: disabled)
Note: Enable this feature will reduce the performance for bridge
forwarding.

Command: bridge brg_name vlan setup

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Bridge brg_name vlan setup
Explanation: Enable/disable vlan fearure. after enabling the vlan feature, the default
vlan(vid:1) will be created automatically, and all ports will become
untagged members of vlan 1. if you disable the vlan feature, the bridge
group will become vlan-unware .
Parameters: Enable/disable
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 60/94 DXC 5000

17.4 DHCP Commands

Command: dhcp relay interface add

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp relay interface add interface
Explanation: Add interface(s)/bridge mgmt(s) which the DHCP relay should listen to so
that any request from a DHCP client on that interface(s) will be forwarded
to the server. If no interface names are specified, it will identify all network
interfaces/bridge mgmt interfaces and exclude those interfaces which
have no IP address
Parameters: Interface lan1/lan2/bridge_group_name

Command: dhcp relay interface delete

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp relay interface delete interface
Explanation: Exclude the interface(s)/bridge mgmt(s) from thedhcp relay so that any
request from a dhcp client on that interface(s) will not be forwarded to
server
Parameters: Interface lan1/lan2/bridge_group_name

Command: dhcp relay server

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp relay server address
Explanation: Set dhcp server ip address to which dhcp and bootp requests should be
relayed
Parameters: address IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)

Command: dhcp relay setup

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp relay setup setting
Explanation: Enable/disable dhcp relay features on the device. note that dhcp server
and relay cannot be enabled simultaneously. once the relay feature is
enabled, any configuration change for the relay will not take affect until
the user disables and enables it again
Parameters: Setting enable/disable

Command: dhcp server host add

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server host add name
Explanation: Hosts which require special configuration options can be added by this
command. If no address is specified in the following command, the
address will be allocated dynamically (if possible), but the host-specific
information will still come from the host declaration
Parameters: Name unique name of host (<16 bytes)
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 61/94

Command: dhcp server host delete

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server host delete name
Explanation: Delete the DHCP host so that all configurations for the host will be lost
Parameters: Name host name in configuration

Command: dhcp server host host_name bootfile

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server host host_name bootfile filename
Explanation: Specifies the name of the file that is used as a boot image which is to be
loaded by a client from the next-server
Parameters: filename bootstrap file name (< 64 bytes) or NULL to remove
setting

Command: dhcp server host host_name client_id

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server host host_name client_id id
Explanation: Sets the DHCP host client identifier. This client id is matched to the actual
DHCP or BOOTP client’s identifier supplied by the client, or, if the host
declaration or the client does not provide a dhcp-client-identifier, by
matching the hardware parameter in the host declaration to the network
hardware address supplied by the client.
Parameters: id client identifier (may be htype/chaddr) or NULL to remove
s
etting

Command: dhcp server host host_name fixed_addr

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server host host_name fixed_addr address
Explanation: Sets the DHCP host ip address. The fixed-address command is used to
assign one fixed IP addresses to a client
Parameters: address IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) or NULL to remove setting

Command: dhcp server host host_name hardware

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server host host_name hardware type address
Explanation: Sets the host hardware type/address. Specifies the MAC address of the
client's hardware and the physical hardware interface type in order for a
BOOTP client to be recognized
Parameters: type Ethernet/token-ring/fddi or null to remove setting
address h/w address specific to h/w type
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 62/94 DXC 5000

Command: dhcp server host host_name lease

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server host host_name lease time
Explanation: Sets the DHCP host default duration of the lease; i.e., the duration of the
lease for an IP address that is assigned from a DHCP Server to a DHCP
client
Parameters: time default lease time in secs or NULL to remove setting

Command: dhcp server host host_name next_server

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server host host_name next_server address
Explanation: Specifies the IP address of the next server in the boot process, which is
typically a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server
Parameters: address IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) or NULL to remove setting

Command: dhcp server host host_name option

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server host host_name option code value
Explanation: Sets the DHCP host option by code (max 8 options). Apart from the
above settings for a host, if the user needs to mention some special
configurations, he/she can use this command, but the user needs to take
care that the option code and corresponding value are in proper format
Parameters: code option code from RFC 2132 (1 to 255)
value option value (< 64 bytes) or NULL to remove setting

Command: dhcp server interface add

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server interface add interface
Explanation: Add interface(s)/bridge mgmt(s) to the DHCP server. The name of the
network interface(s)/ bridge mgmt(s) on which the DHCP server should
listen for client’s request may be specified by this command line. If no
interface names are specified it will identify all network interfaces/bridge
mgmt interfaces and exclude those interfaces which have no IP address.
Parameters: Interface lan1/lan2/bridge_group_name

Command: dhcp server interface delete

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server interface delete interface
Explanation: Exclude the interface(s)/bridge mgmt(s) from DHCP server so that any
request from a DHCP client on that interface(s) will be ignored by the
server
Parameters: Interface lan1/lan2/bridge_group_name
Command: dhcp server subnet add
Privilege: Admin
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 63/94

Syntax: Dhcp server subnet add name

Explanation: Add the DHCP subnetto the server, so that when a request is received
from a DHCP client, the server can assign an IP address and other
necessary parameters to the client. Note that user must add a subnet for
each configured interface on which he/she WANts to run DHCP server
Parameters: Name unique name of subnet (<16 bytes)

Command: dhcp server subnet delete

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server subnet delete name
Explanation: Deletes the DHCP subnet so that all configurations for the subnet will be
lost
Parameters: Name subnet name in configuration

Command: dhcp server subnet subnet_name bootfile

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server subnet subnet_name bootfile filename
Explanation: Specifies the name of the file that is used as a boot image which is to be
loaded by a client from next-server
Parameters: filename bootstrap file name (< 64 bytes) or NULL to remove setting

Command: dhcp server subnet subnet_name bootp

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server subnet subnet_name bootp support
Explanation: Enables/disables the BOOTP support for the subnet. If enabled, any
request from a BOOTP client will be accepted by the DHCP server,
otherwise it will be silently discarded.
Parameters: support enable/disable

Command: dhcp server subnet subnet_name dns_server add

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server subnet subnet_name dns_server add address
Explanation: Configures the Domain Name System (DNS) IP servers available to the
client. User can add 4 DNS servers by this command. If the DNS server is
not configured, the client cannot correlate host names to IP addresses
Parameters: address IP address (max 4 address)
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 64/94 DXC 5000

Command: dhcp server subnet subnet_name dns_server delete

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server subnet subnet_name dns_server delete address
Explanation: Deletes the DNS servers already configured
Parameters: address ip address or “all” to delete all setting

Command: dhcp server subnet subnet_name domain_name

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server subnet subnet_name domain_name name
Explanation: Specifies the client's domain name string
Parameters: name domain name system (<32 bytes) or NULL to remove
setting

Command: dhcp server subnet subnet_name ip_range

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server subnet subnet_name ip_range start_addr end_addr
Explanation: Specifies the pool of IP addresses in the subnet that can be assigned to
DHCP clients. The address pool must be in the same network segment or
subnet
Parameters: start_addr start IP address or NULL to remove setting
end_addr end ip address

Command: dhcp server subnet subnet_name lease

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server subnet subnet_name lease time
Explanation: Set DHCP subnet default duration of lease
Sets the default duration of a lease for an IP address that is assigned from
a DHCP Server to a client
Parameters: time default lease time in secs to remove setting

Command: dhcp server subnet subnet_name nbns add

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server subnet subnet_name nbns add address
Explanation: Specifies the IP address of the NetBIOS WINS name server. This is used
to configure NetBIOS Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS) name
servers for Microsoft DHCP clients.
Parameters: address IP address (max 4 address)
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 65/94

Command: dhcp server subnet subnet_name nbns delete

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server subnet subnet_name nbns delete address
Explanation: Deletes the NetBIOS WINS name server already configured
Parameters: address ip address or “all” to delete all setting

Command: dhcp server subnet subnet_name netb_type

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server subnet subnet_name netb_type type
Explanation: Specifies the NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DHCP clients. Valid types
are:
B-node Broadcast
P-node Peer-to-peer
M-node Mixed
H-node Hybrid
Parameters: type B-node, P-node, M-node or H-node or NULL

Command: dhcp server subnet subnet_name network

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server subnet subnet_name network address
Explanation: Configures the network number and prefix for a DHCP address pool. The
network-number/prefix uniquely identifies the subnet so that DHCP server
first identifies the subnet from a client request it receives, and assigns a IP
address from that subnet address pool
Parameters: address subnet IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/xx) or NULL to remove
setting

Command: dhcp server subnet subnet_name next_server

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server subnet subnet_name next_server address
Explanation: Specifies the IP address of the next server in the boot process, which is
typically a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server
Parameters: address IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) or NULL to remove setting
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 66/94 DXC 5000

Command: dhcp server subnet subnet_name option

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server subnet subnet_name option code value
Explanation: Sets DHCP options by code (max 8 options). Apart from the above settings
for a host, if the user needs to mention some special configurations, he/she
can use this command, but the user needs to take care the option code and
corresponding value are in the proper formats.
Parameters: code option code from RFC 2132 (1 to 255)
value option value (<64 bytes) or NULL to remove setting
Command: dhcp server subnet subnet_name Router-Add
Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server subnet subnet_name Router-Add address
Explanation: Specifies the IP address of the default router in the subnet
Parameters: address IP address (max 4 address)

Command: dhcp server subnet subnet_name router delete

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server subnet subnet_name router delete address
Explanation: Deletes the router for the subnet already configured
Parameters: address IP deleteress (max 4 deleteress)

Command: dhcp server setup

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Dhcp server setup setting
Explanation: Enables/Disables the DHCP server feature on the device. Note that the
DHCP server and relay cannot be enabled simultaneously. Once the server
is enabled, any configuration change for the server will not take effect until
the user disables and enables it again
Parameters: Setting enable/disable
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 67/94

17.5 Interface Commands

The interface commands are always associated with an interface name (ex. interface lan1).
Following commands use ifname to represent an interface name.

Command: interface ifname alias add

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Interface ifname alias add address
Explanation: Adds an alias IP address. This command allows multiple IP addresses can
be assigned to an interface. A maximum of 5 alias IP address are
supported
Parameters: address IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/xx)

Command: interface ifname alias delete

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Interface ifname alias delete address
Explanation: Deletes alias IP address
Parameters: address IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/xx)

Command: interface ifname ip

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname ip address
Explanation: Sets an interface’s IP address.
Parameters: address The IP address. (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/xx)

Command: interface ifname policy acl

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Interface ifname policy acl direction list_name
Explanation: Sets access control for router interface. Not valid for interfaces in bridge
mode.
If a list is binding on the “inbound” direction, all incoming packets to this
interface will be checked with the entries in the list; if a list is binding on the
“outbound” direction, all outgoing packets from this interface will be
checked.
Parameters: direction Set inbound or outbound
list_name list_name or "off" to disable access control
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 68/94 DXC 5000

Command: interface ifname policy mac

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: Interface ifname policy mac direction list_name
Explanation: Sets access control for the bridge interfaces. Not valid for interfaces in
router mode.
Packets coming in or out of the virtual management interface, will be
checked and dropped if the mac address(s) matches those in the list.
If a list is binding on the “inbound” direction, the source mac address of all
incoming packets to this interface will be checked with the entries in the list;
if a list is binding on the “outbound” direction, the destination mac address
of all outgoing packets from this interface will be checked.
Parameters: direction Set inbound or outbound
list_name List name or "off" to disable access control

Command: interface ifname route rip setup

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname route rip setup setting
Explanation: Enables/disables the RIP routing protocol
Parameters: setting Enable/disable.

Command: interface ifname route rip version

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname route rip version setting
Explanation: Configure RIP routing protocol version
Parameters: setting Version number. (1/2)

Command: Interface ifname route ospf auth-key message-digest-key

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname route ospf auth-key message-digest-key
Explanation: Set OSPF MD5 authentication key. Assign a password to be used by
neighboring OSPF routers on a network segment that is using OSPF’s
MD5 password authentication.
Parameters:

Command: Interface ifname route ospf auth-key text-key

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname route ospf auth-key text-key
Explanation: Set OSPF text format authentication key. Assign a password to be used by
neighboring OSPF routers on a network segment that is using OSPF’s
simple password authentication.
Parameters:
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 69/94

Command: Interface ifname route ospf cost

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname route ospf cost value
Parameters: Value the number of seconds to wait before sending another
packet (Valid values are 1 to 65535)

Command: Interface ifname route ospf dead

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname route ospf dead value
Explanation: Set the number of seconds that a device’s hello packets must not have
been seen before its neighbors declare the OSPF router down. This value
must be the same for all routers attached to a common network. The
default value is 40 seconds.
Parameters: Value the number of seconds to wait before sending another
packet (Valid values are 1 to 65535)

Command: Interface ifname route ospf hello

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname route ospf hello value
Explanation: Set the number of seconds between hello packets sent on an OSPF
interface. This value must be the same for all routers attached to a
common network. The default value is 10 seconds.
Parameters: Value the number of seconds to wait before sending another
packet (Valid values are 1 to 65535)

Command: Interface ifname route ospf prior

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname route ospf prior value
Explanation: Set priority to help determine the OSPF designated router for a network. By
setting a higher value, the router will be more eligible to become the
Designated Router. By setting the value to 0, the router will no longer be
eligible to be the Designated Router. The default value is 1.
Parameters: value (Valid values are 0 to 255)

Command: Interface ifname route ospf retransmit

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname route ospf retransmit value
Explanation: Specify the number of seconds between link state advertisement
retransmissions for adjacent OSPF routers linked to this interface. This
value is used when re-transmitting Database Description and Link State
Request packets. The default value is 5 seconds.
Parameters: value the number of seconds to wait before sending another
packet (Valid values are 1 to 65535)
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 70/94 DXC 5000

Command: Interface ifname route ospf transmit

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname route ospf transmit value
Explanation: Set the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update
packet on an OSPF interface. The LSAs’ age should be incremented by
this value when transmitting. The default value is 1 second.
Parameters: value the number of seconds to wait before sending another
packet (Valid values are 1 to 65535)

Command: Interface ifname route ospf setup

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname route ospf setup setup [area_id]
Explanation: Enable/Disable OSPF for a specified interface
Parameters: Setup enable/disable
[area_id] 0~4294967295

Command: interface ifname spantree cost

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname spantree cost value
Explanation: Sets port cost for spanning tree
Parameters: value cost value. Assign lower number to faster media (1-65535)

Command: interface ifname spantree edge_port

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname spantree edge_port setting
Explanation: Enable/disable edge-port feature. This indicates that this port/interface is
known to be on the edge of a bridged LAN.
Parameters: setting enable/disable

Command: interface ifname spantree link_type

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname spantree link_type type
Explanation: Sets link type in the following three ways.
Parameters: type type of link (auto/p-to-p/shared)
- auto: The switch will auto detect the link type. (This is the default value)
- p-to-p: The link is a point-to-point link to another device.
- shared: The link is a shared segment and can contain more than one
device.
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 71/94

Command: interface ifname spantree priority

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname spantree priority value
Explanation: Sets a spanning tree priority for a port, which will be used to break the tie
when two (or more) ports connected to the same bridge towards the root
bridge tie for position as the root port. The port with the lowest port priority
will be forwarded (become the root port) and the other port(s) will blocked
(become the alternate port).
Parameters: value port priority (0-255). Default value is 128.

Command: interface ifname nway auto

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname nway auto
Explanation: Enables auto negotiation to set up link speed/duplex.
Parameters: none

Command: interface ifname nway force

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname nway force speed duplex
Explanation: Force mode to set up link speed and duplex.
Parameters: speed 10/100
duplex full/half

Command: interface ifname vlan frame-type

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname vlan frame-type type
Explanation: Sets the acceptable frame type of a given interface. Two options con be
chosen: all means this interface could accept tagged, untagged or pure-
priority packets; tag-only means this interface could only accept tagged
packets.
Parameters: type all/tag-only
Command: interface ifname vlan ingress-filter
Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname vlan ingress-filter setting
Explanation: Enables/disables ingress filtering of a given interface. If enabled, it will
check whether the incoming packet belongs to the VLAN which the
interface belongs to. If not, it discards the packet.
Parameters: setting enabled/disabled
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 72/94 DXC 5000

Command: interface ifname vlan pvid

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname vlan pvid vid
Explanation: Sets an Interface’s PVID. This PVID will be used in port-based VLAN.
Parameters: vid VLAN ID(range from 1 to 4094)

Command: interface ifname chdlc

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname chdlc interval timeout
Explanation: Sets Cisco HDLC Parameters
Parameters: interval Keep-alive interval (1-3600, default is 10 secs)
timeout Interface restart timeout (seconds, should be multiple of
interval)

Command: interface ifname encapsulation

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname encapsulation protocol
Explanation: Sets layer2 encapsulation protocol
Parameters: protocol Layer 2 encapsulation (hdlc/ppp/chdlc/frame_relay)

Command: interface ifname frame-relay

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname frame-relay lmi_type [n391 value] [n392 value] [n393
value] [t391 value]
Explanation: Sets Frame Relay LMI parameters
Parameters: lmi_type Frame Relay LMI protocol (ansi/q933)
[n391 value] LMI full-status polling interval (1~255)
[n392 value] LMI error threshold (1~10)
[n393 value] LMI monitored event threshold (1~10)
[t391 value] LMI link integrity polling interval (5~30)
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 73/94

17.6 NAT Commands

Command: interface ifname napt setup

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname napt setup setting
Explanation: Enables/disables the Network Address Port Translation
Parameters: setting enable/disable

Command: interface ifname napt static add

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname napt static add name lo_port [hi_port] private_addr
Explanation: Adds an entry into the static port forwarding list
Parameters: name The entry name
lo_port The starting port number
[hi_port] The ending port number
private_addr The IP address of the server offering the services
(xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)

Command: interface ifname napt static delete

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname napt static delete name
Explanation: Deletes entries from thestatic port forwarding list
Parameters: name The entry name

Command: interface ifname nat address add

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname nat address add index start_addr [end_addr]
Explanation: Adds a pool of public IP addresses for NAT
Parameters: index The pool index (1 ~ 8)
start_addr The starting IP address
[end_addr] The ending IP address

Command: interface ifname nat address delete

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname nat address delete index
Explanation: Deletes a pool of public IP addresses for NAT
Parameters: index The pool index (1 ~ 8)
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 74/94 DXC 5000

Command: interface ifname nat setup

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname nat setup setting
Explanation: Enables/disables Network Address Translation
Parameters: setting enable/disable

Command: interface ifname nat static add

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname nat static add public_addr private_addr
Explanation: Adds a static NAT map
Parameters: public_addr The public IP address
private_addr The private IP address

Command: interface ifname nat static delete

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname nat static delete public_addr
Explanation: Deletes entries from the NAT static list
Parameters: public_addr The public IP address to be deleted

Command: interface ifname queue

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname queue method parameter
Explanation: Sets output queue management method
Parameters: method Management method (tb/sfq)
parameter Discipline paramters
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 75/94

Command: interface ifname pvc1 dlci

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: interface ifname pvc1 dlci DLCI [CIR] [Bc] [Be] [Qdepth]
Explanation: Sets/deletes a Frame Relay PVC.
Parameters: DLCI The PVC's DLCI (0/16~991). The parameter specifies DLCI
of the PVC in the WAN link. DLCI=0 will delete the PVC
from the bearer channel.
[CIR] Committed Information Rate (kbps). This specifies how
much bandwidth will be provided by the PVC. It can not be
greater than physical bandwidth of the WAN link.
[Bc] Committed Burst Size (kbits). The Router-A computes
graduation of bandwidth calculation by this parameter and
CIR. The calculation graduaton is (CIR/Bc) seconds.
[Be] Excess Burst Size (kbits)
[Qdepth] Max. queue length. When the PVC can offer enough
bandwidth for user traffic, it buffers the exceeded packets in
internal queue. This parameter specifies maximum number
of packets can be put in the buffer. When the queue length
exceeds the limit all packets coming later will be dropped.
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 76/94 DXC 5000

17.7 Policy Command

Command: policy acl create

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: policy acl create name
Explanation: Creates an access control list with a given name. This list is combined with
several rules and those rules will be checked accordingly.
A maximum of 64 lists can be created.
Parameters: name list_name (<6 bytes)

Command: policy acl destroy

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: policy acl destroy name
Explanation: Destroys the specified access control list. Those rules in the list will
disappear.
Parameters: name list_name in configuration

Command: policy acl list1 append

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: policy acl list1 append action selector
Explanation: Appends an entry on the specified list. If a packet matches the selector
described in the rule, action will be taken.
A maximum of 32 entries can be added to a list.
Parameters: action { permit | deny }
selector "[src_ip/prefix] [dst_ip/prefix] [protocol] [service]"

Command: policy acl list1 delete

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: policy acl list1 delete start_index [end_index]
Explanation: Deletes entry(s) by indicating the index number.
The rule in the back will follow the procedure to move forward step by step.
Parameters: start_index The starting index number. 0 to delete all rules in the list.
[end_index] The end index number

Command: policy mac create

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: policy mac create name
Explanation: Creates an access control list for mac address. This list is used only for
interfaces in bridge mode.
Maximum 6 lists can be created.
Parameters: name list_name (<6 bytes)
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 77/94

Command: policy mac destroy

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: policy mac destroy name
Explanation: Destroys an access control list for mac address
Parameters: name list_name in configuration

Command: policy mac mac_list append

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: policy mac mac_list append selector
Explanation: Adds a MAC address to be blocked to a specified list
Maximum 32 entries can be added for a list.
Parameters: selector "XX : XX : XX : XX : XX : XX"

Command: policy mac mac_list delete

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: policy mac mac_list delete selector
Explanation: Deletes a MAC address from a specified list
Parameters: selector "XX : XX : XX : XX : XX : XX"
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 78/94 DXC 5000

17.8 Route Commands

Command: route static add

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: route static add network gateway interface
Explanation: Adds a static route
Parameters: network Destination network (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/prefix)
gateway Routing gateway
interface Output interface (lan1~lan2/WAN1~WAN64/WANX pvc1-
16/brg_group)

Command: route static delete

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: route static delete network
Explanation: Deletes a static route
Parameters: network Destination network (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/prefix)

Command: route ospf area add

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: route ospf area add area_id
Explanation: Add an OSPF area
Parameters: area_id

Command: route ospf area authentication

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: route ospf area authentication area_id type
Explanation: Enable authentication for an OSPF area
Parameters: area_id 0~4294967295
type null | password |md5

Command: route ospf area cost

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: route ospf area cost area_id cost
Explanation: Assign a specific cost to the default summary route used.
Parameters: area_id 0~4294967295
cost 0~16777215
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 79/94

Command: route ospf area delete

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: route ospf area delete area_id
Explanation: Delete an OSPF area
Parameters: area_id 0~4294967295

Command: route ospf area type

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: route ospf area type area_id type
Explanation: Specify an address range for which a single route will be advertised.
Parameters: area_id 0~4294967295
type normal | stub | stub-no-summary
type normal | stub | stub-no-summary

Command: route ospf redistribute

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: route ospf redistribute type
Explanation: Redistribute routing information from a specified place to the OSPF tables
Parameters: Type kernel | static | connected | rip | null

Command: route ospf router-id

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: route ospf router-id id
Explanation: Set the OSPF router id
Parameters: id IP address that identifies this OSPF router
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 80/94 DXC 5000

17.9 Show Commands

Command: show bridge

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show bridge
Explanation: Shows bridge configuration
Parameters: none

Command: show bridge brg_name config

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show bridge brg_name config
Explanation: Shows bridge group configuration
Parameters: none

Command: show bridge brg_name spantree

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show bridge brg_name spantree
Explanation: Shows RSTP status of brg_name
Parameters: none

Command: show bridge brg_name vlan port

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show bridge brg_name vlan port
Explanation: Shows each port's VLAN information
Parameters: none

Command: show bridge brg_name vlan state

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show bridge brg_name vlan state
Explanation: Shows bridge state
Parameters: none
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 81/94

Command: show bridge brg_name vlan table

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show bridge brg_name vlan table
Explanation: Shows VLAN table
Parameters: none
Command: show dhcp relay config
Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show dhcp relay config
Explanation: shows dhcp relay configuration including the interface/bridge mgmt on
which the user WANts to run the DHCP relay and the DHCP server IP
address
Parameters: none

Command: show dhcp relay status

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show dhcp relay status
Explanation: Shows the DHCP relay current status, enabled or disabled. Also it displays
a short description of error messages encountered when starting up the
DHCP relay if it fails to enable the relay
Parameters: none

Command: show dhcp server config all

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show dhcp server config all
Explanation: Shows all the DHCP server configurations including all subnets and hosts
Parameters: none

Command: show dhcp server config host

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show dhcp server config host
Explanation: Shows the DHCP server specific host configuration specified by its name
Parameters: name host name in configuration

Command: show dhcp server config subnet

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show dhcp server config subnet
Explanation: Shows specific subnet configuration specified by its name
Parameters: name subnet name in configuration
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 82/94 DXC 5000

Command: show dhcp server lease

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show dhcp server lease
Explanation: Shows the DHCP server lease information given to the clients. This is test
file format describing IP address and client h/w address and start of lease
time, end of lease time for each client etc.
Parameters: none

Command: show dhcp server status

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show dhcp server status
Explanation: Shows the DHCP server current status, enabled or disabled. Also it
displays a short description of error messages encountered while starting
up the DHCP server if it fails to enable the server
Parameters: none

Command: show policy

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show policy
Explanation: Shows policy configuration
Parameters: [list_name] Show rules in the list_name

Command: show interface ifname config

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show interface ifname config
Explanation: Shows LAN configuration
Parameters: none

Command: show interface ifname speed

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show interface ifname speed
Explanation: Shows LAN speed/duplex setting
Parameters: none

Command: show interface ifname statistics

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show interface ifname statistics
Explanation: Shows LAN traffic statistics
Parameters: [interval] Timing interval in secs to refresh display (1~60)
If the parameter is absent, the command only shows statistics once.
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 83/94

Command: show interface ifname chdlc

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show interface ifname chdlc
Explanation: Shows Cisco HDlC parameters
Parameters: none

Command: show interface ifname frame_relay

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show interface ifname frame_relay
Explanation: Shows current Frame Relay configuration
Parameters: none

Command: show interface ifname nat

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show interface ifname nat
Explanation: Shows NAT/NAPT configuration
Parameters: none

Command: show interface ifname ospf config

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show interface ifname route ospf config
Explanation: Show the network interface related OSPF configurations
Parameters:

Command: show interface ifname ospf status

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show interface ifname route ospf status
Explanation: Show the network interface related OSPF status
Parameters:

Command: show route entry

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show route entry
Explanation: Shows routing entries
Parameters: [all] Show all routing entries including dynamic entries
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 84/94 DXC 5000

Command: show route ospf border-routers

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show route ospf border-routers
Explanation: Show the border and boundary router current status
Parameters:

Command: show route ospf config

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show route ospf config [area_id] [intf_name]
Explanation: Show the OSPF configuration
Parameters:

Command: show route ospf database

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show route ospf database
Explanation: Show the OSPF database summary
Parameters:

Command: show route ospf neighbor

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show route ospf neighbor
Explanation: Show the OSPF neighbor list
Parameters:

Command: show route ospf route

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show route ospf route
Explanation: Show the OSPF routing entries
Parameters:

Command: show route ospf router-info

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show route ospf router-info
Explanation: Show the OSPF router current status
Parameters:
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 85/94

Command: show system fwinfo

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show system fwinfo
Explanation: Shows card firmware information
Parameters: none

Command: show system hwinfo

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show system hwinfo
Explanation: Shows card hardware information
Parameters: none

Command: show system config

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show system config
Explanation: Show system configuration
Parameters: [file] working_cfg / startup (default is working_cfg)

Command: show system log

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show system log
Explanation: Show startup config error log
Parameters: none

Command: show timeslot

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: show timeslot
Explanation: Shows current timeslot assignment
Parameters: none
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 86/94 DXC 5000

17.10 System Command

Command: system active routing

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: system active routing key
Explanation: Activates the routing feature. If users already ordered a Route-A interface
card with the bridge function only, the users are able to enable the routing
function by ordering an activation key from AREVA then entering the key by
the command. The newly entered key will enable the routing function after
system reboot and hide the command.
Parameters: key The activation key.

Command: system configuration reset

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: system configuration reset
Explanation: Resets configuration to factory default values
Parameters:

Command: system configuration save

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: system configuration save
Explanation: Saves working configuration as startup configuration. Usually, the Router-A
immediately makes configuration changes effective and stores the change
in volatile RAM. The command stores the newest working configuration into
nonvolatile memory to make them effective after the system reboots.
Parameters:

Command: system firmware load

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: system firmware load url
Explanation: Upgrades system firmware from a TFTP server.
Parameters: url URL of the firmware image. (tftp://server_ip/file_name)
server_ip: IP address of the TFTP sever
file_name: file name of the new firmware image

Command: system reboot

Privilege: Admin
Syntax: system reboot
Explanation: Reboots the system.
Parameters: none
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 87/94

17.11 Command List

B dhcp server subnet subnet_name option 64
bridge brg_name age ..................................53 dhcp server subnet subnet_name router
bridge brg_name delete..............................53 add ............................................................ 64
bridge brg_name fcs ...................................53 dhcp server subnet subnet_name router
bridge brg_name ip .....................................53 delete ........................................................ 64
bridge brg_name managemet ....................53 H
bridge brg_name policy mac......................54 hosts ............................................................. 29
bridge brg_name spantree age ..................54 I
bridge brg_name spantree delay ...............55 interface lan1 alias add .............................. 65
bridge brg_name spantree hello................55 interface lan1 alias delete .......................... 65
bridge brg_name spantree priority............55 interface lan1 ip .......................................... 65
bridge brg_name spantree setup...............56 interface lan1 policy acl ............................. 65
bridge brg_name vlan add..........................56 interface lan1 policy mac ........................... 66
bridge brg_name vlan create .....................56 interface lan1 route ospf setup 66, 67, 68, 77
bridge brg_name vlan delete......................56 interface lan1 route rip setup .................... 66
bridge brg_name vlan destroy ...................56 interface lan1 route rip version ................. 66
bridge brg_name vlan mgmt ......................57 interface lan1 spantree cost ...................... 68
bridge brg_name vlan regencrc.................57 interface lan1 spantree edge_port ............ 68
bridge brg_name vlan setup ......................57 interface lan1 spantree link_type.............. 68
bridge create ................................................52 interface lan1 spantree priority ................. 69
bridge destroy..............................................52 interface lan1 speed ................................... 69
D interface lan1 vlan frame-type................... 69
dhcp relay interface add .............................58 interface lan1 vlan ingress-filter ............... 69
dhcp relay interface delete .........................58 interface lan1 vlan pvid .............................. 70
dhcp relay server.........................................58 interface wan1 chdlc .................................. 70
dhcp relay setup..........................................58 interface wan1 encapsulation ................... 70
dhcp server host add ..................................58 interface wan1 frame-relay ........................ 70
dhcp server host delete ..............................59 interface wan1 napt setup.......................... 71
dhcp server host host_name bootfile .......59 interface wan1 napt static add .................. 71
dhcp server host host_name client_id......59 interface wan1 napt static delete .............. 71
dhcp server host host_name fixed_addr ..59 interface wan1 nat address add ................ 71
dhcp server host host_name hardware ....59 interface wan1 nat address delete ............ 71
dhcp server host host_name lease ...........60 interface wan1 nat setup............................ 72
dhcp server host host_name next_server 60 interface wan1 nat static add .................... 72
dhcp server host host_name option .........60 interface wan1 nat static delete ................ 72
dhcp server interface add...........................60 interface wan1 pvc1 dlci ............................ 73
dhcp server interface delete.......................60 interface wan1 queue ................................. 72
dhcp server setup .......................................64 P
dhcp server subnet add..............................61 ping .............................................................. 52
dhcp server subnet delete..........................61 policy acl create.......................................... 74
dhcp server subnet subnet_name bootfile policy acl destroy ....................................... 74
...................................................................61 policy acl list1 append ............................... 74
dhcp server subnet subnet_name bootp..61 policy acl list1 delete.................................. 74
dhcp server subnet subnet_name policy mac create........................................ 74
dns_server add ........................................61 policy mac destroy ..................................... 75
dhcp server subnet subnet_name policy mac list2 append ............................. 75
dns_server delete ....................................62 policy mac list2 delete................................ 75
dhcp server subnet subnet_name R
domain_name...........................................62 route static add ..................................... 76, 77
dhcp server subnet subnet_name ip_range route static delete ................................. 76, 81
...................................................................62 S
dhcp server subnet subnet_name lease...62 show bridge................................................. 78
dhcp server subnet subnet_name nbns add show bridge brg_name config .................. 78
...................................................................62 show bridge brg_name spantree .............. 78
dhcp server subnet subnet_name nbns show bridge brg_name vlan port .............. 78
delete.........................................................63 show bridge brg_name vlan state............. 78
dhcp server subnet subnet_name show bridge brg_name vlan table............. 79
netb_type ..................................................63 show dhcp relay config.............................. 79
dhcp server subnet subnet_name network show dhcp relay status .............................. 79
...................................................................63 show dhcp server config all....................... 79
dhcp server subnet subnet_name show dhcp server config host................... 79
next_server...............................................63 show dhcp server config subnet ................... 79
RTA/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 88/94 DXC 5000

show dhcp server lease ............................. 80 show system hwinfo................................... 83

show dhcp server status ........................... 80 show system log ......................................... 83
show int lan1 config ................................... 80 show timeslot .............................................. 83
show int lan1 speed.................................... 80 subnet mask prefix length ............................... 1
show int lan1 statistics .............................. 80 system active routing ................................. 84
show int wan1 chdlc................................... 81 system configuration reset ........................ 84
show int wan1 frame_relay........................ 81 system configuration save......................... 84
show int wan1 nat....................................... 81 system firmware load ................................. 84
show policy ................................................. 80 system reboot.............................................. 84
show route entry................................... 81, 82 T
show system config ................................... 83 TFTP server .................................................. 48
show system fwinfo.................................... 83 traceroute..................................................... 52
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 89/94

18. APPENDIX: CONVERTING A SUBNET MASK TO BINARY CODE

IP addresses are sometimes followed by their subnet mask expressed in binary (base two)
code. This binary code is called a prefix length. For example, 192.168.1.1 16 is an IP
address followed by the prefix length 16. The prefix length 16 represents the subnet mask
255.255.0.0.
The simplest way to convert a legal subnet mask into a prefix length is to use the scientific
calculator located on most PCs. In the sample Windows screen below, click on Start and
then move the cursor over the Program and Accessories headings to arrive at the
Calculator heading. Click on the Calculator heading.

The calculator will appear. Click on the Dec (Decimal) heading. A dot will mark the circle
beside the Dec heading as shown below (You can ignore the right hand side headings:
Degrees, Radians and Grads.)

The sample subnet mask that we will convert from base ten notation to base two notation is
255.255.0.0. Key in the value 255.
RTU/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 90/94 DXC 5000

Click the Bin (Binary) heading. The base two equivalent of 255 will appear as 11111111.

Now let’s look at our base ten subnet mask, 255.255.0.0. We know that 255 converts to
11111111 in base two. We also know that 0 is 0 regardless of what base it is expressed in.

base ten
255 255 0
. . . 0
base two 11111111 11111111 0 0

D0517ENa
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 91/94

If you look at the base two line in the above drawing you will notice that there are sixteen 1s
in it. The prefix length of the subnet mask 255.255.0.0. is thus 16. The table of subnet mask
show as below.

Subnet Mask Prefix Length

Class A Network 255.0.0.0 8
Class B Network 255.255.0.0 16
255.255.128.0 17
255.255.192.0 18
255.255.224.0 19
255.255.240.0 20
255.255.248.0 21
255.255.252.0 22
255.255.254.0 23
Class C Network 255.255.255.0 24
255.255.255.128 25
255.255.255.192 26
255.255.255.224 27
255.255.255.240 28
255.255.255.248 29
255.255.255.252 30
255.255.255.254 31
Single Host Address 255.255.255.255 32

TABLE 9: SUBNET MASK AND PREFIX LENGTH CONVERSION

RTU/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 92/94 DXC 5000

19. APPENDIX: ROUTER-ACTIVATION PROCEDURE

19.1 Connect a hyperterminal Terminal to the Router-A card Console Port
Use a DB9 straight cable to connect the front panel Console Port of the AM3440 Router-A
card to either COM Port 1 or COM Port 2 of the PC you are using as a hyperterminal
monitor. It doesn’t matter which COM Port you connect to.

1 1 1
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9
4 0 1 2

C C
P P
U U

1 2

Straight UTP/ STP RS232 Cable

to PC's COM Port

PC running VT-100 emulation software

D0518ENa

FIGURE 19: HYPERTERMINAL

NOTE: Many newer PCs use USB Ports. If your computer has a USB port
rather than COM ports you will need to purchase a commercially
available PC USB to DB9 RS232 conversion cable. These cables
come with software which, when loaded into a PC, will allow you to
send keyboard commands through the PC’s USB Port to the DB9
Console Port of the Router-A card.
Make sure all communication parameters are correct (ie. baud rate, data bit, stop bit, and
interface).
19.2 Power up the hyperterminal and the DXC5000 router.
When your hyperterminal and the Router-A card unit are powered up, the DXC5000 screen
will appear on your hyperterminal monitor.
19.3 Find your device serial number
Key in the command show system hwinfo. Press Enter. Hardware information will appear
on the screen.
A sample screen is shown below. On our sample screen the DXC5000 serial number is 27.
Your serial number will be different.
[C]admin>show system hwinfo
Hardware version: A
Serial number: 27
MAC addresses: 00:50:C6:01:57:FD
00:50:C6:01:57:FE
Command succeeded

Write down your serial number and then match it to the serial number/activation number list
that was provided to you by AREVA. Find the Router-Activation code for your unit.
Key in the command system activate routing followed by the Router-Activation code you
found in step 3. Press Enter. If the activation code is correctly entered a prompt will say
“command succeeded”.
In the sample screen below we keyed in the admin command system activate routing
0BCE88FE092388EC7E63AC0F70C587D2 because that was the activation code provided
by AREVA for serial number 27.
[C]admin>system activate routing 0BCE88FE092388EC7E63AC0F70C587D2
RTA Configuration RTA/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 93/94

19.4 Reboot system

In order to activate the router function you must reboot the Router-A card. You can do this by
unplugging the card then plugging it into the slot or by using the system reboot command.
This procedure is now complete. All router-related commands should now be available.
RTU/EN U/A22 RTA Configuration

Page 94/94 DXC 5000

20. GLOSSARY
ACL Access Control List
CIR Committed Information Rate
CLI Command Line Interface
DCE Data Circuit-terminating Equip-connects
DHCP Dynamic host Configuration Protocol
DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier
DNS Domain name server
DS1 Digital Signal, Level One E1 or T1
E1 European Digital signal, Level One
FR Frame Relay
FTP File Transfer Protocol
HDLC High Level Data Link Control
HTTP Hyper Text Transmission Protocol
ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol
IP Internet Protocol
LAN Local Area Network
LED Light Emidding Diode
MAC Media Access Control
NAT Network Address Translation
NAPT Network Address Port Translation
PING Packets Internet Groper
PVCs Private Vitual Circuit
RAM Random Access Memory
RIP Router Information Protocol
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
TFTP Trivial FTP
URL Universual Record Locater
VID VLAN ID
VLAN Virtual LAN
WAN Wide Area Network
WINS Windows Internet Naming Service
Low Speed Optical Fiber LS-OF/EN U/A22

DXC 5000

LOW SPEED OPTICAL FIBER

Low Speed Optical Fiber LS-OF/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 1/22

CONTENTS

1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 5
1.1 Overview 5
1.2 Applications 5
1.3 Specifications 5

2. INSTALLATION 6
2.1 Site Selection 6
2.2 Mechanical Installation 6
2.3 LED Operation 6

3. FRONT PANEL OPERATION 7

3.1 Main Menu 8
3.2 Port Menu 8
3.2.1 Configuration 8
3.2.2 Status 9
3.2.3 Alarm 9
3.2.4 Diagnostic 12
3.2.5 Card Information 12
3.2.6 Miscellaneous 12

4. MAINTENANCE 14
4.1 Near End Loopback 14

5. TERMINAL OPERATION 15
5.1 Port Status 15
5.2 Port Configuration 16
5.3 Port Setup 16
5.4 Port Loopback and Test 17
5.5 Port Alarm Setup 18
5.6 Port Alarm History 18
5.7 Clear Card Alarm History 19
5.8 Port 1-Hour Perf. Report 19
5.9 Port 24-Hour Perf. Report 20
5.10 Clear Card Performance Data 20
5.11 Card Load Default Config 21
LS-OF/EN U/A22 Low Speed Optical Fiber

Page 2/22 DXC 5000

BLANK PAGE
Low Speed Optical Fiber LS-OF/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 3/22

MODIFICATIONS PAGE
Version DATE COMMENTS
A 04/07/2007 ORIGINAL ISSUE
LS-OF/EN U/A22 Low Speed Optical Fiber

Page 4/22 DXC 5000

D Bitte führen Sie das Gerät am Ende seinerLewbensdauer den zue Verfügung
stehended Rückgabeund Sammelsystemen zu.

GB At the end of the product's useful life, please dispose of it at appropriate

collection points provided in your country.

F Une fois le produit en fin devie, veuillez le déposer dans un point de recyclage
approprié.

ES Para preservar el medio ambiente, al final dela vida útil de su producto,

depositelo en los laguares destinado aello de acuerdo con la legislación
vigente.

P No final de vida útil do producto, por favor coloque no ponto de recolha

apropriado.

I Onde tutelare l'ambiente, non buttate l'apparecchio trai i normali rifiuti al

termine della sua vita utile, ma portatelo presso i punti do taccolta specifici per
questi rifiuti previsti dalla normativa vigente.

NL Wij raden u aan het apparant aan het einde van zijn nuttige levensduur, niet
bij hey gewone huisafval te deponeren, maar op de dearvoor bestemde
adressen.

DK Når produktet er udtjent, bor det børtskaffes via de sæ rlige indsamlingssteder

i landet.

N Ved slutten av produktets levetid bør det avhendes på en kommunal

miljøstasjon eller leveres til en elektroforhandler.

S Lämna vänligen in produkten på lämplig återvinningsstation när den är

förbrukad.

FIN Hävitä tuote käytöiän päättyessä viemällä se asianmukaiseen

keräyspisteeseen.

PL Gdy produkt nie nadaje sie juz do dalszego uzytku, nalezy zostawic go w
jednym ze specjalnych punktów zajmujacych sie zbiórka zuzytych producktów
w wybranych miejscach na terenie kraju.

CZ Po skon ení jeho životnosti odložte prosím výrobek na p islušném sb•rném

místé z ízeném dle p edpis ve vaší zemi.

SK Po skon ení jeho životnosti odovzdajte prosím zariadenie na príslušnom

zbernom mieste podía platných miestnych predpisov a noriem.

SLO Ko se izdelku izte e življenska doba, ga odnesite na ustrezno zbirno mesto

oziroma ga odvrzite v skladu z veljavnimi predpisi.

GR Στο Тέλος тης λειτουργικής Ζωής του προϊόντος παρακαλώ

Πετξτε το στα ειōικά σηµεία που Παρέχονται οτη χωρα σας.

PRC 當產品使用壽命結束,請在你的國家所提供的適當地點做好回收處理
Low Speed Optical Fiber LS-OF/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 5/22

1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
1.1 Overview
The Loop LS-Optical Fiber for Interference intra-substation data link between AM3440 and
Relay (high RFI immunity).
1.2 Applications

Central Office Network

T1/ E1

DXC 5000 T1/ E1 Protective

Relay

FOM LS-Optical
Customer Site

Protective
LS-Optical Relay
FOM

DXC 5000

LS-Optical
Network Service
Provider

D0602ENa

1.3 Specifications
LS-Fiber Optical Interface

Source LED Optical Line Rate 2.048Mbps

Wavelength 820nm 2Km reach Line Code NRZ
Connector ST Fiber Type Multimode
Optical Power Budget 62.5 Micron core/ 15db Optical Power 12dBm

NOTE: Both 1 Port and 4 Port versions support ALS

(Automatic Laser Shutdown) function.
LS-OF/EN U/A22 Low Speed Optical Fiber

Page 6/22 DXC 5000

2. INSTALLATION
2.1 Site Selection
The following list indicates a site selection guideline. Users need to follow this guideline to
select a proper installation site.

• Location of the Rack should be part of the central office equipment layout design.
Considerations should be given to entrance cable routing and -48 Vdc power.

• The installation site should have -48 Vdc power. An optional AC/DC power converter
can be used. Use Only with Class 2 power source, -48 Vdc, 100 watts.
2.2 Mechanical Installation
The LS-Optical Fiber card is designed to plug into any of the available slots in the Loop-
AM3440-A device. The front panel is shown in the following figure.

FIGURE 1: LS-OPTICAL FIBER CARD FRONT PANEL

2.3 LED Operation
The following tables list LS-Optical Fiber type port, its color, and indications.

LED Color Indication

Red UNSYNC
LS-Optical Fiber Type Port Green SYNC
Yellow Receive Alarm
Flashing Yellow Loopback
ACT Flashing Green Activation

TABLE 1: LED INDICATION OF THE LS-OPTICAL FIBER CARD

ON THE LOOP-AM3440 FRONT PANEL
Low Speed Optical Fiber LS-OF/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 7/22

3. FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The hand-held LCD of the Loop-AM 3440 utilizes a 2-line by 40 character display and four
keys labeled ESC, ENTER, left arrow '<', and right arrow '>', as shown in Figure 3-1. The
ENTER key is to enable a selection, while the left and right arrow keys move the cursor to
the left and right respectively. The ESC key returns to the next higher level of selection or to
the main menu without performing any operation.
NOTE: For each selection or change, ENTER key must be pressed to
confirm.

POWER E1/T1(A) E1/T1(B) CPU-1 CPU-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

E1/ E1/
T1 T1 C C
P P
U U
E1/T1(C) E1/T1(D)

1 2

E1/ E1/
T1 T1

ESC ENTER

Hand-held LCD Device

D0535ENa

ESC ENTER
D0536ENa

FIGURE 2: FRONT PANEL OF THE HAND-HELD LCD

The LS-Optical Fiber LCD menu tree is shown below. By successively selecting the menu
item at each level, the desired operation or display can be obtained.

LS-Optical

PORT INFO MISC

DIA H/W DEFAULT

CONFIG STATUS ALARM
G

Mode LOS LOS Near-END

RECEIVE- YEL
BW YEL TEST-PATT

TRANSMIT - FRAMING- ES
BW ERR
SES
PAYLOAD-
ERR
UAS

D0605ENa
LS-OF/EN U/A22 Low Speed Optical Fiber

Page 8/22 DXC 5000

3.1 Main Menu

Use arrow keys to move the cursor to the UNIT option, then press ENTER.

AM3440
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

Use arrow keys to select a unit for LS-Optical Fiber interface.

UNIT> Select Unit: <LS-OPTICAL>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

3.2 Port Menu

This menu is used to select a desired port from LS-Optical Fiber card.

6LSO>PORT INFO MISC

Select Port

Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor at a desired port, then press ENTER
to enter into its sub-menu.

6LSO> Select Port Number

PORT-1 PORT-2 PORT-3 PORT-4

3.2.1 Configuration
The "CONFIG" menu is used to set up LS-Optical Fiber card.

6LSO-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

LS-OPTICAL Configuration

3.2.1.1 Mode
The "Mode" is used to set up the mode of LS-Optical Fiber card, the options includes manual
and auto.

6LSO-1 CONFIG>MODE RECEIVE-BW TRANSMIT-BW

MANUAL

6LSO-1 CONFIG>MODE RECEIVE-BW TRANSMIT-BW

*MANUAL AUTO

3.2.1.2 RECEIVE-BW
The "RECEIVE-BW" is used to set up the receive bandwidth of LS-Optical Fiber card.

6LSO-1 CONFIG> MODE RECEIVE-BW TRANSMIT-BW

10
Low Speed Optical Fiber LS-OF/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 9/22

3.2.1.3 TRANSMIT-BW
The "TRANSMIT-BW" is used to set up the transmit bandwidth of LS-Optical Fiber card.

6LSO-1 CONFIG> MODE RECEIVE-BW TRANSMIT-BW

12

6LSO-1 CONFIG> MODE RECEIVE-BW TRANSMIT-BW

*12 OK

3.2.2 Status
The "Status" menu is used to display the current status for LS-Optical Fiber card.

6LSO-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

LSO-OPTICAL Status

3.2.2.1 LOS
The Status includes LOS, YEL, FRAMING-ERR and PAYLOAD-ERR. The screen as
following.

6LSO-1 STATUS>LOS YEL FRAMING-ERR PAYLOAD-ERR

NO

3.2.2.2 YEL

6LSO-1 STATUS>LOS YEL FRAMING-ERR PAYLOAD-ERR

NO

3.2.2.3 FRAMING-ERR

6LSO-1 STATUS>LOS YEL FRAMING-ERR PAYLOAD-ERR

0

3.2.2.4 PAYLOAD-ERR

6LSO-1 STATUS>LOS YEL FRAMING-ERR PAYLOAD-ERR

0

3.2.3 Alarm
The "ALARM" menu is used to do display alarm status and set up alarm.

6LSO-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

Alarm Setup
LS-OF/EN U/A22 Low Speed Optical Fiber

Page 10/22 DXC 5000

3.2.3.1 LOS
The Alarm includes LOS, YEL, ES, SES and UAS. The screen as following. The options for
LOS are Major, Critical, Minor and Disable. Using left and right arrow key cycle through to
the desired value and press ENTER. The current setting is indicated by “*”.

6LSO-1 ALARM>LOS YEL ES SES UAS

DISABLE

6LSO-1 ALARM>LOS YEL ES SES UAS

*DISABLE MAJOR CRITICAL MINOR

3.2.3.2 YEL
The options for YEL are Major, Critical, Minor and Disable. Using left and right arrow key
cycle through to the desired value and press ENTER. The current setting is indicated by “*”.

6LSO-1 ALARM>LOS YEL ES SES UAS

DISABLE

6LSO-1 ALARM>LOS YEL ES SES UAS

*DISABLE MAJOR CRITICAL MINOR

3.2.3.3 ES
The user can set up ES threshold through the key to the desired threshold value and press
ENTER. The range of threshold is from 0 to 900. The current setting is indicated by “*”.

6LSO-1 ALARM> LOS YEL ES SES UAS

DISABLE THRESHOLD = 1

6LSO-1 ES>ALARM THRESHOLD

DISABLE

3.2.3.3.1 Alarm

6LSO-1 ES>ALARM THRESHOLD

*DISABLE MAJOR CRITICAL MINOR

3.2.3.3.2 Threshold

6LSO-1 ES>ALARM THRESHOLD

*001 OK
(0-900)
Low Speed Optical Fiber LS-OF/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 11/22

3.2.3.4 SES
The user can set up SES threshold through the key to the desired threshold value and press
ENTER. The range of threshold is from 0 to 900. The current setting is indicated by “*”.

6LSO-1 ALARM> LOS YEL ES SES UAS

DISABLE THRESHOLD = 1

6LSO-1 SES>ALARM THRESHOLD

DISABLE

3.2.3.4.1 Alarm

6LSO-1 SES>ALARM THRESHOLD

*DISABLE MAJOR CRITICAL MINOR

3.2.3.4.2 Threshold

6LSO-1 SES>ALARM THRESHOLD

*001 OK
(0-900)

3.2.3.5 UAS
The user can set up UAS threshold through the key to the desired threshold value and press
ENTER. The range of threshold is from 0 to 900. The current setting is indicated by “*”

6LSO-1 ALARM> LOS YEL ES SES UAS

DISABLE THRESHOLD = 1

6LSO-1 UAS>ALARM THRESHOLD

DISABLE

3.2.3.5.1 Alarm

6LSO-1 UAS>ALARM THRESHOLD

*DISABLE MAJOR CRITICAL MINOR

3.2.3.5.2 Threshold

6LSO-1 UAS>ALARM THRESHOLD

*001 OK
(0-900)
LS-OF/EN U/A22 Low Speed Optical Fiber

Page 12/22 DXC 5000

3.2.4 Diagnostic
The "DIAG" menu is used to do diagnostic setup.

6LSO-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

Diagnostic

3.2.4.1 Near-END
This menu is used to select the near-end loopback.

6LSO-1 DIAG>NEAR-END TEST-PATT

OFF

6LSO-1 DIAG>NEAR-END REMOTE TEST-PATT

*OFF LOCAL PAYLOAD LINE

3.2.4.2 TEST-PATT
This menu is used to enable or disable loopback test pattern.

6LSO-1 DIAG>NEAR-END TEST-PATT

OFF

6LSO-1 DIAG>NEAR-END TEST-PATT

*OFF ON

3.2.5 Card Information

This menu is used to show the hardware information of card.

6LSO>PORT INFO MISC

Card Information

3.2.5.1 H/W

6LSO INFO>H/W
FPGA Ver.A PCB Ver.A BOM Ver.000

3.2.6 Miscellaneous
The user can set up Miscellaneous through the key to the “MISC” and press ENTER.

6LSO>PORT INFO MISC

Miscellaneous
Low Speed Optical Fiber LS-OF/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 13/22

3.2.6.1 Default

6LSO MISC>DEFAULT
Load Default

6LSO MISC>DEFAULT
Load Default?
LS-OF/EN U/A22 Low Speed Optical Fiber

Page 14/22 DXC 5000

4. MAINTENANCE
4.1 Near End Loopback
The near end Loopbacks such as Local Loopback, Line Loopback and PayLoad Loopback
are activated by the local Loop-AM3440. The loopbacks are at the near end facility. The
following paragraph describes each loopback in detail.

LS-Optical Fiber

Tx
3 2 1

Rx

1 Line Loopback
2 Local Loopback
3 PayLoad Loopback
D0606ENa

FIGURE 3: LOOPBACK BLOCK DIAGRAM

Low Speed Optical Fiber LS-OF/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 15/22

5. TERMINAL OPERATION
The Loop-AM3440 series provides comprehensive report and enhanced configuration
capability through the console port on the front of the main unit. A VT100 type terminal can
be connected to the console port, which is a standard RS232 interface. Using single-
character commands and arrow keys, The Loop-AM3440 can be configured and monitored.
The single-character commands are not case sensitive. On each screen, the available
commands and the configurable fields are highlighted. Alarm messages are also sent to the
console port and are shown on the top of the screen in a blinking mode. Upon power up, the
main menu is shown.
On the upper right corner of the screen, a time-of-day display indicates the time the current
screen is shown. Any key, other than ESC, may be pressed to update the screen.
NOTE: Without storing the current configuration by using the V-command in
the main menu, all new configuration changes will not remain active
after the unit is reset.
SLOT 6 LS- OPTI CAL PO RT 1 === Por t M enu === 1 7:11 :01 03 /09/ 200 6
Vers ion : HW FPG A Ve r.A PC B Ve r.A BO M Ve r.0 00

[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]

1 -> Po rt 1-Ho ur Per f. R epo rt S -> Po rt Setu p
2 -> Po rt 24-H our Pe rf. Rep ort L -> Po rt Loop bac k a nd T est
C -> Po rt Conf igu rat ion M -> Po rt Alar m S etu p
I -> Po rt Stat us X -> Cl ear Car d A lar m Hi sto ry
H -> Po rt Alar m H ist ory K -> Cl ear Car d P erf orma nce Da ta

[LOG ] [MIS C]
U -> Ch oos e Ot her Sl ot Y -> Ca rd Load De fau lt C onf ig
P -> Ch oos e LS -OP TIC AL P ort
F -> Lo g O ff [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu
O -> Lo g O n [ SET UP] ,[MI SC] Me nu
E -> Re tur n to Co ntr olle r M ain Men u

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

5.1 Port Status

Under the “Port Menu”, press "I" to view the status of the LS-Optical Fiber interface card.
SLOT 6 LS-OPTICAL PORT 1 === Port Status === 17:11:15 03/09/2006

-- LINE --
LOS: NO
YEL: NO
FRAMING ERROR: 0
PAYLOAD ERROR: 0

-- TEST --
NEAR-END LOOPBACK : OFF
PATTERN TRANSMITTED: OFF

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
LS-OF/EN U/A22 Low Speed Optical Fiber

Page 16/22 DXC 5000

5.2 Port Configuration

Under the “Port Menu”, press "S" to setup the port configuration of the LS-Optical Fiber
interface card.
The MODE has Manual and Auto options, and default is Manual. The definition of Manual is
allowing the users setting transmit bandwidth from 0 to 12, and Auto is allowing system
setting receive bandwidth and transmit bandwidth automatically.
The range of TRANSMIT BW is from 0 to 12, the default value is 0.
LOT 6 LS-OPTICAL PORT 1=== Port Configuration ===17:11:40 03/09/2006

MODE = MANUAL
RECEIVE BW = 00 TS
TRANSMIT BW = 12 TS

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

NOTE: RECEIVE BW = Receive bandwidth

TRANSMIT BW= Transmit bandwidth
5.3 Port Setup
Under the “Port Menu”, press "S" to do setup for the LS-Optical Fiber interface card. When
the user see ALS=DISABLE from the screen below, Laser of Optical Card will not shut down
automatically.
SLOT 4 LS-OPTICAL PORT 1 === Port Setup === 10:17:20
12/06/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

MODE = MANUAL
RECEIVE BW = 00 TS
TRANSMIT BW = 00 TS
ALS = DISABLE

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

NOTE: ALS = Auto Laser shut down

Low Speed Optical Fiber LS-OF/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 17/22

5.4 Port Loopback and Test

Under the “Port Menu”, press "L" to setup the loopback test of the LS-Optical Fiber interface
card. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*). There are three types
Loopback supported, including Local Loopback, Payload Loopback and Line Loopback.
SLOT 6 LS-OPTICAL PORT 1===Port Loopback and Test===17:13:56 03/09/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY: ITEM SELECT

- NEAR-END LOOPBACK : *OFF LOCAL PAYLOAD LINE

- Send 2exp20-1 Pattern: *OFF ON

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

SLOT 6 LS-OPTICAL PORT 1===Port Loopback and Test===17:13:56 03/09/2006

ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE , E NTE R KE Y: ITE M SE LEC T

- NEAR-END LOOPBACK : *OFF LOCAL PAYLOAD LINE

- Send 2exp20-1 Pattern: *OFF ON

BERT U NSY NC B IT ERR OR=0

ERRO R S ECO NDS= 0 ELA PSED SE CON DS=1 3

<< E SC KEY : EX IT, LE FT A RRO W: RESE T E RRO R, R IGH T A RROW : I NJE CT A N E RRO R >>
LS-OF/EN U/A22 Low Speed Optical Fiber

Page 18/22 DXC 5000

5.5 Port Alarm Setup

Under the “Port Menu”, press "M" to setup alarm of the LS-Optical Fiber interface card.
There are five types of Alarm, including LOS (Lose of Signal Alarm), YEL (YEL Alarm), ES
(Error Second Alarm), SES (Severely Error Second Alarm) and UAS (Unavailable Second
Alarm).
SLOT 6 LS-OPTICAL PORT 1=== Port Alarm Setup ===17:17:44 03/09/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

[TYPE] [THRESHOLD] [ALARM]

LOS DISABLE
YEL DISABLE
ES 001 DISABLE
SES 001 DISABLE
UAS 001 DISABLE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

NOTE: The range of threshold for ES, SES and UAS is from 1 to 900.
5.6 Port Alarm History
Under the “Port Menu”, press "H" to view alarm history of the LS-Optical Fiber interface card.
SLOT 6 LS-OPTICAL PORT 1===Port Alarm History===17:18:25 03/09/2006

[Alarm-Type] [Count] [State] [Setup] [Threshold]

LOS 0 DIS DISABLE
YEL 0 DIS DISABLE
ES 0 DIS DISABLE 1
SES 0 DIS DISABLE 1
UAS 0 DIS DISABLE 1

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
Low Speed Optical Fiber LS-OF/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 19/22

5.7 Clear Card Alarm History

Under the “Port Menu”, press "X" to clear alarm history of the LS-Optical Fiber interface card.
SLOT 6 LS-OPTICAL PORT 1=== Port Menu ===17:18:47 03/09/2006

Version : HW FPGA Ver.A PCB Ver.A BOM Ver.000

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Port 1-Hour Perf. Report S -> Port Setup
2 -> Port 24-Hour Perf. Report L -> Port Loopback and Test
C -> Port Configuration M -> Port Alarm Setup
I -> Port Status X -> Clear Card Alarm History
H -> Port Alarm History K -> Clear Card Performance Data

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Card Load Default Config
P -> Choose LS-OPTICAL Port
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Clear Card Alarm History - are you sure ? [Y/N]

5.8 Port 1-Hour Perf. Report

Under the “Port Menu”, press "1" to view 1-Hour performance report of the LS-Optical Fiber
interface card.
SLOT 6 LS-OPTICAL PORT 1 === 1 Hour Perf. Report ===17:21:21 03/09/2006

>> Select Register Type ? *USER LINE

SLOT 6 LS-OPTICAL PORT 1 === 1 Hour Perf. Report ===17:22:38 03/09/2006

USER
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval: 458 seconds

(ES) (SES) (UAS)

Current 15-Min Interval : 0 0 0
1st Nearest 15-Min Interval: 0 0 0
2nd Nearest 15-Min Interval: 0 0 0
3rd Nearest 15-Min Interval: 0 0 0
4th Nearest 15-Min Interval: ----- ----- -----

-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 3

(ES) (SES) (UAS)
Current 24-Hour Interval : 0 0 0
03/08/2006 : ----- ----- -----
03/07/2006 : ----- ----- -----
03/06/2006 : ----- ----- -----
03/05/2006 : ----- ----- -----
03/04/2006 : ----- ----- -----
03/03/2006 : ----- ----- -----
03/02/2006 : ----- ----- -----

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
LS-OF/EN U/A22 Low Speed Optical Fiber

Page 20/22 DXC 5000

5.9 Port 24-Hour Perf. Report

Under the “Port Menu”, press "2" to view 24-Hour performance report of the LS-Optical Fiber
interface card.
SLOT 6 LS-OPTICAL PORT 1===24 Hours Perf. Report===17:21:50 03/09/2006

>> Select Register Type ? *USER LINE

>> Select Parameter ? *ES SES UAS

SLOT 6 LS-OPTICAL PORT 1===24 Hours Perf. Report===17:23:13 03/09/2006

USER
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval: 493 seconds
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 3
(ES) (SES) (UAS)
Current 15-Min Interval : 0 0 0
Current 24-Hour Interval : 0 0 0

-- LINE, ES , Last 96 15-Min Interval:

01-08 17:15 > 0 0 0 ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
09-16 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
17-24 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
25-32 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
33-40 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
41-48 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
49-56 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
57-64 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
65-72 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
73-80 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
81-88 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
89-96 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

5.10 Clear Card Performance Data

Under the “Port Menu”, press "K" to clear card performance data of the LS-Optical Fiber
interface card.
SLOT 6 LS-OPTICAL PORT 1=== Port Menu ===17:24:30 03/09/2006

Version : HW FPGA Ver.A PCB Ver.A BOM Ver.000

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Port 1-Hour Perf. Report S -> Port Setup
2 -> Port 24-Hour Perf. Report L -> Port Loopback and Test
C -> Port Configuration M -> Port Alarm Setup
I -> Port Status X -> Clear Card Alarm History
H -> Port Alarm History K -> Clear Card Performance Data

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Card Load Default Config
P -> Choose LS-OPTICAL Port
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Clear Card Performance Data - are you sure ? [Y/N]

Low Speed Optical Fiber LS-OF/EN U/A22

DXC 5000 Page 21/22

5.11 Card Load Default Config

Under the “Port Menu”, press "Y” to load default configuration of the LS-Optical Fiber
interface card.
SLOT 6 LS-OPTICAL PORT 1 === Port Menu === 17:24:30 03/09/2006

Version : HW FPGA Ver.A PCB Ver.A BOM Ver.000

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
1 -> Port 1-Hour Perf. Report S -> Port Setup
2 -> Port 24-Hour Perf. Report L -> Port Loopback and Test
C -> Port Configuration M -> Port Alarm Setup
I -> Port Status X -> Clear Card Alarm History
H -> Port Alarm History K -> Clear Card Performance Data

[LOG] [MISC]
U -> Choose Other Slot Y -> Card Load Default Config
P -> Choose LS-OPTICAL Port
F -> Log Off [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
O -> Log On [SETUP],[MISC] Menu
E -> Return to Controller Main Menu

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

LS-OF/EN U/A22 Low Speed Optical Fiber

Page 22/22 DXC 5000

BLANK PAGE
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 1/126

CONTENTS

1. MAIN MENU 16
1.1 Unit 16
1.1.1 Card Type Mismatch 16
1.2 Controller 16
1.2.1 IP 16
1.3 Port Menu 121
1.3.1 Configuration 121
1.3.2 Status 124
1.3.3 Alarm 125
1.3.4 Diagnostic 125
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 2/126 DXC 5000

BLANK PAGE
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 3/126

MODIFICATIONS PAGE
Version DATE COMMENTS
A 23/09/2004 ORIGINAL ISSUE
B 01/03/2005 SUPERSEDES VERSION A
A22 15/05/07 ????????
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 4/126 DXC 5000

BLANK PAGE
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 5/126

The hand-held LCD of the DXC 5000 utilizes a 2-line by 40 character display and four keys
labeled ESC, ENTER, left arrow '<', and right arrow '>', as shown in Figure 5-1. The ENTER
key is to enable a selection, while the left and right arrow keys move the cursor to the left
and right respectively. The ESC key returns to the next higher level of selection or to the
main menu without performing any operation.
NOTE : For each selection or change, ENTER key must be pressed to
confirm.

POWER E1/T1(A) E1/T1(B) CPU-1 CPU-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

E1/ E1/
T1 T1 C C
P P
U U
E1/T1(C) E1/T1(D)

1 2

E1/ E1/
T1 T1

ESC ENTER

Hand-held LCD Device

D0535ENa

ESC ENTER
D0536ENa

FIGURE 1: FRONT PANEL OF THE HAND-HELD LCD

The LCD menu tree is shown below. By successively selecting the menu item at each level,
the desired operation or display can be obtained.
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 6/126 DXC 5000

Main Menu

UNIT Controller TSI-MAP ALARM MISC

IP DATE INFO MCLK MISC BERT PROTECTION

INTERF S/ W MODE STORE SLOT QE1_PAIR

Ethernet MASTER
H/ W NORMAL RETRIEVE PORT
Port

HDLC Port SERIAL No. SSM DEFAULT TYPE SECOND

PPP Port CURR

SOURCE RESET MODE

MY_IP RECOVER
MASTER CHANNEL

SUBNET STATUS
USER
SECOND
PATTERN
GATEWAY
Backup
CURR PERIOD
TRAP_IP
RECOVER Function
TEST

STATUS Mode

Setup

Status

D0537ENa

Main Menu

UNIT Controller TSI-MAP ALARM MISC

Setup Queue Lock

Map-1
Current Source Slot
Setup Alarm 1_STATUS
Map Power
Map-2 Source Port
Copy Map Clear Relay 2_STATUS
Map-3 Source TS Alarm
Clear Map Cut Off Consumption
Set
TS_NUM Port
Inactive
Set Type Clock Loss
Alarm
Destined
Slot Link Switch
Destined
Port Map Switch
Destined
TS

Command

D0538ENa

FIGURE 2: LCD MENU TREE – MAIN MENU (1 OF 15)

Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 7/126

DS1

LINE DIAG INFO MISC ALARM

FRAME FRAME NearLB S/W STATUS CLEAR

CODE CODE RemLB DEFAULT SETUP

RAI YEL PATT RESET

CRC INBAND

AIS AIS

CAS CAS

SaBit Signalling

Signalling INTF

INTF LBO

FDL CGA

CGA OOS

OOS IDLE

IDLE

if E1 if T1
D0539ENa

FIGURE 3: LCD MENU TREE – E1/T1 MENU (2 OF 15)

DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 8/126 DXC 5000

Quad E1

PORT INFO MISC

S/W DEFAULT
LINE DIAG STATUS ALARM

RESET
Frame Frame NearLB CLEAR

Code Code RemLB SETUP

CRC YEL PATT

RAI AIS

AIS CAS

CAS Signaling

Signalling CGA

CGA OOS

OOS Inband

FDL Idle

SaBit Interface

Idle LBO

Protect FDL

Master Protect

Interface Master

if QE1 if QT1 D0540ENa

FIGURE 4: LCD MENU TREE – QUAD E1/T1 MENU (3 OF 15)

Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 9/126

FOM

PORT INFO MISC

H/W DEFAULT
CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

Local Next Local OPT

SYSTEM APSD

Optical Previous Local E1

APSD
FRAME
Enable
E1 Edit Remote OPT
Repetition
CRC
Time
Remote Remote E1
Manual
RAI
Restart
Optical Accept_RemLB
Laser Test_PATT
CAS
Status
E1
AIS

IDLE

D0541ENa

FIGURE 5: LCD MENU TREE – FOM MENU (4 OF 15)

HDSL

PORT INFO MISC

CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG S/W RESET

MODE M-LINE SETUP HDSL-LB DEFAULT

S-CLK S-LINE Slave-LB

S-DTE S-DTE BERT

RATE
D0542ENa

FIGURE 6: LCD MENU TREE – HDSL MENU (5 OF 15)

DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 10/126 DXC 5000

G.SHDSL

PORT INFO MISC

SW RESET
CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG MISC

DEFAULT
Line Rate General Advance

n x 64
Local Far-end Local Far-end

RATE
MODE MCLK MCLK MCLK ANNEX ANNEX

Loop-Num
CAS FRAME FRAME RATE CLK CLK
for setting
2 G.shdsl Max-Data-
CODE CODE CLOCK PSD PSD
only Rate

MAP MAP CAS DATA PBO PBO

if E1 MAP RTS

if T1 TTM

V54

INTF

MAP

if DTE
D0543ENa

G.SHDSL

PORT INFO MISC

CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG MISC

Far-end
Next xDSL_LB
MASTER SLAVE Reset

Previous Slave LB
LOOP 1 LOOP 1

Edit BERT
LOOP 2 LOOP 2

REM-BERT
LOOP 1 or
E1
LOOP 2
shows up
depending on
Loop_Num's T1
setting

DTE

E1, T1, or DTE shows up

depending on the
far_end's card type
D0544ENa

FIGURE 7: LCD MENU TREE – G.SHDSL MENU (6 OF 15)

Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 11/126

DTU

DTU RDTE ALARM DIAG MISC

SETUP RINFO
MCLK SPEED NearLB (Remote INFO)

MODE CHANNEL RemLB SW

CONFIG BERT Serial No.

LINK

CLOCK RESET

DATA

RTS

TTM

INTF

X.50
D0545ENa

FIGURE 8: LCD MENU TREE – DTU MENU (7 OF 15)

FXS

CONF STATUS TEST MISC

OFF-HOOK RING INFO

GAIN TXSIG RXSIG RING PLAR

PULSE BATTERY RESET

LAW ON-HOOK RING-ON CAD

TIP DEFAULT
IMP OFF-HOOK BATT-REV R-FREQ

RING-GND
TXGA RING-GND OOS PULSE

PLAR-ON
RXGA TIP M-FREQ

Ringing
LEVEL

ALARM-ON

D0546ENa

FIGURE 9: LCD MENU TREE – FXS MENU (8 OF 15)

DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 12/126 DXC 5000

FXO

CONF STATUS TEST MISC

RINGING OFF-HOOK TEST INFO

GAIN TXSIG RXSIG LINE METERING
PULSE-DECODE- RESET
OFF-HOOK
TRUNK- METERING-PULSE- LEVEL-SCAN
LAW RING OFF-HOOK
CONDITION FREQUENCY
LINE- DEFAULT
OOS- LINE- METERING-PULSE- BROKEN
IMP NO-RING
ALARM POLARITY DETECT-MODE
RING-GND
MINIMUM-PULSE-
TXGA BATT-REV RING-GND
DETECT-LEVEL
BATT-REV
RXGA PULSE ON

PULSE-ON

ALARM-ON

D0547ENa

FIGURE 10: LCD MENU TREE – FXO MENU (9 OF 15)

E&M

CONF STATUS MISC

OPTION-
S/W-SET SIDE INFO
SET

LAW LINE E-LEAD RESET

TXGA SIDE M-LEAD Default

RXGA IMP POWER

SIGNAL

D0548ENa

FIGURE 11: LCD MENU TREE – E&M MENU (10 OF 15)

Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 13/126

Magneto

CONF STATUS TEST MISC

TX-RING RX-RING INFO

GAIN TXSIG RXSIG RING PLAR (L1&L2) (L1&L2)

TX-RING RX-RING RESET

TX-RING RX-RING PLAR-Ring- (L1&GND) (L1&GND)
LAW
(L1&L2) (L1&L2) Cadence
PLAR-ON TX-RING DEFAULT
TX-RING RX-RING
IMP
(L1&GND) (L1&GND)

PLAR-RX-RING ALARM-ON
TXGA PLAR-TX-RING
(L1&L2) (L1&L2)

PLAR-TX-RING PLAR-RX-RING
RXGA
(L1&GND) (L1&GND)

NO-
OOS-ALARM
TX-RING
D0549ENa

FIGURE 12: LCD MENU TREE – MAGNETO MENU (11 OF 15)

DTE

PORT INFO MISC

S/W RESET
CONF STATUS ALARM DIAG

DEFAULT
DTE
RATE DSR ALARM DTE-LB

CLOCK CTS V54-LB

DATA DCD BERT

RTS DTR

TTM RTS

V54 ExtClk_LOS

INTF RTS_LOS

D0550ENa

FIGURE 13: LCD MENU TREE – DTE MENU (12 OF 15)

DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 14/126 DXC 5000

X.50

CONF DIAG ALARM STATUS INFO

DTE
MUX DTE-LB DSR S/W
ALARM

SYNC BERT CTS

RATE DCD

PHASE DTR

4.8K RTS

CLOCK EXTCLK_LO

DATA RTS

RTS

TTM
D0551ENa

FIGURE 14: LCD MENU TREE – X.50 MENU (13 OF 15)

G.703

PORT INFO

H/W
STATUS DIAG ALARM

NearLB Clear

PATT SETUP

D0552ENa

FIGURE 15: LCD MENU TREE – G.703 CO-DIRECTIONAL MENU (14 OF 15)
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 15/126

Dry Contact
I/O

CONFIG MESSAGE STATUS MISC

INPUT INPUT INFO

OUTPUT OUTPUT DEFAULT

CHANNEL

D0553ENa

FIGURE 16: LCD MENU TREE – DRY CONTACT MENU (15 OF 15)
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 16/126 DXC 5000

1. MAIN MENU
1.1 Unit
Use arrow keys to move the cursor to the UNIT option.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

Press ENTER, then move the cursor to select the desired unit.

UNIT> Select Unit: <FE1>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1.1.1 Card Type Mismatch

If card type mismatch happen, the screen will show “mismatch” as below. Use arrow keys to
move the cursor to the Card Type Mismatch option.
UNIT> Select Unit: <FT1> mismatch

UNIT> Select Unit: <FT1> mismatch

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Press ENTER from above menu to init new card

C>INIT NEW CARD

Init Card C?

Press ENTER from above menu

C>INIT NEW CARD

Initializing....OK

Press ENTER from above menu then init new card done.

C>INIT NEW CARD

Initialized, <ESC> then enter again

1.2 Controller
Use arrow keys to move the cursor to the CONTROLLER option.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

1.2.1 IP
Press ENTER from the CONTROLLER menu. Move the cursor to the IP option.

CONTROLLER>IP DATE INFO MCLK MISC

Network Setting
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 17/126

1.2.1.1 Interface
Press ENTER from the above menu. When the cursor is at the INTERF option, the system
will show as below. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*). Two
interfaces, Ethernet and HDLC, are available.

IP>INTERF MY-IP SUBNET GATEWAY TRAP-IP

ETHERNET_PORT

IP>INTERF MY-IP SUBNET GATEWAY TRAP-IP

*ETHERNET_PORT HDLC_PORT PPP_PORT

1.2.1.2 My-IP
Under IP menu, move the cursor to the MY-IP option, the system will show My IP Address
immediately.

IP>INTERF MY-IP SUBNET GATEWAY TRAP-IP

140.133.031.040

IP>INTERF MY-IP SUBNET GATEWAY TRAP-IP

*140.133.031.040 OK

Subnet
Under IP menu, move the cursor to the SUBNET option, the system will show My IP Subnet
as below.

IP>INTERF MY-IP SUBNET GATEWAY TRAP-IP

255.255.000.000

IP>INTERF MY-IP SUBNET GATEWAY TRAP-IP

*255.255.000.000 OK

Gateway
Under IP menu, move the cursor to the GATEWAY option, the system will show My IP
Gateway immediately.

IP>INTERF MY-IP SUBNET GATEWAY TRAP-IP

140.133.001.254

IP>INTERF MY-IP SUBNET GATEWAY TRAP-IP

*140.133.001.254 OK
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 18/126 DXC 5000

Trap-IP
Under IP menu, move the cursor to the TRAP-IP option, the system will show Trap IP
Address as below.

IP>INTERF MY-IP SUBNET GATEWAY TRAP-IP

140.133.001.200

IP>INTERF MY-IP SUBNET GATEWAY TRAP-IP

*140.133.001.200 OK

Date
Press ESC to exit the IP menu. Under CONTROLLER menu, move the cursor to DATE, the
system will show the current time.

CONTROLLER>IP DATE INFO MCLK MISC

17:34:07 05/12/2005

CONTROLLER>IP DATE INFO MCLK MISC

*17:34:07 05/12/2005 OK

Information
Under CONTROLLER menu, move the cursor to INFO option, the system will show up the
related information about software version, hardware version, and serial number.

CONTROLLER>IP DATE INFO MCLK MISC

System Information

Software Version

INFO>SW_VER HW_VER SERIAL_NO

Version: V4.03 04/21/2005

Hardware Version

INFO>SW_VER HW_VER SERIAL_NO

Version: Ver.D

Serial Number

INFO>SW_VER HW_VER SERIAL_NO

Serial Number: 052843
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 19/126

MCLK
Under CONTROLLER menu, move the cursor to MCLK option. This menu allows users to
set up clock mode and clock source.

CONTROLLER>IP DATE INFO MCLK MISC

Clock Setting

Clock Mode
Use arrow keys to select the desired option, then press ENTER. The current selection will be
highlighted by an asterisk (*).

MCLK>MODE SOURCE
Normal

MCLK>MODE SOURCE
*Normal SSM

Clock Source
Use arrow keys to select the desired option, then press ENTER. The current selection will be
highlighted by an asterisk (*).

MCLK>MODE SOURCE
Clock Source Setup

Clock Source - for Normal Clock Mode

This menu is used to do clock source setup.

MCLK>MODE SOURCE
Clock Source Setup

MASTER CLOCK SOURCE:

SOURCE>MASTER SECOND CURR RECOVER STATUS

INTERNAL

SECOND CLOCK SOURCE:

SOURCE>MASTER SECOND CURR RECOVER STATUS

INTERNAL

CURRENT CLOCK:

SOURCE>MASTER SECOND CURR RECOVER STATUS

MASTER_CLK

CLOCK RECOVER MODE:

Two options are available for recover mode: Manual or Automatic.
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 20/126 DXC 5000

SOURCE>MASTER SECOND CURR RECOVER STATUS

MANUAL

CLOCK STATUS:

SOURCE>MASTER SECOND CURR RECOVER STATUS

Current StatusL NRMAL

Clock Source - for SSM Clock Mode

This menu is used to do clock source setup.

MCLK>MODE SOURCE
Clock Source Setup

MASTER CLOCK SOURCE:

SOURCE>MASTER SECOND CURR RECOVER STATUS

NONE

SECOND CLOCK SOURCE:

SOURCE>MASTER SECOND CURR RECOVER STATUS

NONE

THIRD CLOCK:

SOURCE>MASTER SECOND THIRD CURR STATUS

NONE

CURRENT CLOCK:

SOURCE>MASTER SECOND THIRD CURR STATUS

INTERNAL

CLOCK STATUS:

SOURCE>MASTER SECOND THIRD CURR STATUS

Current StatusL NRMAL

Miscellaneous
Press ESC from the MCLK menu. Move the cursor to MISC option, the system will show up
four options: STORE, RETRIEVE, DEFAULT, and RESET.

CONTROLLER>IP DATE INFO MCLK MISC

Miscellaneous

Store
Move the cursor to STORE option, press ENTER. The following LCD will show up when the
system finish storing.
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 21/126

MISC>STORE RETRIEVE DEFAULT RESET

Store Configuration

MISC>STORE RETRIEVE DEFAULT RESET

Store Configuration?

Use arrow keys to pick the character, followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to
choose from. Password modification can only be done using terminal operation. The default
password is DXC5000. Move the cursor to "OK", then press ENTER when the entire
password is assembled.

Enter Password: ___________ OK

0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!”#$

Retrieve
Move the cursor to RETRIEVE option, press ENTER. Then system will request users to
enter password in next LCD.

MISC>STORE RETRIEVE DEFAULT RESET

Retrieve Configuration

MISC>STORE RETRIEVE DEFAULT RESET

Retrieve Configuration?

Use arrow keys to pick the character, followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to
choose from. Password modification can only be done using terminal operation. The default
password is DXC5000. Move the cursor to "OK", then press ENTER when the entire
password is assembled.

Enter Password: ___________ OK

0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!”#$

Default
Move the cursor to DEFAULT option, press ENTER. Then system will request users to enter
password in next LCD.

MISC>STORE RETRIEVE DEFAULT RESET

Load Default

MISC>STORE RETRIEVE DEFAULT RESET

Load Default?

Use arrow keys to pick the character, followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to
choose from. Password modification can only be done using terminal operation. The default
password is DXC5000. Move the cursor to "OK", then press ENTER when the entire
password is assembled.
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 22/126 DXC 5000

Enter Password: ___________ OK

0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!”#$

Reset
Move the cursor to RESET option, press ENTER. The system will show two options,
PRIMARY and REDUNDANT. Use arrow keys to select the desired option, press ENTER.
Then system will request users to enter password in next LCD.

MISC>STORE RETRIEVE DEFAULT RESET

Reset Controller

MISC>PRIMINARY REDUNANT
.Reset Priminary

Use arrow keys to pick the character, followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to
choose from. Password modification can only be done using terminal operation. The default
password is DXC5000. Move the cursor to YES, then press ENTER when the entire
password is assembled.

Enter Password: YES

0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!"#$

Bert (Bit Error Rate Test)

This menu is used to do bit error rate testing.

CONTROLLER>MCLK MISC FOM-PRO BERT

Bit Error Rate Test

Slot
Press ENTER from the above menu.
This menu is used to do bit error rate testing for a selected slot. Before changing the current
slot, make sure the bit error test is disabled, then press ENTER.

BERT>SLOT PORT TYPE MODE CHANNEL USER ->

12

Port
This menu is used to do bit error rate testing for a selected port. Before changing the current
port, make sure the bit error test is disabled, then press ENTER.

BERT>SLOT PORT TYPE MODE CHANNEL USER ->

P1

Type
This menu is used to display and set up bit error rate test for a selected pattern type. Five
pattern types are available: 2exp20-1, 2exp15-1, 2exp11-1, 2exp9-1, and user def. Before
changing the current pattern type, make sure the bit error test is disabled, then press
ENTER.
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 23/126

BERT>SLOT PORT TYPE MODE CHANNEL USER ->

2exp20-1

Mode
This menu is used to display and set up bit error rate testing mode. Two options are
available: "Send AIS" and "NO". Before changing the current setting, make sure the bit error
test is disabled, then press ENTER.

BERT>SLOT PORT TYPE MODE CHANNEL USER ->

Send AIS

Channel
This menu is used to display and set up bit error rate testing channel. Two options are
available: "mapped" and "full". Before changing the current setting, make sure the bit error
test is disabled, then press ENTER.

BERT>SLOT PORT TYPE MODE CHANNEL USER ->

mapped

User Defined Pattern

This menu is used to display and set up user defined pattern. Before changing the current
setting, make sure the bit error test is disabled, then press ENTER.

BERT>PORT TYPE MODE CHANNEL USER_PATT ->

00000000

Period
This menu is used to display and setup test period (in seconds) If period set to 0, means test
permanent.

BERT>MODE CHANNEL USER_PATT PERIOD TE ->

0

Test
This menu is used to enable or disable bit error rate test.

BERT>TYPE MODE CHANNEL USER_PATT TEST ->

DISABLE

Press ENTER from the above menu.

BERT>TYPE MODE CHANNEL USER_PATT TEST ->

*DISABLE ENABLE

Below menu will show up when bit error rate test is enabled. This menu displays the current
testing status. To exit from this menu, press ESC.

12-1> UNSYNC Elapsed Second:63

Bit Err:0 ES:0 SES:63
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 24/126 DXC 5000

PROTECTION
Press ENTER from the CONTROLLER menu. Move the cursor to the Protection option.

CONTROLLER>IP DATE INFO MCLK MISC BERT

FROTECTION
PROTECTION>BACKUP QE1_PAIR

QE1_PAIR
Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor to the QE1_PAIR option.

PROTECTION>BACKUP QE1_PAIR
SLOT PORT MODE STATUS

Slot
Press ENTER from the above menu.
This menu is used to do bit error rate testing for a selected slot. Before changing the current
slot, make sure the bit error test is disabled, then press ENTER.

QE1_PAIR>SLOT PORT MODE STATUS ->

SLOT_5:6

Port
This menu is used to do bit error rate testing for a selected port. Before changing the current
port, make sure the bit error test is disabled, then press ENTER.

QE1_PAIR>SLOT PORT MODE STATUS ->

Port_3

Mode
This menu is used to display and set up bit error rate testing mode. Two options are
available: "Send AIS" and "NO". Before changing the current setting, make sure the bit error
test is disabled, then press ENTER.

QE1_PAIR>SLOT PORT MODE STATUS ->

LINE_REV

Status
This menu is used to display system status.

QE1_PAIR>SLOT PORT MODE STATUS ->

SLOT_5:6 Port_3 LINE_REV In-Protect

BACKUP
This menu is used to backup the link for slot A, B, C, and D. Move the cursor to the BKUP,
there are four options are available: FUNCTION, MODE, SETUP, and STATUS.

PROTECTION>BACKUP QE1_PAIR
FUNCTION MODE SETUP STATUS
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 25/126

Function
Move the cursor to FUNCTION option, then press ENTER to enable or disable it.

BACKUP>FUNCTION MODE SETUP STATUS

OFF

The current selection will by highlighted by an asterisk (*).

BACKUP>FUNCTION MODE SETUP STATUS

*OFF ON

Mode
Press ENTER from the MODE option. This menu is used to revert the linking backup or not.

BACKUP>FUNCTION MODE SETUP STATUS

non-revertible

The currently active selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

BACKUP>FUNCTION MODE SETUP STATUS

*non-revertible revertible

Setup
Use this menu to setup the link for slot A, B, C, and D.

BACKUP>FUNCTION MODE SETUP STATUS

Setup Backup Function

The following LCD means that LINK-A is backup by LINK-B. X means no backup for the
links. To confirm the setup by moving the cursor to SET with pressing ENTER.

BACKUP>LINK-A LINK-B LINK-C LINK-D

No

Status
This menu is used to view the linking status. Move the cursor to STATUS, then press
ENTER.

BACKUP>FUNCTION MODE SETUP STATUS

Show Backup Status

The following LCD means that LINK-A, whose linking status is N (normal), is backup by
LINK-B. No backup for LINK-B, LINK-C, and LINK-D.

BACKUP>LINK-A LINK-B LINK-C LINK-D

Backup: OFF Status: Normal
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 26/126 DXC 5000

TSI-MAP
Use arrow keys to move the cursor to the TSI-MAP option.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

Map
Press ENTER from the TSI-MAP menu, then move the cursor to MAP option, the system will
show as below.

TSI-MAP>SETUP CurrMAP COPY CLEAR BACKUP

Set TSI Mapping

Press ENTER from the above menu, the following LCD will show up.

SETUP>MAP-1 MAP-2 MAP-3 MAP-4 TSI-FUN ->

Setup MAP-1

Use arrow keys to select the desired slot.

MAP-1>T_SLOT T_PORT T_TS TS_NUM TYPE ->

7

MAP-1>T_SLOT T_PORT T_TS TS_NUM TYPE ->

1

MAP-1>T_SLOT T_PORT T_TS TS_NUM TYPE ->

2

MAP-1>T_SLOT T_PORT T_TS TS_NUM TYPE ->

5

MAP-1>T_SLOT T_PORT T_TS TS_NUM TYPE ->

d

MAP-1>T_PORT T_TS TS_NUM TYPE S_SLOT ->

12

MAP-1>T_TS TS_NUM TYPE S_SLOT S_PORT ->

1
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 27/126

MAP-1>TS_NUM TYPE S_SLOT S_PORT S-TS ->

1

MAP-1>TYPE S_SLOT S_PORT S-TS COMMAND ->

NO

MAP-1>TYPE S_SLOT S_PORT S-TS COMMAND ->

*NO Clear Clear&Set Set_only

As for the operation for MAP-2, MAP-3, and MAP-4 are same as MAP-1.
TSI Function
The "TSI-FUNC" menu is used to set up TSI function as bi-direction or multi-cast.

SETUP>TSI-FUNC IDLE-SIG MAP-1 MAP-2 M ->

1:1(Bidirection)

Press ENTER from the above menu. Use arrow keys to select a desired option, then press
ENTER to confirm. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

SETUP>TSI-FUNC IDLE-SIG MAP-1 MAP-2 M ->

*1:1(Bidirection) 1:N(Multicast)

Idle Signaling
This menu is used to display the current idle signaling.

SETUP>TSI-FUNC IDLE-SIG MAP-1 MAP-2 M ->

1101

To change the current configuration, press ENTER from the above menu. Use ENTER key
to switch "1" and "0". Then move the cursor at "OK", and press ENTER to confirm the new
configuration.

SETUP>TSI-FUNC IDLE-SIG MAP-1 MAP-2 M ->

*1101 OK
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 28/126 DXC 5000

Current Map
Move the cursor to SEL_MAP option to select the desired map. Press ENTER

TSI-MAP>SETUP CurrMAP COPY CLEAR BACKUP

MAP-1

Use arrow keys to select the desired map, then press ENTER. The current selection will be
highlighted by an asterisk (*).

TSI-MAP>SETUP CurrMAP COPY CLEAR BACKUP

*MAP-1 MAP-2 MAP-3 MAP-4

Copy Map
To copy map by moving the cursor to the COPY_MAP option. Press ENTER.

TSI-MAP>SETUP CurrMAP COPY CLEAR BACKUP

Copy Map

COPY>FROM TO COPY
MAP-1

Move the cursor to FROM option, then press ENTER to switch maps. Same action for the
TO option. Then move the cursor to COPY option, press ENTER to confirm the command.

COPY>FROM TO COPY
MAP-2

COPY>FROM TO COPY
Copy Map

COPY>FROM TO COPY
Copy Map?

Clear Map
Move the cursor to CLR_MAP to clear map. Press ENTER.

TSI-MAP>SETUP CurrMAP COPY CLEAR BACKUP

No

Press ENTER to switch maps. Move the cursor to CLEAR and press ENTER to confirm the
clear command

TSI-MAP>SETUP CurrMAP COPY CLEAR BACKUP

MAP-1 MAP-2 MAP-3 MAP-4 *NO
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 29/126

Alarm
Under DXC 5000 main menu, use arrow keys to move the cursor at the ALARM option,
which is used to view alarm queue, to setup or clear alarm.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

Alarm Queue
This menu is used to display the current alarm queue.

ALARM>QUEUE SETUP CLEAR

Show Alarm Queue

Press ENTER from the above menu.

SLOT B : LOF
MAJOR 16:00:59 05/05/2005 001

Alarm Setup
This menu is used to do alarm setup. Press ENTER to get into the sub-menu.

ALARM>QUEUE SETUP CLEAR

Alarm Setup

This menu is used to enable or disable alarm setup.

SETUP>ALARM RELAY ALARM-CUT-OFF PORT_ ->

DISABLE

This menu is used to enable or disable alarm realy.

SETUP>ALARM RELAY ALARM-CUT-OFF PORT_ ->

DISABLE

This menu is used to enable or disable alarm cut off.

SETUP>ALARM RELAY ALARM-CUT-OFF PORT_ ->

DISABLE

This menu is used to enable or disable port inactive alarm.

SETUP>ALARM-CUT-OFF PORT_INACTIVE POR ->

DISABLE

This menu is used to enable or disable port start up.

SETUP>PORT_INACTIVE PORT_START-UP CLK ->

DISABLE
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 30/126 DXC 5000

This menu is used to enable or disable clcok loss alarm.

SETUP>PORT_START-UP CLK_LOSS_ALM LINK ->

DISABLE

This menu is used to enable or disable link switch alarm.

SETUP>CLK_LOSS_ALM LINK_SWITCH MAP_SW ->

DISABLE

This menu is used to enable or disable map switch alarm.

SETUP>LINK_SWITCH MAP_SWITCH ALARM RE ->

DISABLE

Alarm Clear
This menu is used to clear alarm queue.

ALARM>QUEUE SETUP CLEAR

Clear Alarm Queue

Miscellaneous
Under DXC 5000 main menu, use arrow keys to move the cursor at the MISC option, which
is used to view alarm queue, to setup or clear alarm.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

Lock
Press ENTER from the above menu to enter into the "LOCK" sub-menu, as below shows.

MISC>FRONT-PANEL-LOCK POWER
DISABLE

Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor at DISABLE or ENABLE, then press
ENTER. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

MISC>FRONT-PANEL-LOCK POWER
*DISABLE ENABLE

Power Status
Press ENTER from the above menu to enter into the "Power Status" sub-menu, as below
shows.

MISC>FRONT-PANEL-LOCK MOWER
Power Status
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 31/126

Use arrow keys to show power 1 status as below.

POWER> 1_STATUS 2_STATUS CONSUMPTION

Power 1: 100W DC

Use arrow keys to show power 2 status as below.

POWER>1_STATUS 2_STATUS CONSUMPTION

Power 2: N/A

Use arrow keys to show power consumption. Note: Power consumption is estimable value.

POWER>1_STATUS 2_ STATUS CONSUMPTION

Total Power Consumption: 32W

E1 Interface Menu
Under Main menu, move the cursor to UNIT option. Press ENTER.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

Use arrow keys to select FE1 unit as below.

UNIT> Select Unit: <FE1>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Line
Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor to LINE option, the system will show
as below.

C>LINE DIAG INFO MISC ALARM

Line Configuration

Frame
Press ENTER from the LINE menu. Move the cursor to the desired option, the system will
show up the related message immediately. The current selection will be highlighted by an
asterisk (*).

C LINE>FRAME CODE RAI CRC AIS CAS SaBit ->

ON

C LINE>FRAME CODE RAI CRC AIS CAS SaBit ->

*ON OFF
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 32/126 DXC 5000

Code
Two codes, AMI and HDB3,are available here. The current selection will be highlighted by an
asterisk (*).

C LINE>FRAME CODE RAI CRC AIS CAS SaBit

HDB3

C LINE>FRAME CODE RAI CRC AIS CAS SaBit

AMI *HDB3

RAI
Use arrow keys to select ON or OFF, then press ENTER to enable or disable the option.

C LINE>FRAME CODE RAI CRC AIS CAS SaBit ->

ON

C LINE>FRAME CODE RAI CRC AIS CAS SaBit ->

*ON OFF

CRC
The cyclic redundancy check function can be turned on or off. Unlike bipolar violation, which
can monitor only one span, CRC menu allows error monitoring through multiple spans of E1
line. For two frame mode, set CRC to OFF. For multi-frame mode, set CRC to ON.

C LINE>FRAME CODE RAI CRC AIS CAS SaBit ->

ON

C LINE>FRAME CODE RAI CRC AIS CAS SaBit ->

*ON OFF

AIS
AIS menu shows the configuration set for the alarm indication signal. Using left and right
arrow key cycle through to ON or OFF, and then press ENTER. The current selection is
highlighted by an asterisk (*).

C LINE>FRAME CODE RAI CRC AIS CAS SaBit ->

FRAME

C LINE>FRAME CODE RAI CRC AIS CAS SaBit ->

*FRAME UNFRAME OFF
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 33/126

CAS
Using left and right arrow key cycle through to ON or OFF, and then press ENTER. The
current selection is highlighted by an asterisk (*).

C LINE>FRAME CODE RAI CRC AIS CAS SaBit ->

OFF

C LINE>FRAME CODE RAI CRC AIS CAS SaBit ->

ON *OFF

SaBit
To change a channel for FDL, move cursor to Sabit, and use left or right arrow keys to select
a channel, press ENTER. The current selection is highlighted by an asterisk (*).

C LINE>FRAME CODE RAI CRC AIS CAS SaBit ->

Sa4

C LINE>FRAME CODE RAI CRC AIS CAS SaBit ->

*Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 Sa4+Sa5

Signalling
Move the cursor to the signalling item. Use arrow keys to select "TRANS" or "CD=01". The
current selection will be highlight by an asterisk (*).

C LINE>CRC AIS CAS SaBit SIGNALLING IN ->

TRANS

C LINE>CRC AIS CAS SaBit SIGNALLING IN ->

*TRANS CD=01

Interface
After moving cursor to INTERF, the system will show 75 Ohm twisted pair or 120 Ohm
coaxial cable for the current interface.

C LINE>AIS CAS SaBit SIGNALLING INTF F ->

120ohm

C LINE>AIS CAS SaBit SIGNALLING INTF F ->

*120ohm 75ohm
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 34/126 DXC 5000

FDL
FDL menu shows the facility data link. To enable FDL by moving cursor to ON, while to
disable it by moving cursor to OFF, and press ENTER. The current selection is highlighted
by an asterisk "*".

C LINE>CAS SaBit SIGNALLING INTF FDL C ->

ON

C LINE>CAS SaBit SIGNALLING INTF FDL C ->

ON *OFF

CGA
To configure CGA as NORMAL or TRANSPARENT, use the arrow keys to cycle through to
the proper selection and press ENTER.

C LINE>SaBit SIGNALLING INTF FDL CGA O ->

NORM

C LINE>SaBit SIGNALLING INTF FDL CGA O ->

*NORM TRANS

OOS
To change the OOS protocol, use the arrow keys to cycle through to the proper selection
and Press ENTER.

C LINE>SIGNALLING INTF FDL CGA OOS IDL ->

BUSY

C LINE>SIGNALLING INTF FDL CGA OOS IDL ->

*BUSY IDLE BUSY_IDLE IDLE_BUSY

IDLE
Press ENTER for the Line Idle Code menu.
The Idle menu shows the transmission idle code when a DS0 time slot is in idle mode. To
change the idle code, press ENTER to cycle through the selections. This operation must be
concluded by moving the arrow keys to YES position and pressing ENTER to enable the
changes.

C LINE>INTF FDL CGA OOS IDLE FRAME CO ->

0xD5
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 35/126

Diagnostic
Diagnostics group includes near loopback, remote loopback, and test pattern.

C>LINE DIAG INFO MISC ALARM

Line Diagnostic

Near Loopback
Near loopback menus are used to control near end E1 or T1 line side loopback operation,
such as local loopback test, payload loopback test, and line loopback test. Under diagnostics
menu, use left or right keys to select near loopback menu.

C DIAG>NearLB RemLB PATT

OFF

C DIAG>NearLB RemLB PATT

*OFF LOCAL PLB LLB

Remote Loopback
E1 remote loopback is used to activate E1 line remote loopback test. To activate or
deactivate E1 remote loopback, use left or right arrow keys cycle through to a desired
selection and press ENTER.

C DIAG>NearLB RemLB PATT

Remote Loopback

E1 Remote Loopback:

C RemLB>ACTIVATE DEACTIVATE
PAYLOAD

C RemLB>ACTIVATE DEACTIVATE
*PAYLOAD LINE

T1 Remote Loopback:
T1 remote loopback is used to activate T1 line remote loopback test. To activate or
deactivate T1 remote loopback, use left or right arrow keys cycle through to a desired
selection and press ENTER. To select IN-BAND for remote line loopback inband coding,
AT&T-P for remote payload loopback AT&T FDL coding, ANSI-P for remote payload
loopback, ANSI-L for remote line loopback ANSI FDL coding.

C RemLB>ACTIVATE DEACTIVATE
IN_BAND

C RemLB>ACTIVATE DEACTIVATE
*IN_BAND AT&T-P ANSI-P ANSI-L
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 36/126 DXC 5000

PATTERN
Press ENTER from testing pattern menu. Using left or right arrow keys cycle through to a
desired test pattern, and press ENTER.

C DIAG>NearLB RemLB PATT

OFF

C DIAG>NearLB RemLB PATT

*OFF PRBS-FULL

C PRBS>FULL SYNC ERROR SECONDS:0

TOTAL SECONDS:30 ERROR BITS :7

Information
The INFO menu provides the software version number.

C>LINE DIAG INFO MISC ALARM

Card Information

C INFO>S/W
Version: V3.03 01/30/2002

Miscellaneous
Under the DS1 PORT menu, move the cursor to MISC option, then the system will show as
below.

C>LINE DIAG INFO MISC ALARM

Miscellaneous

Status
Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor to STATUS option to view the line
status with pressing ENTER.

C MISC>STATUS LINKID DEFAULT RESET

Show Line Status

C LINE>LOS LOF RxRAI RxAIS TxRAI TxAIS

* * *
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 37/126

LINKID
Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor to LINKID option to view the remote
type with pressing ENTER.

C MISC>STATUS DINKID DEFAULT RESET

Show Reomte Link Identification

Use arrow keys in AN type to view different option.

B LINKID>TYPE RACK SLOT_NUM PORT BK_SLOT_NUM

BK_PORT
AN

Use arrow keys in CPE type to view serinal no.

B LINKID>TYPE SERINAL_NO
CPE

Default
Move the cursor to DEFAULT option to download default configuration.

C MISC>STATUS DEFAULT RESET

Load Default

Use arrow keys to pick the character, followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to
choose from. Password modification can only be done using terminal operation. The default
password is DXC5000. Move the cursor to YES, then press ENTER when the entire
password is assembled.

Enter Password: YES

0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!"#$

Enter Password: XXXX YES

Successful to load default configuration

Reset
Move the cursor to RESET option. Then press ENTER to reset unit.

C MISC>STATUS DEFAULT RESET

Reset Unit

Alarm
Alarm menu for DS1 is used to clear alarm and setup alarm threshold.

C>LINE DIAG INFO MISC ALARM

Alarm Config and Queue
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 38/126 DXC 5000

Alarm Clear
Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor to NO or YES to confirm the alarm
clear.

C ALARM>CLEAR SETUP
Clear Alarm Queue & History

C ALARM>CLEAR SETUP
Clear Alarm Queue & History ?

Alarm Setup
Move the cursor to NEXT or PREV to view alarm, then go to EDIT option with pressing
ENTER to do alarm setup.

C ALARM>CLEAR SETUP
Alarm Setup

C SETUP>RAI AIS LOS LOF BPV ES UAS CSS

MAJOR

Quad E1 Port Menu

Under Main menu, move the cursor to UNIT option. Press ENTER.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

The LCD operation for Quad E1 card and Mini Quad E1 card are same.
For Quad E1 card:

UNIT> Select Unit: <QE1>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

For Mini Quad E1 card:

UNIT> Select Unit: <MQuad E1>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 39/126

Port
Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor to LINE option, the system will show
as below.

5QE1>PORT INFO MISC

Select Port :

5QE1>Select Port Number

PORT-1 PORT-2 PORT-3 PORT-4

Line
Press ENER from the above menu, the screen will show as below. This menu is used to set
up Frame, Code, RAI, Interface, IDLE code, and SaBit.

05QE1-1>LINE DIAG STATUS ALARM

Line Configuration

Frame
Press ENTER from the LINE menu. Move the cursor to the desired option, the system will
show up the related message immediately. The current selection will be highlighted by an
asterisk (*).

5QE1-1 LINE>FRAME CODE CRC RAI AIS CA ->

ON

5QE1-1 LINE>FRAME CODE CRC RAI AIS CA ->

*ON OFF

Code
Two codes, AMI and HDB3,are available here. The current selection will be highlighted by an
asterisk (*).

5QE1-1 LINE>FRAME CODE CRC RAI AIS CA ->

HDB3

5QE1-1 LINE>FRAME CODE CRC RAI AIS CA ->

AMI *HDB3
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 40/126 DXC 5000

CRC
The cyclic redundancy check function can be turned on or off. Unlike bipolar violation, which
can monitor only one span, CRC menu allows error monitoring through multiple spans of E1
line. For two frame mode, set CRC to OFF. For multi-frame mode, set CRC to ON.

5QE1-1 LINE>FRAME CODE CRC RAI AIS CA ->

ON

5QE1-1 LINE>FRAME CODE CRC RAI AIS CA ->

*ON OFF

RAI
Use arrow keys to select ON or OFF, then press ENTER to enable or disable the option.

5QE1-1 LINE>FRAME CODE CRC RAI AIS CA ->

ON

5QE1-1 LINE>FRAME CODE CRC RAI AIS CA ->

*ON OFF

AIS
AIS menu shows the configuration set for the alarm indication signal. Using left and right
arrow key cycle through to ON or OFF, and then press ENTER. The current selection is
highlighted by an asterisk (*).

5QE1-1 LINE>FRAME CODE CRC RAI AIS CA ->

FRAME

5QE1-1 LINE>FRAME CODE CRC RAI AIS CA ->

*FRAME UNFRAME OFF

CAS
Using left and right arrow key cycle through to ON or OFF, and then press ENTER. The
current selection is highlighted by an asterisk (*).

5QE1-1 LINE>CODE CRC RAI AIS CAS Sign ->

OFF

5QE1-1 LINE>CODE CRC RAI AIS CAS Sign ->

ON *OFF
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 41/126

Signalling
Move the cursor to the signalling item. Use arrow keys to select "TRANS" or "CD=01". The
current selection will be highlight by an asterisk (*).

5QE1-1 LINE>CRC RAI AIS CAS Signaling ->

TRANS

5QE1-1 LINE>CRC RAI AIS CAS Signaling ->

*TRANS

CGA
To configure CGA as NORMAL or TRANSPARENT, use the arrow keys to cycle through to
the proper selection and press ENTER.

5QE1-1 LINE>RAI AIS CAS Signaling CGA ->

NORM

5QE1-1 LINE>RAI AIS CAS Signaling CGA ->

*NORM

OOS
To change the OOS protocol, use the arrow keys to cycle through to the proper selection
and Press ENTER.

5QE1-1 LINE>AIS CAS Signaling CGA OOS ->

BUSY

5QE1-1 LINE>AIS CAS Signaling CGA OOS ->

*BUSY IDLE BUSY_IDLE IDLE_BUSY

FDL
FDL menu shows the facility data link.

5QE1-1 LINE>CAS Signaling CGA OOS FDL ->

ON

To change the current configuration, pess ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor at
a desired option, press ENTER to confirm it. The current selection is highlighted by an
asterisk (*).

5QE1-1 LINE>CAS Signaling CGA OOS FDL ->

FDL *OFF HDLC SSM
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 42/126 DXC 5000

SaBit
To change a channel for FDL, move cursor to Sabit, and use left or right arrow keys to select
a channel, press ENTER. The current selection is highlighted by an asterisk (*).

5QE1-1 LINE>CGA OOS FDL SaBit IDLE Pr ->

Sa4

5QE1-1 LINE>CGA OOS FDL SaBit IDLE Pr ->

*Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 Sa4+Sa5

Idle
Press ENTER for the Line Idle Code menu.
The Idle menu shows the transmission idle code when a DS0 time slot is in idle mode. To
change the idle code, press ENTER to cycle through the selections. This operation must be
concluded by moving the arrow keys to YES position and pressing ENTER to enable the
changes.

5QE1-1 LINE>CGA OOS FDL SaBit IDLE Pr ->

D5

5QE1-1 LINE>CGA OOS FDL SaBit IDLE Pr ->

*D5 OK (0-FF)

Protect
This protection function is available only when two Quad E1 cards are plugged into the slots.
Please note that the two Quad E1 cards must be plugged into the slots side by side.
This menu is used to disable protection function or enable circuit protection and line
protection. Use the arrow keys to cycle through to a proper selection and press ENTER.
Then a current selection will be highlight by an asterisk (*).

5QE1-1 LINE>FDL SaBit IDLE Protected ->

DISABLE

5QE1-1 LINE>FDL SaBit IDLE Protected ->

*DISABLE CIRCUIT LINE

Master
This menu is available to set up only as "Protection" function is enable. If the "Protection"
function is disable, the first screen will show up.

5QE1-1 LINE>IDLE Protected Master INT ->

****
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 43/126

If the "Protection" function is enable, this MASTER menu can be set up as slave side or
master side. Move the cursor at the desired option, and press ENTER. The current selection
will be highlighted by an asterisk (*). See also below screen.

5QE1-1 LINE>IDLE Protected Master INT ->

SLAVE *MASTER

Interface
After moving cursor to INTERF, the system will show the current impedence, 75 Ohm twisted
pair or 120 Ohm coaxial cable, for the interface. Users are only allowed to change the
current impedence by adjusting jumpers of the interface. See also Figure 2-15.

5QE1-1 LINE>Protected Master INTF FRA ->

120ohm

Diagnostic
Diagnostics group includes near loopback, remote loopback, and test pattern.

05QE1-1>LINE DIAG STATUS ALARM

Diagnostic

Near Loopback
Near loopback menus are used to control near end E1 or T1 line side loopback operation,
such as local loopback test, payload loopback test, and line loopback test. Under diagnostics
menu, use left or right keys to select near loopback menu.

5QE1-1 DIAG>NearLB RemLB PATT

OFF

5QE1-1 DIAG>NearLB RemLB PATT

*OFF LOCAL PLB LLB

E1 Remote Loopback
E1 remote loopback is used to activate E1 line remote loopback test. To activate or
deactivate E1 remote loopback, use left or right arrow keys cycle through to a desired
selection and press ENTER.

5QE1-1 DIAG>NearLB RemLB PATT

Remote Loopback

5QE1-1 RemLB>ACTIVATE DEACTIVATE

PAYLOAD

5QE1-1 RemLB>ACTIVATE DEACTIVATE

*PAYLOAD LINE
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 44/126 DXC 5000

5QE1-1 RemLB>ACTIVATE DEACTIVATE

PAYLOAD

5QE1-1 RemLB>ACTIVATE DEACTIVATE

*PAYLOAD LINE

PATTERN
Press ENTER from testing pattern menu. Using left or right arrow keys cycle through to a
desired test pattern, and press ENTER.

5QE1-1 DIAG>NearLB RemLB PATT

OFF

5QE1-1 DIAG>NearLB RemLB PATT

OFF *PRBS-FULL

5QE1-1>FULL SYNC ERROR SECONDS:0

TOTAL SECONDS:25 ERROR BITS :0

Status
Under the PORT menu, move the cursor to STATUS option, then the system will show as
below.

5QE1-1>LINE DIAG STATUS ALARM LINKID

Show Line Status

5QE1-1>LINE DIAG STATUS ALARM

*LOS *LOF RxRAI RxAIS TxRAI TxAIS

Alarm
Under the PORT menu, move the cursor to ALARM option, then the system will show as
below. The Alarm menu for Quad E1 is used to clear alarm and setup alarm threshold.

5QE1-1>LINE DIAG MISC ALARM

Alarm Config and Queue
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 45/126

Alarm Clear

5QE1-1 ALARM>CLEAR SETUP

Clear Alarm Queue & History

Press ENTER from the above menu. Press ENTER to confirm the alarm clear.

5QE1-1 ALARM>CLEAR SETUP

Clear Alarm Queue & History?

5QE1-1 ALARM>CLEAR SETUP

Alarm cleared!

Alarm Setup
Move the cursor to NEXT or PREV to view alarm, then go to EDIT option with pressing
ENTER to do alarm setup.

5QE1-1 ALARM>CLEAR SETUP

Alarm Setup

5QE1-1 SETUP>RAI AIS LOS LOF BPV ES UAS

MAJOR

5QE1-1 SETUP>RAI AIS LOS LOF BPV ES UAS

DISABLE *MAJOR CRITICAL MINOR

5QE1-1 SETUP>RAI AIS LOS LOF BPV ES UAS

MAJOR

5QE1-1 SETUP>RAI AIS LOS LOF BPV ES UAS

DISABLE *MAJOR CRITICAL MINOR

5QE1-1 SETUP>RAI AIS LOS LOF BPV ES UAS

MAJOR

5QE1-1 SETUP>RAI AIS LOS LOF BPV ES UAS

DISABLE *MAJOR CRITICAL MINOR
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 46/126 DXC 5000

5QE1-1 SETUP>RAI AIS LOS LOF BPV ES UAS

MAJOR

5QE1-1 SETUP>RAI AIS LOS LOF BPV ES UAS

DISABLE *MAJOR CRITICAL MINOR

5QE1-1 SETUP>RAI AIS LOS LOF BPV ES UAS

MAJOR THRESHOLD = 10E-5

5QE1-1 SETUP>RAI AIS LOS LOF BPV ES UAS

MAJOR

5QE1-1 SETUP>RAI AIS LOS LOF BPV ES UAS

MAJOR THRESHOLD = 10E-5

LINKID
Under the PORT menu, move the cursor to LINKID option, then the system will show as
below.

CQE1-1>LINE DIAG STATUS ALARM BINKID

Show Remote Line Identification

Use arrow keys in AN type to view different option.

CQE1-1 LINE ID> TYPE RACK SLOT_NUM PORT

BK_SLOT_NUM BK_PORT
AN

Use arrow keys in CPE type to view serinal no.

CQE1-1 LINE ID> TYPE SERIAL_NO

CPE
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 47/126

T1 Interface Menu
Under Main menu, move the cursor to UNIT option. Press ENTER.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

Use arrow keys to select FT1 unit as below.

UNIT> Select Unit: <FT1>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Line
Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor to LINE option, the system will show
as below.

B>LINE DIAG INFO MISC ALARM

Line Configuration

Frame
To change the frame type, use the arrow keys to cycle through to a proper selection and
press ENTER. For example, ESF&T1.403 indicates ESF frame format is chosen and facility
data link message follows ANSI T1.403 standard. While ESF indicates ESF frame format is
chosen and facility data link follows AT&T PUB 54016 standard. An asterisk (*) is placed by
the currently selected item. Use the arrow keys to change the setting, and press ENTER.

B LINE>FRAME CODE YEL INBAND AIS CAS ->

ESF

B LINE>FRAME CODE YEL INBAND AIS CAS ->

D4 *ESF ESF&T1.403 NONE

Code
To select the coding scheme, use the arrow keys cycle through to a proper selection and
press ENTER. The choices for T1 are AMI and B8ZS. An asterisk (*) is placed by the
currently selected item. Using the arrow keys to change the setting, and press ENTER. Be
sure that this setting matches that of the network.

B LINE>FRAME CODE YEL INBAND AIS CAS ->

B8ZS

B LINE>FRAME CODE YEL INBAND AIS CAS ->

AMI *B8ZS
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 48/126 DXC 5000

YEL
Yellow alarm for T1 shows the current alarm transmission state when the port reports loss of
signal or loss of frame sync. To enable this alarm being automatically send out when loss of
signal and loss of frame sync, use the arrow keys to cycle through to ON and press ENTER.
To disable yellow alarm sending, use the arrow keys cycle through to OFF and press
ENTER. An asterisk (*) is placed by the currently selected item.

B LINE>FRAME CODE YEL INBAND AIS CAS ->

ON

B LINE>FRAME CODE YEL INBAND AIS CAS ->

*ON OFF

INBAND
The INBAND menu shows the remote inband loopback diagnostics code recognition. The
current selection is highlighted by an asterisk (*). To enable it, move the cursor to ON and
press ENTER. To disable it, move the cursor to OFF and press ENTER.

B LINE>FRAME CODE YEL INBAND AIS CAS ->

ON

B LINE>FRAME CODE YEL INBAND AIS CAS ->

ON *OFF

AIS
The AIS menu shows the configuration set for the alarm indication signal. Use the arrow
keys to cycle through to FRAME or UNFRAMED and press ENTER. The current selection is
highlighted by an asterisk (*).

B LINE>FRAME CODE YEL INBAND AIS CAS ->

FRAME

B LINE>FRAME CODE YEL INBAND AIS CAS ->

*FRAME UNFRAME OFF
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 49/126

CAS
Signaling is either CAS (channel associated signalling) or out-of-band such as CCIS
(common channel interoffice signalling). To change the signaling type, use the arrow keys to
choose from CAS ON or CAS OFF and press ENTER.

B LINE>FRAME CODE YEL INBAND AIS CAS ->

OFF

B LINE>FRAME CODE YEL INBAND AIS CAS ->

ON *OFF

Signalling
Move the cursor to the signalling item. Use arrow keys to select "TRANS", press ENTER.
The current selection will be highlight by an asterisk (*).

B LINE>INBAND AIS CAS SIGNALLING INTF ->

TRANS

Interface
After moving cursor to INTERF, the system will show LONG_HAUL and SHORT_HAUL
options for the current interface.

B LINE>INBAND AIS CAS SIGNALLING INTF ->

LONG_HAUL

B LINE>INBAND AIS CAS SIGNALLING INTF ->

*LONG_HAUL SHORT_HAUL

LBO
The LBO menu shows the current transmission LBO as 0, -7.5, or -15 dB by placing an
asterisk (*), by the appropriate entry. To change the LBO, move the cursor to the proper
selection and press ENTER.

B LINE>AIS CAS SIGNALLING INTF LBO CGA ->

*0dB -7.5dB -15dB

B LINE>AIS CAS SIGNALLING INTF LBO CGA ->

*0dB -7.5dB -15dB
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 50/126 DXC 5000

CGA
To configure CGA as NORMAL or TRANSPARENT, use the arrow keys to cycle through to
the proper selection and press ENTER.

B LINE>AIS CAS SIGNALLING INTF LBO CGA ->

NORM

B LINE>AIS CAS SIGNALLING INTF LBO CGA ->

*NORM

OOS
To change the OOS protocol, use the arrow keys to cycle through to the proper selection
and Press ENTER.

B LINE>CAS SIGNALLING INTF LBO CGA OOS ->

BUSY

B LINE>CAS SIGNALLING INTF LBO CGA OOS ->

*BUSY IDLE BUSY_IDLE IDLE_BUSY

IDLE
Press ENTER for the Line Idle Code menu.
The Idle menu shows the transmission idle code when a DS0 time slot is in idle mode. To
change the idle code, press ENTER to cycle through the selections. This operation must be
concluded by moving the arrow keys to YES position and pressing ENTER to enable the
changes.

B LINE>INTF LBO CGA OOS IDLE FRAME CO ->

0xFF

Diagnostic
Move the cursor to DIAG option, the system will show as below.

B>LINE DIAG INFO MISC ALARM

Line Diagnostic
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 51/126

Near Loopback
Near loopback menus are used to control near end E1 or T1 line side loopback operation,
such as local loopback test, payload loopback test, and line loopback test. Under diagnostics
menu, use left or right keys to select near loopback menu.

B DIAG>NearLB RemLB PATT

OFF

B DIAG>NearLB RemLB PATT

*OFF LOCAL PLB LLB

Remote Loopback
E1 remote loopback is used to activate E1 line remote loopback test. To activate or
deactivate E1 remote loopback, use left or right arrow keys cycle through to a desired
selection and press ENTER.

B DIAG>NearLB RemLB PATT

Remote Loopback

E1 Remote Loopback:

B RemLB>ACTIVATE DEACTIVATE
PAYLOAD

B RemLB>ACTIVATE DEACTIVATE
*PAYLOAD LINE

T1 Remote Loopback:
T1 remote loopback is used to activate T1 line remote loopback test. To activate or
deactivate T1 remote loopback, use left or right arrow keys cycle through to a desired
selection and press ENTER. To select IN-BAND for remote line loopback inband coding,
AT&T-P for remote payload loopback AT&T FDL coding, ANSI-P for remote payload
loopback, ANSI-L for remote line loopback ANSI FDL coding.

B RemLB>ACTIVATE DEACTIVATE
IN_BAND

B RemLB>ACTIVATE DEACTIVATE
*IN_BAND AT&T-P ANSI-P ANSI-L
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 52/126 DXC 5000

PATTERN
Testing pattern menus is used to perform QRSS diagnostics or select a variety of test
pattern. Under Diagnostics menu, use left or right arrow keys to select testing pattern menu.
Press ENTER from testing pattern menu. Using left or right arrow keys cycle through to a
desired test pattern, and press ENTER.

B DIAG>NearLB RemLB PATT

OFF

B DIAG>NearLB RemLB PATT

*OFF QRSS-FULL

B QRSS>FULL UNSYNC ERROR SECONDS:22

TOTAL SECONDS:22 ERROR BITS :65535

Information
Move the cursor to INFO option, the system will show as below.

B>LINE DIAG INFO MISC ALARM

Card Information

B INFO>S/W
Version: V3.03 01/30/2002

Miscellaneous
Under the DS1 PORT menu, move the cursor to MISC option, then the system will show as
below.

B>LINE DIAG INFO MISC ALARM

Miscellaneous

Status
Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor to STATUS option to view the line
status with pressing ENTER.

B MISC>STATUS DEFAULT RESET

Show Line Status

B LINE>LOS LOF RxYEL RxAIS TxYEL TxAIS

* * *
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 53/126

Default
Move the cursor to DEFAULT option to download default configuration.

B MISC>STATUS DEFAULT RESET

Load Default

Use arrow keys to pick the character, followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to
choose from. Password modification can only be done using terminal operation. The default
password is DXC5000. Move the cursor to "OK", then press ENTER when the entire
password is assembled.

Enter Password: OK
0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!"#$

Reset
Move the cursor to RESET option. Then press ENTER to reset unit.

B MISC>STATUS DEFAULT RESET

Reset Unit

Alarm
Alarm menu for DS1 is used to clear alarm and setup alarm threshold.

B>LINE DIAG INFO MISC ALARM

Alarm Config and Queue

Alarm Clear
Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor to NO or YES to confirm the alarm
clear.

B ALARM>CLEAR SETUP
Clear Alarm Queue & History

B ALARM>CLEAR SETUP
Clear Alarm Queue & History ? NO YES

Alarm Setup
Move the cursor to NEXT or PREV to view alarm, then go to EDIT option with pressing
ENTER to do alarm setup.

B ALARM>CLEAR SETUP
Alarm Setup

B SETUP>RAI AIS LOS LOF BPV ES UAS CSS

MAJOR
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 54/126 DXC 5000

FXS Interface Menu

Move the cursor to UNIT option, then press ENTER.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

Move the cursor to select FXS interface, press ENTER.

UNIT> Select Unit: <FXS>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Configuration
This group includes: GAIN, TXSIG, RXSIG, RING, and PLAR.

6U>CONFIG STATUS TEST MISC

System Configuration

GAIN
This menu is used to set up encoding, impedance, transmit loss adjustment, and receiver
loss adjustment. Move the cursor at “GAIN”, press ENTER to get into the submenu.

6U CONFIG>GAIN TXSIG RXSIG RING PLAR

Law, Impedance, and Gain Setup

This menu is used to set up encoding. Use arrow key to select the desired option, U-LAW for
µ-law and A-LAW for A-law. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

6U GAIN>LAW IMP TXGA RXGA

A-LAW

6U GAIN>LAW IMP TXGA RXGA

U-LAW *A-LAW

This menu is used to set up impedance. Use arrow key to select the desired option, 900 ohm
or 600 ohm, press ENTER. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

6U GAIN>LAW IMP TXGA RXGA

600-OHM

6U GAIN>LAW IMP TXGA RXGA

900-OHM *600-OHM
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 55/126

This menu is used to set up transmit loss adjustment. Move the cursor at “TXGA”.

6U GAIN>LAW IMP TXGA RXGA

Tx Gain

6U TXGA>L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L ->
-3.0 dB

6U TXGA>L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L ->
*-3.0 OK (-21 to 10 in dB)

Press ENTER from the above menu. Use arrow key to move the cursor at the desired
position, then press ENTER to the second line. Use arrow key to select a desired item, press
ENTER to confirm the selection.

6U > TX-GAIN -3.0 DB(-21 to +10) SET?

6U > +-0123456789

Then move the cursor at “SET?”, press ENTER to save the latest configuration.

6U > TX-GAIN -3.0 DB(-21 to +10) SET?

6U > Set config OK!

This menu is used to set up receiver loss adjustment. Move the cursor at “RXGA”.

6U GAIN>LAW IMP TXGA RXGA

Rx GAIN

6U RXGA>L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L ->
-3.0 dB

6U RXGA>L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L ->
*-3.0 OK (-21 to 10 in dB)

Press ENTER from the above menu. Use arrow key to move the cursor at the desired
position, then press ENTER to the second line. Use arrow key to select a desired item, press
ENTER to confirm the selection.

6U > RX-GAIN -3.0 DB(-21 to +10) SET?

6U > +-0123456789
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 56/126 DXC 5000

Then move the cursor at “SET?”, press ENTER to save the latest configuration.

6U > RX-GAIN -3.0 DB(-21 to +10) SET?

Set config OK!

TXSIG
This menu is used to set up transmit signaling. Move the cursor at “TXSIG”, press ENTER to
get into the submenu. This group includes these options: ON-HOOK, OFF-HOOK, and
RING-GND. Use arrow key to move the cursor at the desired option, and press ENTER to
get into its submenu.

6U CONFIG>GAIN TXSIG RXSIG RING PLAR

Tx Signaling Bit

This menu is used to set up on hook. Move the cursor at “ON-HOOK”.

6U TXSIG>ON-HOOK OFF-HOOK RING-GND

A=0 B=1 C=0 D=1

Press ENTER from the above menu. Use ENTER key to switch A=0 to A=1 or A=1 to A=0,
same operation for B, C, and D.

6U TXSIG>ON-HOOK OFF-HOOK RING-GND

*A=0 B=1 C=0 D=1 OK

This menu is used to set up off hook. Move the cursor at “OFF-HOOK”. The operation is
same as “ON-HOOK” menu.

6U TXSIG>ON-HOOK OFF-HOOK RING-GND

A=0 B=1 C=0 D=1

This menu is used to set up ringing. Move the cursor at “RING-GND”. This menu is used to
set up ringing. Move the cursor at “OFF-HOOK”. The operation is same as “ON-HOOK”
menu.

6U TXSIG>ON-HOOK OFF-HOOK RING-GND

A=0 B=1 C=0 D=1

RXSIG
This menu is used to set up receiver signaling. Move the cursor at “RXSIG”, press ENTER to
get into the submenu. This group includes these options: RING-ON, BATT-REV, OOS, and
TIP. Use arrow key to move the cursor at the desired option, and press ENTER to get into its
submenu.

6U CONFIG>GAIN TXSIG RXSIG RING PLAR

Rx Signaling Bit

Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor at “RING-ON”.
Press ENTER to get into its submenu. Use ENTER key to switch A=0 to A=1 or A=1 to A=0,
same operation for B, C, and D. The asterisk (*) means: Don’t care.
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 57/126

6U RXSIG>RING-ON BATT-REV OOS TIP

A=0 B=1 C=* D=*

After done the setting, move the cursor at “SET”, and press ENTER. The screen will show up
as below.

6U >RING-ON BATT-REV OOS TIP

Set config OK!

This menu is used to set up battery reverse. Move the cursor at “BATT-REV”. The operation
is same as “RING-ON” menu.

6U RXSIG>RING-ON BATT-REV OOS TIP

A=0 B=1 C=0 D=0

This menu is used to set up out of service. Move the cursor at “OOS”. The operation is same
as “RING-ON” menu.
NOTE: These two options, “OOS” and “TIP”, cannot exist at the same time. If
“OOS” can be set up, “TIP” will not be allowed to configure.

6U RXSIG>RING-ON BATT-REV OOS TIP

A=* B=* C=* D=*

6U RXSIG>RING-ON BATT-REV OOS TIP

A=* B=* C=* D=* SET?

This menu is used to set up out of service. Move the cursor at “TIP”. The operation is same
as “RING-ON” menu.
NOTE: These two options, “OOS” and “TIP”, cannot exist at the same time. If
“TIP” can be set up, “OOS” will not be allowed to configure.

6U RXSIG>RING-ON BATT-REV OOS TIP

A=0 B=1 C=* D=*

6U RXSIG>RING-ON BATT-REV OOS TIP

A=0 B=1 C=* D=* SET?
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 58/126 DXC 5000

RING
This menu is used to set up FXS ringing. This group includes: ringing cadence, ring
frequency, Pulse, Metering frequency, and level.
NOTE: Regarding US ring back signaling for the FXS Card, PLAR generates
a 440/480Hz ringback tone for H/W Version G or over.

6U CONFIG>GAIN TXSIG RXSIG RING PLAR

RING Setup

Press ENTER from the above menu. This menu is used to set up FXS ringing cadence. Use
arrow key to move the cursor at the desired ringing option for PLAR: “1-ON#2-OFF” for 1
second on 2 seconds off, or “2-ON#4-OFF” for 2 seconds on 4 seconds off. The current
selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

6U RING>CAD R-FREQ PULSE M-FREQ LEVEL

2"ON,4"OFF

6U RING>CAD R-FREQ PULSE M-FREQ LEVEL

1"ON,2"OFF *2"ON,4"OFF

Press ENTER from the “RING” menu, and move the cursor at “R-FREQ”. This menu is used
to set up ring frequency.

6U RING>CAD R-FREQ PULSE M-FREQ LEVEL

20

To change the current frequency, press ENTER from the above menu.
Use arrow key to select the desired option, and press ENTER. The current selection will be
highlighted by an asterisk (*).

6U RING>CAD R-FREQ PULSE M-FREQ LEVEL

*20 25 16.7 50

Press ENTER from the “RING” menu, and move the cursor at “PULSE”. This menu is used
to set up PULSE frequency.

6U RING>CAD R-FREQ PULSE M-FREQ LEVEL

OFF

To change the current frequency, press ENTER from the above menu.
Use arrow key to select the desired option, and press ENTER. The current selection will be
highlighted by an asterisk (*).

6U RING>CAD R-FREQ PULSE M-FREQ LEVEL

*OFF ON
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 59/126

Press ENTER from the “RING” menu, and move the cursor at “M-FREQ”. This menu is used
to set up metering frequency.

6U RING>CAD R-FREQ PULSE M-FREQ LEVEL

16

To change the current frequency, press ENTER from the above menu.
Use arrow key to select the desired option, and press ENTER. The current selection will be
highlighted by an asterisk (*).

6U RING>CAD R-FREQ PULSE M-FREQ LEVEL

*16 12

For H/W Version F or below:

Press ENTER from the “RING” menu, and move the cursor at “LEVEL”. This menu is used to
set up metering pulse level.

6U RING>CAD R-FREQ PULSE M-FREQ LEVEL

-24

To change the current level, press ENTER from the above menu.
Use arrow key to select the desired option, and press ENTER. The current selection will be
highlighted by an asterisk (*).

6U RING>CAD R-FREQ PULSE M-FREQ LEVEL

*0 -24

For H/W Version H or over:

Press ENTER from the “RING” menu, and move the cursor at “LEVEL”. This menu is used to
set up metering pulse level.

6U RING>CAD R-FREQ PULSE M-FREQ LEVEL

2.4Vrms

To change the current level, press ENTER from the above menu.
Use arrow key to select the desired option, and press ENTER. The current selection will be
highlighted by an asterisk (*).

6U RING>CAD R-FREQ PULSE M-FREQ LEVEL

*2.4Vrms 1Vrms
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 60/126 DXC 5000

PLAR
This menu is used to set up PLAR. Move the cursor at the desired option, press ENTER.
After done the setting, move the cursor at “set”, and press ENTER to save the configuration.
The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*). From left to right, the Ls represent
L1, L2, …L12.

6U CONFIG>GAIN TXSIG RXSIG RING PLAR

PLAR Setup

6U PLAR>L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L ->
OFF

STATUS
This menu is used to display system status. This group includes these options: OFF-HOOK,
PULSE, TIP, RING-GND, PLAR-ON, TONE-ON, and ALARM-ON. All its submenus are for
display only.

6U>CONFIG STATUS TEST MISC

FXS Status

Press ENTER from the above menu. Use arrow key to select “OFF-HOOK” to display its
current status. From left to right, the Ls represent L1, L2, …L12.

6U Status>OFF-HOOK PULSE TIP RING-GND ->

L L L L L L L L L L L L

Press ENTER from the “STATUS” menu. Use arrow key to select “PULSE” to display its
current status.

6U Status>OFF-HOOK PULSE TIP RING-GND ->

L L L L L L L L L L L L

This menu is used to display the current status for “TIP” option. The operation is same as
above menu.

6U Status>OFF-HOOK PULSE TIP RING-GND ->

L L L L L L L L L L L L

This menu is used to display the current status for ring ground start.

6U Status>OFF-HOOK PULSE TIP RING-GND ->

L L L L L L L L L L L L

This menu is used to display the current status for “PLAR-ON” option.

6U Status>PLAR-ON RINGING ALARM-ON O ->

L L L L L L L L L L L L
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 61/126

This menu is used to display the current status for ringing.

6U Status>PLAR-ON RINGING ALARM-ON O ->

*L *L *L *L *L *L *L *L *L *L *L *L

This menu is used to display the current status for “ALARM-ON” option.

6U Status>PLAR-ON RINGING ALARM-ON O ->

*L *L *L *L *L *L *L *L *L *L *L *L

TEST
This menu is used to do ringing testing. This group includes: (1) ring Testing and (2) battery
reverse testing.

6U>CONFIG STATUS TEST MISC

Diagnostic Test

This menu is used to do ring testing. Move the cursor at the option, then press ENTER to
start the testing. The testing will be processed with the count down seconds from 12 seconds
to the end.

6U TEST>RING BATTERY
RING TEST

This menu is used to do battery reverse testing. Move the cursor at the option, then press
ENTER to start the testing. The testing will be processed with the count down seconds from
12 seconds to the end.

6U TEST>RING BATTERY
BATTERY REVERSE TEST

Miscellaneous
This menu is used to display software information and allowed user to reset system and
download default configuration.

6U>CONFIG STATUS TEST MISC

Miscellaneous

Information
Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor at “INFO” to display software version
number.

6U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Version: V1.03 11/02/2004
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 62/126 DXC 5000

Reset
Press ENTER from the “MISC” menu, move the cursor at “RESET” option.

6U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Reset Unit

Press ENTER from the above menu.

6U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Reset Unit?

Press ENTER to confirm the reset.

Use arrow keys to pick the character, followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to
choose from. Password modification can only be done using terminal operation. The default
password is DXC5000. Move the cursor to "OK", then press ENTER when the entire
password is assembled.

Enter Password: ___________ OK

0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!”#$

Default
Press ENTER from the “MISC” menu, move the cursor at “DEFAULT” option.

6U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Load Default

Press ENTER from the above menu.

6U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Load Default?

Press ENTER to confirm the load default.

Use arrow keys to pick the character, followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to
choose from. Password modification can only be done using terminal operation. The default
password is DXC5000. Move the cursor to "OK", then press ENTER when the entire
password is assembled.

Enter Password: ___________ OK

0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!”#$

FXO Interface Menu

Move the cursor to UNIT option, then press ENTER.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

Move the cursor to select FXO interface, press ENTER.

UNIT> Select Unit: <FXO>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 63/126

Configuration
This group includes these options: GAIN, TXSIG, RXSIG, LINE, and METERING. Use arrow
key to move the cursor at the desired item, and press ENTER.

6U>CONFIG STATUS TEST MISC

System Configuration

GAIN
This menu is used to set up encoding, impedance, transmit loss adjustment, and receiver
loss adjustment. Move the cursor at “GAIN”, press ENTER to get into the submenu.

6U CONFIG>GAIN TXSIG RXSIG LINE METERING

Law, Impedance, and Gain Setup

This menu is used to set up encoding. Use arrow key to select the desired option, u-LAW for
µ-law and A-LAW for A-law. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

6U GAIN>LAW IMP TXGA RXGA

A-LAW

6U GAIN>LAW IMP TXGA RXGA

u-LAW *A-LAW

This menu is used to set up impedance. Use arrow key to select the desired option, 900 ohm
or 600 ohm, press ENTER. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

6U GAIN>LAW IMP TXGA RXGA

600-OHM

6U GAIN>LAW IMP TXGA RXGA

900-ohm *600-ohm

This menu is used to set up transmit loss adjustment. Move the cursor at “TXGA”.

6U GAIN>LAW IMP TXGA RXGA

Tx Gain

6U Tx Gain>L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L1 ->
-3.0

Press ENTER from the above menu. Use arrow key to move the cursor at the desired
position, press ENTER to the select a desired number, then move the cursor at "OK". Press
ENTER to confirm the new setting. Users are allowed to set up the "Tx Gain" from -21 to 10.

6U Tx Gain>L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L1 ->
*-03.0 OK (-21.0 to 10.0)
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 64/126 DXC 5000

This menu is used to set up transmit loss adjustment. Move the cursor at RXGA”.

6U GAIN>LAW IMP TXGA RXGA

Rx Gain

6U Rx Gain>L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L1 ->
-3.0

Press ENTER from the above menu. Use arrow key to move the cursor at the desired
position, press ENTER to the select a desired number, then move the cursor at "OK". Press
ENTER to confirm the new setting. Users are allowed to set up the "Rx Gain" from -21 to 10.

6U Rx Gain>L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L1 ->
*-03.0 OK (-21.0 to 10.0)

TXSIG
This menu is used to set up transmit signaling. Move the cursor at “TXSIG”, press ENTER to
get into the submenu. This group includes these options: RING, NO-RING, BATT-REV,
PULSE-ON, and TIP-OPEN. Use arrow key to move the cursor at the desired option, and
press ENTER to get into its submenu.

6U CONFIG>GAIN TXSIG RXSIG LINE METERING

Tx Signaling Bit

This menu is used to set up ringing. Move the cursor at “RINGING”.

6U TXSIG>RING NO-RING BATT-REV PULSE-ON

A=0 B=0 C=0 D=1

Press ENTER from the above menu. Use ENTER key to switch A=0 to A=1 or A=1 to A=0,
same operation for B, C, and D. After done the setting, move the cursor at “OK”, and press
ENTER.

6U TXSIG>RING NO-RING BATT-REV PULSE-ON

*A=0 B=0 C=0 D=1 OK?

This menu is used to set up no ringing. Move the cursor at “NO-RING”. The operation are
same as “RING”.

6U TXSIG>RING NO-RING BATT-REV PULSE-ON

A=0 B=1 C=0 D=1

6U TXSIG>RING NO-RING BATT-REV PULSE-ON

*A=0 B=1 C=0 D=1 OK?
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 65/126

This menu is used to set up battery reverse. Move the cursor at “BATT-REV”. The operation
are same as “RING”.

6U TXSIG>RING NO-RING BATT-REV PULSE-ON

A=0 B=1 C=0 D=0

6U TXSIG>RING NO-RING BATT-REV PULSE-ON

*A=0 B=1 C=0 D=0 OK?

RXSIG
This menu is used to set up receiver signaling. Move the cursor at “RXSIG”, press ENTER to
get into the submenu. This group includes these options: OFF-HOOK, OOS-ALARM, and
RING-GND. Use arrow key to move the cursor at the desired option, and press ENTER to
get into its submenu.

6U CONFIG>GAIN TXSIG RXSIG LINE METERING

Rx Signaling Bit

This menu is used to set up OFF-HOOK. Move the cursor at “OFF-HOOK”.

Press ENTER to get into its submenu. Use ENTER key to switch A=0 to A=1 or A=1 to A=0,
same operation for B, C, and D.
After done the setting, move the cursor at “OK", and press ENTER to confirm the new
configuration.

6U RXSIG>OFF-HOOK OOS-ALARM
A=1 B=1 C=* D=*

6U RXSIG>OFF-HOOK OOS-ALARM RING-GND

*A=1 B=1 C=* D=* OK?

This menu is used to set up out of service alarm. Move the cursor at “OOS-ALARM”.
Press ENTER to get into its submenu. Use ENTER key to switch A=0 to A=* or A=* to A=0,
same operation for B, C, and D.
After done the setting, move the cursor at “OK”, and press ENTER to confirm the new
configuration..

6U RXSIG>OFF-HOOK OOS-ALARM RING-GND

A=* B=* C=* D=*

6U RXSIG>OFF-HOOK OOS-ALARM RING-GND

*A=* B=* C=* D=* OK?

This menu is used to set up ring ground start and only available for the voice card with
ground start is purchased.
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 66/126 DXC 5000

Move the cursor at “RING-GND”. Press ENTER to get into its submenu. Use ENTER key to
switch A=0 to A=1 or A=1 to A=0, same operation for B, C, and D.
After done the setting, move the cursor at “OK”, and press ENTER to confirm the new
configuration.

6U RXSIG>OFF-HOOK OOS-ALARM RING-GND

A=0 B=0 C=0 D=1

6U RXSIG>OFF-HOOK OOS-ALARM RING-GND

*A=0 B=0 C=0 D=1 OK?

LINE
This menu is used to set up trunk condition and line polarity. Two options are available:
TRUNK-CONDITION and LINE-POLARITY. Move the cursor at “LINE”, then use arrow key
to move the cursor at the desired option, and press ENTER to get into its submenu.

6U CONFIG>GAIN TXSIG RXSIG LINE METERING

Line Setup

This menu is used to set trunk condition as on hook or off hook. Use arrow key to the desired
option, press ENTER to confirm it. The current setting will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

6U LINE>TRUNK-CONDITION LINE-POLARITY
ON-HOOK

6U LINE>TRUNK-CONDITION LINE-POLARITY
*ON-HOOK OFF-HOOK

This menu is used to set line polarity as reverse or normal. Use arrow key to the desired
option, press ENTER to confirm it. The current setting will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

6U LINE> TRUNK-CONDITION LINE-POLARITY

NORMAL

6U LINE> TRUNK-CONDITION LINE-POLARITY

REVERSE *NORMAL
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 67/126

METERING
NOTE: This option is available only when Metering is ordered. This menu is
used to set up metering.
This group includes these options: (1) Metering pulse frequency, (2) Metering pulse detect
mode, (3) Minimum pulse detect mode level #1, (4) Minimum pulse detect mode level #2,
and (5) Minimum pulse detect mode level #3.

6U CONFIG>GAIN TXSIG RXSIG LINE METERING

Metering Pulse Setup

Press ENTER from the above menu. Use arrow key to switch option to “METERING-PULSE-
FREQUENCY”. Two kinds of frequencies are available for this option: 16KHz or 12KHz.
Then move the cursor at the desired frequency, and press ENTER. The current selection will
be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

6U METERING>FREQ MODE LEVEL

16KHZ

6U METERING>FREQ MODE LEVEL

*16KHZ 12KHZ

Press ENTER from the “METERING” menu. Use arrow key to switch option to “METERING-
PULSE-DETECT-MODE”. Two kinds of detect modes are available for this option: PACKET
or NORMAL. Then move the cursor at the desired mode, and press ENTER. The current
selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

6U METERING>FREQ MODE LEVEL

NORMAL

6U METERING>FREQ MODE LEVEL

PACKET *NORMAL

Press ENTER from the “METERING” menu. Use arrow key to switch option to “MINIMUM-
PULSE-DETECT-LEVEL #1”. This menu is used to set up for Line 1 and Line 2, Line 3 and
Line 4.

6U METERING>FREQ MODE LEVEL

Mininum Pulse Decode Level

6U LEVEL>L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L ->
-27

Press ENTER from the above menu. Then move the cursor at the desired dBm, and press
ENTER to confirm it. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk(*).

6U LEVEL>L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L ->
*-27 -28 -29 -30 -31 -32 -33 ->
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 68/126 DXC 5000

STATUS
This menu is used to display system status. This group includes these options: RINGING,
OFF-HOOK, TIP-OPEN, LINE-BROKEN, RING-GND, BATT-REV, PULSE-ON, and ALARM-
ON.

6U>CONFIG STATUS TEST MISC

FXO Status

Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor at “RINGING”, the second line will
show up the status for this option. From left to right, the Ls represent L1, L2, …L12.

6U STATUS>RINGING OFF-HOOK LINE-BROKE ->

L L L L L L L L L L L L

Move the cursor at “OFF-HOOK”, the second line will show up its status.

6U STATUS>RINGING OFF-HOOK LINE-BROKE ->

L L L L L L L L L L L L

Use arrow key to move the cursor at “LINE-BROKEN”, the second line will show up the
current status for this option.

6U STATUS>RINGING OFF-HOOK LINE-BROKE ->

L L L L L L L L L L L L

Move the cursor at “RING-GND”, the second line will display its status.

6U STATUS>LINE-BROKEN RING-GND BATT-R ->

L L L L L L L L L L L L

Move the cursor at “BATT-REV”, the second line will show up the status for battery reverse.

6U STATUS>RING-GND BATT-REV PULSE-ON ->

L L L L L L L L L L L L

Use arrow key to move the cursor at “PULSE-ON”, the second line will show up its current
status.

6U STATUS>RING-GND BATT-REV PULSE-ON ->

L L L L L L L L L L L L

Move the cursor at “ALARM-ON”, the second line will show up the current status for this
option.

6U STATUS>BATT-REV PULSE-ON ALARM-ON ->

*L *L *L *L *L *L *L *L *L *L *L *L
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 69/126

TEST
This menu is used to do system test and to display testing result.

6U STATUS>CONFIG STATUS TEST MISC

Diagnostic Test

Press ENTER from the above menu to get into its submenu as below shows.

6U TEST>OFF-HOOK-TEST PULSE-DECODE-LE ->

OFF-HOOK TEST

Press ENTER frome the above menu to do off-hook testing.

6U TEST>OFF-HOOK-TEST PULSE-DECODE-LE ->

OFF-HOOK TEST?

Press ENTER from the above menu. The system will countdown from 12 to 0 second.

6U TEST>OFF-HOOK-TEST PULSE-DECODE-LE ->

Remain 3 seconds.

Press ENTER from the above menu to get into its submenu as below shows.

6U TEST>PULSE-DECODE-LEVEL-SCAN OFF-H ->

PULSE DECODE LEVEL SCAN

Press ENTER frome the above menu to do off-hook testing.

6U TEST>PULSE-DECODE-LEVEL-SCAN OFF-H ->

PULSE DECODE LEVEL SCAN?

Press ENTER from the above menu. The system will countdown from 12 to 0 second.

6U TEST>PULSE-DECODE-LEVEL-SCAN OFF-H ->

Remain 3 seconds.
6U>LEVEL-SCAN RESULT: (dBm)
L1= NA, L2= NA, L3= NA, L4= NA, C>

Press ESC from the above menu.

6U>LEVEL-SCAN RESULT: (dBm)

Copy Detected Value to System Setup?

6U>LEVEL-SCAN RESULT: (dBm)

Set Config OK!
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 70/126 DXC 5000

Miscellaneous
This menu is used to display software information and allowed user to reset system and
download default configuration.

6U>CONFIG STATUS TEST MISC

Miscellaneous

Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor at “INFO” to display software
information.

6U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Version: V1.01 5/03/2005

Press ENTER from the “MISC” menu, move the cursor at “DEFAULT” option. Use arrow key
to select “YES” to download default configuration or “NO” to abort.

6U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Reset Unit

6U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Reset Unit?

Use arrow keys to pick the character, followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to
choose from. Password modification can only be done using terminal operation. The default
password is DXC5000. Move the cursor to "OK", then press ENTER when the entire
password is assembled.

Enter Password: OK
0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!"#$

Press ENTER from the “MISC” menu, move the cursor at “RESET” option. Use arrow key to
select “YES” to reset or “NO” to abort.

6U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Load Default

6U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Load Default?

Use arrow keys to pick the character, followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to
choose from. Password modification can only be done using terminal operation. The default
password is DXC5000. Move the cursor to "OK", then press ENTER when the entire
password is assembled.

Enter Password: OK
0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!"#$
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 71/126

Magneto Interface Menu

Move the cursor to UNIT option, then press ENTER.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

Move the cursor to select Magneto interface, press ENTER.

UNIT> Select Unit: <Magneto>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Configuration
This group includes these options: GAIN, TXSIG, RXSIG, RING, and PLAR. Use arrow key
to move the cursor at the desired item, and press ENTER.

5U>CONFIG STATUS TEST MISC

System Configuration

GAIN
This menu is used to set up encoding, impedance, transmit loss adjustment, and receiver
loss adjustment. Move the cursor at “GAIN”, press ENTER to get into the submenu.

5U CONFIG>GAIN TXSIG RXSIG RING PLAR

GAIN Setup

This menu is used to set up encoding. Use arrow key to select the desired option, u-LAW for
µ-law and A-LAW for A-law. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

5U GAIN>LAW IMP TXGA RXGA

A-LAW

5U GAIN>LAW IMP TXGA RXGA

u-LAW *A-LAW

This menu is used to set up impedance. Use arrow key to select the desired option, 900 ohm
or 600 ohm, press ENTER. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

5U GAIN>LAW IMP TXGA RXGA

600-OHM

5U GAIN>LAW IMP TXGA RXGA

900-OHM *600-OHM
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 72/126 DXC 5000

This menu is used to set up transmit loss adjustment. Move the cursor at “TXGA”.

5U GAIN>LAW IMP TXGA RXGA

-3.0 dB

TXSIG
This menu is used to set up transmit signaling. Move the cursor at “TXSIG”, press ENTER to
get into the submenu. This group includes these options: (1) NO-TX-GING, (2) TX-RING
(L1&L2), (3) TX-RING (L1&GND), (4) PLAR-TX-RING (L1&L2), and (5) PLAR-TX-RING
(L1&GND).

5U CONFIG>GAIN TXSIG RXSIG RING PLAR

Tx Signaling Bit

Press ENTER from the above menu. Use arrow key to move the cursor at “NO-TX-RING”
option, then the screen will show as below. Use ENTER key to switch A=0 to A=1 or A=1 to
A=0, same operation for B, C, and D.
After done the setting, move the cursor at “OK”, and press ENTER to save the configuration.

5U TXSIG>TX-RING(L1&L2) TX-RING(L1&LN ->

A=0 B=1 C=0 D=1

Use arrow key to move the cursor at “TX-RING (L1&GND)” option, then the screen will show
as below. The operation is same as “TX-GING (L1&GND).

5U TXSIG>TX-RING(L1&L2) TX-RING(L1&LN ->

A=1 B=1 C=0 D=0

Use arrow key to move the cursor at “PLAR-TX-RING (L1&L2)” option, then the screen will
show as below. The operation is same as “TX-GING (L1&GND).

5U TXSIG>PLAR-TX-RING(L1&L2) PLAR-TX- ->

A=1 B=1 C=1 D=1

Use arrow key to move the cursor at “PLAR-TX-RING (L1&GND)” option, then the screen
will show as below. The operation is same as “TX-GING (L1&GND).

5U TXSIG>PLAR-TX-RING(L1&GND) NO-TX-R ->

A=0 B=1 C=0 D=1

5U TXSIG>NO-TX-RING TX-RING(L1&L2) TX ->

A=0 B=1 C=0 D=1
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 73/126

RXSIG
This menu is used to set up receiver signaling. Move the cursor at “RXSIG”, press ENTER to
get into the submenu. This group includes these options: (1) RX-RING (L1&L2), (2) RX-
RING (L1&GND), (3) PLAR-RX-RING (L1&L2), (4) PLAR-RX-RING (L1&GND), and (5)
OOS-ALARM.
The operation are same as “TXSIG” menu, see also section 5.11.1.2.

5U CONFIG>GAIN TXSIG RXSIG RING PLAR

Rx Signaling Bit

5U RXSIG>RX-RING(L1&L2) RX-RING(L1&GN ->

A=1 B=1 C=1 D=0

5U RXSIG>RX-RING(L1&GND) PLAR-RX-RING ->

A=1 B=1 C=0 D=0

5U RXSIG>PLAR-RX-RING(L1&L2) PLAR-RX- ->

A=1 B=1 C=1 D=1 SET?

5U RXSIG>PLAR-RX-RING(L1&LND) OOS-ALA ->

A=1 B=1 C=0 D=1

5U RXSIG>OOS-ALARM RX-RING(L1&L2) RX- ->

A=0 B=0 C=0 D=0

RING
This menu is used to set up PLAR ring cadence.

5U CONFIG>GAIN TXSIG RXSIG RING PLAR

Ring Setup

Press ENTER from the above menu. Use arrow key to move the cursor at the desired ringing
option for PLAR: “1-ON#2-OFF” for 1 second on 2 seconds off, or “2-ON#4-OFF” for 2
seconds on 4 seconds off. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

5U RING>CADENCE
1"ON,2"OFF 2"ON,4"OFF
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 74/126 DXC 5000

PLAR
This menu is used to set up PLAR. After done the setting, move the cursor at “set”, and
press ENTER to save the configuration. From left to right, the Ls represent L1, L2, …L12.

5U CONFIG>GAIN TXSIG RXSIG RING PLAR

PLAR Setup

5U PLAR>L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L1 ->
OFF

5U PLAR>L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L1 ->
*OFF ON

STATUS
This menu is used to display system status. This group includes these options: TX-
RING(L1&L2), TX-RING(L1&GND), PLAR-ON, and ALARM-ON. All its submenus are for
display only.

5U>CONFIG STATUS TEST MISC

Magneto Status

Press ENTER from the above menu. Use arrow key to select the desired option to display its
current status. From left to right, the Ls represent L1, L2, …L12.

5U STATUS>TX-RING(L1&L2) TX-RING(L1&G ->

L L L L L L L L L L L L

5U STATUS>TX-RING(L1&L2) TX-RING(L1&G ->

L L L L L L L L L L L L

5U STATUS>PLAR-ON ALARM-ON TX-RING(L1 ->

L L L L L L L L L L L L

5U STATUS>PLAR-ON ALARM-ON TX-RING(L1 ->

L L L L L L L L L L L L
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 75/126

TEST
This menu is used to do ringing testing. This group includes: (1) RX-RING(L1&L2), (2) RX-
RING(L1&GND), and (3) TX-RING.

5U>CONFIG STATUS TEST MISC

Diagnostic Test

Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor at the desired testing option, then
press ENTER to start the testing. The testing will be processed with the count down seconds
from 12 seconds to the end.

5U TEST>RX-RING(L1&L2) RX-RING(L1&GND ->

RX Ring (L1&L2) Test

Same operation as above.

5U TEST>RX-RING(L1&L2) RX-RING(L1&GND ->

RX-RING (L1&GND) Test

For transmit ringing test, please crank your telephone to do the testing.

5U TEST>TX-RING RX-RING(L1&L2) ->

TX-Ring Test

Press ENTER from the above menu.

5U TEST>TX-RING RX-RING(L1&L2) ->

TX-Ring Test?

Press ENTER again. The system will countdown from 12 seconds to 0 second.

5U TEST>TX-RING RX-RING(L1&L2) ->

Remain 12 seconds.

Miscellaneous
This menu is used to display software information and allowed user to reset system and
download default configuration.

5U>CONFIG STATUS TEST MISC

Miscellaneous

Information
Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor at “INFO” to display software version
number.

5U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Version: V1.03 05/20/2005
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 76/126 DXC 5000

Reset
Press ENTER from the “MISC” menu, move the cursor at “RESET” option.

5U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Reset Unit

Press ENTER from the above menu.

5U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Reset Unit?

Press ENTER to confirm the reset.

Use arrow keys to pick the character, followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to
choose from. Password modification can only be done using terminal operation. The default
password is DXC5000. Move the cursor to "OK", then press ENTER when the entire
password is assembled.

Enter Password: ___________ OK

0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!”#$

Default
Press ENTER from the “MISC” menu, move the cursor at “DEFAULT” option.

5U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Load Default
Press ENTER from the above menu.

5U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Load Default?
Press ENTER to confirm the load default.
Use arrow keys to pick the character, followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to
choose from. Password modification can only be done using terminal operation. The default
password is DXC5000. Move the cursor to "OK", then press ENTER when the entire
password is assembled.

Enter Password: ___________ OK

0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!”#$

E&M Interface Menu

Move the cursor to UNIT option, then press ENTER.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>
Move the cursor to select E&M interface, press ENTER.

UNIT> Select Unit: <E&M>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 77/126

Configuration
This menu is used to configure software setting and option setting.

4U>CONF STATUS MISC

System Configuration

S/W-SET
Under the above menu, use arrow keys to move the cursor at S/W-SET, press ENTER. This
group includes LAW, TXGA, and RXGA.

4U CONFIG>S/W-SET OPTION-SET
S/W Setup

This menu is used to set up encoding. Use arrow key to select the desired option, U-LAW for
µ-law and A-LAW for A-law. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

4U S/W-SET>LAW TXGA RXGA

A-LAW

4U S/W-SET>LAW TXGA RXGA

U-LAW *A-LAW

This menu is used to set up transmit loss adjustment. Move the cursor at

4U S/W-SET>LAW TXGA RXGA

-3.0 dB

4U S/W-SET>LAW TXGA RXGA

*-3.0 OK

4U S/W-SET>LAW TXGA RXGA

-3.0 dB

4U S/W-SET>LAW TXGA RXGA

*-3.0 OK
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 78/126 DXC 5000

OPTION-SET
Under the “CONF” menu, use arrow keys to move the cursor at OPTION-SET, press
ENTER. This group includes LINE, SIDE, IMP, and SIGNAL.

4U CONFIG>S/W-SET OPTION-SET
Optional Setup

This menu is used to set up 2-wire E&M or 4-wire E&M. Use arrow key to select the desired
option, press ENTER. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

4U OPTION-SET>LINE SIDE IMP SIGNAL

4-WIRE

4U OPTION-SET>LINE SIDE IMP SIGNAL

2-WIRE *4-WIRE

This menu is used to set up signaling side, A side or B side. Use arrow key to select the
desired option, press ENTER. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

4U OPTION-SET>LINE SIDE IMP SIGNAL

B

4U OPTION-SET>LINE SIDE IMP SIGNAL

A *B

This menu is used to set up impedance. Use arrow key to select the desired option, 900 ohm
or 600 ohm, press ENTER. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

4U OPTION-SET>LINE SIDE IMP SIGNAL

600-OHM

4U OPTION-SET>LINE SIDE IMP SIGNAL

900-OHM *600-OHM

This menu is used to set up signal type (for transmit only). Five signal types are available:
TP1 (Type 1), TP2 (Type 2), TP3 (Type 3), TP4 (Type 4), TP5 (Type 5). Use arrow key to
select the desired option, press ENTER. The current selection will be highlighted by an
asterisk (*).

4U OPTION-SET>LINE SIDE IMP SIGNAL

TP5

4U OPTION-SET>LINE SIDE IMP SIGNAL

TX TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 *TP5
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 79/126

Status
This menu is used to display status for signal side, E-LEAD, M-LEAD, and power.

4U>CONF STATUS MISC

E&M Status

Move the cursor at “SIDE” option, then the current signaling side will be highlighted by an
asterisk (*).

4U STATUS>SIDE E-LEAD M-LEAD POWER

*B

4U STATUS>SIDE E-LEAD M-LEAD POWER

*B A

Move the cursor at “E-LEAD” to display the current status.

4U STATUS>SIDE E-LEAD M-LEAD POWER

*E1 *E2 *E3 *E4 E5 E6 E7 E8

Move the cursor at “M-LEAD” to display the current status.

4U STATUS>SIDE E-LEAD M-LEAD POWER

*M1 *M2 *M3 *M4 M5 M6 M7 M8

Move the cursor at “POWER” to check the power status.

4U STATUS>SIDE E-LEAD M-LEAD POWER

OK

Miscellaneous
This menu is used to display software information, reset the system, and load default
configuration.

4U>CONF STATUS MISC

Miscellaneous

Information
Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor at “INFO” to display software version
number.

4U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Version: V1.04 01/26/2005
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 80/126 DXC 5000

This menu is used to return to default configuration. Move the cursor at “YES” to confirm the
download or “NO” to abort.

4U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Load Default

Reset
Press ENTER from the “MISC” menu, move the cursor at “RESET” option.

4U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Reset Unit

Press ENTER from the above menu.

4U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Reset Unit?

Press ENTER to confirm the reset.

Use arrow keys to pick the character, followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to
choose from. Password modification can only be done using terminal operation. The default
password is DXC5000. Move the cursor to "OK", then press ENTER when the entire
password is assembled.

Enter Password: ___________ OK

0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!”#$

Default
Press ENTER from the “MISC” menu, move the cursor at “DEFAULT” option.

4U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Load Default
Press ENTER from the above menu.

4U MISC>INFO RESET DEFAULT

Load Default?

Press ENTER to confirm the load default.

Use arrow keys to pick the character, followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to
choose from. Password modification can only be done using terminal operation. The default
password is DXC5000. Move the cursor to "OK", then press ENTER when the entire
password is assembled.

Enter Password: ___________ OK

0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!”#$
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 81/126

DTU Interface Menu (10-Port/ 6-Port)

Under Main menu, move the cursor to UNIT option. Press ENTER.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

Use arrow keys to select 10-port DTU interface as below.

UNIT> Select Unit: <DTU-10>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
12U> Select Port Number
U U U U U U U U U U

Use arrow keys to select 6-port DTU interface as below.

6U> Select Port Number

U U U U U U

The following PORT menus are applied for 10-port and 6-port DTU interfaces.

DTU
Press ENTER from the above LCD to enter in the DTU menu, which has three options:
MCLK, MODE, and LINK. The 12U-1 means the first port of the 12 unit.

12U-1>DTU RDTE ALARM DIAG MISC

DTU Setup

Only Internal is available for MCLK menu.

12U-1 DTU>MCLK MODE LINK

Internal

Only LT mode is available for MODE menu.

12U-1 DTU> MCLK MODE LINK

LT mode

Only M-channel is available for LINK menu.

12U-10 DTU> MCLK MODE LINK

M-channel

RDTE (Remote DTE)

The RDTE menu is used to select and setup the speed, channel, and configuration.

12U-1>DTU RDTE ALARM DIAG MISC

Remote DTE
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 82/126 DXC 5000

Speed for DTE

If the speed mode of remote DTE is SYNC, the choices of speed are 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2,
38.4, 48.0, 64, 56, 128, 112, or 0K.
If the speed mode of remote DTE is ASYNC, the choices of speed are 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6,
19.2, or 38.4K.

12U-1 RDTE>SPEED CHANNEL CONFIG X.50

SYNC 38.4K

To use left or right arrow key to select SYNC, and press ENTER, the following LCD for
choices of speed is shown. Then to keep moving cursor by using right key, the second LCD
is shown. The current selection is highlighted by an asterisk (*).

12U-1 RDTE>SYNC
1.2K 2.4K 4.8K 9.6K 19.2K *38.4K

12U-1 RDTE>SYNC
*64K 56K 128K 112K OK

To use left or right arrow key to select ASYNC, and press ENTER, the following LCD for
choices of speed is shown.

12U-1 RDTE>SPEED CHANNEL CONFIG

12U-1 RDTE> SYNC *ASYNC

12U-1 RDTE> ASYNC

1.2K 2.4K 4.8K 9.6K 19.2K *38.4K

Speed for DTE - X.50

The following RDTE menu is used to select and setup the speed, channel, configuration, and
X.50 interface.

12U-1 PORT> DTU RDTE ALARM DIAG MISC

12U-1 DTU> SPEED CHANNEL CONFIG X.50

If user want to select X.50 menu of Remote DTE menu from ASYNC submenu, move cursor
to SYNC submenu. Press ENTER to enter in the LCD for choices of speed, as the third LCD
shows. After pressing ESC key to return the Remote DTE menu, the X.50 submenu is
shown.

12U-10 RDTE>SPEED CHANNEL CONFIG X.50

12U-10 RDTE> *SYN A_8 A_9 A_10 A_11

12U-10 RDTE> SYNC

1.2 2.4 4.8 9.6 19.2 *38.4 48.0K
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 83/126

Channel
The options of channel for remote DTE are IDLE, B1, B2, or B1+B2 channels.

12U-1 RDTE> SPEED CHANNEL CONFIG X.50

B1

12U-1 RDTE> SPEED CHANNEL CONFIG X.50

IDLE B1 B2 *B1+B2

Configuration
The options of configuration for remote DTE are CLOCK, DATA, RTS, TTM and INTF.

12U-1 RDTE> SPEED CHANNEL CONFIG X.50

RDTE Configuration

12U-1 CONFIG>CLOCK DATA RTS TTM INTF

NORMAL

X.50 Configuration
Use arrow keys to select X.50 option, the LCD will show as below.

12U-1 RDTE> SPEED CHANNEL CONFIG X.50

X.50 Configuration

Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor to IDLE_CODE option to view the idle
code.

12U-1 X.50>IDLE_CODE MAP STATUS

0x2B

Press ENTER from the X.50 menu. Move the cursor to MAP option, the LCD will show as
below.

12U-1 X.50>IDLE_CODE MAP STATUS

[1111111111111111iiii]

To view the current status, press ENTER from the X.50 menu. Move the cursor to STATUS
option, the LCD will show as below.

12U-1 X.50> IDLE_CODE MAP STATUS

[11111111111111110000]
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 84/126 DXC 5000

Alarm
Under DTU PORT menu, move the cursor to ALARM option.

12U-1>DTU RDTE ALARM DIAG MISC

Alarm Setup

Press ENTER from the above menu to display the current alarm.

12U-1 SETUP>UNSYNC_ALM
MAJOR

To change the current configuration, press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor at
a desired option, then press ENTER to confirm it. The current selecton will be highlighted by
an asterisk (*).

12U-1 SETUP>UNSYNC_ALM
DISABLE *MAJOR CRITICAL MINOR

Diagnostic
Under DTU PORT menu, move the cursor to DIAG option, the system will show as below.
Three options are available here: Near Loopback, Remote Loopback, and BERT.

12U-1 PORT> DTU RDTE ALARM DIAG MISC

Diagnostic

Press ENTER from the above menu to enter in the near loopback. The current selection will
be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

12U-1 DIAG>NearLB RemoteLB BERT

OFF

12U-1 DIAG>NearLB RemoteLB BERT

*OFF LOCAL PAYLOAD

12U-1 DIAG>NearLB RemoteLB BERT

OFF

12U-1 DIAG>NearLB RemoteLB BERT

*OFF PAYLOAD DTE1

12U-1 DIAG>NearLB RemoteLB BERT

ON
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 85/126

12U-1 DIAG>NearLB RemoteLB BERT

OFF *ON

Press ENTER from the BERT menu, the LCD will show as below.

12U-1 BERT> UNSYNC Err Secs: 0

Total Seconds:1 Err Bits: 65535

Miscellaneous

Under the DTU PORT menu, move the cursor to MISC option, then the system will show as
below.

12U-1 PORT> DTU RDTE ALARM DIAG MISC

Miscellaneous

Remote Information
Move the cursor to RINFO option to view the remote information for software version and
serial number.

12U-1 MISC>RINFO RESET

Remote Information

12U-1 RINFO>S/W SERIAL

Version: V 1.10 09/10/1997

12U-1 RINFO>S/W SERIAL

Serial Number: 1234 01/1999

Reset
This menu is used to reset the DTE inteface.

12U-1 MISC>RINFO RESET

Reset 12U-1

Press ENTER from the above menu.

12U-1 MISC>RINFO RESET

Reset 12U-1?
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 86/126 DXC 5000

Press ENTER.
Use arrow keys to pick the character, followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to
choose from. Password modification can only be done using terminal operation. The default
password is DXC5000. Move the cursor to "OK", then press ENTER when the entire
password is assembled.

Enter Password: ___________ OK

0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!”#$

DTE Interface Menu

Move the cursor to UNIT option, then press ENTER.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

Use arrow keys to select a unit for DTE interface.

UNIT> Select Unit: <DTE-A>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

DTE Port Menu

5D>PORT INFO MISC

Select Port

5D> Select Port Number:

1 2 3 4 5 6

Configuration
Press ENTER from the above menu, the following LCD will show up.
CONF menu is used to configure DTE-port operation modes, such as data rate, clock mode,
data mode, RTS (request to send) mode, TTM (terminal timing mode) mode, V.54, and
interface.

5D-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

DTE Configuration

Rate
The Rate menu shows the current DTE data rate is either 64 or 56 Kbps. To change the DTE
data rate, move cursor to the desired selection and press ENTER. The current selection will
be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

5D-1 CONFIG>RATE CLK DATA RTS TTM V.54 ->

64KBps

5D-1 CONFIG>RATE CLK DATA RTS TTM V.54 ->

*64KBps 56KBps
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 87/126

Clock
The Clock menu shows the current DTE clock polarity status (either normal or inverted) by
placing an asterisk (*) at the appropriate selection. To change the DTE clock polarity, move
cursor to the desired selection and press ENTER.

5D-1 CONFIG>RATE CLK DAT RTS TTM V.54 ->

Normal

5D-1 CONFIG>RATE CLK DAT RTS TTM V.54 ->

*Normal Inverted

Data
The Data menu shows the current DTE data polarity (either normal or inverted) by placing an
asterisk (*) at the appropriate selection. To change the DTE data polarity, move cursor to the
desired selection and press ENTER.

5D-1 CONFIG>RATE CLK DAT RTS TTM V.54 ->

Normal

5D-1 CONFIG>RATE CLK DAT RTS TTM V.54 ->

*Normal Inverted

RTS
The RTS menu shows the current DTE RTS operation mode (either activate or permanent)
by placing an asterisk (*) at the appropriate selection. To change the DTE RTS operation
mode, move cursor to the desired selection and press ENTER.

5D-1 CONFIG>RATE CLK DAT RTS TTM V.54 ->

Active

5D-1 CONFIG>RATE CLK DAT RTS TTM V.54 ->

*Active Permanent

TTM
TTM menu shows the current DTE terminal timing mode (either OFF or ON) by placing an
asterisk (*) at the appropriate selection. To change the DTE terminal timing mode, move
cursor to the desired selection and press ENTER.

5D-1 CONFIG>RATE CLK DAT RTS TTM V.54 ->

OFF

5D-1 CONFIG>RATE CLK DAT RTS TTM V.54 ->

*OFF ON
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 88/126 DXC 5000

V.54
V54 menu shows the current DTE V.54 mode (either OFF or ON) by placing an asterisk (*)
at the appropriate selection. To change the DTE V.54 mode, move cursor to the desired
selection and press ENTER.

5D-1 CONFIG>RATE CLK DAT RTS TTM V.54 ->

OFF

5D-1 CONFIG>RATE CLK DAT RTS TTM V.54 ->

*OFF ON

Interface
The Interface menu shows the current DTE interface type.
If V.35 DTE card is plugged into the slot of shelf, the LCD will show as below:

5D-1 CONFIG>INTF RATE CLK DATA RTS TT ->

V.35

If V.36 DTE card is plugged into the slot of shelf, the LCD will show as below:

5D-1 CONFIG>INTF RATE CLK DATA RTS TT ->

V.36

If EIA530 DTE card is plugged into the slot of shelf, the LCD will show as below:

5D-1 CONFIG>INTF RATE CLK DATA RTS TT ->

EIA530/RS449

If X.21/V.11 DTE card is plugged into the slot of shelf, the LCD will show as below:

5D-1 CONFIG>INTF RATE CLK DATA RTS TT ->

X.21

Status
Status menu is used to monitor the signal status of DSR, CTS, DCD, DTR, RTS, E_LS
(External Clock Loss), and RTS_LS (RTS Clock Loss).

5D-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

DTE Status

The asterisk "*" is shown only when the signal is ON.

5D-1>DSR CTS DCD DTR RTS ECLK_LS RTS_LS

* * *
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 89/126

Alarm

5D-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

Alarm Setup

The Setup menu is used to set up alarm relays and auto dial out functions.

5D-1 ALARM>DTE_ALARM
MAJOR

5D-1 ALARM>DTE_ALARM
DISABLE *MAJOR CRITICAL MINOR

Diagnostic
Diagnostics group includes DTE Loopback, V54 Loopback, and BERT menu.

5D-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

Diagnostic

DTE Loopback
DTE Loopback menu are used to control near end DTE loopback operation such as TO-
DS1and TO-LINE loopback test. The current selection is highlighted by an asterisk "*'.

5D-1 DIAG>DTE-LB V54-LB BERT

OFF

5D-1 DIAG>DTE-LB V.54-LB BERT

*OFF TO-DTE TO-DS1

V.54 Loopback
The V54 menu is used to control remote V54 channel loopback tests.

5D-1 DIAG>DTE-LB V.54-LB BERT

V.54 Loopback

To activate or deactivate V54 loopback, first by moving cursor to the desired selection, press
ENTER. Then the current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

5D-1 V.54-LB>ACTIVATE DEACTIVATE

*DTE

5D-1 V.54-LB>ACTIVATE DEACTIVATE

*DTE
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 90/126 DXC 5000

BERT
To start the bit error rate test by moving cursor to ON or OFF, then press ENTER. The
current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

5D-1 DIAG>DTE-LB V.54-LB BERT

OFF

5D-1 DIAG> DTE-LB V.54-LB BERT

OFF *ON

5D-1 BERT> SYNC Err Secs: 0

Total Seconds:35 Err Bits: 0

DTE (X.50) Interface Menu

Move the cursor to UNIT option, then press ENTER.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

Use arrow keys to select a unit for X.50 interface.

UNIT> Select Unit: <X.50>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
10X>PORT INFO MISC
Select Port

8X>Select Port Number

1 2 3 4 5

Configuration
CONF menu is used to configure X.50-port operation modes, such as MUX, SYNC, RATE,
PHASE, 4.8K, CLCOK, DATA, RTS (request to send) mode, and TTM (terminal timing
mode) mode.

10X-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

DTE Configuration
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 91/126

Mux
Press ENTER from the “CONFIG” menu, then move the cursor to the “MUX” to select “NO-
MUX” or “MUX”. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

10X-1 CONFIG>MUX SYNC RATE PHASE 4.8K ->

NO_MUX

10X-1 CONFIG>MUX SYNC RATE PHASE 4.8K ->

*NO_MUX MUX

Sync
Move the cursor to the “SYNC”. Under the “SYNC” menu, there are five options, SYNC,
ASYN-8, ASYN-9, ASYN-10, ASYN-11, are available to be selected. The current selection
will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

10X-1 CONFIG>MUX SYNC RATE PHASE 4.8K ->

SYNC

10X-1 CONFIG>MUX SYNC RATE PHASE 4.8K ->

*SYNC ASYN-8 ASYN-9 ASYN-10 ASYN-11

Rate
The Rate menu shows the current X.50 data rate as below: 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 48,
or 64Kbps by placing an asterisk (*) at the selected option. To change the X.50 data rate,
move the cursor to the desired selection, press ENTER.

10X-1 CONFIG>MUX SYNC RATE PHASE 4.8K ->

1.2K

10X-1 CONFIG>MUX SYNC RATE PHASE 4.8K ->

*1.2K 2.4K 4.8K 9.6K 19.2K 38.4K ->
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 92/126 DXC 5000

Phase
Press ENTER from the “CONFIG” menu, then move the cursor to the “PHASE”. Use left of
right arrow key to move the cursor to the desired position, then press ENTER to confirm the
selection. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
NOTE: When “NO-MUX”, the option of the “MUX” menu, is selected, user is
allowed to select “FIXED” only of the “PHASE” menu.

10X-1 CONFIG>MUX SYNC RATE PHASE 4.8K ->

1,6,11,16

10X-1 CONFIG>MUX SYNC RATE PHASE 4.8K ->

*PH_1 PH_2 PH_3 PH_4 PH_5 FIXED

4.8K
Press ENTER from the “CONFIG” menu, then move the cursor to the “4.8K”. Use left of right
arrow key to move the cursor to the desired position, then press ENTER to confirm the
selection. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
NOTE: When “NO-MUX”, the option of the “MUX” menu, is selected, user is
allowed to select “FIXED” only of the “4.8K” menu.

10X-1 CONFIG>MUX SYNC RATE PHASE 4.8K ->

fixed

Clock
The Clock menu shows the current X.50 clock polarity status (either normal or inverted) by
placing an asterisk (*) at the appropriate selection. To change the X.50 clock polarity, move
cursor to the desired selection and press ENTER.

10X-1 CONFIG>CLK DATA RTS TTM MUX SYNC ->

Normal

10X-1 CONFIG>CLK DATA RTS TTM MUX SYNC ->

*Normal Inverted

Data
The Data menu shows the current X.50 data polarity (either normal or inverted) by placing an
asterisk (*) at the appropriate selection. To change the X.50 data polarity, move cursor to the
desired selection and press ENTER.

10X-1 CONFIG>CLK DATA RTS TTM MUX SYNC ->

Normal

10X-1 CONFIG>CLK DATA RTS TTM MUX SYNC ->

*Normal Inverted
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 93/126

RTS
The RTS menu shows the current X.50 RTS operation mode (either activate or permanent)
by placing an asterisk (*) at the appropriate selection. To change the X.50 RTS operation
mode, move cursor to the desired selection and press ENTER.

10X-1 CONFIG>CLK DATA RTS TTM MUX SYNC ->

Permanent

10X-1 CONFIG>CLK DATA RTS TTM MUX SYNC ->

Active *Permanent

TTM
TTM menu shows the current X.50 terminal timing mode (either OFF or ON) by placing an
asterisk (*) at the appropriate selection. To change the X.50 terminal timing mode, move
cursor to the desired selection and press ENTER.

10X-1 CONFIG>CLK DATA RTS TTM MUX SYNC ->

OFF

10X-1 CONFIG>CLK DATA RTS TTM MUX SYNC ->

*OFF ON

Status
The operation is same as DTE interface.
Move the cursor at “STATUS” option and press ENTER, then the system will show up the
current status for these options:

DSR, CTS, DCD, DTR, RTS, EXTCLK_LO.

DSR: Data Set Ready.
EIA/TIA-232 interface circuit that is activated when DCE is powered on and ready for use.
CTS: Clear To Send.
Circuit in the EIA/TIA-232 specification that is activated when DCE is ready to accept data
from a DTE
DCD: Data Carrier Detect.
DTR: Data Terminal Ready.
EIA/TIA-232 circuit that is activated to let the DCE know when the DTE is ready to send and
receive data.
RTS: Request To Send.
EIA/TIA-232 control signal that requests a data transmission on a communications line.
EXTCLK_LO: External Clock Loss

10X-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

DTE Status

10X-1>DSR CTS DCD DTR RTS ECLK_LS RTS_LS ->

* * * *
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 94/126 DXC 5000

Alarm
ALARM menu is used to display alarm history and allowed user to set up alarm. Move the
cursor at “ALARM” option, the LCD screen will show as below. The operation is same as
DTE interface.

10X-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

Alarm Setup

10X-1 ALARM>DTE-ALARM
MAJOR

10X-1 ALARM>DTE-ALARM
DISABLE *MAJOR CRITICAL MINOR

Diagnostic
Diagnostics group includes DTE Loopback and BERT menu. The operation is same as DTE
interface.

10X-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

Diagnostic

10X-1 DIAG>DTE-LB BERT

OFF

10X-1 DIAG>DTE-LB BERT

*OFF TO-DTE TO-DS1

10X-1 DIAG>DTE-LB BERT

*OFF ON

G.703-64K (Co-directional) Menu

Move the cursor to UNIT option, then press ENTER.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

Using arrow keys to move the cursor to select G.703-64K interface, press ENTER.

UNIT> Select Unit: <G.703>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 95/126

PORT Menu
Move the cursor at "PORT" item, press ENTER.

9G>PORT INFO
Select Port

Then move the cursor at the desired port, and press ENTER to enter into the port menu.

9G>Select Port Number:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Status
Submenus for PORT include these items: STATUS, DIAGNOSTICS, and ALARM.
The "STATUS" menu is used to display the current port status.

9G-1>STATUS DIAG ALARM

G703 Status

Press ENTER from the above menu, This menu is for display only. If the current port status
is loss of sync, the asterisk (*) mark will be displayed under LOS item.

9G-1 STATUS>LOS
NO

Diagnostics
Diagnostics group includes near loopback and test pattern.

9G-1>STATUS DIAG ALARM

Diagnostic

Near loopback menus are used to control near end E1 or T1 line side loopback operation,
such as local loopback and payload loopback. Under diagnostics menu, use arrow keys to
select "NearLB", then the second line will show up three options: OFF, LOCAL, and
PAYLOAD. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*). To select other
desired options, move the cursor at the proper location, then press ENTER to confirm.

9G-1 DIAG>NearLB PATT

OFF

9G-1 DIAG>NearLB PATT

OFF *LOCAL PAYLOAD
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 96/126 DXC 5000

This menu is used to disable or enable test pattern. Use arrow keys to move the cursor at
the desired option, then press ENTER to confirm. The current selection will be highlighted by
an asterisk (*).

9G-1 DIAG>NearLB PATT

OFF
9G-1 DIAG>NearLB PATT
*OFF ON
9G-1 BERT> SYNC Err Secs:0
Total Seconds:35 Err Bits:0

Alarm
This ALARM menu is allowed user to do alarm setup.

9G-1>STATUS DIAG ALARM

Alarm Configuration

Press ENTER from the above menu, the LCD will show as below. Two options are available:
DISABLE or SAVE.

9G-1 ALARM>CLEAR SETUP

Clear Alarm History

9G-1 ALARM>CLEAR SETUP

Alarm Setup

This "DISABLE" menu is used to disable alarm setup, or set up Major alarm, critical alarm,
and minor alarm. Use arrow keys to move the cursor at the desired option, then press
ENTER to confirm. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

9G-1 SETUP>LOS_ALM
MAJOR

INFO Menu
This "INFO" menu is used to display information of hardware version.

9G>PORT INFO
Card Information

Press ENTER from the above menu to display the current hardware version.

9G INFO>H/W
Version: FPGA VER.A
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 97/126

Dry Contact Interface Menu

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

Use arrow keys to select a unit for Dry Contact interface.

UNIT> Select Unit: <Dry Contact>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Configuration Menu
This menu is used to do system configuration for input and output of dry contact card.

2DC>CONFIG MESSAGE STATUS MISC

Inputs Outputs Channel Configuration

Inputs
This menu is used to set up dry contact input ports.

2DC CONFIG>INPUTS OUTPUTS CHANNEL

Dry Contact Inputs

Press ENTER from the above menu. The following menus are used to enable or disable pair
1 to pair 4 of N1 port. To change the current setting, press ENTER.

2DC INPUTS>N1-P1 N1-P2 N1-P3 N1-P4 N2 ->

ON

Then move the cursor at "OFF" or "ON", press ENTER. The current selection will be
highlighted by an asterisk (*).

2DC INPUTS>N1-P1 N1-P2 N1-P3 N1-P4 N2 ->

*OFF ON

2DC INPUTS>N1-P1 N1-P2 N1-P3 N1-P4 N2 ->

ON

2DC INPUTS>N1-P1 N1-P2 N1-P3 N1-P4 N2 ->

ON

2DC INPUTS>N1-P1 N1-P2 N1-P3 N1-P4 N2 ->

ON
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 98/126 DXC 5000

2DC INPUTS>N2-P1 N2-P2 N2-P3 N2-P4 N1 ->

ON

Outputs

2DC CONFIG>INPUTS OUTPUTS CHANNEL

Dry Contact Outputs

Press ENTER from the above menu. The following menus are used to set up the current
setting for U1 to U8 ports. To change the current setting, press ENTER. Then move the
cursor at a desired option, press ENTER. The current selection will be highlighted by an
asterisk (*).

2DC OUTPUTS>U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8
Normal

2DC OUTPUTS>U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8
*Normal Operated

2DC OUTPUTS>U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8
Normal

2DC OUTPUTS>U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8
Normal

2DC OUTPUTS>U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8
Normal

2DC OUTPUTS>U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8
Normal

2DC OUTPUTS>U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8
Normal

2DC OUTPUTS>U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8
Normal
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 99/126

2DC OUTPUTS>U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8
Normal

Channel
This menu is used to setup alarm source from Controller or DS0.

2DC CONFIG>INPUTS OUTPUTS CHANNEL

Controller

The current setting will be highlighted by an asterisk (*). Please refer to 6.20.1(Figure 6-1
and Figure 6-2) for Relay Control of DS0 and Signal of DS0.

2DC CONFIG>INPUTS OUTPUTS CHANNEL

*Controller DS0

Message Menu
This menu is used to display inputs alarm message.

2DC>CONFIG MESSAGE STATUS MISC

Inputs Alarm Message

Press ENER from the above menu. The following menus are used to edit alarm message for
pair 1 to pair 4 of input-ports (N1 and N2).

2DC MESSAGE>N1-P1 N1-P2 N1-P3 N1-P4 N ->

N1_Pair_1 Device Alarm

N1-P1
N1_Pair_1 Device Alarm

Press ENTER from the above menu. User arrow keys to select a desired character and
press ETNER to confrim the selection.

N1_Pair_1 Device Alarm__________________

0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOQURSTUVWXYZabc

Then move the cursor at "OK", press ENTER to confirm the editing.

________________ OK
0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOQURSTUVWXYZabc

2DC MESSAGE>N1-P1 N1-P2 N1-P3 N1-P4 N ->

N1_Pair_2 Device Alarm
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 100/126 DXC 5000

2DC MESSAGE>N1-P1 N1-P2 N1-P3 N1-P4 N ->

N1_Pair_3 Device Alarm

2DC MESSAGE>N1-P1 N1-P2 N1-P3 N1-P4 N ->

N1_Pair_4 Device Alarm

2DC MESSAGE>N1-P2 N1-P3 N1-P4 N2-P1 N ->

N2_Pair_1 Device Alarm

2DC MESSAGE>N1-P4 N2-P1 N2-P2 N2-P3 N ->

N2_Pair_2 Device Alarm

2DC MESSAGE>N1-P4 N2-P1 N2-P2 N2-P3 N ->

N2_Pair_3 Device Alarm

2DC MESSAGE>N2-P1 N2-P2 N2-P3 N2-P4 N ->

N2_Pair_4 Device Alarm

Status Menu
This menu is used to display system status for inputs and outputs of dry contact card.

2DC>CONFIG MESSAGE STATUS MISC

Inputs & Outputs Status

Inputs
Press ENTER from the above menu. This menu is used to display the current status for pair
1 to pair 4 of dry contact inputs.

2DC STATUS>INPUTS OUTPUTS

Dry Contact Inputs

2DC INPUTS>N1-P1 N1-P2 N1-P3 N1-P4 N2 ->

OK
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 101/126

Outputs
Press ENTER from the above menu. This menu is used to display the current status for dry
contact outputs.

2DC STATUS>INPUTS OUTPUTS

Dry Contact Outputs

2DC OUTPUTS>U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8
Normal
Miscellaneous
This menu is used to display FPGA version and load default setting.

2DC>CONFIG MESSAGE STATUS MISC

Miscellaneous

Information
Press ENTER from the above menu.

2DC MISC>INFO DEFAULT

FPGA Ver.A

Default
This menu is used to load defautl configuration.

2DC MISC>INFO DEFAULT

Load Default

2DC MISC>INFO DEFAULT

Load Default?

Use arrow keys to pick the character, followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to
choose from. Password modification can only be done using terminal operation. The default
password is DXC5000. Move the cursor to "OK", then press ENTER when the entire
password is assembled.

Enter Password: OK
0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!"#$
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 102/126 DXC 5000

HDSL Interface Menu

Move the cursor to UNIT option, then press ENTER.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

Use arrow keys to select a unit for HDSL interface.

UNIT> Select Unit: <HDSL-LTU-A>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

HDSL Port Menu

Press ENTER from the above menu. The system will show up three submenu: PORT, INFO,
and MISC.

5H>PORT INFO MISC

Select Pport
Use arrow keys to select the desired port.

5H> Select Port Number

PORT-1 PORT-2 PORT-3 PORT-4

Configuration
Press ENTER from the PORT-1 menu, to enter in the CONFIG menu, which provides five
options: MODE, S-CLK, S-DTE, and RATE.

5H-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

HDSL Configuration

MODE
This "MODE" menu is used to select master mode or slave mode.

5H-1 CONFIG>MODE S-CLK S-DTE RATE

MASTER

5H-1 CONFIG>MODE S-CLK S-DTE RATE

*MASTER SLAVE
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 103/126

S-CLK
Slave clock menu is used to view the current clock source of the slave are line, internal, or
DTE by placing an asterisk (*) at the appropriate selection. To change the selection, move
cursor to the desired selection and press ENTER.

5H-1 CONFIG>MODE S-CLK S-DTE RATE

LINE

5H-1 CONFIG>MODE S-CLK S-DTE RATE

*LINE INTERNAL DTE

S-DTE
Slave DTE menu is used to configure DTE port operation mode of the slave. There are the
following choices are available: MAP, clock mode, data mode, RTS, TTM (Terminal Timing
Mode), V.54, and interface type.

5H-1 CONFIG>MODE S-CLK S-DTE RATE

Slave DTE Config

MAP menu shows the current assigned ports for each DS0 channel. In the MAP menu, i
indicates idle, 1 indicates corresponding DTE port numbers. To change a specific DS0
channel port assignment, move the cursor to a the desired port and press ENTER. The
cursor will return to the upper line and the LCD will show the channel number. Slave map will
auto setup whenever the Master MAP (main menu) is changed.

5H-1 S-DTE>MAP CLK DATA RTS TTM V.54 ->

[ii1111111111] (10:640Kbps)

Clock menu shows the current slave DTE clock polarity status (either normal or inverted) by
placing an asterisk (*) at the appropriate selection. To change the DTE clock polarity, move
the cursor to a the desired port and press ENTER.

5H-1 S-DTE>MAP CLK DATA RTS TTM V.54 INTF

NORMAL

5H-1 S-DTE>MAP CLK DATA RTS TTM V.54 INTF

*NORMAL INVERTED

To change the DTE data polarity to NORMAL or INVERTED, use left and right arrow keys to
cycle through to a proper selection and press ENTER.

5H-1 S-DTE>MAP CLK DATA RTS TTM V.54 INTF

NORMAL

5H-1 S-DTE>MAP CLK DATA RTS TTM V.54 INTF

*NORMAL INVERTED
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 104/126 DXC 5000

To change the DTE RTS operation mode to ACTIVE or PERMANENT, move the cursor to
the desired port and press ENTER.

5H-1 S-DTE>MAP CLK DATA RTS TTM V.54 INTF

ACTIVE

5H-1 S-DTE>MAP CLK DATA RTS TTM V.54 INTF

*ACTIVE PERMANENT

To change the DTE terminal timing mode, use left and right arrow keys to cycle through to a
proper selection and press ENTER.

5H-1 S-DTE>MAP CLK DATA RTS TTM V.54 INTF

OFF

To change the DTE V.54 channel to OFF or ON, move the cursor to a the desired port and
press ENTER.

5H-1 S-DTE>MAP CLK DATA RTS TTM V.54 INTF

*OFF ON

To view the DTE interface, use left and right arrow keys to cycle through to a proper
selection.

5H-1 S-DTE>MAP CLK DATA RTS TTM V.54 INTF

V.35

RATE
The Rate menu shows the current line rate.

5H-1 CONFIG>MODE S-CLK S-DTE RATE

784Kbps

Move the cursor at UP or DOWN options to select the desired line rate. Then go to OK
option by pressing ENTER to change setup.

5H-1 RATE>MODE S-CLK S-DTE RATE

*784Kbps UP DOWN OK

Status
Status menu is used to monitor the signal status of master line, slave line, and slave DTE or
E1.

5H-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

HDSL Status
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 105/126

Master Line Status

5H-1 STATUS>M-LINE S-LINE S-DTE

LOOP-1 SYNC

Slave Line Status

5H-1 STATUS>M-LINE S-LINE S-DTE

LOOP-1 SYNC

Slave DTE Status

The asterisk " * " is shown only when the signal is ON.

5H-1 STATUS>M-LINE S-LINE S-DTE

*DSR *CTS *DCD *DTR *RTS

Alarm
Move the cursor to ALARM option to do alarm setup. The Setup menu is used to set up
alarm relays and auto dial out functions. To set up these functions, press ENTER to move to
the following display. Move cursor to NEXT or PREVIOUS and press ENTER to view each
alarm type. To edit the threshold level, alarm relay, and dial out functions, move cursor to
EDIT and press ENTER.

5H-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

Alarm Setup

5H-1 ALARM>SETUP
Alarm Setup

Master Loop
This menu is used to set up master loop alarms, like LOS, ES15M, SES15M, ES24H, and
SES24H.

5H-1 SETUP>M-LOOP S-LOOP

Master-Loop Alarm

LOS (Loss of signal):

This menu displays the current alarm of LOS.

5H-1 M-LOOP>LOS ES15M SES15M ES24H SE ->

MAJOR

To change the current setting, press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor at a
desired option, then press ENTER to confirm the new setting. The current selection will be
highlighted by an asterisk(*).

5H-1 M-LOOP>LOS ES15M SES15M ES24H SE ->

DISABLE *MAJOR CRITICAL MINOR
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 106/126 DXC 5000

ES15M (Error second in current 15-minute):

This menu displays the current alarm of ES15M.

5H-1 M-LOOP>LOS ES15M SES15M ES24H SE ->

MAJOR

To change the current setting, press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor at a
desired option, then press ENTER to confirm the new setting. The current selection will be
highlighted by an asterisk(*).

5H-1 M-LOOP>LOS ES15M SES15M ES24H SE ->

DISABLE *MAJOR CRITICAL MINOR

SES15M (Severely error second in current 15-minute):

This menu displays the current alarm of ES15M.

5H-1 M-LOOP>LOS ES15M SES15M ES24H SE ->

MAJOR

To change the current setting, press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor at a
desired option, then press ENTER to confirm the new setting. The current selection will be
highlighted by an asterisk(*).

5H-1 M-LOOP>LOS ES15M SES15M ES24H SE ->

DISABLE *MAJOR CRITICAL MINOR

ES24H (Error second in current 24-hour):

This menu displays the current alarm of ES15M.

5H-1 M-LOOP>LOS ES15M SES15M ES24H SE ->

MAJOR

To change the current setting, press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor at a
desired option, then press ENTER to confirm the new setting. The current selection will be
highlighted by an asterisk(*).

5H-1 M-LOOP>LOS ES15M SES15M ES24H SE ->

DISABLE *MAJOR CRITICAL MINOR

SES15M (Severely error second in current 24-hour):

This menu displays the current alarm of ES15M.

5H-1 M-LOOP>LOS ES15M SES15M ES24H SE ->

MAJOR
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 107/126

To change the current setting, press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor at a
desired option, then press ENTER to confirm the new setting. The current selection will be
highlighted by an asterisk(*).

5H-1 M-LOOP>LOS ES15M SES15M ES24H SE ->

DISABLE *MAJOR CRITICAL MINOR

Slave Loop
This menu is used to set up slave loop alarms, like LOS, ES15M, SES15M, ES24H, and
SES24H. The operaton for "S-LOOP" is same as "S-LOOP".

5H-1 SETUP>M-LOOP S-LOOP

Slave-Loop Alarm

5H-1 S-LOOP>LOS ES15M SES15M ES24H SE ->

MAJOR

Diagnostic
Diagnostics group includes HDSL, slave Loopback, and BERT menu.

5H-1 DIAG>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

Diagnostic

HDSL Loopback
HDSL Loopback menu are used to control near end HDSL line side loopback operation such
as TO-DS1 loopback tes. Under Diagnostics menu, use left or right key to select HDSL
Loopback menu. The current selection is highlighted by an asterisk (*).

5H-1 DIAG>HDSL-LB SlaveLB BERT

OFF

5H-1 DIAG>HDSL-LB SlaveLB BERT

*OFF TO-DS1
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 108/126 DXC 5000

Slave Loopback
Slave Loopback menu is used to active the slave's loopback test. A proprietary message is
sent to request the slave DXC 5000 3420 to perform line or DTE loopback. Under SlaveLB
menu, use left or right key to select the desired selection. The current selection is highlighted
by an asterisk (*).

5H-1 DIAG>HDSL-LB SlaveLB BERT

OFF

5H-1 DIAG>HDSL-LB SlaveLB BERT

*OFF DTE-TO-LINE DTE-TO-DTE

BERT
Moving cursor to select BERT menu to start the bit error rate test.

5H-1 DIAG>HDSL-LB SlaveLB BERT

OFF

5H-1 DIAG>HDSL-LB SlaveLB BERT

*OFF ON

5H-1 BERT> UNSYNC Err Secs: 0

Total Seconds: 0 Err Bits: 0

Information
The Information menu provides software version number.

5H>PORT INFO MISC

Card Information

5H INFO >S/W
Version: V1.02 01/06/2005

Miscellaneous
Move the cursor to MISC option, the LCD will show as below.

5H>PORT INFO MISC

Miscellaneouos

Reset
Under Miscellaneous menu, moving cursor to RESET, then press ENTER to reset the HDSL
cards. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 109/126

5H MISC>RESET DEFAULT
Reset Unit

5H MISC>RESET DEFAULT
Reset Unit?

Press ENTER to confirm the reset.

Use arrow keys to pick the character, followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to
choose from. Password modification can only be done using terminal operation. The default
password is LOOP. Move the cursor to "OK", then press ENTER when the entire password
is assembled.

Enter Password: ___________ OK

0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!”#$

Default
Move the cursor to DEFAULT option to download default.

5H MISC>RESET DEFAULT
Load Default Port

Press ENTER from the above menu, then use arrow keys to select a desired port.

5H>Load Default Port :

PORT-1 PORT-2 PORT-3

Press ENTER to confirm the load default.

Use arrow keys to pick the character, followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to
choose from. Password modification can only be done using terminal operation. The default
password is DXC5000. Move the cursor to "OK", then press ENTER when the entire
password is assembled.

Enter Password: ___________ OK

0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!”#$
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 110/126 DXC 5000

G.SHDSL Interface Menu

Move the cursor to UNIT option, then press ENTER.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

Use arrow keys to select a unit for 4-port or 2-port G.SHDSL interface.
For 4-port G.SHDSL interface:

UNIT> Select Unit: <GSHDSL-4>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

For 2-port G.SHDSL interface:

UNIT> Select Unit: <GSHDSL-2>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Port Menu
For 4-port G.SHDSL interface:
Press ENTER from the above menu. This menu is allowed users to set up 4 G.SHDSL ports.

4G>PORT INFO MISC

Select Port

4G> Select Port Number

PORT-1 PORT-2 PORT-3 PORT-4

For 2-port G.SHDSL interface:

2G>PORT INFO MISC

Select Port

2G> Select Port Number

PORT-1 PORT-3

Configuration
Press ENTER from the above menu. Thism "CONFIG" menu is used to do system setup for
G.SHDSL card.

4G-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG MISC

G.shdsl Configuration
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 111/126

Line Rate
This menu is used to set up line rate.

4G-1 CONFIG>LINE-RATE GENERAL ADVANCE

Unit Line Rate

Press ENTER from the "LINE-RATE" menu, move the cursor at "Nx64". This menu is used to
set up the value of N.
NOTE: For 4-port G.shdsl, N = 3 to 31; for 2-port G.shdsl, N = 3 to 15.

4G-1 LINE-RATE>Nx64 RATE LOOP-NUM

12

Press ENTER from the "LINE-RATE" menu, move the cursor at "RATE". This menu is used
to display the current data rate, which depends on the value of N x 64.

4G-1 LINE-RATE>Nx64 RATE LOOP-NUM

776Kbps

Press ENTER from the "LINE-RATE" menu, move the cursor at "LOOP-NUM", then the
system will show up the current status. To set up loop number, press ENTER from this
menu.
For 4-port G.SHDSL interface:

4G-1 LINE-RATE>Nx64 RATE LOOP-NUM

Loop_One

For 2-port G.SHDSL interface:

2G-1 LINE-RATE>Nx64 RATE LOOP-NUM

Loop_One Loop-Two *Two-Loops One+One

General Setup
This menu is used to go general setup.

4G-1 CONFIG>LINE-RATE GENERAL ADVANCE

General Setup
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 112/126 DXC 5000

Local
Press ENTER from the above menu. This menu is used to do local setup.

4G-1 GENERAL>LOCAL FAR-END

Local Configuration

Press ENTER from the above menu. This menu is used to select master mode or slave
mode.

4G-1 LOCAL>MODE CAS MAX-DATA-RATE MAP

MASTER
4G-1 LOCAL>MODE CAS MAX-DATA-RATE MAP
*MASTER SLAVE

Press ENTER from the "LOCAL" menu. This menu is used to enable or disable CAS
function.

4G-1 LOCAL>MODE CAS MAX-DATA-RATE MAP

OFF
4G-1 LOCAL>MODE CAS MAX-DATA-RATE MAP
ON *OFF

Press ENTER from the "LOCAL" menu. This menu is used to set up maximum data rate.

4G-1 LOCAL>MODE CAS MAX-DATA-RATE MAP

768Kbps

Press ENTER from the "LOCAL" menu. This menu is used to do MAP setup.

4G-1 LOCAL>MODE CAS MAX-DATA-RATE MAP

[XXXXXXXXXXXXiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii]

Far-End
This menu is used to do general setup for far-end side.

4G-1 GENERAL>LOCAL FAR-END

Far End

For E1:
Press ENTER from the above menu to get into the sub-menu. The "MCLK" menu is used to
display and set up the current master clock: Line, Internal, or DTE.

4G-1 FAR-END>MCLK FRAME CODE MAP

LINE

This menu is used to set up frame or unframe.

4G-1 FAR-END>MCLK FRAME CODE MAP

UNFRAME
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 113/126

The "CODE" menu is used to display and set up the current code format: HDB3 or AMI.

4G-1 FAR-END>MCLK FRAME CODE MAP

HDB3
4G-1 FAR-END>MCLK FRAME CODE MAP
[iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii]

For T1:

4G-1 FAR-END>MCLK FRAME CODE CAS MAP

LINE

4G-1 FAR-END>MCLK FRAME CODE CAS MAP

ESF

4G-1 FAR-END>MCLK FRAME CODE CAS MAP

B8ZS

4G-1 FAR-END>MCLK FRAME CODE CAS MAP

OFF

4G-1 FAR-END>MCLK FRAME CODE CAS MAP

[iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii]

For DTE:

4G-1 FAR-END>MCLK RATE CLOCK DATA RTS ->

LINE

4G-1 FAR-END>MCLK RATE CLOCK DATA RTS ->

768Kbps

4G-1 FAR-END>MCLK RATE CLOCK DATA RTS ->

NORMAL

4G-1 FAR-END>MCLK RATE CLOCK DATA RTS ->

NORMAL
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 114/126 DXC 5000

4G-1 FAR-END>MCLK RATE CLOCK DATA RTS ->

ACTIVE

4G-1 FAR-END>RATE CLOCK DATA RTS TTM ->

ON

4G-1 FAR-END>CLOCK DATA RTS TTM V54 I ->

OFF

4G-1 FAR-END>DATA RTS TTM V54 INTF MA ->

V.35

4G-1 FAR-END>RTS TTM V54 INTF MAP MCL ->

[iiiiiiiiiiii]

Advance Setup
Press ENTER from the "CONFIG" menu, and move the cursor at "ADVANCE" item. The
"ADVANCE" menu is ussed to do advance setup for local sied and far-end side.

4G-1 CONFIG>LINE-RATE GENERAL ADVANCE

Advance Setup

Local
Press ENTER from the "ADVANCE" menu, and move the cursor at "LOCAL" item.

4G-1 ADVANCE>LOCAL FAR-END

Local Configuration

Press ENTER from the above menu and move the cursor at "ANNEX". The system will show
up the current ANNEX status.

4G-1 LOCAL>ANNEX CLK PSD PBO

A

This "ANNEX" menu is used to set up ANNEX A or ANNEX B.

4G-1 LOCAL>ANNEX CLK PSD PBO

*A B

This menu is used to set up clock mode: Plesiosynchronous or Synchronous.

4G-1 LOCAL>ANNEX CLK PSD PBO

PLESIOSYNCHRONOUS
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 115/126

This menu is used to set up power spectral density (PSD) masks. Two options are available:
Symmetric or Asymmetric.

4G-1 LOCAL>ANNEX CLK PSD PBO

SYMMETRIC

Press ENTER from the above menu to change the current configuration. The current
selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

4G-1 LOCAL>ANNEX CLK PSD PBO

*SYMMETRIC ASYMMETRIC

This menu is used to set up power back-off (PBO).

4G-1 LOCAL>ANNEX CLK PSD PBO

AUTOMATIC

Press ENTER from the above menu to change the current configuration. Users are allowed
to set up PBO as "automatic" or a desired dB from 0dB to 31dB. Move the cursor at a
desired option, press ENTER to confirm the new setting.

4G-1 LOCAL>ANNEX CLK PSD PBO

*AUTOMATIC 0dB 1Db 2dB 3dB 4dB ->

Far-End
This menu is used to do advance setup for far-end unit.

4G-1 ADVANCE>LOCAL FAR-END

Far-End

This menu is allowed users to select ANNEX A or ANNEX B.

4G-1 FAR-END>ANNEX CLK PSD PBO

A

This menu is for display only.

4G-1 FAR-END>ANNEX CLK PSD PBO

PLESIOSYNCHRONOUS
4G-1 FAR-END>ANNEX CLK PSD PBO
SYMMETRIC

Press ENTER from the above menu. This menu is allowed users to set PSD as symmetric or
asymmetric. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

4G-1 FAR-END>ANNEX CLK PSD PBO

*SYMMETRIC ASYMMETRIC

4G-1 LOCAL>ANNEX CLK PSD PBO

AUTOMATIC
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 116/126 DXC 5000

Press ENTER from the above menu. This menu is allowed users to select "Automatic" or "0
to 31dB".

4G-1 LOCAL>ANNEX CLK PSD PBO

*AUTOMATIC 0dB 1dB 2dB 3dB 4dB ->

Status
This "Staus" menu is used to display the current G.SHDSL system status for master side
and slave side.

4G-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG MISC

G.shdsl Status

Master Status
To display the current status for rmaster side, press ENTER from the above menu, and
mvoe the cursor at "MASTER" item.

4G-1 STATUS>MASTER SLAVE LINKID

Master Status

Press ENTER from the "MASTER" menu to display the current LOOP-1 status.

4G-1 MASTER>LOOP-1
SYNC

Slave Status
This menu is used to display the current status for slave side.

4G-1 STATUS>MASTER SLAVE

Slave Status

The "LOOP1" of "SLAVE" menu is used to display the current linking status for LOOP1.

4G-1 SLAVE>LOOP1 E1
SYNC

When the slave site is E1 interface, the LCD will show as below. The "E1" of "SLAVE" menu
is used to display the current status, which is highlighed by an asterisk (*), for E1.

4G-1 SLAVE>LOOP1 E1
*LOS *LOF RxAIS RxRAI TxAIS *TxRAI
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 117/126

When the slave site is T1 interface, the LCD will show as below. The "T1" of "SLAVE" menu
is used to display the current status, which is highlighed by an asterisk (*), for T1.

4G-1 SLAVE>LOOP1 T1
*LOS *LOF RxAIS RxYEL TxAIS *TxYEL

When the slave site is DTE interface, the LCD will show as below. The "DTE" of "SLAVE"
menu is used to display the current status, which is highlighed by an asterisk (*), for DTE.

4G-1 SLAVE>LOOP1 DTE

*DSR *CTS *DCD DTR *RTS

LINKID
This menu is used to display the current status for LINKID.

4G-1 STATUS> STATUS SLAVE AINKID

Show Remote Link Identification

Use arrow keys in AN type to view different option.

4G-1 LINK ID>TYPE RACK SLOT_NUM PORT

AN

Use arrow keys in CPE type to view serinal no.

4G-1 LINK ID>TYPE SERIAL NO

CPE

Alarm
The "ALARM" menu is used to review the current alarm status and to do alarm setup.

4G-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG MISC

Alarm Setup

Press ENTER from the above menu. The "NEXT" item is used to display the next alarm
status, the "PREV" item is used to review the previous one, and the "EDIT" item is allowed
user to do setup.

4G-1 ALARM>NEXT PREV EDIT

LOS,MASTER-LOOP1 : MAJOR
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 118/126 DXC 5000

Press ENTER from the "EDIT" menu to do alarm setup. Four options are available: Disable,
Major, Critical, and Minor. Use arrow keys to move the cursor at a desired option, then press
ENTER. The crrent selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

4G-1 LOS,MASTER-LOOP1>ALM
MAJOR

4G-1 LOS,MASTER-LOOP1>ALM
DISABLE *MAJOR CRITCIAL MINOR

Diagnostic
This "DIAG" menu is used to do loopback test and bit error rate test.

4G-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG MISC

Diagnostic

xDSL Lopback
This menu is used to display the current loopback status, and to do xDSL loopback test, or
stop loopback testing.

4G-1 DIAG>xDSL-LB SLAVELB BERT REM-BERT

OFF

This menu is allowed users to select "OFF" to stop loopback testing or select "TO-LOCAL"
for local loopback testing, "TO-LINE" for line loopback testing.

4G-1 DIAG>xDSL-LB SLAVE-LB BERT REM-BERT

*OFF TO-LOCAL TO-LINE

Slave Loopback
This manual is used to do slave loopback.

4G-1 DIAG>xDSL-LB SLAVE-LB BERT REM-BERT

OFF

Press ENTER from the above menu. The system will show up the current loopback test
options, which can be E1-to-Line loopback, T1-to-Line loopback, DTE-to-Line loopback, RTR
(Router)-to-Line.loopback, DTE-to-DTE loopback, xDSL-to-Line loopback, xDSL-to-DTE
loopback, or xDSL-to-BRG (Bridge) loopback,

4G-1 DIAG>xDSL-LB SLAVE-LB BERT REM-BERT

*OFF E1-TO-LINE xDSL-TO-LINE E1-T ->

4G-1 DIAG>xDSL-LB SLAVE-LB BERT REM-BERT

*OFF T1-TO-LINE xDSL-TO-LINE T1-T ->
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 119/126

4G-1 DIAG>xDSL-LB SLAVE-LB BERT REM-BERT

*OFF DTE-TO-LINE xDSL-TO-LINE DTE ->

4G-1 DIAG>xDSL-LB SLAVE-LB BERT REM-BERT

*OFF DTE-TO-LINE xDSL-TO-LINE DTE ->

4G-1 DIAG>xDSL-LB SLAVE-LB BERT REM-BERT

*OFF RTR-TO-LINE xDSL-TO-LINE

4G-1 DIAG>xDSL-LB SLAVE-LB BERT REM-BERT

*OFF xDSL-TO-LINE xDSL-TO-BRG

4G-1 DIAG>xDSL-LB SLAVE-LB BERT REM-BERT

*OFF xDSL-TO-LINE

BERT
This menu is used to do bit error rate test or disable it..

4G-1 DIAG>xDSL-LB SLAVE-LB BERT REM-BERT

OFF

Two options are available: OFF and QRSS.

4G-1 DIAG>xDSL-LB SLAVE-LB BERT REM-BERT

OFF *QRSS

Press ENTER from the above menu.

4G-1 BERT> UNSYNC Err Secs: 27

Total Seconds: 27 Err Bits: 65535

REM-BERT
This menu is used to remote Bert

6G-1 DIAG>xDSL-LB SLAVE-LB BERT REM-BERT

Remote Bert
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 120/126 DXC 5000

Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor at “PATTERN”. The screen show as
below.

6G-1 REM-BERT>PATTERN CHANNEL TEST

2^15-1

Press ENTER from the "CHANNEL" menu. The screen show as below.

6G-1 REM-BERT>PATTERN CHANNEL TEST

FULL

Press ENTER from the "TEST" menu. The screen show as below.

6G-1 REM-BERT>PATTERN CHANNEL TEST

DISABLE

The current selection wil be highlighted by an asterisk(*).

6G-1 REM-BERT>PATTERN CHANNEL TEST

*DISABLE ENABLE

Press ENTER from the above menu.

6 >SYNC ES:0 Err Bits:0

Total Secs:20 Unsync Secs:0

Miscellaneous
This menu is used to reset far end unit.

4G-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG MISC

Miscellaneous

Press ENTER from the "Miscellaneous" menu.

4G-1 MISC>FAR-END-RESET
Reset Far End

Press ENTER from the above menu. Press ENTER

again to confirm the reset.
4G-1 MISC>FAR-END-RESET
Reset Far End?
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 121/126

Then the system will ask for key in a password. Use arrow keys to pick the character,
followed by ENTER. There are 66 characters to choose from. Password modification can
only be done using terminal operation. The default password is DXC5000. Move the cursor
to YES, then press ENTER when the entire password is assembled.

Enter Password: OK
0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!"#$

FOM Interface Menu

Move the cursor to UNIT option, then press ENTER.

DXC 5000
<< UNIT CONTROLLER TSI-MAP ALARM MISC >>

Use arrow keys to select a unit for HDSL interface.

UNIT> Select Uuit: <FOM>

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1.3 Port Menu

This menu is used to select a desired port from FOM card.

D>PORT INFO MISC

Select Port

Press ENTER from the above menu. Move the cursor at a desired port, then press ENTER
to enter into its sub-menu.

D> Select FOM E1 Port

PORT-1 PORT-2 PORT-3 PORT-4

1.3.1 Configuration
The "CONFIG" menu is used to set up FOM card.

D-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

FOM Configuration

1.3.1.1 System Setup

The "SYSTEM" menu is used to do system setup.

D-1 CONFIG>SYSTEM APSD

System Setup

This menu is used to display the current status of line frame.

D-1 SYSTEM>FRAME CRC RAI CAS AIS IDLE

ON

Note that users are not allowed to change the current configuration for "FRAME".
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 122/126 DXC 5000

D-1 SYSTEM>FRAME CRC RAI CAS AIS IDLE

*ON

The "CRC" menu allows users to display the current CRC status and to enable or disable
line CRC.

D-1 SYSTEM>FRAME CRC RAI CAS AIS IDLE

ON

D-1 SYSTEM>FRAME CRC RAI CAS AIS IDLE

*ON OFF

The RAI (remote alarm indicator) menu shows the current RAI transmission state when loss
of signal and loss of frame alignment occur.

D-1 SYSTEM>FRAME CRC RAI CAS AIS IDLE

OFF

This menu is used to enable or disable RAI sending.

D-1 SYSTEM>FRAME CRC RAI CAS AIS IDLE

*OFF ON

The transmission of signaling information within the voice channel. CAS (channel associated
signaling) signaling often is referred to as robbed-bit signaling because user bandwidth is
being robbed by the network for other purposes.

D-1 SYSTEM>FRAME CRC RAI CAS AIS IDLE

OFF

This menu is used to enable or disable line CAS.

D-1 SYSTEM>FRAME CRC RAI CAS AIS IDLE

*OFF ON

This menu is used to set up AIS (alarm indication signal). In a T1 transmission, an all-ones
signal transmitted in lieu of the normal signal to maintain transmission continuity and to
indicate to the receiving terminal that there is a transmission fault that is located either at, or
upstream from, the transmitting terminal.

D-1 SYSTEM>FRAME CRC RAI CAS AIS IDLE

OFF
D-1 SYSTEM>FRAME CRC RAI CAS AIS IDLE
*OFF UNFRAME

Idle menu shows the transmission idle code when DS0 channel is in idle mode.

D-1 SYSTEM>FRAME CRC RAI CAS AIS IDLE

0xD5
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 123/126

In the second line, the "(0-FF)" is the available range for users to set up.

D-1 SYSTEM>FRAME CRC RAI CAS AIS IDLE

*D5 OK (0-FF)

1.3.1.2 APSD Setup

This APSD (automatic power shutdown) menu allows user to enable or disable APSD and
manual restart, to set up the pulse repetition time for automatic restart, and display the
current laster status.

D-1 CONFIG>SYSTEM APSD

APSD Setup

D-1 APSD>APSD_ENABLE REPETITION_TIME ->

OFF

D-1 APSD>APSD_ENABLE REPETITION_TIME ->

*OFF ON

D-1 APSD>APSD_ENABLE REPETITION_TIME ->

300

In the second line, the "(60-300)" is the available range for users to set up.

D-1 APSD>APSD_ENABLE REPETITION_TIME ->

*300 OK (60-300)

D-1 APSD>MANUAL_RESTART LASER_STATUS ->

OFF

To enable the laster, press ENTER from the above menu and move the cursor at "START"
option.

D-1 APSD>MANUAL_RESTART LASER_STATUS ->

*OFF START

Press ENTER from the above menu.

D-1 APSD>MANUAL_RESTART LASER_STATUS ->

LASER_ON
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 124/126 DXC 5000

1.3.2 Status
The "Status" menu is used to display the current status for FOM card.

D-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

FOM Status

1.3.2.1 Local Status

The "LOCAL" menu is used to display the current status for optical and line of local side.

D-1 STATUS>LOCAL REMOTE

Local Status

Press ENTER from the above menu. The current status will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

D-1 LOCAL>OPTICAL E1
*LOS *LOF

D-1 LOCAL>OPTICAL E1
*LOF *RxAIS RxRAI TxAIS TxRAI

1.3.2.2 Remote Status

The "REMOTE" menu is used to display the curren status for optical and line of remote side.

D-1 STATUS>LOCAL REMOTE

Remote Status

Press ENTER from the above menu. The current status will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

D-1 REMOTE>OPTICAL E1
*LOS *LOF

D-1 REMOTE>OPTICAL E1
*LOF
Front Panel Operation DXC5K/EN HI/A22

DXC 5000 Page 125/126

1.3.3 Alarm
The "ALARM" menu is used to do display alarm status and set up alarm.

D-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

Alarm Setup

The "NEXT" and "PREV" menu are used to review the current alarm status. For the detail
alarm types, please see also section 3.6.1.

D-1 ALARM>NEXT PREV EDIT 01

LOF,LOCAL-OPTICAL : MAJOR

The "EDIT" menu allows users to set up alarm.

D-1 ALARM>NEXT PREV EDIT 01

LOF,LOCAL-OPTICAL : MAJOR

D-1 LOF,LOCAL-OPTICAL>ALM
MAJOR

D-1 LOF,LOCAL-OPTICAL>ALM
DISABLE *MAJOR CRITICAL MINOR

1.3.4 Diagnostic
The "DIAG" menu is used to do diagnostic setup.

D-1>CONFIG STATUS ALARM DIAG

Diagnostic

1.3.4.1 Local Optical

This menu is used to disable or set up payload loopback for local optical.

D-1 DIAG>Local-Optical Local-E1 Accep ->

OFF

To change the current setting, pess ENTER from the above menu.

D-1 DIAG>Local-Optical Local-E1 Accep ->

*OFF PAYLOAD
DXC5K/EN HI/A22 Front Panel Operation

Page 126/126 DXC 5000

1.3.4.2 Local E1
This menu is used to disable or set up local loopback and payload loopback for local E1.

D-1 DIAG>Local-Optical Local-E1 Accep ->

OFF

To change the current setting, pess ENTER from the above menu.

D-1 DIAG>Local-Optical Local-E1 Accep ->

*OFF LOCAL PAYLOAD

1.3.4.3 Accept Remote Loopback

This menu is used to enable or disable accetp remote loopback.

D-1 DIAG>Remote-E1 Accept-RemLB Test- ->

ENABLE

D-1 DIAG>Remote-E1 Accept-RemLB Test- ->

*ENABLE DISABLE

1.3.4.4 Test Pattern

This menu is used to enable or disable loopback test pattern.

D-1 DIAG>Accept-RemLB Test-Patt Local ->

OFF

D-1 DIAG>Accept-RemLB Test-Patt Local ->

*OFF ON

D-1 BERT> UNSYNC Err Secs:0

Total Seconds:21 Err Bits:0